ANSYS Icepak Users Guide

ANSYS Icepak User's Guide
ANSYS, Inc. Release 2020 R1

Southpointe January 2020
2600 ANSYS Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. and
[email protected] ANSYS Europe,
Ltd. are UL
http://www.ansys.com registered ISO
(T) 724-746-3304 9001: 2015
(F) 724-514-9494 companies.
Copyright and Trademark Information
© 2020 ANSYS, Inc. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, AUTODYN, CFX, FLUENT and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature
names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries located in the
United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark
of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service and feature names or trademarks are the property
of their respective owners. FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Flexera Software LLC.
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
U.S. Government Rights
For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).
Third Party Software
This product contains the following licensed software which requires reproduction of the following notices.
FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Macrovision Corporation.
Tk and Tcl is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California, Sun Microsystems, Inc., Scriptics Corporation,
and other parties. The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this software
and its documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices are retained in all copies and
that this notice is included verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is required
for any of the authorized uses. Modifications to this software may be copyrighted by their authors and need not
follow the licensing terms described here, provided that the new terms are clearly indicated on the first page of
each file where they apply. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR DISTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, ITS DOCUMENTATION, OR ANY DERIVATIVES THEREOF, EVEN IF THE AUTHORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WAR-
RANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE
AUTHORS AND DISTRIBUTORS HAVE NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCE-
MENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS
GOVERNMENT USE: If you are acquiring this software on behalf of the U.S. government, the Government shall
have only "Restricted Rights" in the software and related documentation as defined in the Federal Acquisition
Regulations (FARs) in Clause 52.227.19 (c) (2). If you are acquiring the software on behalf of the Department of
Defense, the software shall be classified as "Commercial Computer Software" and the Government shall have only
"Restricted Rights" as defined in Clause 252.227-7013 (c) (1) of DFARs. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the authors
grant the U.S. Government and others acting in its behalf permission to use and distribute the software in accord-
ance with the terms specified in this license.
pnmscale: Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
pnmtops: Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.

Copyright (c) 1990 by Sun Microsystems, Inc., Author: Patrick J. Naughton [email protected].
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without
fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is provided "as is" without
express or implied warranty.
pnmtoxwd: Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
Copyright (C) 1995,1996 by Klaus Ehrenfried.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice appears in all copies and that the software is available to all free of charge. The author disclaims all warranties
with regard to this software, including all implied warranties of merchant-ability and fitness. The code is simply
distributed as it is.
ppmquant: Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.
ppmtogif: Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.
Gifsicle is Copyright (C) 1997-2000 by Eddie Kohler licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) Version 2.
Please contact [email protected] for a copy of the Gifsicle source code.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Armadillo C++ Linear Algebra Library
Copyright 2008-2016 by Conrad Sanderson (http://conradsanderson.id.au)
Copyright 2008-2016 National ICT Australia (NICTA)
This product includes software developed by Conrad Sanderson
(http://conradsanderson.id.au)
This product includes software developed at National ICT Australia (NICTA)
Python is owned by the Python Software Foundation, Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007,
2008, 2009 Python Software Foundation; All Rights Reserved
License Agreement: PYTHON SOFTWARE FOUNDATION LICENSE VERSION 2
1. This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Python Software Foundation ("PSF"), and the Individual or Organization
("Licensee") accessing and otherwise using this software ("Python") in source or binary form and its associated
documentation.
2. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, PSF hereby grants Licensee a nonexclusive,
royalty-free, world-wide license to reproduce, analyze, test, perform and/or display publicly, prepare derivative
works, distribute, and otherwise use Python alone or in any derivative version, provided, however, that PSF's License
Agreement and PSF's notice of copyright, i.e., "Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
Python Software Foundation; All Rights Reserved" are retained in Python alone or in any derivative version prepared
by Licensee.
3. In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on or incorporates Python or any part thereof,
and wants to make the derivative work available to others as provided herein, then Licensee hereby agrees to
include in any such work a brief summary of the changes made to Python.
4. PSF is making Python available to Licensee on an "AS IS" basis. PSF MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY OF EXAMPLE, BUT NOT LIMITATION, PSF MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY REPRES-
ENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE
OF PYTHON WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
5. PSF SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF PYTHON FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A RESULT OF MODIFYING, DISTRIBUTING, OR OTHERWISE USING PYTHON,
OR ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF.
6. This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms and conditions.
7. Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency, partnership, or joint
venture between PSF and Licensee. This License Agreement does not grant permission to use PSF trademarks or
trade name in a trademark sense to endorse or promote products or services of Licensee, or any third party.
8. By copying, installing or otherwise using Python, Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of
this License Agreement.
NETEX-G: Copyright © 2004 by Artwork Conversion Software, Inc.
cpp (GCC): Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledg-
ment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, contact openssl-
[email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names
without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
====================================================================
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes
software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered
to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc.,
code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same
copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this
package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual)
provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknow-
ledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The
word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related
:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof ) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS IN-
TERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the
GNU Public Licence.]
Table of Contents
1. Using This Manual ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. What’s In This Manual ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. How To Use This Manual .................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1. For the Beginner ...................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2. For the Experienced User .......................................................................................................... 4
1.3.Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual ................................................................................ 4
1.4. Mathematical Conventions ............................................................................................................... 5
1.5. Mouse and Keyboard Conventions Used In This Manual ..................................................................... 6
1.6. When To Call Your ANSYS Icepak Support Engineer ............................................................................ 6
2. Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1. What is ANSYS Icepak? ...................................................................................................................... 7
2.2. Program Structure ............................................................................................................................ 8
2.3. Program Capabilities ......................................................................................................................... 9
2.3.1. General .................................................................................................................................. 10
2.3.2. Model Building ...................................................................................................................... 10
2.3.3. Meshing ................................................................................................................................. 11
2.3.4. Materials ................................................................................................................................ 12
2.3.5. Physical Models ...................................................................................................................... 12
2.3.6. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................. 12
2.3.7. Solver .................................................................................................................................... 13
2.3.8. Visualization ........................................................................................................................... 13
2.3.9. Reporting .............................................................................................................................. 13
2.3.10. Applications ......................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.11. Known Issues and Limitations ............................................................................................... 14
2.4. Overview of Using ANSYS Icepak ..................................................................................................... 14
2.4.1. Planning Your ANSYS Icepak Analysis ...................................................................................... 15
2.4.2. Problem Solving Steps ............................................................................................................ 15
2.5. Starting ANSYS Icepak ..................................................................................................................... 16
2.5.1. Starting ANSYS Icepak on a Linux System ................................................................................ 16
2.5.2. Starting ANSYS Icepak on a Windows System .......................................................................... 16
2.5.3. Startup Screen ....................................................................................................................... 17
2.5.4. Startup Options for Linux Systems .......................................................................................... 18
2.5.5. Environment Variables on Linux Systems ................................................................................ 19
2.6. Accessing the ANSYS Icepak Manuals .............................................................................................. 20
2.7. Sample Session ............................................................................................................................... 20
2.7.1. Problem Description .............................................................................................................. 20
2.7.2. Outline of Procedure .............................................................................................................. 21
2.7.3. Step 1: Create a New Project ................................................................................................... 22
2.7.4. Step 2: Build the Model ........................................................................................................... 23
2.7.5. Step 3: Generate a Mesh ......................................................................................................... 34
2.7.6. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings .................................................................................. 38
2.7.7. Step 5: Save the Model ........................................................................................................... 39
2.7.8. Step 6: Calculate a Solution ..................................................................................................... 40
2.7.9. Step 7: Examine the results ..................................................................................................... 41
2.7.10. Step 8: Summary .................................................................................................................. 53
3. User Interface ........................................................................................................................................ 55
3.1. The Graphical User Interface ............................................................................................................ 55
3.1.1. The Main Window .................................................................................................................. 56
3.1.2. The ANSYS Icepak Menus ....................................................................................................... 56
3.1.3. The ANSYS Icepak Toolbars ..................................................................................................... 86
Release 2020 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
User's Guide
3.1.4. The Model manager Window .................................................................................................. 92

3.1.5. Graphics Windows .................................................................................................................. 94
3.1.6. The Message Window ............................................................................................................. 97
3.1.7. The Edit Window .................................................................................................................... 97
3.1.8. File Selection Dialog Boxes ..................................................................................................... 98
3.1.9. Control Panels ...................................................................................................................... 103
3.1.10. Accessing Online Help ........................................................................................................ 109
3.2. Using the Mouse ........................................................................................................................... 110
3.2.1. Controlling Panel Inputs ....................................................................................................... 111
3.2.2. Using the Mouse in the Model manager Window .................................................................. 111
3.2.3. Using the Context Menus in the Model manager Window ..................................................... 111
3.3. The Main library Node Context Menu ............................................................................................ 112
3.4. The Materials Node Context Menu ................................................................................................. 112
3.5. The fans and packages Node Context Menu .................................................................................. 112
3.5.1. The Groups Node Context Menus ......................................................................................... 112
3.5.2. The Post-processing Node Context Menu .............................................................................. 114
3.5.3. The Points Node Context Menus ........................................................................................... 114
3.5.4. The Surfaces Node Context Menus ........................................................................................ 115
3.5.5.The Trash Node Context Menus ............................................................................................. 115
3.5.6. The Inactive Node Context Menu .......................................................................................... 115
3.5.7. The Model Node Context Menus ........................................................................................... 117
3.6. The Cabinet Context Menu ............................................................................................................ 119
3.7. The Materials Node Context Menu ................................................................................................. 120
3.8. The Assembly Node Context Menu ................................................................................................ 120
3.8.1. Using the Clipboard ............................................................................................................. 121
3.9. Using the Context Menus in the Graphics Display Window ............................................................. 121
3.10. Manipulating Graphics With the Mouse ....................................................................................... 128
3.10.1. Rotating a Model ................................................................................................................ 129
3.10.2. Translating a Model ............................................................................................................ 129
3.10.3. Zooming In and Out ........................................................................................................... 129
3.10.4. Adding Objects to the Model .............................................................................................. 129
3.10.5. Selecting Objects within a Model ........................................................................................ 129
3.10.6. Translating Objects within a Model ..................................................................................... 130
3.10.7. Resizing Objects within a Model ......................................................................................... 130
3.10.8. Moving the Display Identifiers ............................................................................................ 130
3.10.9. Changing the Color Spectrum ............................................................................................. 130
3.10.10. Changing the Mouse Controls ........................................................................................... 130
3.10.11. Switching Between Modes ................................................................................................ 131
3.11.Triad (coordinate axis) and Rotation Cursors ................................................................................. 132
3.11.1. Pointer Modes .................................................................................................................... 132
3.12. 3-D Input Device Support ............................................................................................................ 133
3.13. Using the Keyboard ..................................................................................................................... 134
3.14. Quitting ANSYS Icepak ................................................................................................................ 135
4. ANSYS Icepak in Workbench ............................................................................................................... 137
4.1. The ANSYS File Menu .................................................................................................................... 137
4.2. The ANSYS Icepak Toolbar ............................................................................................................. 139
4.3. Using Icepak With Remote Solve Manager (RSM) ............................................................................ 139
4.4. The Preferences Panel ................................................................................................................... 140
5. Reading, Writing, and Managing Files ................................................................................................. 143
5.1. Overview of Files Written and Read by ANSYS Icepak ..................................................................... 143
5.2. Files Created by ANSYS Icepak ....................................................................................................... 144
5.2.1. Problem Setup Files .............................................................................................................. 145
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
5.2.2. Mesh Files ............................................................................................................................ 145

5.2.3. Solver Files ........................................................................................................................... 145
5.2.4. Optimization Files ................................................................................................................ 146
5.2.5. Postprocessing Files ............................................................................................................. 146
5.2.6. Metadata Files ...................................................................................................................... 146
5.3. Merging Model Data ..................................................................................................................... 146
5.3.1. Geometric Transformations .................................................................................................. 148
5.4. Saving a Project File ...................................................................................................................... 149
5.4.1. Recent Projects .................................................................................................................... 151
5.5. Saving Image Files ........................................................................................................................ 152
5.5.1. Choosing the Image File Format ........................................................................................... 154
5.5.2. Specifying the Print Region ................................................................................................... 155
5.6. Packing and Unpacking Model Files .............................................................................................. 156
5.7. Cleaning up the Project Data ......................................................................................................... 156
6. Importing and Exporting Model Files ................................................................................................. 159
6.1. Files That Can Be Imported into ANSYS Icepak ............................................................................... 159
6.2. Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak ........................................................................................... 160
6.2.1. Overview of Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak ............................................................... 160
6.2.2. Reading an IDF File into ANSYS Icepak .................................................................................. 161
6.2.3. Updating the Imported IDF File in ANSYS Icepak ................................................................... 169
6.2.4. Using the Imported IDF File in ANSYS Icepak ......................................................................... 171
6.3. Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak ........................................................................................... 171
6.3.1. Overview of Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak ............................................................... 171
6.3.2. Reading an IDX File into ANSYS Icepak .................................................................................. 172
6.3.3. Using the Imported IDX File in ANSYS Icepak ......................................................................... 177
6.4. Importing Electronics Cooling XML Files into ANSYS Icepak ........................................................... 177
6.4.1. Importing EC XML Files ......................................................................................................... 181
6.5. Importing JEDEC PTD/JEP30 Files into ANSYS Icepak ...................................................................... 182
6.6. Importing Trace Files into ANSYS Icepak ........................................................................................ 182
6.6.1. Licensing Requirements for Importing Trace Files .................................................................. 182
6.6.2. Importing Trace Files ............................................................................................................ 183
6.7. Trace Heating ................................................................................................................................ 191
6.7.1. Trace Heating Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 192
6.8. Importing Other Files into ANSYS Icepak ....................................................................................... 193
6.8.1. General Procedure ................................................................................................................ 193
6.8.2. CSV/Excel Files ..................................................................................................................... 194
6.8.3. Networks ............................................................................................................................. 199
6.8.4. Gradient, Cadence, and Apache Sentinel Powermap Files ....................................................... 201
6.8.5. Gradient Powermap Files for Stacked Die Packages ............................................................... 201
6.8.6. Apache RedHawk Chip Thermal Model (CTM) Powermap Files ............................................... 201
6.9. Exporting ANSYS Icepak Files ........................................................................................................ 203
6.9.1. Saving an AutoTherm File ..................................................................................................... 203
6.9.2. Write Sentinel TI HTC File ...................................................................................................... 204
6.9.3. Export ANSYS Electronics Desktop Script .............................................................................. 205
6.9.4. CSV/Excel Files ..................................................................................................................... 206
6.9.5. Networks ............................................................................................................................. 208
6.9.6. IDF Files ............................................................................................................................... 209
6.9.7. Electronics Cooling XML Files ................................................................................................ 210
6.9.8. Gradient, Cadence Thermal Resistance and SIwave Temperature Files .................................... 214
6.9.9. Write Twin Builder Files ......................................................................................................... 214
6.9.10. CFD Post/Mechanical data .................................................................................................. 214
6.9.11. Exporting JEDEC PTD/JEP30 Files into ANSYS Icepak ............................................................ 214
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
User's Guide
7. Unit Systems ........................................................................................................................................ 215

7.1. Overview of Units in ANSYS Icepak ................................................................................................ 215
7.2. Units for Meshing .......................................................................................................................... 216
7.3. Built-In Unit Systems in ANSYS Icepak ............................................................................................ 216
7.4. Customizing Units ......................................................................................................................... 217
7.4.1. Viewing Current Units ........................................................................................................... 217
7.4.2. Changing the Units for a Quantity ......................................................................................... 217
7.4.3. Defining a New Unit ............................................................................................................. 219
7.4.4. Deleting a Unit ..................................................................................................................... 220
7.5. Units for Postprocessing ................................................................................................................ 220
8. Defining a Project ................................................................................................................................ 223
8.1. Overview of Interface Components ............................................................................................... 223
8.1.1. The File Menu ....................................................................................................................... 223
8.1.2. The File commands Toolbar .................................................................................................. 226
8.1.3. The Model manager Window ................................................................................................ 227
8.2. Creating, Opening, Reloading, and Deleting a Project File ............................................................... 229
8.2.1. Creating a New Project ......................................................................................................... 230
8.2.2. Opening an Existing Project .................................................................................................. 232
8.2.3. Reloading the Main Version of a Project ................................................................................ 233
8.3. Configuring a Project .................................................................................................................... 234
8.3.1. Display Options .................................................................................................................... 235
8.3.2. Editing Options .................................................................................................................... 238
8.3.3. Printing Options ................................................................................................................... 238
8.3.4. Miscellaneous Options ......................................................................................................... 239
8.3.5. Editing the Library Paths ....................................................................................................... 241
8.3.6. Editing the Graphical Styles .................................................................................................. 243
8.3.7. Interactive Editing ................................................................................................................ 244
8.3.8. Meshing Options .................................................................................................................. 246
8.3.9. Solution Options .................................................................................................................. 247
8.3.10. Postprocessing Options ...................................................................................................... 249
8.3.11. Other Preferences and Settings ........................................................................................... 249
8.4. Specifying the Problem Parameters ............................................................................................... 250
8.4.1. Time Variation ...................................................................................................................... 252
8.4.2. Solution Variables ................................................................................................................. 252
8.4.3. Flow Regime ........................................................................................................................ 255
8.4.4. Forced- or Natural-Convection Effects ................................................................................... 257
8.4.5. Ambient Values .................................................................................................................... 260
8.4.6. Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials .............................................................................. 261
8.4.7. Initial Conditions .................................................................................................................. 262
8.4.8. Specifying a Spatial Power Profile ......................................................................................... 262
8.4.9. Modeling Solar Radiation Effects ........................................................................................... 263
8.4.10. Modeling Altitude Effects ................................................................................................... 266
8.5. Problem Setup Wizard ................................................................................................................... 267
9. Building a Model ................................................................................................................................. 273
9.1. Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 273
9.1.1. The Object Creation Toolbar ................................................................................................. 273
9.1.2. The Object Modification Toolbar ........................................................................................... 274
9.1.3. The Model Node in the Model manager Window ................................................................... 274
9.1.4. The Model Menu .................................................................................................................. 275
9.2. Defining the Cabinet ..................................................................................................................... 275
9.2.1. Resizing the Cabinet ............................................................................................................. 276
9.2.2. Repositioning the Cabinet .................................................................................................... 280
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
9.2.3. Changing the Walls of the Cabinet ........................................................................................ 283

9.2.4. Changing the Name of the Cabinet ....................................................................................... 283
9.2.5. Modifying the Graphical Style of the Cabinet ........................................................................ 284
9.3. Configuring Objects within the Cabinet ......................................................................................... 284
9.3.1. Overview of the Object Panels and Object Edit Windows ....................................................... 285
9.3.2. Creating a New Object .......................................................................................................... 289
9.3.3. Selecting and Deselecting an Object ..................................................................................... 289
9.3.4. Editing an Object ................................................................................................................. 290
9.3.5. Deleting an Object ............................................................................................................... 290
9.3.6. Resizing an Object ................................................................................................................ 291
9.3.7. Repositioning an Object ....................................................................................................... 292
9.4. Creating a New Local Coordinate System ....................................................................................... 298
9.5. Editing an Existing Local Coordinate System .................................................................................. 299
9.6. Viewing the Definition of a Local Coordinate System ...................................................................... 299
9.7. Deleting Local Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................ 300
9.8. Activating and Deactivating Local Coordinate Systems .................................................................. 300
9.8.1. Aligning an Object with Another Object in the Model ........................................................... 300
9.9. Aligning Object Faces ................................................................................................................... 301
9.10. Aligning Object Edges ................................................................................................................. 302
9.11. Aligning Object Vertices .............................................................................................................. 303
9.12. Aligning Object Centers .............................................................................................................. 304
9.13. Aligning Object Face Centers ....................................................................................................... 305
9.14. Matching Object Faces ................................................................................................................ 305
9.15. Matching Object Edges ............................................................................................................... 306
9.15.1. Copying an Object .............................................................................................................. 306
9.16. Object Attributes ........................................................................................................................ 310
9.16.1. Description ........................................................................................................................ 310
9.16.2. Graphical Style ................................................................................................................... 311
9.16.3. Position and Size ................................................................................................................ 312
9.16.4. Geometry ........................................................................................................................... 312
9.17. Two-Dimensional Polygons ......................................................................................................... 317
9.18. Three-Dimensional Polygons ....................................................................................................... 319
9.18.1. Prism Objects ..................................................................................................................... 322
9.18.2. Cylindrical Objects .............................................................................................................. 323
9.18.3. Ellipsoid Objects ................................................................................................................. 326
9.18.4. Elliptical Cylinder Objects ................................................................................................... 327
9.18.5. CAD Objects ....................................................................................................................... 331
9.18.6. Physical Characteristics ....................................................................................................... 332
9.19. Adding Objects to the Model ....................................................................................................... 333
9.20. Grouping Objects ........................................................................................................................ 333
9.20.1. Creating a Group ................................................................................................................ 334
9.20.2. Renaming a Group ............................................................................................................. 335
9.20.3. Changing the Graphical Style of a Group ............................................................................. 335
9.20.4. Adding Objects to a Group ................................................................................................. 336
9.20.5. Removing Objects From a Group ........................................................................................ 337
9.20.6. Copying Groups ................................................................................................................. 338
9.20.7. Moving a Group ................................................................................................................. 338
9.20.8. Editing the Properties of Like Objects in a Group ................................................................. 338
9.20.9. Deleting a Group ................................................................................................................ 339
9.20.10. Activating or Deactivating a Group ................................................................................... 339
9.20.11. Using a Group to Create an Assembly ................................................................................ 339
9.20.12. Saving a Group as a Project ............................................................................................... 339
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi
User's Guide
9.21. Material Properties ...................................................................................................................... 339

9.21.1. Using the Materials Library and the Materials Panel ............................................................. 341
9.21.2. Editing an Existing Material ................................................................................................. 342
9.21.3. Viewing the Properties of a Material .................................................................................... 349
9.21.4. Copying a Material ............................................................................................................. 349
9.21.5. Creating a New Material ..................................................................................................... 350
9.21.6. Saving Materials and Properties .......................................................................................... 350
9.21.7. Deleting a Material ............................................................................................................. 352
9.21.8. Defining Properties Using Velocity-Dependent Functions .................................................... 352
9.21.9. Defining Properties Using Temperature-Dependent Functions ............................................ 353
9.22. Using the Temperature value curve Window ................................................................................ 354
9.23. Using the Curve specification Panel ............................................................................................. 356
9.24. Custom Assemblies ..................................................................................................................... 357
9.24.1. Creating and Adding an Assembly ...................................................................................... 357
9.24.2. Editing Properties of an Assembly ....................................................................................... 359
9.24.3. Assembly Viewing Options ................................................................................................. 365
9.24.4. Selecting an Assembly ........................................................................................................ 365
9.24.5. Editing Objects in an Assembly ........................................................................................... 365
9.24.6. Copying an Assembly ......................................................................................................... 366
9.24.7. Moving an Assembly .......................................................................................................... 366
9.24.8. Saving an Assembly ............................................................................................................ 366
9.24.9. Loading an Assembly ......................................................................................................... 366
9.24.10. Merging an Assembly With Another Project ...................................................................... 367
9.24.11. Deleting an Assembly ....................................................................................................... 367
9.24.12. Expanding an Assembly Into Its Components .................................................................... 367
9.24.13. Summary Information for an Assembly ............................................................................. 367
9.24.14. Total Volume of an Assembly ............................................................................................. 368
9.24.15. Total Area of an Assembly ................................................................................................. 368
9.25. Checking the Design of Your Model ............................................................................................. 368
9.25.1. Object and Material Summaries .......................................................................................... 368
9.25.2. Design Checks .................................................................................................................... 370
10. Networks ........................................................................................................................................... 373
10.1. Location and Dimensions ............................................................................................................ 373
10.2. Modeling IC Packages ................................................................................................................. 373
10.3. Modeling Heat Exchangers/Cold Plates ........................................................................................ 375
10.4. Modeling Recirculation Openings ................................................................................................ 376
10.5. Network Nodes ........................................................................................................................... 377
10.6. Adding a Network to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ........................................................................... 378
10.6.1. Network Editor Panel .......................................................................................................... 381
10.6.2. Network Nodes and Faces ................................................................................................... 383
10.6.3. Network Links .................................................................................................................... 385
11. Heat Exchangers ................................................................................................................................ 387
11.1. Geometry, Location, and Dimensions ........................................................................................... 387
11.2. Modeling a Planar Heat Exchanger in ANSYS Icepak ..................................................................... 387
11.2.1. Modeling the Pressure Loss through a Heat Exchanger ........................................................ 387
11.2.2. Modeling the Heat Transfer through a Heat Exchanger ........................................................ 388
11.2.3. Calculating the Heat Transfer Coefficient ............................................................................. 388
11.3. Adding a Heat Exchanger to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ................................................................ 389
12. Openings ........................................................................................................................................... 393
12.2. Free Openings ............................................................................................................................ 394
12.3. Recirculation Openings ............................................................................................................... 394
xii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
12.3.1. Recirculation Mass Flow Rate .............................................................................................. 395

12.3.2. Flow Direction for Recirculation Openings .......................................................................... 396
12.3.3. Recirculation Opening Thermal Specifications ..................................................................... 396
12.4. Recirculation Opening Species Filters .......................................................................................... 397
12.5. Adding an Opening to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ......................................................................... 397
12.5.1. User Inputs for a Free Opening ............................................................................................ 400
12.5.2. User Inputs for a Recirculation Opening .............................................................................. 405
13. Grilles ................................................................................................................................................ 409
13.1. Vents .......................................................................................................................................... 409
13.2. Planar Resistances ....................................................................................................................... 410
13.4. Pressure Drop Calculations for Grilles ........................................................................................... 411
13.5. Adding a Grille to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ................................................................................ 414
13.5.1. Using the Pressure drop curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Grille ............................... 417
13.5.2. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Pressure Drop Curve for a Grille ............... 419
14. Sources .............................................................................................................................................. 423
14.2. Thermal Options ......................................................................................................................... 423
14.3. Source Usage .............................................................................................................................. 424
14.4. Adding a Source to Your ANSYS Icepak Model .............................................................................. 424
14.4.1. User Inputs for Thermal specification .................................................................................. 427
15. Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) ............................................................................................................ 435
15.2. Types of PCBs .............................................................................................................................. 435
15.2.1. Hollow PCBs ....................................................................................................................... 435
15.2.2. Compact PCBs .................................................................................................................... 437
15.2.3. Detailed PCBs ..................................................................................................................... 438
15.2.4. ECAD PCBs ......................................................................................................................... 438
15.3. Racks of PCBs .............................................................................................................................. 438
15.4. Adding a PCB to Your ANSYS Icepak Model .................................................................................. 439
16. Enclosures ......................................................................................................................................... 449
16.2. Adding an Enclosure to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ....................................................................... 449
17. Plates ................................................................................................................................................. 453
17.1. Defining a Plate in ANSYS Icepak ................................................................................................. 453
17.2.1. Plate Thickness ................................................................................................................... 454
17.3. Thermal Model Type .................................................................................................................... 454
17.4. Surface Roughness ...................................................................................................................... 455
17.5. Using Plates in Combination with Other Objects .......................................................................... 455
17.6. Adding a Plate to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ................................................................................. 455
17.6.1. User Inputs for the Thermal Model ...................................................................................... 458
17.6.2. User Inputs for the Low- and High-Side Properties of the Plate ............................................. 464
18. Walls .................................................................................................................................................. 467
18.1.1. Wall Thickness .................................................................................................................... 468
18.3. Wall Velocity ................................................................................................................................ 469
18.4. Thermal Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................................... 469
18.4.1. Specified Heat Flux ............................................................................................................. 470
18.4.2. Specified Temperature ........................................................................................................ 471
18.5. External Thermal Conditions ........................................................................................................ 472
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xiii
User's Guide
18.5.1. Convective Heat Transfer .................................................................................................... 472

18.5.2. Radiative Heat Transfer ....................................................................................................... 473
18.6. Constructing Multifaceted Walls .................................................................................................. 474
18.7. Adding a Wall to Your ANSYS Icepak Model .................................................................................. 476
18.7.1. User Inputs for a Symmetry Wall .......................................................................................... 479
18.7.2. User Inputs for a Stationary or Moving Wall ......................................................................... 479
18.7.2.1. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Spatial Boundary Profile .................... 484
19. Periodic Boundaries .......................................................................................................................... 487
19.2. Adding a Periodic boundary to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ............................................................ 489
20. Blocks ................................................................................................................................................ 493
20.2. Block Type .................................................................................................................................. 493
20.4. Physical and Thermal Specifications ............................................................................................. 495
20.5. Block-Combination Thermal Characteristics ................................................................................. 495
20.5.1. Blocks with Coincident Surfaces .......................................................................................... 496
20.5.2. Blocks with Intersecting Volumes ........................................................................................ 497
20.6. A Block and an Intersecting Plate ................................................................................................. 500
20.7. Blocks Positioned on an External Wall .......................................................................................... 501
20.8. Cylinder, Polygon, Ellipsoid, or Elliptical Cylinder Blocks Positioned on a Prism Block ...................... 501
20.9. Network Blocks ........................................................................................................................... 502
20.9.1. Two-Resistor Model ............................................................................................................ 502
20.9.2. Star Network Model ............................................................................................................ 503
20.9.3. Fully Shunted Network Model ............................................................................................. 504
20.9.4. General Network Model ...................................................................................................... 504
20.10. Adding a Block to Your ANSYS Icepak Model .............................................................................. 505
20.10.1. User Inputs for the Block Surface Specification .................................................................. 509
20.10.2. User Inputs for the Block Thermal Specification ................................................................. 513
20.10.3. User Inputs for Network Blocks ......................................................................................... 521
21. Fans ................................................................................................................................................... 527
21.1. Defining a Fan in ANSYS Icepak ................................................................................................... 527
21.2.1. Simple Fans ........................................................................................................................ 528
21.2.2. Fans on Solid Blocks ........................................................................................................... 530
21.3. Flow Direction ............................................................................................................................ 531
21.4. Fans in Series .............................................................................................................................. 532
21.5. Fans in Parallel ............................................................................................................................ 532
21.6. Fans on Blocks ............................................................................................................................ 533
21.7. Specifying Swirl .......................................................................................................................... 533
21.7.1. Swirl Magnitude ................................................................................................................. 534
21.7.2. Fan RPM ............................................................................................................................. 534
21.8. Fixed Flow .................................................................................................................................. 534
21.9. Fan Characteristic Curve .............................................................................................................. 534
21.10. Additional Fan Options .............................................................................................................. 535
21.10.1. Fan Efficiency ................................................................................................................... 536
21.10.2. Fan Resistance Modeling .................................................................................................. 536
21.11. Adding a Fan to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ................................................................................. 536
21.11.1. Using the Fan curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Characteristic Curve Fan Type ........ 542
21.11.2. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Curve for a Characteristic Curve Fan
Type ............................................................................................................................................. 543
21.11.3. Loading a Pre-Defined Fan Object ..................................................................................... 545
xiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
22. Blowers .............................................................................................................................................. 549

22.1. Impellers ..................................................................................................................................... 549
22.2. Centrifugal Blowers ..................................................................................................................... 550
22.3. Specifying Blower Properties ....................................................................................................... 551
22.3.1. Blower Characteristic Curve ................................................................................................ 551
22.3.2. Specifying Swirl .................................................................................................................. 551
22.4. Adding a Blower to Your ANSYS Icepak Model .............................................................................. 552
23. Resistances ........................................................................................................................................ 559
23.2. Pressure Drop Calculation for a 3D Resistance .............................................................................. 560
23.3. Adding a Resistance to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ........................................................................ 561
24. Heat Sinks .......................................................................................................................................... 567
24.1. Simplified Heat Sinks ................................................................................................................... 567
24.1.1. Modeling a Simplified Heat Sink ......................................................................................... 568
24.1.2. Modeling Compact Heat Sinks Using Geometry-Based Correlations ..................................... 569
24.2. Detailed Heat Sinks ..................................................................................................................... 570
24.3. Adding a Heat Sink to Your ANSYS Icepak Model .......................................................................... 572
24.3.1. User Inputs for a Simplified Heat Sink .................................................................................. 575
24.3.2. User Inputs for a Detailed Heat Sink .................................................................................... 580
25. Packages ........................................................................................................................................... 585
25.2. Detailed Packages ....................................................................................................................... 585
25.2.1. Detailed Features ............................................................................................................... 586
25.2.2. Approximated Features ...................................................................................................... 586
25.3. Compact Conduction Model (CCM) Packages .............................................................................. 588
25.3.1. Lead-Frame Packages ......................................................................................................... 588
25.3.2. Ball Grid Array (BGA) Packages ............................................................................................ 588
25.4. Junction-to-Case Characterization Model .................................................................................... 588
25.5. Junction-to-Board Characterization Model ................................................................................... 589
25.6. Adding a Package to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ............................................................................ 590
25.6.1. User Inputs for BGA Packages ............................................................................................. 597
25.6.2. User Inputs for Lead-Frame Packages .................................................................................. 603
25.6.3. User Inputs for Stacked Die Packages .................................................................................. 605
25.6.4. User Inputs for Package on Package .................................................................................... 608
25.6.5. Loading a Pre-Defined Package Object ............................................................................... 611
25.7. Delphi Package Characterization ................................................................................................. 613
26. Transient Simulations ........................................................................................................................ 627
26.1. User Inputs for Transient Simulations ........................................................................................... 627
26.2. Specifying Variables as a Function of Time ................................................................................... 638
26.2.1. Displaying the Variation of Transient Parameters with Time .................................................. 640
26.2.2. Using the Time/value curve Window to Specify a Piecewise Linear Variation With Time ........ 642
26.2.3. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Piecewise Linear Variation With Time .......... 643
26.3. Postprocessing for Transient Simulations ..................................................................................... 644
26.3.1. Examining Results at a Specified Time ................................................................................. 644
26.3.2. Creating an Animation ........................................................................................................ 645
26.3.3. Generating a Report ........................................................................................................... 647
26.3.4. Creating a History Plot ........................................................................................................ 647
27. Species Transport Modeling ............................................................................................................. 653
27.1. Overview of Modeling Species Transport ..................................................................................... 653
27.2. User Inputs for Species Transport Simulations .............................................................................. 654
27.2.1. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Spatial Boundary Profile ............................. 663
27.3. Postprocessing for Species Calculations ....................................................................................... 664
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xv
User's Guide
28. Radiation Modeling .......................................................................................................................... 665

28.1. When to Include Radiation .......................................................................................................... 665
28.2. Surface-to-surface Radiation Modeling ........................................................................................ 665
28.2.1. Radiation Modeling for Objects .......................................................................................... 666
28.3. User Inputs for Radiation Modeling ............................................................................................. 666
28.3.1. User Inputs for Specification of Radiation in Individual Object Panels ................................... 668
28.3.2. User Inputs for Specification of Radiation Using the Form factors Panel ................................ 670
28.4. Discrete Ordinates Radiation Modeling ........................................................................................ 675
28.5. Ray tracing Radiation Modeling ................................................................................................... 676
29. Optimization ..................................................................................................................................... 679
29.1. When to Use Optimization ........................................................................................................... 679
29.2. User Inputs for Optimization ........................................................................................................ 679
30. Parameterizing the Model ................................................................................................................ 689
30.1. Overview of Parameterization ..................................................................................................... 689
30.2. Defining a Parameter in an Input Field ......................................................................................... 690
30.3. Defining Check Box Parameters ................................................................................................... 693
30.3.1. Examples ........................................................................................................................... 694
30.4. Defining Radio Button Parameters (Option Parameters) ............................................................... 695
30.5. Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the Parameters and optimization Panel ................... 696
30.6. Deleting Parameters .................................................................................................................... 699
30.7. Defining Trials ............................................................................................................................. 699
30.7.1. Import and Export of Trial Data ........................................................................................... 701
30.7.2. Selecting Trials ................................................................................................................... 702
30.8. Running Trials ............................................................................................................................. 704
30.8.1. Running a Single Trial ......................................................................................................... 704
30.8.2. Running Multiple Trials ....................................................................................................... 705
30.9. Function Reporting and Plotting ................................................................................................. 709
31. State-Space Characterization ............................................................................................................ 713
31.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................... 713
31.2. When to Use State-Space Characterization ................................................................................... 713
31.3. Perform State-Space Characterization .......................................................................................... 713
31.4. Twin Builder ................................................................................................................................ 715
32. Krylov Reduced-order Models .......................................................................................................... 717
32.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................... 717
32.2. When to Use Krylov ROM Simulation ........................................................................................... 717
32.3. Creating and Using a Krylov ROM ................................................................................................ 717
33. Using Macros ..................................................................................................................................... 723
33.1. JEDEC Test Chambers .................................................................................................................. 723
33.2. Forced-Convection Test Chamber ................................................................................................ 724
33.3. Natural-Convection Test Chamber ............................................................................................... 726
33.4. Printed Circuit Board (PCB) .......................................................................................................... 728
33.4.1. Adding a PCB to Your ANSYS Icepak Model .......................................................................... 728
33.4.2. Adding PCB Attachments to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ........................................................ 730
33.5. Detailed Heat Sink ....................................................................................................................... 735
33.5.1. Adding a Detailed Heat Sink Macro to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ......................................... 735
33.6. Heat Pipes .................................................................................................................................. 739
33.6.1. Adding a Heat Pipe to Your ANSYS Icepak Model ................................................................. 740
33.7. Data Center Components ............................................................................................................ 741
33.7.1. CRAC macro ....................................................................................................................... 741
33.7.2. PDU Macro ......................................................................................................................... 744
33.7.3. Rack Macro ......................................................................................................................... 746
33.7.4. Tile Object .......................................................................................................................... 749
xvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
33.8. Transient Temperature Dependent Power .................................................................................... 752

33.8.1. Create a Temperature-Dependent Powermap ...................................................................... 752
33.8.2. Set Transient Object Properties ........................................................................................... 753
33.8.3. Run the Macro .................................................................................................................... 754
33.9. Debug Divergence ...................................................................................................................... 755
33.9.1. Limitations ......................................................................................................................... 755
33.9.2. Run the Macro .................................................................................................................... 755
33.10. TEC Macros ............................................................................................................................... 757
33.10.1.TEC ................................................................................................................................... 757
33.10.2. Run TEC ............................................................................................................................ 758
33.11. Power Dependent Power ........................................................................................................... 760
33.11.1. Limitations ....................................................................................................................... 760
33.11.2. Set Up Target and Remote Sources .................................................................................... 761
33.11.2.1. Set Up Target Sources .............................................................................................. 761
33.11.2.2. Set Up Remote Sources ............................................................................................ 762
33.11.3. Run the Macro .................................................................................................................. 764
33.12. Create Bonding Wires ................................................................................................................ 765
33.13. Solar Flux Calculator .................................................................................................................. 767
34. Power and Temperature Limit Setup ................................................................................................ 769
34.1. Setting Up the Power and Temperature Limit Values .................................................................... 769
34.2. Comparing the Object Temperatures with the Temperature Limits ............................................... 771
35. Generating a Mesh ............................................................................................................................ 773
35.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................... 773
35.2. Mesh Quality and Type ................................................................................................................ 774
35.2.1. Mesh Quality ...................................................................................................................... 774
35.2.2. Hex-Dominant and Hexahedral Meshes .............................................................................. 775
35.3. Guidelines for Mesh Generation .................................................................................................. 776
35.3.1. Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure ..................................................................................... 776
35.3.2. Hexahedral Meshing Procedure .......................................................................................... 778
35.4. Creating a Minimum-Count Mesh ................................................................................................ 780
35.4.1. Creating a Minimum-Count Hex-Dominant Mesh ................................................................ 780
35.4.2. Creating a Minimum-Count Hexahedral Mesh ..................................................................... 782
35.5. Refining the Mesh Globally .......................................................................................................... 783
35.5.1. Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh ...................................................................... 783
35.5.2. Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh ........................................................................... 790
35.6. Refining the Mesh Locally ............................................................................................................ 793
35.6.1. General Procedure .............................................................................................................. 793
35.6.2. Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters .............................................................. 795
35.6.3. Defining Meshing Parameters for Multiple Objects .............................................................. 796
35.6.4. Meshing Parameters for Cabinets ........................................................................................ 796
35.6.5. Meshing Parameters for Blocks ........................................................................................... 797
35.6.6. Meshing Parameters for Enclosures ..................................................................................... 799
35.6.7. Meshing Parameters for Fans .............................................................................................. 799
35.6.8. Meshing Parameters for Blowers ......................................................................................... 800
35.6.9. Meshing Parameters for Grilles ............................................................................................ 801
35.6.10. Meshing Parameters for Heat Exchangers .......................................................................... 803
35.6.11. Meshing Parameters for Heat Sink Objects ........................................................................ 803
35.6.12. Meshing Parameters for Networks ..................................................................................... 803
35.6.13. Meshing Parameters for Openings .................................................................................... 803
35.6.14. Meshing Parameters for Packages ..................................................................................... 804
35.6.15. Meshing Parameters for PCBs ............................................................................................ 804
35.6.16. Meshing Parameters for Plates .......................................................................................... 804
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xvii
User's Guide
35.6.17. Meshing Parameters for Resistances .................................................................................. 804

35.6.18. Meshing Parameters for Sources ....................................................................................... 805
35.6.19. Meshing Parameters for Traces .......................................................................................... 805
35.6.20. Meshing Parameters for Walls ........................................................................................... 805
35.6.21. Meshing Parameters for Assemblies .................................................................................. 806
35.7. Reusing Mesh ............................................................................................................................. 806
35.8. Controlling the Meshing Order for Objects ................................................................................... 808
35.9. Non-Conformal Meshing Procedures for Assemblies .................................................................... 808
35.10. Displaying the Mesh .................................................................................................................. 810
35.10.1. Displaying the Mesh on Individual Objects ........................................................................ 810
35.10.2. Displaying the Mesh on a Cross-Section of the Model ........................................................ 815
35.11. Checking the Mesh ................................................................................................................... 819
35.11.1. Checking the Face Alignment ........................................................................................... 819
35.11.2. Checking the Element Volume .......................................................................................... 822
35.11.3. Checking the Skewness .................................................................................................... 824
35.12. Loading an Existing Mesh .......................................................................................................... 828
36. Calculating a Solution ....................................................................................................................... 829
36.1. Overview .................................................................................................................................... 829
36.2. General Procedure for Setting Up and Calculating a Solution ........................................................ 830
36.3. Choosing the Discretization Scheme ........................................................................................... 831
36.4. Setting Under-Relaxation Factors ................................................................................................ 833
36.5. Selecting the Multigrid Scheme ................................................................................................... 834
36.6. Selecting Linear Solver Advanced Controls .................................................................................. 835
36.7. Selecting the Version of the Solver ............................................................................................... 835
36.8. Initializing the Solution ............................................................................................................... 835
36.9. Monitoring the Solution .............................................................................................................. 836
36.9.1. Defining Solution Monitors ................................................................................................. 837
36.9.2. Plotting Residuals ............................................................................................................... 839
36.10. Defining Postprocessing Objects ............................................................................................... 840
36.11. Defining Reports ....................................................................................................................... 840
36.12. Setting the Solver Controls ........................................................................................................ 841
36.12.1. Using the Solve Panel to Set the Solver Controls ................................................................ 842
36.12.2. Advanced Solution Control Options .................................................................................. 847
36.12.3. Results Solution Control Options ....................................................................................... 850
36.12.4. Parallel Processing ............................................................................................................ 852
36.12.5. Optimizing the Parallel Solver Performance ....................................................................... 854
36.13. Partitioning the Grid .................................................................................................................. 855
36.13.1. Workstation Cluster .......................................................................................................... 855
36.14. Starting Parallel ANSYS Icepak with the Job Scheduler ............................................................... 856
36.14.1. Configure Icepak for Network Parallel ................................................................................ 857
36.14.1.1. Install and Configure Icepak ..................................................................................... 857
36.14.1.2. Installing IBM MPI .................................................................................................... 858
36.14.1.3. Configure Icepak Network Parallel for Microsoft 2012 Server ..................................... 863
36.14.2. Configure Remote Linux Nodes ......................................................................................... 865
36.14.3. Batch Processing of ANSYS Icepak Projects on a Windows Machine .................................... 868
36.15. Performing Calculations ............................................................................................................ 870
36.15.1. Starting the Calculation .................................................................................................... 871
36.15.2. The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window ............................................ 871
36.15.3. Changing the Solution Monitors During the Calculation .................................................... 873
36.15.4. Ending the Calculation ...................................................................................................... 873
36.15.5. Judging Convergence ....................................................................................................... 874
36.16. Diagnostic Tools for Technical Support ....................................................................................... 874
xviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
37. Examining the Results ....................................................................................................................... 877

37.1. Overview: The Post Menu and Postprocessing Toolbar ................................................................. 877
37.1.1.The Post Menu .................................................................................................................... 877
37.1.2. The Postprocessing Toolbar ................................................................................................ 879
37.2. Graphical Displays ....................................................................................................................... 880
37.2.1. Overview of Generating Graphical Displays ......................................................................... 880
37.2.2. The Significance of Color in Graphical Displays .................................................................... 881
37.2.3. Managing Postprocessing Objects ...................................................................................... 881
37.2.4. Displaying Results on Object Faces ..................................................................................... 884
37.2.5. Displaying Results on Cross-Sections of the Model .............................................................. 888
37.2.6. Displaying Results on Isosurfaces ........................................................................................ 896
37.2.7. Displaying Results at a Point ............................................................................................... 901
37.2.8. Contour Attributes ............................................................................................................. 904
37.2.9. Vector Attributes ................................................................................................................ 909
37.2.10. Particle Trace Attributes .................................................................................................... 913
37.3. XY Plots ...................................................................................................................................... 918
37.3.1. Variation Plots .................................................................................................................... 918
37.3.2. Trials Plots .......................................................................................................................... 923
37.3.3. Network Temperature Plots ................................................................................................ 927
37.4. Selecting a Solution Set to be Examined ...................................................................................... 929
37.5. Zoom-In Modeling ...................................................................................................................... 929
37.6. Display Powermap Property ........................................................................................................ 931
38. Generating Reports ........................................................................................................................... 935
38.1. Overview: The Report Menu ........................................................................................................ 935
38.2. Variables Available for Reporting ................................................................................................. 936
38.3. HTML Reports ............................................................................................................................. 939
38.4. Reviewing a Solution ................................................................................................................... 941
38.5. Summary Reports ....................................................................................................................... 943
38.6. Point Reports .............................................................................................................................. 948
38.7. Full Reports ................................................................................................................................. 951
38.8. Network Block Values Report ....................................................................................................... 953
38.9. EM Heat Losses Report ................................................................................................................ 954
38.10. Fan Operating Points Report ...................................................................................................... 954
39. Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting .................................................................................... 955
39.1. General Information about Variables ............................................................................................ 955
39.2. Definitions of Variables ................................................................................................................ 955
39.2.1. Velocity-Related Quantities ................................................................................................. 956
39.2.2. Pressure-Related Quantities ................................................................................................ 956
39.2.3. Temperature-Related Quantities ......................................................................................... 956
39.2.4. Radiation-Related Quantities .............................................................................................. 958
39.2.5. Species-Transport-Related Quantities ................................................................................. 958
39.2.6. Position-Related Quantities ................................................................................................ 958
39.2.7. Turbulence-Related Quantities ............................................................................................ 958
39.2.8. Thermal Conductivity-Related Quantities ............................................................................ 959
39.2.9. Joule Heating-Related Quantities ........................................................................................ 959
40. Theory ............................................................................................................................................... 961
40.1. Governing Equations ................................................................................................................... 961
40.1.1. The Mass Conservation Equation ........................................................................................ 961
40.1.2. Momentum Equations ........................................................................................................ 961
40.1.3. Energy Conservation Equation ............................................................................................ 962
40.2. Species Transport Equations ........................................................................................................ 962
40.3. Turbulence .................................................................................................................................. 963
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xix
User's Guide
40.3.1. Zero-Equation Turbulence Model ........................................................................................ 963

40.3.2. Advanced Turbulence Models ............................................................................................. 964
40.4. Buoyancy-Driven Flows and Natural Convection .......................................................................... 979
40.4.1. The Boussinesq Model ........................................................................................................ 980
40.4.2. Incompressible Ideal Gas Law ............................................................................................. 980
40.5. Radiation .................................................................................................................................... 980
40.5.1. Overview ........................................................................................................................... 981
40.5.2. Gray-Diffuse Radiation ........................................................................................................ 981
40.5.3. The Surface-to-Surface Radiation Model ............................................................................. 981
40.5.4. The Discrete Ordinates (DO) Radiation Model ...................................................................... 982
40.5.5.The Ray Tracing Radiation Model ......................................................................................... 986
40.6. Optimization ............................................................................................................................... 987
40.6.1. The Dynamic-Q Optimization method ................................................................................. 987
40.6.2. The Dynamic-Trajectory (Leap-Frog) Optimization Method for Solving the Subproblems ..... 989
40.7. Solution Procedures .................................................................................................................... 991
40.7.1. Overview of Numerical Scheme .......................................................................................... 991
40.7.2. Spatial Discretization .......................................................................................................... 993
40.7.2.1. Pseudo Transient Under-Relaxation .......................................................................... 1000
40.7.3. Time Discretization ........................................................................................................... 1000
40.7.4. Multigrid Method ............................................................................................................. 1001
40.7.5. Solution Residuals ............................................................................................................ 1008
40.8. Krylov ROM Theory .................................................................................................................... 1010
Bibliography ........................................................................................................................................... 1011
Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 1013
xx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Figures
2.1. Basic Program Structure .......................................................................................................................... 9
2.2. The Startup Screen ................................................................................................................................ 17
2.3. Problem Description ............................................................................................................................. 21
2.4. The Welcome to Icepak Panel ................................................................................................................ 22
2.5. The New project Panel .......................................................................................................................... 22
2.6. The Cabinet Panel ................................................................................................................................. 23
2.7. The Blocks Panel ................................................................................................................................... 25
2.8. The Printed circuit boards Panel (Geometry Tab) .................................................................................... 27
2.9. The Printed circuit boards Panel (Properties Tab) .................................................................................... 28
2.10. The Fans Panel (Geometry Tab) ............................................................................................................ 29
2.11. The Fans Panel (Properties Tab) ............................................................................................................ 30
2.12. The Grille Panel (Geometry Tab) ........................................................................................................... 31
2.13. The Grille Panel (Properties Tab) .......................................................................................................... 32
2.14. Cabinet with Block, Intake Fan, Rectangular Grille, and Rack of PCBs ..................................................... 33
2.15. Summary of the Model ........................................................................................................................ 34
2.16. The Mesh control Panel ....................................................................................................................... 35
2.17. Viewing the Surface Mesh ................................................................................................................... 36
2.18. Viewing a Plane-Cut View of the Mesh ................................................................................................. 37
2.19. Viewing the Refined Mesh ................................................................................................................... 38
2.20. The Basic settings Panel ...................................................................................................................... 39
2.21. The Solve Panel (General setup Tab) ..................................................................................................... 40
2.22. Residuals After Convergence ............................................................................................................... 41
2.23. The Object face Panel .......................................................................................................................... 42
2.24. The Object face contours Panel ........................................................................................................... 43
2.25. Contours of Temperature on the Rack of PCBs ...................................................................................... 44
2.26. The Plane cut Panel ............................................................................................................................. 45
2.27. Velocity Vectors (Plane-Cut View) ......................................................................................................... 46
2.28. The Isosurface Panel ............................................................................................................................ 47
2.29. Isosurface of Temperature = 28 Degrees .............................................................................................. 48
2.30. The Point Panel ................................................................................................................................... 49
2.31.The Postprocessing Edit Window for a Point View ................................................................................. 49
2.32. The Variation plot Panel ....................................................................................................................... 50
2.33. Variation of Temperature Plot .............................................................................................................. 51
2.34. The Define full report Panel ................................................................................................................. 52
2.35. The Full report for Mass flow Window .................................................................................................. 53
3.1. The Main Window ................................................................................................................................. 56
3.2. The Main Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................... 57
3.3. The File Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 57
3.4.The Edit Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 60
3.5. The Find in tree Panel ............................................................................................................................ 60
3.6. The View Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 61
3.7. The Add marker Panel ........................................................................................................................... 62
3.8. The Available toolbars Panel .................................................................................................................. 63
3.9. The Lighting options Panel .................................................................................................................... 66
3.10. The Orient menu ................................................................................................................................. 67
3.11.The Save user view panel ..................................................................................................................... 68
3.12. The Model Menu ................................................................................................................................. 69
3.13. Show objects by material Panel- Initial ................................................................................................. 71
3.14. Show objects by material Panel- Select material ................................................................................... 71
3.15. Show objects by property Panel .......................................................................................................... 72
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxi
User's Guide
3.16. Show objects by type Panel ................................................................................................................. 73

3.17. Show metal fractions .......................................................................................................................... 73
3.18. The Macros Menu ................................................................................................................................ 74
3.19. The Solve Menu .................................................................................................................................. 80
3.20. The Post Menu .................................................................................................................................... 82
3.21. The Report Menu ................................................................................................................................ 84
3.22. The Help Menu ................................................................................................................................... 85
3.23. The File commands Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 86
3.24. The Edit commands Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 87
3.25. The Viewing options Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 87
3.26. The Orientation commands Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 88
3.27. The Model and solve Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 88
3.28. The Postprocessing Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 89
3.29.The Object creation Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 90
3.30. The Object modification Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 91
3.31. An Example of the Model manager Window ........................................................................................ 93
3.32. Example of a Graphics Window With Controls ...................................................................................... 95
3.33. The Annotations Panel ........................................................................................................................ 96
3.34. Sample Message Window .................................................................................................................... 97
3.35. Sample Edit Window ........................................................................................................................... 98
3.36. The File selection Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 98
3.37. The Save project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog Box .............................................................. 99
3.38. The Open project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog Box and the Preview Tab ........................... 100
3.39. The Open project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog Box and the Notes Tab .............................. 101
3.40. Example of a Control Panel ................................................................................................................ 103
3.41. Pop-Up Text Entry Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 105
3.42. Filter objects by type Panel ................................................................................................................ 107
3.43. An Example of a Tabbed Panel ........................................................................................................... 108
3.44. Floating Toolbars ............................................................................................................................... 109
3.45. The Custom Report Panel .................................................................................................................. 117
3.46. Object Context Menu ........................................................................................................................ 124
3.47. Graphics Display Context Menu ......................................................................................................... 126
3.48. Post processing Context Menu .......................................................................................................... 127
3.49. Legend Context Menu ....................................................................................................................... 128
3.50. The Mouse buttons section of the Preferences panel .......................................................................... 131
3.51. Cursor Rotation Behavior ................................................................................................................... 133
3.52. Warning Message Displayed When Quitting ANSYS Icepak Before Saving Your Model ......................... 136
4.1. Editing Options of the Preferences Panel ............................................................................................ 141
5.1.The Merge project Panel (Preview Tab) ................................................................................................. 147
5.2. The Merge project Panel (Transformation Tab) ..................................................................................... 148
5.3. The Save project Panel ........................................................................................................................ 150
5.4. The Open project Panel ....................................................................................................................... 152
5.5. The Save image Panel .......................................................................................................................... 153
5.6. The Graphics file options Panel ............................................................................................................ 153
5.7. The Clean up project data Panel .......................................................................................................... 157
6.1. The IDF import Panel (Specifying the File) ............................................................................................ 161
6.2. The IDF import Panel (Specifying Board/Panel Details) ......................................................................... 162
6.3. The Board properties Panel ................................................................................................................. 163
6.4. The IDF import Panel (Specifying Component Importing Details) ......................................................... 164
6.5. The Component selection Panel .......................................................................................................... 165
6.6. The IDF import Panel (Specifying How the Components Should Be Modeled) ....................................... 166
6.7. The sample file .................................................................................................................................... 167
xxii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
6.8. The IDF View loaded data Panel ........................................................................................................... 167

6.9. The IDF import Panel (Miscellaneous options) ...................................................................................... 169
6.10. IDF import – Update option ............................................................................................................... 170
6.11. The IDX import Panel (Load IDX File) .................................................................................................. 172
6.12. The IDX import Panel (Layout Options) .............................................................................................. 172
6.13. The IDX import Panel (Component Filters) ......................................................................................... 173
6.14. The IDX import Panel (Component Models) ....................................................................................... 174
6.15. The sample file .................................................................................................................................. 175
6.16. The IDX View loaded data Panel ......................................................................................................... 175
6.17.The IDX import Panel (Miscellaneous options) .................................................................................... 176
6.18.The IDX Import Panel (Miscellaneous options) .................................................................................... 177
6.19. The Select Electronics Cooling XML file Panel ..................................................................................... 182
6.20. Locate OBD++ Design Panel .............................................................................................................. 185
6.21. Trace file Panel .................................................................................................................................. 186
6.22. Import Gerber files Panel ................................................................................................................... 187
6.23. Board Layer Information .................................................................................................................... 188
6.24. Via Layer Information ........................................................................................................................ 191
6.25. The Trace heating Panel ..................................................................................................................... 192
6.26. Row import Options Panel ................................................................................................................. 195
6.27. Column import options Panel ............................................................................................................ 196
6.28. Export Sentinel TI HTC file .................................................................................................................. 205
6.29. Select file for ANSYS Electronics Desktop script .................................................................................. 206
6.30. The Save object Panel for CSV/Excel Files ........................................................................................... 207
6.31. An Example of a CSV/Excel Export Options Panel ............................................................................... 208
6.32. The Save all network data Panel ......................................................................................................... 209
6.33. The Export IDF files Panel .................................................................................................................. 209
7.1. The Units Section of the Preferences Panel ........................................................................................... 216
7.2. Units Defined for Individual Inputs for a Block ...................................................................................... 218
7.3. The New unit name Panel .................................................................................................................... 219
7.4. The Postprocessing units Panel ............................................................................................................ 221
8.1. The File Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 224
8.2. The File commands Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 226
8.3. An Example of the Model manager Window ........................................................................................ 228
8.4. The New project File Selection Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 230
8.5. Warning Message Displayed When Opening a New Project before Saving the Current Project ............... 231
8.6. The Title/notes Panel ........................................................................................................................... 232
8.7. The Open project Panel ....................................................................................................................... 233
8.8. The Preferences Panel ......................................................................................................................... 234
8.9. The Display Section of the Preferences Panel ....................................................................................... 236
8.10. The Editing Section of the Preferences Panel ...................................................................................... 238
8.11.The Printing Section of the Preferences Panel ..................................................................................... 239
8.12. The Misc Section of the Preferences Panel .......................................................................................... 239
8.13. The Libraries Section of the Preferences Panel .................................................................................... 241
8.14. The Library name and info Panel ........................................................................................................ 242
8.15. The Object types Section of the Preferences Panel ............................................................................. 243
8.16. The Interaction Section of the Preferences Panel ................................................................................ 245
8.17. The Meshing Section of the Preferences Panel ................................................................................... 246
8.18. The Solution Section of the Preferences Panel .................................................................................... 248
8.19. The Postprocessing Section of the Preferences Panel .......................................................................... 249
8.20. The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab) ................................................................................. 251
8.21. The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) ............................................................................... 252
8.22. The Basic parameters Panel (Advanced Tab) ....................................................................................... 258
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxiii
User's Guide
8.23. The Basic parameters Panel (Defaults Tab) .......................................................................................... 261

8.24. Problem setup wizard panel- Choose variable(s) to solve .................................................................... 268
8.25. Problem setup wizard panel- Select flow condition ............................................................................ 268
8.26. Problem setup wizard panel- Select flow regime ................................................................................ 269
8.27. Problem setup wizard panel- Determine radiation heat transfer ......................................................... 269
8.28. Problem setup wizard panel- Choose radiation model ........................................................................ 270
8.29. Problem setup wizard panel- Determine external heat load ............................................................... 270
8.30. Problem setup wizard panel- Choose variable behavior ...................................................................... 271
8.31. Problem setup wizard panel- Altitude effects ..................................................................................... 271
9.1. The Object Creation Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 274
9.2. The Object Modification Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 274
9.3. The Model Node in the Model manager Window ................................................................................. 275
9.4. The Cabinet Edit Window .................................................................................................................... 275
9.5. The Cabinet Panel (Info Tab) ................................................................................................................ 277
9.6. The Cabinet Panel (Geometry Tab) ....................................................................................................... 277
9.7. The Cabinet Panel (Properties Tab) ....................................................................................................... 278
9.8. The Cabinet Panel (Notes Tab) ............................................................................................................. 278
9.9. The Move all objects in model Panel .................................................................................................... 279
9.10. The Interaction Section of the Preferences Panel ................................................................................ 281
9.11.The Snap to grid Panel ....................................................................................................................... 282
9.12. Example of an Object Edit Window .................................................................................................... 285
9.13. Example of an Object Panel (Info Tab) ................................................................................................ 286
9.14. Example of an Object Panel (Geometry Tab) ....................................................................................... 287
9.15. Example of an Object Panel (Properties Tab) ...................................................................................... 288
9.16. Example of an Object Panel (Notes Tab) ............................................................................................. 289
9.17. Example of an Object Edit Window .................................................................................................... 291
9.18. The Objects outside Panel ................................................................................................................. 294
9.19. Object Outside Cabinet Boundary ..................................................................................................... 294
9.20. Moving the Object Back Inside the Cabinet ........................................................................................ 295
9.21. Resizing an Object that is Outside the Cabinet ................................................................................... 296
9.22. Resizing the Cabinet to Include Outside Object .................................................................................. 297
9.23. The Local coord systems Panel ........................................................................................................... 298
9.24. The Local coords Panel ...................................................................................................................... 299
9.25. Two Objects that Are Close Together ................................................................................................. 301
9.26. Alignment of Two Objects Using Edges .............................................................................................. 303
9.27. Example of a Copy object Panel ......................................................................................................... 307
9.28. The Object selection Panel ................................................................................................................ 309
9.29. Rectangular Object Definition ........................................................................................................... 313
9.30. Circular Object Definition .................................................................................................................. 314
9.31. Inclined Object Definition ................................................................................................................. 316
9.32. Inclined Object Slope Definition ........................................................................................................ 316
9.33. Definition of a 2D Polygon Object ...................................................................................................... 318
9.34. Definition of a Uniform 3D Polygon Object ........................................................................................ 320
9.35. Definition of a Non-Uniform 3D Polygon Object ................................................................................. 321
9.36. Definition of a Prism Object ............................................................................................................... 323
9.37. Definition of a Uniform Cylindrical Object .......................................................................................... 324
9.38. Definition of a Non-Uniform Cylindrical Object .................................................................................. 325
9.39. Nomenclature for Simplified Elliptical Cylinders ................................................................................. 328
9.40. Nomenclature for Detailed Elliptical Cylinders .................................................................................... 329
9.41. 2D CAD Object .................................................................................................................................. 331
9.42. 3D CAD Object .................................................................................................................................. 332
9.43. The Groups Node in the Model manager Window .............................................................................. 334
xxiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
9.44. The Create group Panel ..................................................................................................................... 334

9.45. The Rename group Panel ................................................................................................................... 335
9.46. The Group parameters Panel ............................................................................................................. 335
9.47. The Add by name/pattern Panel ........................................................................................................ 337
9.48. The Remove by name/pattern Panel .................................................................................................. 338
9.49. Material Selection Panel .................................................................................................................... 341
9.50. The Materials Node in the Library Tab of the Model manager Window ................................................ 342
9.51.The Materials Panel for a Solid Material (Properties Tab) ...................................................................... 343
9.52. The Anisotropic tensor Panel ............................................................................................................. 345
9.53. The Materials Panel for a Fluid Material .............................................................................................. 346
9.54. The Fluid Radiation Properties Panel .................................................................................................. 347
9.55. The Materials Panel for a Surface Material .......................................................................................... 348
9.56. The Materials Node under the Model Node ........................................................................................ 350
9.57. The Selection Panel for Saving Materials ............................................................................................ 351
9.58. The Fluid conductivity Panel Showing the Velocity-Dependent Inputs ................................................ 353
9.59. Example of a Solid specific heat Panel ................................................................................................ 353
9.60. The Temperature/value curve Graphics Display and Control Window .................................................. 355
9.61. The Set range Panel ........................................................................................................................... 356
9.62. The Curve specification Panel ............................................................................................................ 357
9.63. An Assembly Node in the Model manager Window ............................................................................ 358
9.64. The Assemblies Panel (Definition Tab) ................................................................................................ 359
9.65. The Assemblies Panel (Meshing Tab) .................................................................................................. 361
9.66. The Assemblies Panel Using Mesher-HD (Meshing Tab) ...................................................................... 363
9.67. The Assembly contents Panel ............................................................................................................ 367
9.68. Model Summary ............................................................................................................................... 369
9.69. Detailed Summary ............................................................................................................................ 370
10.1. A Two-Resistor Model of an IC Package for Steady-State Simulations .................................................. 374
10.2. An RC Model of an IC Package ........................................................................................................... 374
10.3. A Four-Resistor Representation of an IC Package ................................................................................ 375
10.4. Detailed Heat Exchanger ................................................................................................................... 375
10.5. Network Object Used to Model a Cold Plate/Heat Exchanger .............................................................. 376
10.6. Network Object Representation of Recirculation Openings ................................................................ 377
10.7. The Networks Panel (Geometry Tab) .................................................................................................. 379
10.8. The Networks Panel (Properties Tab) .................................................................................................. 380
10.9. Example of a Network editor Panel .................................................................................................... 381
10.10. Face Align Panel .............................................................................................................................. 383
10.11. Example of a Node Panel (Face Node) .............................................................................................. 384
10.12. Example of a Node Panel (Boundary Node) ...................................................................................... 384
10.13. Example of a Node Panel (Internal Node) ......................................................................................... 385
10.14. Example of a Link Panel ................................................................................................................... 386
11.1. The Heat exchangers Panel (Geometry Tab) ....................................................................................... 389
11.2. The Heat exchangers Panel (Properties Tab) ....................................................................................... 390
12.1. External Recirculation Cooling Device ................................................................................................ 395
12.2. Internal Recirculation Device ............................................................................................................. 395
12.3. Flow Direction through an Opening .................................................................................................. 396
12.4. The Openings Panel for a Free Opening (Geometry Tab) ..................................................................... 398
12.5.The Openings Panel for a Recirculation Opening (Geometry Tab) ........................................................ 399
12.6. The Openings Panel for a Free Opening (Properties Tab) ..................................................................... 401
12.7. The Turbulence equation parameters panel ....................................................................................... 402
12.9. The Openings Panel for a Recirculation Opening (Properties Tab) ....................................................... 406
13.1. Vent Examples .................................................................................................................................. 409
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxv
User's Guide
13.2. Outlet Grille Conditions (Vents) ......................................................................................................... 411

13.3. Grille Flow Direction (Vents) .............................................................................................................. 412
13.4. The Grille Panel (Geometry Tab) ......................................................................................................... 414
13.5. The Grille Panel (Properties Tab) ......................................................................................................... 415
13.6. The Pressure drop curve Graphics Display and Control Window .......................................................... 418
13.7. The Set range Panel ........................................................................................................................... 419
14.1. The Sources Panel (Geometry Tab) ..................................................................................................... 425
14.2. The Sources Panel (Properties Tab) ..................................................................................................... 426
14.3. The Temperature dependent power Panel- Linear .............................................................................. 428
14.4. The Temperature dependent power Panel- Piecewise linear ............................................................... 428
14.5. Curve specification panel .................................................................................................................. 429
14.6. The Joule heating power Panel .......................................................................................................... 430
14.7. The Temperature dependent power Panel- Linear .............................................................................. 431
14.8. The Temperature dependent power Panel- Piecewise linear ............................................................... 431
14.9. LED power settings Panel .................................................................................................................. 433
15.1. Component Flow Suppression in a Hollow PCB .................................................................................. 436
15.2. Rack of Four PCBs .............................................................................................................................. 439
15.3. The Printed circuit boards Panel (Geometry Tab) ................................................................................ 440
15.4. The Printed circuit boards Panel (Properties Tab) ................................................................................ 441
15.5. PCB Trace file panel ........................................................................................................................... 442
15.6. The Low side surface properties Panel ............................................................................................... 443
15.7. The Configure vias Panel ................................................................................................................... 445
15.8. Compact Vias- Filled [Vias1] ............................................................................................................... 445
15.9. The PCB low side specification Panel .................................................................................................. 446
16.1. The Enclosures Panel (Geometry Tab) ................................................................................................. 450
16.2. The Enclosures Panel (Properties Tab) ................................................................................................ 451
17.1. High/Low Side Plate Definition .......................................................................................................... 454
17.2. The Plates Panel (Geometry Tab) ........................................................................................................ 456
17.3. The Plates Panel (Properties Tab) ........................................................................................................ 457
17.4. The Joule heating power Panel .......................................................................................................... 459
17.5. The Temperature dependent power Panel ......................................................................................... 462
17.6. Curve specification Panel .................................................................................................................. 463
17.7. Using a Fluid Plate ............................................................................................................................. 464
17.8. The Low side surface properties Panel ............................................................................................... 464
18.1. Wall Thickness Direction .................................................................................................................... 468
18.2. Moving Walls .................................................................................................................................... 469
18.3. Thermal Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................... 470
18.4. Specified Heat Flux or Specified Temperature .................................................................................... 471
18.5. Wall with Non-Zero Thickness ............................................................................................................ 472
18.6. Radiative Heat Transfer ...................................................................................................................... 474
18.7. Blocked-Out Volumes ........................................................................................................................ 475
18.8. Wall with Overlaid Objects ................................................................................................................. 475
18.9. Multifaceted Walls ............................................................................................................................. 476
18.10. The Walls Panel (Geometry Tab) ....................................................................................................... 477
18.11. The Walls Panel (Properties Tab) ....................................................................................................... 478
18.12. The Wall external thermal conditions Panel ...................................................................................... 482
18.13. The Flow dependent heat transfer Panel .......................................................................................... 483
18.14. The Curve specification Panel .......................................................................................................... 485
19.1. Example of Translational Periodicity - Physical Domain ....................................................................... 487
19.2. Example of Translational Periodicity - Modeled Domain ..................................................................... 488
19.3. The Periodic boundaries Panel (Geometry Tab) .................................................................................. 489
xxvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
19.4. The Periodic boundaries Panel (Properties Tab) .................................................................................. 490

20.1. A Simple Network Block .................................................................................................................... 494
20.2. Blocks with Coincident Surfaces ........................................................................................................ 496
20.3. Heat Flux for Blocks with Coincident Surfaces .................................................................................... 497
20.4. Blocks with Intersecting Volumes ....................................................................................................... 498
20.5. Intersecting-Volume Properties ......................................................................................................... 499
20.6. Block Positioned on a Plate ................................................................................................................ 500
20.7. Plate Intersecting a Block .................................................................................................................. 500
20.8. Block on an External Wall ................................................................................................................... 501
20.9. Multiple Blocks in Contact ................................................................................................................. 502
20.10. A Two-Resistor Network Block .......................................................................................................... 503
20.11. A Star Network Block ....................................................................................................................... 503
20.12. A Fully Shunted Network Block ........................................................................................................ 504
20.13. Location of Junctions for a General Network Block ........................................................................... 505
20.14. The Blocks Panel (Geometry Tab) ..................................................................................................... 506
20.15. The Blocks Panel (Properties Tab) ..................................................................................................... 507
20.16. The Individual side specification Panel ............................................................................................. 510
20.17.The Temperature dependent power Panel ........................................................................................ 514
20.18. Curve specification Panel ................................................................................................................. 515
20.19.The Joule heating power Panel with Constant Inputs ........................................................................ 516
20.20. The Joule heating power Panel with Varying Inputs .......................................................................... 517
20.21. The LED power settings Panel .......................................................................................................... 518
20.22. The Block thermal conditions Panel for a Solid or Fluid Block ............................................................ 519
20.23. The Block thermal conditions Panel for a Hollow Block ..................................................................... 520
20.24. The Network resistances Panel ......................................................................................................... 524
20.25. Simple Example of Three Resistances in a General Network Block ..................................................... 525
21.1. Intake and Exhaust Fans .................................................................................................................... 528
21.2. Internal Fan Placement ...................................................................................................................... 528
21.3. Circular Fan Definition ....................................................................................................................... 529
21.4. Rectangular Fan Hub Definition ......................................................................................................... 529
21.5. 3D Fans with Housing ....................................................................................................................... 530
21.6. Intake Fan Flow Direction .................................................................................................................. 531
21.7. Fans in Series .................................................................................................................................... 532
21.8. Fans in Parallel .................................................................................................................................. 532
21.9. Fan on a Block ................................................................................................................................... 533
21.10. Tube-axial Fan Curve ....................................................................................................................... 535
21.11. The Fans Panel (Geometry Tab) ........................................................................................................ 537
21.12. The Fans Panel (Properties Tab) ........................................................................................................ 538
21.13. The Fan curve Graphics Display and Control Window ....................................................................... 542
21.14. The Set range Panel ......................................................................................................................... 543
21.16. The Search fan library Panel ............................................................................................................. 546
22.1. Impeller Definition ............................................................................................................................ 550
22.2. Centrifugal Blower Definition ............................................................................................................ 551
22.3. Geometry for Impeller Swirl Calculation (Top View) ............................................................................ 552
22.4. The Blowers Panel (Geometry Tab) ..................................................................................................... 553
22.5. The Blowers Panel (Properties Tab) ..................................................................................................... 554
22.6. Centrifugal Blowers Geometry Panel .................................................................................................. 556
23.1. The Resistances Panel (Geometry Tab) ............................................................................................... 562
23.2. The Resistances Panel (Properties Tab) ............................................................................................... 563
24.1. Simplified Heat Sink Definition .......................................................................................................... 568
24.2. Extruded Heat Sink ............................................................................................................................ 571
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxvii
User's Guide
24.3. Cross Cut Extrusion Heat Sink ............................................................................................................ 571

24.4. Cylindrical Pin Heat Sink With Staggered Pins .................................................................................... 572
24.5. The Heat sinks Panel (Geometry Tab) ................................................................................................. 573
24.6. The Heat sinks Panel (Properties Tab) ................................................................................................. 574
24.7. The Resistance curve Graphics Display and Control Window for a Heat Sink ........................................ 578
24.8. The Curve specification Panel for a Heat Sink ..................................................................................... 579
24.9. The Interface thermal resistance Panel ............................................................................................... 582
25.1. Example of a BGA Package ................................................................................................................ 586
25.2. Two-Layer Substrate .......................................................................................................................... 587
25.3. JC Characterization ........................................................................................................................... 589
25.4. JB Characterization ........................................................................................................................... 590
25.5. The Packages Panel (Dimensions Tab) ................................................................................................ 591
25.6.The Packages Panel (Substrate Tab) .................................................................................................... 592
25.7. The Packages Panel (Solder Tab) ........................................................................................................ 593
25.8. The Packages Panel (Die/Mold Tab) .................................................................................................... 594
25.9. The Component Visibility Panel ......................................................................................................... 596
25.10. The Flip-Chip Dimensions Panel ....................................................................................................... 596
25.11. The PBGA Substrate Panel ............................................................................................................... 598
25.12. The FPBGA Solder Panel .................................................................................................................. 599
25.13. The Top side surface properties Panel .............................................................................................. 600
25.14. The Cavity Down BGA Die Panel ....................................................................................................... 601
25.15. The Edit Wire Bonds Panel ............................................................................................................... 602
25.16. Schematic Showing the Stacked Dies ............................................................................................... 608
25.17. Schematic Showing Package on Package Die Panel .......................................................................... 611
25.18. The Search package library Panel ..................................................................................................... 612
25.19. The Preferences Panel - Misc ............................................................................................................ 619
25.20. Launching the Macro ...................................................................................................................... 621
25.21. The Macro Interface: Select Package Type ......................................................................................... 621
25.22. Arrangement of Interconnects (pins/balls) ....................................................................................... 622
25.23. Choose to Have Side Nodes for the Delphi Package .......................................................................... 622
25.24. Choose the number of boundary conditions .................................................................................... 622
25.25. Instructions on Delphi Model Creation ............................................................................................. 623
25.26. Image of the Excel Based Optimizer ................................................................................................. 624
25.27. Editing the Network Object: Assigning Power ................................................................................... 625
25.28. Checking the Location of a Face Object in the Model. Make Pictures without Annotation Lines ......... 626
26.1. The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) ............................................................................... 628
26.2. The Transient parameters Panel ......................................................................................................... 628
26.3. The Square Wave Time-Step Parameters Panel ................................................................................... 629
26.4. The Square Wave Inputs for Time Step Variation ................................................................................. 629
26.5. Automatic time-step parameters panel .............................................................................................. 631
26.6. The Basic parameters Panel (Default tab) ........................................................................................... 633
26.7. The Basic settings Panel for a Transient Simulation ............................................................................. 638
26.8. Definition of a Square Wave ............................................................................................................... 639
26.9. The Transients Panel .......................................................................................................................... 640
26.10. The Time/value curve Graphics Display and Control Window ............................................................ 642
26.11. The Set range Panel ......................................................................................................................... 643
26.13. The Post-processing time Panel ....................................................................................................... 645
26.14. The Transient animation Panel ......................................................................................................... 646
26.15. The History plot Panel ..................................................................................................................... 648
26.16. The Selection Panel ......................................................................................................................... 648
26.17. The Create point Panel .................................................................................................................... 650
xxviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
27.1. Basic parameters (Advanced tab) ....................................................................................................... 655

27.2. The Species definitions Panel ............................................................................................................. 656
27.3. The fraction menu ............................................................................................................................. 657
27.4. The Species concentrations Panel for a Hollow Block, Fan or Grille ...................................................... 658
27.5. The Species concentrations for a Free Opening .................................................................................. 659
27.6.The Species concentrations Panel for a 3D Resistance ......................................................................... 659
27.7. The Species concentrations Panel for a 2D Source .............................................................................. 660
27.8. The Species concentrations Panel for a 3D Source .............................................................................. 660
27.9. The Species filter efficiency Panel ...................................................................................................... 661
27.10. The Advanced solver setup Panel ..................................................................................................... 662
28.1. The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab) ................................................................................. 667
28.2.The Radiation specification Panel ....................................................................................................... 669
28.3.The Radiation object selection Panel .................................................................................................. 669
28.4. The Form factors Panel ...................................................................................................................... 671
28.5. A Plate Radiates to Two Blocks ........................................................................................................... 674
28.6. The Modify form factors Panel ........................................................................................................... 675
28.7. The Discrete ordinates parameters Panel ........................................................................................... 676
28.8. The Ray tracing parameters Panel ...................................................................................................... 677
29.1. The Parameters and optimization Panel (Setup Tab) ........................................................................... 681
29.2. The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables Tab) ........................................................... 682
29.3. The Parameters and optimization Panel (Functions Tab) ..................................................................... 683
29.4. The Define primary function Panel ..................................................................................................... 684
29.5. The Global value Drop-down List ....................................................................................................... 685
29.6. The Define compound function Panel ................................................................................................ 685
29.7. The Optimization run Panel ............................................................................................................... 686
30.1. The Param value Panel ....................................................................................................................... 692
30.2. The Active parameter Panel ............................................................................................................... 693
30.3. The Active parameter Panel for the Extruded Heat Sink ...................................................................... 694
30.4. The Active parameter Panel for the Pin Fin Heat Sink .......................................................................... 695
30.5. The Option parameter Panel .............................................................................................................. 696
30.6. The Parameters and optimization Panel (Setup Tab) ........................................................................... 697
30.7. The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables Tab) ........................................................... 698
30.8. The Parameters and optimization Panel (Trials Tab) ............................................................................ 700
30.9. Trials data Panel ................................................................................................................................ 702
30.10. The Parameters and optimization Panel Displaying Restart ID Options (Trials Tab) ............................. 703
30.11. Trials panel ...................................................................................................................................... 705
30.12. Set trial name prefix ........................................................................................................................ 707
30.13. The Solve Panel ............................................................................................................................... 708
30.14. The Parametric trials Panel ............................................................................................................... 710
30.15. The Select Panel (X axis selection) .................................................................................................... 710
30.16. The Select Panel (y axis selection) .................................................................................................... 711
30.17. Plot ................................................................................................................................................. 711
31.1. The Parameters and Optimization Panel (Setup Tab) ........................................................................... 713
31.2. The Parameters and Optimization Panel (State-space Tab) .................................................................. 714
32.1. Create Krylov ROM (Setup Tab) .......................................................................................................... 718
32.2. Create Krylov ROM (Construct Tab) .................................................................................................... 719
32.3. Create Krylov ROM (Evaluate Tab) ...................................................................................................... 720
33.1. The Create JEDEC Test Chambers Panel (Forced Convection) .............................................................. 724
33.2. The Create JEDEC Test Chamber Panel (Natural Convection) ............................................................... 726
33.3.The Create PCB - Detailed and Compact Panel .................................................................................... 729
33.4. Wedgelock with Conduction Plates .................................................................................................... 731
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxix
User's Guide
33.5. The Create Wedgelock Panel .............................................................................................................. 731

33.6. The Create Bolt Panel ........................................................................................................................ 732
33.7. Stiffener ............................................................................................................................................ 733
33.8. The Create Stiffener Panel .................................................................................................................. 734
33.9.The Create Detailed Heatsink Panel .................................................................................................... 736
33.10. The Create Straight Network Heatpipe Panel .................................................................................... 740
33.11. The Create CRAC Panel .................................................................................................................... 742
33.12. The Detailed Fan Specifications Panel .............................................................................................. 743
33.13. The Create PDU Panel ...................................................................................................................... 745
33.14. The Create Rack (Front to Rear) Panel ............................................................................................... 747
33.15. The Create Rack (Front to Top) Panel ................................................................................................ 748
33.16. The Create Tile Panel ....................................................................................................................... 750
33.17. Example Powermap File .................................................................................................................. 753
33.18. Curve Specification Panel ................................................................................................................ 754
33.19. Transient Temperature Dependent Power Panel ............................................................................... 754
33.20. Debug Divergence Panel ................................................................................................................. 756
33.21. Create Thermoelectric Cooler Panel ................................................................................................. 757
33.22. Macro Information Panel ................................................................................................................. 758
33.23. Run TEC Panel ................................................................................................................................. 759
33.24. Macro Information Panel ................................................................................................................. 760
33.25. Sources Panel (Target Source) .......................................................................................................... 762
33.26. Sources Panel (Remote Source) ........................................................................................................ 763
33.27. Power Dependent Power Panel ........................................................................................................ 764
33.28. Remote Source Multipliers Panel ..................................................................................................... 765
33.29. Create Bonding Wires Panel ............................................................................................................. 766
33.30. Create Bonding Wires Panel ............................................................................................................. 767
33.31. Solar Flux Calculator Panel ............................................................................................................... 767
34.1. The Power and temperature limit setup Panel .................................................................................... 769
34.2. Power and temperature limit setup Panel - Networks tab ................................................................... 770
34.3.The Save table Panel .......................................................................................................................... 771
34.4. The Power and temperature limit setup Panel .................................................................................... 772
35.1. Mesh with Small Elements Near Objects and Large Elements in Open Spaces ..................................... 774
35.2. Elements with Low and High Skew .................................................................................................... 775
35.3. Aligning Nearly-Aligned Faces ........................................................................................................... 778
35.4. Aligning Nearly-Aligned Faces ........................................................................................................... 779
35.5. The Mesh control Panel for the Hex-Dominant Mesher ....................................................................... 781
35.6. The Mesh control Panel for the Hexahedral Mesher ............................................................................ 782
35.7. Multi-level meshing max levels .......................................................................................................... 786
35.8. Edit size regions panel ....................................................................................................................... 787
35.9. Mesh size region ............................................................................................................................... 788
35.10. O-Grid Height ................................................................................................................................. 789
35.11. O-Grid Height ................................................................................................................................. 792
35.12. The Per-object meshing parameters Panel ....................................................................................... 794
35.13. High- and Low-Side Surface Definition ............................................................................................. 795
35.14. The Meshing Parameters Available for a Cabinet .............................................................................. 796
35.15. The Meshing Parameters Available for a Block .................................................................................. 797
35.16. The Meshing Parameters Available for a Circular Grille ...................................................................... 801
35.17. The Per-object meshing parameters Panel (Recirc Openings) ............................................................ 804
35.18. The Meshing Parameters Available for a Wall .................................................................................... 805
35.19. The Per-object mesh reuse Panel ..................................................................................................... 807
35.20. The Object priority Panel ................................................................................................................. 808
35.21.The Display Tab of the Mesh control Panel ........................................................................................ 811
xxx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
User's Guide
35.22. Display of Surface Elements ............................................................................................................. 812

35.23. Display of Volume Elements ............................................................................................................. 813
35.24. Solid Display with Mesh Lines .......................................................................................................... 814
35.25. Solid Display without Mesh Lines ..................................................................................................... 814
35.26. Mesh Display on a Cross-Sectional Plane .......................................................................................... 816
35.27. Specification of a Vertical Cross-Section ........................................................................................... 818
35.28. Isometric View of Cross-Sectional Mesh Display ............................................................................... 819
35.29. Definition of Face Alignment ........................................................................................................... 820
35.30. The Face alignment Histogram in the Mesh control Panel ................................................................. 821
35.31. The Volume Histogram in the Mesh control Panel ............................................................................. 823
35.32. Ideal and Skewed Triangles and Quadrilaterals ................................................................................. 824
35.33. The Skewness Histogram in the Mesh control Panel ......................................................................... 827
35.34. Skewness Labels ............................................................................................................................. 828
36.1. The Solve Menu ................................................................................................................................ 830
36.2. The Advanced solver setup Panel ....................................................................................................... 832
36.3. The Basic settings Panel ..................................................................................................................... 836
36.4. The Solution monitor parameters Panel ............................................................................................. 837
36.5.The Modify point Panel ...................................................................................................................... 838
36.6. Object Monitor Surfaces .................................................................................................................... 839
36.7.The Define summary report Panel ...................................................................................................... 841
36.8. The Solve Panel (General setup Tab) ................................................................................................... 842
36.9. The Solve Panel (Advanced Tab) ......................................................................................................... 843
36.10. The Solve Panel (Results Tab) ........................................................................................................... 844
36.11. The Remote execution parameters Pane (Linux) ............................................................................... 847
36.12. The Remote execution parameters Panel (Windows) ........................................................................ 848
36.13. The Export Panel ............................................................................................................................. 851
36.14. The Parallel settings Panel ............................................................................................................... 853
36.15. Shared Directories ........................................................................................................................... 857
36.16. Map Network Drive ......................................................................................................................... 857
36.17. Map Network Drive Panel ................................................................................................................ 858
36.18. ANSYS Installation - Initial Screen ..................................................................................................... 859
36.19. ANSYS Installation - Second Screen .................................................................................................. 859
36.20. Example of Host File ........................................................................................................................ 861
36.21. Parallel Settings Panel ..................................................................................................................... 862
36.22. Parallel Settings Panel ..................................................................................................................... 864
36.23.The Solve Panel for Batch Processing ................................................................................................ 869
36.24. The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window ........................................................... 872
37.1. The Post Menu .................................................................................................................................. 878
37.2. The Postprocessing Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 879
37.3. The Postprocessing Node in the Model manager Window .................................................................. 882
37.4. The Edit Window for postprocessing objects ...................................................................................... 882
37.5. Block Object Face .............................................................................................................................. 884
37.6. The Object face Panel ........................................................................................................................ 885
37.7.The Object face (facet) Panel .............................................................................................................. 887
37.8. Plane Cut Defined by Point and Normal ............................................................................................. 889
37.9. The Plane cut Panel ........................................................................................................................... 890
37.10. 3D Multi-Level Plane-cut Mesh Display ............................................................................................ 892
37.11. 3D Multi-Level Plane-cut Mesh Display with Mesh control Panel ....................................................... 892
37.12. Isosurface Example ......................................................................................................................... 897
37.13. The Isosurface Panel ........................................................................................................................ 898
37.14. Point Object .................................................................................................................................... 901
37.15. The Point Panel ............................................................................................................................... 902
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxxi
User's Guide
37.16. The Min/max locations Panel ........................................................................................................... 904

37.17. Contour Plot ................................................................................................................................... 905
37.18. The Object face contours Panel ........................................................................................................ 906
37.19. Vector Plot ...................................................................................................................................... 910
37.20. The Object face vectors Panel .......................................................................................................... 911
37.21. Arrow Styles: 2D arrow heads and Rhomboid ................................................................................... 913
37.22. Particle Trace Plot ............................................................................................................................ 914
37.23. The Object face particles Panel ........................................................................................................ 915
37.24. Cone-Styled Markers and Dot-Styled Markers for Particle Traces ....................................................... 916
37.25. Variation Plot .................................................................................................................................. 919
37.26. 2D Variation plot ............................................................................................................................. 920
37.27. 3D Variation plot ............................................................................................................................. 921
37.28. The Clip to box Section of the Variation Plot Panel ............................................................................ 922
37.29. Trials Plot ........................................................................................................................................ 924
37.30. The Trials plot Panel ......................................................................................................................... 925
37.31. The Selection Panel ......................................................................................................................... 926
37.32. Network Temperature Curve ............................................................................................................ 928
37.33. The Set Range Panel ........................................................................................................................ 929
37.34. The Version selection Panel .............................................................................................................. 929
37.35. The Zoom-in modeling Panel ........................................................................................................... 930
37.36. The Display powermap property Panel ............................................................................................ 932
37.37. Powermap in 2D View ..................................................................................................................... 933
37.38. Powermap in 3D View ..................................................................................................................... 933
38.1. The Report Menu .............................................................................................................................. 936
38.2. The HTML report Panel ...................................................................................................................... 939
38.3. The Version selection Panel ............................................................................................................... 942
38.4. The Solution Panel ............................................................................................................................ 942
38.5.The Define summary report Panel ...................................................................................................... 943
38.6. The Version selection Panel ............................................................................................................... 944
38.7. The Report summary data Panel ........................................................................................................ 944
38.8. The Report summary data Panel Displayed by Column ....................................................................... 945
38.9. Edit columns ..................................................................................................................................... 946
38.10. The Define point report Panel .......................................................................................................... 949
38.11. The Report point data Panel ............................................................................................................ 950
38.12. The Define full report Panel ............................................................................................................. 951
38.13. The Full report for Temperature window .......................................................................................... 953
39.1. The Heat tr. coeff parameters Panel .................................................................................................... 957
40.1. Exemplary Decay of Turbulence Intensity (Tu) as a Function of Streamwise Distance (x) ...................... 979
40.2.The Angular Coordinate System ......................................................................................................... 983
40.3. The Face with No Control Angle Overhang ......................................................................................... 984
40.4. The Face with Control Angle Overhang .............................................................................................. 984
40.5. The Face with Control Angle Overhang (3D) ....................................................................................... 985
40.6.The Pixelation of Control Angle .......................................................................................................... 986
40.7. Overview of the Solution Method ...................................................................................................... 992
40.8. Control Volume Used to Illustrate Discretization of a Scalar Transport Equation ................................... 994
40.9. V-Cycle Multigrid ............................................................................................................................. 1003
40.10. W-Cycle Multigrid .......................................................................................................................... 1004
40.11. Logic Controlling the Flex Multigrid Cycle ...................................................................................... 1006
xxxii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Tables
2.1. Problem Solving Steps in ANSYS Icepak ................................................................................................. 15
2.2. System Environment Variables .............................................................................................................. 19
2.3. ANSYS Icepak-Specific Environment Variables ........................................................................................ 20
2.4. Coordinates for the Cabinet .................................................................................................................. 23
2.5. Coordinates for the Block ...................................................................................................................... 24
2.6. Coordinates for the PCB ........................................................................................................................ 26
2.7. Coordinates for the Fan ......................................................................................................................... 28
2.8. Coordinates for the Grille ...................................................................................................................... 30
5.1. Files Written or Read by ANSYS Icepak ................................................................................................. 143
8.1. Object Choices for Editing Graphical Styles .......................................................................................... 243
8.2.Typical Values of Dimensionless Parameters in Forced- and Natural-Convection Problems in ANSYS Ice-
pak ........................................................................................................................................................... 260
20.1. Which side Options for Block Geometries ........................................................................................... 511
35.1. Skewness Ranges and Cell Quality ..................................................................................................... 824
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxxiii
xxxiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: Using This Manual
This chapter contains the following sections:
1.1. What’s In This Manual
1.2. How To Use This Manual
1.3.Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual
1.4. Mathematical Conventions
1.5. Mouse and Keyboard Conventions Used In This Manual
1.6. When To Call Your ANSYS Icepak Support Engineer
1.1. What’s In This Manual

This manual tells you what you need to know to use ANSYS Icepak. Introductory information about
ANSYS Icepak is given, as well as a sample session, and information about the user interface. The next
sections explain how to use ANSYS Icepak and each specific topic or problem setup step is presented
in a procedural manner. Lastly, information about the theory behind ANSYS Icepak’s physical models
and numerical procedures is presented.
A brief description of each chapter follows:
• Getting Started (p. 7) describes the capabilities of ANSYS Icepak, gives an overview of the problem setup
steps, and presents a sample session that you can work through at your own pace.
• User Interface (p. 55) describes the mechanics of using the user interface.
• ANSYS Icepak in Workbench (p. 137) describes the mechanics of using ANSYS Icepak in the Workbench
framework.
• Reading, Writing, and Managing Files (p. 143) contains information about the files that ANSYS Icepak can
read and write, including hard copy files.
• Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159) provides information on importing IDF files, and other files
created by commercial CAD packages into ANSYS Icepak.
• Unit Systems (p. 215) describes how to use the standard and custom unit systems available in ANSYS Icepak.
• Defining a Project (p. 223) describes how to define a job for your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Building a Model (p. 273) contains information about how to set up your model in ANSYS Icepak.
• Networks (p. 373) contains information about network objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak
model.
• Heat Exchangers (p. 387) contains information about heat exchanger objects and how to add them to your
ANSYS Icepak model.
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
Using This Manual
• Openings (p. 393) contains information about opening objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak
model.
• Grilles (p. 409) contains information about grille objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Sources (p. 423) contains information about source objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak
model.
• Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) (p. 435) contains information about PCB objects and how to add them to your
ANSYS Icepak model.
• Enclosures (p. 449) contains information about enclosure objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak
model.
• Plates (p. 453) contains information about plate objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Walls (p. 467) contains information about wall objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Periodic Boundaries (p. 487) contains information about periodic boundary objects and how to add them to
your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Blocks (p. 493) contains information about block objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Fans (p. 527) contains information about fan objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Blowers (p. 549) contains information about blower objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak
model.
• Resistances (p. 559) contains information about volumetric resistance objects and how to add them to your
ANSYS Icepak model.
• Heat Sinks (p. 567) contains information about heat sink objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak
model.
• Packages (p. 585) contains information about package objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak
model.
• Transient Simulations (p. 627) contains information about solving problems involving time-dependent phe-
nomena, including transient heat conduction and convection.
• Species Transport Modeling (p. 653) explains how to include species in your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Radiation Modeling (p. 665) explains how to include radiative heat transfer in your ANSYS Icepak simulation.
• Optimization (p. 679) contains information about solving design-optimization problems using ANSYS Icepak.
• Parameterizing the Model (p. 689) describes how to use parameterization to determine the effect of various
object sizes or other characteristics on the solution.
• Using Macros (p. 723) describes the predefined combinations of ANSYS Icepak objects designed to fulfill
specific functions in the model, and how you can use them.
• Power and Temperature Limit Setup (p. 769) contains information about setting up and reviewing the power
of objects and temperature limits, as well as comparing the temperature limits with the object temperatures.
• Generating a Mesh (p. 773) explains how to create a computational mesh for your ANSYS Icepak model.
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
How To Use This Manual
• Calculating a Solution (p. 829) describes how to compute a solution for your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Examining the Results (p. 877) explains how to use the graphics tools in ANSYS Icepak to examine your
solution.
• Generating Reports (p. 935) describes how to obtain reports of flow rates, heat flux, and other solution data.
• Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955) defines the flow variables that appear in the variable
selection drop-down lists in the reporting and postprocessing panels.
• Theory (p. 961) describes the theory behind the physical models and numerical procedures in ANSYS Icepak.
1.2. How To Use This Manual

Depending on your familiarity with computational fluid dynamics and ANSYS Icepak, you can use this
manual in a variety of ways:
1.2.1. For the Beginner
1.2.2. For the Experienced User
1.2.1. For the Beginner

The suggested readings for the beginner are as follows:
• For an overview of ANSYS Icepak modeling features, information on how to start up ANSYS Icepak, or
advice on how to plan your electronics cooling simulation, see Getting Started (p. 7). In this section you
will also find a self-paced tutorial that illustrates how to solve a simple problem using ANSYS Icepak.
You should be sure to try (or at least read through) this sample problem before working on any of
the tutorials in the ANSYS Icepak Tutorial Guide.
• To learn about the user interface, read User Interface (p. 55).
• For information about the different files that ANSYS Icepak reads and writes, see Reading, Writing, and
Managing Files (p. 143).
• To learn about importing IDF files into ANSYS Icepak, see Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159).
• If you plan to use a unit system other than SI (British units, for example), see Unit Systems (p. 215) for in-
structions.
• To learn how to define a job for your model, see Defining a Project (p. 223).
• For information about defining your ANSYS Icepak model, see Building a Model (p. 273).
• For information about available objects and how to add them to your ANSYS Icepak model, see Net-
works (p. 373) – Packages (p. 585).
• For information about modeling the effect of time-dependent phenomena, see Transient Simulations (p. 627).
• For information about modeling species transport, see Species Transport Modeling (p. 653).
• To learn about including radiative heat transfer effects in your simulation, see Radiation Modeling (p. 665).
Using This Manual
• To learn how to solve constrained-design-optimization problems, see Optimization (p. 679).
• For information about parameterizing your model, see Parameterizing the Model (p. 689).
• To learn how to use macros to define common combinations of ANSYS Icepak objects (such as heat sinks),
see Using Macros (p. 723).
• To learn how to set up and review the power of objects and temperature limits, see Power and Temperature
Limit Setup (p. 769).
• To learn how to generate a computational mesh for your model, see Generating a Mesh (p. 773).
• To learn how to calculate a solution for your model or to modify parameters that control this calculation,
see Calculating a Solution (p. 829).
• To find out how to examine the results of your calculation using graphics and reporting tools, see Examining
the Results (p. 877) and Generating Reports (p. 935).
1.2.2. For the Experienced User

If you are an experienced user who needs to look up specific information, there are two tools that
enable you to use the ANSYS Icepak User’s Guide as a reference manual.
• The table of contents, as far as possible, discusses topics in the order you would typically perform them,
enabling you to find material relating to a particular procedural step.
• The Advanced Search enables you to filter the results of your search to show only returns from the Icepak
documentation set.
1.3. Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual

Several typographical conventions are used in this manual’s text to facilitate your learning process.
• Different type styles are used to indicate graphical user interface menu items and text inputs that you enter
(for example, Open project panel, enter the name projectname).
• A mini flow chart is used to indicate the menu selections that lead you to a specific panel. For example,
Model Generate mesh
indicates that the Generate mesh option can be selected from the Model menu at the top of the
ANSYS Icepak main window.
The arrow points from a specific menu toward the item you should select from that menu. In this
manual, mini flow charts usually precede a description of a panel or a screen illustration showing
how to use the panel. They allow you to look up information about a panel and quickly determine
how to access it without having to search the preceding material.
• A mini flow chart is also used to indicate the list tree selections that lead you to a specific panel or operation.
For example,
Problem setup Basic parameters
Mathematical Conventions
indicates that the Basic parameters item can be selected from the Problem setup node in the
Model manager window
• Pictures of toolbar buttons are also used to indicate the button that will lead you to a specific panel. For
example, indicates that you will need to click this button (in this case, to open the Walls panel) in the
toolbar.
1.4. Mathematical Conventions

• Where possible, vector quantities are displayed with a raised arrow (for example, , ). Boldfaced characters
are reserved for vectors and matrices as they apply to linear algebra (for example, the identity matrix, ).
• The operator , referred to as grad, nabla, or del, represents the partial derivative of a quantity with respect
to all directions in the chosen coordinate system. In Cartesian coordinates, is defined to be
(1.1)
appears in several ways:
– The gradient of a scalar quantity is the vector whose components are the partial derivatives; for example,
(1.2)
– The gradient of a vector quantity is a second-order tensor; for example, in Cartesian coordinates,
(1.3)
This tensor is usually written as
(1.4)
– The divergence of a vector quantity, which is the inner product between and a vector; for example,
(1.5)
– The operator , which is usually written as and is known as the Laplacian; for example,
(1.6)
is different from the expression , which is defined as
Using This Manual
(1.7)
• An exception to the use of is found in the discussion of Reynolds stresses in Advanced Turbulence Mod-
els (p. 964), where convention dictates the use of Cartesian tensor notation. In this section, you will also find
that some velocity vector components are written as u, v, and w instead of the conventional v with directional
subscripts.
1.5. Mouse and Keyboard Conventions Used In This Manual

The default mouse buttons used to manipulate your model in the graphics window are described in
Manipulating Graphics With the Mouse (p. 128). Note that you can change the default mouse controls
in ANSYS Icepak to suit your preferences (see Changing the Mouse Controls (p. 130)). In this manual,
however, descriptions of operations that use the mouse assume that you are using the default settings
for the mouse controls.
The default keyboard key that is used in conjunction with the mouse buttons to move legends, titles,
and so on in the graphics window is the Ctrl key. Note that you can change this key in ANSYS Icepak to
suit your preference (see Configuring a Project (p. 234)). In this manual, however, descriptions of moving
legends, titles, and so on assume that you are using the default setting (that is, the Ctrl key).
1.6. When To Call Your ANSYS Icepak Support Engineer

The ANSYS Icepak support engineers can help you to plan your modeling projects and to overcome
any difficulties you encounter while using ANSYS Icepak. If you encounter difficulties we invite you to
call your support engineer for assistance. However, there are a few things that we encourage you to
do before calling:
1. Read the sections of the manual containing information on the options you are trying to use.
2. Recall the exact steps you were following that led up to and caused the problem.
3. Write down the exact error message that appeared, if any.
For particularly difficult problems, package up the project in which the problem occurred (see Packing
and Unpacking Model Files (p. 156) for instructions) and send it to your support engineer. This is the
best source that we can use to reproduce the problem and thereby help to identify the cause.
Chapter 2: Getting Started
This chapter provides an introduction to ANSYS Icepak, an explanation of its structure and capabilities,
an overview of using ANSYS Icepak, and instructions for starting the ANSYS Icepak application. A sample
session is also included.
Information in this chapter is divided into the following sections:
• What is ANSYS Icepak? (p. 7)
• Program Structure (p. 8)
• Program Capabilities (p. 9)
• Overview of Using ANSYS Icepak (p. 14)
• Starting ANSYS Icepak (p. 16)
• Accessing the ANSYS Icepak Manuals (p. 20)
• Sample Session (p. 20)
2.1. What is ANSYS Icepak?

ANSYS Icepak is a powerful CAE software tool that allows engineers to model electronic system designs
and perform heat transfer and fluid flow simulations that can increase a product’s quality and significantly
reduce its time-to-market. The ANSYS Icepak program is a total thermal management system that can
be used to solve component-level, board-level, or system-level problems. It provides design engineers
with the ability to test conceptual designs under operating conditions that might be impractical to
duplicate with a physical model, and obtain data at locations that might otherwise be inaccessible for
monitoring.
ANSYS Icepak uses the Fluent computational fluid dynamics (CFD) solver engine for thermal and fluid-
flow calculations. The solver engine provides complete mesh flexibility, and allows you to solve complex
geometries using unstructured meshes. The multigrid and pressure-based solver algorithms provide
robust and quick calculations.
ANSYS Icepak provides many features that are not available in other commercial thermal and fluid-flow
analysis packages. These features include the following:
• accurate modeling of non-rectangular devices
• contact resistance modeling
• anisotropic conductivity
• nonlinear fan curves
Getting Started
• lumped-parameter heat sink devices
• external heat exchangers
• automatic radiation heat transfer view factor calculations
2.2. Program Structure

Your ANSYS Icepak package includes the following components:
• ANSYS Icepak, the tool for modeling, meshing, and postprocessing
• Fluent, the solver engine
• filters for importing model data from STEP (Standard for the Exchange of Product model data) and Interme-
diate Data Format (IDF) files
Program Capabilities
Figure 2.1: Basic Program Structure
ANSYS Icepak is used to construct your model geometry and define your model. You can import model
data from other CAD and CAE packages in this process. ANSYS Icepak then creates a mesh for your
model geometry, and passes the mesh and model definition to the solver for computational fluid dy-
namics simulation. The resulting data can then be postprocessed using ANSYS Icepak, as shown in
Figure 2.1: Basic Program Structure (p. 9).
2.3. Program Capabilities

All of the functions that are required to build an ANSYS Icepak model, calculate a solution, and examine
the results can be accessed through ANSYS Icepak’s interactive menu-driven interface.
Getting Started
2.3.1. General
• mouse-driven interactive controls
– mouse or keyboard control of placement, movement, and sizing of objects
– 3D mouse-based view manipulation
– error and tolerance checking
• complete flexibility of unit systems
• geometry import using ISTEP and IDF file formats
• library functions that enable you to store or retrieve groups of objects in an assemblies library
• online help and documentation
– complete hypertext-based online documentation (including theory and tutorials)
• supported platforms
– Linux workstations
– PCs running Windows 7 or Windows 8
2.3.2. Model Building

• object-based model building with predefined objects
– cabinets
– networks
– heat exchangers
– openings
– grilles
– sources
– printed circuit boards (PCBs)
– enclosures
– plates
– walls
– periodic boundaries
– blocks
– fans (with hubs)
– blowers
– resistances
– heat sinks
– packages
• macros
– JEDEC test chambers
– printed circuit board (PCB)
– ducts
– compact models for heat sinks
• 2D object shapes
– rectangular
– circular
– inclined
– polygon
• complex 3D object shapes
– prisms
– cylinders
– ellipsoids
– elliptical and concentric cylinders
– prisms of polygonal and varying cross-section
– ducts of arbitrary cross-section
2.3.3. Meshing
• automatic unstructured mesh generation
– hexahedra, tetrahedra, pyramids, prisms, and mixed element mesh types
• meshing control
– coarse mesh generation option for preliminary analysis
– full mesh control
– viewing tools for checking mesh quality
Getting Started
– non-conformal meshing
2.3.4. Materials
• comprehensive material property database
• input for full anisotropic conductivity in solids
• temperature-dependent material properties
2.3.5. Physical Models

• laminar and turbulent flow models
• species transport
• steady-state and transient analysis
• forced, natural, and mixed convection heat transfer modes
• conduction in solids
• conjugate heat transfer between solid and fluid regions
• surface-to-surface radiation heat transfer model (with automatic view-factor calculation)
• volumetric resistances and sources for velocity and energy
• choice of mixing-length (zero-equation), two-equation (standard k-ε), RNG k-ε, realizable k-ε, three enhanced
two-equation models (standard, RNG and realizable k-ε with enhanced wall treatment), Spalart-Allmaras
or k-ω SST turbulence models
• contact resistance modeling
• non-isotropic volumetric flow resistance modeling, with non-isotropic resistance proportional to velocity
(linear and/or quadratic)
• internal heat generation in volumetric flow resistances
• nonlinear fan curves for realistic fan modeling
• lumped-parameter models for fans, resistances, and grilles
2.3.6. Boundary Conditions

• wall and surface boundaries with options for specification of heat flux, temperature, convective heat
transfer coefficient, radiation, and symmetry conditions
• openings and grilles with options for specification of inlet/exit velocity, exit static pressure, inlet total
pressure, inlet temperature and species
• fans, with options for specified mass flow rate and fan performance curve
• recirculating boundary conditions for external heat exchanger simulation or species filters
• time-dependent and temperature-dependent sources
• time-varying ambient temperature inputs
2.3.7. Solver
For its solver engine, ANSYS Icepak uses Fluent, a finite-volume solver. ANSYS Icepak’s solver features
include:
• pressure-based solution algorithm with a sophisticated multigrid solver to reduce computation time
• choice of first-order upwinding for initial calculations, or a higher-order scheme for improved accuracy
2.3.8. Visualization
• 3D modeling and dynamic viewing features
• visualization of velocity vectors, contours, particle traces, grid, cut planes, and isosurfaces
• point probes and XY plotting for data reporting
• contours of velocity components, speed, temperature, species mass fractions, pressure, heat flux, heat
transfer coefficient, flow rate, turbulence parameters, vorticity, and many more quantities
• velocity vectors color-coded by temperature, velocity magnitude, pressure, or other solved/derived

quantities
• animation for viewing particle and dye traces
• animation of vectors and contours in transient analyses
• animation of plane cuts through the domain
• export of animations in AVI, MPEG, FLI, Flash, and animated GIF formats
2.3.9. Reporting
• writing to user-specified ASCII files of all solved quantities and derived quantities (heat flux, mass flow
rate, heat transfer coefficient, and so on) on all objects, parts of objects, and user-specified regions of the
domain
• time history of solution variables at any point in the model
• graphical monitoring of convergence history during the solution process
• report of operating point for fans that use a fan characteristic curve
• direct graphics output to printers and/or to user-specified files
– color, gray-scale, or monochrome PostScript
– PPM
– TIFF
Getting Started
– GIF
– JPEG
– VRML scripts
– MPEG movies
– AVI movies
– FLI movies
– animated GIF movies
– Flash files
2.3.10. Applications
ANSYS Icepak can be used to solve a wide variety of engineering applications, including, but not
limited to, the following:
• flow in computer cabinets
• telecommunications equipment
• analysis of chip- and board-level packages
• system-level modeling
• heat sink analysis
• numerical wind tunnel testing
• modeling heat pipes
2.3.11. Known Issues and Limitations

ANSYS Icepak has the following known issues and limitations:
• For Gerber file import to function, Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Service Pack 1 (x86) redistributables must
be installed.
• When entering points for a fan curve, the maximum number of points is fifty.
2.4. Overview of Using ANSYS Icepak

Before you create your model in ANSYS Icepak, you should plan the analysis for your model. When you
have considered the issues discussed in Planning Your ANSYS Icepak Analysis (p. 15), you can set up
and solve your problem using the basic steps listed in Problem Solving Steps (p. 15).
Overview of Using ANSYS Icepak
2.4.1. Planning Your ANSYS Icepak Analysis

When you are planning to solve a problem using ANSYS Icepak, you should first give consideration
to the following issues:
• Defining the Modeling Goals: What results are required? What level of accuracy is needed? The level of
accuracy that is required will help you determine assumptions and approximations. How detailed should
your problem setup be?
• Choosing the Computational Model: What are the boundary conditions?
• Choosing the Physical Models: What is the flow regime (laminar or turbulent) and fluid type? Is the flow
steady or transient? What other physical models do you need to apply (for example, gravity)?
• Determining the Solution Procedure: Can the problem be solved simply, using the default solver for-
mulation and solution parameters? Can convergence be accelerated with a more judicious solution pro-
cedure? Will the problem fit within the memory constraints of your computer? How long will the problem
take to converge on your computer?
Careful consideration of these issues before beginning your ANSYS Icepak analysis will contribute
significantly to the success of your modeling effort. When you are planning an analysis project, take
advantage of the customer support provided to all ANSYS Icepak users.
2.4.2. Problem Solving Steps

Once you have determined important features of the problem you want to solve using ANSYS Icepak,
follow the basic procedural steps outlined below.
1. Create a project file.
2. Specify the problem parameters.
3. Build the model.
4. Generate the mesh.
5. Calculate a solution.
6. Examine the results.
7. Generate summaries and reports.
Note:
Table 2.1: Problem Solving Steps in ANSYS Icepak (p. 15) shows each problem solving step
and the ANSYS Icepak menu, window, or toolbar it is initiated from, as well as the section
in this manual that describes the process.
Table 2.1: Problem Solving Steps in ANSYS Icepak
Problem Solving Step Interface Location See...

1. Create project file File menu Defining a Project (p. 223)
Getting Started
Problem Solving Step Interface Location See...

2. Specify the problem Model manager Defining a Project (p. 223)
parameters window
3. Build the model Object toolbar Building a Model (p. 273) –
Packages (p. 585)
4. Generate a mesh Model menu Generating a Mesh (p. 773)
5. Calculate a solution. Solve menu Calculating a Solution (p. 829)
6. Examine the results Post menu or Examining the Results (p. 877)
toolbar
7. Generate summaries and Report menu Generating Reports (p. 935)
reports.
2.5. Starting ANSYS Icepak

The way you start ANSYS Icepak will be different for Linux and Windows systems, as described in the
following sections. The installation process (described in the separate installation instructions for your
computer type) is designed to ensure that the ANSYS Icepak program is launched when you follow the
appropriate instructions. If it is not, consult your computer systems manager or your technical support
engineer.
Once you have installed ANSYS Icepak on your computer system, you can start it as described in the
following section.
2.5.1. Starting ANSYS Icepak on a Linux System

For a Linux system, start ANSYS Icepak by typing icepak at the system prompt.
icepak
You can also start an ANSYS Icepak application on a Linux system using a startup command line option.
For example, if you want to start ANSYS Icepak and load a project that was previously created (such
as tut1), you can type
icepak tut1
at the system prompt, and the project file named tut1 will be loaded into ANSYS Icepak and displayed
in the graphics window. If the project you name is a new project, then an empty default cabinet will
appear in the graphics window. See Startup Options for Linux Systems (p. 18) for details on startup
command line options for Linux systems.
2.5.2. Starting ANSYS Icepak on a Windows System

For a Windows (Windows 7 or Windows 8) system, start ANSYS Icepak using the following procedure:
1. Click the Start button, select the Programs menu, select the ANSYS 2020 R1 menu, and then select
the 2020 R1 ANSYS Icepak program item. (Note that if the default "ANSYS 16" program group
name was changed when ANSYS Icepak was installed, you will find the ANSYS Icepak menu item in
the program group with the new name that was assigned, rather than in the ANSYS 16 program group.)
Starting ANSYS Icepak
2. After installation, there will be a desktop shortcut called Icepak-2020 R1 that you can double-click to
launch ANSYS Icepak.
Note:
There is a limitation for ANSYS Icepak with OpenGL on Windows 7 machines using the
NVIDIA graphic card. Use the following work-around:
1. Go to NVIDIA Control Panel.
2. Under 3D Settings (in left pane), select option Manage 3D Settings.
3. In the corresponding right pane, expand the Global Presets drop-down.
4. Select Dassault Systems CATIA - compatible option and Apply. (Recommended).
5. If option Dassault Systems CATIA - compatible option is not found, any other 3D setting
option that has the word "compatible", can be selected.
2.5.3. Startup Screen

When the application-startup procedure is completed, ANSYS Icepak displays the startup screen
(shown in Figure 2.2: The Startup Screen (p. 17)). This consists of two components: the Main window
and the Welcome to Icepak panel.
Figure 2.2: The Startup Screen
The Main Window

The Main window controls the execution of the ANSYS Icepak program and contains sub-windows
for navigating the project list tree (left), displaying messages (bottom left), editing general ANSYS
Getting Started
Icepak object parameters (bottom right), and displaying the model (center). You can resize any of
these sub-windows within the Main window by holding down your left mouse button on any of the
square boxes on the window borders and dragging your mouse in a direction allowed by the cursor.
The Main window is discussed in The Main Window (p. 56).
The Welcome to Icepak Panel

The Welcome to Icepak panel is a temporary window that closes once you choose one of three op-
tions:
• To create a new project, click New in the Welcome to Icepak panel, which will instruct ANSYS Icepak to
open the New project panel. In the New project panel, enter the name of the project in the Project field
and click Create, or you can click Cancel and select New project in the File menu.
Note:
Parentheses are not valid in an ANSYS Icepak project name.
• To open an existing project, click Existing in the Welcome to Icepak panel. In the Open project panel,
you can use your left mouse button to select a project from the Directory list and click Open. To open a
project that was recently edited, you can select the project name in the drop-down list to the right of
Recent projects in the Open project panel and then click Open.
• To expand a compressed (or packed) file, click Unpack in the Welcome to Icepak panel. In the File selec-
tion dialog box, you can use your left mouse button to select a .tzr file from the Directory list and click
Open.
Note:
Selecting Quit from the Welcome to Icepak panel will terminate your ANSYS Icepak
session.
For more details on how to create new projects or open existing projects see Creating, Opening, Re-
loading, and Deleting a Project File (p. 229). See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on se-
lecting a project using a file selection dialog box.
You can configure your graphical user interface for the current project you are running, or for all
ANSYS Icepak projects, using the Options node of the Preferences panel. See Configuring a Pro-
ject (p. 234) for details on changing the configuration parameters.
2.5.4. Startup Options for Linux Systems

Although ANSYS Icepak can be started by simply entering icepak at the system command prompt,
you can customize your ANSYS Icepak startup using command line arguments. The general form of
the ANSYS Icepak command line is:
icepak -option value [-option value ...] [projectname]
where option is the name of the option argument, and value is a value for a particular option.
Items enclosed in square brackets are optional. (Do not type the square brackets.) Not all option ar-
Starting ANSYS Icepak
guments allow values to be specified. Arguments can be entered in any order on the command line,
and are processed from left to right. Each command line argument is listed below, along with its
functional description.
• -x specifies the X Windows graphics driver. By default (that is, when you start ANSYS Icepak without the
-x option) ANSYS Icepak will use the native graphics driver for each specific workstation platform. The
native graphics driver typically takes advantage of the available graphics hardware, particularly for 3D
graphics operations. The -x option is useful, for example, if you are accessing a 3D graphics workstation
using an X terminal.
• -xfast enables a fast form of X Window graphics. This is accomplished by various shortcuts in the display
of graphical information. The resulting graphics display will not be as aesthetically pleasing as the -x
graphics, but it does result in faster performance when performing dynamic manipulation of the displayed
model. This mode of operation is particularly useful when using an X terminal that is connected via the
network to a workstation on which ANSYS Icepak is running.
• -unpack allows you to restore files that were packed using the Pack process to their original state.
You can compress project files into a single encoded file that is suitable for electronic file transfer to your
technical support engineer using the Pack option in the File menu. To restore or "unpack" files, type
icepak -unpack filename.tzr
where filename.tzr is the name of the compressed file. See Packing and Unpacking Model
Files (p. 156) for more details.
• projectname (if specified) must be the last argument in the command line argument list. It is the name
of the ANSYS Icepak project to be loaded on startup, and can be either a new project or an existing project.
Specifying a projectname bypasses the Welcome to Icepak panel.
2.5.5. Environment Variables on Linux Systems

You can use environment variables to tailor the operation of ANSYS Icepak to a particular environment.
There are two types of environment variables: system environment variables and ANSYS Icepak envir-
onment variables. System environment variables are used by ANSYS Icepak at the system level, and
are independent of the ANSYS Icepak application. ANSYS Icepak environment variables are specific
to the execution of ANSYS Icepak.
System Environment Variables

In most cases, the system environment variables shown in Table 2.2: System Environment Vari-
ables (p. 19) will already have been set for your system when you log onto your computer. These
environment variables must be set for your system before you can use ANSYS Icepak.
For more information on environment variables, refer to documentation concerning shell commands
for your computer system.
Table 2.2: System Environment Variables
Variable Description
HOME The path to your home directory where configuration files are
located. (Linux systems only)
TERM The terminal type (for example, xterm). (Linux systems only)
Getting Started
DISPLAY The location of the display screen. This is used by the X Window
system to determine which screen to display its output to (for
example, linux:0.0), and must be set for ANSYS Icepak to
operate. (Linux systems only)
PATH The list of directories to search for system-level commands.
You will need to include the ANSYS 20.1/bin directory in the path. For example, if ANSYS Icepak
2020 R1 has been installed under /usr/local, there will be a ANSYS directory present as
/usr/local/ANSYS.Inc. You would then need to set your PATH environment variable to include
/usr/local/ANSYS.Inc/bin.
ANSYS Icepak Environment Variables

ANSYS Icepak allows you to change certain aspects of its operation by setting ANSYS Icepak-specific
environment variables. There are two ANSYS Icepak-specific environment variables, which are described
in Table 2.3: ANSYS Icepak-Specific Environment Variables (p. 20).
Table 2.3: ANSYS Icepak-Specific Environment Variables
ICEPAK_LIB_PATH Allows you to specify the search path where ANSYS
Icepak loads the material library files or the files for
customized macros. See Editing the Library
Paths (p. 241) for details.
ICEPAK_LICENSE_FILE Allows you to specify an alternate location for the
ANSYS Icepak license file. See the ANSYS
Icepak installation instructions for details.
ICEPAK_JOB_DIRECTORY Allows you to specify a default location for unpacking
files. See Packing and Unpacking Model Files (p. 156)
for details.
2.6. Accessing the ANSYS Icepak Manuals

As described in The Help Menu (p. 85), ANSYS Icepak’s online help gives you access to ANSYS Icepak doc-
umentation. For printing, Adobe Acrobat PDF versions of the manuals are also provided on the ANSYS
customer site. See On-Line Help (p. 109) for information about accessing the manuals through the online
help.
2.7. Sample Session

In the following demonstration, you will use ANSYS Icepak to set up a problem, solve it, and postprocess
the results. This is a basic introduction to the features of ANSYS Icepak. Working through the examples
in the tutorial guide will provide a more complete demonstration of the program’s features.
2.7.1. Problem Description

The problem solved here is illustrated in Figure 2.3: Problem Description (p. 21). It involves a cabinet
containing an adiabatic block, a rack of printed circuit boards (PCBs), a fan, and a rectangular grille.
Sample Session
The cabinet is 0.2 m long, 0.2 m wide, and 0.1 m high. The block measures 0.08 m 0.06 m 0.1 m
and is used to create a void in the computational domain and so create a U-shaped enclosure. The
rack of PCBs contains four boards, spaced 1.25 cm apart, and each board dissipates 1 W from its “low"
side. The fan is a circular intake fan with a radius of 3.5 cm, a hub radius of 1 cm, and a fixed mass
flow rate of 0.001 kg/s.
Figure 2.3: Problem Description
2.7.2. Outline of Procedure

The problem shown in Figure 2.3: Problem Description (p. 21) is a simple problem in which the flow
is laminar, based on the Reynolds Number calculation.
The steps you will follow in this sample session are reduced to the following:
1. Create a new project.
2. Add the block, rack of PCBs, fan, and grille modeling objects to the cabinet.
3. Generate a summary of the model.
4. Create a mesh.
5. Calculate a solution.
6. Examine the results.
Getting Started
2.7.3. Step 1: Create a New Project

Start ANSYS Icepak as described in Starting ANSYS Icepak (p. 16). The Welcome to Icepak panel will
be displayed, as shown in Figure 2.4: The Welcome to Icepak Panel (p. 22). Click New to open the
New project panel (Figure 2.5: The New project Panel (p. 22)).
Figure 2.4: The Welcome to Icepak Panel
Figure 2.5: The New project Panel
Under Project name, enter the name of your ANSYS Icepak project (for example, sample). Click
Create to open the new job. ANSYS Icepak will create a default cabinet with the dimensions 1 m
1 m 1 m, and display the cabinet in the graphics window.
Sample Session
You can rotate the cabinet around a central point using the left mouse button, or you can translate
it to any point on the screen using the middle mouse button. You can zoom into and out from the
cabinet using the right mouse button. To restore the cabinet to its default orientation, select Home
position in the Orient menu.
2.7.4. Step 2: Build the Model
Resize the Default Cabinet
Model Cabinet
To resize the cabinet, ensure that the Cabinet item in the Model node of the Model manager window
is selected, and enter the coordinates shown in Table 2.4: Coordinates for the Cabinet (p. 23) into the
cabinet Edit window.
Table 2.4: Coordinates for the Cabinet
xS 0.0 xE 0.2
yS 0.0 yE 0.1
zS 0.0 zE 0.2
Click Apply to resize the cabinet. In the Orient menu, select Isometric view. This will display an iso-
metric view of the cabinet scaled to fit the graphics window.
Alternatively, you can resize the cabinet by double-clicking on the Cabinet item in the Model node
of the Model manager window to open the Cabinet panel (Figure 2.6: The Cabinet Panel (p. 23)),
selecting the Geometry tab, and entering the coordinates under Location.
Figure 2.6: The Cabinet Panel
Getting Started
Adding Objects to the Cabinet

You will now add objects to the cabinet. The process of adding an object involves three basic steps:
1. Creating a new object.
2. Specifying the coordinates of the object.
3. Specifying the thermal characteristics of the object.
Adding a Block
First, you will create an adiabatic block inside the cabinet.
Click the button to create a new block, and then click the button to open the Blocks panel.
ANSYS Icepak will create a prism block in the center of the cabinet. Click the Geometry tab in the
Blocks panel (Figure 2.7: The Blocks Panel (p. 25)), and enter the coordinates shown in Table 2.5: Co-
ordinates for the Block (p. 24). Click Update to resize the block.
Table 2.5: Coordinates for the Block
xS 0.06 xE 0.14
yS 0.0 yE 0.1
zS 0.0 zE 0.06
Sample Session
Figure 2.7: The Blocks Panel
A block is specified to be solid and adiabatic by default in ANSYS Icepak. To change the type and
thermal specification of the block, go to the Properties tab of the Blocks panel. For this problem,
select Hollow as the Block type and click Done to close the panel.
The steps listed above create an adiabatic hollow block with zero power on the cabinet wall. The effect
of this block is to create a U-shaped computational domain.
Adding a Rack of Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)

Next, you will add a rack of PCBs to your model. To construct a rack of PCBs, you must first create
and resize one PCB, then specify the number of similar PCBs in the rack and the spacing between
them.
Getting Started
Click the button to create a new PCB, and then click the button to open the Printed circuit
boards panel (Figure 2.8: The Printed circuit boards Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 27) and Figure 2.9: The
Printed circuit boards Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 28)).
Click the Geometry tab. In the Plane drop-down list, select X-Y to define the plane in which the PCB
lies. In the Location group box, enter the coordinates shown in Table 2.6: Coordinates for the
PCB (p. 26) for the PCB.
Table 2.6: Coordinates for the PCB
xS 0.06 xE 0.14
yS 0.015 yE 0.06
zS 0.125 zE —
Sample Session
Figure 2.8: The Printed circuit boards Panel (Geometry Tab)
Click the Properties tab. Enter 4 next to Number in rack. Specify a Rack spacing of 0.0125 m or
1.25 cm.
To specify the thermal characteristics of the rack, enter a Total power of 1 W under Thermal spe-
cification. Under Tracing layer parameters, enter 0.035, and select mm as the units for the High
surface thickness, Low surface thickness, and Internal layer thickness. Keep all other defaults in
the Printed circuit boards panel, and click Done to accept the changes and close the panel.
Getting Started
Figure 2.9: The Printed circuit boards Panel (Properties Tab)
Adding an Intake Fan

Now you will add a circular intake fan to your model.
Click the button to create a new fan, and then click the button to open the Fans panel
(Figure 2.10: The Fans Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 29) and Figure 2.11: The Fans Panel (Properties
Tab) (p. 30)).
Click the Geometry tab. In the Plane drop-down list, select Y-Z to define the plane in which the fan
lies. Enter the coordinates of the center of the fan, the radius of the fan, and the radius of the hub
of the fan as shown in Table 2.7: Coordinates for the Fan (p. 28).
Table 2.7: Coordinates for the Fan
xC 0.0 Radius 0.035
Sample Session
yC 0.045 Int radius 0.01

zC 0.13 — —
Figure 2.10: The Fans Panel (Geometry Tab)
Click the Properties tab. To specify an intake fan, keep the default selection of Intake in the Fan
type drop-down list. Under Direction, select Specified, and specify a vector (X, Y, Z) of (1, 0, 0).
Under Fan flow, select Fixed and Mass flow, and enter a mass flow rate of 0.001 kg/s. Click Done
in the Fans panel to accept the changes and close the panel. Note that when you click Done, ANSYS
Icepak displays a small arrow in the center of the fan in the graphics window to indicate whether it
is an exhaust fan (arrow pointing outward from the cabinet) or intake fan (arrow pointing into the
cabinet).
Getting Started
Figure 2.11: The Fans Panel (Properties Tab)
Adding a Rectangular Grille

Finally, you will add a rectangular grille to your model.
Click the button to create a new grille, and then click the button to open the Grille panel
(Figure 2.12: The Grille Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 31) and Figure 2.13: The Grille Panel (Properties
Tab) (p. 32)).
Click the Geometry tab. In the Plane drop-down list, select Y-Z to define the plane in which the grille
lies. Under Specify by, enter the coordinates shown in Table 2.8: Coordinates for the Grille (p. 30) for
the grille.
Table 2.8: Coordinates for the Grille
xS 0.2 xE —
Sample Session
yS 0.01 yE 0.04
zS 0.1 zE 0.18
Figure 2.12: The Grille Panel (Geometry Tab)
Click the Properties tab. Select Approach in the Velocity loss coefficient drop-down list. To specify
that the grille is an outlet vent, keep the default selection of Normal out under Flow direction. Click
Done to accept the changes and close the panel.
Getting Started
Figure 2.13: The Grille Panel (Properties Tab)
Note:
Although ANSYS Icepak allows the grille to be placed anywhere within the cabinet, the
only physically realistic positions for a vent are those along the walls of the cabinet.
The finished model should appear as shown in Figure 2.14: Cabinet with Block, Intake Fan, Rectangular
Grille, and Rack of PCBs (p. 33).
Sample Session
Figure 2.14: Cabinet with Block, Intake Fan, Rectangular Grille, and Rack of PCBs
Generating a Summary
Once you have completed your model, you can display a summary of the model by selecting Summary
(HTML) in the View menu.
View Summary (HTML)
The HTML version of the summary will be displayed in your web browser. ANSYS Icepak will automat-
ically launch your web browser, as shown in Figure 2.15: Summary of the Model (p. 34).
Getting Started
Figure 2.15: Summary of the Model
2.7.5. Step 3: Generate a Mesh

Once you are satisfied with your model, you can generate a mesh for it. First, you will create a default
mesh, then you will display the mesh, and finally you will refine the mesh.
Creating a Coarse Mesh

You will now generate a coarse mesh for your model. To create a mesh, select Generate mesh in the
Model menu.
Model Generate mesh
Sample Session
ANSYS Icepak will open the Mesh control panel, as shown in Figure 2.16: The Mesh control Pan-
el (p. 35). Alternatively, you can click the button to open the Mesh control panel.
Turn off the Max X size, Max Y size, and Max Z size options. In the Mesh parameters drop-down
list under the Global tab, select Coarse. Click Generate to generate a mesh using the coarse mesh
parameters to represent the geometry.
The Message window will display the results of the mesh generation procedure, including the number
of elements or “hexas" (hexahedral brick elements), and information regarding the quality of the
elements in the mesh. The number of mesh elements (elements = 3356) and the number of nodes
(nodes = 3907) in the mesh will also be displayed in the Mesh control panel.
Note:
The exact number of nodes and element numbers may vary slightly on different computers.
Figure 2.16: The Mesh control Panel
Getting Started
Displaying the Mesh

ANSYS Icepak offers several options for displaying the mesh, including views on surfaces, within the
entire cabinet volume, and through a plane intersecting the cabinet (a “plane-cut" view).
Viewing the Mesh Across All Surfaces

To view the mesh across all surfaces in the model, click the Display tab in the Mesh control panel.
Select the Surface option, keep the Wire option selected, select the All option in the Surface/ volume
options group box, and then select Display mesh. The mesh will be displayed on the surfaces of all
the objects in the model, as shown in Figure 2.17: Viewing the Surface Mesh (p. 36).
Figure 2.17: Viewing the Surface Mesh
Note:
You can change the color of the Surface mesh by clicking on the colored box next to the
Surface mesh color option and then choosing a color from the palette.
Viewing a Plane Cut Through the Mesh

To simplify the display of the mesh within the cabinet volume, it is often useful to create a plane-cut
view (that is, a zero-thickness slice through the mesh). Next, you will create a plane-cut view of the
mesh in the area surrounding the PCBs.
Sample Session
To restore the model to its default orientation, select Home position in the Orient menu. Turn off
the display of the mesh by deselecting Display mesh in the Mesh control panel. Deselect Surface
and select the Cut plane option instead. To specify a horizontal plane cut, select Horizontal - screen
select in the Set position drop-down list under Plane location. To create a cut plane, click a point
in the graphics window about 1/3 from the top of the front PCB using the left mouse button. To
display the mesh on the cut plane, select Display mesh in the Mesh control panel. To view the mesh,
select Orient positive Y in the Orient menu. To fit the whole model into the graphics window, select
Scale to fit in the Orient menu.
Figure 2.18: Viewing a Plane-Cut View of the Mesh (p. 37) shows the top (positive Y) view of the plane
cut through the mesh. Note that there is room for improvement in the quality of the mesh, particularly
around the PCB. In general:
• A "good" mesh should include a minimum of three nodes (four elements) in the channels between PCBs
in a rack.
• The aspect ratio of the largest to smallest elements should not exceed 10:1.
• Elements should be graded away from object surfaces (that is, there should be no large jumps in size for
elements near surfaces in the model).
Figure 2.18: Viewing a Plane-Cut View of the Mesh
Refining the Mesh

For this example, the default mesh shown in Figure 2.18: Viewing a Plane-Cut View of the Mesh (p. 37)
will not generate a solution with our desired level of accuracy. ANSYS Icepak provides tools to improve
the mesh. You will change the global specification of the maximum element size to refine the mesh
and improve the mesh quality.
Getting Started
To specify the maximum element size throughout the computational domain, click the Settings tab
in the Mesh control panel. Select the Max X size, Max Y size, and Max Z size options in the Mesh
control panel, and keep the default values for each of the entries. Under the Global tab, select Normal
in the Mesh parameters drop-down list.
Click Generate to create the refined mesh. The refined mesh (Figure 2.19: Viewing the Refined
Mesh (p. 38)) will be displayed in the graphics window automatically because Display mesh is still
selected in the Display section of the Mesh control panel.
Figure 2.19: Viewing the Refined Mesh
Max X size, Max Y size, and Max Z size specify a limit on the element size in the x, y, and z coordinate
directions, respectively. Specifying a global value for Init element height in the Options tab limits
the size of the first row of elements on all objects in the model. In most cases, you should specify
the initial height for each individual object. Specifying a global value can result in an excessively large
mesh, especially for complex models. Thus, it is recommended that you keep the Init element height
option deselected.
To turn off the mesh display, click the Display tab and deselect the Display mesh option. Then Close
the Mesh control panel.
2.7.6. Step 4: Physical and Numerical Settings

To review the default solution parameters, double-click the Basic settings item under the Solution
settings node of the Model manager window.
Sample Session
Solution settings Basic settings
Note:
The Basic settings panel can also be opened from the Menu toolbar as: Solve
Settings Basic
ANSYS Icepak will open the Basic settings panel, as shown in Figure 2.20: The Basic settings Pan-
el (p. 39).
Figure 2.20: The Basic settings Panel
Note:
By default, the Number of iterations is 100. Based on experience, 300 is a good

number of iterations for most problems.
Click the Reset button. ANSYS Icepak will calculate the Reynolds and Peclet numbers and display es-
timates of these numbers in the Message window. For this example, both the Reynolds and Peclet
numbers are about 2000 or less, so the problem is laminar. The flow is specified to be laminar by
default in ANSYS Icepak, so no change is needed. Click Accept to accept the solution parameters.
2.7.7. Step 5: Save the Model

ANSYS Icepak automatically saves the model for you before it starts the calculation, but it is a good
idea to save the model (including the mesh) yourself as well. If you exit ANSYS Icepak before you
start the calculation, you will be able to open the job you saved and continue your analysis in a future
ANSYS Icepak session. (If you start the calculation in the current ANSYS Icepak session, ANSYS Icepak
will simply overwrite your job file when it saves the model.) To save the project, select Save project
in the File menu.
Getting Started
File Save project
2.7.8. Step 6: Calculate a Solution

After the mesh has been generated and refined, ANSYS Icepak is ready to solve the model. You will
use the Solve panel (Figure 2.21: The Solve Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 40)) to start the solver. To
open the Solve panel, select Run solution in the Solve menu or click the icon in the toolbar.
Solve Run solution
Figure 2.21: The Solve Panel (General setup Tab)
The default Solution ID consists of the project name and a sequential two-digit suffix (starting value
= 00). To modify the Solution ID, you can type a new name in the Solution ID text entry box. In this
example, you will keep the default ID.
Click Start solution to start the solver. The solver will start the calculation, and ANSYS Icepak will
open the Solution residuals graphics display and control window, where it will display the convergence
history for the calculation.
The solution is converged to the default tolerances after a total of about 90 iterations. At this point,
your residual plot will look something like Figure 2.22: Residuals After Convergence (p. 41). Note that
Sample Session
the exact number of iterations required for convergence may vary on different computers. Also the
actual values of the residuals may differ slightly on different machines, so your plot may not look
exactly the same as Figure 2.22: Residuals After Convergence (p. 41).
Figure 2.22: Residuals After Convergence
Click Done to close the Solution residuals window.
2.7.9. Step 7: Examine the results

ANSYS Icepak provides a number of ways to view and examine the solution results, including:
Getting Started
• object-face views
• plane-cut views
• isosurface views
• point values of solution variables
• variation plots along specified lines in the cabinet
The following sections illustrate how to generate and display each view.
Object-Face Views
An object-face view allows you to examine the distribution of a solution variable on one or more
faces of an object in the model. To generate an object-face view, you must select the object and
specify both the variable to be displayed (such as temperature) and the attributes of the view (such
as shading type).
You will use the Object face panel (Figure 2.23: The Object face Panel (p. 42)) to create a solid-band
object-face view of temperature on the rack of PCBs. To open the Object face panel, select Object
face in the Post menu.
Post Object face
Figure 2.23: The Object face Panel
Sample Session
To specify the PCB as the object on which the results will be displayed, select pcb.1 in the Object
drop-down list, and click Accept.
To specify the variable to be displayed and the attributes of the view, turn on the Show Contours
option and click Parameters. This will open the Object face contours panel, shown in Figure 2.24: The
Object face contours Panel (p. 43).
Figure 2.24: The Object face contours Panel
The default Variable is Temperature, so no change is needed. Keep the default selections of Solid
fill under Contour options and Banded under Shading options. If you want to show contours on
the meshed region of the specified object, turn on the Mesh option. This option is used when an
object intersects with one or more objects and the mesh in the intersecting region might not neces-
sarily belong to it. By default, Icepak reports on the full mesh of the specified object. Enabling the
Mesh option allows you to draw contours on the meshed region of the specified object. In the Color
levels group box, select This object from the Calculated drop-down list. Click Done in the Object
face contours panel to close the panel. Click Create in the Object face panel to create and display
the object face by loading the data. The solid-band temperature contours on the rack of PCBs will
be displayed in the graphics window. Select Isometric view in the Orient menu to see an isometric
view of the contours.
In addition to the solid contour bands on the rack of PCBs, ANSYS Icepak displays a legend showing
a vertical color-band spectrum and the associated temperatures in the graphics window. The spectrum
includes the entire range of temperatures applicable to the solution.
Solid contour bands are usually easier to interpret than line contour bands; however, it is sometimes
preferable to generate a line-band plot (for example, when generating black-and-white image files).
To replace the solid bands with line bands on the rack of PCBs, click Parameters next to Show con-
tours in the Object face panel. Deselect the Solid fill option under Contour options and select Line.
Getting Started
Under Contour levels, enter 15 next to Number to specify the density of the lines. Click Done to
create the line contour plot shown in Figure 2.25: Contours of Temperature on the Rack of PCBs (p. 44).
Figure 2.25: Contours of Temperature on the Rack of PCBs
Note:
Before continuing, you should deactivate the line band contour plot so that it will not
obstruct your view of subsequent postprocessing objects. In the Object face panel, deselect
the Active option and click Done. If the Object face panel is not visible on your screen,
double-click the face.1 item under the Postprocessing node of the Model manager
window to bring the Object face panel to the foreground.
Plane-Cut Views
Plane-cut views enable you to observe the variation in a solution variable across the surface of a
plane.
Select Home position in the Orient menu to return the cabinet to its default orientation (front view).
You will use the Plane cut panel (Figure 2.26: The Plane cut Panel (p. 45)) to view the direction and
magnitude of velocity across a horizontal plane near the middle of the cabinet. To open the Plane
cut panel, select Plane cut in the Post menu.
Post Plane cut
Sample Session
Figure 2.26: The Plane cut Panel
To specify a horizontal plane cut, select Horizontal - screen select in the Set position drop-down
list under Plane location. To create a cut plane, click a point in the graphics window about 1/3 from
the top of the front PCB using the left mouse button. Turn on the Show vectors option and click
Done. Select Isometric view in the Orient menu to see an isometric view of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2.27: Velocity Vectors (Plane-Cut View) (p. 46).
Getting Started
Figure 2.27: Velocity Vectors (Plane-Cut View)
Note:
To deactivate the plane-cut view, right-click the cut.1 item under the Postprocessing
node of the Model manager window and deselect the Active option in the pull-down
menu.
Isosurface Views
Isosurface views display surfaces across which one of the primary or derived variables exhibits as a
single value or multiple values.
You will use the Isosurface panel (Figure 2.28: The Isosurface Panel (p. 47)) to view the surface across
which all points have a temperature of 28°C. To open the Isosurface panel, select Isosurface in the
Post menu.
Post Isosurface
Sample Session
Figure 2.28: The Isosurface Panel
Keep the default Variable of Temperature. Enter a value of 28 next to Value(s) to specify an
isosurface at 28°C. Turn on the Show mesh option, and change the color to black by clicking the
colored square and selecting black from the color palette. Click Done to create the isosurface, an
isometric view of which is shown in Figure 2.29: Isosurface of Temperature = 28 Degrees (p. 48).
Getting Started
Figure 2.29: Isosurface of Temperature = 28 Degrees
Note:
To deactivate the isosurface view, right-click the iso.1 item under the Postprocessing
node in the Model manager window and deselect the Active option in the drop-
down menu.
Point Views
Point views enable you to probe the computational domain to sample the values of one of the primary
or derived solution variables at any point.
You will use the Point panel (Figure 2.30: The Point Panel (p. 49)) to probe for temperature. To open
the Point panel, select Point in the Post menu.
Post Point
Sample Session
Figure 2.30: The Point Panel
Keep the default Variable of Temperature. In the Position drop-down list, enter 0.02 0.02 0.02
to create a starting point offset from the origin. Turn on the Leave trail option to enable tracing.
Keep the default Point size of 4. Click Done to create the point and close the panel.
Note:
There will not be any objects in the Position drop-down list in this model.
ANSYS Icepak draws the initial (blue) sample point at the x, y, and z coordinates specified (0.02, 0.02,
0.02) and displays the Value of the temperature at that point in the postprocessing Edit window, as
shown in Figure 2.31: The Postprocessing Edit Window for a Point View (p. 49).
Figure 2.31: The Postprocessing Edit Window for a Point View
You can sample the temperature at a different location in the domain by moving the point. Select
the point in the graphics window by holding down the Shift key on the keyboard and using the left
mouse button to select the point. Drag the point to the new location using the left mouse button.
As the point moves, it will leave behind a trace colored according to the temperature legend in the
graphics window. The postprocessing Edit window displays the value of the temperature at the current
Getting Started
location (Value), and the minimum (Global min) and maximum (Global max) values of temperature
in the computational domain.
Note:
To deactivate the point trace before moving on, right-click the point.1 item under the
Postprocessing node in the Model manager window, and deselect the Active option in
the drop-down menu.
Variation Plots
ANSYS Icepak variation plots enable you to view the variation of any one of the primary or derived
solution variables along a line through the computational domain.
Select Home position in the Orient menu to return the cabinet to its default orientation (front view).
You will use the Variation plot panel (Figure 2.32: The Variation plot Panel (p. 50)) to view temperature
along a horizontal line in the middle of the cabinet. To open the Variation plot panel, select Variation
plot in the Post menu.
Post Variation plot
Figure 2.32: The Variation plot Panel
Keep the default Variable of Temperature. To specify a variation plot line normal to the screen at a
point, click From screen and then click a point in the graphics window in the middle of the front
PCB using the left mouse button. Click Create in the Variation plot panel to create a variation plot,
as shown in Figure 2.33: Variation of Temperature Plot (p. 51).
Sample Session
Figure 2.33: Variation of Temperature Plot
ANSYS Icepak draws the variation plot in a separate window (called the Variation of Temperature
graphics display and control window in this example), and displays the line on which the variation
plot is calculated in the graphics window. You can use the mouse to rotate the cabinet and view the
variation plot line from various angles. Click Done to close the Variation of Temperature window
and remove the variation plot line from the graphics window.
Saving Postprocessing Objects

You can save the objects (for example, plane-cut views, isosurfaces) generated during the postpro-
cessing session to a file, so that you can reuse them the next time you view the model in ANSYS
Icepak. Select Save post objects to file in the Post menu.
Post Save post objects to file
Click Save in the resulting File selection dialog box to save the file with the default name post_ob-
jects.
Note:
Saving postprocessing objects often requires a large amount of disk space.
Getting Started
Generating Reports
ANSYS Icepak allows you to generate, view, and print reports detailing the results of the simulation.
Reports regarding primary and derived solution variables such as temperature, flow rate, heat flux,
and heat transfer coefficient can be generated either for individual objects or for collections of objects.
You will use the Define full report panel (Figure 2.34: The Define full report Panel (p. 52)) to generate
an on-screen report of mass flow rate for the fan. To open the Define full report panel, select Full
report in the Report menu.
Report Full report
Figure 2.34: The Define full report Panel
To specify mass flow rate as the variable to be reported, select Mass flow in the Variable drop-down
list. Select the Selected objects option under Report region and select fan.1 in the adjacent drop-
down list, and click Accept to specify the fan as the object on which the results will be reported. Click
the Select sides option from the drop-down list to create a report for the whole fan. Keep the Write
to window option turned on to display the report in a window, and deselect the Write to file option.
Click Write to generate the report. ANSYS Icepak displays the report in a separate window (called the
Full report for Mass flow window in this example), as shown in Figure 2.35: The Full report for Mass
flow Window (p. 53). ANSYS Icepak displays the surface area of the fan, and the average, maximum,
and minimum values for the mass flow rate. Click Done to close the Full report for Mass flow window.
Sample Session
Figure 2.35: The Full report for Mass flow Window
Exiting From ANSYS Icepak

When you are finished examining the results, you can end the ANSYS Icepak session by clicking Quit
in the File menu.
File Quit
2.7.10. Step 8: Summary

This example has been designed to show you how to use ANSYS Icepak to solve a very simple problem.
Example problems of increasing difficulty are solved in the ANSYS Icepak Tutorial Guide, where the
different modeling objects, physical models, and solution parameters that are available in ANSYS
Icepak are illustrated in greater detail.
Chapter 3: User Interface
The user interface for ANSYS Icepak consists of a graphical interface with windows, menus, toolbars,
and panels. An overview of the graphical interface, including information about the toolbars, menus,
and panels is presented in this chapter. Details on using the mouse and keyboard and accessing the
online help are also included.
• The Graphical User Interface (p. 55)
• Using the Mouse (p. 110)
• Using the Keyboard (p. 134)
• Quitting ANSYS Icepak (p. 135)
3.1. The Graphical User Interface

ANSYS Icepak’s graphical user interface (GUI) consists of several major components: the menu bar,
toolbars, control panels, the Model manager window, the Message window, and the graphics windows.
When you use the graphical interface, you will be interacting with one of these components at all times
within a single ANSYS Icepak application window.
You interact with ANSYS Icepak through the graphical interface by means of the mouse and the keyboard.
To perform most operations in ANSYS Icepak, you simply position the cursor of the mouse on the object
or item you want to act upon, and click the left mouse button.
You perform most tasks (such as file saving, object creation, object editing, and so on) using either the
menu bar, the toolbars, or the Model manager window. Your work is displayed in the graphics window
where you can use the mouse to view various aspects of your model.
Information about the components of the graphical interface is presented in the following sections:
• The Main Window (p. 56)
• The ANSYS Icepak Menus (p. 56)
• The ANSYS Icepak Toolbars (p. 86)
• The Model manager Window (p. 92)
• Graphics Windows (p. 94)
• The Message Window (p. 97)
• The Edit Window (p. 97)
• File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98)
• Control Panels (p. 103)
User Interface
• Accessing Online Help (p. 109)
3.1.1. The Main Window

When you start ANSYS Icepak, the Main window (center) is displayed on the screen (Figure 3.1: The
Main Window (p. 56)). The Main window controls the execution of the ANSYS Icepak program and
has six primary components: the Main Menu bar (top), the Model Display window or graphics window
(right), the Model manager window (left), the Message window (lower left), the Edit window (lower
right), and several toolbars.
Figure 3.1: The Main Window
Resizing ANSYS Icepak Windows

You can customize the appearance of the Main window by resizing any of the four major ANSYS
Icepak windows: the Model manager window; the Message window; the Edit window; and the
Model Display graphics window.
To resize an ANSYS Icepak window, click and hold down the left mouse button on the separator and
drag the separator to the desired location. The slider bars for each ANSYS Icepak window are located
either to the lower right and/or the lower left of each window.
3.1.2. The ANSYS Icepak Menus

The Main Menu bar (Figure 3.2: The Main Menu Bar (p. 57)) contains eleven menus that are located
along the top of the Main window. These menus (File, Edit, View, Orient, Macros, Model, Solve,
Post, Report, Windows, and Help) are accessible at all times and enable you to access top-level
The Graphical User Interface
ANSYS Icepak functionality. When you select one of these menus in the Main Menu bar, a set of
menu-specific options will be displayed. Some menu-specific options also have sub-options that you
can choose from. In addition, note that each menu in the Main Menu bar has a keyboard shortcut
so that the menu and its options can be accessed using the keyboard. For more information on using
the keyboard in ANSYS Icepak, see Using the Keyboard (p. 134).
Figure 3.2: The Main Menu Bar
The File Menu

The File menu (Figure 3.3: The File Menu (p. 57)) contains options for working with ANSYS Icepak pro-
jects and project files. From this menu, you can open, merge, and save ANSYS Icepak projects. In ad-
dition, you can import, export, compress, and decompress files relating to your ANSYS Icepak model.
There are also utilities designed to save or print your model geometries. A brief description of the
File menu options is provided below. See Reading, Writing, and Managing Files (p. 143) for more in-
formation about reading, writing, and managing ANSYS Icepak project files. Note that if you are running
ANSYS Icepak from within ANSYS Workbench, the File options are different than what is presented
in this section. See The ANSYS File Menu (p. 137) for more information on the File menu options when
running ANSYS Icepak from Workbench.
Figure 3.3: The File Menu
User Interface
New project enables you to create a new ANSYS Icepak project using the New project panel. Here,
you can browse through your directory structure, create a new project directory, and enter a project
name.
Note:
This option is not available when running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench. See The ANSYS File
Menu (p. 137) for more information.
Open project enables you to open existing ANSYS Icepak projects using the Open project panel.
Here, you can browse through your directory structure, locate a project directory, and either enter a
project name, or specify an old project name from a list of recent projects. Additionally, you can
specify a version name or number for the project.
Note:
Merge project enables you to merge an existing project into your current project using the Merge
project panel.
Reload main version enables you to re-open the original version of the ANSYS Icepak project when
your project has multiple versions. See Defining a Project (p. 223) for more information.
Save project saves the current ANSYS Icepak project.
Save project as enables you to save the current ANSYS Icepak project under a different name using
the Save project panel.
Note:
This option is not available when running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench. See The ANSYS
File Menu (p. 137) for more information.
Import provides options to import tetin file geometries into ANSYS Icepak. You also can import
powermap and IDF files, as well as comma separated values or spreadsheet format (CSV) using this
option. See Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159) for more information about importing files.
Export enables you to export your work as IDF 2.0 or 3.0 library files, comma separated values or
spreadsheet format (CSV). See Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159) for more information about
exporting files.
EM Mapping enables you to perform a one-way mapping of volumetric and/or surface loss information
from HFSS, Q3D, or Maxwell to Icepak for steady-state or transient solutions. For steady state solutions,
you must select a Solution ID and a Frequency. For transient solutions, you must select a Solution ID
and Start and End time steps. See Ansoft to Icepak Coupling in Workbench for more information on
the Icepak to HFSS workflow.
Unpack project opens a File selection dialog box that enables you to browse for and decompress
.tzr files.
Note:
Pack project opens a File selection dialog box that enables you to compact your project into a
compressed .tzr file.
Cleanup enables you to clean up your project by removing or compressing data relating to ECAD,
mesh, post-processing, screen captures, summary output, reports, and scratch files using the Clean
up project data panel.
Print screen enables you to print a PostScript image of the ANSYS Icepak model that is displayed in
the graphics window using the Print options panel. The inputs for the Print options panel are
similar to those in the Graphics file options panel. See Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details.
Create image file opens a Save image dialog box that enables you to save your model displayed
in the graphics window to an image file. Supported file types include: PNG, GIF (8 bit color), JPEG,
PPM, TIFF, VRML, and PS. PNG is the default file type.
Shell window opens a separate window running an operating system shell. The window is initially
in the subdirectory of the ANSYS Icepak projects directory that contains all the files for the current
projects. In this window you can issue commands to the operating system without exiting ANSYS
Icepak. Type exit in the window to close the window when you are finished using it. Note that on
Windows machines, this menu item appears as Command prompt.
Quit exits the ANSYS Icepak application. See Quitting ANSYS Icepak (p. 135) for details.
Note:
The Edit Menu

The Edit menu (Figure 3.4: The Edit Menu (p. 60)) contains options for editing your ANSYS Icepak model.
A description of the Edit menu options is provided below. See Building a Model (p. 273) for more in-
formation about editing objects in your ANSYS Icepak model.
User Interface
Figure 3.4: The Edit Menu
Undo enables you to undo the last model operation you performed. Undo can be used repeatedly
to take you back to the first operation performed.
Redo enables you to redo one or more previously undone operations. This option applies only to
operations undone by selecting the Undo option.
Find opens the Find in tree panel (Figure 3.5: The Find in tree Panel (p. 60)) that enables you to
search the Model manager window hierarchy for a specific object.
Figure 3.5: The Find in tree Panel
To locate a specifically named object, type the object name in the Find object name text field. Click
the Next button to find the next occurrence of the name in the tree hierarchy. Each time an object
name is found, its name is highlighted in the tree hierarchy. Click the Prev button to find the previously
found object name.
You can type an object name that contains an asterisk or a question mark in place of characters or
a character, respectively. For example, typing fan* will search the tree for all objects whose names
start with fan; typing vent? will search the tree for all objects whose names consist of the word
vent plus one character. Any object in the model whose name matches this text pattern will be
highlighted when you click Next or Prev buttons in the Find in tree panel.
Note:
Find in tree is not able to find objects with names containing the following characters:
[]{}/\
Show clipboard enables you to show objects or materials that you have placed in the clipboard.
Clear clipboard enables you to remove object or materials placed in the clipboard.
Snap to grid opens the Snap to grid panel that enables you to snap a selected object in the
graphics window to the grid. See Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details.
Preferences opens the Preferences panel, where you can configure the graphical user interface. See
Configuring a Project (p. 234) for more information about setting preferences.
Annotations enables you to add annotations (for example, labels and arrows) to the graphics window
using the Annotations panel. See Adding Annotations to the Graphics Window (p. 95) for more in-
formation about annotations.
The View Menu

The View menu (Figure 3.6: The View Menu (p. 61)) contains options that control the appearance of
the graphics window. A description of the View menu options is provided below.
Figure 3.6: The View Menu
Summary (HTML) enables you to display an HTML version of the summary of your model. To display
the summary, select Summary (HTML) in the View menu. ANSYS Icepak will automatically launch
your web browser, as shown in Figure 2.15: Summary of the Model (p. 34).
Location enables you to display the coordinates of a point in your model. To find the coordinates of
a point, select Location in the View menu. Select the point in the graphics window using the left
mouse button. ANSYS Icepak will display the coordinates of the point you select in the graphics
window and in the Message window. To exit from the Location mode, right-click in the graphics
window.
Distance enables you to calculate the distance between two points in your ANSYS Icepak model. To
find the distance between two points, select Distance in the View menu. Select the first point in the
graphics window using the left mouse button. ANSYS Icepak will display the coordinates of the point
you select in the graphics window and in the Message window. Then select the second point in the
graphics window, also using the left mouse button. ANSYS Icepak will display the coordinates of the
second point in the graphics window and in the Message window, calculate the distance between
User Interface
the two points, and display the distance in the Message window. To exit from the Distance mode,
click with the right mouse button in the graphics window.
Angle enables you to calculate the angle created between two vectors in your ANSYS Icepak model.
To find the angle between two vectors, select Angle in the View menu. Select a vertex point in the
graphics window using the left mouse button. Then select the end point of the first vector, also using
the left mouse button. Then select the end point of the second vector, also using the left mouse
button. ANSYS Icepak will display the angle created by the two vectors in the Message window.
Bounding box enables you to determine the minimum and maximum coordinates for your model’s
bounding box. To find the minimum and maximum coordinates for the model’s bounding box, select
Bounding box in the View menu. ANSYS Icepak will display the minimum and maximum x, y, and z
coordinates for the model enclosure in the Message window.
Traces enable you to select a trace or net and view its information. To display the trace or net, select
Traces in the View menu and click Net info or Trace info. Using the left mouse button, select the
trace or net. When Trace info is selected, the trace ID is displayed, along with the associated net
name, layer name, and if it is a via, the via name is also displayed. Click the middle mouse or right
mouse button to exit.
Markers enables you to add or remove markers from the graphics window of your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Add enables you to add a marker to the graphics window of your ANSYS Icepak model. To add a marker,
select Markers then select Add in the View menu. This will open the Add marker panel (Figure 3.7: The
Add marker Panel (p. 62)).
Figure 3.7: The Add marker Panel
To specify the position of the marker, you can enter the coordinates of the point (separated by
spaces) next to Position or you can click Select and then click a location in the graphics window
to select the point. To specify the text for the marker, enter the text in the Text box. Click Accept
to add the marker to the graphics window.
• Clear enables you to remove all of the markers from the graphics window.
Rubber bands enables you to add and remove rubber-banding rulers between two objects in the
graphics window.
• Add enables you to add a rubber-banding ruler between two points on two objects in the graphics window.
To add a rubber band, select Add in the View menu. Select the point on the first object in the graphics
window using the left mouse button. Then select the point on the second object in the graphics window,
also using the left mouse button. ANSYS Icepak will calculate the overall distance between the two points,
and the distances in the x, y, and z coordinate directions. It will display this information in the graphics
window next to an arrow drawn between the objects. If you move one of the objects, ANSYS Icepak will
update the display of the distances between the two objects.
• Clear removes all of the rubber bands from the graphics window.
Edit toolbars enables you to customize the appearance of ANSYS Icepak by displaying or hiding any
of the ANSYS Icepak toolbars using the Available toolbars panel (Figure 3.8: The Available toolbars
Panel (p. 63)).
Figure 3.8: The Available toolbars Panel
By default, all toolbars are visible. To hide toolbars, deselect the appropriate toolbar option and click
Accept. Click Reset to display all previously hidden toolbars.
Default shading contains options that control the rendering of your ANSYS Icepak model. Options
include:
• Wire outlines the model’s outer edges and those of its components.
• Solid adds solid-tone shading to the visible surfaces of the model’s internal components to give them a
solid appearance.
• Solid/wire adds solid-tone shading to the visible surfaces of the object currently selected in the object
Edit window to give it a solid appearance. Also, an outline of the surfaces will be displayed in either white
or black depending on the background color.
• Hidden line activates the hidden line removal algorithm, which makes objects that are drawn to look
transparent now appear to be solid.
• Selected solid adds solid-tone shading to only the currently selected object.
Display contains options that enable you to customize the appearance of the graphics window. Options
include:
• Object names displays object names next to objects in the graphics window. Options include:
– Current assembly displays the names of the objects in the currently selected assembly.
– None does not display any object names. This option is selected by default.
– Selected displays the names of the currently selected objects.
User Interface
• Coord axes displays the coordinate axes reference in the lower left hand corner of the graphics window.
This option is selected by default.
• Visible grid displays the grid in the graphics window when the model is displayed in the X, Y, or Z orient-
ation only. The grid parameters must first be set in the Interaction section of the Preferences panel. See
Interactive Editing (p. 244) for more information about the interactive editing.
Note:
In the Preferences panel Interaction options, you must select the X grid, Y grid, and
Z grid check boxes under Snap attributes to view the grid. Enter a value in the corres-
ponding text field to define the grid coarseness.
• Origin marker displays the origin of the graphics window. This option is selected by default.
• Rulers displays ruled coordinate axes from the origin of the graphics window.
• Project title displays the project name and the ANSYS Icepak version number in the graphics window.
You can move the project title after it is displayed by holding down the Control key, clicking on the
project title with the middle mouse button, and dragging it to a new location.
• Logo displays the ANSYS Icepak logo in the graphics display window. This option is selected by default.
• Current date displays the current date in the graphics window. You can move the current date after it is
displayed by holding down the Ctrl key, clicking on the current date with the middle mouse button, and
dragging it to a new location.
• Construction lines displays construction lines from STEP models.
• Construction points displays construction points from STEP models.
• Mesh displays a mesh that has been loaded into a model.
• Mouse position displays the position of the mouse in the lower left hand portion of the graphics window.
• Depthcue adds a visual element of depth to enhance the model’s 3D appearance. This effect is achieved
by intensifying foreground lines and softening background lines. This option does not affect the X Window
graphics driver.
• Tcl console opens a separate window running a Tcl operating system shell. In this window, advanced
users can issue commands to the operating system without exiting ANSYS Icepak. Type exit in the
window to close the window when you are finished using it.
Visible enables you to choose which objects of your ANSYS Icepak model that you want displayed
in the graphics window. You can toggle the visibility of the following items:
• Cabinet
• Assemblies
• Networks
• Heat exchangers
• Openings
• Periodic boundaries
• Grille
• Sources
• Printed circuit boards
• Enclosures
• Plates
• Walls
• Blocks
• Fans
• Blowers
• Resistances
• Heat sinks
• Packages
To make any of these items become visible (or invisible) in the display, select (or deselect) the desired
sub-option. Hidden objects appear in the Model manager window as grayed-out items under the
Inactive node but are not visible in the graphics window. This enables you to view and edit portions
of your model while hiding the rest from view.
Lights enables you to set the lighting parameters for viewing your ANSYS Icepak model. To change
the lighting parameters, select Lights in the View menu. This will open the Lighting options panel
(Figure 3.9: The Lighting options Panel (p. 66)).
User Interface
Figure 3.9: The Lighting options Panel
Under Advanced lighting, you can choose Simple lighting (the default) or Complex lighting. In
both cases, the lighting direction is fixed relative to your view of the model. If Complex lighting is
selected, you will have control over the Intensity and Color of the Ambient light, and the Intensity,
Color, and direction of origin (X, Y, Z) of up to four additional lights. The Intensity can range from
0 to 1; the Color can be specified as described in Editing the Graphical Styles (p. 243). You can enable
or disable a particular light by toggling the check box next to its name.
For Complex lighting, you can also specify how the object surface materials will respond to being
lit. Under Materials, you can use the slider bars or directly specify values for the following parameters:
• Diffuse reflectance is the ratio of the incident luminous flux reradiated in the visual spectrum by diffuse
reflection. Diffuse reflectance plays the most important role in determining what you perceive the color
of an object to be. It is affected by the color of the incident diffuse light and the angle of the incident light
relative to the normal direction, with the highest intensity where the incident light falls perpendicular to
the surface. The diffuse reflectance is not affected by the position of your viewpoint. Values may range
from 0 to 1.
• Ambient reflectance is the ratio of the incident luminous flux reradiated in the visual spectrum by ambient
reflection. Ambient reflectance is most noticeable where an object receives no direct illumination. An
object’s total ambient reflectance is affected by the global ambient light and ambient light from individual
light sources. Like diffuse reflectance, ambient reflectance is not affected by the position of your viewpoint.
Values may range from 0 to 1.
• Shininess controls the size and brightness of the highlight. Values may range from 0 to 128. The higher
the value, the smaller and brighter (more focused) the highlight.
• Specular reflectance is the ratio of the incident luminous flux reradiated in the visual spectrum by
specular reflection. Specular reflection from an object produces highlights. Unlike diffuse and ambient
reflection, the amount of specular reflection that you see does depend on the location of your viewpoint,
and it is brightest along the direct angle of reflection. Values may range from 0 to 1.
• To restore the default values for complex lighting, click Restore complex defaults.
The Orient Menu

The Orient menu (Figure 3.10: The Orient menu (p. 67)) contains options that enable you to modify
the direction from which you view your model in the graphics window. Besides selecting the view
along the x, y, and z axis, you can zoom your model, scale it to fit exactly within the graphics window,
or restore it to the default view along the negative axis. A description of the Orient menu options is
provided below.
Figure 3.10: The Orient menu
Home position selects the default view of your model directed along the negative z axis.
Isometric views the model from the direction of the vector equidistant to all three axes.
Orient positive X, Y, Z views the model toward the direction of the positive x, y, or z axis.
Orient negative X, Y, Z views the model toward the direction of the negative x, y, or z axis.
Zoom in enables you to focus on any part of your model by opening and resizing a window around
the desired area. After selecting this option, position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area to
be zoomed, hold down the left mouse button and drag open a selection box to the desired size, and
then release the mouse button. The selected area will then fill the graphics window.
User Interface
Scale to fit adjusts the overall size of your model to take maximum advantage of the graphics window’s
width and height.
Reverse orientation views the model along the current view vector but from the opposite direction
(that is, rotated 180°).
Nearest axis orients the view to the nearest axis normal to the plane.
Save user view opens the Save user view panel (Figure 3.11: The Save user view panel (p. 68)) that
prompts you for a view name and then saves the current view using your specified name. The new
view name is attached to a listing of user views at the bottom of the Orient menu.
Figure 3.11: The Save user view panel
Clear user views removes the listing of user views from the bottom of the Orient menu.
Write user views to file saves the user views to a file.
Read user views from file loads the saved views from a file and lists them at the bottom of the
Orient menu.
The Model Menu

The Model menu (Figure 3.12: The Model Menu (p. 69)) contains options that enable you to generate
a mesh, load non-native files, edit CAD data, create objects and perform other model-related functions.
A description of the Model menu options is provided below.
Figure 3.12: The Model Menu
Create object enables you to add an ANSYS Icepak object (for example, block, fan, and so on) to
Radiation form factors opens the Form factors panel where you can model the radiation for specific
objects in your ANSYS Icepak model. See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for more information about ra-
diation models in ANSYS Icepak.
Generate mesh opens the Mesh control panel where you can provide settings to create a mesh for
your ANSYS Icepak model. See Generating a Mesh (p. 773) for more information about meshes.
Edit priorities opens the Object priorities panel that enables you to prioritize the objects in your
model. ANSYS Icepak provides priorities based on object creation and uses the priorities when
meshing the model. See Controlling the Meshing Order for Objects (p. 808) for details.
Edit cutouts When openings, fans or grilles are placed inside, adjacent to a block, or partially over-
lapping a solid, a fluid hole or cutout is automatically generated in the block to enable flow to go
through the openings, fans or grilles. You can use the Edit grid cutouts panel to visualize the cutouts
if you place, for example, a free opening adjacent to a block. In certain scenarios where the internal
passage through a block is already defined via a separate fluid block (for example, a fluid CAD block),
you can selectively disable the automatic cutout creation by setting Allow cutout to 0 for each cor-
responding entry in the Edit grid cutouts panel. You can also disable all cutouts by unchecking the
Enable grid cutouts in the Edit grid cutouts panel. By default, overlap cutouts are not considered.
If you want to include them, select Enable overlaps in the Edit grid cutouts panel.
Note:
You should not disable cutouts unless you are defining the shape of the cutout using
another fluid object.
Create material library enables you to save a materials library for use with your ANSYS Icepak model.
See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
User Interface
Power and temperature limits opens the Power and temperature limit setup panel where you
can review or change the power of objects and specify the temperature limits. See Power and Tem-
perature Limit Setup (p. 769) for more information about power and temperature limit setup.
Check model performs a check to test the model for problems in the design. See Design Checks (p. 370)
for details.
Show objects by material displays objects by selected material.
• Material displays summary of materials used by active objects in a current Icepak session. When a
material is selected in the left pane of the Show objects by material panel, the right pane displays
active objects using that material. In addition, the objects corresponding to the selected material are
highlighted, by shading them, in the graphics display window.
Note:
The actual material used by a PCB object is a temporary material not displayed in
the list of materials used.
Multiple material selection is not available.
Initially the right pane is empty and the tree in the left pane is populated with
materials used by all active objects in session. The numbers against each material
type subtree indicate their number available in session. Expand the subtree(s) to
view all used materials. Select a material to display all active objects using the ma-
terial. The selection causes the list in right pane of the Show objects by material
panel to refresh and list names of all active objects in session using the selected
material. The Refresh button will automatically incorporate any changes done to
session of active objects and material - addition/deletion and renaming, by re-
populating the tree.
Figure 3.13: Show objects by material Panel- Initial
Figure 3.14: Show objects by material Panel- Select material
Click Close in the Show objects by material panel to close the panel.
Show objects by property displays objects by selected property type.
User Interface
Figure 3.15: Show objects by property Panel
• Property - Select the property you want to display.
– Select Power to display the power color gradient for the objects in your model. Constant and temper-
ature-dependent (linear and piecewise linear) power sources are taken into account.
– Select Heat flux to display the heat flux color gradient for the sources and wall and plate objects in
your model.
To change the range of values displayed, click Min value and/or Max value and enter a value.
Objects with property values outside the defined range are not included the color gradient. If Min
value and/or Max value are deselected, ANSYS Icepak does not use these values and displays the
full range of the selected property values. Click Reset limits to reset the Min value and Max Value
to the minimum and maximum property values as defined by the active objects in the model. Click
Display to display the color gradient and a legend showing the color spectrum and its associated
property values. To reposition the legend, hold down the Ctrl key, press and hold down the
middle mouse button, and drag the legend to any location in the graphics window. To display
different levels of the legend or change its orientation, see Using the Context Menus in the
Graphics Display Window (p. 121).
Note:
To display values for pre-solve property value-shaded objects, you can use the Surface
probe ( ). When selecting a point, click close to an object's edge or vertex.
Show object by type displays objects by object type
Figure 3.16: Show objects by type Panel
• Object type - Select the object type from the Object type drop-down list and click Display to
highlight a specific object or objects in the model. To display object(s) in the Model manager window,
select the object type from the Object type drop-down list and click Select. The Sub type drop-
down list enables you to display object types with different geometry options such as solid, hollow,
fluid, and network. Select the Sub type drop-down list and/or enable the options With traces, With
Joule heating and With CAD to further specify the object or objects to be displayed. Click Close to
return the graphics display window back to its original view and to close the Show object by type
panel.
• In the Show metal fractions panel, select the trace to view using the Object with traces drop-down list.
Then select the Trace layer and Component using the respective drop-down lists. The Number of rows
and Number of columns are displayed and can be updated. Metal fractions will need to be recomputed
to display changes in the number of rows or columns or the active state of the vias. Click Display to display
the traces. Select Yes to recompute in the pop-up dialog box. The Display button will change to Interrupt,
enabling you to cancel the metal-fraction calculation.
Figure 3.17: Show metal fractions
The Macros Menu

The Macros menu (Figure 3.18: The Macros Menu (p. 74)) contains additional Icepak capabilities that
help automate routine tasks such as Geometry creation, Modeling (solver and physics), Post Processing,
and Productivity (validation, meshing, etc.). See Using Macros (p. 723) for more information about
ANSYS Icepak macros. A description of the Macros menu options is provided below.
User Interface
Figure 3.18: The Macros Menu
Geometry
Geometry macros are useful for approximating, simplifying, and creating new objects.
• Approximation enables you to create analogues of certain geometries and objects. Options include:
– 1/4 Cylinder-Polygonal enables you to approximate one or more quadrants of a cylinder using
polygonal block, source, or resistance objects.
– Circular-Polygonal enables you to approximate a circular fan, vent, opening, wall, plate, or source
using a polygonal object.
– Cylinder-Plates enables you to approximate a cylinder using a ring of rectangular thin conducting
plate objects.
– Cylinder-Polygonal enables you to approximate a cylinder using a polygonal block, source, or

resistance object.
– Hemisphere enables you to approximate a hemisphere using a stack of cylinders with a non-uniform
radius.
– Polygonal Enclosure enables you to approximate a polygonal enclosure using a ring of wall and
polygonal block objects.
– Thin Adiabatic Enclosure enables you to create an enclosure using adiabatic thin plates.
• Data Center Components contains macros for creating models commonly found in data centers.
– CRAC enables you to create hollow block and fan objects to represent a Computer Room Air Conditioning
unit.
– PDU enables you to create a fluid block, partitions, and vent objects to represent a Power Distribution
Unit.
– The Rack macros enable you to create a hollow block and recirculation openings to represent a Rack.
→ Rack (Front to Top) should be chosen when flow enters from the front face and leaves from the top
face of the Rack.
→ Rack (Front to Rear) should be chosen when flow enters from one face and leaves from the other
face in the same direction.
– Tile enables you to create resistance and opening objects to represent a Tile.
• Heat sink contains available ANSYS Icepak heat sink macros. Options include:
– Align Heatsink enables you to align a heat sink with a block.
– Angled Fin Heatsink enables you to create a heat sink with angled fins. The angle of inclination of the
fins relative to the base can be specified.
– Arc fin creates a heatsink with arc-shaped fins.
– Circular Based Pin Fin - Generalized Pin creates a cylindrical heat sink that has cylindrical fins that
are placed in a radial pattern across the hub.
– Detailed Heatsink enables you to create detailed finned heat sinks or heat sinks with pins. Each pin is
modeled as a block object. This allows maximum flexibility in specifying material properties and activ-
ating and deactivating individual pins.
– Folded Fin creates a heat sink that uses folded fins based on the number of top folds and their width.
– Lance + Offset creates a lance+offset heat sink using plates.
– Lance + Offset - Blocks creates a lance+offset heat sink using blocks.
– Radial - Cylindrical Hub creates a cylindrical heat sink that has fins modeled from thick or thin plates,
or polygonal blocks, that are placed in a radial pattern along the hub.
– Radial - Cylindrical Hub Triangular Fns creates a cylindrical heat sink that has triangular fins that are
placed in a radial pattern along the hub.
– Skived creates a skived heat sink out of up to four thin conducting plates per fin.
• Other
– ATX/Micro-ATX Chassis enables you to create the ATX and Micro-ATX chassis. The following three
power supply types are available: ATX, PS3 and SFX. Also, the following three flow arrangements
are possible: air guide with left-side vent, duct with pressurizing rear-fan and no air-guide, or duct
with rear-fan exhausts. There is an option to use either active or passive heat sinks. Additionally,
the number of CD/DVDs in the chassis can be specified.
– Export Geometry to ANSYS SpaceClaim allows you to export the Icepak model geometry to a
collection of .obj files. These files can be used to import the geometry in ANSYS SpaceClaim.
– Network Heatpipe - Straight allows you to specify a network heat pipe’s geometry and its thermal
properties.
– Network heat exchanger allows for the templated creation of a flow-through or looped heat
exchanger.
– Polygon Vertex Cleaner allows you to delete excessive vertices on polygonal objects. This operation
can significantly reduce the mesh count on polygonal objects with many vertices.
• Packages contains options for creating a variety of packages, including: BGA, Bonding Wires, Cavity-
Down BGA, DUAL, Flipchip-BGA, FPBGA, LCC, Plastic Encapsulated SOT, QFP, and SDGBA. These
packages will be created using multiple primitive objects.
• Packages - Network Models contains options related to the creation of DELPHI networks to represent
BGA and QFP type packages, as well as generalized networks using templates. The macros create
network and block objects with the appropriate internal topology, resistance values, and external
geometry.
User Interface
• Packages - TO Devices contains various options to create TO packages. It contains macros for the
TO220, TO252, and TO263 packages.
• PCB contains options related to the creation of printed circuit boards (PCBs) and vias. Options include:
– Bolt is used to define a location on the board where the board is bolted to a heat sink or cold plate.
– Compact Vias enables you to create a simplified object to represent a set of vias. The macro allows
for the specification of via density, via diameter, electroplating thickness, and material. The macro
creates either a block or a plate with equivalent orthotropic thermal conductivity.
– Compact Vias - Filled enables you to create a simplified object to represent the via as in the
Compact Vias macro, but also enables you to specify the fill material.
– Compact Vias II enables you to create a simplified object to represent the via as in the Compact
Vias macro, but enables you to specify an angle of rotation.
– PCB - Detailed and Compact opens the Create PCB - Detailed and Compact panel. This panel
enables you to create a plate object with orthotropic conductivity that can be used to model a
printed circuit board (PCB).
– Stiffener is an item that is either bolted or bonded to the board surface.
– Wedgelock is used to define a location on the board where the board is clamped to a heat sink
or cold plate.
• Rotate rotates multiple objects at once around a point, centroid, or vertex.
– Groups of Prism Blocks rotates all prism blocks contained in a group.
– Individual Polygonal Blocks rotates a selection of multiple polygonal blocks.
– Individual Prism Blocks rotates a selection of multiple prism blocks.
– Individual Plates rotates a selection of multiple plates.
Modeling
Modeling macros can be used to simulate a wide array of electronics cooling phenomena. In this
macro menu category, you will find efficient ways to characterize heatsinks and packages, model
thermoelectric coolers, employ thermostatic controls on fans and heat sources, run SIwave-Icepak
coupled simulations, use sources that depend on both time and temperature, and much more.
Note:
Modeling macros are compiled and tested only for supported Windows operating
systems.
• Heatsink Wind Tunnel contains options related to the creation and solution of wind tunnels using
pre-existing detailed heat sink objects.
– Create Wind Tunnel creates a separate Icepak project using an existing heat sink object.
– Process Wind Tunnel - Plate-Fin Heatsink Configuration is used after opening the project created
from Create wind tunnel to process the wind tunnel.
• IC Packages
– The Conduction Enclosure option that enables you to specify package and board dimensions,
heat transfer coefficient boundary conditions, and load from the library.
– Extract Delphi Network creates a model that runs parametric trials by varying the heat transfer
coefficient boundary conditions, the results of which can be used to extract a thermal network to
represent the internal structure of the IC package.
– Extract JB and JC enables you to automatically extract junction to board and junction to case
thermal resistances. You can select junction to board (JB), junction to case (JC), or both. The macro
automatically sets the mesh, solver, and wall boundary condition inputs. There is also a Post-pro-
cessing only option to extract the values for completed simulations.
– JEDEC Test Chamber opens the Create JEDEC Test Chamber panel where you can quickly set
up test chambers for IC package thermal characterization.
• Siwave Icepak Coupling
– PCB Iterator allows you to automatically perform a coupled DC IR simulation between ANSYS SIwave
and Icepak for models with up to 10 PCBs.
• Thermoelectric Cooler contains options related to the creation and solution of models that include
thermoelectric coolers.
• Extract Network Information creates a networks.info file in the project directory from the parameters
defined in a network object. The macro assumes that all inputs are in SI units (C/W, W, and m).
• Import Power Matrix File reads in a text file, updates existing objects, or creates new objects if they
do not exist with the power values specified in the file. The following format is used while reading
the file:
name xstart ystart zstart xend/length yend/length zend/length total

power
block.1 4.9 0.75 4.9 6.3 0.95 6.3 0.08
plate.1 6.3 0.75 4.9 7.7 0.86 4.9 2.45
source 7.7 0.75 4.9 7.7 0.65 6.3 50.0
Note:
If an object listed in the file does not exist in your model, a new block object will
be created by default.
• Multi-Die Characterization runs a set of parametric trials by toggling ON a single source for each
trial over an array of sources that lie on die faces. Up to ten dies can be selected. The macro automat-
ically creates the sources, and sets up the trials, which can be launched from the batch file written
to the model folder.
• Multi-Die Characterization Post writes out report files that can be used in a spreadsheet to compute
die temperatures by varying the power values on the heat sources.
User Interface
• Power Dependent Power Macro allows you to dynamically control the power of a target source
based on the power consumed by remote sources.
• Solar Flux Calculator calculates the solar flux along a surface at a particular latitude, longitude, date,
and time of day.
• Source/Fan Thermostat uses thermostat control on heat source power and/or fan speed.
• Transient Temperature Dependent Power allows you to associate time-dependent power with
temperature-dependent powermaps.
Post Processing
Post processing macros help you write reports, export data files, report maximum temperature values,
and compute the metal fractions for ECAD objects.
• Automatic Postprocessing creates a PowerPoint file with snapshots of all the post-processing objects
available in all solution IDs.
• Export CSV Reports writes CSV report files for the selected object types and model settings.
• Ensight Export writes the Ensight post data files.
• Report Max Values helps to get the maximum and vertex average value of the post object.
• Temperature Field to ANSYS WB exports nodal temperature data for ANSYS Workbench.
• Write Average Metal Fractions enables you to select an object with imported traces and write out
the metal fractions for each layer. These metal fractions can then be used to create a lumped PCB
object.
• Write Detailed Report writes a detailed report of material properties, power, and temperature values.
Productivity
Productivity macros are useful for model validation and performing routine tasks: automatic meshing,
find zero-slack assemblies, copy assembly mesh settings, debug diverence, delete unused materials
/ parameters, and so on.
• Change Background Color
– Set to Black changes the Main window background color to black.
– Set to Default changes the Main window background color to the default color set for all projects in
the Preferences panel.
– Set to White changes the Main window background color to white.
• Validation
– Automatic Case Check Tool enables you to check the geometry of your model for potential errors
during meshing and solving.
→ Assembly intersection check checks whether any assemblies are intersecting one another.
→ Thin Conducting Plate and Assembly Intersections checks whether any thin conducting plates
are intersecting with an assembly.
→ Polygon Block, Inclined Objects, and Assembly Intersections checks whether any polygonal block
or inclined objects are intersecting with an assembly.
→ Placement of Network Blocks checks whether any network face is blocked by hollow surfaces.
→ Placement of 2D source checks whether there are any 2D sources placed over thin conducting
plates.
→ Orphan Object in Assembly checks whether there are any assemblies containing an orphan object.
→ Thin Plate Enclosure and Assembly Intersections checks whether any enclosure thin conducting
plates are intersecting with an assembly.
– Primitive Intersection Check uses a bounding box approach to verify if there are any objects that in-
tersect each other. To ensure a consistent modeling intent, intersections must be dealt with by applying
appropriate meshing priorities. This guarantees that correct material and power values are assigned to
each intersecting region.
– Primitive Misalignment Check searches the model to find and report small misalignments between
objects. It's important to remove small misalignments, as they can often be the source of mesh and
divergence issues.
• Automatic CutCell Meshing allows you to automatically apply cut cell meshing to a model or a subset
of assemblies with the desired mesh resolution.
• Automatic Mesh Settings allows you to automatically generate a coarse, medium, or fine mesh. This
macro enables new users to quickly generate a mesh with reasonable resolution by modifying max element
sizes in the main mesh panel, as well as applying per-object parameters for critical components. The Help
button provides details on the settings used for each mesh resolution.
• Change Background Color allows you to quickly change the graphics window background color to the
default color, black, white, or a user-specified hexadecimal color code.
• Cleanup Object Names removes spaces and special characters from the names of objects, materials,
monitor points, monitor surfaces, and groups. Spaces can be replaced with periods, underscores, or dashes.
• Copy Assembly Settings allows you to select a source assembly and apply the mesh settings to one or
more target assemblies.
• Debug Divergence automates the process of identifying the region of divergence.
• Delete Unused Materials deletes all materials that are not used in the project. Materials that are in a
library are not deleted.
• Delete Unused Parameters deletes all parameters that are not used in the project.
• Dimensionless Parameter Calculator allows you to compute the Reynolds, Prandtl, Grashof, and Rayleigh
numbers by inputting appropriate characteristic velocity, length, and temperature scales.
• Export materials to Fluent creates a Scheme file with all standard Icepak library and custom materials.
The Scheme file can then be imported into Fluent as a User-defined Database.
User Interface
• Find Zero-Slack Assemblies identifies any assemblies in the model that have zero slack values assigned.
• Macros Toolbar initializes a toolbar that can be customized to call your most frequently used macros.
The wrench icon will launch a panel to assign a macro to a toolbar button. Once a button has an assignment,
it will turn to red. If the toolbar is not visible, you can activate it by going to View > Edit toolbars.
• Make All Objects Visible changes all invisible objects to visible.
• Mesh Settings Comparison allows you to set a baseline for mesh settings and generate a report (a .txt
file in the project directory) after updating the mesh settings for comparison.
• Report Object Volume and Mass writes a text file in the model directory that displays the volume and
mass for all objects. To change the units of this report, go to Edit > Preferences > Units.
• Sort Inactive Node sorts inactive objects alphabetically.
The Solve Menu

The Solve menu (Figure 3.19: The Solve Menu (p. 80)) contains options that enable you to control
the solution of your ANSYS Icepak model. See Calculating a Solution (p. 829) for more information. A
description of the Solve menu options is provided below.
Figure 3.19: The Solve Menu
Settings enables you to set various solution parameters for your ANSYS Icepak project. Options include:
• Basic opens the Basic settings panel where you can specify the number of iterations to be performed
and convergence criteria ANSYS Icepak should use before starting your CFD calculations. See Initializing
the Solution (p. 835) for details.
• Advanced opens the Advanced solver setup panel where you can specify the discretization scheme,
under-relaxation factors, and the multigrid scheme. See Calculating a Solution (p. 829) for details.
• Parallel opens the Parallel settings panel where you can specify the type of execution you want to perform
(for example serial (the default), parallel, network parallel or Microsoft Job Scheduler). See Parallel Pro-
cessing (p. 852) for details.
Patch temperatures opens the Patch temperatures panel where you can set the initial temperature
for blocks and plates.
Run solution opens the Solve panel where you can set solution parameters for your ANSYS Ice-
pak model.
Run optimization opens the Parameters and optimization panel where you can define parameters
(design variables) and set the optimization process.
Create Krylov ROM opens the Create Krylov ROM panel where you can select input objects to create
a reduced order model and run steady-state and transient simulations.
Solution monitor opens the Solution monitors definition panel where you specify the variables to
be monitored during the calculation.
Define trials opens the Parameters and trials panel where you can define trial calculations for your
model. Each trial is based on a combination of parameter values defined in ANSYS Icepak.
Define report opens the Define summary report panel where you can specify a summary report
for a variable on any or all objects in your ANSYS Icepak model.
Diagnostics enables you to edit the output files created after you have generated case files and
solutions for your model. See Diagnostic Tools for Technical Support (p. 874) for details.
The Post Menu

The Post menu (Figure 3.20: The Post Menu (p. 82)) contains options that enable you to access ANSYS
Icepak’s postprocessing objects. See Examining the Results (p. 877) for more information. A description
of the Post menu options is provided below.
User Interface
Figure 3.20: The Post Menu
Object face (node) enables you to display results on object faces based on nodes in the model.
Object face (facet) enables you to display results on object faces based on facets in the model.
Plane cut enables you to display results on cross-sections of the model.
Isosurface enables you to display results on defined isosurfaces in the model.
Point enables you to create points and display results at points in the model.
Surface probe enables you to display results at a point on a postprocessing object that has been
created in the model.
Min/max locations enables you to display the location of the minimum and maximum values for
postprocessed variables.
Convergence plot enables you to display the convergence history of the solution.
Variation plot enables you to create a 2D plot of a variable along a line through the model.
3D Variation plot enables you to create a 3D plot of a variable along a line, through the model, at
different time values. This option is for transient problems only.
History plot enables you to plot solution variable histories over time.
Trials plot enables you to plot solution variables at specified points across multiple trials.
Network temperature plot enables you to plot the temperatures of internal nodes of network objects
and network blocks present in the model. The plot shows the nodal temperatures versus solution it-
eration or time in the case of transient simulations.
Transient settings opens the Post-processing time panel where you can set parameters for transient
simulations.
Load solution ID enables you to select a specific solution set to be examined.
Postprocessing units opens the Postprocessing units panel where you can choose the units for
different postprocessing variables.
Load post objects from file enables you to load postprocessing objects from a file.
Save post objects from file enables you to save postprocessing objects to a file.
Rescale vectors enables you to redisplay vectors drawn at their original sizes.
Create zoom-in model enables you to zoom in and define a region in your ANSYS Icepak model and
save that region as a separate ANSYS Icepak project.
Power and temperature values opens the Power and temperature limit setup panel where you
can set up and review the power of objects and temperature limits, as well as compare the temper-
ature limits with the object temperatures.
Workflow data and the CFD Post/Mechanical data option enable you to write out data files that
can be loaded into CFD-Post and Mechanical.
Display powermap property enables you to visualize a source object's powermap properties in 2D
or 3D.
The Report Menu

The Report menu (Figure 3.21: The Report Menu (p. 84)) contains options for generating output
concerning the results of your ANSYS Icepak model. See Generating Reports (p. 935) for more inform-
ation. A description of the Report menu options is provided below.
User Interface
Figure 3.21: The Report Menu
HTML report opens the HTML report panel where you can customize your results and write out an
HTML document that can be viewed in a web browser.
Solution overview enables you to view and create solution overview files.
• View opens a File selection dialog box where you can open a solution overview file (*.overview) where
summary data is stored for a particular solution.
• Create opens a Version selection panel where you can select a solution for which to create an overview
file. See Reviewing a Solution (p. 941) for details.
Show optimization/param results opens an Optimization run panel where you can view all the
function values, design variables, and the running times for each optimization iteration, as well as
the plots of the function values and design variables versus iteration number.
Summary report opens the Define summary report panel where you can specify a summary report
Point report opens the Define point report panel where you can create a report for a variable at
any point in your ANSYS Icepak model.
Full report opens the Define full report panel where you can customize the report of your results.
Network block values enables you to create a report of the internal node temperatures for the network
blocks and network objects in your ANSYS Icepak model.
Fan operating points enables you to create a report of the fan operating points for fans using fan
curves in your model.
EM heat losses enables you to create a report of the volumetric and surface losses for objects in your
model.
Solar loads enables you to display solar load values on exposed surfaces in the Message window
when Solar loading is enabled on the Advanced tab of the Basic Parameters panel.
Write Autotherm file enables you to export temperature and heat transfer coefficient data to an
Autotherm file.
Export enables you to export package die thermal resistance and temperature data that can be read
by the chip-level thermal analysis tools. For exporting die thermal resistance, the block representing
the package die needs to be selected and the appropriate ambient temperature entered before the
resistance file can be exported. For exporting temperature data, the block objects of interest need
to be selected before the temperature file can be exported.
• Gradient Firebolt p2i file
• Cadence TPKG file
• SIwave temp data
• Sentinel TI HTC file
• RedHawk Back Annotation
The Windows Menu

The Windows menu contains the names of ANSYS Icepak panels when one or more of them are open.
This feature is useful when you have many panels or toolbars open and you want to quickly locate
a specific toolbar or panel. An asterisk (*) to the left of a panel or toolbar name indicates that the
panel or toolbar is currently hidden. You can show or hide toolbars using the Available toolbars
panel through the Edit toolbars option under the View menu. See The View Menu (p. 61) for more
information about showing and hiding toolbars using the View menu.
The Help Menu

The Help menu (Figure 3.22: The Help Menu (p. 85)) contains options that enable you to access the
online ANSYS Icepak documentation, ANSYS Icepak web sites, and also print a list of keyboard shortcuts
available in ANSYS Icepak. A description of the Help menu options is provided below.
Figure 3.22: The Help Menu
Help opens online ANSYS Icepak documentation in a web browser.
Icepak on the Web opens the ANSYS Icepak home page in a web browser.
Customer Portal opens the ANSYS customer site web page in a web browser.
List shortcuts prints the list of keyboard shortcuts for ANSYS Icepak in the Message window.
About ANSYS Icepak contains ANSYS Icepak copyright information and legal notices.
User Interface
3.1.3. The ANSYS Icepak Toolbars

The ANSYS Icepak graphical user interface (Figure 3.1: The Main Window (p. 56)) also includes eight
toolbars located throughout the Main window. These toolbars (File commands, Edit commands,
Viewing options, Orientation commands, Model and solve, Postprocessing, Object creation, and
Object modification) provide shortcuts to performing common tasks in ANSYS Icepak. By default,
the toolbars are docked to the ANSYS Icepak interface but can also be detached and treated as regular
control panels. See Floating Toolbars (p. 109) for more information about using detached toolbars.
The File commands Toolbar

The File Commands toolbar (Figure 3.23: The File commands Toolbar (p. 86)) contains options for
working with ANSYS Icepak projects and project files. A brief description of the File commands
toolbar options is provided below. See Reading, Writing, and Managing Files (p. 143) for more inform-
ation about reading, writing, and managing files in ANSYS Icepak.
Figure 3.23: The File commands Toolbar
New project ( ) enables you to create a new ANSYS Icepak project using the New project panel.
Here, you can browse through your directory structure, create a new project directory, and enter a
project name.
Open project ( ) enables you to open existing ANSYS Icepak projects using the Open project
panel. Here, you can browse through your directory structure, locate a project directory, and either
enter a project name, or specify an old project name from a list of recent projects. Additionally, you
can specify a version name or number for the project.
Save project ( ) saves the current ANSYS Icepak project.
Print screen ( ) enables you to print a PostScript image of the ANSYS Icepak model that is displayed
in the graphics window using the Print options panel. The inputs for the Print options panel are
Create image file ( ) opens a Save image dialog box that enables you to save your model dis-
played in the graphics window to an image file. Supported file types include: PNG, PPM, GIF (8 bit
color), JPEG, TIFF, VRML, and PS. PNG is the default file type.
The Edit commands Toolbar

The Edit commands toolbar (Figure 3.24: The Edit commands Toolbar (p. 87)) contains options that
enable you to perform undo and redo operations in your ANSYS Icepak model. A description of the
Edit commands toolbar options is provided below. See Building a Model (p. 273) for more information
about editing objects in ANSYS Icepak.
Figure 3.24: The Edit commands Toolbar
Undo ( ) enables you to undo the last model operation you performed. Undo can be used re-
peatedly to take you back to the first operation performed.
Redo ( ) enables you to redo one or more previously undone operations. This option applies only
to operations undone by selecting the Undo option.
The Viewing options Toolbar

The Viewing options toolbar (Figure 3.25: The Viewing options Toolbar (p. 87)) contains options that
enable you to modify the way in which you view your model in the graphics window. A description
of the Viewing options toolbar options is provided below.
Figure 3.25: The Viewing options Toolbar
Home position ( ) selects the default view of your model directed along the negative axis.
Zoom in ( ) enables you to focus on any part of your model by opening and resizing a window
around the desired area. After selecting this option, position the mouse pointer at a corner of the
area to be zoomed, hold down the left mouse button and drag open a selection box to the desired
size, and then release the mouse button. The selected area will then fill the graphics window.
Scale to fit ( ) adjusts the overall size of your model to take maximum advantage of the graphics
window’s width and height.
Rotate about screen normal ( ) rotates the current view by 90° clockwise about the axis normal
to the view.
One viewing window ( ) displays a single graphics window.
Four viewing windows ( ) displays four graphics windows, each with a different viewing perspect-
ive. By default, one view is isometric, another is of the x-y plane, and another is of the y-z plane.
Display object names ( ) toggles the visibility of a model’s object names in the graphics window.
The Orientation commands Toolbar

The Orientation commands toolbar (Figure 3.26: The Orientation commands Toolbar (p. 88)) contains
options that enable you to modify the direction from which you view your model in the graphics
window. A description of the Orientation commands toolbar options is provided below.
User Interface
Figure 3.26: The Orientation commands Toolbar
• Orient X,Y, Z ( ) views the model toward the direction of the positive x, y or, or negative z
axis.
• Isometric view ( ) views the model from the direction of the vector equidistant to all three axes.
• Reverse orientation ( ) views the model along the current view vector but from the opposite direction
(that is, rotated 180°).
The Model and solve Toolbar

The Model and solve toolbar (Figure 3.27: The Model and solve Toolbar (p. 88)) contains options
that enable you to generate a mesh, model radiation, check your model, and run a solution. A descrip-
tion of the Model and solve toolbar options is provided below.
Figure 3.27: The Model and solve Toolbar
• Power and temperature limits ( ) opens the Power and temperature limit setup panel where you
can review or change the power of objects, as well as specify the temperature limits.
• Generate mesh ( ) opens the Mesh control panel where you can provide settings to create a mesh for
your ANSYS Icepak model. See Generating a Mesh (p. 773) for more information about generating meshes.
• Radiation ( ) opens the Form factors panel where you can model radiation for specific objects in
your model. See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for more information about radiation models in ANSYS Icepak.
• Check model ( ) performs a check to test the model for problems in the design. See Repositioning an
Object (p. 292) for details.
• Run solution ( ) opens the Solve panel where you can set solution parameters for your ANSYS Ice-
pak model.
• Run optimization ( ) opens the Parameters and optimization panel where you can define parameters
(design variables) and set the optimization process.
The Postprocessing Toolbar

The Postprocessing toolbar (Figure 3.28: The Postprocessing Toolbar (p. 89)) contains options that
enable you to examine your results using ANSYS Icepak’s postprocessing objects. A description of
the Postprocessing toolbar options is provided below. See Examining the Results (p. 877) for more
information about postprocessing.
Figure 3.28: The Postprocessing Toolbar
• Object face ( ) enables you to display results on object faces in the model.
• Plane cut ( ) enables you to display results on cross-sections of the model.
• Isosurface ( ) enables you to display results on defined isosurfaces in the model.
• Point ( ) enables you to display results at points in the model.
• Surface probe ( ) enables you to display results at a point on a surface in the model.
• Variation plot ( ) enables you to plot a variable along a line through the model.
• History plot ( ) enables you to plot solution variable histories over time.
• Trials plot ( ) enables you to plot trial solution variables.
• Transient settings ( ) opens the Post-processing time panel where you can set parameters for
transient simulations.
• Solution ID ( ) enables you to select a specific solution set to be examined.
• Summary report ( ) opens the Define summary report panel where you can specify a summary report
• Power and temperature values ( ) opens the Power and temperature limit setup panel where you
can compare the temperature values of objects with the temperature limits.
The Object creation Toolbar

The Object creation toolbar (Figure 3.26: The Orientation commands Toolbar (p. 88)) contains options
that enable you to add objects to your ANSYS Icepak model. A description of the Object creation
toolbar (Figure 3.29: The Object creation Toolbar (p. 90)) options is provided below. Unless otherwise
noted, all objects are created in the center of the corresponding model cabinet.
User Interface
Figure 3.29: The Object creation Toolbar
• Create assemblies ( ) enables you to create an assembly object. See Building a Model (p. 273) for details.
• Create networks ( ) enables you to create a network object. See Networks (p. 373) for details.
• Create heat exchangers ( ) enables you to create a heat exchanger object. See Heat Exchangers (p. 387)
for details.
• Create openings ( ) enables you to create an opening object. See Openings (p. 393) for details.
• Create grille ( ) enables you to create a grille object. See Grilles (p. 409) for details.
• Create sources ( ) enables you to create a source object. See Sources (p. 423) for details.
• Create printed circuit boards ( ) enables you to create a printed circuit board object. See Printed
Circuit Boards (PCBs) (p. 435) for details.
• Create enclosures ( ) enables you to create an enclosure object. See Enclosures (p. 449) for details.
• Create plates ( ) enables you to create a plate object. See Plates (p. 453) for details.
• Create walls( ) enables you to create a wall object. See Walls (p. 467) for details.
• Create periodic boundaries ( ) enables you to create a periodic boundary object. See Periodic
Boundaries (p. 487) for details.
• Create blocks ( ) enables you to create a block object. See Blocks (p. 493) for details.
• Create fans ( ) enables you to create a fan object. See Fans (p. 527) for details.
• Create blowers ( ) enables you to create a blower object. See Blowers (p. 549) for details.
• Create resistances ( ) enables you to create a 3D resistance object. See Resistances (p. 559) for details.
• Create heat sinks ( ) enables you to create a heat sink object. See Heat Sinks (p. 567) for details.
• Create packages ( ) enables you to create a package object. See Packages (p. 585) for details.
• Create materials ( ) enables you to create a materials node for the model in the Model manager
window. See Building a Model (p. 273) for details.
The Object modification Toolbar

The Object modification toolbar (Figure 3.30: The Object modification Toolbar (p. 91)) contains options
that enable you to edit, delete, move, copy, or align an object in your ANSYS Icepak model. A descrip-
tion of the Object modification toolbar options is provided below. See Building a Model (p. 273) for
details about modifying objects in ANSYS Icepak.
Figure 3.30: The Object modification Toolbar
• Edit object ( ) opens an object-specific Edit window where you can set various object properties.
• Delete object( ) removes the object from the model.
• Move object ( ) opens an object-specific Move panel where you can scale, rotate, translate, or mirror
an object.
• Copy object ( ) opens an object-specific Copy panel where you can create a copy of an object and
then scale, rotate, translate, or mirror the copied object.
User Interface
• Align and morph faces ( ) aligns the faces of two objects.
• Align and morph edges ( ) aligns the edges of two objects.
• Align and morph vertices ( ) aligns the vertices of two objects.
• Align object centers ( ) aligns the centers of two objects.
• Align face centers ( ) aligns the centers of the faces of two objects.
• Morph faces ( ) matches the faces of two objects.
• Morph edges ( ) matches the edges of two objects.
3.1.4. The Model manager Window

The ANSYS Icepak Model manager window (Figure 3.31: An Example of the Model manager Win-
dow (p. 93)) consists of the Project and Library tabs. The Project tab provides a localized area for
defining your ANSYS Icepak model and contains a project-specific listing of problem and solution
parameters. The Library tab consists of the Main library and any user-defined libraries.
The Model manager window is presented in a tree-like structure with expandable and collapsible
tree nodes that show or hide relevant tree items. To expand a tree node, use the left mouse button
to click the icon on the left hand side of the tree. To collapse a tree node, click the icon.
You can edit and manage your ANSYS Icepak project from within the Model manager window using
the mouse. For example, you can select multiple objects, edit project parameters, add groups within
groups, break apart assemblies, or edit objects, by clicking and dragging objects. In addition, the
Model manager window includes a context menu, accessible by right-clicking the mouse, that enables
you to easily manipulate your ANSYS Icepak model. See Using the Mouse in the Model manager
Window (p. 111) for more information on using the mouse in the Model manager window.
Figure 3.31: An Example of the Model manager Window
An ANSYS Icepak project is organized in the Model manager window using six different categories:
• Problem setup ( ) enables you to set basic problem parameters, set the project title, and define local
coordinate systems. Options include:
– Basic parameters ( ) opens the Basic parameters panel where you can specify parameters for the
current ANSYS Icepak model. See Specifying the Problem Parameters (p. 250) for details.
– Title/notes ( ) opens the Title/notes panel where you can enter a title and notes for the current ANSYS
Icepak model.
– Local coords ( ) opens the Local coord systems panel where you can create local coordinate systems
that can be used in your model other than the ANSYS Icepak global coordinate system with an origin
of (0, 0, 0). The origins of the local coordinate systems are specified with an offset from the origin of
the global coordinate system. See Local Coordinate Systems (p. 297) for details.
• Solution settings ( ) enables you to set ANSYS Icepak solution parameters. Options include:
– Basic settings ( ) opens the Basic settings panel where you can specify the number of iterations to
be performed and convergence criteria ANSYS Icepak should use before starting your CFD calculations.
See Initializing the Solution (p. 835) for details.
– Parallel settings ( ) opens the Parallel settings panel where you can specify the type of execution
you want to perform (for example serial (the default), parallel, network parallel or Microsoft Job
Scheduler). See Parallel Processing (p. 852) for details.
– Advanced settings ( ) opens the Advanced solver setup panel where you can specify the discretization
scheme, under-relaxation factors, and the multigrid scheme. See Calculating a Solution (p. 829) for details.
User Interface
• Groups ( ) lists any groups of objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Grouping Objects (p. 333)
for details about grouping objects.
• Post-processing ( ) lists any postprocessing objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Examining
the Results (p. 877) for details about postprocessing in ANSYS Icepak.
• Points ( ) lists any point monitoring objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Defining Solution
Monitors (p. 837) for details about point monitors.
• Surfaces ( ) lists any surface monitoring objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Defining
Solution Monitors (p. 837) for details about surface monitors.
• Trash ( ) lists any objects that have been deleted from the ANSYS Icepak model. Any items in the Trash
node will only be available for the current ANSYS Icepak session.
• Inactive ( ) lists any objects that have been made inactive in the ANSYS Icepak model.
• Model ( ) lists all active objects and materials for the ANSYS Icepak project.
• Libraries ( ) lists the libraries used in your ANSYS Icepak project and is located in the Library tab. By
default, a Main library exists in your ANSYS Icepak project that contains materials (fluids, solids, and sur-
faces), fan objects, and other complex objects. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
3.1.5. Graphics Windows

Displaying graphics is an important aspect of the ANSYS Icepak graphical user interface. There are
two types of graphical displays in ANSYS Icepak: a graphics window (or Model Display window) and
a graphics display and control window.
The graphics window (or Model Display window) displays your ANSYS Icepak model and takes up
most of the Main window (Figure 3.1: The Main Window (p. 56)). It is the working space for building
and manipulating your model. The graphics window contains only a graphical display of your model;
it does not contain any control features.
At the lower left corner of the graphics window is a three-dimensional coordinate axes system, which
indicates the current orientation of your model. The axis that is closest to your line of sight is displayed
in a diamond shape. As you rotate your model, the axes rotate as well, and vice versa. You can ma-
nipulate objects in the graphics window using the mouse; see Manipulating Graphics With the
Mouse (p. 128) for details.
The other type of graphics window you can encounter in ANSYS Icepak is a graphics display and
control window, which provides graphics display as well as control features (an example is shown
in Figure 3.32: Example of a Graphics Window With Controls (p. 95)). These types of windows open
during specific model-building and simulation processes. For example, if you are displaying residuals
while a solution is being calculated, the Solution residuals window will appear on the screen as
shown in Figure 3.32: Example of a Graphics Window With Controls (p. 95). In addition to the
graphics, a set of control features is provided, which are located at the bottom of the window. These
control features are described in The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 871).
Figure 3.32: Example of a Graphics Window With Controls
Adding Annotations to the Graphics Window

You can add annotations (for example, labels and arrows) to the graphics window using the Annota-
tions panel. To open the Annotations panel, select the Annotations option in the Edit menu.
Edit Annotations
User Interface
Figure 3.33: The Annotations Panel
The following options are available for annotations:
• Title includes the job title in the graphics window.
• Date includes the current date in the graphics window.
• Logo includes the ANSYS logo in the graphics window. You can control the size and color of the displayed
logo using the drop-down lists.
• Arrows includes arrows in the graphics window. You can Add arrows, Edit arrows, Remove one arrow
at a time, or Clear all arrows. ANSYS Icepak displays messages in the graphics window regarding positioning
and modifying arrows.
• Text includes alphanumeric notations in the graphics window. You can Add text, Edit text, Remove one
text annotation at a time, or Clear all text annotations. ANSYS Icepak displays messages in the graphics
window regarding positioning and modifying text annotations.
• Lines includes lines in the graphics window. You can Add lines, Edit lines, Remove one line at a time, or
Clear all lines. ANSYS Icepak displays messages in the graphics window regarding positioning and modi-
fying lines.
• Markers includes markers in the graphics window. You can Add markers, Edit markers, Remove one
marker at a time, or Clear all markers. ANSYS Icepak displays messages in the graphics window regarding
positioning and modifying markers.
• Annotation style defines the Color, Line width, and Point size for new annotations. The defaults are
white for Color, 1 for Line width, and 5 for Point size.
The annotations will remain in the graphics window for the current session until you turn them off
in the Annotations panel. Annotations are saved when you save a job file. You can add annotations
to your image files (see Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details about image files).
3.1.6. The Message Window

The Message window (Figure 3.34: Sample Message Window (p. 97)) is located below the graphics
window. ANSYS Icepak communicates with you through its Message window. It is used to display
informative messages, such as those relating to meshing or solution procedures, as well as error
messages and instructions. ANSYS Icepak saves all information that is written to the Message window
in memory. You can review this information at any time by using the scroll bar on the right-hand
side of the Message window. To instruct ANSYS Icepak to display more detailed messages related to
the meshing and solution procedures, select the Verbose option in the Message window.
Figure 3.34: Sample Message Window
To write this information to a file, follow the steps below.
1. Click the Save push button in the Message window. A Save log dialog box appears. The default name
(messages.01.txt) for the saved information will appear in the File name field at the bottom of the
Save log dialog box.
2. To specify a different file name, type it in the text field.
3. Click the Save button in the Save log dialog box to save the file. Click the Cancel button to cancel the
procedure.
You can save the file multiple times in the same ANSYS Icepak session.
You can also direct ANSYS Icepak to log all information that is reported in the Message window to
a log file. To do this, follow the steps below.
1. Select the Log option in the Message window (Figure 3.34: Sample Message Window (p. 97)). A File
selection dialog box appears. The default name (messages.log) for the log file will appear in the File
name field at the bottom of the File selection dialog box.
2. To specify a different filename, type it in the text field.
3. Click the Open button in the File selection dialog box to start the log file. Click the Cancel button to
cancel the procedure.
3.1.7. The Edit Window

The Edit window is located in the lower right corner of the screen below the graphics window. This
window displays geometric data and other general properties for a selected object. The layout of this
window and the data displayed in this window change depending on the currently selected object
in the graphics window. For example, when you are constructing a fan, the Edit window becomes
User Interface
the fan Edit window. An example of the Edit window is shown in Figure 3.35: Sample Edit Win-
dow (p. 98).
Figure 3.35: Sample Edit Window
3.1.8. File Selection Dialog Boxes

File selection dialog boxes enable you to choose a file for reading or writing. You can use them to
look at your system directories and select a file.
Note that the appearance of the file selection dialog box will not always be the same. The version
shown in Figure 3.36: The File selection Dialog Box (p. 98) will appear in many cases. If you are saving
a project, the version shown in Figure 3.37: The Save project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog
Box (p. 99) will appear. If you are opening a project, merging two projects, or loading an external
assembly, a version similar to that shown in Figure 3.38: The Open project Panel Showing the File
Selection Dialog Box and the Preview Tab (p. 100) and Figure 3.39: The Open project Panel Showing
the File Selection Dialog Box and the Notes Tab (p. 101) will appear.
Figure 3.36: The File selection Dialog Box
Figure 3.37: The Save project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog Box
User Interface
Figure 3.38: The Open project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog Box and the Preview Tab
Figure 3.39: The Open project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog Box and the Notes Tab
The steps for file selection are as follows:
Note:
ANSYS Icepak does not support forward compatibility. Projects saved by the current version
of Icepak may not read correctly into previous versions. You should make a backup copy
of the project before saving your work when appropriate.
1. (Windows systems only) In the Drive drop-down list, select the drive on your system that contains the
file.
2. You can do this in four different ways:
• Select or enter the desired directory in the Directory name field/drop-down list. You can enter the
full pathname (beginning with a / character on a Linux system or a drive letter on Windows) or a
pathname relative to the directory in which ANSYS Icepak was started. Be sure to include the final /
character in the pathname. Note that you can also move one level up a directory tree using the
button, or click the previous or forward buttons to select a file.
• Double-click a directory, and then a subdirectory, and so on, in the directories list until you reach the
directory you want. Note that the directories list is always located under the Name field/drop-down
list.
User Interface
You can browse the directory you want in two ways. You can either double-click a directory,
and then a subdirectory and so on in the directories list or click the icon to open a directory
node and then subdirectory and so on, in the directories list.
• Click one of the buttons to the left of the Name field/drop-down list to find a desired directory or file.
( ) will take to your home directory, ( ) will take you to the root directory or My computer in
Windows, ( ) will take you to the current directory and ( ) will take you to favorites. A tool tip de-
scribing these options is displayed when you place your mouse over an icon.
Note:
The favorite button is displayed when the environment variable, ICEPAK_JOB_DIR-

ECTORY is set to an ANSYS Icepak projects folder.
• Most file selection dialog boxes contain a button that enable you to create a new directory ( ) at the
top of the panel. If you want to create a new directory, for example, to save a job file into a new dir-
ectory, you can click the button. ANSYS Icepak will prompt you for the name of the new directory.
Enter a name in the Create folder New folder name? text entry box, and then click Done. ANSYS
Icepak will create a new directory with the specified name and then open the new directory.
3. Specify the file name, if necessary, by selecting it in the listing of files and directories, or by entering the
name of the file in the File name text entry box. The name of this text entry box will change depending
on the type of file you are selecting (for example Project name in the Save project panel).
4. (project files only) You can choose from a number of previously opened ANSYS Icepak project files in
the Recent projects drop-down list.
5. (project files only) Select the version of the job file in the Project version drop-down list (for example,
in the Open project panel shown in Figure 3.38: The Open project Panel Showing the File Selection
Dialog Box and the Preview Tab (p. 100)). This list displays the available versions for the project file selected.
The version listing is also available in the Information tab of some file selection dialog boxes. For example,
if you run a project with a project ID of job01, ANSYS Icepak will save a model file called job01.model.
If, for example, you then change the material properties specified for a block in your model, and give
this project an ID of job02, ANSYS Icepak will save a model file called job02.model. These files are
all saved in the same directory. When you select the directory in the Directory list, all the different versions
of the project in that directory will be displayed in the Project version drop-down list.
6. (project files only) To apply the settings you specified under Options in the Preferences panel (see
Configuring a Project (p. 234)) from the previous time you worked on the project, turn on the Apply user
preferences from project option.
7. (project files only) Title and Notes fields will appear in the Notes tab of some of the file selection dialog
boxes (for example, Figure 3.39: The Open project Panel Showing the File Selection Dialog Box and the
Notes Tab (p. 101)). In addition, the Preview tab (for example, Figure 3.38: The Open project Panel
Showing the File Selection Dialog Box and the Preview Tab (p. 100)) may contain a picture of the model
if a picture has been saved. These items are described below.
• Title displays the title of the job file selected. See Title and Notes (p. 231) for information on adding a
title to a job.
• Notes displays any notes related to the job file selected. See Title and Notes (p. 231) for information
on adding notes to a job.
• A picture of the geometry of the model will be displayed if you selected the Save picture file option
in the Save project panel when you saved the project. See Saving a Project File (p. 149) for more in-
formation on the Save picture file option.
8. In some of the file selection dialog boxes there are other options that you can select, for example, on
the right-hand side of the Save project panel (Figure 3.37: The Save project Panel Showing the File Se-
lection Dialog Box (p. 99)). These options are described in the section related to the use of that particular
panel, for example, the options in the Save project panel are described in Saving a Project File (p. 149).
9. Click Save to read or write the specified file. Shortcuts for this step are as follows:
• If your file appears in the listing of files and directories, double-click it instead of just selecting it. This
will automatically activate the Open button for opening files, the Create button for creating projects,
or the Save button for saving files.
• If you entered the name of the file in the File name text entry box, you can press the Enter key instead
of clicking on the Open button for opening files, the Create button for creating projects, or the Save
button for saving files.
3.1.9. Control Panels

Control panels, which are used to perform input tasks, are another major component of the GUI. They
are displayed in a separate window, and are invoked by means of a higher-level function selection.
Figure 3.40: Example of a Control Panel (p. 103) shows an example of a control panel.
Figure 3.40: Example of a Control Panel
Working with a panel is similar to filling out a form. You provide input data to the panel’s controls.
Once you have finished entering data, you either apply the changes by “submitting" the form, or
cancel the form. Clicking on the Accept push button accepts any changes you have made to the
panel, and closes the panel. Clicking on the Reset button undoes all the changes you have made in
User Interface
the panel and restores all items in the panel to their original states. Cancel closes the panel and ignores
any changes made to the panel.
Each panel is unique, and uses a variety of input controls that are described in the following sections.
Push Button
A push button is a rectangular-shaped button that performs a function indicated by the button label.
To activate a push button, place the mouse pointer over the push button and “click" the left mouse
button. A “click" is one press and release of the mouse button. When push buttons are located on a
menu bar, they usually cause a submenu to appear, or a panel to be displayed.
Check Box
A check box is a square-shaped button that is used to turn on or off an item or action indicated by
the check box label. Click the left mouse button on the check box to switch the state.
Radio Button
Radio buttons are diamond-shaped buttons that are located on a menu bar or panel. They are a set
of mutually exclusive options that allow only one to be set in the “on" position at a time. When you
click the left mouse button on a radio button, it will be turned on, and all others will be turned “off".
Field
A text entry field allows you to type text input. It will often have a label associated with it to indicate
what the entry is for. Click the left mouse button on the text entry field to input text from the keyboard.
If the text input overflows the field, you can scroll backward or forward in the field by pressing and
holding down the middle mouse button. You can delete characters in the text entry field using the
Del or Back Space key. In addition, you can double-click the text entry to highlight the entire
field, and type the new entry.
To view text that overflows the field, press Ctrl+ left-click to display a pop-up dialog box of the text
entry field. You can edit and save text in this pop-up dialog box, re-size the dialog box, or cancel any
actions.
Note:
Pop-up dialog boxes are available for all editable fields.
Figure 3.41: Pop-Up Text Entry Dialog Box
Real Number Entry
A real number entry is similar to a text entry except it allows only real numbers to be entered (for
example, 10, -10.538, 50000.45, or 5.e-4).
Single-Selection List
A single-selection list contains one or more items. Each item is printed on a separate line in the list.
You can select an item (for example, ex3.300) by placing the mouse pointer over the item line and
clicking with the left mouse button. The selected item will become highlighted. Selecting another
item will deselect the previously selected item in the list. If the list item overflows the window, you
can scroll backward or forward in the field by clicking and holding down the middle mouse button.
Single-selection lists are either visible in a panel, or hidden in the case of a drop-down list.
User Interface
Drop-Down List
A drop-down list is a hidden single-selection list that shows only the current selection to save space.
It will have a label associated with it to indicate what the list is for, and it is activated by clicking on
the triangular button located next to the text field ( ). For example, in the Object drop-down list
shown below, All is the current selection.
When you want to change the selection (for example, from assembly-group to fan-group), follow
the steps below:
1. Click the button located next to the text field to display the list.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the new list item (for example, fan-group). If the item is not visible, you
can use the scroll bar to find it.
3. Click the left mouse button on the item to make the new selection. The list will close automatically, and
the new selection will then be displayed.
If you want to abort the selection process while the list is displayed, you can move the pointer any-
where outside the list and click the left mouse button, or click Cancel.
If you want to filter the objects appearing in the model tree, click Filter to display the Filter object
list by type panel.
Figure 3.42: Filter objects by type Panel
In the Filter object list by type panel, you can deselect the check box next to object types you want
to hide from the Objects drop-down list. Click Done to accept your selections. Click Cancel to exit
the panel without saving your selections. To select or deselect more than one object at once, right-
click the ( ) button and select All, None, or Toggle. Selecting Toggle inverts your current selections.
If you want to synchronize the selection(s) between the object tree to those selected in the model
tree, click Sync.
Scale
The scale is used to select a value from a predefined range by moving a slider. The number shows
the current value. To change the value, follow the steps below:
1. Place the pointer over the slider.
2. Press and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Move the pointer along the slider bar to change the value.
4. Release the left mouse button.
User Interface
Tabs
Many of the ANSYS Icepak panels (for example object editing panels) include tabbed regions that
separate different categories of input fields. For instance, the Walls panel includes four tabs: Info,
Geometry, Properties, and Notes, as seen in Figure 3.43: An Example of a Tabbed Panel (p. 108). Here,
you can access the appropriate category for the object, in this case, a wall. To display the contents
of a particular tab, select the tab label with the left mouse button.
Figure 3.43: An Example of a Tabbed Panel
Many tabbed panels have the following types of tab categories:
• Info displays general information about the object such as its name, its group, and other display properties.
• Geometry displays geometric information such as its shape, its plane, and its coordinates.
• Properties provides access to the object’s material and thermal properties.
• Notes provides an area for you to leave notations about the object.
Note that some object and macro panels include different tabs that are based on the properties of
the object.
Floating Toolbars
Most of the ANSYS Icepak toolbars can be detached from the Main window and exist as floating
toolbars that can be moved to any position in the window. Floating toolbars are identified by two
small buttons in the upper right hand corner of the toolbar ( ).
You can detach a toolbar, by clicking on the button. To move the detached toolbar, select the title
bar and drag the toolbar to a new position in the Main window. To resize a detached toolbar, click
and drag the edge of the toolbar to the desired position using the left mouse button.
Figure 3.44: Floating Toolbars
To hide an attached toolbar entirely from view in the ANSYS Icepak graphical interface, click the
button.
You can re-attach a floating toolbar to the ANSYS Icepak interface, by clicking on the button in the
upper right hand corner of the floating toolbar. To hide a floating toolbar entirely from view in the
ANSYS Icepak graphical interface, select the icon in the upper right hand corner of the floating
toolbar.
Whether attached or detached, you can retrieve a hidden toolbar using the Windows menu or selecting
the Edit toolbars option in the View menu and using the Available toolbars panel.
View Edit toolbars
3.1.10. Accessing Online Help

There are three types of help available in ANSYS Icepak: online help, bubble help and context-specific
help. Bubble help provides a brief explanation of the function performed by items in the Main window,
the Message window, the Edit window, the Model manage window, the various toolbars, the mater-
ials drop-down lists, and control panels. Online help provides access to online versions of the ANSYS
Icepak manuals. Context-specific help provides specific information for a panel or window.
On-Line Help
To invoke the online help system, select the Help option in the Help menu. The ANSYS viewer will
display the ANSYS Icepak User’s Guide. To access the ANSYS Icepak Tutorial Guide, click the Product
Documentation node and click Tutorials. See Accessing the ANSYS Icepak Manuals (p. 20) for inform-
ation on using the online manuals.
User Interface
Bubble Help
Bubble help (that is, tool tips) is available for radio buttons, push buttons, and toggle buttons in the
Main window, the Message window, the Edit window, the toolbars, and control panels. To use bubble
help, hold the mouse pointer over an item for a few seconds. A bubble will appear giving a brief
description of the function of the item. You can disable the bubble help, as described in Configuring
a Project (p. 234).
Context-Specific Help
To use context-specific help, move the mouse pointer to any location within the panel you require
help for, and press the F1 key or click the Help button in a panel. ANSYS Icepak will automatically
launch the ANSYS viewer, open the appropriate online document, and locate the heading or figure
within the document that relates to the panel in question.
3.2. Using the Mouse

The mouse is used as the primary means of interacting with the graphical user interface (GUI) to access
ANSYS Icepak’s functionality. To take full advantage of the functionality available in ANSYS Icepak, you
will need a three-button mouse.
The mouse can be used to provide inputs to control panels, display control panels, access objects in
the Model manager window, as well as manipulate objects in the graphics window.
Using the Mouse
3.2.1. Controlling Panel Inputs

The left mouse button is used to control panel inputs in the following ways:
• Executing selector button functions (for example, push buttons, radio buttons, toggle buttons)
• Highlighting items in a list
• Enabling a text field for typing
The middle mouse button enables you to drag into view text entries or list items that overflow the
field.
3.2.2. Using the Mouse in the Model manager Window

The left mouse button is used in the Model manager window in the following ways:
• Opening and closing tree nodes by clicking on the or icons to the left of the tree node name.
• Selecting node items by clicking on the item in the Model manager window. The item is highlighted
when it is selected.
• Dragging and dropping items to other locations in the tree. To do this, hold down the left mouse button
on an item (for example in the Group, Model, or Materials nodes), drag the item to another area of the
tree, and drop the item into the tree by releasing the left mouse button.
• Selecting and operating on multiple items in the Model manager window by holding down the Control
key while you select items. To select a succession of items (for example, fan.1, fan.2,..., fan.10) select the
first item (for example, fan.1), hold down the Shift key and select the last item (for example, fan.10). All
items between the first item and the last item will become selected in the Model manager window.
• Double-clicking on certain tree items will open a control panel for additional input (for example, to set
project parameters and options, or edit object properties).
The middle mouse button is used in the Model manager window in the following way:
• You can automatically open all tree nodes in the assembly tree structure by clicking the middle mouse
button on the icon.
The right mouse button is used in the Model manager window in the following way:
• You can automatically close all tree nodes in the assembly tree structure by right-clicking the icon.
In addition, there are context menus available in the ANSYS Icepak Model manager window, as de-
scribed in the next section.
3.2.3. Using the Context Menus in the Model manager Window

ANSYS Icepak includes a context menu that you can access by holding down the right mouse button
on certain objects that are selected in the Model manager window. The context menu is useful in
the Model manager window when you want to quickly perform common tasks on the objects in
your model.
User Interface
The Libraries Node Context Menus

When the Libraries node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Create opens the Library path panel where you can change the path settings to include new libraries of
macros and materials so that ANSYS Icepak can find them. See Editing the Library Paths (p. 241) for details.
• Search packages opens the Search package library panel, where you can search through the database
of packages located in the packages library under the Libraries node. Search criteria can be based on
package type, minimum and maximum package dimension, and the number of leads/balls. See Loading
a Package Using the Search Tool (p. 611) for details.
• Search fans opens the Search fan library panel, where you can search through the database of fans
located in the fans library under the Libraries node. Search criteria can be based on physical flow prop-
erties. See Loading a Fan Using the Search Tool (p. 545) for details.
3.3. The Main library Node Context Menu

When the Main library node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Edit opens the Library name and info panel where you can view and edit the library name and information
fields. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
• Find object opens the Find in tree panel where you can search the Model manager window hierarchy for
a specific object. See The Edit Menu (p. 59) for details.
• Paste from clipboard allows you to add objects or materials to the ANSYS Icepak library that you have
placed in the clipboard. See page Using the Clipboard (p. 121) for more information about the clipboard.
• Refresh updates the library if any changes (additions or subtractions) have been made to the library repos-
itory.
3.4. The Materials Node Context Menu

When the Materials node is selected, the context menu has the following option:
• Find material opens the Copy library material panel. You can enter a material name and the panel will
list materials matching your search query. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
3.5. The fans and packages Node Context Menu

When an item in the fans or packages node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Load as object adds the object to your model. See Building a Model (p. 273) for more information about
adding objects.
• Edit as project loads the object into ANSYS Icepak as its own project.
3.5.1. The Groups Node Context Menus

When the Groups node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
The fans and packages Node Context Menu
• Create allows you to name a new group and then add the new group as an item under the Groups node.
When an individual group node is selected under the Groups node (for example, group.1), the context
menu includes the following options:
• Edit opens the Group parameters panel where you can set color, line width, and shading properties for
objects in the group.
• Rename allows you to rename the group.
• Copy opens the Copy group panel where you can copy a group then scale, rotate, translate, or mirror
the copied group.
• Move opens the Move group panel where you can scale, rotate, translate, or mirror a group.
• Delete moves the group to the Trash node.
• Paste from clipboard pastes the group from the clipboard to your model. See page Using the Clip-
board (p. 121) for more information about the clipboard.
• Add allows you to add objects to a group by selecting a point or region on the screen or choosing an
object name or pattern.
• Remove allows you to remove objects from a group by selecting a point or region on the screen or
choosing an object name or pattern.
• Delete all deletes all objects in the group.
• Edit objects opens the object Edit window where you can edit object properties if all objects in the group
are of the same type.
• Visible toggles the display of the group in the graphics window.
• Activate all activates all inactive objects in the group.
• Deactivate all deactivates all active objects in the group.
• Total volume prints the total volume of all objects (excluding CAD objects) from the group in the Message
window.
• Total area prints the total area of all objects (excluding CAD objects) from the group in the Message
window.
• Create assembly creates an assembly out of the group. See Custom Assemblies (p. 357) for details.
• Copy params applies the parameters of the selected object to all objects of the same type in the selected
group.
• Save as project allows you to save the selected group as a separate ANSYS Icepak project.
See Grouping Objects (p. 333) for details about grouping objects.
When an individual item in a Groups node is selected (for example, block.1), the context menu includes
the following options:
User Interface
• Remove from group allows you to remove the object from the group. This option appears in the context
menu only for selected objects under the Groups node.
• Create group allows you to create a group from the selected item.
See Building a Model (p. 273) for more information about editing objects and groups of objects.
3.5.2. The Post-processing Node Context Menu

When an item in the Post-processing node is selected, the context menu includes the following
options:
• Edit allows you to edit the post-processing object.
• Active allows you to toggle the postprocessing object’s activity. If this option is turned off, the post-pro-
cessing object is placed under the Inactive node.
• Show mesh allows you to display or hide the selected post-processing object's mesh.
• Show contours allows you to display or hide the selected post-processing object's contours.
• Show vectors allows you to display or hide the selected post-processing object's vectors.
• Show particle traces allows you to display or hide the selected post-processing object's particle traces.
• Delete moves the post-processing object to the Trash node.
See Examining the Results (p. 877) for more information about post-processing in ANSYS Icepak.
3.5.3. The Points Node Context Menus

When the Points node is selected, the context menu includes the following option:
• Create at location displays the Create Point panel where you can define the location of solution monitor
points. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) for details.
• Paste from clipboard allows you to add objects or materials to the ANSYS Icepak library that you have
placed in the clipboard. See page Using the Clipboard (p. 121) for more information about the clipboard.
When an item in the Points node is selected, the context menu includes the following options (see
Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837)):
• Edit displays the Modify point panel where you can monitor the temperature, pressure, velocity and
species mass fractions at a central point within an object.
• Active allows you to toggle the item’s activity.
• Move displays the Move point panel where you can specify a new coordinate location for an existing
monitor point.
• Copy displays the Copy point panel where you can specify parameters for copying an existing monitor
point.
• Delete deletes the monitor point.
3.5.4. The Surfaces Node Context Menus

When the Surfaces node is selected, the context menu includes the following option:
• Create at surface displays the Create Surface panel where you can define the location of solution
monitor surfaces. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) for details.
When an item in the Surfaces node is selected, the context menu includes the following options (see
Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837)):
• Edit displays the Modify surface panel where you can monitor the mass flow and heat flow on a surface
of an object.
• Delete deletes the monitor surface.
3.5.5. The Trash Node Context Menus

When the Trash node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Paste from clipboard empties the contents of the clipboard into the Trash node. See page Using the
Clipboard (p. 121) for more information about the clipboard.
• Empty trash deletes the contents of the Trash node completely from the ANSYS Icepak project.
When an item in the Trash node is selected, the context menu includes the following option:
• Restore allows you to add the deleted object back to your model.
3.5.6. The Inactive Node Context Menu

When an item in the Inactive node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Edit allows you to edit the properties of the item.
• Rename allows you to rename the item.
• Copy allows you to copy the selected object.
• Move allows you to move the selected object.
• Delete moves the item to the Trash node.
• Add to clipboard copies the item to the clipboard. See page Using the Clipboard (p. 121) for more inform-
ation about the clipboard.
• Paste from clipboard pastes the item from the clipboard to your model. See page Using the Clip-
• Create allows you to create an assembly, group, monitor point, monitor surface, or object face from the
selected item.
User Interface
– Assembly allows you to create an assembly from the selected item.
– Group allows you to create a group from the selected item.
– Monitor point allows you to create monitor points for selected objects. This will also copy the selected
objects from the Model node into the Points node. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) for more
information on object monitor points.
– Monitor surface allows you to create monitor surfaces for selected objects. This will also copy the se-
lected objects from the Model node into the Surfaces node. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837)for
more information on object monitor surfaces.
– Object face(s) allows you to create object faces for selected objects. Newly created object faces will
show up under the Post-processing node. See Displaying Results on Object Faces (p. 884) for more in-
formation on defining object faces.
• Set allows you to set multi-level meshing levels, object mesh parameters, object zone merge settings,
and solar participation settings.
– Multi-level meshing level opens up the Multi-level meshing level panel where you can enter the
multi-level meshing maximum level. See Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh (p. 783) for more
information on editing levels.
– Object mesh params opens up the Per-object parameters panel where you can review and define
meshing parameters specific to the selected object. See General Procedure (p. 793) for more information
on defining object-specific meshing parameters.
– Object zones merge opens up the Merge object zones panel where you can turn off zone merging
for an object or groups of objects. By default the option Don't merge object zones is off. This option
has the effect of writing a separate zone for each of the selected object(s) in the solver to enable the
specification of certain boundary conditions. If this option is turned on, the Merge zones when possible
option in the Solve panel should be turned on to turn off zone merging for that object(s). This option
cannot be used for Cabinet, assemblies, or materials.
– Solar particpation opens up the Solar loading panel. By default, when Solar loading is enabled on
the Basic parameters Advanced tab, the option Participate in solar loading is turned on. If this option
is turned off for a given object, the object does not participate in solar loading.
• Display options allows you to Set shading and/or Set transparency for objects. See Graphical Style (p. 311)
for more information on displaying graphical style options.
• Visible allows you to toggle the item’s visibility. Hidden objects appear in the Model manager window
as grayed-out items and are not visible in the graphics window. This allows you to view and edit portions
of your model while hiding the rest.
• Total volume prints the total volume of selected objects (excluding CAD objects) in the Message window.
• Total area prints the total area of selected objects (excluding CAD objects) in the Message window.
• Summary report allows you to create entries in the Define summary report panel for selected objects.
Combined creates a single entry for the selected objects. Separate creates an entry for each selected
object. When you select Combined or Separate, the Define summary report panel is displayed to define
report parameters. Custom opens the Custom report panel where you can specify report parameters.
See Figure 3.45: The Custom Report Panel (p. 117). See Summary Reports (p. 943) for more information on
creating a summary report.
Figure 3.45: The Custom Report Panel
3.5.7. The Model Node Context Menus

When the Model node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Create object allows you to add an ANSYS Icepak object (for example, block, fan, and so on) to your
model.
• Find object opens the Find in tree panel where you can search the Model manager window hierarchy
for a specific object. See The Edit Menu (p. 59) for details.
• Paste from clipboard empties the contents of the clipboard into your model. See page Using the Clip-
• Merge project allows you to merge an existing project with your current project using the Merge project
panel.
• Load assembly allows you to load an assembly as another ANSYS Icepak project using the Load project
panel.
• Sort allows you to sort the tree hierarchy. Options include:
– Alphabetical sorts objects alphabetically by their names.
– Meshing priority sorts objects by their meshing priority.
– Creation order sorts objects by their order of creation in the model (default).
• Object view allows you to customize the method in which objects in the tree hierarchy are organized.
Options include:
– Flat arranges objects in the order they are created.
– Types groups objects in the tree hierarchy by object type.
– Types/subtypes groups objects in the tree hierarchy by object type and subtype.
User Interface
– Types/subtypes/shapes groups objects in the tree hierarchy by object type, subtype, and shape.
When an item in the Model node is selected (with the exception of the Cabinet, the Materials node,
and any assemblies), the context menu includes the following options:
• Add to clipboard copies the item to the clipboard. See page Using the Clipboard (p. 121) for more inform-
ation about the clipboard.
• Paste from clipboard pastes the item from the clipboard to your model. See page Using the Clip-
selected item.
objects from the Model node into the Points node. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) for more
information on object monitor points.
– Monitor surface allows you to create monitor surfaces for selected objects. This will also copy the se-
lected objects from the Model node into the Surfaces node. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837)for
more information on object monitor surfaces.
– Object face(s) allows you to create object faces for selected objects. Newly created object faces will
show up under the Post-processing node. See Displaying Results on Object Faces (p. 884) for more in-
formation on defining object faces.
• Set allows you to set multi-level meshing levels, object mesh parameters, object zone merge settings,
and solar participation settings.
– Multi-level meshing level opens up the Multi-level meshing level panel where you can enter the
multi-level meshing maximum level. See Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh (p. 783) for more
information on editing levels.
– Object zones merge opens up the Merge object zones panel where you can turn off zone merging
for an object or groups of objects. By default the option Don't merge object zones is off. This option
has the effect of writing a separate zone for each of the selected object(s) in the solver to enable the
The Cabinet Context Menu
specification of certain boundary conditions. If this option is turned on, the Merge zones when possible
option in the Solve panel should be turned on to turn off zone merging for that object(s). This option
cannot be used for Cabinet, assemblies, or materials.
– Solar particpation opens up the Solar loading panel. By default, when Solar loading is enabled on
the Basic parameters Advanced tab, the option Participate in solar loading is turned on. If this option
is turned off for a given object, the object does not participate in solar loading.
• EM Mapping allows you to open the Volumetric heat losses panel or Surface heat losses panel. Only
objects selected in the Model manager appear in the list. Either hold shift and select multiple objects or
use shift and left mouse key to interactively select objects in a region to display more than one object in
the list. To display all objects of an assembly in the panel, select the assembly and one of its member objects
in the Model manager, right-click the selected member object, and select EM Mapping and then Volu-
metric heat loss or Surface heat loss.
• Visible allows you to toggle the item’s visibility. Hidden objects appear in the Model manager window
as grayed out items and are not visible in the graphics window. This allows you to view and edit portions
of your model while hiding the rest.
• Summary report allows you to create entries in the Define summary report panel for selected objects.
Combined creates a single entry for the selected objects. Separate creates an entry for each selected
object. When you select Combined or Separate, the Define summary report panel is displayed to define
report parameters. Custom opens the Custom report panel where you can specify report parameters.
See Figure 3.45: The Custom Report Panel (p. 117). See Summary Reports (p. 943) for more information on
creating a summary report.
See Building a Model (p. 273) for more information about adding objects and assemblies to your
model, as well as about editing objects and groups of objects.
3.6. The Cabinet Context Menu

When the Cabinet in the Model node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Visible allows you to toggle the item’s visibility. Hidden objects appear in the Model manager window as
grayed out items and are not visible in the graphics window. This allows you to view and edit portions of
your model while hiding the rest.
• Add to clipboard copies the item to the clipboard. See page Using the Clipboard (p. 121) for more information
about the clipboard.
• Paste from clipboard pastes the item from the clipboard to your model. See page Using the Clipboard (p. 121)
for more information about the clipboard.
User Interface
• Total volume prints the total volume of the selected object (excluding a CAD object) in the Message window.
• Total area prints the total area of the selected object (excluding a CAD object) in the Message window.
3.7. The Materials Node Context Menu

When an item in the Materials node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Copy copies the item and adds it to your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Delete moves the material item to the Trash node.
See Material Properties (p. 339) for more information about materials.
3.8. The Assembly Node Context Menu

When an assembly node is selected, the context menu includes the following options:
• Edit allows you to edit the properties of the assembly item.
• Active allows you to toggle the assembly item’s activity.
• Rename allows you to rename the assembly item.
• Copy allows you to copy the selected assembly object.
• Move allows you to move the selected assembly object.
• Delete moves the assembly item to the Trash node.
• Create object allows you to create another ANSYS Icepak object (for example block, fan, and so on) and
adds it to the assembly.
• Create assembly allows you to create an assembly from the selected assembly item.
• Delete assembly moves items within an assembly to the level of the assembly node and moves the assembly
to the Trash node.
Using the Context Menus in the Graphics Display Window
• Visible allows you to toggle the assembly item’s visibility.
• View separately allows you to move the assembly item up to the level of the Model node in the Model
manager window.
• Merge project you to merge an existing project with your current project using the Merge project panel.
See Reading, Writing, and Managing Files (p. 143) for more details.
• Load assembly allows you to load an assembly as another ANSYS Icepak project using the Load project
panel.
• Save as project saves the assembly as an ANSYS Icepak project.
• Edit mesh parameters opens up the Per-object parameters panel where you can review and define
meshing parameters specific to the selected object. See General Procedure (p. 793) for more information on
defining object-specific meshing parameters.
• Total volume prints the total volume of all objects (excluding CAD objects) from the assembly in the Message
window.
• Total area prints the total area of all objects (excluding CAD objects) from the assembly in the Message
window.
• Summary information opens the Assembly contents panel which lists the total number of objects in the
assembly along with the number of objects of each individual object-type (see Summary Information for
an Assembly (p. 367)).
See Custom Assemblies (p. 357) for more information about assemblies.
3.8.1. Using the Clipboard

In the Libraries, Groups, Inactive, and Model nodes (including items within the Materials node or
an Assembly node under the Model node) of the Model manager window, the context menu allows
you to copy items to a temporary holding area called a clipboard. You can select objects from these
nodes, copy them to the clipboard and paste them into other nodes of the Model manager window
(Libraries, Groups, Monitor points, Monitor surfaces, Inactive, Trash, and Model nodes). The
clipboard is especially useful when you have a large ANSYS Icepak model and you need to move one
or more objects from one node of the Model manager window to another.
To use the clipboard, right-click an appropriate item and select Add to clipboard from the resulting
context menu. Next, right-click the destination node in the Model manager window and select Paste
from clipboard.
You can add more than one item to the clipboard by selecting multiple items in the Model manager
window while holding down the Control key, displaying the context menu, and using the Add to
clipboard option. When an item has been added to the clipboard, ANSYS Icepak displays the number
of clipboard items under the Model manager window.
3.9. Using the Context Menus in the Graphics Display Window

You can access a context menu in the Graphics display window by holding down the Shift key and
the right mouse button near the edges of an object or on a postprocessing legend. The context menu
User Interface
allows you to quickly perform common tasks on the objects in your model. Context menu options may
be slightly different depending on the type of object selected.
Note:
If Set <Shift-RightClick> to object menu is not enabled in the Preferences tab, the context
menu will not appear for an object. Instead, the interactive object resize feature will be en-
abled. See Changing the Mouse Controls (p. 130) for more details.
The Graphics display context menu includes the following options:
• Active allows you to toggle the item's activity.
• Rename allows you to rename the selected object.
selected item.
objects from the Model node into the Points node. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) for more in-
formation on object monitor points.
– Monitor surface allows you to create monitor surfaces for selected objects. This will also copy the selected
objects from the Model node into the Surfaces node. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837)for more
information on object monitor surfaces.
– Object face(s) allows you to create object faces for selected objects. Newly created object faces will show
up under the Post-processing node. See Displaying Results on Object Faces (p. 884) for more information
on defining object faces.
• Set allows you to set multi-level meshing levels, object mesh parameters, object zone merge settings, and
solar participation settings.
– Multi-level meshing level opens up the Multi-level meshing level panel where you can enter the multi-
level meshing maximum level. See Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh (p. 783) for more inform-
ation on editing levels.
– Object zones merge opens up the Merge object zones panel where you can turn off zone merging for
an object or groups of objects. By default the option Don't merge object zones is off. This option has
the effect of writing a separate zone for each of the selected object(s) in the solver to enable the specific-
ation of certain boundary conditions. If this option is turned on, the Merge zones when possible option
in the Solve panel should be turned on to turn off zone merging for that object(s). This option cannot be
used for Cabinet, assemblies, or materials.
– Solar particpation opens up the Solar loading panel. By default, when Solar loading is enabled on the
Basic parameters Advanced tab, the option Participate in solar loading is turned on. If this option is
turned off for a given object, the object does not participate in solar loading.
• EM Mapping allows you to open the Volumetric heat losses panel or Surface heat losses panel. Only the
object selected in the Model Display window appears in the list.
Note:
To display all objects of an assembly in the panel, select the assembly and one of its
member objects in the Model Display window, right-click the selected member object in
the Model manager, and select EM Mapping and then Volumetric heat loss or Surface
heat loss.
• Visible allows you to toggle the item's visibility. Hidden object appear in the Model manager window as
grayed out items and are visible in the graphics window. This allows you to view and edit portions of your
model while hiding the rest.
• Summary report opens the Define summary report panel where you can specify a summary report for a
variable on any or all objects in your ANSYS Icepak model. See Summary Reports (p. 943) for more information
on creating a summary report.
User Interface
Figure 3.46: Object Context Menu
You can access another context menu in the Graphics display window by holding down the Shift key
and the right mouse button anywhere in the Graphics display window away from the edges of objects
or post processing objects. The context menu allows you to quickly perform common tasks in your
model.
• Clear Selection allows you to remove all selected objects in the graphics window.
• Filter object type allows filtering of objects by object type from a preselected list of objects.
• Orient allows you to modify the direction from which you view your model. Besides selecting the view along
the x, y, and z axis, you can scale it to fit exactly within the graphics window.
– Isometric views the model from the direction of the vector equidistant to all three axes.
– Scale to fit model adjusts the overall size of your model to take maximum advantage of the graphics
width and height.
– Orient positive x, y, z views the model toward the direction of the positive x, y, or z axis.
– Orient negative x, y, z views the model toward the direction of the negative x, y, or z axis.
• Default shading allows options that control the rendering of your ANSYS Icepak model.
– Wire outlines the model's outer edges and those of its components.
– Solid adds solid-tone shading to the visible surfaces of the model's internal components to give them a
solid appearance.
– Solid/wire adds solid-tone shading to the visible surfaces of the object currently selected in the object
Edit window to give it a solid appearance. Also, an outline of the surfaces will be displayed in either white
or black depending on the background color.
– Hidden Line activates the hidden line removal algorithm, which makes objects that are drawn to look
transparent now appear to be solid.
– Selected solid highlights selected objects to give them a solid appearance. If Solid fill is selected in the
mesh Display tab, then the solid fill color of the mesh will take precedent. Otherwise this option overrides
all previous object display settings.
• Default transparency allows options that control the transparency of your ANSYS Icepak model.
– Off allows for all objects in your model to appear opaque, transparency is turned off. Off is the default
setting.
– % allows for all objects to be transparent to a certain percentage. In the case of the Solid/ wire option,
the transparency will be seen on the faces only, not the edges.
• Scale to fit object adjusts viewer to focus on the selected object in the model and displays it at full screen
view. When multiple objects are selected, the viewer will focus on the first selected object.
• Display mesh allows you to display a mesh on the surfaces of all the objects in the model.
• Display cut plane mesh allows you to display a plane-cut view of the mesh.
• Min/max locations allow you to display the location of the minimum and maximum values for post processed
variables.
• Power and Temperature Values opens the Power and temperature limit setup panel where you can set
up and review the power of objects and temperature limits, as well as compare the temperature limits with
the object temperatures.
User Interface
Figure 3.47: Graphics Display Context Menu
You can access a third context menu in the Graphics display window by selecting a plane cut or a
point object in the Graphics display window by holding down the Shift key and the right mouse
button. The context menu allows you to quickly edit, activate, or delete post processing objects in your
model. Plane cut and point objects can be easily moved through the model. Hold down the Shift key,
press and hold down the middle mouse button and drag the point or plane cut through the model in
the graphics display.
• Edit allows you to edit the properties of the post processing object.
• Active allows you to toggle the item's activity.
• Show mesh allows you to toggle grid display.
• Show contour allows you to toggle contours display.
• Show vector allows you to toggle vectors display.
• Show particle traces allows you to toggle particle traces display.
Figure 3.48: Post processing Context Menu
Lastly, you can access a context menu in the Graphics display window by holding down the Shift key
and the right mouse button on a postprocessing legend. The context menu allows you to quickly perform
common tasks on a legend in your model.
• Set levels allow you to display different levels of the legend. Select Set levels in the context menu and
enter the number of levels in the Set levels panel. Click Accept to update the legend.
Note:
The number of levels should be at least two.
• Set orientation allows you to display the legend horizontally or vertically. Select Set orientation in the
context menu and click Vertical or Horizontal to update the legend.
User Interface
To permanently retain changes made to the orientation and/or levels of the legend, save the project
before exiting Icepak. If not, then changes made to the legend shall be retained only in the active session.
Figure 3.49: Legend Context Menu
3.10. Manipulating Graphics With the Mouse

You can modify the view of your ANSYS Icepak model in the graphics window using the mouse. You
can use the mouse buttons (left, right, and middle), either alone or in combination with a keystroke, to
perform the following graphic manipulation functions:
• Rotating, translating, and zooming in on the entire model
• Adding, selecting, translating, and resizing individual objects
• Selecting and translating title, date, and axes
• Changing the spectrum on the color legend
Manipulating Graphics With the Mouse
You can change the default mouse controls in ANSYS Icepak to suit your preferences using the Mouse
buttons section of the Preferences and settings panel (Figure 3.50: The Mouse buttons section of the
Preferences panel (p. 131)).
Edit Preferences
3.10.1. Rotating a Model

To rotate your model about a central point on the graphics display, position the cursor over the
model, hold down the left mouse button (or the button that you specified as the 3D Rotate button
in the Mouse buttons section of the Preferences panel), and move the mouse in any direction. To
rotate about an axis perpendicular to the screen, hold down the right mouse button (or the button
that you specified as the Scale/2D Rotate button in the Mouse buttons section of the Preferences
panel) and move the mouse to the left and right.
To change the center of rotation on the graphics display, enable the Set rotation around mouse
selected point option in the Mouse buttons section of the Preferences panel and select a point in
the graphics display. The model will rotate about the new center.
3.10.2. Translating a Model

To translate your model to any point on the screen, position the cursor over the model, hold down
the middle mouse button (or the button that you specified as the Translate button in the Mouse
buttons section of the Preferences panel), and move the mouse to a new location.
3.10.3. Zooming In and Out

To zoom into your model, position the cursor over the model, hold down the right mouse button (or
the button that you specified as the Scale/2D Rotate button in the Mouse buttons section of the
Preferences panel), and move the mouse up (or in the direction that you specified as the Zoom in
direction in the Mouse buttons section of the Preferences panel). To zoom out from your model,
hold down the mouse button and move the mouse in the opposite direction.
3.10.4. Adding Objects to the Model

To add objects to your ANSYS Icepak model using the mouse, hold down the left mouse button on
one of the buttons in the Object creation toolbar (for example, wall, fan, opening, and so on) and
drag the cursor inside the graphics window. The new object will appear inside the cabinet and you
can continue to drag the object in the graphics window. Release the mouse button to set the object’s
position in the graphics window.
3.10.5. Selecting Objects within a Model

To select an individual object in the graphics display, hold down the Shift key and use the left mouse
button (or the button that you specified as the Select/2D Rotate button in the Mouse buttons
section of the Preferences panel) to click the object.
To select multiple objects in the graphics display, hold down the Shift key and use the right mouse
button to display the context menu. To choose objects of a particular type from the list of selected
objects, use the Filter object type option to filter remaining object type(s) from the list. After setting
User Interface
the Filter object type, draw a box around the model using the Shift key and right mouse button. The
objects, of type selected in Filter object type option, will be highlighted in the Model manager.
By default, the All option is selected to return all objects to the initial selection list. To add another
object type to the filtered object type list, again use Filter object type with a different (intended)
object type. After setting the Filter object type, draw a box around the model using the Ctrl key
and right mouse button. The objects, of type selected in the Filter object type option, will be high-
lighted in the Model manager, in addition to previously selected objects of chosen type.
Note:
Object types such as blocks and packages have additional sub-options such as With traces
and All where the All sub-option will select all block objects irrespective of their type or
geometry and with or without traces. The With traces sub-option will select blocks only
with traces. This same concept applies to package objects.
3.10.6. Translating Objects within a Model

To translate an individual object in a model, hold down the Shift key and use the middle mouse
button (or the button that you specified as the Translate button in the Mouse buttons section of
the Preferences panel) to select the object and drag it to its new location.
You can also snap an object to the nearest edge or vertex of existing geometry while you are trans-
lating the object. See Configuring a Project (p. 234) for details about enabling this feature.
3.10.7. Resizing Objects within a Model

To resize an individual object in a model, hold down the Shift key, use the right mouse button (or
the button specified as the Scale/2D Rotate button in the Mouse buttons section of the Preferences
panel) to select the object, and then move the mouse to shrink or enlarge the object.
3.10.8. Moving the Display Identifiers

To move the title, date, coordinate axes, and color legend in the graphics display, hold down the
Control key (or the key specified as the Annotation edit key in the Editing section of the Preferences
panel, described in Configuring a Project (p. 234)), use the middle mouse button to select an identifier,
and then move the mouse to a new location.
3.10.9. Changing the Color Spectrum

To change the spectrum of color in the graphics display, position the cursor over the color spectrum,
hold down the Control key (or the key specified as the Annotation edit key in the Editing section
of the Preferences panel, described in Configuring a Project (p. 234)), press and hold down the right
mouse button, and drag the legend value lines up or down the spectrum.
3.10.10. Changing the Mouse Controls

You can change the default mouse controls in ANSYS Icepak to suit your preferences using the Mouse
buttons section of the Preferences panel.
Manipulating Graphics With the Mouse
Edit Preferences
Figure 3.50: The Mouse buttons section of the Preferences panel
To change the default mouse control for a manipulation function, select the relevant button (Left,
Middle, or Right). Translate a model quickly or slowly by changing the Wheel sensitivity value. The
higher numbers allow for quick and large movements and the lower numbers allow for smaller incre-
mental movements of your model. If Wheel sensitivity is not enabled, you cannot translate a model.
Enable Set Classic Display Cursors to restore the display of the cursors to the one used prior to
ANSYS Icepak 12.0 and the rotation cursors will no longer be displayed in the graphics window. By
default, Set <Shift-RightClick> to object menu is enabled to display an object menu when you
perform Shift+right-click an object. If this option is not enabled, performing a Shift+right-click activates
the interactive object resize feature. Set rotation around mouse selected point allows you to select
a point in the graphics display window using the mouse and rotate a model around this selection.
You can apply the changes either to the current project by clicking This project, or to all ANSYS
Icepak projects by clicking All projects button. To close the Preferences panel without applying any
changes, click Cancel.
Note:
• In this manual, descriptions of operations that use the mouse assume that you are using the
default settings for the mouse controls. If you change the default mouse controls, you will
need to use the mouse buttons you have specified, instead of the mouse buttons that the
manual tells you to use.
• The 3D Rotate button is active when Set Classic Display Cursors is enabled.
3.10.11. Switching Between Modes

When you are using the mouse for a specific function in the graphics window other than manipulating
graphics (described in Manipulating Graphics With the Mouse (p. 128)), you can switch between the
specific function and the graphics manipulation functions using the F9 key on the keyboard. For ex-
ample, if you are using the Probe option in the postprocessing objects Edit window to display the
value of a variable at a point, and you want to rotate your model to see the value of the variable,
press the F9 key on the keyboard to switch the mode of the mouse from the Probe function to the
graphics manipulation functions, and then use the mouse to rotate the display. When you have finished
User Interface
manipulating the graphics, press the F9 key to switch the mode of the mouse back to the Probe
function.
3.11. Triad (coordinate axis) and Rotation Cursors

The triad and rotation cursors allow you to control the viewing orientation as described below.
• Triad (coordinate axis)
– Located in the lower left corner.
– Positive directions arrows are labeled and color-coded. Negative direction arrows display only when you
hover the mouse cursor over the particular region.
– Clicking an arrow animates the view such that the arrow points out of the screen.
– Arrows and the isometric sphere highlight when you point at them.
– Isometric sphere visualizes the location of the isometric view relative to the current view.
– Clicking the sphere animates the view to isometric.
• Rotation Cursors
– Free rotation ( )
– Rotation around an axis that points out of the screen (roll) ( )
– Rotation around a vertical axis relative to the screen (“yaw" axis) ( )
– Rotation around a horizontal axis relative to the screen (“pitch" axis) ( )
3.11.1. Pointer Modes

The type of rotation depends on the starting location of the cursor. In general, if the cursor is near
the center of the graphics window, the familiar 3D free rotation occurs. If the cursor is near a corner
or edge, a constrained rotation occurs: pitch, yaw or roll.
3-D Input Device Support
Figure 3.51: Cursor Rotation Behavior
3.12. 3-D Input Device Support

ANSYS Icepak has been tested with 3Dconnexion mouse devices. These devices detect slight fingertip
pressures and resolve them into X, Y, and Z translations, rotation components, and movements of your
3-D images. They are intended to provide smooth, dynamic, interactive, simultaneous six-degree-of-
freedom control of 3-D graphical images or objects. These devices are designed to be used in conjunction
with the mouse, not in place of it.
The requisite developer's kit software had been included in the applicable code, and drivers for the
system you are installing to are available at http://www.3dconnexion.com/downlink.asp.
If problems are encountered, try loading different drivers for the devices, either older drivers, or drivers
from similar operating systems. Legacy drivers for older models of these devices are also available.
User Interface
Please contact the appropriate manufacturer if you have any questions, or require any additional inform-
ation about the devices.
Note:
The Fit and View button features on 3Dconnexion mouse devices are not currently supported
in ANSYS Icepak.
See ANSYS.com > Support > Platform Support for a complete list of 3Dconnexion products certified
with the current release of ANSYS applications.
3.13. Using the Keyboard

You can also use the keyboard to modify the direction from which you view your model in the graphics
window. The “hot keys" that are available in ANSYS Icepak are listed below. You can view help for these
keys in the Message window by selecting the List shortcuts option under the Help menu, or by typing
? in the ANSYS Icepak graphics window.
Note:
These hot-keys are case-sensitive.
• Ctrl+a toggles active objects
• Ctrl+c copies and moves selected objects or groups
• Ctrl+e edits an object or postprocessing object
• Ctrl+f finds in tree
• Ctrl+h toggles shading of selected objects
• Ctrl+l opens the main version of the model
• Ctrl+m opens/closes the Model subtree
• Ctrl+n creates a new project
• Ctrl+o opens an existing project
• Ctrl+p prints the screen
• Ctrl+r performs a redo of one or more previously undone operations
• Ctrl+s saves the project
• Ctrl+t opens/closes the currently-selected tree node
• Ctrl+v toggles object visibility
• Ctrl+w toggles between solid, solid/wire, and wire shading of the model.
• Ctrl+x moves selected objects
Quitting ANSYS Icepak
• Ctrl+z performs an undo of the previous operation to the model
• Delete deletes the current object
• F1 displays the main help page for ANSYS Icepak
• F5 sets the model’s wireframe offset
• F6 sets the model’s wireframe offset to 0
• F7 increments the model’s wireframe offset. This allows the lines in your model to be drawn at a different
depth than the solid colors. ANSYS Icepak will move the lines forward toward you.
• F8 decrements the model’s wireframe offset. This allows the lines in your model to be drawn at a different
depth than the solid colors. ANSYS Icepak will move the lines away from you.
• F9 toggles between interactive object resize feature and object menu.
• Shift+f adjusts the Icepak graphics window to focus on the selected object in the model and displays it at
full screen view.
• Shift+i displays the isometric view of the model.
• Shift+p displays the Preferences panel.
• Shift+r displays the reverse view of the model.
• Shift+x views the model toward the direction of the negative axis.
• Shift+y views the model toward the direction of the positive axis.
• Shift+z views the model toward the direction of the negative axis.
• Shift+? prints the keyboard shortcuts in the Message window.
• Shift+LMB creates a selector region in the Icepak graphics window by dragging the mouse to dynamically
select object(s) within the region.
• h selects the default view of your model directed along the negative axis.
• s scales the view to fit the graphics window.
• z allows you to focus on any part of your model by opening and resizing a window around the desired area.
Position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area to be zoomed, hold down the left mouse button and drag
open a selection box to the desired size, and then release the mouse button. The selected area will then fill
the graphics window.
In addition, each menu in the Main Menu bar has a keyboard shortcut so that the menu and its options
can be accessed using the keyboard. A combination of the Alt key and the underlined letter in the
menu label will open the menu using the keyboard. You can then use the arrow keys on the keyboard
to scroll through the menu’s options and sub-options.
3.14. Quitting ANSYS Icepak

You can exit ANSYS Icepak by selecting Quit in the File menu.
User Interface
File Quit
If the present state of the project has not been written to a file, you will receive a warning message as
shown in Figure 3.52: Warning Message Displayed When Quitting ANSYS Icepak Before Saving Your
Model (p. 136).
Figure 3.52: Warning Message Displayed When Quitting ANSYS Icepak Before Saving Your Model
You can save the current project and quit ANSYS Icepak by clicking the Save and quit button. You can
quit ANSYS Icepak without saving the current job by clicking the Quit without saving button. To cancel
the quit, click the Cancel quit button.
Chapter 4: ANSYS Icepak in Workbench
The ANSYS Icepak application can be used as a stand-alone product or within the ANSYS Workbench
framework. See The ANSYS File Menu (p. 137) and The ANSYS Icepak Toolbar (p. 139) for a description of
the File menu and File commands toolbar options for running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench. A tutorial
or sample session is shown in the Workbench online help to introduce you to solving an ANSYS Ice-
pak model in Workbench.
• The ANSYS File Menu (p. 137)
• The ANSYS Icepak Toolbar (p. 139)
• Using Icepak With Remote Solve Manager (RSM) (p. 139)
• The Preferences Panel (p. 140)
Interoperability within ANSYS Workbench

For information about performing a thermal modeling analysis using ANSYS Icepak, see Electronics in
the ANSYS DesignModeler application help.
For detailed information about creating a utility Icepak system in the Project Schematic, see Icepak in
the ANSYS Workbench User's Guide.
4.1. The ANSYS File Menu

When running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench, the File menu options are slightly different. The following
options are no longer available. New project, Open project, Save Project as, Unpack and Quit. Instead,
the File menu options in the Workbench interface are used to create, open, save and exit projects. The
File menu options are described below.
ANSYS Icepak in Workbench
Refresh Input Data refreshes the current data with new input data.
project panel.
your project has multiple versions. See Defining a Project (p. 223) for more information.
Import provides options to import tetin file geometries into ANSYS Icepak. You can also import
powermap and IDF files, as well as comma separated values or spreadsheet format (CSV) using this
option. See Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159) for more information about importing files.
Export enables you to export your work as IDF 2.0 or 3.0 library files, comma separated values or
spreadsheet format (CSV), and also STEP or tetin files. See Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159)
for more information about exporting files.
Pack project opens a File selection dialog box that enables you to compact your project into a com-
pressed .tzr file.
Cleanup enables you to clean up your project by removing or compressing data related to ECAD, mesh,
postprocessing, screen captures, summary output, reports, and scratch files using the Clean up project
data panel.
Using Icepak With Remote Solve Manager (RSM)
the graphics window using the Print options panel. The inputs for the Print options panel are similar
to those in the Graphics file options panel. See Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details.
Create image file opens a Save image dialog box that enables you to save your model displayed in
the graphics window to an image file. Supported file types include: PNG, GIF (8-bit color), JPEG, PPM,
TIFF, VRML, and PS. PNG is the default file type.
Shell window opens a separate window running an operating system shell. The window is initially in
the subdirectory of the ANSYS Icepak projects directory that contains all the files for the current projects.
In this window you can issue commands to the operating system without exiting ANSYS Icepak. Type
exit in the window to close the window when you are finished using it. Note that on Windows machines,
this menu item appears as Command prompt.
Close Icepak exits the ANSYS Icepak application. See Quitting ANSYS Icepak (p. 135) for details.
4.2. The ANSYS Icepak Toolbar

When running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench, the File commands toolbar options are slightly different.
The following options are no longer available: New project, Open project, and Save project. The File
commands toolbar options are described below.
Save Project ( ) saves the current ANSYS Icepak project.
Refresh Input Data ( ) refreshes the current data with new input data.
Print screen ( ) enables you to print a PostScript image of the ANSYS Icepak model that is displayed
in the graphics window using the Print options panel. The inputs for the Print options panel are
Create image file ( ) opens a Save image dialog box that enables you to save your model displayed
in the graphics window to an image file. Supported file types include: PNG, PPM, GIF (8-bit color), JPEG,
TIFF, VRML and PS. PNG is the default file type.
4.3. Using Icepak With Remote Solve Manager (RSM)

The Remote Solve Manager (RSM) is a job queuing system used to distribute tasks that require computing
resources. RSM schedules and manages tasks within Workbench and allows tasks to be sent only to the
local machine to run in background mode, or they can be broken into a series of jobs for parallel pro-
cessing.
For more information about using Icepak in Workbench and RSM (with associated limitations), see
Submitting Solutions to Remote Solve Manager and Submitting Icepak Jobs to Remote Solve Manager.
ANSYS Icepak in Workbench
4.4. The Preferences Panel

You can configure your graphical user interface for the current project you are running, or for all ANSYS
Icepak projects, using the Options node of the Preferences panel (Figure 8.8: The Preferences Pan-
el (p. 234)). When running ANSYS Icepak in ANSYS Workbench, the Preferences options are slightly dif-
ferent. An additional option is included in the Editing node.
The option Use DM object names is available only when running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench. When
this option is enabled, any changes made to object names in DesignModeler will be updated in ANSYS
Icepak.
Note:
When working in Icepak in Workbench, the Workbench color scheme is used only if Use
Workbench Color Scheme is selected in the properties of the Icepak project Setup cell.
Otherwise, the Icepak Display preferences are used.
The Preferences Panel
Figure 4.1: Editing Options of the Preferences Panel
Chapter 5: Reading, Writing, and Managing Files
This chapter describes the files that are read into and written out by ANSYS Icepak, and how ANSYS
Icepak manages these files. Files that can be imported into ANSYS Icepak from third-party packages (for
example, IDF files) are discussed in Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159). Information in this
chapter is divided into the following sections:
• Overview of Files Written and Read by ANSYS Icepak (p. 143)
• Files Created by ANSYS Icepak (p. 144)
• Merging Model Data (p. 146)
• Saving a Project File (p. 149)
• Saving Image Files (p. 152)
• Packing and Unpacking Model Files (p. 156)
• Cleaning up the Project Data (p. 156)
5.1. Overview of Files Written and Read by ANSYS Icepak

Table 5.1: Files Written or Read by ANSYS Icepak (p. 143) lists the files that ANSYS Icepak can read and/or
write. You can use this table to get an overview of the files you may be using, to find out which codes
write to a particular file, and to see where to look for more information on each file.
Table 5.1: Files Written or Read by ANSYS Icepak
File Created Used by Default Suffix See...

Type by or Filename
Model ANSYS ANSYS Icepak model Problem Setup
Icepak Files (p. 145)
Problem ANSYS ANSYS Icepak problem Problem Setup
Job ANSYS ANSYS Icepak job Problem Setup
Mesh ANSYS mesher grid_input Mesh Files (p. 145)
input Icepak
Mesh mesher ANSYS Icepak grid_output Mesh Files (p. 145)
output
Case ANSYS Fluent .cas Solver Files (p. 145)
Icepak
Data Fluent Fluent .dat and .fd- Solver Files (p. 145)
at
Reading, Writing, and Managing Files
File Created Used by Default Suffix See...

Type by or Filename
Residual Fluent ANSYS Icepak .res Solver Files (p. 145)
Script ANSYS ANSYS Icepak .SCRIPT or Solver Files (p. 145)
Icepak _scr.bat
Solver ANSYS Fluent .uns_in Solver Files (p. 145)
input Icepak
Solver Fluent – .uns_out Solver Files (p. 145)
output
Diagnostic ANSYS – .diag Solver Files (p. 145)
Icepak
Optimization ANSYS optimizer .log, .dat, Optimization
Icepak .tab .post, Files (p. 146)
and .rpt
Postprocessing Fluent ANSYS Icepak .resd Postprocessing
Files (p. 146)
Log ANSYS ANSYS Icepak .log The Message
Icepak Window (p. 97)
Geometry assorted ANSYS Icepak .igs, .stp, Importing and
and so on Exporting Model
Files (p. 159)
Image ANSYS assorted .png, .gif, Saving Image
Icepak .jpg, .ppm, Files (p. 152)
.tiff, .vrml,
and .ps
Packaged ANSYS ANSYS Icepak .tzr Packing and Unpacking
Icepak Model Files (p. 156)
Metadata ANSYS ANSYS .xml Metadata Files (p. 146)
Icepak Engineering
Knowledge
Manager
5.2. Files Created by ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak creates files during the course of a simulation that are related to setting up the problem,
generating a mesh, calculating a solution, and postprocessing the results. These files are described below.
• Problem Setup Files (p. 145)
• Mesh Files (p. 145)
• Solver Files (p. 145)
• Optimization Files (p. 146)
• Postprocessing Files (p. 146)
• Metadata Files (p. 146)
Files Created by ANSYS Icepak
5.2.1. Problem Setup Files

ANSYS Icepak creates several files that relate to the setup of the simulation:
• The model file contains information related to the model: boundary conditions and geometry information.
• The problem file contains information on the settings for the problem: the under-relaxation factors, units
for objects in the model, information on the color of objects, parameters for the mesh generator, units to
be used for postprocessing, and information on default settings in the model.
• The job file has information on the project title and notes for the model.
ANSYS Icepak saves each of these files for the current project when you save the project.
ANSYS Icepak also saves different versions of the model and problem files for different version
numbers of the same project. For example, if you want to run the same problem using different power
settings for a component, then each solution can be saved using a different solution ID. The model
and problem files for each solution will be saved using a different name, for example, project-
name.model and projectname.problem.
5.2.2. Mesh Files

The meshing procedure in ANSYS Icepak creates two files that relate to the generation of the mesh
for your simulation:
• The mesh input file (for example, grid_input) contains the inputs for the mesh generator.
• The mesh output file (for example, grid_output) contains the output from the mesh generator; that
is, the mesh file.
5.2.3. Solver Files

ANSYS Icepak creates several files that are used by the solver to start the calculation:
• The case file (projectname.cas) contains all the information that is needed by ANSYS Icepak to run
the solver.
• The diagnostic file (projectname.diag) contains information about the correspondence between
object names in the model file and object names in the case file.
• The solver input file (projectname.uns_in) is read by the solver to start the calculation.
• The script file (projectname.SCRIPT on Linux systems, projectname_scr.bat on Windows systems)

runs the solver executable, and can also be used to run the solver in batch mode.
Two files are created while the solver is running:
• The residual file (projectname.res) contains information about the convergence monitors.
• The solver output file (projectname.uns_out) contains information from the solver that is displayed
on the screen during the calculation. Note that this file is written only on Linux systems.
The solver saves two files when it has finished calculating: projectname.dat and projectname.fd-
at. These data files can be used to restart the solver (see Using the Solve Panel to Set the Solver
Controls (p. 842)).
5.2.4. Optimization Files

ANSYS Icepak creates several files that are used during an optimization process:
• The log file (optimization.log) contains information about all the trials performed during the optim-
ization run. It also contains design variable inputs and optimizer outputs.
• The input file (in.dat) is the input file that is read by the optimizer.
• The output file (out.dat) is the output file that is written out by the optimizer.
• The tab file (optimization.tab) contains the optimization data displayed in the Optimization run
panel (see Optimization (p. 679)). This data is also used during plotting of optimization variables and
functions.
• The postprocessing files (optimization.post and optimization.rpt) contain information required

by the ANSYS Icepak postprocessor to compute all the optimization function values during the optimization
run.
5.2.5. Postprocessing Files

The solver creates a file (projectname.resd) that is used by ANSYS Icepak for postprocessing.
5.2.6. Metadata Files

ANSYS Icepak creates two files that are used by ANSYS Engineering Knowledge Manager to display
basic project and solution information.
• The output file (main.ice.xml) is created when a project is saved. It contains basic parameters
and settings.
• The output file (solutionID.xml, where "solutionID" is the name you specified for the solution)
is created after a solution is complete. In addition to the basic settings and parameters, it contains
an overview of the solution.
5.3. Merging Model Data

ANSYS Icepak allows you to merge an existing project into your current project. Both the existing project
and the current project are defined with respect to a global (x, y, z) coordinate system. When the two
projects have been merged, they will coexist in this global coordinate system. In many cases, this can
result in objects from one project being overlaid on objects from another project. The Merge project
panel includes options to perform geometric transformations on the existing project before it is merged
into the current project.
Merging Model Data
To merge two projects, you can use the Merge project panel (Figure 5.1: The Merge project Panel
(Preview Tab) (p. 147)). To open the Merge project panel, select Merge project in the File menu.
File Merge project
Figure 5.1: The Merge project Panel (Preview Tab)
1. Select the existing file to be merged with the current file. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details
on selecting a file.
2. Click the Transformation tab.
3. (Optional) Enable the appropriate Geometric transformation options. See Geometric Transformations (p. 148)
for details.
4. In the Group for merged objects text entry box, enter a group name for all the objects in the existing
project you are merging. The default name is merge.n, where n is a sequential integer starting with zero.
Once a project has been merged, further Copy or Move transformations can be applied to this group using
the Group control panel (see Grouping Objects (p. 333) for more details about groups). If the Group for
merged objects field is left blank, a group will not be created.
5. If you want to apply the settings you specified under Options in the Preferences panel (see Defining a
Project (p. 223)) for the current project to the project that is being merged, turn on the Apply user prefer-
ences from project option.
6. If you want to merge the two projects such that the new objects are listed at the end of the model tree,
select Merge to the end of model tree option.
7. Click Open to merge the two projects (or click Cancel to close the panel without merging the projects).
Note that when a project is selected in the directory list, information about the title, available versions,
and notes saved with the project is displayed under the Information tab of the Merge project
panel.
You can also use the Merge project panel to create a new directory (see File Selection Dialog
Boxes (p. 98)).
5.3.1. Geometric Transformations

ANSYS Icepak can transform the existing model data you are merging with your current model by
using a combination of up to four geometric transformations: translation, rotation, mirroring, and
scaling. To access the geometric transformations options, you will click the Transformation tab in
the Merge project panel. Only the transformations selected in the Merge project panel are performed
on the merged geometry. If multiple geometric transformations are selected, ANSYS Icepak applies
them in the order in which they appear in the panel. For example, if both Rotate and Translate options
are selected, the imported geometry is rotated first and then translated. Note that not all combinations
of transformations are commutative; that is, the result is order-dependent, particularly if reflection is
used.
To access the geometric transformations options, you will click on the Transformation tab in the
Merge project panel (Figure 5.2: The Merge project Panel (Transformation Tab) (p. 148)).
Figure 5.2: The Merge project Panel (Transformation Tab)
Scaling Merged Model Data

To scale the existing model data you are merging with your current model, turn on the Scale option
in the Scale tab. Specify the scaling factor by entering a value in the Scale text entry box. The scaling
factor must be a real number greater than zero. Values greater than 1 will increase the size, while
values less than 1 will decrease the size. To scale the existing model data by different amounts in
different directions, enter the scaling factors separated by spaces. For example, if you enter 1.5 2
Saving a Project File
3 in the Scale text entry box, ANSYS Icepak will scale the model data by 1.5 in the x direction, 2 in
the y direction, and 3 in the z direction.
Mirroring Merged Model Data

To obtain the mirror image of the existing model data you are merging with your current model, turn
on the Mirror option in the Mirror tab. You can specify the Plane across which to reflect the model
data by selecting XY, YZ, or XZ. You can also specify the location about which the model is to be
flipped by selecting Centroid, Low end, or High end next to About in the Merge project panel.
Rotating Merged Model Data

To rotate the existing model data you are merging with your current model, turn on the Rotate option
in the Rotate tab. You can rotate the model data you are merging about any coordinate axis. Select
X, Y, or Z next to Axis, and then select 90, 180, or 270 degrees of rotation.
Translating Merged Data

To translate the existing model data you are merging with your current model, turn on the Translate
option in the Translate tab. Define the distance of the translation from the current origin by specifying
an offset in each of the coordinate directions: X offset, Y offset, and Z offset. Note that all offsets
are relative to the position of the existing project being merged.
5.4. Saving a Project File

To save the current project under its current name, click the button in the File commands toolbar
or select Save project in the File menu. ANSYS Icepak will save the project using the current name.
File Save project
To save the current project under a different name, or for more options when saving the current project,
select the Save project as option in the File menu. This opens the Save project panel (Figure 5.3: The
Save project Panel (p. 150)).
File Save project as
Note:
Save project as is not available when running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench. See The ANSYS
Figure 5.3: The Save project Panel
To save the current project, follow the steps below:
1. Specify the name of the project to be saved in the Project text entry box. You can choose the directory
and filename in the Directory list. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for more information on file se-
lection. Alternatively, you can enter your own filename, which can be a full pathname to the file (beginning
with a / character on a Linux system or a drive letter on Windows) or a pathname relative to the directory
in which ANSYS Icepak was started. The filename can include any alphanumeric characters and most special
characters. It cannot contain control characters, double-byte characters, spaces, tabs, or the following
characters:
$ ][ }{ /\ " * ? ()
2. Specify the Version for the project to be saved. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for information on
versions.
3. Select any other data to be saved with the project.
• If you have created a mesh for the project, you can copy the mesh data to the new project by selecting
the Copy mesh data option.
Saving a Project File
• If you have solution data for the project, you can copy the solution data to the new project by selecting
the Copy solution data option.
• You can save postprocessing data with the project by selecting the Save postprocessing objects option.
• You can save a snapshot of the model as it currently appears in the graphics window by selecting the
Save picture file option. The picture will be displayed when you select the project in the Open project
panel (see Opening an Existing Project (p. 232)) or the Merge project panel (see Merging Model
Data (p. 146)).
• If you have active and inactive objects for the project, you can save only the active objects to the project
by selecting the Save active objects only option. Otherwise both active and inactive objects are saved
to the project.
• When saving an assembly as a project using the right-click menu for an assembly, you can save the as-
sembly structure by selecting the Keep assembly structure option. If not, only the contents of the as-
sembly are saved to a new project folder.
4. Click Save to save the current project (or click Cancel to close the panel without saving the current project).
You can also use the Save project panel to create a new directory (see File Selection Dialog
Boxes (p. 98)).
5.4.1. Recent Projects

ANSYS Icepak keeps track of the most recent projects you saved, and allows you to select one from
the Recent projects drop-down list in the Open project panel (Figure 5.4: The Open project Pan-
el (p. 152)). You can open the Open project panel by choosing Existing in the Welcome to Icepak
panel when starting ANSYS Icepak, or at any time when you select Open project from the File menu.
Figure 5.4: The Open project Panel
5.5. Saving Image Files

Graphics window displays can be saved as image files in various formats, including PNG, TIFF, GIF (8
bit color), and PostScript. There may be slight differences, however, between images and the view dis-
played in the graphics window, since images are generated using the internal software renderer, while
the graphics window may utilize specialized graphics hardware for optimum performance.
To set image parameters and save image files, you will use the Save image panel (Figure 5.5: The Save
image Panel (p. 153)). To open the Save image panel, select Create image file in the File menu. This
allows you to generate a file or a printed copy of your model as shown in the graphics window or in a
selected region of the graphics window. Note that you can also add annotations to your image file (see
Adding Annotations to the Graphics Window (p. 95)).
Saving Image Files
Figure 5.5: The Save image Panel
The procedure for saving an image file is as follows:
1. Specify the name for the image file to be saved. ANSYS Icepak will assign a default prefix for the filename,
which is shown in the Files of type drop-down list. You can enter your own filename, which can be a full
pathname to the file (beginning with a / character on a Linux system or a drive letter on Windows) or a
pathname relative to the directory in which ANSYS Icepak was started.
2. Select the image format. See Choosing the Image File Format (p. 154) for details.
3. Click Options... to open the Graphics file options panel (Figure 5.6: The Graphics file options Panel (p. 153)).
Figure 5.6: The Graphics file options Panel
a. Under Region, specify the desired selection method (Fullscreen, Mouse selection, or Pixel location)
in the Select using drop-down list. If you select Pixel location, specify the region in the Left, Bottom,
Width and Height fields. See Specifying the Print Region (p. 155) for more details.
b. Under Image options, use the Invert black and white option to control the foreground/background
color. If this option is selected, the black and white colors of the graphics window being rendered into
hard copy will be swapped. This feature allows you to make images with a white background and black
foreground, while the graphics window is displayed with a black background and white foreground.
c. If you are saving a PostScript file, set the appropriate PS options. See Setting Options for PostScript
Files (p. 155) for details.
d. Under Image options, use the Landscape mode option to specify the orientation of the image. If this
option is turned on, the image is made in landscape mode; otherwise it is made in portrait mode.
e. Under Image options, specify a scale factor by entering a value in the Scale factor text entry box.
The image in the image file will be scaled relative to its actual size in the graphics window. The scaling
factor must be a real number greater than zero. Values greater than 1 will increase the size, while values
less than 1 will decrease the size.
f. Click Accept to close the Graphics file options panel.
4. Click Save to save the image file (or click Cancel to close the Save image panel without saving the image
file).
5.5.1. Choosing the Image File Format

To choose the image file format, select one of the following items in the Files of type drop-down
list:
• PNG files (*.png) (Portable Network Graphics) is a graphic image format.
• GIF files (*.gif) (Graphics Interchange Format) is a graphic image format.
• JPEG files (*.jpg) (Joint Photographic Experts Group) is a graphic image format. You can define the JPEG
Quality of a JPEG image under Image options in the Graphics file options panel (Figure 5.6: The
Graphics file options Panel (p. 153)). The maximum value of 100 will result in slightly reduced file compres-
sion, but there will be no loss of data when the image is decompressed. Lower values will result in more
file compression, but some data will not be recovered when the image is decompressed. The default value
of 75 should be acceptable for most cases.
• PPM files (*.ppm) (Portable Pixmap) output is a common raster file format.
• TIFF files (*.tiff) (Tagged Image File Format) is a common raster file format. The TIFF driver may not be
available on all platforms.
• VRML files (*.vrml) (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) is a graphics interchange format that allows export
of 3D geometrical entities that you can display in the ANSYS Icepak graphics window. This format can
commonly be used by VR systems and in particular the 3D geometry can be viewed and manipulated in
a web-browser graphics window.
Note:
Non-geometric entities such as text, titles, color bars, and orientation axis are not expor-
ted. In addition, most display or visibility characteristics set in ANSYS Icepak, such as
lighting, shading method, transparency, face and edge visibility, outer face culling, and
Saving Image Files
hidden line removal, are not explicitly exported but are controlled by the software used
to view the VRML file.
• Postscript (*.ps) is a common vector file format. See the following section for details.
Setting Options for PostScript Files

ANSYS Icepak provides several options for printing PostScript files in the Graphics file options panel
(Figure 5.6: The Graphics file options Panel (p. 153)). To enable the available options for making image
PostScript files, select Postscript files (*.ps) from the Files of type drop-down list in the Save image
panel (Figure 5.5: The Save image Panel (p. 153)) and click Options... This opens the Graphics file
options panel.
To specify the PostScript options follow the procedure below:
1. Specify the Resolution by selecting one of the following items from the drop-down list:
• Full resolution allows you to customize the PostScript image file using the options in steps 2–5. Image
files saved using this option will have a white background instead of the black background displayed
in the graphics window.
• From screen will make a PostScript image file directly from what is displayed in the graphics window.
2. Specify the format in which the graphics window is stored in the output file by selecting PS or EPS from
the Type drop-down list. EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) output is the same as PostScript output, with
the addition of Adobe Document Structuring Conventions (v2) statements. Currently, no preview bitmap
is included in EPS output. Often, programs that import EPS files use the preview bitmap to display on-
screen, although the actual vector PostScript information is used for printing (on a PostScript device).
3. Specify the color mode. For a color-scale copy, select Color from the Mode drop-down list; for a gray-
scale copy, select Gray; and for a black-and-white copy, select Mono. Note that most monochrome
PostScript devices will render Color images in shades of gray, but to ensure that the color ramp is rendered
as a linearly-increasing gray ramp, you should select Gray.
4. Enable the Frame option, if desired. If this option is turned on, a frame will be included around the image
in the image output.
5. Enable Labels for the image, if desired. The label, which consists of the project name, the machine name,
and a date/time stamp, will appear at both the top and bottom of the page.
6. Click Accept to store the PostScript options.
5.5.2. Specifying the Print Region

There are three ways to define the region of the graphics window that should be printed to the file:
you can pick the desired selection method in the Graphics file options panel, from the Select using
drop-down list under Region.
• Full screen instructs ANSYS Icepak to use the whole graphics window as the print region.
• Mouse selection allows you to select a region of the graphics window as the print region. ANSYS Icepak
will ask you to define the region to be written to the file. Position the mouse pointer at a corner of the
area to be included, hold down the left mouse button and drag open a selection box to the desired size,
and then release the mouse button. The selected area will be printed to the file. Note that ANSYS Icepak will
update the Pixel location values in the Graphics file options panel automatically when you define the
region using the mouse.
• Pixel location allows you to specify a region of the graphics window as the print region. Define the bottom
left corner of the print region by specifying the Left and Bottom pixel locations. A value of 0 for both
Left and Bottom specifies that the bottom left corner of the print region coincides with the bottom left
corner of the graphics window. Specify the Width and Height of the region in pixels.
This option is useful if you want to capture different images of the same size and location in the
graphics window. First, define the region you want to capture using the Mouse selection option.
ANSYS Icepak will display the pixel location values for this region in the Graphics file options
panel. You can then use the Pixel location option to create further images of the same region and
the same size.
5.6. Packing and Unpacking Model Files

To archive or pack up a project, select the Pack project option in the File menu.
File Pack project
ANSYS Icepak will open the File selection dialog box (see File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98)), in which
you can specify the name of the packaged-up project. ANSYS Icepak will combine all the relevant files
for off-line (remote) diagnosis by an ANSYS technical support engineer and write them to a compressed
tar file with extension .tzr. The file is in a format suitable for transfer by electronic mail or other means
to your support engineer.
To unarchive or unpack a packaged-up project, select the Unpack project option in the File menu.
File Unpack project
ANSYS Icepak will open the File selection dialog box, in which you can specify the name of the packaged-
up project to be unpacked. ANSYS Icepak will unpack the project and display the model in the graphics
window. (You can also unpack a project using the -unpack command described in Startup Options
for Linux Systems (p. 18).)
Note:
Unpack project is not available when running ANSYS Icepak in Workbench. See The
ANSYS File Menu (p. 137) for more information.
5.7. Cleaning up the Project Data

A complete ANSYS Icepak simulation can generate a significant amount of information. You can remove
data associated with the current project from the project directory using the Clean up project data
panel (Figure 5.7: The Clean up project data Panel (p. 157)). You can also instruct ANSYS Icepak to compress
the files associated with a particular solution ID. This option will remove any files that are not required
for further postprocessing of the solution and compress the remaining files. When you postprocess the
results associated with a compressed solution ID, ANSYS Icepak automatically uncompresses the files.
Cleaning up the Project Data
Figure 5.7: The Clean up project data Panel
The data associated with the current project are identified in the Clean up project data panel by the
operation that created them (for example, Mesh, Post-processing), and ANSYS Icepak provides an es-
timate of the size of the data in kilobytes. The size of the total data for the current project, including
the data for the model itself, is given at the bottom of the Clean up project data panel.
To clean up the project data, select Cleanup in the File menu.
File Cleanup
This opens the Clean up project data panel shown in Figure 5.7: The Clean up project data Panel (p. 157).
The following items are listed in the Clean up project data panel:
• Model specifies the size of the data associated with the model itself. Model data cannot be removed, since
it is not possible to recreate it from other data.
• ECAD specifies the size of the data resulting from ECAD files. These files include, but are not limited to, bool,
and conductivity.
• Mesh specifies the size of the data resulting from the mesh generation.
• EM Mapping specifies the size of all files and directories used for surface and volume losses from the EM
solvers.
• Post-processing specifies the size of the data resulting from postprocessing analysis.
• Screen pictures specifies the size of the data resulting from requests to store copies of the graphics window.
• Summary output specifies the size of the data resulting from generating a summary of the model objects.
• Reports specifies the size of the data resulting from generating reports.
• Scratch files specifies the size of any scratch files that were inadvertently left after a simulation.
• Solution projectname specifies the size of the data files (that is, .cas, .dat, .resd, and so on) resulting
from running the solution. All solutions that exist for the current project are listed by solution ID.
• Version projectname specifies the size of the version files (that is, job, model, and problem) resulting
from running the solution. All versions that exist for the current project are listed by solution ID. Version
files cannot be compressed.
• Total for project reports the total size of the files of all the data associated with the current project, including
the model data.
To delete project data, turn on the options for the data that you want to delete, and click the Remove
button at the bottom of the Clean up project data panel.
To compress project data, turn on the options for the data that you want to compress, and click the
Compress button at the bottom of the Clean up project data panel.
Chapter 6: Importing and Exporting Model Files
You can import geometry that was created using a commercial CAD program into ANSYS Icepak and
also export ANSYS Icepak files back into various other formats. There are several types of CAD file formats
that are supported by ANSYS Icepak. This chapter describes the CAD files that can be imported, the
way in which each type of file can be imported, and how to export an ANSYS Icepak project to other
file formats.
• Files That Can Be Imported into ANSYS Icepak (p. 159)
• Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 160)
• Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 171)
• Importing Electronics Cooling XML Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 177)
• Importing Trace Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 182)
• Trace Heating (p. 191)
• Importing Other Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 193)
• Exporting ANSYS Icepak Files (p. 203)
6.1. Files That Can Be Imported into ANSYS Icepak

The following types of files can be imported into ANSYS Icepak:
• Comma-separated values files (can be created or read in by spreadsheet programs like Excel) (see CSV/Excel
Files (p. 194))
• Intermediate Data Format (IDF) files (see Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 160))
• Incremental Data eXchange (IDX) files (see Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 171))
• EC XML files (see Importing Electronics Cooling XML Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 177))
• JEDEC PTD/JEP30 files (see Importing JEDEC PTD/JEP30 Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 182))
All of these files can be imported using the File Import menu.
The procedure for importing each type of file is described in the sections specified above.
Importing and Exporting Model Files
6.2. Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak can import Intermediate Data Format (IDF) files that have been exported from an ECAD
package. The IDF is a neutral file format that is supported by many ECAD packages (for example, Board
Station from Mentor Graphics and Visula from Zuken) and some mechanical CAD packages (for example,
PTC Creo, SDRC/I-deas, and Unigraphics). You can obtain a complete list of CAD and ECAD vendors
that export IDF files from www.intermedius.com. You can import IDF 2.0 and IDF 3.0 files into ANSYS
Icepak. Note that IDF 4.0 files cannot be read by ANSYS Icepak. This is because, currently, ECAD and
CAD packages do not export to the IDF 4.0 format, due to the rather radical changes from IDF 3.0 to
IDF 4.0.
Information on importing an IDF file into ANSYS Icepak is presented in the following sections:
• Overview of Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 160)
• Reading an IDF File into ANSYS Icepak (p. 161)
• Updating the Imported IDF File in ANSYS Icepak (p. 169)
• Using the Imported IDF File in ANSYS Icepak (p. 171)
6.2.1. Overview of Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak

IDF 2.0 consists of two files, a board file and a library file. IDF 3.0 may consist of two or three files: a
board file, a library file, and (in some cases) a panel file. The board file contains information about
the outline of the board, its thickness, and the positions (but not the sizes) of the components on
the board. The library file contains information about the components of the board: their sizes, and
their thermal and electrical properties. ANSYS Icepak needs both of these files to obtain complete
thermal information about the board and the components. The panel file contains information about
the placement of boards in a rack.
Note that IDF 2.0 is a simpler format than IDF 3.0. For example, information such as junction-to-case
thermal resistances and operating power information can be found only in an IDF 3.0 file.
There are two methods for importing an IDF file into ANSYS Icepak: a simple import and a detailed
import. In a simple import, ANSYS Icepak will import the board as an ANSYS Icepak block object. It
will find the total power of the components on the board and assign a single distributed power value
to the board. When you perform a simple import of a board into ANSYS Icepak, you will have the
option to specify its geometrical and material properties directly, using the Board properties panel,
accessed from the Layout options step in the IDF import panel.
For a detailed import, you have more control over the features of your ECAD model that are imported
into ANSYS Icepak. You can specify the minimum size of features (cutouts) on the board to be imported
if you import the board as a polygon shape. You can also control the import of tooling/mounting
holes in the board. This is usually discouraged, unless the holes are large enough to make them
thermally significant. You can instruct ANSYS Icepak to discard components smaller than a minimum
size or with a power less than a specified value. Finally, you can specify whether you want ANSYS
Icepak to model the components as 2D ANSYS Icepak source objects or 3D ANSYS Icepak block objects.
If you select 3D blocks, you can specify a cutoff height for the imported components. This enables
you to remove any objects larger than the specified cutoff height. The default cutoff height is the
maximum height of all of the components on the board. When you perform a detailed import of a
board into ANSYS Icepak, you will have the option to pick individual components of the board for
Importing IDF Files into ANSYS Icepak
import, using the Component selection panel, accessed through the Component filters step in the
IDF import panel.
ANSYS Icepak can export temperature and heat transfer coefficient data to an AutoTherm file (a board-
level analysis product available from Mentor Graphics). When you have calculated a solution for
your IDF file that you imported into ANSYS Icepak, you can save the temperature and heat transfer
coefficient data to a file that can be read into AutoTherm.
ANSYS Icepak can export IDF 2.0 or 3.0 library files.
File Export IDF 2.0 library file or File Export IDF 3.0 library file
6.2.2. Reading an IDF File into ANSYS Icepak

To import a new IDF file into ANSYS Icepak, follow the steps below.
1. Select Import, IDF file and then New in the File menu to open the IDF import panel (Figure 6.1: The
IDF import Panel (Specifying the File) (p. 161)), which is a wizard-style panel that will change as you follow
the steps below.
File Import IDF file New
Figure 6.1: The IDF import Panel (Specifying the File)
2. In the IDF import panel, specify the IDF file to be imported into ANSYS Icepak.
a. Enter the name of the board file in the Board file field. You can enter your own filename, which can
be a full pathname to the file (beginning with a / character on a Linux system or a drive letter on
Windows) or a pathname relative to the directory in which ANSYS Icepak was started. Alternatively,
you can choose a filename by clicking on Browse next to the Board file text field and then selecting
the file in the resulting Import Idf board file dialog box. The extension for a board file is usually
either .bdf or .emn, depending on how you created the IDF file.
b. Enter the name of the library file in the Library file field. The extension for the library file is usually
.ldf or .emp. Note that a .bdf file is usually paired with an .ldf file, and an .emn file is paired
with an .emp file. ANSYS Icepak will automatically fill in the Library file field with the name of the
library file that corresponds to the board file you selected, but you can change this if required.
c. Enter the name of the panel file (if relevant) in the Panel file field.
d. Enter the name of the trace file in the Trace file field (supported file types are listed in the Files of
type drop-down menu). For details on trace import, refer to Importing Other Files into ANSYS Ice-
pak (p. 193).
e. Click Next . ANSYS Icepak will examine the board, library, and panel files you have selected to
determine the IDF version of the files.
3. Specify details related to the import of the board and, if relevant, the panel (Figure 6.2: The IDF import
Panel (Specifying Board/Panel Details) (p. 162)).
Figure 6.2: The IDF import Panel (Specifying Board/Panel Details)
a. Select the type of import that is required under Import type.
• Simple instructs ANSYS Icepak to import the board as an ANSYS Icepak block object and specify
a power to be distributed over the board.
• Detail enables you to specify more details about the import of the board and its components than
for the simple import, as described below.
b. Select the plane in which the board should lie (XY, YZ, or XZ) under Board plane.
c. (detailed import only) Specify whether you want ANSYS Icepak to create the board as a rectangular
object or a polygonal object by selecting Rectangular or Polygon under Board shape. If you select
Rectangular, ANSYS Icepak will ignore the cutouts in the edge of the board.
d. (simple import only) Specify the overall board geometrical and material properties. Click Edit... next
to Board properties to open the Board properties panel (Figure 6.3: The Board properties Pan-
el (p. 163)).
Figure 6.3: The Board properties Panel
i. Specify the Number of layers of trace/metalization on the board.
ii. Specify the Layers thickness.
iii. Specify the Material sub-type in the drop-down list. Options include: Metals/Alloys, Insulators,
IC_package_materials, other, Epoxy, Semiconductors, and Plastics.
iv. Specify the Board material to be used. To change the board material, select a material from the
Board material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
v. Specify the percentage of Copper coverage in the trace/metalization layers.
See Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) (p. 435) for more information about the terminology of printed
circuit boards.
e. (detailed import only) ANSYS Icepak will not import drilled holes by default. If you want to import
drilled holes, turn on Import drilled holes under Detail options and specify the minimum hole size
(in mm) of the holes to be imported.
f. (detailed import only) If you want ANSYS Icepak to convert all polygonal components of your model
into prisms, select Make all components rectangular. This is sometimes recommended if a simpler
model is desired.
g. Click Next .
4. (detailed import only) Specify details related to the import of the components on the board (Figure 6.4: The
IDF import Panel (Specifying Component Importing Details) (p. 164)).
Figure 6.4: The IDF import Panel (Specifying Component Importing Details)
a. Specify the minimum size of components to be imported into ANSYS Icepak by selecting Filter by
size/power/component type and turning on Size filter, and specifying the size (in mm) across from
Size filter.
b. Specify the minimum power of components to be imported into ANSYS Icepak by selecting Filter
by size/power/component type and turning on Power filter, and specifying the power (in mW)
across from Power filter.
If any components have a size that is smaller than the specified minimum size and a power
that is less than the specified minimum power, they will not be imported into ANSYS Icepak.
c. To filter capacitors so they are not imported into ANSYS Icepak, select Filter by size/power/compon-
ent type and click Filter Capacitors.
d. To filter resistors so they are not imported into ANSYS Icepak, select Filter by size/power/component
type and click Filter Resistors.
e. To filter inductors so they are not imported into ANSYS Icepak, select Filter by size/power/component
type and click Filter Inductors.
f. Or, specify the type of components to be imported into ANSYS Icepak by selecting Filter by compon-
ents and Import selected components.
g. Click Choose... to open the Component selection panel (Figure 6.5: The Component selection Pan-
el (p. 165)).
Figure 6.5: The Component selection Panel
h. When you have made your selections, click Apply in the Component selection panel. You can revert
to importing all components by selecting Import all components in the Component filters step of
the IDF import panel.
i. Click Next .
5. (detailed import only) Specify the ANSYS Icepak objects to be used to model the components (Fig-
ure 6.6: The IDF import Panel (Specifying How the Components Should Be Modeled) (p. 166)).
Figure 6.6: The IDF import Panel (Specifying How the Components Should Be Modeled)
• Model all components as enables all components to be modeled the same way.
– 2d sources specifies that all components on the board should be modeled as 2D ANSYS Icepak source
objects.
– 3d blocks specifies that all components on the board should be modeled as 3D ANSYS Icepak block
objects. Specify the maximum height (in mm) for the components to be imported in the Cutoff
height for modeling components as 3d blocks field. By default, ANSYS Icepak calculates the
maximum height of all the components on the board and uses this value as the cutoff height. If you
specify a value smaller than the default value, any components with a height greater than the spe-
cified value will not be imported.
• Choose specific component model enables you to specify the modeling of each component.
– Load data from file enables you to specify individual component modeling by loading a file. You
will select the relevant file by clicking Browse....
To use this option, you need a tab-delimited text file containing the following information
for each component:
Reference_designator Power(W) Rjc Rjb
A sample file is shown in Figure 6.7: The sample file (p. 167). If Rjc and Rjb are left out, then
the component will be modeled as a solid block with properties of Epoxy.
You can view the loaded data by clicking the View... button to open the IDF View loaded
data panel (Figure 6.8: The IDF View loaded data Panel (p. 167))
Figure 6.7: The sample file
Figure 6.8: The IDF View loaded data Panel
→ Cutoff filter enables you to specify the minimum size and power of components to be imported
into ANSYS Icepak. This option is enabled only if the Filter by component type is selected under
Component filters.
a. You can specify the minimum power of components to be imported into ANSYS Icepak by
specifying the power density (in W/m3 next to the Power density or the power) in W next to
Power. This filtering is enabled only if all of the selected components have specified power
value.
b. You can specify the minimum size of components to be imported into ANSYS Icepak by spe-
cifying the size (in m) next to the Min size.
To apply the filtering components, click the Apply button. To view the selected components,
click the View selected components button and open the IDF View selected components
panel. To view dropped components, click the View dropped components button and open
the IDF View dropped components panel.
– Specify values for individual component types enables you to specify a model from the Model
using drop-down list for every single component you select in the Selected component list. Options
include: Rjc-Rjb, 2d sources, 3d blocks, and Libraries. For Rjc-Rjb, 2d sources, and 3d blocks, you
will specify the object’s Power. If you select Rjc-Rjb, you will need to specify the values for the
junction-to-case resistance (Rjc) and the junction-to-board resistance (Rjb).
If you select Libraries, you will need to specify the library path. You can also click Browse...
to navigate through your directory structure to locate the library file. Once the library file has
been selected, select the Package name(s) from the drop-down list, or click Search to display
a list of available packages.
Click Apply to accept the parameters.
6. Specify details related to the naming conventions, monitor points, and points reports (Figure 6.9: The
IDF import Panel (Miscellaneous options) (p. 169)).
Figure 6.9: The IDF import Panel (Miscellaneous options)
a. • Select the desired naming convention of components under Naming conventions. Use Reference
Designator only for name instructs ANSYS Icepak to use only reference designators for component
names (for example, C1, U5, R10, ...).
• Append Part Name to Reference Designator instructs ANSYS Icepak to use both reference des-
ignator and a part name for a component name \ (for example, C1-C1206—Vapor_phase, U5-
SO14—reflow, R10-TR4—Pitch,...)
b. Select whether you want to create monitor points for all components, selected components, or you
do not want to create monitor points. Select Locate monitor at centroid of solid components if
you want the monitor points to be created at the center of the components. Otherwise, the monitor
points are created at the contact point between components and the PCB.
c. Select whether you want to create points report template or not. The template format used is as
follows:
Point variable value temperature active number ...
d. Enable Purge Inactive Objects to remove components that have not been imported into the model
and are present in the Inactive bin.
7. Click Finish to finish the specification for the IDF file import and import the IDF file into ANSYS Icepak.
6.2.3. Updating the Imported IDF File in ANSYS Icepak

To update an IDF file in ANSYS Icepak, follow the steps below.
1. Select Import, IDF file and then Update in the File menu to open the IDF import panel (Figure 6.10: IDF
import – Update option (p. 170)), which is a wizard-style panel that will change as you follow the steps
below.
File Import IDF file Update
Figure 6.10: IDF import – Update option
In the IDF import panel, specify the following inputs.
• Enter the name of the board file in the Board file field. You can enter your own filename, which can be
a full pathname to the file (beginning with a / character on a Linux system or a drive letter on Windows)
or a pathname relative to the directory in which ANSYS Icepak was started. Alternatively, you can choose
a filename by clicking on Browse next to the Board file text field and then selecting the file in the resulting
Import Idf board file dialog box. The extension for a board file is usually either .bdf or .emn, depending
on how you created the IDF file.
• Enter the name of the library file in the Library file field. The extension for the library file is usually .ldf
or .emp. Note that a .bdf file is usually paired with an .ldf file, and an .emn file is paired with an .emp
file. ANSYS Icepak will automatically fill in the Library file field with the name of the library file that cor-
responds to the board file you selected, but you can change this if required.
• Enter the name of the panel file (if relevant) in the Panel file field.
• Enter the name of the trace file in the Trace file field (supported file types are listed in the Files of type
drop-down menu). For details on trace import, refer to Importing Other Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 193).
• Select the Board block from the drop-down list.
• Click Next . ANSYS Icepak will examine the board, library, and panel files you have selected to determine
the IDF version of the files. If the components and/or dimensions of the board have changed, the changes
will be updated.
• Specify details related to the update of the board in the following panels similar to the procedure described
in Reading an IDF File into ANSYS Icepak (p. 161).
Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak
6.2.4. Using the Imported IDF File in ANSYS Icepak

The library file (.bdf or .emp) lists all of the components used by the IDF file. When you import the
IDF file into ANSYS Icepak, ANSYS Icepak will group the components into different groups depending
on their characteristics (size and power). You can use the Groups node in the Model manager
window to identify the various sub-classes of components. You can modify the properties of a group
of components, and you can easily activate or deactivate a group using the Groups node in the
Model manager window (see Grouping Objects (p. 333) for details). ANSYS Icepak will also create a
group containing all of the components on the top surface of the board and another group containing
all of the components on the bottom surface of the board. This enables you to easily identify these
components and to use them during postprocessing. Note that the third column of the IDF file (ref-
erence designator) is used as part of the naming scheme of the component for easy identification.
6.3. Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak can import Incremental Data eXchange (IDX) files that have been exported from an ECAD
or MCAD package. IDX is a neutral file format that is supported by some ECAD packages and mechan-
ical CAD packages (for example, PTC Creo and SOLIDWORKS).
Information on importing an IDX file into ANSYS Icepak is presented in the following sections:
• Overview of Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 171)
• Reading an IDX File into ANSYS Icepak (p. 172)
• Using the Imported IDX File in ANSYS Icepak (p. 177)
6.3.1. Overview of Importing IDX Files into ANSYS Icepak

The IDX format is based on the EDMD data model and uses an XML schema to define model properties.
ANSYS Icepak's IDX import capabilities are limited to importing the board outline and electrical and
mechanical components.
ANSYS Icepak uses multiple steps to configure the import of an IDX file. See Reading an IDX File into
ANSYS Icepak (p. 172) for detailed instructions on how to import an IDX file.
• Step 1: Load IDX file
• Step 2: Layout options
• Step 3: Component filters
• Step 4: Component models
• Step 5 Miscellaneous options
ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify the board shape and imports it as a PCB object. You are able to
import all components or select only those you want to import. Also, you are able to model all com-
ponents as 3d blocks or 2d sources, or you can load component data from file or specify values based
on component groups.
6.3.2. Reading an IDX File into ANSYS Icepak

To import a new IDX file into ANSYS Icepak, follow the steps below.
1. Select Import and then IDX file to open the IDX import panel (Figure 6.11: The IDX import Panel (Load
IDX File) (p. 172)), which is a wizard-style panel that will change as you follow the steps below.
File Import IDX file
Figure 6.11: The IDX import Panel (Load IDX File)
2. In the IDX import panel, specify the IDX file to be imported into ANSYS Icepak.
a. Enter the name of the IDX file in the EDMD (*.idx) field. You can enter your own filename, which
can be a full pathname to the file (beginning with a / character on a Linux system or a drive letter on
Windows) or a pathname relative to the directory in which ANSYS Icepak was started. Alternatively,
you can choose a filename by clicking on Browse next to the EDMD (*.idx) text field and then selecting
the file in the resulting Select IDX file dialog box.
b. Click Next .
3. In the IDX import panel under Layout Options, specify a Board shape by selecting Rectangular or
Polygon from the drop-down list and click Next .
Figure 6.12: The IDX import Panel (Layout Options)
4. In the IDX import panel under Component filters, select a Filter by components option.
• Import all components imports all components in the IDX file.
• Import selected components enables you to specify which components in the IDX file to import.
Click Choose to open the Component selection panel and use the Add button to move the
components you want to import into the Selected components column. When you have made your
selections, click Apply.
Figure 6.13: The IDX import Panel (Component Filters)
5. Click Next .
6. In the IDX import panel under Component models, specify the ANSYS Icepak objects to be used to
model the components (Figure 6.14: The IDX import Panel (Component Models) (p. 174)).
7. Figure 6.14: The IDX import Panel (Component Models)
• Model all components as enables all components to be modeled the same way.
– 2d sources specifies that all components on the board should be modeled as 2D ANSYS Icepak source
objects.
– 3d blocks specifies that all components on the board should be modeled as 3D ANSYS Icepak block
objects.
Note:
Network blocks must be prisms. If a network block is polygonal, ANSYS Icepak ig-
nores the Rjc-Rjb values and writes a warning in the Message window.
• Choose specific component model enables you to specify the modeling of each component.
– Load individual component data from file enables you to specify individual component modeling
by loading a file. You will select the relevant file by clicking Browse.
Note:
Component parameters in the selected file will override values set in the Selected
component groups list when using the Specify values for component groups.
To use this option, you need a tab-delimited text file containing the following information
for each component:
Reference_designator Power(W) Rjc Rjb
A sample file is shown in Figure 6.15: The sample file (p. 175). If Rjc and Rjb are left out,
then the component will be modeled as a solid block with properties of Epoxy.
You can view the loaded data by clicking the View button to open the IDX View loaded
data panel (Figure 6.16: The IDX View loaded data Panel (p. 175))
Figure 6.15: The sample file
Figure 6.16: The IDX View loaded data Panel
– Specify values for component groups enables you to specify a model from the Model using drop-
down list for every single component you select in the Selected component list. Options include:
Rjc-Rjb, 2d sources, and 3d blocks. For Rjc-Rjb, 2d sources, and 3d blocks, you will specify the
object’s Power. If you select Rjc-Rjb, you will need to specify the values for the junction-to-case
resistance (Rjc) and the junction-to-board resistance (Rjb).
Note:
If you use both the Load individual component data from file and the Specify
values for component groups options, parameters set in the Selected component
groups list are overridden by parameters from the selected data file.
Click Apply to accept the parameters.
8. In the IDX import panel under Miscellaneous options, specify which naming convention to apply to
the components (Figure 6.17: The IDX import Panel (Miscellaneous options) (p. 176)).
Figure 6.17: The IDX import Panel (Miscellaneous options)
• Select the desired naming convention of components under Naming conventions. Use Reference
Designator only for name instructs ANSYS Icepak to use only reference designators for component
names (for example, C1, U5, R10, ...).
• Append Part Name to Reference Designator instructs ANSYS Icepak to use both reference designator
and a part name for a component name (for example, C1-C1206—Vapor_phase, U5-SO14—reflow,
R10-TR4—Pitch,...).
• Click Finish to finish the specification for the IDX file import and import the IDX file into ANSYS Icepak.
When the import is finished, the IDX Import Summary panel is displayed.
Importing Electronics Cooling XML Files into ANSYS Icepak
Figure 6.18: The IDX Import Panel (Miscellaneous options)
6.3.3. Using the Imported IDX File in ANSYS Icepak

When you import the IDX file into ANSYS Icepak, ANSYS Icepak will group the components into dif-
ferent groups depending on their characteristics (size and power).
Note:
Component groups are only created if they consist of more than one component. The
TOP and BOTTOM groups are always created.
You can use the Groups node in the Model manager window to identify the various sub-classes of
components. You can modify the properties of a group of components, and you can easily activate
or deactivate a group using the Groups node in the Model manager window (see Grouping Ob-
jects (p. 333) for details). ANSYS Icepak will also create a group containing all of the components on
the top surface of the board and another group containing all of the components on the bottom
surface of the board. This enables you to easily identify these components and to use them during
postprocessing.
6.4. Importing Electronics Cooling XML Files into ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak can import Electronics Cooling XML (EC XML) files. EC XML files can contain object, ma-
terial, and monitor point information. Objects grouped as assemblies in the source software are imported
into ANSYS Icepak as assemblies. The procedure for importing EC XML files is described in Importing
EC XML Files (p. 181). The following table displays EC XML object types and properties and corresponding
Icepak definitions and defaults.
Imported XML Object and Icepak Definition with Defaults

Properties
solutionDomain Cabinet
• Location

Properties
• Size
• Ambient conductivity
solid2DBlock Plate
• Name • Shape: Rectangular
• Location • Thermal model: Conducting thin
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
• Total power
solid3DBlock Block
• Name • Block type: Solid
• Location • Shape: Prism
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
• Total power
solidCylinder Block
• Name • Block type: Solid
• Location • Shape: Cylinder
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
• Total power
sourceBlock Source
• Name • Shape: Prism
• Location • Thermal condition: Total power
• Size

Properties
• Total power
source2DBlock Source
• Location • Thermal condition: Total power
• Size
• Plane
• Total power
printedCircuitBoard PCB
• Location • Pcb type: Compact
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
Grille Grille
• Location • Flow specification
• Size – Pressure loss specification: Loss coefficient
• Loss coefficient – Velocity loss coefficient: Device
• Free area ratio – Resistance velocity dependence: Linear
flowResistance Resistance
• Location • Flow specification
• Size – Pressure loss specification: Loss coefficient
• Plane? – Velocity loss coefficient: Device
• Loss coefficient – Resistance velocity dependence: Linear
• Free area ratio

Properties
enclosure Enclosure
• Name
• Location
• SIze
• Wall Thickness
rectangular2dfan Fan
• Name • Model as: 2d
• Location • Shape: Rectangular
• Size Note: Only Non-linear and Fixed flow types are

supported. If Flow type is set as Linear, Icepak sets
• Plane it as Fixed by default.
• Flow type
axial3dfan Fan
• Name • Model as: 2d
• Location • Shape: Rectangular
• Size Note: Only Non-linear and Fixed flow types are

supported. If Flow type is set as linear, Icepak sets it
• Plane as Fixed by default.
• Flow type
• Hub radius
heatsink Heatsink
• Name • Type: Simple
• Location • Plane: X-Z
• Size
twoResistorModel Block
• Name • Shape: Prism
• Location • Block type: Network
• Size • Network type: Two resistor
• Board side

Properties
• Junction power
• Rjc
• Rjb
Material Material
• Name • Material type: Solid
• Density Note: Only Isotropic and Orthotropic conductivity

types are supported. If Conductivity type is set as
• Specific heat linear temperature-dependent, Icepak sets it as Iso-
tropic and Solid conductivity as Linear by default.
• Conductivity
• Conductivity type
assembly Assembly
• Name
• List of objects
monitorPoint Monitor point
• Name
• Location
Note:
The EC XML defines location and size for all objects. Unless additional data is included,
most objects are imported as 2d rectangular or 3d prism shapes.
6.4.1. Importing EC XML Files

To import an EC XML file into ANSYS Icepak, follow the steps below.
1. Select File Import EC XML file to open the Select Electronics Cooling XML file panel.
Figure 6.19: The Select Electronics Cooling XML file Panel
2. Browse to the directory in which the EC XML file is saved. Select the file and click Open to import
the model in ANSYS Icepak.
6.5. Importing JEDEC PTD/JEP30 Files into ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak can import network object files in the JEDEC PTD/JEP30 format. From the File > Import
menu, select JEDEC PTD/JEP30 file. Visit the following URL for information and guidelines on the JEDEC
PTD/JEP 30 format:
https://www.jedec.org/category/technology-focus-area/jep30
6.6. Importing Trace Files into ANSYS Icepak

You can import the trace layout of boards for use in heat transfer and fluid flow simulations. The file
formats supported are Extended Gerber files (.art, .gbr, .pho) that were created using Synopsys, Zuken,
and Mentor. Lastly, Ansoft Neutral Files (ANF files) version 2 in ASCII format and ODB++ can be imported
and is discussed in Importing Trace Files (p. 183). The procedure for importing ANF, ODB++ or Extended
Gerber files is described in Importing Trace Files (p. 183).
6.6.1. Licensing Requirements for Importing Trace Files

The following are requirements for importing various trace file types into Icepak.
• .anf, .edb, ODB++: No license or additional installation is required.
Importing Trace Files into ANSYS Icepak
• .art, .gbr, .pho: An Artwork license is required.
6.6.2. Importing Trace Files

You can import ANF, ODB++, and EDB files in the following ways.
1. While importing the associated IDF files you can specify the trace file (see Importing IDF Files into ANSYS
Icepak (p. 160)).
2. You can associate a board that has already been imported using IDF import with a ANF, ODB++, EDB, or
IPC2581 file. This is done by editing the board and clicking the Import ECAD file drop-down list under
the Geometry tab of the object panel. Then select the ODB++ Design, Ansys EDB, Ansoft Neutral ANF,
Gerber files, ASCII Neutral BOOL, or IPC2581 option and select the associated file.
Note:
When you import ECAD for packages and you need to change the package type, you
must first click Clear ECAD and then select the package type from the Choose type
drop-down list.
When moving an object (block or PCB) with traces, select Move trace with object to repositioned
the traces to the object's centroid. When changing trace layer thickness, select Resize object with
trace thickness, to also resize the object's thickness. These options are selected by default if Repos-
ition Trace to object and Resize object are selected during trace import.
Note:
• ODB++, ANF, EDB, and ICP2581 import require the installation of ECADTranslators.
• When you import traces using option 2, the board has to be first imported in the XY plane. All
subsequent transformations (translation, rotation or mirroring) of the board can then be started
from the default XY plane. When you import traces using option 1, the board can be imported
in any of the three planes: XY, YZ, or XZ. The board can then be translated, rotated or mirrored
similar to the previous case.
The Locate ODB++ Design panel (Figure 6.20: Locate OBD++ Design Panel (p. 185)) is displayed when
importing an ODB++ file. Select a file or directory where the design is located and click Import to
import the file.
Figure 6.20: Locate OBD++ Design Panel
Note:
• The Use control file option enable you to specify the location of an ODB++ control file, which
is used to define the parameters of the design.
• The Reposition option enables you to reposition to the Object to trace or Trace to object. If
you select Object to trace, the object is translated to the origin of the trace. If you select Trace
to object, the trace is translated to the current location of the object. If you don't select Repos-
ition, the trace is imported to its own location and the object remains in its current location.
• The Resize object option enables you to resize to Trace thickness only or Trace thickness
and bounding box. If you select Trace thickness only, the object thickness is scaled to match
the total trace layer thickness (the X and Y plane dimensions are not scaled). If you select Trace
thickness and bounding box, the object is scaled in all 3 directions (thickness and planar di-
mensions) to match the bounding box of traces.
• The Include dummy net option imports blank ("dummy") net traces during the ECAD import.
• The Min trace width option prevents importing geometry smaller than the minimum trace
width.
The Trace file panel (Figure 6.21: Trace file Panel (p. 186)) is displayed when importing an EDB, ANF,
BOOL, or IPC2581 file. Select a file and click Open to import the file.
Figure 6.21: Trace file Panel
Note:
• The Reposition option enables you to reposition to the Object to trace or Trace to object. If
you select Object to trace, the object is translated to the origin of the trace. If you select Trace
to object, the trace is translated to the current location of the object. If you don't select Repos-
ition, the trace is imported to its own location and the object remains in its current location.
• The Resize object option enables you to resize to Trace thickness only or Trace thickness
and bounding box. If you select Trace thickness only, the object thickness is scaled to match
the total trace layer thickness (the X and Y plane dimensions are not scaled). If you select Trace
thickness and bounding box, the object is scaled in all 3 directions (thickness and planar di-
mensions) to match the bounding box of traces.
• The Include dummy net option imports blank ("dummy") net traces during the ECAD import.
• The Min trace width option prevents importing geometry smaller than the minimum trace
width.
You can import Extended Gerber trace and via layout files by clicking on the option Gerber files and
following the procedures below.
Note:
To import Gerber files, an Artwork license is required. It is usually preferable to convert

to a format that does not require additional licensing, see Licensing Requirements for
Importing Trace Files (p. 182).
Figure 6.22: Import Gerber files Panel
1. Click the Browse button in the Metal layer Gerber files panel to display the metal layer file dialog box.
2. Select a file or hold down the CTRL or Shift key to select multiple files and click Open to import the
file(s).
3. To change the order of Gerber files, use the up (Up), and down (Dn) buttons or to delete a file, select
Delete.
4. Select each of the via files in the same manner and define the starting and ending layers that those vias
connect. To move or delete a file, use the up, down or delete buttons.
5. Select Accept to save your changes or Cancel to close the panel.
After the trace files have been specified and read in, ANSYS Icepak converts the trace files into a bool
file that is used to display the traces. During Gerber import, ANSYS Icepak creates an intermediate
NJB file that is then converted into a BOOL file. After the BOOL file is created ANSYS Icepak displays
the layer and via information in the Board layer and via information window, Figure 6.23: Board
Layer Information (p. 188).
Figure 6.23: Board Layer Information
When importing traces, the default materials are Cu-pure for metal and FR-4 for dielectric. In order
to specify a custom trace material, create a material in the Model manager window. In the Info tab
of the Materials panel, enter the name of the material. In the Properties tab enter the name
Dielectric or trace for the Sub-type name. Ensure the Material type is Solid. Drag and drop
this newly created material onto objects with traces to change the trace material for all layers.
Note:
To change the trace material for an individual layer, double-click the material for a layer
in the Board layer and via information panel and enter the material type in the Layer
message box. A list will be displayed at the bottom of the Layer message box matching
this entry. Select a trace material.
To change the trace material for all layers, double-click the Material header at the top of
the Board layer and via information panel, enter and select the material for all layers.
Values in the Board layer and via information panel can be modified later by clicking on the option
Trace layers and vias in the Blocks or Printed circuit boards panel (Figure 20.14: The Blocks Panel
(Geometry Tab) (p. 506)). The Layers tab enables you to edit the material properties, visibility and
activity of the layers. Visibility can be changed after the traces have been displayed on the screen. In
addition, the visibility of the layers can be individually changed by selecting the layer to be displayed
across from the Visible check box. The active state can be changed on all metal layers except for the
bottom layer. When a layer is inactive, its thickness doesn't account in the Total thickness value.
Visibility is changed on all layers by doing a right mouse click Visible and selecting All or None from
the shortcut menu.
Note:
By default, layers are projected to a 2D plane of host objects. To view layers in a 3D pro-
jected space, check the Display traces in 3D option in the Preferences panel shown in
Figure 8.9: The Display Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 236).
To view the resolution of grid density based on the values in the Board layer and via in-
formation panel, use the Show metal fractions option in the Model menu. See The
Model Menu (p. 68) section for details.
The Grid Density that is used to create the thermal conductivity distribution of the board can be
specified By count or By size. The grid density count is 200 x 200 by default. Depending on the trace
resolution and the computational costs desired, you can change the values for the rows and columns
to receive optimum results. The following points outline best practices for balancing accuracy and
cost of computing the cell by cell orthotropic thermal conductivity:
• The grid density By size specification is preferred, and should be a multiple of either the minimum
trace width or via diameter.
• For board level simulations, By size should equal the minimum trace width or minimum via diameter.
• For system level simulations, By size should equal four to eight times the minimum trace width or
minimum via diameter.
• For accuracy, the layers should always be meshed separately.
• For all models, the CFD mesh on the board should equal four to eight times the By size specification.
By default, the thickness direction thermal conductivity of the board is determined by lumping the
conductivities of the individual layers. For accuracy, the preferred approach is to compute the normal
conductivity for each layer by checking the option Model layers separately. Note that while using
this option, you need to ensure that each of the layers gets at least one mesh cell in the thickness
direction. ANSYS Icepak accomplishes this by automatically creating dummy contact resistance
meshing plates in the plane of the board at the start and end locations of each metal layer except
the start of the bottom layer and the end of the top layer. All these plates have zero thermal resistance
to ensure they do not affect the solution in any way and merely ensure that each layer gets at least
one cell in the thickness direction. Once the plates are created, if the layer thicknesses are changed
or the board is rotated/translated ANSYS Icepak automatically modifies/moves the plates to updated
locations. However, it is recommended that you turn the Model layers separately option on after
you have located the board and specified the correct layer thicknesses.
Note:
The Model layers separately option is checked on for PCB and package objects and
cannot be turned off.
The Don’t recompute metal fraction enables use of existing metal fraction files provided the grid
resolution has not been modified.
If you want to remove traces and vias from an object, you can do so by clicking the Clear ECAD data
from block button in the object panel.
The via information can be specified in the Via tab. The names of the via sets, the diameters of the
vias and their connectivity are imported directly during the import process. The visibility of the vias
can be individually changed by selecting the via set across from the Visible check box. Visibility can
be changed on all vias by doing a right-mouse click Visible header and selecting All or None from
the shortcut menu. The plating thickness of the vias must be specified. The default thickness is 12.7
microns. The vias can be made filled or unfilled. If filled, the fill material must be specified.
Trace Heating
Editing the via properties -- plating thickness and fill status -- has no effect on the metal fraction
display. However, these changes affect how the final conductivity values are computed.
Figure 6.24: Via Layer Information
After the creation of the BOOL file ANSYS Icepak displays the traces in the graphical display area. You
can change the display attributes of the traces by right-clicking on the board item in the Model
manager window and choosing one of the options: Off, Single color, Color by trace, Color by layer
or Color by net.
Note:
Extended Gerber files can only be imported on the Windows version of ANSYS Icepak.
6.7. Trace Heating

The Trace heating panel displays a list of traces on each layer in order of descending area. The minimum
calculated trace area (Smallest trace area) is the area of the trace with the smallest area, and the
maximum calculated trace area (Largest trace area) is the area of the trace with the largest area on
the selected layer. By default, the list displays traces with areas larger than 20% of the maximum area.
To display more traces, change the Min area value and click the Update button. This will update the
Trace heating panel with all traces on the selected layer that are equal to or greater than the area input
in the Min area box.
To create a trace block:
1. Select the layer where the trace is on from the Layer drop-down list. The graphics display area will refresh
to only display traces on the selected layer.
2. Select the trace in the list, the trace will be highlighted in the graphics display area.
3. Retain the default settings for Max angle and Min length or change the value to obtain a smoother or
coarser object. The number of segments that define a trace can be reduced by eliminating some segments
based on the angle between two segments and the segment lengths, this makes for a coarser description
of the trace. If the angle between two segments is less than the Max angle and both the segment lengths
are less than Min length, then the two segments will be replaced by one segment. The new segment will
be defined by the beginning of the first segment and the end of the second segment.
The trace material is pure copper "Cu-Pure".
Note:
The trace block will be automatically resized if the layer thickness is modified or the
PCB Board is moved or rotated.
4. Click Create solid trace to create a block object.
Figure 6.25: The Trace heating Panel
6.7.1. Trace Heating Boundary Conditions

There are two ways to set boundary conditions for a solid trace block object.
Importing Other Files into ANSYS Icepak
• Specify the joule heating inputs directly in the Joule heating power panel found in the Properties tab
of the block, package or PCB. Current/voltage can be specified for two or more sides of the solid trace.
See User Inputs for the Block Thermal Specification (p. 513) for a description of user inputs.
• Create a 2D source object with the appropriate shape on any of the sides belonging to the solid trace.
The area of the source object should be equal to or smaller than the area of the side of the solid trace it
touches. Specify current/voltage for the source object. See User Inputs for Thermal specification (p. 427)
for user inputs.
Note:
– While using this method, note that joule heating inputs can be additionally specified for the
solid trace. However, it is important to ensure that if no voltages are specified, current flow
into the block is conserved. This is accomplished by calculating the sum of all the current
values specified for the sides of the solid trace and the source objects and ensuring that it
is zero.
– The created solid trace object is polygonal in shape. Note that the shape of the block should
not be changed to a non-polygonal shape.
6.8. Importing Other Files into ANSYS Icepak

This section describes how to import STEP files containing point and line information and comma sep-
arated values (CSV/Excel) files into ANSYS Icepak.
The general procedure for importing these files is described in General Procedure (p. 193). Specific in-
formation on importing STEP files is provided in General Procedure (p. 193).
Note:
Importing model geometry from STEP files is not a direct way to construct a model; it is a
way of creating the geometry of objects you want in your model without specifying the di-
mensions from scratch.
• General Procedure (p. 193)
• CSV/Excel Files (p. 194)
• Networks (p. 199)
• Gradient, Cadence, and Apache Sentinel Powermap Files (p. 201)
• Gradient Powermap Files for Stacked Die Packages (p. 201)
• Apache RedHawk Chip Thermal Model (CTM) Powermap Files (p. 201)
6.8.1. General Procedure

To import model geometry into ANSYS Icepak, you will use the File Import menu.
File Import
When model geometry from any of these file formats is imported into ANSYS Icepak, the points
between line segments are displayed in blue. To import model data into ANSYS Icepak, follow the
procedure below.
1. Select a file format from the File type options.
• For a STEP file that contains point and line information, select STEP points+lines.
• For a comma separated ASCII file, select CSV/Excel.
2. Enter the name of the import file (for example, file.igs) in the File name field in the dialog box. You
can enter your own filename, which can be a full pathname to the file (beginning with a / character on
a Linux system or a drive letter on Windows) or a pathname relative to the directory in which ANSYS
Icepak was started. Alternatively, you can choose a filename by selecting the file in the directory list in
the dialog box.
3. (STEP files only) Keep the default option of Scale cabinet to fit objects. This sizes the cabinet automat-
ically to the dimensions required to contain the imported data.
4. Click Open to import the model data.
6.8.2. CSV/Excel Files

ANSYS Icepak enables you to import geometry and power for simple objects (including blocks, plates,
walls, grilles, 2D fans, resistances, openings, sources, materials, monitor points and monitor surfaces)
in the form of comma separated values (CSV) files. Complex objects (that is, 3D fans, blowers, PCBs,
heat sinks, heat exchangers, and packages) are not supported for this operation. Certain boundary
conditions are also not supported for this type of import.
To import a CSV file, select Import CSV/Excel from the File menu and load a file. Click the Import
button at each window to move into the next stage or to finish the import process. Note this process
may take some time depending on the number of objects. See Figure 6.26: Row import Options
Panel (p. 195) and Figure 6.27: Column import options Panel (p. 196).
Figure 6.26: Row import Options Panel
Figure 6.27: Column import options Panel
An example of csv file format is given below. For details about how to export a CSV/Excel file, see
CSV/Excel Files (p. 206).
# Custom Materials
#
name,solid_conductivity_constant,fixvals,solid_density,current_genus,mat_subtype,mat_type,obtype,solid_sp_heat_con
"Panasonic CV8710U",0.95,1,1980.0,,Mold compound,solid,material,900.0,0,-1,0,E:/Projects/MSM8994_1044MNSP_Package-
"Panasonic CV8715A",0.8,1,1750,,Mold compound,solid,material,1000,0,-1,0,E:/Projects/MSM8994_1044MNSP_Package-Ther
"Panasonic R1515A",0.64,1,2100.0,,Substrate_core,solid,material,870,0,-1,0,E:/Projects/MSM8994_1044MNSP_Package-Th
# Plates Rectangular Object

name,high_emis_on,high_reftemp,high_rtype,low_rtype,plate_type,
all_conduct_thin_thickness,fl_material,use_contact_res,eff_thick,low_enabled,
low_material,all_conduct_thin_material,all_conduct_thin_on,sol_material,
high_material,high_enabled,contact_res,te,eff_thick_on
plate.1,0,20.0,reftemp,reftemp,conduct_thin,0.0,default,0,0.01,0,default,
default,0,default,default,0,0.0,0.0,0
# Plates Rectangular
name,xs,ys,zs,xe,ye,ze,xd,yd,zd,volume_flag,split_flag,plate_flag,diff_flag,
plane,iradius,thickness,numcopies,copyspace,xoff,yoff,zoff
plate.1,0.4,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.6,0.5,0.2,0.2,0,0,0,1,0,2,0,0,1,0,0,0,0
# Fans Circular Object

name
fan.1
# Fans Circular
name,xc,yc,zc,split_flag,plane,radius,iradius,xoff,yoff,zoff
fan.1,0.5,0.5,0.5,16,2,0.1,0,0,0,0
# Blocks Polygon Object

name
block.1
# Resistances Prism Object

name
resistance.1
# Blocks Polygon
name,volume_flag,split_flag,changes,nverts,plane,height,xoff,yoff,zoff,
vert1,tvert1,vert2,tvert2,vert3,tvert3
block.1,1,0,0,3,0,0.2,0,0,0,0.8 0 0.717157,,0.8 0.282843 0.717157,,0.8 0 1,
# Resistances Prism
name,xs,ys,zs,xe,ye,ze,xd,yd,zd,volume_flag,diff_flag,xoff,yoff,zoff
resistance.1,0.8,0.241689,0.0363489,1,0.441689,0.236349,0.2,0.2,0.2,1,0,0,0,0
# Monitor Points
#
name,active,selected,temperature,velocity,pressure,object,nodes,x,y,z,x_units,y_units,z_units
DIE_PIN 1,1,0,1,0,0,,,6.716,5.403,0.211,mm,mm,mm
PKG_PIN 1,1,0,1,0,0,,,-7.8,7.5,-0.116,mm,mm,mm
Temperature_Sensor_0,1,0,1,0,0,,,-6.084,1.803,0.211,mm,mm,mm
Temperature_Sensor_1,1,0,1,0,0,,,0.316,3.503,0.211,mm,mm,mm
Typically, the flags you would use are name, xs, ys, zs, xe, ye, ze, xd, yd, zd. In
many cases (for example, for 2D objects, inclined shapes, or cylindrical shapes), plane information is
also useful. This is represented by an integer value of , , or , where maps to yz, maps to xz
and to xy. In general:
• xs, ys, zs represent the starting coordinates
• xe, ye, ze represent the ending coordinates
• xd, yd, zd represent the lengths in each direction.
For cylindrical or circular objects, the relevant dimensions become xc, yc, zc, radius,
height.
If you import the file from ANSYS Icepak into Excel and use the comma as a separator, then each
column will get imported correctly.
To import a file from Excel into ANSYS Icepak, it is recommended that you group all object types and
shape types together. For example, if you want to create a number of cuboidal blocks, you might
create the following input (where the commas separate columns):
# Blocks Prism name,xs,ys,zs,xe,ye,ze,xd,yd,zd,volume_flag,diff_flag,xoff,yoff,zoff

block.1,0.4,0.4,0.4,0.6,0.6,0.6,0.2,0.2,0.2,1,0,0,0,0
block.2,0.3,0.3,0.3,0.6,0.6,0.6,0.2,0.2,0.2,1,0,0,0,0
block.3,0.4,0.4,0.4,0.6,0.6,0.6,0.2,0.2,0.2,1,0,0,0,0
Alternatively, you could input the same syntax into a text editor and then import the text file into
ANSYS Icepak.
To add cylindrical blocks, for example, append the following to the previous list:
# Blocks Cylinder
name,xc,yc,zc,xc2,yc2,zc2,volume_flag,changes,plane,radius,iradius,
radius2,iradius2,height,start_angle,end_angle,xoff,yoff,zoff
block.4,0.4,0.5,0.5,0.6,0.5,0.5,1,0,0,0.112838,0,0.112838,0,0.2,0,0,0,0,0
block.5,0.4,0.5,0.5,0.6,0.5,0.5,1,0,0,0.112838,0,0.112838,0,0.2,0,0,0,0,0
block.7,0.4,0.5,0.5,0.6,0.5,0.5,1,0,0,0.112838,0,0.112838,0,0.2,0,0,0,0,0
You can proceed this way to generate as many object types and shapes as you want.
Note that not all of the columns are necessary. It is also not necessary to create the header section
with the labels as shown above (that is, name, xs, ys, and so on). In the following example, you will
import three prism (cuboid) blocks. The starting coordinates are expressed by the first three values
and the dimensions are expressed by the last three values.
# Blocks Prism
block.1,0.4,0.4,0.4,0.2,0.2,0.2
block.2,0.3,0.3,0.3,0.2,0.2,0.2
block.3,0.4,0.4,0.4,0.2,0.2,0.2
When you import this syntax into ANSYS Icepak using the CSV/Excel option in the File Import
menu, ANSYS Icepak will ask you for inputs of units, choice of separator, and type of object by which
to represent the input geometry. When ANSYS Icepak encounters a line that begins with a #, it will
pause and ask for the next set of choices. For example, if you import the following syntax
# Blocks Prism
block.1,0.4,0.4,0.4,0.2,0.2,0.2
block.2,0.3,0.3,0.3,0.2,0.2,0.2
block.3,0.4,0.4,0.4,0.2,0.2,0.2
# Openings Rectangular
opening.1,0.4,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.6,0.5
opening.2,0.2,0.2,0.3,0.6,0.6,0.3
ANSYS Icepak will stop after the first set of blocks and ask you how you want to import the next set.
This process will continue until ANSYS Icepak reaches the end of the file.
Note:
If you do not have any lines starting with a #, your only choice will be to import all of the
objects as a single type/shape.
The same procedure can be used to import power values for a set of objects.
To import power values for a set of rectangular sources you can use the following syntax.
# Sources Rectangular Object

name,temp_total,temp_total_units
M-1,0.708813428,W
M-2,1.895909642,W
M-3,2.316375884,W
Note:
For the power import, the object geometry needs to be imported/created prior to the
power values. If the object geometry is not created prior to the power import, the objects
will be created using the default geometry.
To import power values for polygonal sources you can use the following syntax.
#Sources Polygon
#
name,nverts,vert1,vert2,vert3,vert4,vert5,vert6,vert7,vert8,vert9,vert10
source.2,4,0.631271 0.398228 0.5,0.831271 0.398228 0.5,0.83127 0.598228 0.5,0.631271 0.59822 8 0.5
source.1,10, 0.4,0.4 0.4 0.5,0.5 0.4 0.5,0.6 0.4 0.5,0.6 0.6 0.5,0.5 0.7 0.5,0.4 0.6 0.5,0.2 0.5 0.5,0.3 0.3 0.5,
.0 0.35 0.5,0.45 0.375 0.5
6.8.3. Networks
ANSYS Icepak enables you to import geometry for network objects using comma separated values
(CSV/Excel) files.
An example of this file format is given below. In this example, the header lines are shown in bold to
indicate they are needed and should not be removed from the file. For details about how to export
a CSV/Excel file, see CSV/Excel Files (p. 206) and for details about how to export a network object, see
Networks (p. 208).
# network starts
# network name, num_bound, value, num_int, value, num_face, value
network.1, num_bound, 2, num_int,2, num_face, 3
# boundary nodes
# node name, prop, value, prop, value,...
bound_1, Fixed heat, 10.0 W, x, 20, y, 20
bound_2, Fixed temperature, ambient C, x, 170, y, 20
# internal nodes
int_1, Power, 20.0 W, Mass, 20.1 kg, Capacity, 20.2 J/kg-K, C (W/K),
1.0, Low T, ambient, High T, 323.15 C, x, 70, y, 100
int_2, Power, 21.0 W, Mass, 21.1 kg, Capacity, 21.2 J/kg-K, x, 220, y, 110
# surface nodes
face_2, Contact resistance, 31.0 C/W, x, 190, y, 190
face_3, x, 350, y, 190
face_1, Effective thickness, 30.0 m, x, 20, y, 180
# thermal links
# node1 name, node2 name, type, prop, value, prop, value, ...
int_2, face_3, R, Resistance, 30.0 C/W
int_1, face_1, R, Heat tr coeff, 11.0 W/K-m2
bound_1, int_1, R, Resistance, 10.0 C/W
int_2, face_2, C, Mass flow, 20.0 kg/s
int_1, int_2, R, Resistance, 30.0 C/W
bound_2, int_2, C, Mass flow, 20.0 kg/s
# curve data
# node name, point 1, point 2, point 3, ...
int_2, 0 0.3,0.4 0.8,0.7 0.4, 1 0,
# plates
# face name, face type, prop, value, prop, value,...
face_1, quad, xs, 0.1, ys, 0.7, zs, 0.5, xe, 0.3, ye, 0.9, ze, 0.5, xd, 0.2, yd, 0.2, zd, 0,
volume_flag, 0, split_flag, 0, plate_flag, 0,diff_flag, 0,plane, 2,iradius, 0,thickness, 0,
numcopies, 1, copyspace, 0, xoff, 0, yoff, 0, zoff, 0
face_2, circ, xc,0.5, yc, 0.8, zc, 0.408807, split_flag, 0,plane, 2, radius, 0.112838,
iradius, 0, xoff, 0,yoff, 0, zoff, 0
face_3, quad, xs, 0.7, ys, 0.7, zs, 0.5, xe, 0.9, ye, 0.9, ze,0.5, xd, 0.2, yd, 0.2, zd, 0,
volume_flag, 0, split_flag, 0,plate_flag, 0,diff_flag, 0, plane, 2, iradius, 0, thickness, 0,
numcopies, 1, copyspace, 0, xoff, 0, yoff, 0, zoff, 0
# network ends
# network starts
# network name, num_bound, value, num_int, value, num_face, value
network.2, num_bound,2,num_int,1,num_face,2
# boundary nodes
bound_a, Fixed heat, 10.0 W, x, 20, y,20
bound_b, Fixed heat, 11.0 W, x, 220, y, 20
# internal nodes
# node name, prop, value, prop, value, ...
int_a, Power, 20.0 W, Mass, 20.1 kg, Capacity, 20.2 J/kg-K, x, 100, y, 100
# surface nodes
face_b, Contact resistance, 31.0 C/W, x, 240, y, 180
face_a, Effective thickness, 30.0 m, x, 20, y, 180
# thermal links
# node1 name, node2 name, type, prop, value, prop, value, ...
int_a, face_a, R, Heat tr coeff, 10.0 W/K-m2
bound_a, int_a, R, Resistance, 10.0 C/W
bound_b, int-a, C, Mass flow, 20.0 kg/s
int_a, face_b, C, Mass flow, 20.0 kg/s
# curve data
# node name, point1, point2, point3,...
# plates
# face name, face type, prop, value, prop, value,...
face_a,incline,xs,0.471055,ys,0.154742,zs,0.435914,xe,0.671055,ye,0.354742,ze,0.635914,
xd,0.2,yd,0.2,zd,0.2,xd2,0.2,yd2,0.282843,zd2,0,volume_flag,0,split_flag,0,plate_flag, 0,
diff_flag, 0,axis,0,rotate_sign,1,rotate_angle,45,thickness,0,xoff, 0, yoff, 0, zoff, 0
face_b, polygon, volume_flag, 0, split_flag, 0, changes, 0, nverts, 5,
plane, 2, height, 0, xoff, 0, yoff, 0, zoff, 0, vert1, 0.127767 0.263882 0.591802, tvert1, ,
vert2, 0.227767 0.163882 0.591802, tvert2, , vert3, 0.327767 0.263882 0.591802, tvert3, , vert4,
0.327767 0.463882 0.591802, tvert4, , vert5, 0.127767 0.463882 0.591802, tvert5,
# network ends
If you import the file from ANSYS Icepak into Excel and use the comma as a separator, then each
column will get imported correctly. Alternatively, you could input the same syntax into a text editor
and then import the text file into ANSYS Icepak. You have the option of creating a new csv file to
import or you can export an existing file and modify it. After modifying the file, you can then import
it.
Note:
Before importing a network object, you will need to add an empty network object to your
model first and use consistent naming in your csv file.
6.8.4. Gradient, Cadence, and Apache Sentinel Powermap Files

ANSYS Icepak enables you to import Integrated Circuit (IC) powermap files to enable integrated chip-
to-system level thermal analysis. These files are exported from the chip-level thermal analysis tools
Gradient Firebolt (i2p), Cadence Encounter (tab) and Apache Sentinel TI.
The import of Sentinel TI files can be done for Face Up or Face down die blocks.
The powermap file can be imported using the appropriate option in the File Import Powermaps
menu. After reading the powermap file, ANSYS Icepak will create an array of 2D sources. The source
geometries and powers are imported directly from the powermap files.
For information on viewing powermap properties in 2D and 3D, see Display Powermap Property (p. 931).
6.8.5. Gradient Powermap Files for Stacked Die Packages

ANSYS Icepak enables you to import individual die powermap files for stacked die packages to enable
integrated die-to-system thermal analyses. These files are exported from Cadence Encounter (tab).
The powermap files can be imported using the Import Cadence Stacked Die tab file panel in the
File Import Powermaps menu. In the Import Cadence Stacked Die tab file panel, click the
Browse button and select the powermap file. Select the appropriate Die Block from the drop-down
list and choose the position and orientation of the sources. Repeat this same process for Die 2. If
there are more than 2 dies, click Add Die and repeat the process of selecting the power map file,
position and orientation. After reading the powermap files, ANSYS Icepak will create an array of 2D
sources on each of the dies in the stacked die package. The source geometries and powers are imported
directly from the powermap files.
6.8.6. Apache RedHawk Chip Thermal Model (CTM) Powermap Files

ANSYS Icepak enables you to import individual CTM powermap files exported from Apache RedHawk.
To import the powermap into ANSYS Icepak, follow the procedure below.
1. From the Die Block drop-down list, select the block on which to place the powermap.
2. Enter a value for Density Number to define the number of heat sources.
3. If needed, enter a value for Resolution. Resolution allows you to input a factor by which to multiply
the size of the smallest sources in the powermap. This is helpful when using a high Density number.
The default entry of 1 retains the default size of the smallest sources.
4. Next to CTM File, click Browse to open the CTM panel. Browse to the location of the CTM file, select
it, and click Open.
5. Click Load to load the CTM file. Under CTM data, the Total Power(W) and SH Power(W) (self-heat
power) are displayed for each Temperature(C) point.
Note:
It is useful to check if the CTM power structure is normal. That is, Total Power(W)
increases with temperature as expected, and SH Power(W) is small relative to total
power (e.g., less than 10%).
Exporting ANSYS Icepak Files
6. Under CTM data, select the Direction of the powermap.
7. If needed, select a Rotation to rotate the powermap clockwise.
8. The current selection is displayed in the Current field.
Note:
You can click View next to each CTM temperature level to display the powermap
in the graphics window and the Powermap info panel, which includes the Tem-
perature, Max Power, Min Power, and Total Power.
9. Click Apply. A source object powermap is created.
6.9. Exporting ANSYS Icepak Files

The following sections detail how to export ANSYS Icepak projects in various other formats.
• Saving an AutoTherm File (p. 203)
• Write Sentinel TI HTC File (p. 204)
• Export ANSYS Electronics Desktop Script (p. 205)
• CSV/Excel Files (p. 206)
• Networks (p. 208)
• IDF Files (p. 209)
• Electronics Cooling XML Files (p. 210)
• Gradient, Cadence Thermal Resistance and SIwave Temperature Files (p. 214)
• Write Twin Builder Files (p. 214)
• CFD Post/Mechanical data (p. 214)
• Exporting JEDEC PTD/JEP30 Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 214)
6.9.1. Saving an AutoTherm File

ANSYS Icepak can export temperature and heat transfer coefficient data to an AutoTherm file (a board-
level analysis product available from Mentor Graphics). After you calculate a solution for an IDF file
that you imported into ANSYS Icepak, you can save the temperature and heat transfer coefficient
data to a file that can be read into AutoTherm. To save an AutoTherm file, select Write Autotherm
file in the Report menu.
Report Write Autotherm file
ANSYS Icepak will open a File selection dialog box. Specify the name of the file where you want to
save the AutoTherm data in the File name text entry box. You can also specify the directory in which
the data should be saved. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on saving a file.
The user inputs for saving an AutoTherm file are shown below.
The steps for specifying the format of the AutoTherm file to be saved are as follows:
1. Specify the plane in which you want to save the temperature and heat transfer coefficient data (Y-Z, X-
Z, or X-Y).
2. Specify the number of points on the plane where ANSYS Icepak should save the data in the two directions
parallel to the Plane. The directions that are available depend on your choice of Plane. For example, if
you selected X-Y next to Plane, you can specify the number of points in the x direction (X count) and
in the y direction (Y count).
3. Specify the reference temperature (Ref temp) for the heat transfer coefficient. The heat transfer coefficient
is computed as
(6.1)
where q is the heat flux and Tref is the reference temperature.
6.9.2. Write Sentinel TI HTC File

ANSYS Icepak can export temperature, heat flux, and heat transfer coefficient data to a Sentinel TI
file after solving. To write a Sentinel TI file, select Sentinel TI HTC file from the Export drop-down
list in the Report menu.
Report Export Sentinel TI HTC file
ANSYS Icepak will open an Export Sentinel TI HTC file panel. The user inputs for writing a Sentinel
TI file are shown below.
Figure 6.28: Export Sentinel TI HTC file
The steps for writing the HTC format of the Sentinel TI file are as follows:
1. A default Solution ID will appear in the Solution ID text box. To specify a different solution, click the
Select button.
2. Select the Package up direction using the drop-down arrow. The package up direction indicates the
direction of the package stackup starting with the solder balls to the top of the mold/die.
3. Select the Package top object using the drop-down arrow. Select the mold of a package object or an
object representing the mold. In the case of flip-chip packages, the die object represents the package
top.
4. Select the Package substrate object using the drop-down arrow. Select the substrate of a package
object or an object representing the substrate.
5. Select the Package bottom object using the drop-down arrow. Select solder balls of a package object
or multiple objects representing the solder balls.
6. Enter the actual numerical Ambient temp or use "ambient" as the default input.
7. Select the Distributed HTC values option to write out the package top and substrate values. This option
exports the heat transfer coefficient values at each of the mesh faces of the package top and the package
substrate exposed to the flow. If this option is turned off, only average heat transfer coefficient values
are exported.
8. Enter a File name or use default.htc. Select the Browse button to save the file in a directory.
9. Click Write to write out the htc file.
6.9.3. Export ANSYS Electronics Desktop Script

ANSYS Icepak can export a python script that will generate an equivalent Icepak model in the ANSYS
Electronics Desktop as an Icepak design type.
File > Export > ANSYS Electronics Desktop script
Figure 6.29: Select file for ANSYS Electronics Desktop script
ANSYS Icepak will open an Select file for ANSYS Electronics Desktop script panel. Navigate to the
desired folder, enter a File name, and click Save to save the python script.
6.9.4. CSV/Excel Files

To export an object or a list of objects in CSV/Excel file format, select the appropriate objects in the
Model manager window, and then select CSV/Excel in the File Export menu. ANSYS Icepak will
open the Save object panel (Figure 6.30: The Save object Panel for CSV/Excel Files (p. 207)), where
you can specify the details of the object that you want to export.
File Export CSV/Excel
Figure 6.30: The Save object Panel for CSV/Excel Files
After you have entered a File name, you will need to specify the type of Separator that will be used
to separate the data in the output file (that is, tab, space, comma, or semicolon).
If the object geometries are all that you want to export, you should turn on the Geometry only option.
However, if you also want to export other model data (for example, radiation, heat transfer, flow dir-
ection information), leave the Geometry only option turned off and instead click Object output
options. ANSYS Icepak will then open a series of panels (for example, Figure 6.31: An Example of a
CSV/Excel Export Options Panel (p. 208)) where you can select the data to be exported.
Figure 6.31: An Example of a CSV/Excel Export Options Panel
In each of the export options panels, turn on the options for the data to be exported for the various
objects. When you are done with one object, click Select in the panel to proceed to the next panel.
When you are finished with all of the objects, click Save in the Save object panel to complete the
export.
Note:
• To associate materials with objects, click Material in the export options panels.
• Object geometries will not be written unless General is turned on in each of the export options
panels. All custom materials, monitor points and monitor surfaces in your project will be expor-
ted automatically.
6.9.5. Networks
To export network objects, select Networks in the File Export menu. ANSYS Icepak will open the
Save all network data panel (Figure 6.32: The Save all network data Panel (p. 209)) where you can
specify the file name and save the file.
File Export Networks
Figure 6.32: The Save all network data Panel
6.9.6. IDF Files

To export an IDF file from ANSYS Icepak, select the IDF in the File Export menu. ANSYS Icepak will
open the Export IDF files panel (Figure 6.33: The Export IDF files Panel (p. 209)), where you can specify
the details of the IDF files that you want to export. You have the option of choosing IDF file versions
2.0 or 3.0. Select the board in the Board block to export drop-down list. In addition to the board
file (.emn, .bdf ), a library file (.emp, .ldf ) can be specified in the panel.
Note:
IDF export is enabled for boards that have been imported via the IDF import option.
Additional components created within Icepak as block objects are supported. However,
other object types and CAD shapes for the blocks are not supported.
Figure 6.33: The Export IDF files Panel
6.9.7. Electronics Cooling XML Files

ANSYS Icepak enables you to export models in Electronics Cooling XML (EC XML) format that can be
read by applications with EC XML compatibility. To export an EC XML file into ANSYS Icepak, select
File Export EC XML file to open the File selection panel. Browse to the desired location and
click Save. The XML file is saved to the specified location with a file name of projectname_ec.xml.
Note:
CAD and inclined shapes are not supported.
Supported Icepak Objects and Settings Exported XML Object and Properties
Cabinet solutionDomain
• Location
• Size
• Ambient conductivity
Plate solid2DBlock
• Shape: Rectangular, Polygon, and Circular • Name
• Location
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
• Total power
Wall solid2DBlock
• Shape: Rectangular, Polygon, and Circular • Name
• Wall type: Stationary • Location
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
• Total power
Block solid3DBlock
• Block type: Solid • Name
• Shape: Prism, Polygon, and Ellipsoid • Location
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
• Total power
Block (Cylinder) solidCylinder
• Block type: Solid • Name
• Shape: Cylinder • Location
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
• Total power
Source sourceBlock
• Shape: Prism, Polygon, Cylinder, and Ellipsoid • Name
• Total power: 0 • Location
• Size
• Total power
Source (Rectangular) source2DBlock
• Shape: Rectangular and Circular, Cylinder, and • Name

Ellipsoid
• Location
• Total power: 0
• Size
• Plane
• Total power
PCB printedCircuitBoard
• Shape: Rectangular and Polygon • Name
• Pcb type: All types • Location
• Size
• Plane
• Solid material
Grille Grille
• Shape: Rectangular, Circular, and Polygon • Name
• Pressure loss specification: Loss coefficient • Location
• Size
• Loss coefficient
• Free area ratio
Resistance flowResistance
• Shape: All shapes • Name
• Pressure loss specification: Loss coefficient • Location
• Velocity loss coefficient: Device • Size
• Resistance velocity dependence: Quadratic • Plane?
• Loss coefficient
• Free area ratio
Enclosure enclosure
• Name
• Location
• SIze
• Wall Thickness
Fan (2d Rectangular) rectangular2dfan
• Model as: 2d • Name
• Shape: Rectangular, Circular, and Polygon • Location
• Flow type: Fixed, Linear, and Non-linear • Size
• Plane
• Flow type
Fan (3d Axial) axial3dfan
• Model as: 3d • Name
• Shape: Rectangular and Circular • Location
• Flow type: Fixed, Linear, and Non-linear • Size
• Plane
• Flow type
• Hub radius
Heatsink heatsink
• Type: Simple and Detailed • Name
• Location
• Size
Block (Network Two Resistor) twoResistorModel
• Shape: Prism • Name
• Block type: Network • Location
• Network type: Two resistor • Size
• Board side
• Junction power
• Rjc
• Rjb
Material Material
• Material type: Solid • Name
• Solid specific heat: Constant • Density
• Conductivity type: Isotropic and Orthotropic • Specific heat
Note: Only Constant and Linear solid • Conductivity

conductivity types are supported. If Solid
conductivity is set as Piecewise, Icepak • Conductivity type
sets it as Constant.
Assembly assembly
• Name
• List of objects
Monitor point monitorPoint
• Name
• Location
6.9.8. Gradient, Cadence Thermal Resistance and SIwave Temperature Files

ANSYS Icepak enables you to export package die thermal resistance data that can be read by the
chip-level thermal analysis tools Gradient Firebolt (p2i) and Cadence Encounter (TPKG). In addition,
you can export temperature data to SIwave. The resistance or temperature file can be exported using
the appropriate option in the Report Export menu. For exporting die thermal resistance, the block
object representing the package die needs to be selected and the appropriate ambient temperature
entered before the resistance file can be exported. For exporting temperature data, the block objects
of interest need to be selected before the temperature file can be exported.
6.9.9. Write Twin Builder Files

ANSYS Icepak enables you to export a .simpinfo file that can be read by Twin Builder. The Twin
Builder file is written out by enabling the Write Twin Builder File option in the Parameters and
optimization panel. See Running a Single Trial (p. 704) for details.
6.9.10. CFD Post/Mechanical data

CFD Post/Mechanical data instructs ANSYS Icepak to export .cfd.dat and .cfd.cas files that can be
read by CFD-Post and transfer temperature data (.loads and .loadsummary files) from ANSYS Icepak
to Mechanical. In the case of a transient problem, each time step will be written out as well with the
same extensions. The files are written out by enabling CFD Post/Mechanical data in the Solve panel.
If this option was not enabled prior to solving, you also have the option of exporting data using the
Post>Workflow data menu in ANSYS Icepak.
6.9.11. Exporting JEDEC PTD/JEP30 Files into ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak can export network object files in the JEDEC PTD/JEP30 format. From the File > Export
menu, select JEDEC PTD/JEP30 file. Visit the following URL for information and guidelines on the
JEDEC PTD/JEP 30 format:
https://www.jedec.org/category/technology-focus-area/jep30
Chapter 7: Unit Systems
This chapter describes the units used in ANSYS Icepak and how you can control them. Information is
organized into the following sections:
• Overview of Units in ANSYS Icepak (p. 215)
• Units for Meshing (p. 216)
• Built-In Unit Systems in ANSYS Icepak (p. 216)
• Customizing Units (p. 217)
• Units for Postprocessing (p. 220)
7.1. Overview of Units in ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak allows you to work in any unit system, including mixed units. Thus, for example, you can
work in Imperial (British) units with heat input in Watts, or you can work in SI units with length defined
in inches. This is accomplished by providing ANSYS Icepak with a correct set of conversion factors
between the units you want to use and the standard SI unit system that is used internally. ANSYS Icepak
uses these conversion factors for input and output, internally storing all parameters and performing all
calculations in SI units.
Units can be altered part way through a problem setup and/or after you have completed your calculation.
If you have input some parameters in SI units and then you switch to Imperial, all of your previous inputs
(and the default prompts) are converted to the new unit system. If you have completed a simulation
in SI units but you would like to report the results in any other units, you can alter the unit system and
ANSYS Icepak will convert all of the problem data to the new unit system when results are displayed.
As noted above, all problem inputs and results are stored in SI units internally. This means that the
parameters stored in the project files are in SI units. ANSYS Icepak simply converts these values to your
unit system at the interface level.
Note:
You must specify all inputs in SI units in the Transient temperature panel.
Note:
When entering decimals in ANSYS Icepak, you must use the dot character. Do not use
a comma as the radix point.
Unit Systems
7.2. Units for Meshing

The units used for meshing will be the same as the default units specified for length (meters) in ANSYS
Icepak. To change the units for meshing, you must change the default units for length. See Changing
the Units for a Quantity (p. 217) for details on changing the units for a quantity.
7.3. Built-In Unit Systems in ANSYS Icepak

ANSYS Icepak provides two built-in unit systems: Imperial and SI. You can convert all units from one
system to another in the Units section of the Preferences panel.
Edit Preferences
Figure 7.1: The Units Section of the Preferences Panel
To choose the Imperial standard for all units, click the Set all to Imperial button; to select the Interna-
tional System of units (SI) standard for all units, click the Set all to SI button. Clicking on one of these
buttons will immediately change the unit system. You can then click Cancel to close the Preferences
panel if you are not interested in customizing any units.
Changing the unit system in the Preferences panel causes all current and future inputs that have units
to be based on the newly selected unit system.
Customizing Units
7.4. Customizing Units

If you would like a mixed unit system, or any unit system different from the default SI system supplied
by ANSYS Icepak, you can use the Units section of the Preferences panel (Figure 7.1: The Units Section
of the Preferences Panel (p. 216)) to select an available unit or specify your own unit name and conversion
factor for each quantity.
• Viewing Current Units (p. 217)
• Changing the Units for a Quantity (p. 217)
• Defining a New Unit (p. 219)
• Deleting a Unit (p. 220)
7.4.1. Viewing Current Units

Before customizing units for one or more quantities, you may want to view the current units. To view
the built-in definitions for a particular category, select the category in the Category list in the Units
section of the Preferences panel (Figure 7.1: The Units Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 216)). The
built-in definitions will be displayed in the Units list. For example, to view the built-in definitions for
length, select Length in the Category list. The built-in definitions for length are displayed in the
Units list: m, ft, cm, mm, microns, in, mil, and Cu-oz/ft2.
7.4.2. Changing the Units for a Quantity

ANSYS Icepak will allow you to modify the units for individual quantities. This is useful for problems
in which you want to use one of the built-in SI unit systems, but you want to change the units for
one quantity (or for a few). If, for example, you want to use SI units for your problem, but the dimen-
sions of the geometry are given in inches, you can select the SI unit system and then change the unit
of length from meters to inches.
Changing the Default Unit

The default unit for a particular Category is marked with an asterisk (*) in the Units list. To change
the default units for a particular quantity, follow these steps:
1. Select the quantity in the Category list (they are arranged in alphabetical order) in the Units section of
the Preferences panel (Figure 7.1: The Units Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 216)).
2. Choose a new unit from those that are available in the Units list.
3. Click Set as default under Conversion.
4. If you want to change the units for another quantity, repeat the steps above.
5. Apply the changes to the unit system either to the current project or to this and all future projects. To
apply changes to the unit system to the current project only, click This project in the Preferences panel.
To apply changes to the unit system to the current project and all future ANSYS Icepak projects, click All
projects in the Unit definitions panel.
Unit Systems
For the example cited above, you would choose Length in the Category list, and then select in
(inches) in the Units list. ANSYS Icepak displays the equation for the conversion between meters and
inches:
(7.1)
When the Conversion factors c= 39.37008, x0= 0, and y0= 0 are substituted into the above
equation, it becomes
(7.2)
You would then click Set as default to make inches the default unit of length for your model (see
Figure 7.1: The Units Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 216)).
You should substitute a length in meters into Equation 7.2 (p. 218) to calculate the length in inches.
For example, to convert a length of 10 m into inches:
(7.3)
Changing the default unit for a Category in the Units section of the Preferences panel causes all
future inputs that have units in that Category to be based on the newly selected default unit. For
example, if you change the unit of length as described in the example above, and then you create a
new block, the units defined for the block that relate to length will be in inches (see Figure 7.2: Units
Defined for Individual Inputs for a Block (p. 218)).
Figure 7.2: Units Defined for Individual Inputs for a Block
Note that changing the default unit for a Category does not change the units for any previous inputs.
Previous inputs still use the old units, so you do not need to make any changes to them.
Changing the Unit for an Individual Input

You can change the unit for an individual input by following the steps below:
1. Click the unit definition to the right of the text field to display the list of available units.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the new list item.
3. Click the left mouse button on the item to make the new selection. The list will close automatically and
If you want to abort the selection process while the list is displayed, you can move the pointer
anywhere outside the list and click the left mouse button.
For example, if you wanted to change the unit for xE in Figure 7.2: Units Defined for Individual Inputs
for a Block (p. 218) from inches to meters, you would click in to the right of the xE text entry field.
Customizing Units
You would then select m from the list of available units. The unit for xE would be changed to meters
and the units for the other parameters would remain unchanged.
The Fix values Option

You can also change the units in which a quantity is displayed, without changing its value, using the
Fix values option. This option is available in the Geometry tab of the Cabinet panel, in the Geometry
and Properties tabs of the Object panels, and in the Properties tab of the Materials panels. The
Fix values option is off by default in the Cabinet and the Object panels.
If, for example, you specify a block of size 0.2 m 0.2 m 0.2 m, and then you change the units for
the dimensions of the block from meters to centimeters, the block will be defined with dimensions
of 0.2 cm 0.2 cm 0.2 cm. (Internally ANSYS Icepak represents this as 0.002 m 0.002 m 0.002 m.)
If the Fix values option is selected in the Blocks panel, and you change the units for the dimensions
of the block from meters to centimeters, the values for the dimensions of the block will change from
0.2 m to 20 cm in the Blocks panel (the internal value stays the same, 0.2 m).
The Fix values option is on by default in the Materials panel. A database of materials is provided
with ANSYS Icepak (see Material Properties (p. 339)), and the units for these materials are defined as
SI units by default. When the Fix values option is on in the Materials panel, you can change the
units for a quantity without changing the internal value for that quantity. For example, the default
value and units for the density of air are 1 kg/m3. If you change the units from kg/m3 to lb/ft3 for
density, the value of density for air will be displayed as 0.0624 lb/ft3 in the Materials panel, and the
internal value is still 1 kg/m3.
If the Fix values option is not selected in the Materials panel and the units are changed for a
quantity, the internal value of the quantity will be changed. In the above example of changing the
units from kg/m3 to lb/ft3 for density, the value of density for air will be displayed as 1 lb/ft3 in the
Materials panel, and the internal value will be changed to 16.02 kg/m3.
7.4.3. Defining a New Unit

To create a new unit to be used for a particular quantity, follow the procedure below:
1. In the Units section of the Preferences panel (Figure 7.1: The Units Section of the Preferences Pan-
el (p. 216)), select the quantity in the Category list.
2. Click the New unit button to open the New unit name panel (Figure 7.3: The New unit name Panel (p. 219)).
Figure 7.3: The New unit name Panel
Unit Systems
3. Enter the name of your new unit in the text entry box and click Done. The new unit will appear in the
Units list in the Units section of the Preferences panel.
4. Select the new unit in the Units list, and enter the conversion factors (c, x0, and y0) under Conversion.
5. Click Set as default under Conversion if you want the new unit to be the default unit for that Category.
For example, if you want to use minutes as the unit of time, select Time in the Category list in the
Units section of the Preferences panel and click the New button. In the resulting New unit name
panel, enter min in the text entry box and click Done. The new unit min will appear in the Units list
in the Units section of the Preferences panel. Enter 0.016667 (which is equal to 1/60) for c under
Conversion in the Unit definitions panel.
Determining the Conversion Factor, c

The conversion factor c you specify (under Conversion in the Units section of the Preferences panel)
tells ANSYS Icepak the number to multiply by to obtain your customized unit value from the SI unit
value. Thus the conversion factor c should have the form custom units/SI units. For example, if you
want the unit of length to be inches, you should input a conversion factor c of 39.37008 inches/meter.
If you want the unit of speed to be feet/min, you can determine the conversion factor c by using the
following equation:
(7.4)
You should input a conversion factor c of 196.85, which is equal to 60/0.3048.
7.4.4. Deleting a Unit

To delete a unit, follow the procedure below:
1. In the Units section of the Preferences panel (Figure 7.1: The Units Section of the Preferences Pan-
el (p. 216)), select the quantity in the Category list.
2. Select a unit that you want to delete from the Units list.
3. Click the Delete unit button and select Accept in the Confirm panel.
7.5. Units for Postprocessing

You can choose the units for postprocessing for different variables using the Postprocessing units
panel (Figure 7.4: The Postprocessing units Panel (p. 221)). There are several ways to open the Postpro-
cessing units panel:
Units for Postprocessing
Figure 7.4: The Postprocessing units Panel
• Select Postprocessing units in the Post menu.
Post Postprocessing units
• Select Solution monitor in the Solve menu.
Solve Solution monitor
This opens the Solution monitor definition panel. Next, click the Output units button at the bottom
of the Solution monitor definition panel.
• Select Define report in the Solve menu.
Solve Define report
This opens the Define summary report panel. Next, click the Units button in the Define summary
report panel.
• Select Convergence plot in the Post menu.
Post Convergence plot
This opens the Solution monitor definition panel. Next, click the Output units button at the bottom
of the Solution monitor definition panel.
Unit Systems
• Click Summary report in the Report menu.
Report Summary report
This opens the Define summary report panel. Next, click the Edit units button in the Define summary
report panel.
• Select Point report in the Report menu.
Report Point report
This opens the Define point report panel. Next, click the Edit units button in the Define point report
panel.
The Postprocessing units panel shows the units defined for the different variables available for post-
processing. You can change the unit for a particular variable by selecting a new unit from the unit
definition drop-down list to the right of the variable, as described in Changing the Units for a Quant-
ity (p. 217).
Chapter 8: Defining a Project
Once you have planned your ANSYS Icepak analysis and have identified important features of the
problem you want to solve (see Overview of Using ANSYS Icepak (p. 14)), you are ready to begin the
first step in the ANSYS Icepak problem solving process: defining a project. All of the functions that are
needed to define a project are found in the File menu and toolbar and the Model manager window.
Consequently, this chapter will begin with an overview of the File menu and its functions, followed by
a discussion of the relevant portions of the Model manager window. Once you have defined a project,
you can then move on to building your model (Building a Model (p. 273)).
The information in this chapter is divided into the following sections:
• Overview of Interface Components (p. 223)
• Creating, Opening, Reloading, and Deleting a Project File (p. 229)
• Configuring a Project (p. 234)
• Specifying the Problem Parameters (p. 250)
• Problem Setup Wizard (p. 267)
8.1. Overview of Interface Components

• The File Menu (p. 223)
• The File commands Toolbar (p. 226)
• The Model manager Window (p. 227)
8.1.1. The File Menu

The File menu (Figure 8.1: The File Menu (p. 224)) contains options for working with ANSYS Icepak pro-
jects and project files. From this menu, you can open, merge, and save ANSYS Icepak projects. In ad-
dition, you can import, export, compress, and decompress files relating to your ANSYS Icepak model.
There are also utilities designed to save or print your model geometries. A brief description of the
File menu options is provided below. See Reading, Writing, and Managing Files (p. 143) for more in-
formation about reading, writing, and managing ANSYS Icepak project files. Note that if you are running
ANSYS Icepak from within ANSYS Workbench, the File menu options are different than what is
presented in this section. See The ANSYS File Menu (p. 137) for more information on the File menu
options when running ANSYS Icepak from Workbench.
Defining a Project
Figure 8.1: The File Menu
New project enables you to create a new ANSYS Icepak project using the New project panel. Here,
you can browse through your directory structure, create a new project directory, and enter a project
name.
Note:
Open project enables you to open existing ANSYS Icepak projects using the Open project panel.
Here, you can browse through your directory structure, locate a project directory, and either enter a
project name, or specify an old project name from a list of recent projects. Additionally, you can
specify a version name or number for the project.
Note:
project panel.
your project has multiple versions.
Overview of Interface Components
Note:
Save project as enables you to save the current ANSYS Icepak project under a different name using
the Save project panel.
Import provides options to import tetin file geometries into ANSYS Icepak. You also can import IDF
files, as well as comma separated values or spreadsheet format (CSV) using this option. See Importing
and Exporting Model Files (p. 159) for more information about importing files.
Export enables you to export your work as comma separated values or spreadsheet format (CSV), as
IDF 2.0 or 3.0 library files, or as a tetin file. See Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159) for more
information about exporting files.
Unpack project opens a File selection dialog box that enables you to browse for and decompress
.tzr files. See Packing and Unpacking Model Files (p. 156) for details.
Note:
Pack project opens a File selection dialog box that enables you to compact your project into a
compressed .tzr file. See Packing and Unpacking Model Files (p. 156) for details.
Clean up enables you to clean up your project by removing or compressing data relating to ECAD,
mesh, postprocessing, screen captures, summary output, reports, message logs, and scratch files using
the Clean up project data panel.
the graphics window using the Print options panel. The inputs for the Print options panel are sim-
ilar to those in the Graphics file options panel. See Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details.
Create image file opens a Save image dialog box that enables you to save your model displayed
in the graphics window to an image file. Supported file types include: PNG, GIF (8 bit color), JPEG,
PPM, VRML, TIFF, and PS. PNG is the default file type.
Shell window opens a separate window running an operating-system shell. The window is initially
in the subdirectory of the ANSYS Icepak projects directory that contains all the files for the current
projects. In this window you can issue commands to the operating system without exiting ANSYS
Icepak. To close the shell, enter the command exit. (Note that on Windows systems, this menu item
is called Command prompt).
Defining a Project
Quit exits the ANSYS Icepak application.
Note:
8.1.2. The File commands Toolbar

The File Commands toolbar (Figure 8.2: The File commands Toolbar (p. 226)) contains options for
working with ANSYS Icepak projects and project files. Note that if you are running ANSYS Icepak from
within ANSYS Workbench, the File command options are different than what is presented in this
section. See The ANSYS Icepak Toolbar (p. 139) for more information on the File commands options
when running ANSYS Icepak from Workbench. A brief description of the File commands toolbar options
is provided below. See Reading, Writing, and Managing Files (p. 143) for more information about
reading, writing, and managing files in ANSYS Icepak.
Figure 8.2: The File commands Toolbar
• New project ( ) enables you to create a new ANSYS Icepak project using the New project panel. Here,
you can browse through your directory structure, create a new project directory, and enter a project name.
Note:
Icepak Toolbar (p. 139) for more information.
• Open project ( ) enables you to open existing ANSYS Icepak projects using the Open project panel.
Here, you can browse through your directory structure, locate a project directory, and either enter a project
name, or specify an old project name from a list of recent projects. Additionally, you can specify a version
name or number for the project.
Note:
Icepak Toolbar (p. 139) for more information.
• Save project ( ) saves the current ANSYS Icepak project.
• Print screen ( ) enables you to print a PostScript image of the ANSYS Icepak model that is displayed
in the graphics window using the Print options panel. The inputs for the Print options panel are similar
to those in the Graphics file options panel. See Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details.
Overview of Interface Components
• Create image file ( ) opens a Save image dialog box that enables you to save your model displayed
in the graphics window to an image file. Supported file types include: PNG, PPM, GIF (8 bit color), JPEG,
VRML, TIFF, and PS. PNG is the default file type.
8.1.3. The Model manager Window

The ANSYS Icepak Model manager window (Figure 8.3: An Example of the Model manager Win-
dow (p. 228)) provides a localized area for defining your ANSYS Icepak model and contains a project-
specific listing of problem and solution parameters.
The Model manager window is presented in a tree-like structure with expandable and collapsible
tree nodes that show or hide relevant tree items. To expand a tree node, use the left mouse button
to click the icon on the left hand side of the tree. To collapse a tree node, click the icon.
You can edit and manage your ANSYS Icepak project from within the Model manager window using
the mouse. For example, by clicking on or dragging individual items, you can edit objects, select
multiple objects, edit project parameters, add groups within groups, and break apart assemblies. In
addition, the Model manager window includes a context menu, accessible by right-clicking the
mouse, that enables you to easily manipulate your ANSYS Icepak model. See Using the Mouse in the
Model manager Window (p. 111) for more information on using the mouse in the Model manager
window.
Defining a Project
Figure 8.3: An Example of the Model manager Window
An ANSYS Icepak project is organized in the Model manager window using six different categories:
• Problem setup enables you to set basic problem parameters, set the project title, and define local co-
ordinate systems. Options include:
– Basic parameters opens the Basic parameters panel where you can specify parameters for the
current ANSYS Icepak model. See Specifying the Problem Parameters (p. 250) for details.
Creating, Opening, Reloading, and Deleting a Project File
– Title/notes opens the title/notes panel where you can enter a title and notes for the current ANSYS
Icepak model.
– Local coords opens the Local coord systems panel where you can create local coordinate systems
that can be used in your model other than the ANSYS Icepak global coordinate system with an origin
of (0, 0, 0). The origins of the local coordinate systems are specified with an offset from the origin of
the global coordinate system. See Local Coordinate Systems (p. 297) for details.
• Solution settings enables you to set ANSYS Icepak solution parameters. Options include:
– Basic settings opens the Basic settings panel where you can specify the number of iterations to be
performed and convergence criteria ANSYS Icepak should use before starting your CFD calculations.
See Initializing the Solution (p. 835) for details.
– Parallel settings opens the Parallel settings panel where you can specify the type of parallel exe-
cution you want to perform. Options include serial (the default), parallel, or network parallel. See Parallel
Processing (p. 852) for details.
– Advanced settings opens the Advanced solver setup panel where you can specify the discretization
scheme, under-relaxation factors, and the multigrid scheme. See Calculating a Solution (p. 829) for details.
• Groups lists any groups of objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Grouping Objects (p. 333)
for details about grouping objects.
• Postprocessing lists any postprocessing objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Examining
the Results (p. 877) for details about postprocessing in ANSYS Icepak.
• Points lists any point monitoring objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Defining Solution
Monitors (p. 837) for details about point monitors.
• Surfaces lists any surface monitoring objects in the current ANSYS Icepak project. See Defining Solution
Monitors (p. 837) for details about surface monitors.
• Trash lists any objects that have been deleted from the ANSYS Icepak model.
• Inactive lists any objects that have been made inactive in the ANSYS Icepak model.
• Model lists all active objects and materials for the ANSYS Icepak project.
• Libraries lists the libraries used in your ANSYS Icepak project and is located in the Library tab. By
default, a Main library exists in your ANSYS Icepak project that contains materials (fluids, solids, and sur-
faces), fan objects, and packages. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
8.2. Creating, Opening, Reloading, and Deleting a Project File

• Creating a New Project (p. 230)
• Opening an Existing Project (p. 232)
• Reloading the Main Version of a Project (p. 233)
Defining a Project
8.2.1. Creating a New Project

The first step in the process of defining a project is to create a new project file. To do this, select New
project in the File menu or click the button in the File commands toolbar.
File New project
ANSYS Icepak will open the New project file selection dialog box (Figure 8.4: The New project File
Selection Dialog Box (p. 230)). Here, you can select a project name, choose a location for the project,
then click Create to create the new project. For more information on file selection dialog boxes, see
File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98).
Note:
Parentheses are not valid in an Icepak project name.
Figure 8.4: The New project File Selection Dialog Box
The Message window will report
Creating new project

Done loading.
In addition, a new directory for your project (for example, project2) will be created, and the default
cabinet will be displayed in the graphics window.
If you are creating a new project and already have a project open that has not been written to a file,
ANSYS Icepak will display a warning message as shown in Figure 8.5: Warning Message Displayed
When Opening a New Project before Saving the Current Project (p. 231).
Figure 8.5: Warning Message Displayed When Opening a New Project before Saving the Current
Project
To save the current project before opening the new project, click Save. ANSYS Icepak will open the
Save project panel, where you can specify the name of the file. (See Saving a Project File (p. 149) for
more details on saving a project file.) To start the new project without saving the current project,
click Don’t save. Alternatively, to cancel opening the new project, click Cancel switch.
Title and Notes

You can enter a title and some notes for your new ANSYS Icepak project in the Title/notes panel
(Figure 8.6: The Title/notes Panel (p. 232)). To open the Title/notes panel, double-click the Title/notes
item under the Problem setup node in the Model manager window.
Problem setup Title/notes
Defining a Project
Figure 8.6: The Title/notes Panel
To enter a title and notes for your project:
1. Enter a title in the Title text entry box. The title can be longer and more descriptive than the project
name. The title can be displayed in the graphics window by toggling Project title in the Display drop-
down list in the View menu (see The View Menu (p. 61)).
2. Enter notes for the project in the Notes text entry box. There is no restriction on the number and type
of text characters you can use in your project’s title and notes.
3. Click Accept.
8.2.2. Opening an Existing Project

You will use the Open project panel (Figure 8.7: The Open project Panel (p. 233)) to open an existing
project. To do this, select Open project in the File menu or click the button in the File commands
toolbar.
File Open project
Figure 8.7: The Open project Panel
Select a project (for example, project1) in the Open project panel (see File Selection Dialog
Boxes (p. 98) for information on selecting a file). If you want to apply the settings you specified under
Options in the Preferences panel (see Configuring a Project (p. 234)) from the previous time you
worked on the project, turn on the Apply user preferences from project option.
Click Open to display the graphics for the selected model in the graphics window.
You can also use the Open project panel to create a new directory (see File Selection Dialog
Boxes (p. 98)).
8.2.3. Reloading the Main Version of a Project

When your project has multiple versions and solutions, and you want to make a change to the original
model, you can quickly revert to the main version of your ANSYS Icepak project. To do this, select
Reload main version in the File menu.
File Reload main version
While ANSYS Icepak enables you to have multiple versions of the same model, any changes you make
to a version of a model will not be saved to the main version. ANSYS Icepak enables you to quickly
reload the main version of a model so that changes can be made.
Each project and its corresponding versions are stored in the project directory. The main version of
the model can be identified by the model, job, and project files. Subsequent versions of the
Defining a Project
project can be identified with a version tag (that is, rad01.problem, rad01.job, rad01.model,
and so on).
8.3. Configuring a Project

You can configure your graphical user interface for the current project you are running, or for all ANSYS
Icepak projects, using the Options node of the Preferences panel (Figure 8.8: The Preferences Pan-
el (p. 234)).
Edit Preferences
Figure 8.8: The Preferences Panel
When you click one of the item nodes under the Options node, the Preferences panel (Figure 8.9: The
Display Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 236)- Figure 8.12: The Misc Section of the Preferences Pan-
el (p. 239)) will change to enable you to define many configuration settings for your ANSYS Icepak project.
Configuring a Project
The settings that are specified when any of the items under Options are selected in the Preferences
panel are stored in a file named .icepak_config, which is located in your home directory. You
should not modify the .icepak_config file directly; instead, make your desired configuration changes
in the Preferences panel. The settings specified under Defaults apply directly to the ANSYS Icepak model,
and are not related to how the model is displayed or how you interact with the model. These are saved
in .icepak_defaults.
The default settings for the Preferences panel are appropriate for many applications. To reset the
panel to the default settings, click the Reset all button at the bottom of the panel (Figure 8.8: The
Preferences Panel (p. 234)). You can make changes to the Preferences panel, and apply the changes
either to the current project by clicking This project, or to all ANSYS Icepak projects by clicking on
the All projects button. To close the panel without applying any changes, click Cancel.
A description of each item under the Options node in the Preferences panel is provided below. For
other items in this panel, please see the appropriate section.
Note:
If you want to load project-specific Options that were saved during a previous ANSYS
Icepak session, you will need to turn on the Apply user preferences from project option
in the Open project panel the next time you load the project. See Opening an Existing
Project (p. 232) for more information about opening a project.
8.3.1. Display Options

To set display options for your model, select the Display item under the Options node in the Prefer-
ences panel.
Options Display
Defining a Project
Figure 8.9: The Display Section of the Preferences Panel
• Color legend data format specifies the format of the labels that define the color divisions in the color
legend for a postprocessing object (see The Significance of Color in Graphical Displays (p. 881) for details
about the color legend and spectrum). The following data formats are available in ANSYS Icepak:
– exponential displays real values with a mantissa and exponent (for example, 1.0e-02). You can define
the number of digits in the fractional part of the mantissa in the Color legend precision field.
– float displays real values with an integral and fractional part (for example, 1.0000). You can set the
number of digits in the fractional part by changing the value of the Color legend precision.
– general displays real values with either float or exponential form, depending on the size of the number
and the defined Numerical display precision.
• Numerical display precision defines the number of fractional digits displayed in the labels for the color
legend.
• Color assembly objects gray contains options for changing the color of objects in the graphics window
to gray.
– None specifies that no objects are to be colored gray.
– Unselected specifies that only assemblies that are not selected should be colored gray.
– All specifies that all objects are to be colored gray.
• Display object names contains options for displaying the names of ANSYS Icepak objects in the graphics
window. You can select from the following options, or you can click the button in the Viewing options
toolbar to cycle through them.
– None specifies that no object names are displayed.
– Selected object specifies that only the name of the selected object is displayed.
– Current assembly specifies that the names of all objects in the current assembly are displayed. If no
assemblies are defined, the names of all objects under the Model node are displayed.
• Highlight block sides with properties enables you to highlight a side of a block object that has
thermal/radiation properties specified. The sides with properties are highlighted in red.
• Display traces in 3D enable you to view trace layers projected to a 3D space according to their cumulative
thickness values. By default this option is not enabled and traces are projected to a 2D plane.
• Screen up direction enables you to choose the direction of the vertical axis to be either Y or Z.
• Display scale enables you to specify the scaling for the display of your project in the graphics window.
For example, if you have a long and thin model (x=10 m, y=0.1 m, z=0.1 m), you may want to view the
model so that all directions are on the same scale in the graphics window. For the above example, you
would enter 0.01 for X, 1 for Y, and 1 for Z.
• Background Style sets a solid graphic background or a gradient background that varies from top to
bottom, left to right, or diagonally. The default is the top to bottom gradient.
• Background color1 enables you to specify the background color of the graphics window by opening a
Select the new background color window (or a similar panel, depending on the platform of your machine).
Since this window is not a part of the ANSYS Icepak application, the procedure for changing the color will
vary by platform. The default color is black.
• Background color2 sets a second graphic background color from the built-in color palette. The second
color is used for gradient background displays. For example, if you want a top-bottom gradient that starts
out white and ends up black, Background Color should be set to white and Background Color2 should
be set to black. The default color is white.
• Animate view orientation enables an animated transition between views when you select an orientation
option from the Orient menu or click a button on the Orientation commands toolbar.
Defining a Project
8.3.2. Editing Options

To set editing options for your model, select the Editing item under the Options node in the Prefer-
ences panel.
Options Editing
Figure 8.10: The Editing Section of the Preferences Panel
• Default dimensions enables you to specify whether you want Start/end or Start/length as the default
selection for dimensions in the Cabinet panel, the Object panels, and some of the Macros panels.
• Annotation edit key specifies which keyboard key is used in conjunction with the mouse buttons to
move legends, titles, and so on in the graphics window. You can select Control (for the Control key),
Shift (for the Shift key), or Meta (for the Alt key).
Note:
In this manual, descriptions of operations that use the Annotation edit key assume
that you are using the default setting (that is, Control). If you change the default
setting, you will need to use the key you have specified, instead of the Control key,
when you move legends, titles, and so on in the graphics window.
• Fix values contains options for fixing the values of quantities in the various object panels. See Unit Sys-
tems (p. 215) for details.
– All specifies that the values of all quantities will be fixed. This will cause the Fix values option to be
unavailable in the Object and Cabinet panels.
– None specifies that no quantities will be fixed. This will also cause the Fix values option to be unavailable
in the Object and Cabinet panels.
– Per-object specifies that the Fix values option can be toggled on or off for each individual object. This
is the default selection.
8.3.3. Printing Options

To set printing options for your model, select the Printing item under the Options node in the
Preferences panel.
Options Printing
Figure 8.11: The Printing Section of the Preferences Panel
• Print command for text files (Linux systems only) designates the command used to print text files. The
symbols % p and % f designate the printer name and filename, respectively. When the command is issued,
ANSYS Icepak replaces % p with the name of your default printer (specified by the LPDEST environment
variable). You can also specify the printer name explicitly (for example, -dmyprinter). ANSYS Icepak will
replace % f with the name you specify for the file. The default command is
lp -d %p %f
The symbol % t can be used to denote a temporary file whose name is uniquely generated by
ANSYS Icepak.
This command is not used by Windows systems. The Windows Print menu can be used instead.
• Print command for PS files (Linux systems only) is the command used to print PostScript (PS) files. The
default command is the same as the Print command for text files, described above.
This command is not used by Windows systems. The Windows Print menu can be used instead.
8.3.4. Miscellaneous Options

To set other miscellaneous options for your model, select the Misc item under the Options node in
the Preferences panel.
Options Misc
Figure 8.12: The Misc Section of the Preferences Panel
• Xterm options (Linux systems only) enables you to specify options for the text window that is opened
using the Shell window item in the File menu. See The File Menu (p. 57) for more details on opening a
text window.
Defining a Project
• Bubble help delay enables you to specify the delay time before the bubble help appears when you hold
your mouse pointer over an object in the interface. To disable the bubble help, specify a Bubble help
delay of 0.
• Microsoft Excel location (Windows systems only) is the location of the Microsoft Excel executable file.
• Default project location is the location for ANSYS Icepak project files. ANSYS Icepak will default to this
location while opening new and existing projects and also while opening tzr files. The Default project
location is the same location as the favorites directory ( ). If the Default project location field is empty,
the environment variable, ICEPAK_JOB_DIRECTORY, takes priority.
• Default file location is the location for importing files into ANSYS Icepak. ANSYS Icepak will search for
files to be imported (that is IDF and Gerber files) in this location. If the Default file location field is empty,
the environment variable, ICEPAK_FILE_DIRECTORY, takes priority.
• Default script file location is the location where script files (for example, script for launching the flow
solver) will be written to and executed from. If the Default script file location is not specified (i.e., empty),
the scripts are written to the current project location.
• 2D profile interpolation method enables you to specify the interpolation method for point profiles. Select
one of the three choices from the drop-down list.
– Constant is a zeroth-order interpolation. For each cell face at the boundary, the solver uses the value
from the profile file closest to the cell. Therefore, the accuracy of the interpolated profile will be affected
by the density of the data points in your profile file.
– Inverse distance weighted assigns a value to each cell face at the boundary, based on weighted con-
tributions from the values in the profile file. The weighted factor is inversely proportional to the distance
between the profile point and the cell face center. This is the default interpolation method for point
profiles.
– Least Squares assigns values to the cell faces at the boundary through a first-order interpolation
method that tries to minimize the sum of the squares of the offsets.
• Use node-weighted interpolation can improve the accuracy of reported values in models with large
discrepancies in cell-node interpolations, especially models with varying joule heating and those consisting
of traces and vias. This method uses a least-squares-based approach to determine cell node weights. For
surface node values, inverse distance is used as weight. If disabled, inverse volume is used as weight for
cell-node interpolation and simple averages of face values for surface node values.
Note:
The computation of node-weighted interpolation is expensive. Enabling Use node-

weighted interpolation may increase simulation time.
• Use GPU for metal fraction calculation, when enabled, uses the capabilities of your graphics card to
accelerate the ECAD trace metal fraction calculation.
Note:
Not all graphics cards have the required framebuffer memory to accurately compute
the metal fraction. Make sure your graphics cards have at least 2 GB (or more) of dedic-
ated memory.
– Save metal fraction calculation images, when enabled, saves PNG files of metal fraction layers in the
project directory.
8.3.5. Editing the Library Paths

The Libraries section of the Preferences panel (Figure 8.13: The Libraries Section of the Preferences
Panel (p. 241)) enables you to change the path settings to include libraries of macros and materials
so that ANSYS Icepak can find them.
Options Libraries
Figure 8.13: The Libraries Section of the Preferences Panel
The path to the default ANSYS Icepak library is displayed in the Location text field. By default, this
library contains information about the materials (see Material Properties (p. 339)) and macros (see
Using Macros (p. 723)) that are predefined in ANSYS Icepak.
If you have materials or macros that are not predefined in ANSYS Icepak, but you want to include
them in your model, you can add new libraries to the list. When you start ANSYS Icepak, it will load
Defining a Project
the material and macro information from the libraries specified in the list. See Saving Materials and
Properties (p. 350) for information about creating a user-defined materials file.
The following operations can be performed in the Libraries section of the Preferences panel:
• To create a new library, click New library. Enter a name for the library in the Library name text field and
then enter the path in the Location text field or click Browse to search for a specific directory. You should
avoid using root directory paths (such as C:\ or /home/user_name) or paths that contain many files and
directories as the library location path.
• To modify an existing library path, select the library in the list of libraries and then edit the path in the
Location text field, or click Browse to search for a specific directory.
• To delete a library, select the library name in the list of libraries and click Delete library.
You can make changes to the Libraries section of the Preferences panel, and apply the changes
either to the current project by clicking This project, or to all ANSYS Icepak projects by clicking All
projects. Click Cancel to close the Preferences panel without saving the changes. Once you have
created a new library, a new node appears under the Libraries node in the Model manager window.
Changing the Name of a Library

To change the name of any user-defined library, right-click on the specified library node and select
Edit info in the resulting pull-down menu. ANSYS Icepak will open the Library name and info panel
(Figure 8.14: The Library name and info Panel (p. 242)), where you can change the Name or add any
descriptive information in the large text entry field.
Figure 8.14: The Library name and info Panel
Adding Items to a Library

To add an item to a new library, first select the item in the Project tab of the Model manager window
and choose Add to clipboard in the context menu of the item. Then under the context menu of the
library choose Paste from clipboard. If the item you paste into the library is a material, a Materials
node will appear under the new library node containing the new material item in its appropriate
category (Solid, Fluid, Surface, and so on). If the item you drag into the library is an object or assembly,
ANSYS Icepak will open a Save project panel. You will need to save the object or assembly as a
separate project to make it available in the new library. See Saving a Project File (p. 149) for details
about using the Save project panel.
8.3.6. Editing the Graphical Styles

The Object types section of the Preferences panel (Figure 8.15: The Object types Section of the
Preferences Panel (p. 243)) enables you to customize the color, line width, shading, decoration, and
font type of individual objects associated with your ANSYS Icepak model, as they are displayed in the
graphics window. For example, you may want to change the shading of a rack of PCBs to a different
type to better distinguish it from other objects in your graphics window. The types of objects that
you can customize in the Graphical styles panel are listed in Table 8.1: Object Choices for Editing
Graphical Styles (p. 243). A description of each option in the Object types section of the Preferences
panel follows.
Options Object types
Figure 8.15: The Object types Section of the Preferences Panel
Table 8.1: Object Choices for Editing Graphical Styles
Ob- Description
ject
Cabin- ANSYS Icepak cabinet
et
Blocks Blowers ANSYS Icepak modeling
objects
Defining a Project
Fans Periodic bound-

aries
Open- Heat sinks
ings
Walls Enclosures
Plates Grille
Sources Heat exchangers
Resist- Printed circuit
ances boards
Pack-
ages
• Color displays the color currently associated with the corresponding object type. When you click this
option, a color palette menu opens. You can replace the default color for an object by selecting the new
color in the color palette menu. To select a different color, click the icon in the lower right corner of the
palette menu. Select a new color using the method or panel that is appropriate to your system.
• Width specifies the width of the line used to display the object, which is drawn in wireframe format.
• Shading specifies the type of shading to be applied to an object when it is displayed. To change the
default shading type, click the square button to the right of the text field. Select a shading type from the
resulting drop-down list: view, wire, flat, or gouraud. Note that when you select the view option, the
type of shading that will be applied to the object is taken from the Shading drop-down list in the View
menu (see The View Menu (p. 61)).
• Decoration is a toggle button that adds graphical detail (blades, deflectors, and so on) to fans, grilles,
openings, sources, resistances, and heat sinks. By default, decorations are turned on.
• Font specifies the font used for text that is associated with the object.
• Visible toggles whether the specified type of object will be visible in the graphics window.
8.3.7. Interactive Editing

The Interaction section of the Preferences panel (Figure 8.16: The Interaction Section of the Preferences
Panel (p. 245)) enables you to perform snapping when repositioning an object in the graphics window.
Snapping can be done by:
• using a grid-snap technique to position the cabinet or an object at specified discrete distances along each
axis.
• using an object-snap technique to position an object using a vertex, line, or plane of another object.
Options Interaction
Figure 8.16: The Interaction Section of the Preferences Panel
You can set the global size of the grid independently along each axis. To set the global size of the
grid for this project only, follow the steps below.
1. Select X grid, Y grid, and/or Z grid in the Snap attributes section of the Preferences panel.
2. Enter values for X grid, Y grid, and/or Z grid in the relevant text entry fields.
3. Click This project.
You can set the object snap length by specifying a value (in pixels) for the Snap Tolerance. When
this value has been set, and the model is oriented in one of the X, Y, or Z views, a dragged object
will automatically snap into alignment with a second object of similar shape when it comes within
the specified number of pixels of a vertex, line, or plane of the second object.
See Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for more information about moving objects and setting object
interaction parameters.
You can set the Cabinet autoscale factor, which is applied to the size of the smallest cabinet required
to fit all objects in the model when you autoscale the cabinet. See Resizing the Cabinet (p. 276) for
more information about autoscaling the cabinet.
If a point is created from an object, the point position is, by default, not recomputed when the object
shape dimension is changed, for example, xE is changed from 0.6 to 0.8. If you want shape dimension
changes to be reflected in the associated points, then Move points with object option must be se-
lected. This does not affect Move and Rotate operations as these operations will change the position
of the point according to the operation.
To set the global size of the grid or the object snap length for all ANSYS Icepak projects, follow the
procedure above, but click All projects (instead of This project) in the Interaction section of the
Defining a Project
Preferences panel (Figure 8.16: The Interaction Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 245)). ANSYS Ice-
pak sets the values for the grid-snap distances to 1 and the object snap length to 10 by default, and
uses the default length units for your model. If none of the snap options are selected, the movement
of the cabinet or the object using the mouse will be continuous.
8.3.8. Meshing Options

To set meshing options for your model, select the Meshing item under the Defaults node in the
Preferences panel (Figure 8.17: The Meshing Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 246)).
Defaults Meshing
Figure 8.17: The Meshing Section of the Preferences Panel
• Mesh type is used to specify the type of mesh to be used in your ANSYS Icepak project. By default, ANSYS
Icepak uses the Mesher-HD option, which denotes an unstructured mesh. The other mesh types you can
choose from are Hexa unstructured and Hexa cartesian.
• Minimum object separation is used to specify the minimum distance separating objects in your model
in the x, y, and z coordinate directions. This distance may be expressed in any valid number format (for
example, 0.001, 1e-3, 0.1e-2). This specification is used by ANSYS Icepak whenever the distance between
two objects is less than this value, but greater than the model’s zero tolerance.
• Enforce 3D cut cell meshing for all objects is a meshing technique used to body-fit the mesh to certain
complicated shapes like CAD, ellipsoids, elliptical cylinders and intersecting cylinders. It is used when Allow
multi-level meshing option in the Mesh control panel is switched on. When the Enforce 3D cut cell
meshing for all objects is switched on, all objects irrespective of their shapes will be meshed using this
cut cell technique.
• Optimize mesh counts in thickness direction for package and PCB geometries are applicable to the
hex-dominant mesher (Mesher-HD) only. When this option is on, the mesher will try to put single elements
in the thickness direction of each of the objects and/or gaps like solderballs, die, and so on that are enclosed
by a package or pcb except for trace heating layers (where more than one element may be desired in the
thickness direction).
• Enable 2D multi-level meshing is used with the hex-dominant mesher only and starts with coarse
background meshes and then refines the mesh to resolve fine-level features. This is a meshing technique
for all shapes except for CAD objects, non-uniform polygonal objects and non-single axis aligned objects.
2D multi-level meshing can be activated when this option is switched on along with the Allow multi-
level meshing option in the main Mesh control panel. Its advantage over 3D cut cell meshing is that it
can be used on objects with smaller thicknesses such as trace heating layers. There is no stairsteps
meshing involved in this option.
– In general Isotropic refinement enables you to refine the mesh regardless of the geometry. This option
yields higher cell count as compared to anisotropic refinement but quality of cells may be better, as
aspect ratio is maintained in 2D.
– By default Anisotropic refinement enables you to refine the mesh in adapting to the geometry. This
option yields lower cell count but quality of cells may be affected depending on the geometry.
• Detect gaps between overlapped objects is used to identify gaps between objects that overlap (such
as an object within another object) when enforcing minimum elements in gap mesh parameter. To include
gap detection between overlapping objects, enable Detect gaps between overlapped objects before
meshing.
8.3.9. Solution Options

To set advanced solution options for your model, select the Solution item under the Defaults node
in the Preferences panel (Figure 8.18: The Solution Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 248)).
Defaults Solution
Defining a Project
Figure 8.18: The Solution Section of the Preferences Panel
For details on advanced solver setup options see Choosing the Discretization Scheme (p. 831) - Selecting
the Version of the Solver (p. 835).
8.3.10. Postprocessing Options

To set postprocessing options for your model, select the Postprocessing item under the Options
node in the Preferences panel (Figure 8.19: The Postprocessing Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 249)).
Defaults Postprocessing
Figure 8.19: The Postprocessing Section of the Preferences Panel
• Postprocessing tolerance is used during postprocessing operations for a number of tasks. For example,
it is used to determine whether a point lies on a plane or an isosurface and to snap plane cuts to adjacent
nodes. This tolerance, which is a dimensionless fraction of the cell size, may be expressed in any valid
number format (for example, 0.001, 1e-3, 0.1e-2).
• Surface probe color enables you to change the color of the probed point and text. To change the color,
click the colored rectangular next to Surface probe color. This will open a color palette menu. To select
a different color, click the icon in the lower right corner of the palette menu.
• Particle trail marker spacing enables you to specify the distance between markers when particle traces
are used. The minimum value possible is 1.
• Legend color scheme enables you to specify a legend color scheme from the drop-down list.
• Merge zones when possible for CFD-Post data instructs ANSYS Icepak to optimize the solver by merging
zones whenever possible before writing the model information to a Fluent case file.
8.3.11. Other Preferences and Settings

When you click other items in the Preferences panel, you will be able to edit additional preferences
as follows:
• Units enables you to modify the default unit definitions and conversion factors. See Unit Systems (p. 215)
for details.
Note:
Changing units does not apply to objects in the Inactive folder.
• Mouse buttons enables you to change the default mouse controls in ANSYS Icepak. See Changing the
Mouse Controls (p. 130) for details.
Defining a Project
8.4. Specifying the Problem Parameters

You can specify parameters for the current model in ANSYS Icepak using the Basic parameters panel
(Figure 8.20: The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 251), Figure 8.21: The Basic parameters
Panel (Transient setup Tab) (p. 252), Figure 8.22: The Basic parameters Panel (Advanced Tab) (p. 258) and
Figure 8.23: The Basic parameters Panel (Defaults Tab) (p. 261)). The types of parameters you can use to
describe your model include the following:
• time variation
• solution variables
• flow regime
• gravity
• ambient values
• default fluid, solid, and surface materials
• initial conditions
• spatial power profile
The default settings for the Basic parameters panel are as follows:
• steady-state
• solution of flow (velocity and pressure), temperature, and surface-to-surface radiation solution variables
• no species transport
• laminar flow
• natural convection included
• ambient temperature of 20° C, ambient pressure of 0 N/m2, ambient radiation temperature of 20° C
• fluid is air, solid is extruded aluminum, and surface is oxidized steel.
• ambient temperature and no flow for initial conditions
To open the Basic parameters panel (Figure 8.20: The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 251),
Figure 8.21: The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) (p. 252), Figure 8.22: The Basic parameters
Panel (Advanced Tab) (p. 258), and Figure 8.23: The Basic parameters Panel (Defaults Tab) (p. 261)), double-
click on the Basic parameters item under the Problem setup node in the Model manager window.
There are four push buttons at the bottom of the Basic parameters panel. To accept any changes you
have made to the panel and then close the panel, click Accept. To undo all the changes you have made
in the panel and restore all items in the panel to their original states when the panel was opened, click
Specifying the Problem Parameters
the Reset button. To close the panel and ignore any changes made to it, click Cancel. To access the
online documentation, click Help.
Figure 8.20: The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab)
Defining a Project
Figure 8.21: The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab)
8.4.1. Time Variation

ANSYS Icepak enables you to solve two types of flow problems:
• steady-state
• transient
The default setting for time variation in the Basic parameters panel (Transient setup tab) is steady-
state (Figure 8.21: The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) (p. 252)). The procedure for defining
a transient simulation is described in Transient Simulations (p. 627).
8.4.2. Solution Variables

ANSYS Icepak enables you to choose the variables you want it to solve in your simulation. Four options
are presented in the Basic parameters panel (General setup tab): Flow (velocity/pressure), Tem-
perature, Radiation and (Advanced tab): Species (Figure 8.20: The Basic parameters Panel (General
setup Tab) (p. 251)) and (Figure 8.22: The Basic parameters Panel (Advanced Tab) (p. 258)). These options
are discussed in the following section.
Flow, Temperature and Species Variables

ANSYS Icepak enables you to solve the problem for any of the following combinations of flow and
temperature variables:
• flow (velocity and pressure fields) only
• flow and temperature distributions (velocity, pressure, and temperature fields)
• temperature distribution only
In the third case, the flow solution from a previous simulation (for the same problem with an
identical mesh) can be used to supply a velocity field for the thermal simulation. This is useful when
the dominant mechanism for heat transfer by the fluid is forced convection, rather than natural con-
vection (see Forced- or Natural-Convection Effects (p. 257) for more details on forced and natural
convection). In this case, the solution of the energy equation does not affect the flow solution, so
these systems can be solved independently rather than as a coupled simulation. The flow-only simu-
lation can be performed first, followed by multiple thermal simulations, if required.
Note:
You must include either flow variables or temperature variables in your simulation, or both.
To select the variables to be solved, follow one of the procedures below:
• To solve the problem for flow, select Flow (velocity/pressure) under Variables solved in the General
setup tab of the Basic parameters panel (Figure 8.20: The Basic parameters Panel (General setup
Tab) (p. 251)). You must also specify the Flow regime in the General setup tab of the Basic parameters
panel to be Laminar or Turbulent (see Flow Regime (p. 255) for more details on selecting a flow type).
• To solve the energy equation for the temperature distribution together with the flow equations, select
both Flow (velocity/pressure) and Temperature under Variables solved in the General setup tab of
the Basic parameters panel.
• You can also solve first for the flow, and then for the temperature. This approach is valid only if the solution
of the energy equation does not affect the flow solution, which is the case if forced convection is the
dominant heat transfer mechanism and the Gravity vector is not enabled in the Basic parameters panel
(General setup tab). To solve only for temperature using a previous solution, specify the ID for the previous
solution next to Restart in the Solve panel and select Full data under Restart. To open the Solve panel,
select Run solution in the Solve menu. See Using the Solve Panel to Set the Solver Controls (p. 842) for
details on restarting a calculation using a previous solution. The previous solution will be used to access
the flow field for use in solving the energy equation. Note that solving only for temperature using a velocity
field of zero is equivalent to solving only for heat conduction.
• To solve the problem for species, enable Species in the Advanced tab of the Basic parameters panel.
The procedure for defining a species transport calculation is described in Species Transport Modeling (p. 653).
Radiation Variables
You can choose whether to solve the problem for radiation. If you want to solve for radiation, select
On for Radiation in the General setup tab of the Basic parameters panel (Figure 8.20: The Basic
Defining a Project
parameters Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 251)). If you do not want to solve for radiation, select Off.
There are three options for modeling radiation: surface-to-surface model, discrete ordinates model
and the ray cluster-based model. Surface-to-surface radiation model is used for modeling radiation
by default. The other two types will include all the objects in the domain.
See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for information on surface-to-surface radiation modeling, Discrete
Ordinates Radiation Modeling (p. 675) for a description of the Discrete ordinates model and Ray tracing
Radiation Modeling (p. 676) for a description of the ray tracing radiation model.
Note:
When Surface to surface radiation modeling or Ray tracing radiation modeling

is selected, object faces that touch zero slack non-conformal assembly boundaries will
not participate in radiative heat transfer. Select Discrete ordinates radiation modeling
to solve with radiation for these object faces.
Postprocessing for Solution Variables

ANSYS Icepak provides postprocessing options for displaying, plotting, and reporting the solution
variables. The following variables are contained in the Variable and Value drop-down lists that appear
in the postprocessing and reporting panels. See Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955)
for their definitions.
Velocity-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• UX
• UY
• UZ
• Speed
• Vorticity
• Mass flow
• Volume flow
Pressure-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• Pressure
Temperature-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• Temperature
• Heat flux
• Heat flow
• Heat flow (into Solid)
• Heat flow (into Fluid)
• Heat tr. coeff
Species-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• species (mass), the mass fraction of a species
• species (mole), the mole fraction of a species
• Relative humidity
Radiation-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• Radiative heat flow
Thermal conductivity-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• K_X
• K_Y
• K_Z
Joule heating-related quantity that can be reported is as follows:
• Electric Potential
• Elec current density
• Joule heating density
8.4.3. Flow Regime

Turbulent flows are characterized by fluctuating velocity fields. These fluctuations mix transported
quantities such as momentum and energy, and cause the transported quantities to fluctuate as well.
Since these fluctuations can be of small scale and high frequency, they are too computationally ex-
pensive to simulate directly in practical engineering calculations. Instead, the instantaneous (exact)
governing equations can be time-averaged to remove the small scales, resulting in a modified set of
equations that are computationally less expensive to solve. However, the modified equations contain
additional unknown variables, and turbulence models are needed to determine these variables in
terms of known quantities.
Laminar flow is smooth, regular, deterministic, and steady (unless you define a transient simulation).
Turbulent flow is random, chaotic, non-deterministic, and essentially unsteady due to statistical fluc-
tuations. For laminar flow, ANSYS Icepak solves the classical Navier-Stokes and energy conservation
equations. For turbulent flow, ANSYS Icepak solves the Reynolds-averaged forms of these equations,
which, in effect, smooth out (time-average) the stochastic fluctuations. See Turbulence (p. 963) for
more details on these equations.
Laminar Flow
In laminar flow, fluid mixing and heat transfer take place on a molecular level. The molecular (or dy-
namic) viscosity and the thermal conductivity are the quantities that measure the amount of mixing
and heat transfer.
Defining a Project
Turbulent Flow
In turbulent flow the degree of fluid mixing and heat transfer is much greater than in laminar flow,
and takes place on a global, or macroscopic, level rather than on a molecular level. The amount of
fluid mixing is measured by an effective viscosity, which is the sum of the dynamic viscosity and the
turbulent eddy viscosity. The latter is not a measurable quantity since it depends on the details of
the flow. The eddy viscosity is part of the turbulence model and is calculated by ANSYS Icepak. The
eddy viscosity is typically 100--1000 times greater than the measured molecular viscosity.
Similarly, for turbulent flow, the amount of heat transfer is measured by an effective thermal conduct-
ivity, which is the sum of the fluid’s thermal conductivity and a turbulent conductivity.
ANSYS Icepak provides a mixing-length zero-equation turbulence model, a two-equation turbulence

model (the standard k-ε model), the RNG k-ε turbulence model, the realizable k-ε turbulence model,
enhanced models for the three two-equation models (k-ε models with enhanced wall treatment,
pressure gradient effects, and thermal effects), Spalart-Allmaras turbulence model and the K-ω SST
turbulence model. In most cases, the zero-equation model will sufficiently account for the effects
of turbulence. See Turbulence (p. 963) for more details on the turbulence models available in ANSYS
Icepak.
Note:
ANSYS Icepak provides Zero equation and Zero equation (4.0) models. The Zero equation
model uses a more self-consistent formulation for the law of the wall in comparison to the
Zero equation (4.0) model. The Zero equation (4.0) model is included only for backward
compatibility.
Specifying the Flow Regime

The nature of the flow regime (laminar or turbulent) is indicated by the values of certain dimensionless
groups, such as the Reynolds and Rayleigh numbers. The Reynolds number is generally the appropriate
measure for forced convection, while the Rayleigh number is generally appropriate for natural con-
vection. The flow is laminar when these numbers are relatively small and turbulent when they are
large. See Forced- or Natural-Convection Effects (p. 257) for more details on forced and natural con-
vection and Rayleigh and Reynolds numbers.
To specify the flow regime for your ANSYS Icepak model, follow the steps below:
1. Select Laminar or Turbulent under Flow regime in the General setup tab of the Basic parameters
panel (Figure 8.20: The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 251)) to specify a laminar or turbulent
flow.
2. If you select Turbulent, activate the turbulence model to be used in the simulation by selecting Zero
equation, Zero equation (4.0) (included only for backward compatibility), Two equation (standard k-
ε model), RNG, Realizable two equation Enhanced two equation, Enhanced RNG, Enhanced realizable
two equation, Spalart-Allmaras or K-ω SST in the drop-down list.
Postprocessing for Turbulent Flows

ANSYS Icepak provides postprocessing options for displaying, plotting, and reporting the solution
variables. You can generate graphical plots or reports of the following quantities:
• TKE (two-equation and RNG turbulence models only)
• Epsilon (two-equation and RNG turbulence models only)
• Viscosity ratio
• Wall YPlus
These variables are contained in the Variable and Value drop-down lists that appear in the postpro-
cessing and reporting panels. See Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955) for their defini-
tions.
Note:
When the K-ω SST turbulence model is selected, TKE and Epsilon quantities are not expor-
ted.
8.4.4. Forced- or Natural-Convection Effects

Natural (or free) convection arises when the air density varies due to temperature differences.
The motion of fluid in an enclosure has a significant effect on the temperature distribution in the
enclosure by convecting heat from one area to another. Forced convection occurs when a device
such as a fan is pushing air past a heated object and convecting heat from the object as a result of
its motion. In some applications, both forced and free convection (that is, mixed convection) play a
role in determining the overall temperature distribution. In general, forced-convection effects greatly
dominate natural-convection effects when fans are present. Both forced-convection and natural-
convection flows can be modeled by ANSYS Icepak.
Many of today’s newer enclosures rely solely on natural convection for cooling. For simulations where
natural-convection effects are important, it is essential to activate the effects of gravity. When gravity
is present, either the Boussinesq approximation or the ideal gas law is used (see Buoyancy-Driven
Flows and Natural Convection (p. 979) for more details about these models). For mixtures containing
two or more species, the ideal gas law approach is used. The momentum equations become strongly
coupled to the energy equations and this coupling makes the task of solving the equations more
difficult and more computationally expensive. Therefore, gravity should be activated only when nat-
ural-convection effects are important.
Including Gravity Effects

The effects of gravity are ignored in your ANSYS Icepak simulation by default. To set the gravitational
acceleration in each Cartesian coordinate direction, enter the appropriate values in the X, Y, and Z
fields. Note that the default gravitational acceleration in ANSYS Icepak is 9.80665 m/s2 in the y direction.
To ignore the gravitational effects in your calculation, turn off the Gravity vector option in the
General setup tab of the Basic parameters panel.
Including Temperature-Dependent Density Effects

ANSYS Icepak provides two options for the definition of a temperature-dependent fluid density. The
default option is the Boussinesq approximation model, which should be used for natural-convection
problems involving small changes to temperature (see The Boussinesq Model (p. 980)).
Defining a Project
The second option is the ideal gas law (see Incompressible Ideal Gas Law (p. 980)), which should be
used when pressure variations are small enough that the flow is fully incompressible but you want
to use the ideal gas law to express the relationship between density and temperature (for example,
for a natural-convection problem). The ideal gas law should not be used to calculate time-dependent
natural convection in closed domains.
To use the ideal gas law to define a temperature-dependent fluid density, follow the steps below.
1. Click the Advanced tab in the Basic parameters panel (Figure 8.22: The Basic parameters Panel (Advanced
Tab) (p. 258)).
Figure 8.22: The Basic parameters Panel (Advanced Tab)
2. Change from the default option, Boussinesq approx, and select the Ideal gas law option.
3. Set the operating pressure (Oper. pressure).
Caution:
The input of the operating pressure is of great importance when you are computing
density with the ideal gas law. You should use a value that is representative of the
mean flow pressure. The operating pressure is set to 101325 Pa by default, which
is the atmospheric pressure at sea level. The operating pressure will decrease with
increasing altitude.
4. Select Oper. density and set the operating density, if required. By default, ANSYS Icepak will compute
the operating density by averaging over all elements. In some cases, you may obtain better results if you
explicitly specify the operating density instead of having ANSYS Icepak compute it for you. For example,
if you are solving a natural-convection problem with a pressure boundary, it is important to understand
that the pressure you are specifying is p′ s in Equation 40.97 (p. 980). Although you will know the actual
pressure ps , you will need to know the operating density in order to determine ps ′ from ps . Therefore,
you should explicitly specify the operating density rather than use the computed average. The specified
value should, however, be representative of the average value.
In some cases, the specification of an operating density will improve convergence behavior, rather
than the actual results. For such cases, use the approximate bulk density value as the operating
density, and be sure that the value you choose is appropriate for the characteristic temperature
in the domain.
Caution:
If you use the ideal gas law and you have created a new fluid material or copied a fluid
material, make sure that you specify the correct molecular weight for the new or copied
material.
Determining the Flow Regime

Prior to solving the model, ANSYS Icepak will determine whether the flow will be dominated by forced
or natural convection. For problems dominated by forced convection, ANSYS Icepak computes the
Reynolds number (Re) and the Peclet number (Pe), both of which are dimensionless. For flows dom-
inated by natural convection (that is, buoyancy-driven flows), ANSYS Icepak computes the Rayleigh
number (Ra) and the Prandtl number (Pr), which are also dimensionless.
The Reynolds number measures the relative importance of inertial forces and viscous forces. When
it is large, inertial forces dominate, boundary layers form, and the flow may become turbulent. The
Peclet number is similar to the Reynolds number and measures the relative importance of advection
to diffusion for the transport of heat. For most flows simulated by ANSYS Icepak, both the Reynolds
and Peclet numbers are large.
The Prandtl number measures the relative magnitude of molecular diffusion to thermal diffusion. The
Rayleigh number is a measure of the importance of the buoyancy effects.
Defining a Project
For the flow of air in enclosures of the type simulated with ANSYS Icepak, typical ranges for these
parameters are shown in Table 8.2: Typical Values of Dimensionless Parameters in Forced- and Natural-
Convection Problems in ANSYS Icepak (p. 260).
Table 8.2: Typical Values of Dimensionless Parameters in Forced- and Natural-Convection

Problems in ANSYS Icepak
Dimensionless Number Range

Reynolds 103– 105
Peclet 103 – 105
Prandtl 0.71
Rayleigh 10 5 – 109
If the Reynolds number is greater than 2000 or the Rayleigh number is greater than 5 107, then
selecting the Turbulent option in the General setup tab of the Basic parameters panel is recom-
mended (see Flow Regime (p. 255) for more details on specifying the flow type).
To review the estimates of the Reynolds and Peclet numbers or the Prandtl and Rayleigh numbers,
open the Basic Settings panel by double-clicking on the Basic settings item under the Solution
settings node in the Model manager window. Click Reset in the Basic settings panel. ANSYS Icepak
recomputes the solver setup defaults based on the physical characteristics of the model as defined,
and displays estimates of the Reynolds and Peclet numbers or the Prandtl and Rayleigh numbers in
the Message window.
8.4.5. Ambient Values

Ambient values reflect the conditions surrounding the outside of the cabinet. You can specify ambient
values for pressure and radiation temperature by entering values in the Gauge Pressure and Radiation
temp text entry boxes under Ambient conditions in the Defaults tab of the Basic parameters
panel (Figure 8.23: The Basic parameters Panel (Defaults Tab) (p. 261)). Note that the ambient value
for pressure must be the gauge pressure. You can also enter an ambient value for Temperature, and
you can define this temperature to vary as a function of time for a transient simulation. The Temper-
ature specified in the Basic parameters panel is used as s0 in the transient equations (see Transient
Simulations (p. 627) for information on transient simulations).
Figure 8.23: The Basic parameters Panel (Defaults Tab)
8.4.6. Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials

ANSYS Icepak enables you to specify a default material for fluids, solids, and surfaces in the Defaults
tab of the Basic parameters panel (Figure 8.23: The Basic parameters Panel (Defaults Tab) (p. 261)).
The default fluid in ANSYS Icepak is Air, the default solid is Al-Extruded (extruded aluminum), and
the default surface is Steel-Oxidised-surface (oxidized steel).
Changing the Default Material

To change a default material, follow the steps below:
1. Click the button located next to the relevant text field to display the list of available materials.
2. Place the mouse pointer over the new list item (for example, Al-Pure in the Default solid drop-down
list). If the item is not visible, you can use the scroll bar.
3. Click the left mouse button on the item to make the new selection. The list will close automatically, and
Defining a Project
If you want to abort the selection process while the list is displayed, click Cancel at the bottom of
the list.
Changing the Properties of a Material

The properties of the materials in the Default fluid, Default solid, and Default surface lists can be
modified using the Materials panel. To open the Materials panel, select the Edit definition option
from the materials drop-down list. For more information on material properties, see Material Proper-
ties (p. 339).
Specifying the Material for Individual Objects

Any modeling objects that require the specification of a fluid, a solid, or a surface material will be
defined with the relevant default material specified in the Basic parameters panel (Defaults tab),
by default. For example, if you create a solid block in your model, the material specified for the solid
block will be shown as default in the Blocks panel, which is the default solid material in the Basic
parameters panel (that is, Al-Extruded). You can change the selection of the fluid, solid, or surface
material for individual objects by selecting the new material in the drop-down list in the panel related
to that object. For example, to change the solid material for a solid block from default (Al-Extruded)
to Al-Pure, follow the steps below:
1. Open the list of available materials for Solid material in the Blocks panel.
2. Select Al-Pure in the materials drop-down list.
You can view the properties of the currently selected material, edit the definition of the material, and
create a new material using the Materials panel, as described in Material Properties (p. 339).
8.4.7. Initial Conditions

ANSYS Icepak enables you to set initial conditions for the fluid in your model. If you are performing
a steady-state analysis, the initial conditions are the initial guess for the various solution fields used
by the solution procedure. If you are performing a transient simulation, the initial conditions are the
physical initial state of the fluid.
You can specify an initial X velocity, Y velocity, Z velocity, and Temperature for all objects in the
model by entering values under Initial conditions in the Transient setup tab of the Basic parameters
panel (Figure 8.21: The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) (p. 252)).
Turbulent kinetic energy, Turbulent dissipation rate and Specific dissipation rate can be added
for all objects in the model.
8.4.8. Specifying a Spatial Power Profile

To assign a spatial, or volumetric, power profile to a solid region, click Load next to Spatial power
profile file in the Advanced tab of the Basic parameters panel (Figure 8.20: The Basic parameters
Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 251)).
ANSYS Icepak will open the File selection dialog box (see File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98)), in
which you can specify the profile file (for example, example.prof). Such a profile file has to be
created outside of ANSYS Icepak, although its format should be similar to that of a profile file used
for openings and walls. Each line of the file should contain an (x, y, z) coordinate and a corresponding
value for the power per unit volume. See User Inputs for a Free Opening (p. 400) for more information
about spatial profiles.
8.4.9. Modeling Solar Radiation Effects

ANSYS Icepak 's solar load model enables you to include the effects of direct solar illumination as well
as diffuse solar radiation. Given the model geometry and pertinent solar information such as terrestrial
location, date, and time, the model performs a ray tracing shading test for all boundary surfaces. This
approach includes a two-band (visible and infrared) spectral model for solar illumination. The trans-
parent material model computes the absorptivity and transmissivity as functions of incident angle.
User Inputs for the Solar Load Model

ANSYS Icepak provides a solar calculator that can be used to compute solar beam direction and irra-
diation. Alternatively you can specify a value for the Direct solar irradiation, Diffuse solar irradiation
flux and the sun direction vector. To use the solar load model, follow the procedure outlined below.
In the Advanced tab of the Basic parameters panel, turn on the Solar loading option and click
Options to open the Solar Load Model parameters panel.
Defining a Project
In the Solar load model parameters panel, the default option is Solar calculator. You will need to
specify the following parameters:
1. Under Solar load model, specify a value for Scattering fraction. The scattering fraction specifies the
amount of direct solar radiation that is reflected from opaque objects in your model. The reflected radi-
ation is evenly distributed among all objects that participate in solar loading. The value should be
between 0 and 1.
2. Under Local time and position. specify a value for the Date and select the month from the Month
menu.
3. Specify the local time at the desired location in the two fields to the right of Time. The time is based
on a 24-hour clock, thus acceptable values range from 0 h 0 min (12:00 a.m.) to 23 h 59.99 min (11:59:99
p.m.). Values entered in the first text-entry field (hour) must be integral, but values entered in the second
text-entry field (minute) can be integral or fractional. For example, if the local time was 12:01:30 a.m.,
you would enter 0 for the hour and 1.5 for the minute. If the local time was 4:17 p.m., you would enter
16 for the hour and 17 for the minute.
4. Specify the local time zone of the desired location using the offset value to the right of the +/- GMT
entry fields. If the time you enter is a local time, specify the current time zone by providing the offset
in the +/- GMT entry. If the time you enter is already in GMT, then +/- GMT should be set to 0 (zero).
Note:
For example, the figure above shows +/- GMT of -5, which is Eastern Standard Time
(EST).
5. Specify the Local Latitude of the desired location. Values can range from -90° (the South Pole) to 90°
(the North Pole), with 0° defined as the equator. Select the hemisphere (N or S) from the menu to the
right of the Local Longitude entry field.
6. Specify the Local Longitude of the desired location. The longitude is approximated if you specify the
local time zone, but you can enter a more precise value if you know it. Any value you enter here will
take precedence over the time zone. Values may range from 0° to 180°. Select the hemisphere (W or
E) from the menu to the right of the Local Longitude entry field.
7. Under Illumination parameters, specify the following parameters:
a. Specify the Sunshine fraction, which is a factor between 0 and 1 used to account for the effects
of clouds that may reduce the direct solar irradiation. Clear sky is modeled by setting the value
equal to 1 and complete cloud cover is modeled by setting the value equal to 0. Partial cloud
cover is modeled by setting the value to be between 0 and 1. The default value is 1.0.
b. Specify the Ground reflectance, which is a parameter that is used in determining the contributions
of reflected solar radiation from ground surfaces. Reflected solar radiation from ground surfaces
is a function of the direct normal irradiation, the time of the year, the tilt angle of the surface, and
the ground reflectance. If is treated as part of the total diffuse solar irradiation. Ground reflectance
values can vary depending on the ground surface (that is, concrete, grass, rock, gravel, asphalt).
The default value is 0.2.
8. Specify the Northward direction vector. To specify this vector, enter the appropriate values in the X, Y,
and Z fields under Northward direction. Note that the default northward direction in ANSYS Icepak is
the x direction.
9. Specify the surface material to be used for each object or surface. This surface defines the roughness,
emissivity, solar behavior, and the solar absorption and transmission parameters of the surface. For
each material, select one of the following options next to Solar behavior:
• Opaque indicates that the surface will not allow solar radiation to pass through it.
• Transparent indicates that the surface will allow a portion of the solar radiation to pass through it.
By default, the surface material is specified as Opaque. This means that the material specified
on the object or surface is defined under Default surface in the Default tab of the Basic para-
meters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material for
an object or surface, select a material from the material drop-down list. See Material Proper-
ties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
In the Solar Load Model parameters panel, you can select the Specify flux and direction vector
option. You will need to specify the following parameters under Solar flux and direction vector:
1. Specify a value for Direct solar irradiation. This parameter is the amount of energy per unit area due
to direct solar irradiation. This value may depend on the time of the year and the clearness of the sky.
2. Specify a value for Diffuse solar irradiation. This parameter is the amount of energy per unit area due
to diffuse solar irradiation. This value may depend on the time of year, the clearness of the sky, and
also on ground reflectivity.
3. Enter the Solar direction vector. To specify this vector, enter the appropriate values in the X, Y, and Z
fields.
Note:
The solar load model is not supported for objects meshed using the multi-level
meshing technique. In addition, object surfaces touching non-conformal assemblies
do not participate in solar radiation.
Modifying Solar Participation

When solar loading is enabled, all objects are set to paricipate by default. You can modify solar parti-
cipation settings from the Basic parameters panel or from the context menu in the project tree or
graphics display window.
• From the Basic parameters Advanced tab under Solar loading, click Edit. In the Object solar
loading panel, enter 0 to disable or 1 to enable solar loading participation for a given object.
Defining a Project
• From the context menu (in the project tree or graphics display window), select Set > Solar particpa-
tion. In the Solar loading panel, select Particpate in solar radiation to include the object in the
solar loading calculation.
8.4.10. Modeling Altitude Effects

The density variation of air from sea level to higher altitudes can vary considerably. In addition, as
the altitude increases, the mass flow rates of fans are reduced. The effect of altitude can be modeled
in ANSYS Icepak. To model altitude, follow the procedure below:
Problem Setup Wizard
• In the Advanced tab of the Basic parameters panel (Figure 8.22: The Basic parameters Panel (Advanced
Tab) (p. 258)), turn on the Altitude option and enter the altitude in the text entry box. ANSYS Icepak
computes the density of air at a particular altitude based on the International Standard Atmosphere, ISO
2533:1975 published by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
• If a fan is present in the model, enable Update fan curves. This option automatically updates the fan
characteristic curves based on the ratio of densities of air at the specified altitude and the sea level. Note
that this option updates the curves for characteristic curve fans only. Fixed flow fans will have the same
constant mass/volume flow at higher altitudes as they do at sea level, albeit with a lower air density.
Note:
– The effect of altitude can be automatically modeled by ANSYS Icepak only when the default
fluid is air.
– When altitude effects are modeled, the Ideal gas law option cannot be used, though note
that the operating density and pressure update after running a simulation with altitude effects
enabled.
8.5. Problem Setup Wizard

The problem setup wizard enables you to specify parameters such as flow, turbulence, radiation, transient
or steady-state behavior, altitude, and so on for the current ANSYS Icepak model.
The first step in the process of using the wizard is to right-click Problem setup in the Model manager
window. Select Problem setup wizard to display the Problem setup wizard panel.
Choose the variables or parameters in the dialog boxes to setup your problem. Use the Next or Previous
buttons to move forward or back through the panels. Additional panels will be displayed depending
on your selection. Click Done to close the panel.
Defining a Project
Figure 8.24: Problem setup wizard panel- Choose variable(s) to solve
Click Next. Specify the flow condition.
Figure 8.25: Problem setup wizard panel- Select flow condition
Click Next. Specify the flow regime (laminar or turbulent).
Figure 8.26: Problem setup wizard panel- Select flow regime
Click Next. Determine heat transfer due to radiation.
Figure 8.27: Problem setup wizard panel- Determine radiation heat transfer
Click Next. Choose radiation model.
Defining a Project
Figure 8.28: Problem setup wizard panel- Choose radiation model
Click Next. Determine external heat load.
Figure 8.29: Problem setup wizard panel- Determine external heat load
Click Next. Choose variable behavior.
Figure 8.30: Problem setup wizard panel- Choose variable behavior
Click Next. Select any altitude effects.
Figure 8.31: Problem setup wizard panel- Altitude effects
Chapter 9: Building a Model
Once you have created a new project file (or opened an existing project) using the File menu (see De-
fining a Project (p. 223)), you are ready to build your ANSYS Icepak model. The default cabinet will be
displayed in the graphics window when you create a new project. You can resize the cabinet if desired,
and then add objects to the cabinet using the Object creation toolbar. This chapter begins with an
overview of the Model menu and the Object creation toolbar, and describes information related to
building your ANSYS Icepak model. Once you have built your model, you will go on to mesh it, as de-
scribed in Generating a Mesh (p. 773).
• Overview (p. 273)
• Defining the Cabinet (p. 275)
• Configuring Objects within the Cabinet (p. 284)
• Object Attributes (p. 310)
• Adding Objects to the Model (p. 333)
• Grouping Objects (p. 333)
• Material Properties (p. 339)
• Custom Assemblies (p. 357)
• Checking the Design of Your Model (p. 368)
9.1. Overview
In creating your ANSYS Icepak model, you will make use of several parts of the graphical user interface:
the Object creation toolbar, the Object modification toolbar, the Model node in the Model manager
window, and the Model menu.
9.1.1. The Object Creation Toolbar

The Object creation toolbar (Figure 9.1: The Object Creation Toolbar (p. 274)) contains buttons that
enable you to add objects to your ANSYS Icepak model and specify material properties for those
objects. See Networks (p. 373) -- Packages (p. 585) for information about adding specific objects to
your ANSYS Icepak model. See Material Properties (p. 339) for information about specifying object
material properties.
Building a Model
Figure 9.1: The Object Creation Toolbar
9.1.2. The Object Modification Toolbar

The Object modification toolbar (Figure 9.2: The Object Modification Toolbar (p. 274)) is used to make
changes to objects in your ANSYS Icepak model and contains buttons that enable you to edit, move,
copy, delete, and align objects that you have created within the cabinet. See Configuring Objects
within the Cabinet (p. 284) for information about modifying object configuration within the cabinet.
See Object Attributes (p. 310) for information about modifying individual object attributes.
Figure 9.2: The Object Modification Toolbar
9.1.3. The Model Node in the Model manager Window

The Model node in the Model manager window (Figure 9.3: The Model Node in the Model manager
Window (p. 275)) is used for many of the same functions as the Object creation and Object modific-
ation toolbars. Right-clicking the Model node and its corresponding items enables you to create,
Defining the Cabinet
edit, move, copy, and delete objects within your ANSYS Icepak model. See Configuring Objects
within the Cabinet (p. 284) for information about modifying object configuration within the cabinet.
See Object Attributes (p. 310) for information about modifying individual object attributes.
Figure 9.3: The Model Node in the Model manager Window
9.1.4. The Model Menu

The Model objects to your model. These options include functions related to generating a mesh
(Model Generate mesh) and specifying the order in which objects are meshed (Model Edit
priorities). These functions are described in Generating a Mesh (p. 773). There are also options related
to importing geometry from third-party CAD software (Model CAD data) and radiation modeling
(Model Radiation) that are described in Importing and Exporting Model Files (p. 159) and Radiation
Modeling (p. 665), respectively.
9.2. Defining the Cabinet

When you start a new project, ANSYS Icepak automatically creates a 3D rectangular cabinet with the
dimension 1 m 1 m 1 m and displays the cabinet in the graphics window. The default view of the
cabinet is in the direction of the negative z axis. The sides of the cabinet represent the physical
boundary of the model and no object (except for external walls with non-zero thickness) can extend
outside the cabinet.
The Edit window in the lower right corner of the screen will become the cabinet Edit window (Fig-
ure 9.4: The Cabinet Edit Window (p. 275)).
Figure 9.4: The Cabinet Edit Window
The options for modifying the default cabinet are as follows:
• resizing the cabinet
• repositioning the cabinet
Building a Model
• changing the walls of the cabinet
• changing the description of the cabinet
• changing the graphical style of the cabinet
Each option is described in detail below. Click the Apply button to modify the cabinet to reflect any
changes you have made to the text entry fields in the cabinet Edit window. Click the Reset button to
undo all the changes you have made to the text entry fields in the panel and to restore all text entry
fields in the panel to their original states. Click the Edit button to open the Cabinet panel (Figure 9.5: The
Cabinet Panel (Info Tab) (p. 277)-Figure 9.8: The Cabinet Panel (Notes Tab) (p. 278)).
9.2.1. Resizing the Cabinet

You can resize the cabinet in several different ways:
• Specify the dimensions of the cabinet in the cabinet Edit window (Figure 9.4: The Cabinet Edit Win-
dow (p. 275)). You can specify the starting and ending points of the cabinet by selecting Start/end in the
drop-down list at the top of the window and entering the starting point of the cabinet (xS, yS, zS) and
the ending point of the cabinet (xE, yE, zE). After you type a number into a text entry field (or type numbers
in several fields), you must click Apply or press Enter to update the model and display the updated
model in the graphics window. If you do not click Accept or press Enter, ANSYS Icepak will not update
the model.
Alternatively, you can specify the starting point of the cabinet and the length of the sides of the
cabinet by selecting Start/length in the drop-down list and entering the starting point (xS, yS, zS)
and the lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of the cabinet.
• Specify the dimensions of the cabinet in the Cabinet panel (Figure 9.5: The Cabinet Panel (Info
Tab) (p. 277)-Figure 9.8: The Cabinet Panel (Notes Tab) (p. 278)). To open this panel, double-click the Cabinet
item under the Model node in the Model manager window.
Model Cabinet
Figure 9.5: The Cabinet Panel (Info Tab)
Figure 9.6: The Cabinet Panel (Geometry Tab)
Building a Model
Figure 9.7: The Cabinet Panel (Properties Tab)
Figure 9.8: The Cabinet Panel (Notes Tab)
You can specify the starting and ending points of the cabinet by clicking the Geometry tab in the
Cabinet panel, selecting Start/end from the Specify by drop-down list, and entering the starting
point of the cabinet (xS, yS, zS) and the ending point of the cabinet (xE, yE, zE). Alternatively, you
can specify the starting point of the cabinet and the length of the sides of the cabinet by selecting
Start/length from the Specify by drop-down list and entering the starting point (xS, yS, zS) and
the lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of the cabinet.
• Hold down the Shift key on the keyboard, right-click the cabinet, and then move the mouse to shrink or
enlarge the cabinet.
• In the object Edit window (Figure 9.4: The Cabinet Edit Window (p. 275)), click the coordinate (displayed
in orange) that you want to change. Click a point in the graphics window that is inside the boundary of
the current cabinet. The cabinet will be contracted in the chosen coordinate direction. For example, if you
click yE (value = 1.0 m) and then click a point in the graphics window with y=0.7 m, then the cabinet
height will be contracted such that yE is now 0.7 m. The x and z coordinates will remain constant.
Note:
This feature cannot be used to extend the cabinet beyond the boundaries that were
in place prior to resizing.
• Scale the cabinet using the Move all objects in model panel (Figure 9.9: The Move all objects in model
Panel (p. 279)). To open this panel, right-click Cabinet under the Model node in the Model manager
window and select Move from the drop-down menu. Alternatively, you can select the cabinet and click
the button in the Object modification toolbar.
Model Cabinet Move
Figure 9.9: The Move all objects in model Panel
Building a Model
To scale the cabinet, turn on the Scale option in the Move all objects in model panel. Specify
the scaling factor by entering a value in the Scale factor text entry box. The scaling factor must
be a real number greater than zero. Values greater than 1 will increase the size, while values less
than 1 will decrease the size. To scale the cabinet by different amounts in different directions, enter
the scaling factors separated by spaces. For example, if you enter 1.5 2 3 in the Scale factor
text entry box, ANSYS Icepak will scale the cabinet by a factor of 1.5 in the x direction, 2 in the y
direction, and 3 in the z direction. By default, the objects are scaled about their current Centroid
locations. To scale the object(s) around a point, select Point next to Scale about and enter X, Y,
and/or Z coordinates. The specified point will become the new centroid of the scaled object(s).
Click Apply to scale the cabinet. Click Done to close the Move all objects in model panel.
Note:
If your model contains objects inside the cabinet, these objects will be scaled also.
• Click Autoscale in the cabinet Edit window (Figure 9.4: The Cabinet Edit Window (p. 275)) to automatically
resize the cabinet based on the Cabinet autoscale factor. See Interactive Editing (p. 244) for more inform-
ation about the Cabinet autoscale factor. Autoscale can be used at any stage during the model-building
process.
Note:
ANSYS Icepak does not automatically resize the cabinet to fit the modeling objects.
You need to click Autoscale to resize it.
9.2.2. Repositioning the Cabinet

You can reposition the cabinet in several different ways:
• Select or specify a local coordinate system for the cabinet in the Cabinet panel (Figure 9.6: The Cabinet
Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 277)).
Model Cabinet
By default, the global coordinate system is used, which has an origin of (0, 0, 0). To use a local co-
ordinate system for the cabinet, select a local coordinate system from the Local coord system
drop-down list. You can also create a new local coordinate system, edit an existing local coordinate
system, and view the definition of a local coordinate system, as described in Local Coordinate
Systems (p. 297).
• You can reposition the cabinet along the x, y, and z axes by selecting Start/end in the drop-down list in
the cabinet Edit window (Figure 9.4: The Cabinet Edit Window (p. 275)) or in the Specify by drop-down
list in the Cabinet panel (Figure 9.6: The Cabinet Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 277)) and modifying the starting
point (xS, yS, zS) and ending point (xE, yE, zE) of the cabinet. Alternatively, you can modify the starting
point (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of the cabinet if you select Start/length in
the Specify by drop-down list in the Cabinet panel or in the drop-down list in the cabinet Edit window.
• Hold down the Shift key on the keyboard, use the middle mouse button to click the cabinet, and then
drag the cabinet to its new location. Options available for moving the cabinet interactively using the
mouse are available in the Interaction section of the Preferences panel (Figure 9.10: The Interaction
Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 281)) and are described below.
Edit Preferences Interaction
Figure 9.10: The Interaction Section of the Preferences Panel
– X, Y, Z enable you to select which combination of the three axes the cabinet can be translated along.
For example, if you want to translate the cabinet only along the x direction, select X and deselect Y and
Z next to Motion allowed in direction.
– X grid, Y grid, Z grid enable you to use a grid-snap technique to position the cabinet at specified discrete
distances along each axis. You can set the size of the grid independently along each axis. To use grid-
snap along with the mouse to reposition the cabinet, select X grid, Y grid, and/or Z grid and then enter
values for X grid, Y grid, and/or Z grid in the relevant text entry fields. ANSYS Icepak sets the values
for the grid-snap distances to 1 by default, and uses the default length units for your model. If none of
the grid-snap options are selected in the Interactive editing panel, the movement of the cabinet using
the mouse will be continuous.
To apply the chosen options to the current project only, click This project. To apply the chosen
options to all projects, click All projects.
• Move the cabinet using the Move all objects in model panel (Figure 9.9: The Move all objects in model
Panel (p. 279)). To open this panel, right-click Cabinet under the Model node in the Model manager
Model Cabinet Move
If multiple geometric transformations are selected, ANSYS Icepak applies them in the order that
they appear in the panel. For example, if both the Rotate and Translate options are selected, the
cabinet and objects are rotated first and then translated. Note that not all combinations of trans-
formations are commutative; that is, the result may be order-dependent, particularly if reflection
is used.
Building a Model
Options available for moving objects using the Move all objects in model panel include the fol-
lowing:
– Scale enables you to resize the cabinet and all objects within the cabinet. To scale the cabinet, turn on
the Scale option and specify a Scale factor to increase or decrease the size of the cabinet. The cabinet
can be scaled about a Point or its Centroid. Enter coordinates when scaling about a Point.
– Mirror enables you to obtain the mirror image of the cabinet and all objects within the cabinet. To
mirror the cabinet, turn on the Mirror option and specify the Plane across which to reflect the cabinet
by selecting XY, YZ, or XZ. You can also specify the location about which the cabinet is to be flipped
by selecting Centroid, Low end, or High end next to About.
– Rotate enables you to rotate the cabinet and all objects within the cabinet. You can rotate the cabinet
about any coordinate axis. Select X, Y, or Z next to Axis, and then select 90, 180, 270, -90, -180, or -270
degrees of rotation. The cabinet can also be moved about a Point or its Centroid. Enter coordinates
when rotating about a Point.
– Translate enables you to translate the cabinet and all objects within the cabinet. To translate the
cabinet, turn on Translate and define the distance of the translation from the current origin by specifying
an offset in each of the coordinate directions: X offset, Y offset, and Z offset.
• Snap the cabinet (and other objects) to a grid using the Snap to grid panel (Figure 9.11: The Snap to grid
Panel (p. 282)). To open this panel, select the cabinet in the graphics window and then select Snap to
grid in the Edit menu.
Edit Snap to grid
Figure 9.11: The Snap to grid Panel
Options available for snapping objects to a grid using the Snap to grid panel include the following:
– Incr enables you to specify the increment unit and distance of the grid in each axis direction.
– Count enables you to specify the number of grid points for in a specified range in each axis direction.
– Start enables you to specify the coordinates of the origin of the grid. This option is available for both
Incr and Count.
– End enables you to specify the ending coordinates of the grid if you have selected the Count option.
After you click Accept the cabinet (and all future objects) will be repositioned (or created) at the
grid point nearest to the selection point rather than at the selection point itself.
Note:
It is no longer necessary to snap all objects to a grid to eliminate small gaps in the
mesh. That operation is automatically performed when you create a mesh, when
the gaps are fixed in the mesh but the model is not changed. See Generating a
Mesh (p. 773) for more information about creating a mesh.
9.2.3. Changing the Walls of the Cabinet

To give more complex physical properties to the cabinet, ANSYS Icepak enables you to change the
definition of the cabinet walls. By default, the walls of the cabinet have no thickness and have zero
velocity and heat flux boundary conditions.
For each side of the cabinet (Min x, Max x, Min y, Max y, Min z, and Max z), you can specify how
the wall is defined. To change the cabinet walls, select a new option from the Wall type drop-down
list in the Properties tab of the Cabinet panel (Figure 9.7: The Cabinet Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 278)).
The following options are available:
• Default defines the specified cabinet wall as an impermeable adiabatic boundary. This option is selected
by default.
• Wall defines the specified cabinet wall as a wall object.
• Opening defines the specified cabinet wall as an opening object.
• Grille defines the specified cabinet wall as a grille object.
For each Wall, Opening, or Grille that you select, a new object will be added under the Model node
in the Model manager window. To edit the properties of these objects, click the appropriate Edit
button under Properties to open the appropriate Object panel. See Editing an Object (p. 290) for
more information about editing objects. (See Chapters Walls (p. 467), Openings (p. 393), and
Grilles (p. 409), respectively for details about wall, opening, and grille objects.)
9.2.4. Changing the Name of the Cabinet

ANSYS Icepak enables you to change the name of the cabinet. The name of the cabinet is displayed
in the Name text entry box in the Cabinet panel (Figure 9.5: The Cabinet Panel (Info Tab) (p. 277)).
Model Cabinet
You can change the name of the cabinet by entering a new name in the Name text entry field. The
default name is cabinet.1.
Caution:
There should never be more than one cabinet in your ANSYS Icepak model. Your ANSYS
Icepak model should always contain one (and only one) cabinet.
Building a Model
Adding Notes about the Cabinet

You can enter notes for cabinet under Notes for this object in the Notes tab of the Cabinet panel
(Figure 9.8: The Cabinet Panel (Notes Tab) (p. 278)). There is no restriction on the number and type of
text characters you can use. When you are finished entering or updating the text in this field, click
Update to store this information along with the cabinet object.
9.2.5. Modifying the Graphical Style of the Cabinet

ANSYS Icepak enables you to change the display of the cabinet in the graphics window. You can
change the color and line width of the cabinet as described in the following sections.
Changing the Color

The Color of the cabinet in the graphics window is shown as default in the Cabinet panel (Fig-
ure 9.5: The Cabinet Panel (Info Tab) (p. 277)). The color that will be applied to the cabinet when default
is selected is defined in the Object types section of the Preferences panel (see Editing the Graphical
Styles (p. 243) for more details on changing the default color using this panel). To change the color
of the cabinet, select the selected option next to Color and click the square button to the right of
the Color text field. A color palette menu will open. You can select the new color in the color palette
menu. To select a different color, click the icon in the lower right corner of the palette menu. Select
a new color using the method or panel that is appropriate to your system.
Changing the Line Width

The Linewidth of the cabinet in the graphics window is shown as default in the Cabinet panel
(Figure 9.5: The Cabinet Panel (Info Tab) (p. 277)). The width of the line used to display the cabinet
when default is selected is defined in the Graphical styles panel (see Editing the Graphical
Styles (p. 243) for more details on changing the default line width using the Graphical styles panel).
To change the width of the line for the cabinet, select one of the options in the drop-down list next
to Linewidth (default, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5). Click Update at the bottom of the Cabinet panel to change
the width of the line for the cabinet in the graphics window.
9.3. Configuring Objects within the Cabinet

The options for configuring objects within the cabinet are described in detail in the following sections.
• Overview of the Object Panels and Object Edit Windows (p. 285)
• Creating a New Object (p. 289)
• Selecting and Deselecting an Object (p. 289)
• Editing an Object (p. 290)
• Deleting an Object (p. 290)
• Resizing an Object (p. 291)
• Repositioning an Object (p. 292)
• Aligning an Object with Another Object in the Model (p. 300)
Configuring Objects within the Cabinet
• Copying an Object (p. 306)
9.3.1. Overview of the Object Panels and Object Edit Windows

When you click an object button in the Object creation toolbar, the Edit window in the lower right
corner of the screen becomes the object Edit window for the type of object selected. For example,
if you click the button in the Object creation toolbar, then the Edit window becomes the block
Edit window. The object Edit window is similar for all types of objects, and is divided into sections
for name and group information and relevant geometric information. Figure 9.12: Example of an Object
Edit Window (p. 285) shows an example of an object Edit window specific to plates (the plates Edit
window).
Figure 9.12: Example of an Object Edit Window
The object Edit window works in conjunction with the Object panel that opens at the bottom right
of the screen when you click the button in the Object modification toolbar. Note that you can
also open an Object panel by double-clicking on the name of the object under the Model node in
the Model manager window or by clicking the Edit button in the object Edit window.
The Object panel enables you to specify physical characteristics and properties not available in the
object Edit panel. In general, the Object panel is divided into four parts that are similar for all types
of objects: description, geometry specification, and physical properties, and object notes. Figure 9.13: Ex-
ample of an Object Panel (Info Tab) (p. 286)-Figure 9.16: Example of an Object Panel (Notes Tab) (p. 289)
show examples of an Object panel specific to plates (the Plates panel).
Building a Model
Figure 9.13: Example of an Object Panel (Info Tab)
Figure 9.14: Example of an Object Panel (Geometry Tab)
Building a Model
Figure 9.15: Example of an Object Panel (Properties Tab)
Figure 9.16: Example of an Object Panel (Notes Tab)
9.3.2. Creating a New Object

To create a new object, click the appropriate button in the Object creation toolbar (Figure 9.1: The
Object Creation Toolbar (p. 274)). You can also right-click the Model node in the Model manager
window, select Create, and then the object type from the subsequent drop-down menus. For example:
Model Create Block
A new object will be created with the default name object.n, where n is the next sequential number
among numbered objects of the same type. The name of the new object will appear in the list of
existing objects under the Model node in the Model manager window and in the Name text entry
box in the Object panel and the object Edit window. You can rename an object by entering a new
name in the Name text entry field.
Alternatively, you can create a new object by dragging and dropping the appropriate object to the
graphics window. See Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details about repositioning objects once
they have been created.
9.3.3. Selecting and Deselecting an Object

There are two ways to select an object:
Building a Model
• Click the name of the object in the object list under the Model node in the Model manager window.
• Position the mouse cursor over the object in the graphics window and Shift-click the left mouse button.
The object will become highlighted in the object list and the characteristics of the object will be dis-
played in the object Edit window (for example, Figure 9.12: Example of an Object Edit Window (p. 285))
and the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.13: Example of an Object Panel (Info Tab) (p. 286)).
To deselect an object that is currently selected, click another item under the Model node in the
Model manager window. When you select a new object, the previously selected object is automatically
unselected.
9.3.4. Editing an Object
To edit an object, select the object and click the button in the Object modification toolbar
(Figure 9.2: The Object Modification Toolbar (p. 274)). This opens the Object panel (for example, Fig-
ure 9.13: Example of an Object Panel (Info Tab) (p. 286)). The Object panel is specific to the type of
object being configured and contains more functionality than the object Edit window. The Object
panel enables you to specify physical characteristics and properties not available in the object Edit
window.
Note:
An object must be selected before you click the button. See Selecting and
Deselecting an Object (p. 289) for details on selecting an object.
Alternate ways of opening the Object panel after selecting an object are as follows:
• Click the Edit button in the object Edit window.
• Double-click the object name in the object list under the Model node in the Model manager window.
• Right-click the object name under the Model node and select Edit object from the drop-down menu.
9.3.5. Deleting an Object
To delete an object, select the object and click the button in the Object modification toolbar
(Figure 9.2: The Object Modification Toolbar (p. 274)) or click Delete in the Object panel. The selected
object will be permanently removed from the model and from the list of objects under the Model
node in the Model manager window.
You can recover a deleted object immediately after the delete operation by selecting Undo in the
Edit menu. See The Edit Menu (p. 59) for more details on using undo and redo operations.
To remove an object from the model only temporarily, you can deactivate it. See Including or Excluding
an Object (p. 310) for details.
Alternate ways of deleting a selected object are as follows:
• Select the object and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
• Right-click the object name under the Model node and select Delete from the drop-down menu.
9.3.6. Resizing an Object

You can resize and object in several different ways:
• Specify the new dimensions of the object in the object Edit window (Figure 9.17: Example of an Object
Edit Window (p. 291)). You can specify the starting and ending points of the object by selecting Start/end
in the drop-down list at the top of the window and entering the starting point of the object (xS, yS, zS)
and the ending point of the object (xE, yE, zE). After you type a number into a text entry field (or type
numbers in several fields), you must click Apply or press Enter to update the model and display the updated
model in the graphics window. If you do not click Accept or press Enter, ANSYS Icepak will not update
the model.
Figure 9.17: Example of an Object Edit Window
Alternatively, you can specify the starting point of the object and the length of the sides of the object
by selecting Start/length in the drop-down list and entering the starting point (xS, yS, zS) and the
lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of the object.
• Specify the dimensions of the object in the object panel (Figure 9.13: Example of an Object Panel (Info
Tab) (p. 286)-Figure 9.16: Example of an Object Panel (Notes Tab) (p. 289)). To open this panel, double-click
the object under the Model node in the Model manager window.
You can specify the starting and ending points of the object by clicking on the Geometry tab in
the object panel, selecting Start/end from the Specify by drop-down list, and entering the starting
point of the object (xS, yS, zS) and the ending point of the object (xE, yE, zE). Alternatively, you
can specify the starting point of the object and the length of the sides of the object by selecting
Start/length from the Specify by drop-down list and entering the starting point (xS, yS, zS) and
the lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of the object.
• Shift-right click the object, and then move the mouse to shrink or enlarge the object.
Note:
Ensure the Shift-RightClick is not enabled in the Preferences panel (or press F9) to
activate the interactive object resize feature.
• In the object Edit window (Figure 9.17: Example of an Object Edit Window (p. 291)), click the coordinate
(displayed in orange) that you want to change. Click a point in the graphics window that is inside the
boundary of the current object. The object will be contracted in the chosen coordinate direction. For ex-
Building a Model
ample, if you click yE (value = 1.0 m) and then click a point in the graphics window with y = 0.7 m, then
the object height will be contracted such that yE is now 0.7 m. The x and z coordinates will remain constant.
Note:
This feature cannot be used to extend the object beyond the boundaries that were in
place prior to resizing.
• Scale the object using the Move all objects in model panel (Figure 9.9: The Move all objects in model
Panel (p. 279)). To open this panel, right-click the object under the Model node in the Model manager
Model Cabinet Move
9.3.7. Repositioning an Object

You can reposition an object in ANSYS Icepak in much the same way as you reposition a cabinet. See
Repositioning the Cabinet (p. 280) for details on repositioning a cabinet. Note that you can also repos-
ition an object (and the cabinet) using a local coordinate system as described Local Coordinate Sys-
tems (p. 297).
You should note the following differences between repositioning an object and repositioning a cab-
inet:
• To modify the plane of the currently selected object (if relevant), click the Plane text entry field in the
object Edit panel (for example, Figure 9.12: Example of an Object Edit Window (p. 285)) to open a list of
available planes (yz, xz, and xy), and select a new plane from the list. The plane of the currently selected
object can also be specified in the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.14: Example of an Object Panel
(Geometry Tab) (p. 287)) using the Plane drop-down list, where you can choose Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y.
• There are several options related to moving an object using the mouse that are available for objects but
not for the cabinet. These options are displayed in the Interaction section of the Preferences panel
(Figure 9.10: The Interaction Section of the Preferences Panel (p. 281)) and are listed below:
– X, Y, Z enable you to select which combination of the three axes along which the object can be translated.
For example, if you are positioning an opening on a wall, you would want to limit the motion of the
opening to only two coordinate directions in order to move the opening across the surface of the wall.
– Restrict movement to cabinet enables you to restrict the motion of the object to within the cabinet
boundaries. If In cabinet is not selected, ANSYS Icepak will enable the object to project beyond the
cabinet boundaries. This option is on by default for all objects.
– Objects can't penetrate each other instructs ANSYS Icepak not to allow any penetration of the object
by another object. This option is on by default for all objects.
– Move object also moves group enables you to move entire groups using the Shift key and the middle
mouse button.
– Move object snaps to other objects enables you to snap objects to other objects using the Shift key
and the middle mouse button.
– Snap Tolerance specifies the distance, in pixels, within which a moved object will be snapped to an-
other object. When this value has been set, and the model is oriented in one of the X, Y, or Z views, a
dragged object will automatically snap into alignment with a second object of similar shape when it
comes within the specified number of pixels of a vertex, line, or plane of the second object.
– New object size factor specifies the default size of a newly-created object in terms of the size of the
cabinet. For example, in a 1 m 1 m 1 m cabinet, a value of 0.2 specifies that new objects will have
side lengths of 0.2 m.
Note:
This value does not apply to package objects.
• If you click the button after selecting an object, ANSYS Icepak will open a Move object panel and not
the Move all objects in model panel that is used for the cabinet. You can also open the Move object
panel by right-clicking on an object in the list under the Model node and selecting Move in the drop-
down menu.
You can rotate the object about any coordinate axis. Select X, Y, or Z next to Axis, and then select
90, 180, 270, -90, -180, or -270 degrees of rotation. The object can also be rotated about a Point
or its Centroid. Enter coordinates when rotating about a Point.
If multiple geometric transformations are selected, ANSYS Icepak applies them in the order that
they appear in the panel. For example, if both the Rotate and Translate options are selected, the
new object is rotated first and then translated. Note that not all combinations of transformations
are commutative; that is, the result may be order-dependent, particularly if reflection is used.
If you specify a transformation that moves an object outside the cabinet, ANSYS Icepak opens the
Objects outside panel (Figure 9.18: The Objects outside Panel (p. 294)), which contains the following
options:
– Allow out instructs ANSYS Icepak to let the object remain outside the cabinet boundary. The object
can be either completely outside the cabinet or partly outside the cabinet, as shown in Figure 9.19: Object
Outside Cabinet Boundary (p. 294). This option can be used if the cabinet you have created is too small
and you want to resize the cabinet at a later time.
– Move instructs ANSYS Icepak to move the object back inside the cabinet. The object is moved back
inside the cabinet as shown in Figure 9.20: Moving the Object Back Inside the Cabinet (p. 295), where
the dashed line shows the position of the object before the move, and the solid line shows the position
of the object after the move.
– Resize instructs ANSYS Icepak to resize the object so that it is inside the cabinet. ANSYS Icepak will
change the object so that only the part of the object that is inside the cabinet after the transformation
remains in the model, as shown in Figure 9.21: Resizing an Object that is Outside the Cabinet (p. 296).
The part that is outside will be discarded.
– Resize cabinet instructs ANSYS Icepak to resize the cabinet so that the object is inside the cabinet, as
shown in Figure 9.22: Resizing the Cabinet to Include Outside Object (p. 297).
– Cancel instructs ANSYS Icepak to cancel the move operation that caused the object to either exceed
the cabinet dimension or be placed outside the cabinet.
Building a Model
Figure 9.18: The Objects outside Panel
Figure 9.19: Object Outside Cabinet Boundary
Figure 9.20: Moving the Object Back Inside the Cabinet
Building a Model
Figure 9.21: Resizing an Object that is Outside the Cabinet
Figure 9.22: Resizing the Cabinet to Include Outside Object
Local Coordinate Systems

The global coordinate system has an origin of (0, 0, 0) in ANSYS Icepak. You can create local coordinate
systems that can be used in your model. The origins of the local coordinate systems are specified
with an offset from the origin of the global coordinate system.
The Local coord systems panel can be used to view and manage all local coordinate systems in your
ANSYS Icepak model. To open the Local coord systems panel (Figure 9.23: The Local coord systems
Panel (p. 298)), double-click the Local coords item under the Problem setup node in the Model
manager window.
Problem setup Local coords
Building a Model
Figure 9.23: The Local coord systems Panel
The Local coord systems panel can be used to create new local coordinate systems, edit existing
local coordinate systems, and delete or deactivate local coordinate systems. These operations are
described below.
Each Object panel (for example, Figure 9.14: Example of an Object Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 287)), and
also the Cabinet panel (Figure 9.6: The Cabinet Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 277)), contains a Local coord
system drop-down list. To select a local coordinate system for an object (or for the cabinet), open
the Local coord system list and select a local coordinate system from the list. If the Local coord
system field is empty, the global coordinate system will be used for the object (or cabinet).
The Local coord system list can also be used to create a new local coordinate system, edit an existing
local coordinate system, and view the definition of the selected local coordinate system. These oper-
ations are described in the following section.
9.4. Creating a New Local Coordinate System

To create a new local coordinate system, click New in the Local coord systems panel (Figure 9.23: The
Local coord systems Panel (p. 298)). A new local coordinate system will be created. Rename the local
coordinate system, if desired. Keep the default Type (Trans), and specify the origin of the local coordinate
system by entering values for the X offset, Y offset, and Z offset from the origin of the global coordinate
system, which is (0, 0, 0). Repeat these steps to create any other local coordinate systems, and then
click Accept.
You can also create a new local coordinate system in any Object panel (or the Cabinet panel). To create
a new local coordinate system, open the Local coord system drop-down list and select Create new.
This will open the Local coords panel (Figure 9.24: The Local coords Panel (p. 299)). Enter a name in the
Name field for the new local coordinate system. Keep the default Type (Trans), and specify the origin
of the local coordinate system by entering values for the X offset, Y offset, and Z offset from the origin
of the global coordinate system, which is (0, 0, 0). Click Accept when you have finished creating the
local coordinate system, and ANSYS Icepak will close the Local coords panel and return to the Object
panel (or the Cabinet panel).
Viewing the Definition of a Local Coordinate System
Figure 9.24: The Local coords Panel
9.5. Editing an Existing Local Coordinate System

You can use the Local coord systems panel (Figure 9.23: The Local coord systems Panel (p. 298)) to rename
an existing local coordinate system. You can also change the origin of a local coordinate system by
entering new values for the X offset, Y offset, and Z offset from the origin of the global coordinate
system, which is (0, 0, 0). Click Accept when you have finished editing the local coordinate systems.
You can also edit the definition of a local coordinate system in any Object panel (or in the Cabinet
panel). To edit the properties of the local coordinate system selected in the Local coord system list,
open the list and select Edit definition. This will open the Local coords panel (Figure 9.24: The Local
coords Panel (p. 299)) and display the properties of the selected coordinate system. You can edit the
definition of the coordinate system using the Local coords panel. Click Accept when you have finished
editing the coordinate system, and ANSYS Icepak will close the Local coords panel and return to the
Object panel (or the Cabinet panel).
Note:
If you have used a local coordinate system for an object (or the cabinet) and you then
edit the origin of the local coordinate system, the position of the object will not change
in the graphics window, because the object’s position with respect to the global coordin-
ate system is still the same. Because the object is displayed with respect to the global
coordinate system in the graphics window, only its local coordinate values will be adjus-
ted to account for its display location. For example, if the offset values for a local co-
ordinate system were (0.1, 0, 0), then the coordinate location of any object using that
local coordinate system would be adjusted by -0.1 units in the x direction so that the
object is displayed in the same location in the graphics window. If the offset values are
changed to be (0.2, 0, 0), then the coordinate location of the object(s) would be adjusted
by a total of -0.2 units in the x direction, but the position of the object in the graphics
window (with respect to the global coordinate system) will still remain the same.
9.6. Viewing the Definition of a Local Coordinate System

You can view the definition of a local coordinate system using any Object panel (or the Cabinet panel).
To view the properties of the local coordinate system selected in the Local coord system list, open the
list and select View definition. The Message window will report the definition of the coordinate system.
Building a Model
9.7. Deleting Local Coordinate Systems

If there are local coordinate systems in the Local coord systems panel (Figure 9.23: The Local coord
systems Panel (p. 298)) that you no longer need, you can easily delete them. Click on the Delete button
on the line of the coordinate system that you want to delete. The coordinate system will be permanently
removed from your model.
To remove all local coordinate systems from your ANSYS Icepak model, click Clear in the Local coord
systems panel.
Note that, if you delete a local coordinate system that is being used by an object (or the cabinet), the
object (or cabinet) will remain in the same position in the graphics window. ANSYS Icepak will add the
coordinates of the origin of the local coordinate system to the coordinates of the object (or cabinet)
and update the coordinates in the Object panel (or the Cabinet panel) and the object Edit window
(or the cabinet Edit window).
9.8. Activating and Deactivating Local Coordinate Systems

By default, all local coordinate systems that you create will be available in your current ANSYS Icepak mod-
el. You can remove a local coordinate system from your model temporarily by turning off the Active
option for the coordinate system in the Local coord systems panel (Figure 9.23: The Local coord systems
Panel (p. 298)). You can repeat this for each local coordinate system that you want to temporarily remove
from your model. When a local coordinate system is deactivated, it is simply removed from the Local
coord system drop-down lists, not deleted from ANSYS Icepak. Since it still exists, you can easily add
it to the Local coord system drop-down lists again by turning the Active option back on.
Note that, if you deactivate a local coordinate system that is currently being used by an object (or the
cabinet), ANSYS Icepak will still use the local coordinate system for the object (or cabinet). Deactivating
a local coordinate system only removes it from the Local coord system lists so that it cannot be selected.
9.8.1. Aligning an Object with Another Object in the Model

You can align an object with another object in your ANSYS Icepak model using the Edit window or
the Object modification toolbar.
Aligning Objects with the Object Edit Window

Figure 9.25: Two Objects that Are Close Together (p. 301) shows an example of two objects that are
close together. To align the right-hand side of object.1 with the left-hand side of object.2 using
the object Edit window, follow the steps below.
Aligning Object Faces
Figure 9.25: Two Objects that Are Close Together
1. Select the object you want to align (object.1 in this example).
2. In the object Edit window, click on the coordinate that you want to change. The coordinates are displayed
in orange in the object Edit window. For example, if you wanted to change the xE coordinate of ob-
ject.1, you would click xE in the object Edit panel.
3. Click the part of the object that you want to align your object with in the graphics window. In this example,
you would click the left-hand side of object.2.
ANSYS Icepak will stretch object.1 so that the right-hand side of object.1 coincides with the
left-hand side of object.2.
Aligning Objects with the Object modification Toolbar

You can align an object with another object in your ANSYS Icepak model in several ways using the
Object modification toolbar (Figure 9.2: The Object Modification Toolbar (p. 274)).
9.9. Aligning Object Faces
You can align two objects with faces that are in parallel planes using the button in the Object
modification toolbar. Alignment of one object with another using faces can be accomplished by two
methods:
• resizing the selected object by stretching or contracting in the direction normal to the plane of its selected
face, so that the selected face on the chosen object will be in the same plane as the selected face on the
reference object
• translating the selected object in the direction normal to the plane of its selected face, so that the selected
face on the chosen object will be in the same plane as the selected face on the reference object
Note:
The resizing option for aligning faces is available only for objects that have prism, cyl-
indrical, or 3D polygon geometries. Objects with these geometries can then be resized
only when they are being aligned to objects with similar geometry (for example, prism
objects cannot be resized to become aligned with cylindrical objects).
Building a Model
To align the faces of two objects, use the following procedure:
1. Decide whether you want to align the two desired objects by resizing or translating one of the objects.
• To align objects by resizing one of the objects, left-click the button.
• To align objects by translating one of the objects, right-click the button.
2. Click the face of the object that you want to change. If there are multiple faces joined together at the same
edge or overlaid on the same plane, you can cycle through the faces by repeatedly clicking the left button
until the desired face is selected. If you select the wrong face, right-click to deselect it.
3. When you have selected the desired face, click the middle mouse button to accept the choice.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the face on the reference object with which you want the first object to be aligned.
9.10. Aligning Object Edges
You can align two objects with edges that run in the same direction using the button in the Object
modification toolbar. Aligning one object to another using edges can be accomplished by two methods
for both 2D and 3D objects:
• 2D objects
– resizing the selected object by stretching (or contracting) in the coordinate direction normal to the direction
of its selected edge, so that the selected edge of the chosen object will be collinear with the selected
edge on the reference object
– translating the selected object in the coordinate direction normal to the direction of its selected edge, so
that the selected edge of the chosen object will be collinear with the selected edge on the reference object
• 3D objects
– resizing the selected object by stretching (or contracting) in up to two coordinate directions normal to
the direction of its selected edge, so that the selected edge of the chosen object will be collinear with
the selected edge on the reference object
– translating the selected object in up to two coordinate directions normal to the direction of its selected
edge, so that the selected edge of the chosen object will be collinear with the selected edge on the refer-
ence object
Note:
Aligning two objects using edges is not available for objects with circular, cylindrical, ellipsoid,
or elliptical cylinder geometry.
To align the edges of two objects, use the following procedure:
• To align objects by resizing one of the objects, click the button.
Aligning Object Vertices
2. Click the edge of the object that you want to change. If there are multiple edges joined together at the
same point or overlaid on the same line, you can cycle through the edges by repeatedly clicking until the
desired edge is selected. If you select the wrong edge, right-click to deselect it.
3. When you have selected the desired edge, click the middle mouse button to accept the choice.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the edge on the reference object with which you want the first object to be aligned.
Figure 9.26: Alignment of Two Objects Using Edges (p. 303) shows an example of aligning the edges of
two objects using resizing and translation.
Figure 9.26: Alignment of Two Objects Using Edges
9.11. Aligning Object Vertices
You can align two objects by their individual vertices using the button in the Object modification
toolbar. Alignment of one object with another using vertices can be accomplished by two methods:
Building a Model
• Resizing the selected object by stretching (or contracting) in up to three coordinate directions, so that the
selected vertex of the chosen object will occupy the same point in the cabinet space as the selected vertex
on the reference object
• Translating the selected object in up to three coordinate directions, so that the selected vertex of the chosen
object will occupy the same point in the cabinet space as the selected vertex on the reference object
Note:
Aligning two objects using vertices is not available for objects with circular or cylindrical
geometry.
To align the vertices of two objects, use the following procedure:
• To align objects by resizing one of the objects, click the button.
2. Click the vertex of the object that you want to change. If there are multiple vertices occupying the same
point, you can cycle through the vertices by repeatedly clicking until the desired vertex is selected. If you
select the wrong vertex, right-click to deselect it.
3. When you have selected the desired vertex, click the middle mouse button to accept the choice.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the vertex on the reference object with which you want the first object to be
aligned.
9.12. Aligning Object Centers
You can align two objects by their geometric centroids using the button in the Object modification
toolbar. Alignment of one object to another using centers occurs by translating the selected object in
up to three coordinate directions so that the center of the chosen object will occupy the same point
in the cabinet space as the center of the reference object.
To align the centers of two objects, use the following procedure:
1. Click the button.
2. Click the object that you want to change. If there are multiple objects in close proximity to each other, you
can cycle through the objects by repeatedly clicking until the desired object is selected. If you select the
wrong object, right-click to deselect it.
3. When you have selected the desired object, click the middle mouse button to accept the choice.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the reference object with which you want the first object to be aligned.
Matching Object Faces
9.13. Aligning Object Face Centers
You can align two objects by the geometric centers of their faces using the button in the Object
modification toolbar. Alignment of one object to another using face centers occurs by translating the
selected object in up to three coordinate directions so that the center of the face on the chosen object
will occupy the same point in the cabinet space as the center of the face on the reference object.
Note:
Aligning two objects using face centers is not available for objects with ellipsoid geo-
metry.
To align the face centers of two objects, use the following procedure:
2. Click the face on the object that you want to change. If there are multiple faces joined together at the same
edge or overlaid on the same plane, you can cycle through the faces by repeatedly clicking until the desired
face is selected. If you select the wrong face, right-click to deselect it.
9.14. Matching Object Faces
You can align two objects by matching their faces using the button in the Object modification
toolbar. Alignment of one object to another by matching faces occurs as necessary by some or all of
the following methods:
• resizing the selected object by stretching (or contracting) in one or both of the coordinate directions of the
plane of the selected face
• translating the selected object in up to three coordinate directions
• rotating the selected object so that the plane of the face on the selected object is the same as the plane of
the face on the reference object
Note:
• Matching object faces is possible only when the selected faces are being matched to other object
faces with similar geometry. For example, a face on a prism object cannot be matched to a face
on a cylindrical object, but a circular face, such as a 2D fan, can be matched to a face on a cyl-
indrical object. Circular faces in different planes (for example, x-y and y-z), however, cannot be
matched.
• Aligning two objects by matching faces is not available for objects with ellipsoid geometry.
To align two objects by matching faces, use the following procedure:
Building a Model
2. Click the face on the object that you want to change. If there are multiple faces joined together at the same
edge or overlaid on the same plane, you can cycle through the faces by repeatedly clicking until the desired
face is selected. If you select the wrong face, right-click to deselect it.
9.15. Matching Object Edges
You can align two objects by matching their edges using the button in the Object modification
toolbar. Alignment of one object to another by matching edges occurs as necessary by one or both of
the following methods:
• resizing the selected object by stretching (or contracting) in the coordinate direction of the selected edge
• translating the selected object in up to three coordinate directions
Note:
• Matching object edges is possible only when the selected edges are in the same general plane
(that is, x-y, y-z, x-z , or inclined).
• Aligning two objects by matching edges is not available for objects with circular, cylindrical, el-
lipsoid, or elliptical cylinder geometry.
To align two objects by matching edges:
2. Click the edge on the object that you want to change. If there are multiple edges joined together at the
same point or overlaid on the same line, you can cycle through the edges by repeatedly clicking until the
desired edge is selected. If you select the wrong edge, right-click to deselect it.
3. When you have selected the desired edge, click the middle mouse button to accept the choice.
9.15.1. Copying an Object

There are two ways to copy an object in ANSYS Icepak: using the Copy object panel and using the
Object selection panel.
Copying an Object Using the Copy object Panel

One way to copy an object is to use the Copy object panel. Figure 9.27: Example of a Copy object
Panel (p. 307) shows an example of a Copy object panel specific to copying a block (the Copy block
Matching Object Edges
panel). To open this panel, select the object in the graphics window and click on the button in
the Object modification toolbar (Figure 9.2: The Object Modification Toolbar (p. 274)).
Figure 9.27: Example of a Copy object Panel
An alternate way of opening the Copy object panel is as follows:
• Right-click the object name under the Model node and select Copy from the drop-down menu.
Note:
If you copy an object such that the new object is created outside the cabinet, ANSYS
Icepak opens the Objects outside panel, as described in Repositioning an Ob-
ject (p. 292).
When you use a Copy object panel, a new object with a sequentially numbered name appears in
the list of existing objects under the Model node in the Model manager window, and the new object
Building a Model
appears in the graphics window. Only the options that are selected in the Copy object panel affect
the copy creation.
If multiple geometric transformations are selected, ANSYS Icepak applies them in the order that they
appear in the panel. For example, if both the Rotate and Translate options are selected, the new
object is rotated first and then translated. Note that not all combinations of transformations are
commutative; that is, the result may be order-dependent, particularly if reflection is used. If you want
to perform a transformation that requires an order of operations different from that provided by the
Copy object panel, you can create an initial object and then perform additional transformations in
the order desired using the Move object panel. See Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for more inform-
ation on moving an object.
Options available for copying objects using the Copy object panel include the following:
• Number of copies enables you to specify how many copies of the selected object you require.
• Group name enables you to specify a name for the group to which the new objects will belong. No group
will be created if this option is not selected.
• Scale enables you to increase or decrease the size of the new object relative to the original object. To
scale the object, turn on the Scale option and specify the scaling factor by entering a value in the Scale
factor text entry box. The scaling factor must be a real number greater than zero. Values greater than 1
will increase the size, while values less than 1 will decrease the size. To scale the object by different amounts
in different directions, enter the scaling factors separated by spaces. For example, if you enter 1.5 2 3
in the Scale factor text entry box, ANSYS Icepak will scale the object by a factor of 1.5 in the x direction,
2 in the y direction, and 3 in the z direction. By default, the object is scaled about their current Centroid
locations. To scale the object around a point, select Point next to Scale about and enter X, Y, and/or Z
coordinates. The specified point will become the new centroid of the scaled object. To scale the size of
multiple copies successively (that is, to scale the first copy relative to the original object, the second copy
relative to the first copy, etc.), select Scale copies cumulatively.
• Mirror enables you to obtain the mirror image of the copied object. To mirror the object, turn on the
Mirror option and specify the Plane across which to reflect the object by selecting XY, YZ, or XZ. You
can also specify the location about which the object is to be flipped by selecting Centroid, Low end, or
High end next to About.
• Rotate enables you to rotate the new object about any coordinate axis from the object’s original position.
Select X, Y, or Z next to Axis, and then select 90, 180, or 270 degrees of rotation.
• Translate enables you to translate the new object a specified distance from the original object’s position.
To translate the new object, turn on Translate and define the distance of the translation from the current
object by specifying an offset in each of the coordinate directions: X offset, Y offset, and Z offset. If
multiple copies are created, this translation is relative to the previous copy for each new object.
Copying an Object Using the Object selection Panel

You can also copy an object using the Object selection panel. Figure 9.28: The Object selection
Panel (p. 309) shows an example of an Object selection panel. To open this panel, click Copy from
in the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.14: Example of an Object Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 287)).
Matching Object Edges
Figure 9.28: The Object selection Panel
The Copy from option is used when you want to transform an existing object of a specific type in a
particular location into an object of another type in the same location. Consider, for example, that
your model includes a block and a resistance and you want to transform the block into a 3D resistance.
In the Resistances panel, click the Copy from button. This opens the Object selection panel. In the
Copy from object list, choose the block. When you click Done, ANSYS Icepak will create a new object
with the location and dimensions of the block and the physical properties of the resistance.
Other options available in the Object selection panel are as follows:
• Deactivate other object deactivates the selected object in the Copy from object list. This option is on
by default. The object will be temporarily removed from the model, which renders the object inactive for
purposes of the current analysis.
• Delete other object deletes the selected object in the Copy from object list.
• Keep other object does not delete or deactivate the selected object in the Copy from object list.
• Copy shape info copies the object shape.
– From shape copies the exact shape information from the selected object.
– From bounding box orients and scales the current shape to fit the bounding box of the selected object.
• Copy object info copies the shape and the parameters of the object.
• Copy creation order ensures that the creation order of the new object is the same as that selected from
the Copy from object list.
• Copy groups ensures that the new object is put into the same group as the selected object in the Copy
from object list.
Building a Model
9.16. Object Attributes

When a new object is created in ANSYS Icepak, default characteristics are applied to the object. ANSYS
Icepak gives the object the following characteristics, which are displayed in the object Edit window or
the Object panel, or, in some cases, in both places.
• Description (name, notes, group, include or exclude the object)
• Graphical style (shading, line width, color, texture, transparency)
• Position and size
• Geometry
• Physical characteristics
The first four characteristics relate to all objects and are described in the following section. The physical
characteristics are specific to a particular object and are described in detail in the section related to
that object.
9.16.1. Description
ANSYS Icepak enables you to change the name of the object, specify the group to which it belongs,
and include or exclude the object. These options are described in the following section.
Changing the Name of an Object

ANSYS Icepak enables you to change the name of an object. The name of an object is displayed in
the Name text entry box in the object Edit window (for example, Figure 9.12: Example of an Object
Edit Window (p. 285)) and in the Name text entry box in the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.13: Ex-
ample of an Object Panel (Info Tab) (p. 286)). To change the name of an object, enter a new name in
the Name text entry box.
Adding Notes about the Object

You can enter notes for object under Notes for this object in the Notes tab of the Cabinet panel
(for example, Figure 9.16: Example of an Object Panel (Notes Tab) (p. 289)). There is no restriction on
the number and type of text characters you can use. When you are finished entering or updating the
text in this field, click Update to store this information along with the object.
Assigning an Object to a Group

The group to which the object belongs is displayed in the Group text entry box in the object Edit
window (for example, Figure 9.12: Example of an Object Edit Window (p. 285)) and in the Groups text
entry box in the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.13: Example of an Object Panel (Info Tab) (p. 286)).
You can specify the group to which the object belongs (if applicable) by entering the name of the
group in the Group text entry box.
Including or Excluding an Object

You can include an object in the model or exclude it by selecting or deselecting Active in the Object
panel (for example, Figure 9.13: Example of an Object Panel (Info Tab) (p. 286)). The object is included
Object Attributes
by default. If the Active option is deselected, the object is temporarily removed from the model,
which renders the object inactive for purposes of the current analysis.
9.16.2. Graphical Style

ANSYS Icepak enables you to change the display of the object in the graphics window. The procedure
for changing the color and line width of the object is the same as for changing the color and line
width of the cabinet, as described in Modifying the Graphical Style of the Cabinet (p. 284).
Changing the Shading

The Shading of an object in the graphics window is shown as default in the Object panel (for example,
Figure 9.13: Example of an Object Panel (Info Tab) (p. 286)). The type of shading that will be applied
to the object when default is selected is defined in the Object types section of the Preferences
panel (see Editing the Graphical Styles (p. 243) for more details on changing the default shading using
the Preferences panel). To change the shading of the object, click the square button to the right of
the Shading text field in the Object panel. Select a shading type in the resulting drop-down list:
default, Wire, Solid, Solid/wire, Hidden line, or Invisible. Click Update at the bottom of the Object
panel to change the shading for the object in the graphics window.
Changing the Texture

The Texture of an object in the graphics window can be modified when Solid or Solid/wire has
been selected in the Shading drop-down list. The default texture option is No texture. To modify
the texture, select Load from file and select an available PPM image file in the resulting File selection
dialog box (see File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98)).
Note:
Only binary encoded PPM image files can be used as a source for applying texture to
only Solid/Solid-wire shaded objects. Any other image file format, including ASCII
encoded PPM image, causes Icepak to close without a warning message. Texture is
applied on faceted object such as Prism blocks, 2D plates, board, heat sink and curva-
ceous objects such as cylinder or sphere. To properly adjust texture for viewing com-
plete image, use texture scaling property to shrink or stretch image texture. A texture
can be applied to multiple objects for only solid/solid-wire shaded objects of same
type by editing them together. To unload texture from all of them, select No texture
for Texture in the Edit panel of each object separately.
Depending on its pixel size, the image, or a portion thereof, will be used to cover each side of the
object. To change the size of the image used for the texture, specify a value for the Texture scale.
Values greater than 1.0 will reduce the size of the image on each side of the object, resulting in a
tiling effect at large enough values. Values less than 1.0 will increase the size of the image on each
side of the object.
Changing the Transparency

The transparency of an object in the graphics window can be modified by turning on the Transparency
option and moving the slider bar between values of 0.00 (opaque) and 0.99 (fully transparent). This
option is useful when Solid has been selected in the Shading drop-down list. In the case of the
Solid/wire option, the transparency will be seen on the faces only, not the edges.
Building a Model
9.16.3. Position and Size

An example of how ANSYS Icepak displays the position and size of an object is described below for
a rectangular object.
• The plane of the currently selected object is displayed in the object Edit window (for example, Fig-
ure 9.12: Example of an Object Edit Window (p. 285)) next to Plane (if relevant). For 2D objects, Plane is
the plane the object is in. (For 3D objects, Plane is not available.) To modify the plane, select a new plane
in the drop-down list of available planes (yz, xz, and xy). The plane of the currently selected object can
also be specified in the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.14: Example of an Object Panel (Geometry
Tab) (p. 287)) by selecting Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y in the Plane drop-down list.
• The starting and ending points of the selected object are displayed in the object Edit window (for example,
Figure 9.12: Example of an Object Edit Window (p. 285)) and in the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.14: Ex-
ample of an Object Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 287)) under Location if Start/end is selected. For rectangular
objects, the start and end points take the form (xS, yS, zS) and (xE, yE, zE). If Start/length is selected in
the Object panel or the object Edit window, the starting point of the object (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths
of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) are displayed in the Object panel and the object Edit window.
9.16.4. Geometry
ANSYS Icepak displays the geometry of the currently selected object in the object Edit window (for
example, Figure 9.12: Example of an Object Edit Window (p. 285)) next to Geom. To modify the geo-
metry, select a new geometry from the list of available geometries. The geometries available depend
on the type of object selected. For example, the geometries available for a block are prism, cylinder,
polygon, ellipsoid, and elliptical cylinder. The geometry of the currently selected object can also be
specified in the Object panel (for example, Figure 9.14: Example of an Object Panel (Geometry
Tab) (p. 287)) in the Shape drop-down list.
The geometries available in ANSYS Icepak are listed below and described in the following sections.
• rectangular
• circular
• inclined
• polygon (2D and 3D)
• prism
• cylindrical
• ellipsoid
• elliptical cylinder
• CAD
Rectangular Objects
The location and dimension parameters for a rectangular object include the coordinate plane (Y-Z,
X-Y, or X-Z) in which the object lies and its physical dimensions. A rectangular object is defined by
the coordinates of its lower left and upper right corners (see Figure 9.29: Rectangular Object Defini-
Object Attributes
tion (p. 313)). These are referred to as the starting point (xS, yS, zS) and ending point (xE, yE, zE), re-
spectively. The coordinate on the axis that is normal to the plane of the object is specified only for
the starting point. For the ending point, this same value is used. For example, if the object is in the
X-Z plane, you specify xS, yS, zS, xE, and zE, and ANSYS Icepak automatically sets yE equal to yS.
Figure 9.29: Rectangular Object Definition
Rectangular geometries are available for the following objects:
• networks
• heat exchangers
• openings
• grilles
• sources
• printed circuit boards (PCBs)
• plates
• walls
• fans
• resistances (3D rectangular geometries only)
To specify a rectangular object, select Rectangular in the Shape drop-down list in the Object panel.
The user inputs for a rectangular object are shown below.
Building a Model
Select the plane in which the object lies (Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y) in the Plane drop-down list. Select Start/end
in the Specify by drop down list and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end co-
ordinates (xE, yE, zE) of the object, or select Start/length and enter values for the start coordinates
(xS, yS, zS) and lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of the object.
Circular Objects
A circular object (see Figure 9.30: Circular Object Definition (p. 314)) is defined by the coordinate location
of its center (xC, yC, zC), the plane (X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z) in which the object lies, and its Radius.
Figure 9.30: Circular Object Definition
Circular geometries are available for the following objects:
• heat exchangers
• openings
• grilles
• sources
• plates
• walls
• fans
Object Attributes
• resistances
To specify a circular object, select Circular in the Shape drop-down list in the Object panel. The user
inputs for a circular object are shown below.
Specify the location of the center of the object (xC, yC, zC), the plane in which the object lies (Y-Z,
X-Z, or X-Y), and the Radius of the object. For a circular fan, you can specify the size of the hub or
inner radius (IRadius).
You can also define a circular object on the surface of another circular object. For example, you can
create a circular fan on the circular face of a cylindrical block. Use the Orient menu or the Orientation
commands toolbar to specify the desired orientation of the object. For the cylindrical block, you
would choose the orientation such that the circular face of the block is in the plane of the graphics
window. Then, for the fan, select Circular in the drop-down list next to Geom in the fan Edit window
and click Select 3 pts. Using the left mouse button, select the first, second, and third points on the
radius of the circular face of the cylindrical block in the graphics window. For a circular fan, you can
also specify the size of the hub or inner radius by selecting an inner radius point in the graphics
window using the left mouse button.
Inclined Objects
An inclined object has only two of its edges aligned with a coordinate axis (X, Y, or Z), and its phys-
ical dimensions are defined by the coordinates of a rectangular box that serves as its boundary (see
Figure 9.31: Inclined Object Definition (p. 316)). The lower left corner and upper right corner of the
box are referred to as the starting point (xS, yS, zS) and ending point (xE, yE, zE), respectively.
Building a Model
Figure 9.31: Inclined Object Definition
To complete the definition of an inclined object, you must specify the axis around which it is rotated
and the orientation of the object (see Figure 9.32: Inclined Object Slope Definition (p. 316)).
Figure 9.32: Inclined Object Slope Definition
Inclined geometries are available for the following objects:
• networks
• heat exchangers
• openings
• grilles
• sources
Two-Dimensional Polygons
• plates
• walls
• fans
• resistances
To specify an inclined object, select Inclined in the Shape drop-down list in the Object panel. The
user inputs for an inclined object are shown below.
Specify the Axis of rotation by selecting X, Y, or Z in the drop-down list. Under Location, select one
of the following options from the Specify by drop-down list to specify the location of the inclined
object.
• Start/end Enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end coordinates (xE, yE, zE), and specify
the Orientation by selecting Positive or Negative in the drop-down list.
• Start/length Enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of
the object, and specify the Orientation by selecting Positive or Negative in the drop-down list.
• Start/angle Enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of
the object, and specify the Angle of inclination of the object.
Polygon Objects
Two-dimensional polygons and three-dimensional polygons are available in ANSYS Icepak.
9.17. Two-Dimensional Polygons

A two-dimensional polygon object (see Figure 9.33: Definition of a 2D Polygon Object (p. 318)) is described
by the plane in which it lies (Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y) and the coordinates of its vertices (for example, vert 1,
vert 2, vert 3). The coordinate on the axis that is normal to the plane of the object is specified only for
the first vertex. For the remaining vertices, this same value is used. For example, if the object is in the
X-Z plane, you specify (x1, y1, z1) for vert 1, (x2, z2) for vert 2, (x3, z3) for vert 3, etc., and ANSYS
Icepak automatically sets y2 = y3 = y1, etc.
Building a Model
Figure 9.33: Definition of a 2D Polygon Object
Two-dimensional polygon geometries are available for the following objects:
• networks
• heat exchangers
• openings
• grilles
• sources
• plates
• walls
• fans
• printed circuit boards
To specify an object in the shape of a 2D polygon, select Polygon in the Shape drop-down list in the
Object panel. The user inputs for a 2D polygon are shown below.
Specify the plane in which the polygon lies by selecting Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y in the Plane drop-down list
and then specify the coordinates of the vertices (for example, vert 1, vert 2, vert 3, etc.) of the polygon.
You can add and remove vertices using the Add and Remove buttons. You can also click Edit to open
the Edit polygon coords panel to add, remove, or edit vertices in a text editor format. The list of the
Three-Dimensional Polygons
polygon's coordinates in the text editor must be ordered list. The Coordinate units can be specified
in the drop-down list.
To modify the position of any polygon vertex, either select its name (for example, vert 1) in the vertex
list and modify its x, y, and z coordinate values to the left of the vertex list, or select and move its point
in the graphics window using the mouse.
9.18. Three-Dimensional Polygons

Three-dimensional polygon objects have top and bottom sides that are polygonal in shape and are
parallel to each other. A uniform 3D polygon object (Figure 9.34: Definition of a Uniform 3D Polygon
Object (p. 320)) has a centerline aligned with one of the coordinate axes and a constant cross-section
throughout the height of the block. It is described by the plane in which its base lies (Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y),
its Height, and the coordinates of the vertices (for example, vert 1, vert 2, vert 3) on the base plane.
Building a Model
Figure 9.34: Definition of a Uniform 3D Polygon Object
A non-uniform 3D polygon object (Figure 9.35: Definition of a Non-Uniform 3D Polygon Object (p. 321))
can be skewed with respect to the coordinate axes and can possess top and bottom sides of different
shapes. It is described by the plane in which its base lies (Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y), its Height, and the coordinates
of its vertices (for example, low 1, low 2, low 3, high 1, high 2, high 3). The top and bottom sides of
a non-uniform 3D polygon object can differ in shape but must be parallel to each other and possess
an identical number of vertices.
Figure 9.35: Definition of a Non-Uniform 3D Polygon Object
Three-dimensional polygon geometries are available only for blocks and resistances.
To specify an object in the shape of a 3D polygon, select Polygon in the Shape drop-down list in the
Object panel. The user inputs for a 3D polygon are shown below.
For a uniform 3D polygonal object, specify the plane in which the base lies by selecting Y-Z, X-Z, or X-
Y in the Plane drop-down list. Under Location, specify the Height and the coordinates of the vertices
(for example, vert 1, vert 2, vert 3) on the base plane. You can add and remove vertices using the Add
and Remove buttons. You can also click Edit to open the Edit polygon coords panel to add, remove,
or edit vertices in a text editor format. The Coordinate units can be specified in the drop-down list.
Building a Model
If you select None in the Plane drop-down list, the polygonal block will be constructed with zero height
and will take the shape of the base of the polygon.
For a non-uniform 3D polygon object, select Nonuniform and specify the plane in which the base lies
by selecting Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y in the Plane drop-down list. Under Location specify the Height and the
coordinates of its vertices (for example, low 1, low 2, low 3, high 1, high 2, high 3).
For a uniform 3D polygon object, the top and bottom sides are identical in shape and size, and the
cross-section is uniform in one coordinate direction. (Therefore, a uniform 3D polygon object is completely
defined by its height and the coordinates of its base vertices.) In a non-uniform 3D polygon object, the
top and bottom sides lie in parallel planes and possess an identical number of vertices but are not
identical in shape or size. Also, their centroids do not necessarily lie along a line parallel to any one of
the coordinate axes.
The default 3D polygon object is uniform in type with a triangular base and a Height of 0.2 m. To
modify the position of any polygon vertex, either select its name (for example, vert 1 or low 2) in the
vertex list and modify its x, y, and z coordinate values to the left of the vertex list, or select and move
its point in the graphics window using the mouse.
Note:
The mouse operations for a 3D polygon object in the graphics window do not restrict
you from specifying vertices that render the top and bottom sides of the object non-
parallel. However, ANSYS Icepak’s meshing procedures are not designed to mesh such
shapes. To prevent the accidental creation of an unmeshable 3D polygon object, restrict
allowable point movement in the graphics window (using the Motion allowed toggle
buttons in the Interactive editing panel as described in Repositioning an Object (p. 292))
before selecting and moving the polygon vertices.
9.18.1. Prism Objects

A prism object (Figure 9.36: Definition of a Prism Object (p. 323)) has its sides aligned with the three
coordinate planes. Its location is defined by the coordinates of the lower left front corner, referred
to as the object starting point (xS, yS, zS), and the upper right corner, referred to as the object ending
point (xE, yE, zE).
Figure 9.36: Definition of a Prism Object
Prism geometries are available for the following objects:
• blocks
• sources
• resistances
To specify an object in the shape of a prism, select Prism in the Shape drop-down list in the Object
panel. The user inputs for a prism are shown below.
Under Specify by, select Start/end and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end
coordinates (xE, yE, zE) of the prism object, or select Start/length and enter values for the start co-
ordinates (xS, yS, zS) and lengths of the sides (xL, yL, and zL) of the prism object.
9.18.2. Cylindrical Objects

Cylindrical objects can be specified as uniform or non-uniform. A uniform cylindrical object (Fig-
ure 9.37: Definition of a Uniform Cylindrical Object (p. 324)) has a constant radius throughout the
Building a Model
height of the object, and can be described by its Radius, Height, the plane in which its base lies (Y-Z,
X-Z, or X-Y), and the location of the center of its base (xC, yC, zC).
Figure 9.37: Definition of a Uniform Cylindrical Object
A non-uniform cylindrical object (Figure 9.38: Definition of a Non-Uniform Cylindrical Object (p. 325))
has a radius that varies linearly with object height, and can be described by the parameters specified
for a uniform cylinder and by the radius of the top of the cylinder (the side not located on the base
plane).
Figure 9.38: Definition of a Non-Uniform Cylindrical Object
Concentric cylinders are defined by the plane in which the circular base lies (X-Y, Y-Z, or X-Z), the
outer radius of the cylinder (Radius), the inner radius (Int Radius), the coordinates of the center of
the base (xC, yC, zC), and the height of the cylinder. Additionally, the Nonuniform radius option
can be enabled so that the cylinder can have varying radius along the length of its internal or external
surfaces. The direction of increasing height is the normal direction to the specified plane. For example,
if the circular base lies in the X-Z plane, the height will increase in the direction.
Cylindrical geometries are available for the following objects:
• blocks
• sources
• resistances
To specify an object in the shape of a cylinder, select Cylinder in the Shape drop-down list in the
Object panel. The user inputs for a cylinder are shown below.
Building a Model
For a uniform cylinder, specify the plane in which the base lies by selecting Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y in the
Plane drop-down list. Under Location, specify the Radius, the Height (which can be negative), and
the location of the center of the base (xC, yC, zC). For concentric cylinders, you should also specify
a value for the inner radius (Int Radius).
For a non-uniform cylinder (an object in the shape of a truncated cone), select Nonuniform radius
and specify the plane in which the base lies by selecting Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y in the Plane drop-down
list. Under Location, specify the Radius at the bottom of the cylinder, the radius (Radius 2) at the
top of the cylinder (the circle not located on the base plane), the Height, and the location of the
center of the base (xC, yC, zC). For concentric cylinders, you should also specify a value for the inner
radius at the bottom of the cylinder (Int Radius) and the inner radius at the top of the cylinder (Int
Radius 2).
9.18.3. Ellipsoid Objects

Ellipsoid objects are defined by a bounding box, just like a prism, and a set of flags that indicate
whether each octant should be turned on or off. Any one or more of the eight octants can be activated
or deactivated. The object is defined by the number of octants used as well as the actual dimensions
specified by xS, xE, yS, yE, zS, and zE. The octants can be activated or deactivated using the xyz,
Xyz, xYz, XYz, xyZ, XyZ, xYZ, and XYZ check boxes. The naming scheme follows the convention
where, if the character is lowercase, then it activates the lower half, and if it is uppercase, then it ac-
tivates the upper half.
Note:
Ellipsoids can be meshed only with the hex-dominant mesher (see Guidelines for Mesh
Generation (p. 776)).
Ellipsoid geometries are available only for blocks and sources.
To specify an object in the shape of an ellipsoid, select Ellipsoid in the Shape drop-down list in the
Object panel. The user inputs for an ellipsoid are shown below.
Under Location, specify the dimensions of the object (xS, xE, yS, yE, zS, zE). Under Corners, activate
or deactivate octants by selecting or deselecting xyz, Xyz, xYz, XYz, xyZ, XyZ, xYZ, or XYZ. The
naming scheme follows the convention where, if the character is lowercase, then it activates the lower
half, and if it is uppercase, then it activates the upper half.
9.18.4. Elliptical Cylinder Objects

Elliptical cylinders (E. cylinder) are defined with four quadrants. The two centers are specified by X,
Y, Z for the bottom center point (Bot cent), and X, Y, Z for the top center (Top cent), as shown in
Figure 9.39: Nomenclature for Simplified Elliptical Cylinders (p. 328) and Figure 9.40: Nomenclature for
Detailed Elliptical Cylinders (p. 329). Each center has two vectors that should be perpendicular, which
define the two end caps of the cylinder. The four vectors are named Bot vec 1 and Bot vec 2 for the
low center (Bot cent), and Top vec 1 and Top vec 2 for the high center (Top cent). One or more of
the quadrants can be activated or deactivated using the check buttons -1 -2, -1 +2, +1 -2, and +1
+2. Here, -1 -2 is the quadrant between the vectors -Bot vec 1 and -Bot vec 2, -1 +2 is the quadrant
between the vectors -Bot vec 1 and Bot vec 2, +1 -2 is the quadrant between the vectors Bot vec
1 and -Bot vec 2, and +1 +2 is the quadrant between the vectors Bot vec 1 and Bot vec 2.
Building a Model
Figure 9.39: Nomenclature for Simplified Elliptical Cylinders
Figure 9.40: Nomenclature for Detailed Elliptical Cylinders
Elliptical cylinder geometries are available only for blocks and sources.
To specify an object in the shape of an elliptical cylinder, select E. cylinder in the Shape drop-down
list in the Object panel. The user inputs for an elliptical cylinder are shown below.
Building a Model
Specify X, Y, Z for the bottom center point (Bot cent), and X, Y, Z for the top center point (Top cent).
The Simplified specification option enables you to define a cylinder with circular end caps of variable
radius and also enables you to define tube-like geometry. For the Simplified specification, specify
the Bot radius and Bot int radius for the bottom end cap, and the Top radius and Top int radius
for the top end cap.
The Detailed specification enables you to define an elliptical cylinder with non-parallel end caps,
because the vectors can encompass all three coordinate directions. For the Detailed specification,
specify perpendicular vectors for the bottom center (Bot vec 1 and Bot vec 2) and for the top center
(Top vec 1 and Top vec 2).
When you have specified the necessary radii or vectors, activate or deactivate quadrants by selecting
or deselecting -1 -2, -1 +2, +1 -2, and +1 +2 next to Corners. For the Detailed specification, -1 -2
is the quadrant between the vectors -Bot vec 1 and -Bot vec 2, -1 +2 is the quadrant between the
vectors -Bot vec 1 and Bot vec 2, +1 -2 is the quadrant between the vectors Bot vec 1 and -Bot vec
2, and +1 +2 is the quadrant between the vectors Bot vec 1 and Bot vec 2. For the Simplified spe-
cification, the four quadrants (Corners) are defined in the same way as for a detailed elliptical cylinder
if you imagine that setting a value for the Bot radius is equivalent to setting Bot vec 1 and Bot vec
2 to be the same length and in the same plane.
9.18.5. CAD Objects

CAD objects are directly imported using CAD Block import feature. CAD objects can possess the most
general 2D (Figure 9.41: 2D CAD Object (p. 331)) and 3D (Figure 9.42: 3D CAD Object (p. 332)) shapes.
The geometry of a CAD object cannot be specified or modified in ANSYS Icepak. As such, any changes
to the shape of the object must be made in the CAD tool before being exported.
Note:
Step export for CAD geometries is not supported.
Figure 9.41: 2D CAD Object
Building a Model
Figure 9.42: 3D CAD Object
Note:
CAD geometries are available only for blocks, plates, openings, grilles, walls, sources,
and fans. For a CAD block object, you can specify the Origin and Axis of the CAD
geometry. The Origin and Axis are used to define the MRF properties when appropri-
ate.
Note:
Heat flow reporting for CAD objects specify the total heat flow for an object. Heat
flow for individual sides is not computed.
9.18.6. Physical Characteristics

ANSYS Icepak enables you to specify the physical characteristics of an object in the Object panel (for
example, Figure 9.15: Example of an Object Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 288)). The physical characteristics
are specific to the type of object being configured. For example, the Object panel for printed circuit
boards enables you to specify whether there is a rack of boards, and, if so, how many boards are in
the rack. Also, you can specify the number and height of components on each side of the board, as
well as physical properties for each side. Thermal characteristics of an object are also specified in the
Object panel.
Grouping Objects
Specific information on the use of the individual Object panels appears in Adding Objects to the
Model (p. 333) within the discussion of each object type.
9.19. Adding Objects to the Model

Adding an object to your model is more complicated than defining a cabinet, because, in addition to
specifying dimensions, you must also assign physical properties, describe the components of some
objects, and configure the object within the model.
Basic objects, including PCBs, fans, grilles, and walls, are available in pre-constructed forms that you
can edit to your specifications. More general kinds of objects, such as blocks, openings, sources, and
resistances, are also provided in pre-constructed forms that you can customize into any object you
might need in your model.
The first step in the process of adding an object to your model is to select the object type in the Object
creation toolbar (Figure 9.1: The Object Creation Toolbar (p. 274)). Once you have selected an object,
you can edit its dimensions, specify its physical characteristics, and choose whether to make it an active
or inactive part of the model. You can also move it and position it precisely in the model or make
multiple copies of it elsewhere in the model.
The basic steps for adding an object to your model are as follows:
1. Create the object.
2. Change the description of the object.
3. Change the graphical style of the object (optional).
4. Specify the geometry, position, and size of the object.
5. Specify the type of the object (if relevant).
6. Specify the physical and thermal characteristics of the object.
The objects available for your ANSYS Icepak model are described in detail in Networks (p. 373) -- Pack-
ages (p. 585).
9.20. Grouping Objects

ANSYS Icepak enables you to group objects in your model. Groups can be used for several purposes,
including the following:
• defining a set of objects as a single design element so that you can use it repeatedly in a series of models
• modifying the properties of like objects
• designating a collection of objects as a set to test one part of the model independently from the whole
model
• moving several objects simultaneously
• grouping objects together for postprocessing purposes
Building a Model
• turning defined sets of objects on and off at your discretion
Groups can be easily activated and deactivated, enabling you to control the parts of your model at a
subassembly level by selecting the objects that are to be included in the current analysis. Groups can
be copied or moved within the model using a variety of geometric transformations. ANSYS Icepak enables
you to copy the properties of one object to a collection of objects of the same type in a single operation.
You can use the Groups node in the Model manager window (Figure 9.43: The Groups Node in the
Model manager Window (p. 334)) to create and configure groups within your ANSYS Icepak model.
Figure 9.43: The Groups Node in the Model manager Window
The procedures for creating and configuring groups are described in the following sections.
9.20.1. Creating a Group

To create a new group, double-click the Groups node in the Model manager window (Figure 9.43: The
Groups Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) or select Create in the object menu. The new
group node will be added under the Groups node. It will not contain any objects until you add them
to it, as described in Adding Objects to a Group (p. 336).
Alternatively, you can use the Control and Shift keys in combination with the mouse to select multiple
objects in the Model manager window (see Using the Mouse in the Model manager Window (p. 111)).
To create a group from the selected items, right-click one of the items and select Create and Group
in the drop-down menu. In the resulting Create group dialog box (Figure 9.44: The Create group
Panel (p. 334)), enter a name and click Done.
Figure 9.44: The Create group Panel
ANSYS Icepak will create a new group with the default name group.n, where n is the next sequential
number among numbered groups. The Groups node lists the groups that already exist in the current
model. Selecting a group in this list and expanding the node will display the list of objects it contains.
Grouping Objects
9.20.2. Renaming a Group

To rename an existing group, right-click the group node in the Model manager window (Fig-
ure 9.43: The Groups Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) and select Rename in the drop-
down menu. In the resulting Rename group dialog box (Figure 9.45: The Rename group Panel (p. 335)),
enter a new name and click Done.
Figure 9.45: The Rename group Panel
9.20.3. Changing the Graphical Style of a Group

ANSYS Icepak enables you to change the display of a group in the graphics window. You can change
the shading, color, and line width of the group in the Group parameters panel (Figure 9.46: The
Group parameters Panel (p. 335)).
To open the Group parameters panel, right-click on the group node in the Model manager window
(Figure 9.43: The Groups Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) and select Edit in the drop-
down menu.
Figure 9.46: The Group parameters Panel
Changing the Color

To change the color of a group, turn on the Color option in the Group parameters panel and click
on the square button to the right of the Color text option. A color palette menu will open. See
Modifying the Graphical Style of the Cabinet (p. 284) for details about selecting colors. Click Accept
in the Group parameters panel to change the color of the group in the graphics window.
Building a Model
Changing the Line Width

To change the width of the lines for a group, turn on the Linewidth option and select a line width
(1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) from the drop-down list. Click Accept in the Group parameters panel to change the
line width of the group in the graphics window.
Changing the Shading

To change the shading of a group, turn on the Shading option in the Group parameters panel and
select a shading type (View, Wire, Solid, Solid/wire, Hidden line, or Invisible) from the drop-down
list. Click Accept in the Group parameters panel to change the shading of the group in the graphics
window.
Note that the type of shading that will be applied to the group when View is selected is taken from
the Shading submenu in the View menu, described in The View Menu (p. 61).
Changing the Texture

The surface texture of a group can be modified when Solid or Solid/wire has been selected in the
Shading drop-down list. The default texture option is No texture. To modify the texture, turn on the
Texture option in the Group parameters panel. Select Load from file, and then select an available
PPM image file in the resulting File selection dialog box (see File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98)).
Depending on its pixel size, the image, or a portion thereof, will be used to cover each side of the
object. To change the size of the image used for the texture, specify a value for the Texture scale.
Values greater than 1.0 will reduce the size of the image on each side of the object, resulting in a
tiling effect at large enough values. Values less than 1.0 will increase the size of the image on each
side of the object.
Changing the Transparency

The transparency of a group can be modified by turning on the Transparency option and moving
the slider bar between values of 0.00 (opaque) and 0.99 (fully transparent). This option is most useful
when Solid has been selected in the Shading drop-down list.
9.20.4. Adding Objects to a Group

To add an object to a group, right-click the group node in the Model manager window (Fig-
ure 9.43: The Groups Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) and select Add in the drop-down
menu.
There are three ways to add objects to a group using these menus:
• Screen select adds individually selected objects to a group. To add an object to a group, select Screen
select and then use the Shift key and the left mouse button to select the object you want to add to the
group in the graphics window. To deactivate the Screen select mode, press the Shift key and click the
middle mouse button or the right mouse button in the graphics window.
• Screen region adds objects to a group based on their location in the model. This option enables you to
add all objects in an entire region of the model to a group. To add objects, select Screen region and then
select the objects in the model to be added to the group by defining a rectangular box on the screen.
Position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area where the objects to be included are located, hold
Grouping Objects
down the left mouse button and drag open a selection box to enclose the objects to be included, and
then release the mouse button. The objects within the bounded area will be added to the currently-selected
group.
• Name/pattern adds any object whose name matches a specified text pattern to a group. To add an object,
select Name/pattern. This opens a Add by name/pattern dialog box (Figure 9.47: The Add by
name/pattern Panel (p. 337)).
Figure 9.47: The Add by name/pattern Panel
You can type an object name that contains an asterisk or a question mark in place of characters
or a character, respectively. For example, typing fan* will add all objects whose names start with
fan to the group; typing vent? will add all objects whose names consist of the word vent plus
one character to the group. Any object in the model whose name matches this text pattern will
be added to the group when you click Done in the Add by name/pattern dialog box.
You can also add an object to a group by typing the name of the group in the Groups text entry
box in the Object panel (see Assigning an Object to a Group (p. 310)).
9.20.5. Removing Objects From a Group

To remove an object from a group, right-click the group node in the Model manager window (Fig-
ure 9.43: The Groups Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) and select Remove in the drop-
down menu.
There are three ways to remove objects from a group using these menus. For all methods, the object(s)
will be removed only from the group, not from the model.
• Screen select removes individually selected objects from an existing group. To remove an object from a
group, select Screen select and use the Shift key and the left mouse button to select the object you want
to remove from the group in the graphics window. To deactivate the Screen select mode, press the Shift
key and click the middle mouse button or the right mouse button in the graphics window.
• Screen region removes objects from a group based on their location in the model. This option enables
you to remove all objects in an entire region of the model from a group. To remove an object, select
Screen region and then select the objects in the model to be removed from the group by defining a
rectangular box on the screen. Position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area where the objects to
be removed are located, hold down the left mouse button and drag open a selection box to enclose the
objects to be removed, and then release the mouse button. The objects within the bounded area will be
removed from the currently-selected group.
• Name/pattern removes any object whose name matches a specified text pattern from a group. To remove
an object, select Name/pattern. This will open a Remove by name/pattern dialog box (Figure 9.48: The
Remove by name/pattern Panel (p. 338)).
Building a Model
Figure 9.48: The Remove by name/pattern Panel
You can type an object name that contains an asterisk or a question mark in place of characters
or a character, respectively. For example, typing source* will remove all objects whose names
start with source from the group; typing vent? will remove all objects whose names consist
of the word vent plus one character from the group. Any object in the model whose name matches
this text pattern will be removed from the group when you click Done in the Remove by
name/pattern dialog box.
Note that you can also remove an object from a group by right-clicking on the object name under
the specific group node in the Model manager window and selecting Remove from group at the
bottom of the drop-down menu.
9.20.6. Copying Groups

You can access these items using the Model manager window by right-clicking on the specific group
node and selecting Copy group or Copy params in the drop-down menu.
9.20.7. Moving a Group

To move a group, right-click the group node in the Model manager window (Figure 9.43: The Groups
Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) and select Copy in the drop-down menu. This opens
the Move group panel. You can apply various transformations to the group. The operations in the
Move group panel are the same as those in the Move all objects in model panel (Figure 9.9: The
Move all objects in model Panel (p. 279)). The Scale option is described in Resizing the Cabinet (p. 276),
and the Mirror, Rotate, and Translate options are described in Repositioning the Cabinet (p. 280)
and Repositioning an Object (p. 292).
You can also move a group using the mouse by selecting the group in the Model manager window,
holding down the Shift key and dragging the group with the middle mouse button in the graphics
window.
9.20.8. Editing the Properties of Like Objects in a Group

You can edit the properties of like objects simultaneously within a group. Note that the objects in
the group must be of the same type (for example, all blocks), and you cannot change the geometry
of the objects. To edit the properties of like objects in a group, right-click on the group under the
Groups node in the Model manager window and select Edit objects in the drop-down menu. This
will open the Object panel (for example, the Blocks panel if the group contains blocks) and display
the properties of the selected objects. You can edit any properties of the objects that are not grayed
out in the Object panel. Click Done when you have finished editing the objects. ANSYS Icepak will
close the Object panel and apply the changes to all the objects in the group. You can check the
Material Properties
changes that ANSYS Icepak has made to the objects in the group by viewing the properties of the
objects in the Parameter summary panel, described in Object and Material Summaries (p. 368).
9.20.9. Deleting a Group

You can access these items in the Model manager window by right-clicking on the specific group
node and selecting Delete or Delete all in the drop-down menu.
9.20.10. Activating or Deactivating a Group

You can access these items using the Model manager window by right-clicking on the specific group
node and selecting Activate all or Deactivate all in the drop-down menu.
9.20.11. Using a Group to Create an Assembly

To create an assembly using a group, right-click the group node in the Model manager window
(Figure 9.43: The Groups Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) and select Create assembly
in the drop-down menu. See Custom Assemblies (p. 357) for information on assemblies.
9.20.12. Saving a Group as a Project

To save a group of objects as a separate project (model), right-click on the group node in the Model
manager window (Figure 9.43: The Groups Node in the Model manager Window (p. 334)) and select
Save as project in the drop-down menu. (See Saving a Project File (p. 149) for information on the
Save project panel.) You can save the project containing the group to any directory, but it is recom-
mended that you create a local groups directory where you can save all the groups you create.
9.21. Material Properties

An important step in the setup of your model is the definition of the physical properties of the materials.
Material properties are defined in the Materials panel, which enables you to input values for the
properties that are relevant to the problem you have defined in ANSYS Icepak. These properties can
include the following:
• Density and/or molecular weights
• Viscosity
• Specific heat capacity
• Thermal conductivity
• Diffusivity
• Volumetric expansion coefficient
• Surface roughness
• Emissivity
• Solar behavior
Building a Model
• Solar and diffuse absorptance and transmittance
Materials can be defined from scratch, or they can be used directly from the ANSYS Icepak material
property database. You can select the fluid, solid, or surface material for individual objects by selecting
the material in the drop-down list in the panel related to that object. For example, to change the solid
material for a solid block from default (Al-Extruded) to Al-Pure follow the steps below:
1. Open the list of available materials for Solid material in the Blocks panel.
2. Select Al-Pure in the materials drop-down list.
You can view material properties by holding the mouse over the name of the material and the material
properties will be displayed in a highlighted list as shown in the figure below.
Tip:
Double-click any material specification field to bring up the respective material selection
panel (Figure 9.49: Material Selection Panel (p. 341)). You can type a material name in the
material selection panel to display materials matching your search query. The figure below
shows “Water” typed into the search field and the matching materials that result. Note that
you can access this search for any type of material specification field, such as Solid material,
Surface material, Fluid material, and so on. This panel is also accessible in the Materials
node under the Main library node.
Material Properties
Figure 9.49: Material Selection Panel
Some properties may be temperature-dependent, and ANSYS Icepak enables you to define a property
as:
• a constant value
• a linear function of temperature
• a piecewise-linear function of temperature, described as a series of points defining the property variation.
These points can be described in two ways:
– using the graph editor
– specifying points as coordinate pairs
You can also define the thermal conductivity of a fluid to be velocity-dependent, if required.
9.21.1. Using the Materials Library and the Materials Panel

You will use the Materials library node in the Library tab of the Model manager window and the
Materials panel to define materials within your ANSYS Icepak model.
Libraries Main library Materials
Building a Model
Figure 9.50: The Materials Node in the Library Tab of the Model manager Window
The Materials library node in the Library tab of the Model manager window works in conjunction
with the Materials panel. The Materials panel enables you to edit the physical characteristics of the
material selected under the Materials library node. The Materials panel will have different inputs
depending on the material selected.
9.21.2. Editing an Existing Material

A common operation that you will perform with the Materials panel is the modification of an existing
material. Items in the Materials library, themselves, cannot be edited. Instead, you can create a copy
of an existing material for use in your model and then edit the copy.
The steps for this procedure are as follows:
Material Properties
1. Expand the node for the type of the material (for example, Fluid, Solid, Surface) in the Project tab of
the Model manager window. Expand the node for the sub-type of the material (for example, Immersion
fluids in Figure 9.50: The Materials Node in the Library Tab of the Model manager Window (p. 342)) and
select the material item under the sub-type node. Right-click on the material item and select Edit in the
drop-down menu to open the Materials panel. You can also open the Materials panel by selecting the
material item in the Project tab of the Model manager window and clicking on the button in the
Object modification toolbar. Figure 9.51: The Materials Panel for a Solid Material (Properties Tab) (p. 343)
shows the Materials panel for a solid material.
Figure 9.51: The Materials Panel for a Solid Material (Properties Tab)
The Material type and the Sub-type for the material will be displayed in the Properties tab of
the Materials panel. The lower part of the panel will change depending on your selection of
material type.
2. Change the name of the material, if required. The name of the currently selected material is displayed
in the Name text entry box in the Info tab of the Materials panel. You can change the name of the ma-
terial by entering a new name in the Name text entry field.
Alternatively, you can rename a material using the Model manager window. Right-click the ma-
terial item and select Rename in the drop-down menu. In the subsequent Rename object dialog
box, enter a new name in the text entry field and click Done.
Building a Model
3. In the Properties tab, specify whether you want to fix the values for the units in the panel. See The Fix
values Option (p. 219) for details.
4. Define the properties of the material. The properties for different types of materials are described below.
5. Click Update to save the changes to the material for the current project and keep the Materials panel
open, or click Done to save the changes to the material for the current project and close the Materials
panel.
You can also edit the definition of a material in any panel that contains a materials list. For example,
the Walls panel contains a list called the External material list. To edit the properties of the material
selected in the External material list, open the list and select Edit definition. This will open the
Materials panel and display the properties of the selected material. You can edit the definition of
the material as described above. Click Done when you have finished editing the material, and ANSYS
Icepak will close the Materials panel and return to the Walls panel.
Note:
Any changes you make to the materials in the current project will be saved as part
of the current project only. These changes will be available whenever you work on
this project, but not for any other project. See Saving Materials and Properties (p. 350)
for details on saving material properties to a library.
Editing a Solid Material

The inputs for editing a solid material are shown in Figure 9.51: The Materials Panel for a Solid Mater-
ial (Properties Tab) (p. 343). The following properties are defined for solid materials:
• Density is the density of the solid.
• Specific heat is the specific heat capacity of the solid. To define specific heat enable the check box next
to the input box and click the adjacent Edit button. This will open the Solid specific heat panel. For details,
refer to Defining Properties Using Temperature-Dependent Functions (p. 353).
• Conductivity is the thermal conductivity of the solid. To define conductivity enable the check box next
to the input box and click the adjacent Edit button. This will open the Solid conductivity panel. For details,
refer to Defining Properties Using Temperature-Dependent Functions (p. 353).
• Conductivity type contains a list of options for specifying the thermal conductivity. To specify an isotropic
conductivity, select Isotropic from the Conductivity type drop-down list and enter a value for the Con-
ductivity. You can specify a non-isotropic conductivity in ANSYS Icepak, where the thermal conductivity
varies with respect to one or more coordinate axes. There are four non-isotropic conductivity options
available in ANSYS Icepak:
– To define an orthotropic thermal conductivity, select Orthotropic from the Conductivity type drop-
down list and specify the thermal Conductivity. To define the degree to which the orthotropic conduct-
ivity varies in each coordinate direction, specify a scaling factor for the conductivity in each of the X,
Y, and Z coordinate directions. The solid conductivity for each coordinate direction can be defined as
a temperature-dependent function by enabling the check box next to the input box and clicking the
adjacent Edit button. For details refer to Defining Properties Using Temperature-Dependent Func-
tions (p. 353).
Material Properties
– To specify an anisotropic thermal conductivity, specify the thermal Conductivity and then select An-
isotropic from the Conductivity type drop-down list. To define the degree to which the anisotropic
conductivity varies in each direction, specify a scaling factor for the conductivity in each of the XX, XY,
XZ, YX, YY, YZ, ZX, ZY, and ZZ directions, respectively, next to Tensor. Alternatively, you can click the
Edit button to the right of the Tensor text entry field. This opens the Anisotropic tensor panel (Fig-
ure 9.52: The Anisotropic tensor Panel (p. 345)).
Figure 9.52: The Anisotropic tensor Panel
Enter the scaling factors for the conductivity in the following way in the Anisotropic tensor
panel:
(9.1)
– To specify a biaxial thermal conductivity, select Biaxial from the Conductivity type drop-down list
and specify the thermal Conductivity. To define the degree to which the biaxial conductivity varies in
each direction, specify a scaling factor for the conductivity in the Normal and In-plane directions.
– To specify a cylindrical orthotropic conductivity, select Cyl-Orthotropic from the Conductivity type
drop-down list. To define the degree to which the cylindrical orthotropic varies in direction, specify a
scaling factor for the conductivity in each direction. Enter values for z (axial), r (radial), and Θ (tangential).
Click on Origin and Axis to set and be referenced by all objects. To change the global coordinate in-
formation, click the Edit button next to Origin or Axis. When Origin or Axis is not enabled, Icepak
automatically uses coordinate information from corresponding objects.
The thermal conductivity is used when temperature is included in the problem (see Solution Vari-
ables (p. 252)). When modeling a transient problem, density and specific heat will also be used. See
Transient Simulations (p. 627) for details on transient simulations.
Editing a Fluid Material

The inputs for editing a fluid material are shown in Figure 9.53: The Materials Panel for a Fluid Mater-
ial (p. 346).
Building a Model
Figure 9.53: The Materials Panel for a Fluid Material
The following properties are defined for fluid materials:
• Vol. expansion is the volumetric expansion coefficient of the fluid.
• Viscosity is the fluid dynamic viscosity.
• Density is the fluid density.
• Specific heat is the specific heat capacity of the fluid.
• Radiation behavior specifies whether the material is Opaque or will Participate in the radiation calculation
when assigned to an object. When Participate is selected, click Edit to open the Solid radiation properties
panel and specify the Asborption coefficient, Scattering coefficient, and Refractive index. Asborption
coefficient and Scattering coefficient specify the change in radiation intensity per unit length along the
path through the material. Refractive index specifies the ratio of speed of light in the material to the
speed of light in vacuum.
Material Properties
Figure 9.54: The Fluid Radiation Properties Panel
• Conductivity is the thermal conductivity of the fluid (which can be velocity- or temperature-dependent).
• Diffusivity is the diffusivity of the fluid.
• Molecular weight is the molecular weight of the fluid.
The density and viscosity of the fluid are used in all flow problems, but ANSYS Icepak automatically
sets an effective viscosity when the flow is turbulent, as described in Flow Regime (p. 255). The thermal
conductivity and specific heat are used when temperature is included in the problem (see Flow,
Temperature and Species Variables (p. 253)). Again, ANSYS Icepak automatically sets an effective con-
ductivity when the flow is turbulent. The volumetric expansion coefficient of the fluid is used when
natural convection due to gravity effects is present (see Forced- or Natural-Convection Effects (p. 257)).
If gravity is not activated, the volumetric expansion coefficient is not used. By default, ANSYS Ice-
pak uses the Boussinesq approximation (see The Boussinesq Model (p. 980)) to model the buoyancy
force and in this case ANSYS Icepak uses a constant density in its calculations. If you select the ideal
gas law to model the buoyancy force, ANSYS Icepak uses a density that varies as as described in
Incompressible Ideal Gas Law (p. 980).
Note:
If you use the ideal gas law and you have created a new fluid material, make sure that you
specify the correct molecular weight for the new material.
Editing a Surface Material

The inputs for editing a surface material are shown in Figure 9.55: The Materials Panel for a Surface
Material (p. 348).
Building a Model
Figure 9.55: The Materials Panel for a Surface Material
The following properties are defined for surface materials:
• Flow properties
– Roughness is the roughness of the entire surface, where zero represents a perfectly smooth surface.
• Radiation properties
– Emissivity is the emissivity of the surface.
– Diffuse fraction is the fraction of reflected radiation flux that is to be treated as diffuse. The default
setting is 1, indicating that all of the radiation is diffuse. A diffuse fraction equal to 0 indicates purely
spectral reflected radiation. A diffuse fraction between 0 and 1 indicates partially diffuse and partially
specular reflected energy.
– Radiation behavior specifies the solar classification of a material. Opaque and Semi-transparent are
the two available options.
• Solar properties
– Absorptance-normal incidence is the fraction of direct solar irradiation energy that is absorbed by
the semi-transparent surface for a direct solar irradiation beam normal to the surface.
Material Properties
– Transmittance-normal incidence is the fraction of direct solar irradiation energy that passes through
the semi-transparent surface for a direct solar irradiation beam normal to the surface.
– Hemispherical diffuse absorptance is the fraction of diffuse solar irradiation energy that is absorbed
by the semi-transparent surface.
– Hemispherical diffuse transmittance is the fraction of diffuse solar irradiation energy that passes
through the semi-transparent surface.
The roughness of the surface is used when the flow is turbulent, as described in Flow Regime (p. 255).
The emissivity is used when radiation is modeled (see Radiation Modeling (p. 665)). Solar and diffuse
absorptance and transmittance properties are used when solar loading is modeled (see Modeling
Solar Radiation Effects (p. 263)). Properties of semi-transparent surface radiation account for its solar
performance relative to direct solar irradiation and diffuse solar irradiation. One semi-transparent
surface material may be used to represent the lumped effect of fenestration containing several glazing
layers. For any semi-transparent surface, the sum of absorptance, transmittance, and reflectance must
equal 1 for each type of solar irradiation. Therefore, it is sufficient to specify only two of the three
solar performance properties for each type of radiation.
9.21.3. Viewing the Properties of a Material

You can view the properties of a material using any panel that contains a materials list. For example,
the Walls panel contains a list called the Solid material list. To view the properties of the material
selected in the Solid material list, open the list and select View definition.
The Message window will report the properties of the material, for example, for when the library
material eGRAF_SPREAD_SS300 is assigned to an object in the Solid material list:
Material name: "eGRAF_SPREAD_SS300", type solid, subtype

Heat_Spreaders
Density =1360.0 kg/m3
Specific heat = 711.0 J/Kg-K
Conductivity type = Orthotropic
K_X = 300.0 W/m-k K_Y = 300.0 W/m-k K_Z = 4.5 W/m-k
9.21.4. Copying a Material

To copy a material, right-click the material item in the Model manager window and select Copy in
the drop-down menu. You can also copy a material by selecting the material item in the Model
manager window and clicking on the button. A new material will be created under the Model
node (Figure 9.56: The Materials Node under the Model Node (p. 350)) with the name of the material
that you have copied and the suffix .1. For example, if you make a copy of the solid material Freon-
TF, the new material will have the default name Freon-TF.1. The properties of the new material are
the same as the properties of the material that was copied. The properties of the new material can
be edited as described in Editing an Existing Material (p. 342).
Building a Model
Figure 9.56: The Materials Node under the Model Node
Note:
Any changes you make to the materials in the current project will be saved as part of the
current project only. These changes will be available whenever you work on this project,
but not for any other project. See Saving Materials and Properties (p. 350) for details on
saving material properties to a library.
9.21.5. Creating a New Material
To create a new material, click the button in the Object creation toolbar. A new material will
be created with the default name material.n, where n is the next sequential number among numbered
materials. The name of the new material will appear under the Model node in the Model manager
window (Figure 9.56: The Materials Node under the Model Node (p. 350)) and in the Name text entry
box in the Materials panel. See Editing an Existing Material (p. 342) for details on renaming a material.
You can also create a new material in any panel that contains a materials list. For example, the Walls
panel contains a list called the External material list. To create a new material, open the External
material list and select Create material. This will open the Materials panel and create a material
called wall.1 ext_material in this example. You can rename and edit the material using the
Materials panel. Click Done when you have finished editing the material, and ANSYS Icepak will close
the Materials panel and return to the Walls panel.
Note:
Any changes you make to the materials in the current project will be saved as part of the
current project only. These changes will be available whenever you work on this project,
but not for any other project. See Saving Materials and Properties (p. 350) for details on
saving material properties to a library.
9.21.6. Saving Materials and Properties

By default, ANSYS Icepak searches for the materials file that is provided with the standard ANSYS
Icepak distribution. This file includes a large collection of material definitions that are available to all
ANSYS Icepak users. It is located in the ICEPAK_ROOT/icepak_lib directory and is called the
materials file. Different materials files can be accessed using different libraries. If you wish to
modify the properties of materials that are included with ANSYS Icepak, there are two ways to do
this:
Material Properties
• create a new library and copy materials to the library
• copy materials from the main library into the model
You can access as many different materials files as you like. Note that all the materials files must have
the same name (materials), and so must be located in different directories.
When you use the Model manager window or the Materials panel to create, modify, or delete an
existing material, these modifications are saved as part of the current project only. These changes
will be available whenever you work on this project, but not for any other project.
To create a new library of materials, you have two options:
• Create your own local materials file using the following procedure:
1. Select Create material library in the Model menu.
Model Create material library
2. Select all the materials that you want to save from the list in the Selection panel (Figure 9.57: The Se-
lection Panel for Saving Materials (p. 351)). Click All if you want to select all the materials in the list.
Click None to deselect all of the materials in the list.
3. Click Done when you have finished selecting the materials to be saved. This will open the File selection
dialog box, in which you can specify the filename (materials) and directory to which the materials
file is to be saved. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details about the file selection dialog box.
Figure 9.57: The Selection Panel for Saving Materials
Building a Model
To use the new materials file, add the path for the materials file to the list of library paths in
the Library path panel so that the new and edited materials can be made available for all your
ANSYS Icepak projects. See Editing the Library Paths (p. 241) for details.
This enables you to create new materials or edit previously defined materials using the Materials
panel. If a material is defined in the global materials file and also in a user-defined file, ANSYS Ice-
pak will take the definition of the material from the first file that it loads and will ignore any sub-
sequent redefinitions of the material. The order in which the files are loaded is the same as the
order in which they are specified in the Library path panel (see Editing the Library Paths (p. 241)).
• Create a new library using the Library path panel as described in Editing the Library Paths (p. 241).
Once you have created a new library, the name of the library will appear under the Libraries node
in the Library tab of the Model manager window. To add new or previously-defined materials to
a new library, select the material item and drag it into the new library node. This will create a new
materials file. If you drag any new materials into the same library, the materials file will be ap-
pended with the new materials.
9.21.7. Deleting a Material

If there are materials in your local materials library that you no longer need, you can easily delete
them. Select the material under the Materials (or Model) node and click the button in the Object
modification toolbar or click Delete in the Materials panel (for example, Figure 9.51: The Materials
Panel for a Solid Material (Properties Tab) (p. 343)). The selected material will be removed from your
model.
9.21.8. Defining Properties Using Velocity-Dependent Functions

You can define the thermal conductivity of a fluid in ANSYS Icepak to be a function of velocity. The
thermal conductivity of a fluid can be defined using a power law form:
(9.2)
where k is the thermal conductivity of the fluid, v is the velocity, and C and n are constants.
To define the thermal conductivity of the fluid as velocity-dependent, enable the check box next to
Conductivity and click the adjacent Edit button for a fluid material in the Materials panel. This will
open the Fluid conductivity panel. Select Velocity at the top of the panel (Figure 9.58: The Fluid
conductivity Panel Showing the Velocity-Dependent Inputs (p. 353)).
Material Properties
Figure 9.58: The Fluid conductivity Panel Showing the Velocity-Dependent Inputs
Specify the Coefficient (C in Equation 9.2 (p. 352)) and the Exponent (n in Equation 9.2 (p. 352)) and
click Accept to define the velocity-dependent thermal conductivity of the fluid.
Note:
You must specify these inputs in SI units.
9.21.9. Defining Properties Using Temperature-Dependent Functions

Many material properties in ANSYS Icepak can be defined as functions of temperature. For most
properties, you can define a constant, linear, or curve function of temperature. To define a property
as temperature-dependent, enable the check box next to the property and click the adjacent Edit
button in the Materials panel. This will open the respective parameter panel. Figure 9.59: Example
of a Solid specific heat Panel (p. 353) shows an example of a temperature-dependent parameter panel
(the Solid specific heat panel).
Figure 9.59: Example of a Solid specific heat Panel
Note that if you are defining a temperature-dependent thermal conductivity for a fluid, you will need
to select the Temperature option at the top of the Fluid conductivity panel.
There are three options for specifying the temperature dependence of a parameter:
• Constant enables you to define the property as a constant.
• Linear enables you to define the property in terms of a linear equation:
Building a Model
(9.3)
where v0 is a reference value, C is a constant, and Tref is the reference temperature.
• Piecewise enables you to define the property as a curve consisting of piecewise-continuous line segments.
ANSYS Icepak enables you to describe the curve either by positioning a series of points on a graph using
the Temperature/value curve window or by specifying a list of temperature/value coordinate pairs using
the Curve specification panel. These options are described below.
9.22. Using the Temperature value curve Window

You can specify a piecewise linear variation of a property with temperature using the Temperature/value
curve graphics display and control window (Figure 9.60: The Temperature/value curve Graphics Display
and Control Window (p. 355)). To open the Temperature/value curve window, select Piecewise in the
specific heat parameter panel (Figure 9.59: Example of a Solid specific heat Panel (p. 353)) and select
Graph editor.
Using the Temperature value curve Window
Figure 9.60: The Temperature/value curve Graphics Display and Control Window
The following functions are available for creating, editing, and viewing a curve:
• To create a new point on the curve, click the curve with the middle mouse button.
• To move a point on the curve, hold down the middle mouse button while positioned over the point, and
move the mouse to the new location of the point.
• To delete a point on the curve, click the right mouse button on the point.
• To zoom into an area of the curve, position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area to be zoomed, hold
down the left mouse button and drag open a selection box to the desired size, and then release the mouse
button. The selected area will then fill the Temperature/value curve window, with appropriate changes
Building a Model
to the axes. After you have zoomed into an area of the model, click on Full range to restore the graph to
its original axes and scale.
• To set the minimum and maximum values for the scales on the axes, click Set range. This will open the Set
range panel (Figure 9.61: The Set range Panel (p. 356)).
Figure 9.61: The Set range Panel
Enter values for Min X, Min Y, Max X, and Max Y and enable the check boxes. Click Accept.
• To load a previously defined curve, click Load. This will open the Load curve file selection dialog box. Select
the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on se-
lecting a file.
• To save a curve, click Save. This will open the Save curve dialog box, in which you can specify the filename
and directory to which the curve data is to be saved.
You can use the Print button to print the curve. See Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details on saving
hardcopy files.
Click Done when you have finished creating the curve; this will store the curve and close the Temper-
ature/value curve graphics display and control window. Once the curve is defined, you can view the
pairs of coordinates defining the curve in the Curve specification panel (see Figure 9.62: The Curve
specification Panel (p. 357) for the pairs of coordinates for the curve shown in Figure 9.60: The Temper-
ature/value curve Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 355)).
9.23. Using the Curve specification Panel

You can define a piecewise linear variation of a property with temperature using the Curve specification
panel (Figure 9.62: The Curve specification Panel (p. 357)). To open the Curve specification panel, select
Piecewise in the Temperature dependent parameter panel (Figure 9.59: Example of a Solid specific
heat Panel (p. 353)) and select Text editor from the resulting list.
Custom Assemblies
Figure 9.62: The Curve specification Panel
To define a curve, specify a list of coordinate pairs in the Curve specification panel. It is important to
give the numbers in pairs, but the spacing between numbers is not important. Click Accept when you
have finished entering the pairs of coordinates; this will store the values and close the Curve specific-
ation panel.
Once the pairs of coordinates have been entered, you can view the curve in the Temperature/value
curve graphics display and control window. See Figure 9.60: The Temperature/value curve Graphics
Display and Control Window (p. 355) for the curve for the values shown in Figure 9.62: The Curve spe-
cification Panel (p. 357).
9.24. Custom Assemblies

In thermal management models, it is not uncommon to encounter cases where a given combination
of modeling objects appears in more than one model. It may be necessary, for example, to model the
use of a standard electronic assembly (for example, a power supply) in conjunction with several different
types of cabinets and/or other electronic components. ANSYS Icepak enables you to create the standard
assembly once, and then use it in other models.
Assemblies are collections of ANSYS Icepak objects (for example, PCBs, grilles, fans, blocks) that have
been defined together as a group (see Grouping Objects (p. 333) for information on grouping objects)
and stored as a single unit.
9.24.1. Creating and Adding an Assembly

You can create an assembly to be used in your ANSYS Icepak model using one of the following
methods:
• Create a group containing all the objects that you want to be in the assembly and then create the assembly
from the group. See Grouping Objects (p. 333) for details on creating groups.
Building a Model
• Create an assembly first and then add individual objects or groups to the assembly.
Creating an Assembly from a Group of Objects

You can create a new assembly by right-clicking on the group item under the Groups node in the
Model manager window and selecting Create assembly in the drop-down menu.
Figure 9.63: An Assembly Node in the Model manager Window
Creating an Assembly Item without Using a Group of Objects

To create an empty assembly item under the Model node in the Model manager window (Fig-
ure 9.63: An Assembly Node in the Model manager Window (p. 358)), click on the button in the
Object creation toolbar. If the Assemblies panel is already open, you can also click New in the As-
semblies panel to create a new assembly.
Alternatively, you can use the Control and Shift keys in combination with the mouse to select
multiple objects in the Model manager window (see Using the Mouse in the Model manager Win-
dow (p. 111)). To create an assembly from the selected items, right-click one of the items and select
Create assembly in the drop-down menu.
Adding Objects to an Assembly

To add objects to an existing assembly, use one of the following methods:
• Select one or more object items in the Model manager window and drag them into the desired assembly
node.
• Select one or more objects in the graphics window by holding down the Shift key and dragging open a
selection box around the objects with the left mouse button. In the Model manager window, drag the
highlighted item(s) into the desired assembly node.
Note:
Multiple objects can also be selected in the graphics display window using the Filter
object type option. See Selecting Objects within a Model (p. 129) for details.
• Right-click the assembly item in the Model manager window and select Create in the first drop-down
menu. In the subsequent drop-down menu, select the type of object you wish to add to the assembly.
See Networks (p. 373) -- Packages (p. 585) for information about the different objects in ANSYS Icepak.
Custom Assemblies
9.24.2. Editing Properties of an Assembly

To edit properties of an assembly item, use the following procedure:
1. Click on the button in the Object modification toolbar or right-click the assembly item in the
Model manager window and select Edit in the drop-down menu. This will open the Assemblies panel
(Figure 9.64: The Assemblies Panel (Definition Tab) (p. 359) and Figure 9.65: The Assemblies Panel
(Meshing Tab) (p. 361)).
Figure 9.64: The Assemblies Panel (Definition Tab)
2. Change the description of the assembly, if required, in the Info tab of the Assemblies panel. Changing
the description of an assembly is the same as changing the description of an object. See Description (p. 310)
for details.
Building a Model
3. Change the graphical style of the assembly, if required. Changing the graphical style of an assembly is
the same as changing the graphical style of an object. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Definition tab, select the assembly to be added to the model (Figure 9.64: The Assemblies Panel
(Definition Tab) (p. 359)). There are two options:
• External Assembly enables you to use an assembly that was created in a previous ANSYS Icepak session.
Specify the name of the project where the assembly was created in the Project definition text entry
field. You can enter your own filename, which can be a full pathname to the file (beginning with a /
character on a Linux system or a drive letter on Windows) or a pathname relative to the directory in
which ANSYS Icepak was started. Alternatively, you can choose a filename by clicking on the square
button located next to the Project definition text field and then selecting the file in the resulting File
selection dialog box. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for more information on the File selection
dialog box.
Note:
When you use the external assembly option to define your assembly, the assembly
is not copied into your model. ANSYS Icepak creates a link to the project that contains
the assembly. To copy the assembly into the model and store it in the model, you
should create the link to the external assembly using the External Assembly option
as described above, then select the Internal Assembly option and click Update. If
the external assembly is not copied into the current model, all modifications made
to the external assembly will be lost.
• Internal Assembly enables you to specify a group that is defined in the current model to be used as
an assembly. This option is selected by default. To specify a group, click the Define using group
button and choose a group from the list in the subsequent Selection panel.
5. (optional) To translate the assembly by a specified distance from its original position, define the distance
of the translation from the original position by specifying an offset in each of the coordinate directions:
X offset, Y offset, and Z offset.
Note that if you want to perform a transformation that is different from that provided by the As-
semblies panel, you can create an initial assembly and then perform additional transformations
using the Move assembly panel. The Move assembly panel is identical to the Move all objects
in model panel described in Resizing the Cabinet (p. 276) and Repositioning the Cabinet (p. 280).
You should also note the extra details for moving an object in Repositioning an Object (p. 292).
Note:
If you scale, rotate, mirror, or translate the assembly, these operations will be performed
with respect to the assembly’s local coordinate system and not the global coordinate
system.
6. In the Meshing tab, specify whether you want to have the assembly meshed separately from the rest of
your ANSYS Icepak model (Figure 9.65: The Assemblies Panel (Meshing Tab) (p. 361)).
Custom Assemblies
Figure 9.65: The Assemblies Panel (Meshing Tab)
a. To allow ANSYS Icepak to generate a non-conformal mesh, turn on the Mesh separately option. See
Generating a Mesh (p. 773) for details about generating a mesh.
b. To reuse mesh already generated for an assembly from another project or an external mesher, select
Reuse mesh. Select Browse to select and import the mesh file. In order for mesh to be reused, the
assembly geometry from the source must be identical to the assembly's geometry (object names
Building a Model
and types can differ, however). Overlapping mesh cells are sorted according to the current object
priority settings.
Note:
A mesh imported as solid can be made hollow if the object's properties are set to
hollow. Hollow object mesh cannot be made solid since no new mesh cells are
generated in the process.
Note:
If your project contains multiple instances identical assemblies, you can reuse the
same mesh for each assembly. The mesher automatically translates the imported
mesh. Rotation of imported mesh is not supported.
The following mesh formats are compatible:
• Icepak mesh (grid_output file)
• Fluent mesh (.msh)
c. If you selected Mesh separately, specify the Slack settings distance around the bounding box of
the assembly (Min X, Max X, Min Y, Max Y, Min Z, Max Z). The bounding box will be moved outward
by the amount of slack that is specified. Additionally, each of the slack distances can be assigned by
aligning the edges of the assembly bounding box to existing edges of objects or other assemblies.
To do so, follow the procedure described in Aligning an Object with Another Object in the Mod-
el (p. 300).
For example, to set the slack distance in the Min X direction, you would first click Min X dis-
played in orange in the Meshing tab of the Assemblies panel, then click the edge of the object
in the graphics window that you want to align with the Min X edge of the assembly bounding
box.
d. If you selected Mesh separately, you can deselect Use global mesh control settings to enable Max
element size, Minimum gap, and Options. If Use global mesh control settings is selected, the
mesh control settings will be inherited from the global mesh settings. Click Copy global to populate
the mesh control settings with the current global mesh setting values.
e. If you deselected Use global mesh control settings, you can specify the Mesh type for the objects
in the assembly. Assemblies meshed separately can have a mesh type different from the type used
to mesh the outside assembly.
By default, ANSYS Icepak uses the same mesh type specified in the Mesh control panel to
mesh the objects inside the assembly. If the Mesh type is Mesher-HD, the Meshing tab will
appear as shown in Figure 9.66: The Assemblies Panel Using Mesher-HD (Meshing Tab) (p. 363).
f. If you deselected Use global mesh control settings, you can specify a limit on the element size of
the assembly mesh in the x, y, and z coordinate directions. To do so, select Max X, Max Y, and Max
Z size specifications and set each one to the desired maximum element length in each direction.
g. If you deselected Use global mesh control settings, you can specify the Minimum gap that separates
objects in the assembly in the X, Y, and Z directions. This specification is used by ANSYS Icepak whenev-
Custom Assemblies
er the distance between two objects inside the assembly is less than this value, but greater than the
model’s zero tolerance.
h. If you deselected Use global mesh control settings, you can select No O-grids to allow no O-grids
to be specified on a per assembly basis.
Figure 9.66: The Assemblies Panel Using Mesher-HD (Meshing Tab)
Building a Model
i. A brief description of options available with Mesher-HD is given below. These options are available
when Use global mesh control settings is deselected. For more detailed information, see Global
Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh (p. 783).
Note:
When enabled, the options on the Options and Multi-level settings tabs are applied
only to the selected assembly, overriding the global mesh settings in the Mesh
Control panel. Select the check box on the left to enable the corresponding local
mesh setting. When disabled, global mesh settings in the Mesh Control panel are
applied.
• Enforce 3D cut cell meshing for all objects enables 3D cut cell meshing instead of the mesh
settings selected in the Misc tab of the Mesh control panel.
• No O-grids allows no O-grids to be specified on a per assembly basis. This option can be found in
the Options tab.
• Allow stair-stepped meshing and Allow multi-level meshing can be activated in the Options
and Multi-level settings tabs when Mesher-HD is selected.
• Set uniform mesh params is best used with multi-level meshing. This option can be found in the
Options tab.
• Set uniform mesh params has two options: Use average and Keep XYZ max sizes. Use average
creates a uniform mesh with the same mesh size in all coordinate directions. The mesh size is
computed by averaging the specified max element sizes. Keep XYZ max sizes creates a uniform
mesh in each coordinate direction using the corresponding max element size. The resulting mesh
has constant spacing in each coordinate direction but the spacing can be different if the max ele-
ment sizes are different. Using uniform mesh params results in lower mesh count and improved
quality. It is recommended to use uniform meshing params when multi-level meshing is used. If
this option is enabled then 3D cut cells and stair step meshing ignores the object-based params
to keep the mesh uniform and generates better quality meshes. To provide object-based control
on meshing, meshing levels can be used for the objects defined under Edit levels.
• Enable 2D multi-level meshing starts with a coarse background meshes and then refines the
mesh to resolve fine-level features. Lastly a 3D cut-cell technique is used for fitting the mesh.
– Anisotropic refinement enables you to refine the mesh in adapting to the geometry. This option
yields lower cell count but quality of cells may be affected depending on the geometry.
– Isotropic refinement enables you to refine the mesh regardless of the geometry. This option
yields higher cell count as compared to anisotropic refinement but quality of cells may be better,
as aspect ratio is maintained in 2D.
– Enforce 2D cut cell for all objects enables 2D cut cell meshing instead of the mesh settings
selected in the Misc tab of the Mesh control panel. If necessary, select a coordinate direction
to enforce the cut cell meshing in the specified direction. Multi-level mesh refinement is con-
strained to the 2D plane.
• In the Multi-level settings tab, Max Levels enables you to set the number of meshing levels for
every object meshed using 3D cut-cells. Proximity size function and/or Curvature size function
depend on the Max Levels.
Custom Assemblies
• In the Multi-level settings tab, the Edit levels button enables you to control levels individually
for every object contained in the assembly.
• In the Multi-level settings tab, Buffer layers is used in conjunction with multi-level meshing.
j. If you selected Mesh separately, you can specify a limit on the element size of the assembly mesh
in the x, y, and z coordinate directions. To do so, select Max X, Max Y, and Max Z size specifications
and set each one to the desired maximum element length in each direction.
7. Specify whether you want to fix the values for the units in the panel. See The Fix values Option (p. 219)
for details.
8. Click Update to position the assembly according to the specifications in the Assemblies panel. Click
Done to position the assembly and close the Assemblies panel.
9.24.3. Assembly Viewing Options

There are several ways to view an assembly in your ANSYS Icepak model. Expanding the assembly
node in the Model manager window will display the objects in the assembly as they would normally
look. Closing the assembly node will display only the bounding box of the assembly.
In a more complicated model, you can choose to view only one particular assembly while hiding the
rest of your ANSYS Icepak model. To change the display in this manner, right-click the desired assembly
node under the Model node in the Model manager window and turn on the View separately option
in the drop-down menu. The assembly node will be temporarily moved up one level in the tree and
the Model node will be closed, which results in only the assembly being displayed. To return to the
default display settings, right-click the assembly node and turn off the View separately option.
9.24.4. Selecting an Assembly

There are two ways to select an assembly:
• Select the name of assembly under the Model node in the Model manager window using the left mouse
button.
• Position the mouse cursor over the assembly in the graphics window, hold down the Shift key on the
keyboard, and click the left mouse button.
9.24.5. Editing Objects in an Assembly

Once you have created an assembly or read an assembly into your ANSYS Icepak model, you can edit
the individual objects in the assembly. To edit an object, select the object item under the assembly
node and click the button in the Object modification toolbar. This will open the Object panel,
where you can edit any of the properties of any individual object.
Alternatively, you can edit an assembly by right-clicking on the assembly item in the Model manager
window and selecting Edit in the drop-down menu.
Building a Model
9.24.6. Copying an Assembly
To copy an assembly in your model, select the assembly and click on the button in the Object
modification toolbar. This will open the Copy assembly panel. The procedure for copying an assembly
is the same as copying an object using the Copy object panel, as described in Copying an Ob-
ject (p. 306).
Alternatively, you can copy an assembly by right-clicking on the assembly item in the Model manager
window and selecting Copy in the drop-down menu.
Note:
with respect to the assembly’s local coordinate system and not the global coordinate system.
9.24.7. Moving an Assembly
To move an assembly, select the assembly and click the button in the Object modification
toolbar. This opens the Move assembly panel. You can apply various transformations to the assembly.
The operations in the Move assembly panel are the same as those in the Move all objects in model
panel (Figure 9.9: The Move all objects in model Panel (p. 279)). The Scale option is described in Res-
izing the Cabinet (p. 276), and the Rotate, Mirror, and Translate options are described in Repositioning
the Cabinet (p. 280) and Repositioning an Object (p. 292).
Alternatively, you can move an assembly by right-clicking on the assembly item in the Model manager
window and selecting Move in the drop-down menu.
Note:
with respect to the assembly’s local coordinate system and not the global coordinate system.
9.24.8. Saving an Assembly

To save an assembly to be used in another model, click Write in the Assemblies panel (Figure 9.64: The
Assemblies Panel (Definition Tab) (p. 359)). This will open the Save project panel. See Saving a Project
File (p. 149) for information on the Save project panel. You can save the project containing the assembly
to any directory, but it is recommended that you create a local assemblies directory where you can
save all the assemblies you create.
Alternatively, you can save an assembly as a separate project by right-clicking on the assembly item
in the Model manager window and selecting Save as project in the drop-down menu. See Saving
a Project File (p. 149) for details about saving projects.
9.24.9. Loading an Assembly

To load an assembly that was created in another model, right-click on the assembly item in the
Model manager window and select Load assembly in the drop-down menu. This will open the Load
Custom Assemblies
project panel, which is similar to the Open project panel. See Creating, Opening, Reloading, and
Deleting a Project File (p. 229) for information on the Open project panel.
9.24.10. Merging an Assembly With Another Project

To merge an assembly with another project, right-click the assembly item in the Model manager
window and select Merge project in the drop-down menu. This will open the Merge project panel.
See Merging Model Data (p. 146) for information about using this panel.
9.24.11. Deleting an Assembly

You can delete an assembly by right-clicking on the assembly item in the Model manager window
and selecting Delete in the drop-down menu.
To recover a deleted assembly, you can undo the delete operation by selecting the Undo option in
the Edit menu. See The Edit Menu (p. 59) for more details on using undo and redo operations.
9.24.12. Expanding an Assembly Into Its Components

Once you have created an assembly or read an assembly into your ANSYS Icepak model, you can expand
the assembly into its individual components. To expand an assembly, simply expand the assembly
node in the Model manager window. The assembly will be expanded into its individual components
that can be edited separately.
Alternatively, you can expand an assembly into its components by right-clicking on the assembly
item in the Model manager window and selecting Open subtree in the drop-down menu. To view
the assembly as a single object, you can close the node or select Close subtree in the drop-down
menu.
9.24.13. Summary Information for an Assembly

To view a brief summary of the contents of an assembly, right-click the assembly item in the Model
manager window and select Summary information in the drop-down menu. This will open the As-
sembly contents panel, as shown in Figure 9.67: The Assembly contents Panel (p. 367). This panel
lists the total number of objects in the assembly along with the number of objects of each individual
object-type.
Figure 9.67: The Assembly contents Panel
Building a Model
9.24.14. Total Volume of an Assembly

To display the total volume occupied by all the objects in an assembly (excluding CAD objects), right-
click the assembly item in the Model manager window and select Total volume in the drop-down
menu. The total volume will be displayed in the Message window.
9.24.15. Total Area of an Assembly

To display the total area occupied by all the objects in an assembly (excluding CAD objects), right-
click the assembly item in the Model manager window and select Total area in the drop-down
menu. The total area will be displayed in the Message window.
9.25. Checking the Design of Your Model

ANSYS Icepak provides two ways to check your model for design problems: object and material sum-
maries, and design checks. Object and material summaries, and design checks are described in detail
in the following section.
9.25.1. Object and Material Summaries

Object and material summaries provide an on-screen catalog of all objects in the model, (including
names, descriptions, dimensions, locations, and all physical and thermal properties associated with
each object) and any materials you have created or edited. The summary enables you to review the
contents of your model as a means of examining the design. To create an object and material summary,
select Summary (HTML) in the View menu. The HTML version of the summary will be displayed in
your web browser. ANSYS Icepak will automatically launch your web browser (IE, or Mozilla), as shown
in (Figure 9.68: Model Summary (p. 369)).
View Summary (HTML)
Checking the Design of Your Model
Figure 9.68: Model Summary
The summary displays a list of all the objects in the model and all the parameters that have been set
for each object. The information is grouped by object types (for example, blocks, fans, openings). For
each object type, the number of objects of that type is indicated, along with the Name and Shape
of every object. If specified, other information will be listed, such as Material, Power, Radiation, Loss
specification, etc. If certain properties (for example, radiation) are specified, you can view the detailed
version of the summary by clicking the appropriate object names or property specifications. For ex-
ample, if you click block.3 in the summary shown in Figure 9.68: Model Summary (p. 369), the detailed
version of the summary will be displayed as shown in Figure 9.69: Detailed Summary (p. 370).
Building a Model
Figure 9.69: Detailed Summary
9.25.2. Design Checks

Design checks test the model for problems in the design. To perform an automated design check,
select Check model in the Model menu.
Model Check model
In the design check, ANSYS Icepak searches for incidences of overlapping objects, violations of physics
(for example, openings not associated with walls), and unacceptable data (for example, values out of
range for individual specifications).
Checking the Design of Your Model
The results of the design check are reported sequentially in the ANSYS Icepak Message window. In-
formative messages appear as blue text, while flaws or design errors detected by the check appear
as red text. ANSYS Icepak highlights the overlapping sections of all intersecting objects in red in the
graphics window. To restore the model colors to their defaults, select Check model again.
If ANSYS Icepak detects a large number of flaws in the model, the on-screen report may exceed the
size of the Message window. To review the entire list of flaws, you can either expand the Message
window, or print the contents of the Message window to a file using the Log option in the Message
window (see The Message Window (p. 97)).
Note that the design check is performed automatically when you generate a mesh for the model.
Chapter 10: Networks
Networks are two-dimensional objects that can be used to model IC packages, using resistor-capacitor
(RC) representations, in steady-state or transient simulations. Additionally, networks can be used to
model cold plates and external heat exchangers of the flow-through type, where the flow through the
heat exchanger is a known, fixed quantity, and also can function like a series of recirculation openings.
A network object is a more general representation of a network block object. The network object allows
you to make fairly complicated (and quite arbitrarily connected) thermal networks. Each network object
can consist of a set of faces that are connected to internal network nodes. The internal network nodes
can also be connected to so-called boundary nodes for which you can specify boundary conditions of
fixed temperature or a fixed heat flux. Face nodes may be connected to each other as well. See Network
Blocks (p. 502) for details about network block objects.
To configure a network in the model, you must specify its location (that is, the location and size of the
network faces that are connected to the nodes), the number of nodes, and the links between the nodes.
Information about the characteristics of a network is presented in the following sections:
• Location and Dimensions (p. 373)
• Modeling IC Packages (p. 373)
• Modeling Heat Exchangers/Cold Plates (p. 375)
• Modeling Recirculation Openings (p. 376)
• Network Nodes (p. 377)
• Adding a Network to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 378)
10.1. Location and Dimensions

A network is defined as one or more 2D objects in ANSYS Icepak. The location and dimension parameters
for a network vary according to the geometry of the network faces. Network geometries include rectan-
gular, 2D polygon, circular, and inclined. These geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312).
10.2. Modeling IC Packages

Figure 10.1: A Two-Resistor Model of an IC Package for Steady-State Simulations (p. 374) and Figure 10.2: An
RC Model of an IC Package (p. 374) are, respectively, examples of steady-state and transient network
models for IC packages. Figure 10.1: A Two-Resistor Model of an IC Package for Steady-State Simula-
tions (p. 374) is a commonly used representation of a two-resistor network model. The resistance Rjc
represents the thermal resistance from the junction to the case and the resistance Rjb represents the
thermal resistance from the junction to the board. The intention of the model is to represent the simplest
possible path the heat flow can take from the junction to the case and the board. It is assumed that
Networks
negligible heat transfer occurs through the sides. In Figure 10.2: An RC Model of an IC Package (p. 374),
C is the thermal capacitance.
Figure 10.1: A Two-Resistor Model of an IC Package for Steady-State Simulations
Figure 10.2: An RC Model of an IC Package
A more complicated network representation is shown in Figure 10.3: A Four-Resistor Representation of

an IC Package (p. 375). Instead of considering the top of the package to be representative of the case
temperature (a single value) and the bottom face of the package to be represented as a single value,
it is more physical to represent the top and bottom by two separate temperatures and connect them
up with the junction using appropriate resistances. Continuing in this vein, the top, bottom, and sides
of the IC packages can be broken up into various "isothermal" zones to construct ever more complicated
thermal networks.
Modeling Heat Exchangers/Cold Plates
Figure 10.3: A Four-Resistor Representation of an IC Package
10.3. Modeling Heat Exchangers/Cold Plates

An example of a heat exchanger that can be modeled using a network object is shown in Figure 10.4: De-
tailed Heat Exchanger (p. 375).
Figure 10.4: Detailed Heat Exchanger
Networks
Figure 10.5: Network Object Used to Model a Cold Plate/Heat Exchanger
Modeling the flow through a detailed model of the heat exchanger in Figure 10.4: Detailed Heat Ex-
changer (p. 375) would provide the correct results; however, it is neither necessary nor efficient to do
so. Typically, a thermal designer will not be interested in modeling the heat exchanger details or in
even designing the heat exchanger, but instead will be interested in selecting the right heat exchanger
or analyzing the effect of the heat exchanger on the rest of the system.
An approximate way of modeling the heat exchanger would be to use a volumetric resistance with
conductivity that has been appropriately increased to account for the enhanced heat transfer in the
heat exchanger volume. The inlet and outlet can be modeled using openings with a fixed velocity and
zero gauge pressure, respectively. See Resistances (p. 559) for details about volumetric resistances. See
Openings (p. 393) for details about openings.
In most cases, however, even this sort of simplified modeling for such a heat exchanger is not necessary.
All you will typically know is the UA value (overall heat transfer coefficient area) of the heat exchanger
and the mass flow rate through the heat exchanger (see Figure 10.5: Network Object Used to Model a
Cold Plate/Heat Exchanger (p. 376)). Given the surface area/geometry of the heat exchanger in terms of
its bounding box and the two values listed above, ANSYS Icepak’s network object model can be used
to model the effects of the heat exchanger on the rest of the system.
10.4. Modeling Recirculation Openings

Examples of several recirculation openings that can be modeled using a network object are shown in
Figure 10.6: Network Object Representation of Recirculation Openings (p. 377).
Network Nodes
Figure 10.6: Network Object Representation of Recirculation Openings
To model a recirculation opening using an opening object, you are limited to a single pair of openings
for the extract and supply, both of which must have the same mass flow rate.
With a network object, there can be more than one supply or extract opening provided that mass is
conserved. In Figure 10.6: Network Object Representation of Recirculation Openings (p. 377), the extract
air leaves the cabinet domain at A and B and the supply air re-enters the cabinet domain at C, D, and
E. Heat may be transferred to or from the flow when the air leaves the cabinet domain (that is, it either
flows inside a hollow block or outside of the cabinet walls) and enters the recirculation device. The re-
circulation device itself is outside of the cabinet domain. Thus, it can be represented by an internal
node because you will generally be interested in the effects of a recirculation device on the rest of the
cabinet instead of the physical makeup of the device. When you have created a valid network of
openings, the color of the network object faces in the graphics window will change from purple to
yellow, indicating that the faces are to be treated as velocity boundaries.
10.5. Network Nodes

Networks consist of a set of face nodes, boundary nodes, and internal nodes. Face nodes represent the
geometry of the network face, so that you can visualize the geometric shape to which the internal
nodes are connected. Boundary nodes represent boundary conditions for the network node. They are
just like regular boundary conditions that you would apply at a wall (for example, fixed heat flux or
fixed temperature). Internal nodes represent objects that you want to lump together to have a single
temperature. For example, if you are modeling an IC package or a chip, the junction would be an internal
node. The assumptions here are that the internal details of the chip are not important and that the
most important characteristic that would be of interest in modeling is the junction node. The rest of
the chip is modeled through resistance connections to surfaces.
Networks
Nodes can be connected in the following ways:
• face nodes can connect to other face nodes or to internal nodes
• boundary nodes can connect only to internal nodes
• internal nodes can connect to all three types of nodes
When two nodes are connected, the link between the nodes can be resistive (an R-link) or convective
(a C-link). Resistive links are by far the most commonly used. R-links can represent complicated thermal
networks that the network block object alone cannot model (see Network Blocks (p. 502) for more in-
formation about network blocks). For instance, if you want to model a package with multiple heat
sources and represent it with a network object, you can create the package by using a combination of
a network object and a hollow block. The internal nodes represent the various junctions (heat sources),
and their connections to the face nodes (that are positioned on the faces of the hollow block) or to
other internal nodes represent the thermal heat flow paths in the package.
The mass flow rate entering and leaving any internal or face node must sum to zero to account for
conservation. Face nodes/surfaces must be located on domain boundaries (for example, a cabinet
boundary, hollow block surfaces) since they represent a connection to an external domain that you do
not want to model in detail.
10.6. Adding a Network to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a network in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Networks panel, shown in Figure 10.7: The Networks Panel
(Geometry Tab) (p. 379) and Figure 10.8: The Networks Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 380).
Adding a Network to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 10.7: The Networks Panel (Geometry Tab)
The procedure for adding a network to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a network. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an
Object (p. 306) for details on copying an existing object.
2. Change the description of the network, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the network, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
Networks
Figure 10.8: The Networks Panel (Properties Tab)
4. In the Geometry tab, select the appropriate face tab (Face 0, Face 1, and so on) and specify the geometry,
position and size of each face in the network. There are five different kinds of geometry available for networks
in the Shape drop-down list. The inputs for these geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312). See Res-
izing an Object (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details on
repositioning an object.
5. If the network face is subject to radiative heat transfer, select Radiation in the Properties tab. You can
modify the default radiation characteristics of the network (for example, the view factor). See Radiation
Modeling (p. 665) for details on radiation modeling.
Specify the Surface material to be used for the network face. By default, this is specified as default.
This means that the material specified for the network face is defined in the Basic parameters
panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material for the network
face, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details
on material properties.
10.6.1. Network Editor Panel

1. Edit the connectivity and other properties of the network nodes in the Network editor panel (Fig-
ure 10.9: Example of a Network editor Panel (p. 381)). To open the Network editor panel, select the
Properties tab and click the Edit network button.
Figure 10.9: Example of a Network editor Panel
2. Create additional face, internal, or boundary nodes as necessary by clicking Internal, Boundary, or Face
next to Create node. The working area of the Network editor panel will contain graphical representations
of the nodes that you created. Face nodes will appear as orange squares, boundary nodes as grey dia-
monds, and internal nodes as pink circles. Nodes with non-zero power or non-ambient temperature
shown with a red outline.
Note:
To hide labels on the working area of the network editor, select any of the following
check boxes: Hide R-link labels, Hide C-link labels, Hide node labels, and Hide face
labels.
Note:
Use the navigation buttons in the upper right corner of the panel to zoom in or out
and navigate the working area of the network editor.
Note:
Press Ctrl and right-click in the working area of the Network editor to access the
context menu, which includes the following options:
Networks
• Node creation options: Create internal node, Create boundary node, and Create
face node
• Display options: Show all, Show faces, and Show nodes
• Selection options: Clear selections, Clone selections, and Delete selections
• Automatic editing options: Auto edit new node and Auto edit new link
3. Create the appropriate links between the nodes to represent either the thermal resistance or the mass
flow rate. To create a link, hold down the right mouse button on a node and drag it to connect to a dif-
ferent node in the working area. Select the Move faces with nodes check box to ensure the faces move
with internal and boundary nodes when dragged in the working area.
Note:
Mass flow links appear blue, and thermal resistance links contain a jagged section.
4. Move the nodes in the working area to make them convenient to visualize. To reposition a node, hold
down the left mouse button on the node and drag it to different location in the working area. Changing
the location of a node in the Network editor panel will not affect the geometry or the position of the
network in the graphics window. To automatically move the nodes in a radial arrangement, click Reset
locations.
Note:
To select more than one node or face with a selection box, press Ctrl and click in the
working area of the Network Editor and drag the cursor.
5. Create anchors to help organize and arrange the links in the network display editor. To create anchors,
click a link and drag it to the desired location. You can create additional anchors to better organize the
network editor.
Note:
Press Shift and right-click on a node or link to access the following context menu op-
tions.
• Delete node deletes the selected node.
• Align to (face nodes only) opens the Face align panel. You can select the side of an object
or shape to align the face node to. Also, you can select Change face geometry to match
selected side to ensure the face node geometry matches that of the selected side.
• Copy to opens the Copy node panel in which you can select one or more parameters and
the target nodes.
• Show this node hides all other nodes except nodes that are directly linked.
• Clone options do the following:
– This node and faces copies the selected node and all faces connected to it.
– Connected nodes copies the selected node and all nodes connected to it.
– Connected nodes and faces copies the selected node and all faces and nodes connected
to it.
• For links, the options are Edit link, Reverse link, Delete link, Delete anchor, Highlight
anchors, and Copy link to. Copy link to opens the Copy link panel in which you can select
the target link. By default, only links of the same type (mass flow or thermal resistance) are
displayed. Select the All links check box to display all links.
10.6.2. Network Nodes and Faces

If you need to specify the geometry of newly-created faces, navigate to Geometry tab and then
double-click the face node in the working area of the Network editor. The face node's tab is auto-
matically selected. Specify the geometry, position and size of the new face. Or you can press Shift
and right-click on a face node in the network editor to display the context menu. Select Align to to
open the Face align panel. You can select the side of an object or shape to align the face node to.
Also, you can select Change face geometry to match selected side to ensure the face node geometry
matches that of the selected side.
Figure 10.10: Face Align Panel
Edit the node parameters in the Node panel. Figure 10.11: Example of a Node Panel (Face
Node) (p. 384)-Figure 10.13: Example of a Node Panel (Internal Node) (p. 385) show examples of Node
Networks
panels specific to each type of node. To open a Node panel, double-click the node in the working
area of the Network editor panel.
Figure 10.11: Example of a Node Panel (Face Node)
For a face node, specify the name of the node in the Node name text entry box, and then specify
whether or not a contact resistance is applied to the face.
• If there is no contact resistance, select None.
• If you would like ANSYS Icepak to calculate a contact resistance based on the properties of the face, select
Compute and specify the Effective thickness of the network node and the Solid material of which it is
made. The values of the effective thickness and the thermal conductivity of the solid material will be used
to calculate the contact resistance of the network node.
• If you want to specify the contact resistance yourself, select Specified and enter a Resistance in the text-
entry field.
Figure 10.12: Example of a Node Panel (Boundary Node)
For a boundary node, specify the name of the node in the Node name text entry box. Select Constant
power or Constant temperature as the boundary condition and specify a value for the parameter.
Figure 10.13: Example of a Node Panel (Internal Node)
For an internal node, specify the name of the node in the Node name text entry box, and then specify
values for the Power, Mass, and Specific heat of the node.
For transient simulations, you can also specify transient power parameters for an internal node or
transient temperature parameters for a boundary node. To edit the transient power or temperature
parameters for the network, turn on the Transient option and click the adjacent Edit button. This
option is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic parameters
panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
Note:
• You can view Node settings by pointing the mouse at the node and the settings will be dis-
played as a bubble help window.
• You can also view Node and Power values in the Networks tab of the Power and temperature
limit setup panel. See Setting Up the Power and Temperature Limit Values (p. 769) for more
details.
10.6.3. Network Links

Edit the link parameters in the Link panel (Figure 10.14: Example of a Link Panel (p. 386)).
Networks
Figure 10.14: Example of a Link Panel
In the Link panel, select R- link and specify the thermal Resistance or select C- link and specify the
Mass flow. The thermal resistance for links connecting face nodes and internal nodes can be specified
either by choosing Resistance or Heat transfer coeff.. For links between two internal nodes, only
the Resistance option can be used. If Heat transfer coeff. is specified, ANSYS Icepak computes the
thermal resistance as where h is the heat transfer coefficient and A is the area of the face. If
you have selected Mass flow and want to reverse the direction of the flow, click Reverse. Click Done
to display the link in the working area.
The link will be displayed by connecting the two nodes with a zig-zagged line. If the link is specified
by a mass flow rate, an arrow will be displayed to indicate the direction of the flow. To edit an existing
link, double-click the link in the Network editor panel.
Chapter 11: Heat Exchangers
Heat exchangers are two-dimensional modeling objects representing the heat exchange with the sur-
rounding air. For a planar heat exchanger in ANSYS Icepak, a lumped-parameter model is used to
model a heat exchange element. The heat exchanger enables you to specify both the pressure drop
and heat transfer coefficient as functions of the velocity normal to the radiator.
In this chapter, information about the characteristics of heat exchangers is presented in the following
sections:
• Geometry, Location, and Dimensions (p. 387)
• Modeling a Planar Heat Exchanger in ANSYS Icepak (p. 387)
• Adding a Heat Exchanger to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 389)
11.1. Geometry, Location, and Dimensions

Heat exchanger location and dimension parameters vary according to the geometry. Heat exchanger
geometries include rectangular, inclined, circular, and 2D polygon. These geometries are described in
Geometry (p. 312).
11.2. Modeling a Planar Heat Exchanger in ANSYS Icepak

A lumped-parameter model for a heat exchange element (for example, a radiator or condenser), is
available in ANSYS Icepak. The heat exchanger allows you to specify both the pressure drop and the
heat transfer coefficient as functions of the velocity normal to the heat exchanger.
• Modeling the Pressure Loss through a Heat Exchanger (p. 387)
• Modeling the Heat Transfer through a Heat Exchanger (p. 388)
• Calculating the Heat Transfer Coefficient (p. 388)
11.2.1. Modeling the Pressure Loss through a Heat Exchanger

In the heat exchanger model in ANSYS Icepak, the heat exchanger is considered to be infinitely thin,
and the pressure drop through the heat exchanger is assumed to be proportional to the dynamic
head of the fluid, with an empirically determined loss coefficient that you supply. That is, the pressure
drop, Δp, varies with the normal component of velocity through the radiator, v, as follows:
(11.1)
where ρ is the fluid density, and kL is the non-dimensional loss coefficient, which can be specified
as a constant or as a polynomial function.
Heat Exchangers
In the case of a polynomial, the relationship is of the form
(11.2)
where rn are polynomial coefficients and v is the magnitude of the local fluid velocity normal to the
resistance.
11.2.2. Modeling the Heat Transfer through a Heat Exchanger

The heat flux from the heat exchanger to the surrounding fluid is given as
(11.3)
where q is the heat flux, Tair,d is the temperature downstream of the heat exchanger, and Text is the
reference temperature for the liquid. The convective heat transfer coefficient, h, can be specified as
a constant or as a polynomial function.
For a polynomial, the relationship is of the form
(11.4)
where hn are polynomial coefficients and v is the magnitude of the local fluid velocity normal to the
resistance in m/s.
Either the actual heat flux (q) or the heat transfer coefficient and heat exchanger temperature (h,Tair,d
) may be specified. q (either the entered value or the value calculated using Equation 11.3 (p. 388)) is
integrated over the heat exchanger surface area.
11.2.3. Calculating the Heat Transfer Coefficient

To model the thermal behavior of the heat exchanger, you must supply an expression for the heat
transfer coefficient, h, as a function of the fluid velocity through the resistance, v. To obtain this ex-
pression, consider the heat balance equation:
(11.5)
where
q = heat flux
= fluid mass flow rate
cp = specific heat capacity
h = empirical heat transfer coefficient
Text = external temperature (reference temperature for the liquid)
Tair,d = temperature downstream from the heat exchanger
A = heat exchanger frontal area
Note:
Equation 11.5 (p. 388) can be rewritten as:
Adding a Heat Exchanger to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
(11.6)
where Tair,u , is the upstream air temperature. The heat transfer coefficient, h, can therefore
be computed as
(11.7)
or, in terms of the fluid velocity,
(11.8)
11.3. Adding a Heat Exchanger to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a heat exchanger in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation
toolbar and then click the button to open the Heat exchangers panel, shown in Figure 11.1: The
Heat exchangers Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 389) and Figure 11.2: The Heat exchangers Panel (Properties
Tab) (p. 390).
Figure 11.1: The Heat exchangers Panel (Geometry Tab)
Heat Exchangers
Figure 11.2: The Heat exchangers Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a heat exchanger to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a heat exchanger. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and
Copying an Object (p. 306) for details on copying an existing object.
2. Change the description of the heat exchanger, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the heat exchanger, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the heat exchanger. There are four different
kinds of geometry available for heat exchangers in the Shape drop-down list. The inputs for these geometries
are described in Geometry (p. 312). See Resizing an Object (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Re-
positioning an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object.
5. In the Properties tab, specify the Loss coefficient for the heat exchanger. To specify a constant loss
coefficient, select Constant and enter the value in the Constant text entry box. To specify a polynomial
loss coefficient, select Polynomial and enter the coefficients for the polynomial equation (separated by
spaces) in the Polynomial text entry box. For example, if you have a polynomial equation of the form
(11.9)
you would enter
a b c d
Adding a Heat Exchanger to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
in the Polynomial field.
Note:
You must use SI units for the polynomial equation.
6. Specify the Heat transfer through the heat exchanger. Select from two options in the Thermal condition
drop-down list:
• Heat flux specifies a fixed rate of heat transfer from the resistance to the surrounding fluid.
• Heat transfer coefficient specifies a heat transfer coefficient to model the heat input/output of the
resistance. You can specify a Constant value for the heat transfer coefficient (h in Equation 11.3 (p. 388)).
Alternatively, you can specify a Polynomial heat transfer coefficient by entering the coefficients for the
polynomial equation (separated by spaces) in the Polynomial text entry field.
Note:
You must use SI units for the polynomial equation.
Specify the temperature of the resistance (that is, Tair,d in Equation 11.3 (p. 388)) next to External
temp. The value of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic
parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
Chapter 12: Openings
Openings are two-dimensional modeling objects representing areas of the model through which fluid
can flow. Opening geometries include rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, inclined and CAD. Opening
types include free and recirculation. Free openings are specified individually, but recirculation openings
must be specified in pairs. Recirculation opening pairs consist of two sections:
• an extract section, representing the location at which fluid is removed from the enclosure
• a supply section, representing the location at which fluid is returned to the enclosure
Openings should be located on an enclosure boundary, that is, either a cabinet wall or the surface of
a hollow block that has been used to mask a portion of the enclosure. Free openings can also be located
on the surfaces of blocks or plates within the enclosure.
Free openings represent holes either on the boundary of the enclosure or on blocks or plates. Recircu-
lation openings model devices (for example, heaters, refrigeration circuits) that extract fluid from the
enclosure at one location, heat or cool it, and supply it to a different location in the model.
Note that the mass flow rates for the extract and supply sections of a recirculation opening must be
the same. You can specify different mass fluxes for the two sections if they differ in size, but the mass
flow rates (mass flux area) for the sections must be the same.
To configure an opening in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and dimensions)
and type. For free openings, you can also specify temperature, static pressure, species concentrations
and velocity at the opening. For transient problems, you can specify the variation of temperature,
pressure, species concentration, and velocity with time. For recirculation openings, you must specify
the mass flow rate and thermal treatment of the fluid in the recirculation loop. The thermal treatment
can be specified as a constant temperature increase (or decrease), a fixed heat input (or extraction), or
using a conductance and the external temperature. You can also specify the direction of flow out of
the supply section as well as an increase or decrease in species in the recirculation loop.
In this chapter, information about the characteristics of an opening is presented in the following sections:
• Free Openings (p. 394)
• Recirculation Openings (p. 394)
• Adding an Opening to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 397)
Openings

The location and dimension parameters for an opening vary according to the geometry of the opening.
Opening geometries include rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, inclined and CAD. These geometries are
described in Geometry (p. 312).
Note:
The geometries of the extract and supply sections for a recirculation opening can differ from
one another.
12.2. Free Openings

A free opening represents an area on the surface of a solid object (such as a block or plate), or an area
on a planar object such as a wall, through which a fluid is free to flow in any direction. In most cases,
an opening represents a hole on the boundary of the cabinet where the model fluid is exposed to the
external environment.
By default, ANSYS Icepak calculates the rate of flow through a free opening as part of the solution.
For free openings located on cabinet walls, ANSYS Icepak computes the rate of flow through the
opening based on an external static pressure. The default external pressure and temperature are the
ambient temperature specified under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient
Values (p. 260)). For cases where the external fluid velocity is not perpendicular to the plane of the
opening, ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify the velocity directional components as well as specify
species concentrations and turbulence parameters at the opening. You can also specify boundary profiles
for pressure, temperature, velocity, species concentrations, and turbulence parameters at a free opening.
12.3. Recirculation Openings

Recirculation openings model recirculation devices such as heating or cooling units. In such a device,
the fluid is withdrawn from the cabinet through the extract section of the opening and returned to the
cabinet through the supply section, as shown in Figure 12.1: External Recirculation Cooling Device (p. 395).
The extract and supply sections of the recirculation opening can differ from one another in both size
and geometry.
Recirculation Openings
Figure 12.1: External Recirculation Cooling Device
You can model an internal recirculation device by placing the extract and supply sections of a recircu-
lation opening on two different sides of an adiabatic block, as shown in Figure 12.2: Internal Recirculation
Device (p. 395).
Note:
A conducting solid block cannot be used to represent an internal recirculation device.
Figure 12.2: Internal Recirculation Device
• Recirculation Mass Flow Rate (p. 395)
• Flow Direction for Recirculation Openings (p. 396)
• Recirculation Opening Thermal Specifications (p. 396)
12.3.1. Recirculation Mass Flow Rate

ANSYS Icepak provides two methods of specifying the flow rate through a recirculation device:
• total mass flow through the opening
Openings
• mass flow rate per unit area of the opening
Because the extract and supply sections can differ in size, the per-unit-area specification can result
in different mass fluxes but the same mass flow rate for each section of the opening. Such specifications
can be used to model devices that extract or supply a fluid anywhere in the recirculation loop.
12.3.2. Flow Direction for Recirculation Openings

By default, the flow direction of the fluid passing through the extract or supply section of a recirculation
opening is normal to the plane of the section. However, you can specify that the flow leaves the
supply section at an angle, as shown in Figure 12.3: Flow Direction through an Opening (p. 396). Note
that ANSYS Icepak uses the direction parameters only to determine the direction of fluid flow; they
do not affect the magnitude of the velocity.
Figure 12.3: Flow Direction through an Opening
12.3.3. Recirculation Opening Thermal Specifications

When fluid exits and re-enters the enclosure through a recirculation device, its temperature can increase
or decrease. ANSYS Icepak computes the temperature of the re-entering fluid (Tsupply ) based on the
temperature of the exiting fluid (Textract ) and the thermal change applied to the fluid as it passes
through the device.
ANSYS Icepak provides three methods for computing Tsupply . The first method requires the specification
of a constant temperature change (ΔT) applied to the fluid within the device. In this case, Tsupply is
computed by
(12.1)
where Textract is the temperature of the enclosure fluid averaged over the face of the extract section.
Adding an Opening to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
The second method requires the specification of the amount of heat (ΔH) input to or extracted from
the fluid by the recirculation device. In this case, Tsupply is computed by
(12.2)
where cp is the fluid specific heat of the default fluid material selected in the Basic parameters
panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)) and is the mass flow rate through the
device.
The third method requires the specification of the conductance (h1A) and the external temperature
(Texternal). In this case, Tsupply is computed by
(12.3)
where cp is the specific heat of the default fluid material selected in the Basic parameters panel (see
Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)), and is the mass flow rate through the device.
12.4. Recirculation Opening Species Filters

When fluid exists and re-enters the cabinet through a recirculation device, you can specify an increase
or decrease of species in the recirculation loop. See Species Transport Modeling (p. 653) for details on
modeling species transport.
12.5. Adding an Opening to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include an opening in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Openings panel, shown in Figure 12.4: The Openings Panel
for a Free Opening (Geometry Tab) (p. 398) and Figure 12.5: The Openings Panel for a Recirculation
Opening (Geometry Tab) (p. 399).
Openings
Figure 12.4: The Openings Panel for a Free Opening (Geometry Tab)
Figure 12.5: The Openings Panel for a Recirculation Opening (Geometry Tab)
The procedure for adding an opening to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create an opening. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an
2. Change the description of the opening, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the opening, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the type of the opening by selecting Free or Recirc next to Type. The lower
part of the panel will change depending on your selection of the Type.
5. Specify the geometry, position, and size of the opening. There are five different kinds of geometry for Free
type opening and five different kinds of geometry for Recirc type opening available in the Shape drop-
Openings
down list. The inputs for these geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312). See Resizing an Object (p. 291)
for details on resizing an object and Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object.
Note:
You can specify different geometries and dimensions for the Supply and Extract
sections of a recirculation opening.
Note:
The decoration (p. 243) shown on the opening object in the graphic display window
is not displayed when the opening is a CAD object.
6. In the Properties tab, specify the characteristics related to the selected opening Type. These options are
described in the following sections.
• User Inputs for a Free Opening (p. 400)
• User Inputs for a Recirculation Opening (p. 405)
12.5.1. User Inputs for a Free Opening

To specify a free opening, select Free next to Type in the Openings panel. The user inputs for a free
opening are shown in Figure 12.6: The Openings Panel for a Free Opening (Properties Tab) (p. 401).
Figure 12.6: The Openings Panel for a Free Opening (Properties Tab)
The steps for defining a free opening are as follows:
1. Specify the Temperature of the fluid external to the cabinet. By default, the external temperature is the
temperature specified under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Val-
ues (p. 260)). To specify a uniform temperature, enter a value in the Temperature text entry box. To define
a spatial profile for the temperature external to the cabinet, select Profile next to Temperature and
click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described below).
2. If radiation is enabled, you can specify the external radiation temperature independently from the flow
temperature. If you input ambient in the External radiation temp text entry box, Icepak will use the
Radiation temp set on the Defaults tab of the Basic Parameters panel.
3. Specify the Static pressure external to the cabinet. To specify a uniform static pressure, enter a value in
the Static pressure text entry box. To define a spatial profile for the static pressure external to the cab-
inet, select Profile next to Static pressure and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described
below).
Openings
4. Specify the velocity vector for flow across the opening. To specify a uniform x velocity, y velocity, or z
velocity, enter a value in the X Velocity, Y Velocity, or Z Velocity text entry box. To define a spatial
profile for the x velocity, y velocity, or z velocity select Profile next to X Velocity, Y Velocity, or Z Velocity
and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described below).
5. If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the Static pressure, Temperature, X Velocity,
Y Velocity, or Z Velocity as a function of time. These options are available if you have selected Transient
under Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the static
pressure, temperature, x velocity, y velocity, or z velocity, select Transient and click Edit in the Openings
panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
Note:
ANSYS Icepak cannot use both a spatial profile and a transient profile for the static
pressure, temperature, x velocity, y velocity, or z velocity. If you specify both profile
types for any of these parameters, ANSYS Icepak will use the transient profile and ignore
the spatial profile.
6. Specify the inlet or outlet species concentrations for the opening if X Velocity, Y Velocity, and/or Z
Velocity are defined, if required. You can input the species concentrations for the opening using the
Species concentrations panel. To open this panel, select Species in the Openings panel and then click
Edit. See Species Transport Modeling (p. 653) for details on modeling species transport.
7. Specify the turbulence parameters for the opening, if required. This option is enabled when a Turbulent
setting is selected for Flow Regime on the General Setup tab of Basic Parameters.
Note:
Turbulent parameters are not available when Zero equation, Spalart-Allmaras, or K-

Omega SST is selected.
Select Turbulence and click Edit to open the Turbulence equation parameters panel.
Figure 12.7: The Turbulence equation parameters panel
There are two options for specifying turbulence parameters:
• Turbulent intensity/turbulent length scale allows you to specify the turbulence intensity and
length scale for the opening. Specify values for the Turbulent intensity and the Turbulent
length scale. The default value of the turbulence intensity is 10%. By default, Icepak will use a
default value for the length scale. The default value calculated by Icepak is 10% of the length
of the shortest side of the opening.
• Turbulent energy/turbulent dissipation allows you to specify the Turbulent energy and
Turbulent dissipation rate for the opening. To specify a uniform turbulent kinetic energy or
turbulent dissipation rate, enter a value in the Turbulent energy or Turbulent dissipation text
entry box. To define a spatial profile for the turbulent kinetic energy or turbulent dissipation
rate, select Profile next to Turbulent energy or Turbulent dissipation and click Edit to open
the Curve specification panel (described below).
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the Turbulent energy or Tur-
bulent dissipation as a function of time. These options are available if you have selected
Transient under Time variation on the Transient setup tab of the Basic Parameters
panel. To edit the transient parameters for the turbulent kinetic energy or turbulent dissip-
ation rate, select Transient and click Edit in the Turbulence equation parameters panel.
See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
Note:
Icepak cannot use both a spatial profile and a transient profile for the tur-
bulent kinetic energy or turbulent dissipation rate. If you specify both profile
types for either of these parameters, Icepak will use the transient profile
and ignore the spatial profile.
Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Spatial Boundary Profile

You can define a spatial boundary profile using the Curve specification panel (Figure 12.8: The Curve
specification Panel (p. 404)). To open the Curve specification panel, select Profile in the Openings
panel and click Edit.
Openings
To define a profile, specify a list of (x, y, z) coordinates and the corresponding values in the Curve
specification panel. For example, the first line in Figure 12.8: The Curve specification Panel (p. 404)
specifies a temperature of 30° C at (0.25, 0.25, 1). The data in Figure 12.8: The Curve specification
Panel (p. 404) specify a variation of temperature on the plane 0.25≤x≤0.75, 0.25≤y≤0.75, z=1. The
values in the right-hand column are the external static pressure, external temperature, x velocity, y
velocity, or z velocity, depending on your selection in the Openings panel. Click Accept when you
have finished defining the profile; this will store the values and close the Curve specification panel.
ANSYS Icepak will interpolate the data you provide in the Curve specification panel to create a profile
for the whole boundary.
Note:
If the starting point of the opening object is located at (x 0,y 0 z 0), then the first point of
the profile should be (x 0,y 0 z 0, a 0), where a 0 is the corresponding value for that point.
However, if the first point in the profile is has a different value, for example (x 1,y 1 z 1, a
0), ANSYS Icepak will automatically translate the first point to (x 0,y 0 z 0, a 0), and the rest
of the profile points will be shifted by (x 1-x 0, y 1-y 0 z 1-z 0). This translation of point loca-
tions will not affect the values of the variables (a n), and is also useful if the opening is
ever translated within the model. In this way, you will not have to recreate the profile file
or re-enter values in the Curve specification panel. This translation feature also applies
to other objects that allow the specification of point profiles (that is, walls, blocks, and
resistances).
To load a previously defined profile, click Load. (See Saving a Contour Plot (p. 908) for details on saving
contour data and using them as a profile.) This will open the Load curve file selection dialog box.
Select the file containing the profile data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for
details on selecting a file. If you know the units used in the profile data you are loading, you should
select the appropriate units in the Curve specification panel before you load the profile. If you want
to view the data after you have loaded it, using different units than the default units in the Curve
specification panel, select the relevant Fix values options and then select the appropriate units from
the unit definition lists.
If you want to load a curve file that you have created outside of ANSYS Icepak, you will need to make
sure that the first three lines of the file before the data contain the following information:
1. the number of data sets in the file (usually 1)
2. the unit specifications for the file, which can be obtained from the Curve specification panel (for example,
units m C)
3. the number of data points in the file (for example, 10)
Using the above example, the first three lines of the curve file would be
units m C
10
The actual data points should be entered in the same way as you would enter them in the Curve
specification panel.
Note:
• If you want to load a curve from an Excel file, make sure that you also save the file as formatted
text (space-delimited) before reading it into ANSYS Icepak.
• The interpolation method of the profile is specified in the Misc item under the Options node
in the Preferences panel. A description of interpolation methods can be found in Miscellaneous
Options (p. 239).
To save a profile, click Save. This will open the Save curve dialog box, in which you can specify the
filename and directory to which the profile data are to be saved.
12.5.2. User Inputs for a Recirculation Opening

To specify a recirculation opening, select Recirc next to Type in the Geometry tab of the Openings
panel. The user inputs for the physical properties of a recirculation opening are shown in Fig-
ure 12.9: The Openings Panel for a Recirculation Opening (Properties Tab) (p. 406).
Openings
Figure 12.9: The Openings Panel for a Recirculation Opening (Properties Tab)
The steps for defining a recirculation opening are as follows:
1. Specify the thermal change applied to the fluid in the recirculation loop. There are three options:
• Temperature change specifies a constant increase or decrease of temperature applied to the fluid in
the recirculation loop (see Equation 12.1 (p. 396)).
• Heat input/extract specifies a constant heat flow into or out of the fluid as it passes through the re-
circulation loop (see Equation 12.2 (p. 397)).
• Conductance (h*A) specifies a conductance to model the heat input/output of the fluid from your
system. Enter the value of the conductance (h1A in Equation 12.3 (p. 397)) in the Conductance text
entry field.
Specify the external temperature (Texternal in Equation 12.3 (p. 397)) next to External temp. The
value of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters
panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
2. Specify the mass flow rate through the opening. You can specify either a Mass flow rate, Mass flux rate,
or Volumetric flow rate. If you specify a Mass flux rate, and you have specified different cross-sectional
areas for the Supply and Extract sections of the opening, then these sections will have the same total
mass flow rate but different mass fluxes. The extract side mass flux is used to compute the mass flow
rate.
3. Specify the Supply flow direction. There are two options:
• If the fluid flows into the cabinet normal to the opening, select Normal.
• To specify the flow angle of the fluid entering the cabinet through the supply section of the opening,
select Specified. Enter values for the direction vector (X, Y, Z) for the flow. Only the direction of the
vector is used by ANSYS Icepak; the magnitude is ignored.
4. (transient problems only) Specify the Start time and the End time when the thermal and mass flow
specifications for the opening are active.
5. Specify the change of species in the recirculation loop. You can specify an increase or decrease in the
species in the recirculation loop using the Species filter efficiency panel. To open this panel, select
Species filter in the Openings panel and then click Edit. See Species Transport Modeling (p. 653) for
details on modeling species transport.
Chapter 13: Grilles
In your ANSYS Icepak model, grilles can represent either vents or planar resistances, which are similar
types of objects. A vent grille is located on the boundary of a wall or a surface, while a planar resistance
grille is generally located in free space in the cabinet interior.
In this chapter, information about the characteristics of a grille is presented in the following sections:
For information about 3D resistance objects, see Resistances (p. 559).
• Vents (p. 409)
• Planar Resistances (p. 410)
• Pressure Drop Calculations for Grilles (p. 411)
• Adding a Grille to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 414)
13.1. Vents
Vents represent holes through which fluid can enter or leave the cabinet. They are always located on
enclosure boundaries; that is, either cabinet walls or the surfaces of blocks used to modify the shape
of the enclosure (see Figure 13.1: Vent Examples (p. 409)). Vent geometries include rectangular, circular,
2D polygon, inclined and CAD.
Figure 13.1: Vent Examples
Grilles
In most real-world cases, vents have coverings (for example, screen meshes, angled slats, wire grilles).
These coverings result in a pressure drop across the plane of the vent. ANSYS Icepak treats the pressure
drop in the same way that it treats a pressure drop through a resistance modeling object.
Fluid can enter or exit the cabinet through a vent. The actual flow direction through the vent is computed
by ANSYS Icepak. In some cases, fluid can enter and exit through different areas of a single vent. In
cases where the amount of flow in both directions is nearly equal, the vent may be modeled as two
separate but adjoining vents.
ANSYS Icepak computes both the temperature and the direction of the fluid exiting the cabinet through
a vent. By default, the temperature of the fluid entering the cabinet through a vent is assumed to be
the ambient temperature specified under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see
Ambient Values (p. 260)). If flow is leaving the domain through the vent, the temperature is ignored. By
default, the direction of flow of the fluid through a vent is computed by ANSYS Icepak. If you know the
direction of flow at the vent, you can specify it in the Grille panel.
To configure a vent in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and dimensions).
For best results, the vent size and geometry should closely match the size and geometry of the actual
vent. In some cases, you must also specify the temperature, pressure, species concentration, and/or
method used to calculate the pressure drop through the vent covering.
13.2. Planar Resistances

Planar resistances represent partial obstructions to flow within the cabinet. Planar resistance geometries
include rectangular, circular, inclined, 2D polygon and CAD and are designed to model planar flow ob-
structions such as screens and permeable baffles.
For a planar resistance in ANSYS Icepak, the effect of any resistance is modeled as a pressure drop
through its area or volume. ANSYS Icepak provides a list of resistance types that you can select to
model the pressure drop through a planar resistance. Alternatively, the pressure drop across the resistance
can be calculated using either the approach-velocity method or the device-velocity method, both of
which require a user-specified velocity loss coefficient. The approach-velocity and device-velocity
methods differ from each other only by virtue of a factor called the free area ratio. The calculated
pressure drop can be proportional either to the fluid velocity itself, or to the square of the velocity. It
is common practice to employ the linear relationship for laminar flow and the quadratic relationship
for turbulent flow. In the general case, a combination of the linear and quadratic relationships may
more accurately model the pressure drop/speed curve.
Note:
You cannot use the hexahedral mesher if a planar resistance is placed on an inclined con-
ducting thick plate.
To configure a flow resistance in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and di-
mensions), the pressure drop model, and the relationship between resistance and velocity.

Grille location and dimension parameters vary according to the grille geometry. Grille geometries include
rectangular, circular, inclined, 2D polygon and CAD. These geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312).
Pressure Drop Calculations for Grilles
13.4. Pressure Drop Calculations for Grilles

ANSYS Icepak computes the speed, direction, and temperature of the fluid exiting the cabinet through
a grille (see Figure 13.2: Outlet Grille Conditions (Vents) (p. 411)). The calculations are based on the as-
sumption that the external pressure is static. If you do not specify a value for the external pressure,
ANSYS Icepak uses the ambient pressure specified under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters
panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
Figure 13.2: Outlet Grille Conditions (Vents)
Fluid entering the cabinet through a grille is drawn in from the external environment. By default, the
external fluid is at the ambient temperature specified under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters
panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)), and the flow enters the cabinet in a direction computed by ANSYS
Icepak. However, you can impose a flow direction, as shown in Figure 13.3: Grille Flow Direction
(Vents) (p. 412). You can also specify a temperature for the fluid entering the grille.
Grilles
Figure 13.3: Grille Flow Direction (Vents)
To account for pressure losses due to the presence of mesh screens or angled slats on the grille, you
must specify a loss coefficient or select a grille type. See [ 11 (p. 1011) ] for a compilation of loss coefficients
applicable to most situations encountered in electronic enclosures.
ANSYS Icepak can calculate loss coefficients for different types of grilles based on the free area ratio of
the grille. The following grille types are available in ANSYS Icepak:
• a perforated thin vent, with a loss coefficient of
(13.1)
where A is the free area ratio.
• a circular metal wire screen, with a loss coefficient of

(13.2)
• a two-plane screen with cylindrical bars, with a loss coefficient of
(13.3)
Pressure Drop Calculations for Grilles
Note:
Setting the ambient temperature and flow direction has no effect on the calculations if fluid
flows out of the cabinet through the vent.
Alternatively, ANSYS Icepak can calculate the pressure drop resulting from a resistance either by the
approach-velocity method or by the device-velocity method.
The approach-velocity method relates the pressure drop to the fluid velocity:
(13.4)
where lc is the user-specified loss coefficient, ρ is the fluid density, and vapp is the approach velocity.
The approach velocity is the calculated velocity at the plane of the grille. The velocity dependence can
be linear (n = 1), quadratic (n = 2), or a combination of linear and quadratic.
The device-velocity method relates the pressure drop induced by the grille to the fluid velocity:
(13.5)
where vdev is the device velocity. The velocity dependence can be linear (n = 1), quadratic (n = 2), or
a combination of linear and quadratic.
The difference between the approach-velocity and device-velocity methods is in the velocity used to
compute the pressure drop. The device velocity is related to the approach velocity by
(13.6)
where A is the free area ratio. The free area ratio is the ratio of the area through which the fluid can
flow unobstructed to the total planar area of the obstruction.
Note:
The loss coefficient used in the equation for the device velocity is not the same as the
loss coefficient used in the equation for the approach velocity.
The loss coefficients in Equation 13.4 (p. 413) and Equation 13.5 (p. 413) are related to the flow regime
of the problem:
• For a viscous flow regime (for example, laminar flow, slow flow, very dense packing), you should select a
linear velocity relationship:
(13.7)
• For an inertial flow regime (such as turbulent flow), you should select a quadratic velocity relationship:
(13.8)
• For a combination of these two types of flow, you should select a linear+quadratic velocity relationship:
(13.9)
Grilles
You can obtain the loss coefficients in several ways:
• experimental measurements
• computational measurements
• from a reference (The loss coefficients for many grille and vent configurations are available in [ 11 (p. 1011) ].)
13.5. Adding a Grille to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a grille in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Grille panel, shown in Figure 13.4: The Grille Panel (Geometry
Tab) (p. 414) and Figure 13.5: The Grille Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 415).
Figure 13.4: The Grille Panel (Geometry Tab)
Adding a Grille to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 13.5: The Grille Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a grille to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a grille. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an Ob-
ject (p. 306) for details on copying an existing object.
2. Change the description of the grille, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the grille, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the grille. There are five different kinds of
geometry available for grilles in the Shape drop-down list. The inputs for these geometries are described
in Geometry (p. 312). See Resizing an Object (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Repositioning an
Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object.
Note:
The decoration (p. 243) shown on the grille object in the graphic display window is not
displayed when the grille is a CAD object.
5. In the Properties tab, specify the characteristics for the grille.
Grilles
a. Select the Pressure loss specification in the drop-down list. The following options are available:
• To specify the loss coefficient, select Loss coefficient and then select the method to be used to cal-
culate the velocity loss coefficient. The following options are available in the Velocity loss coefficient
drop-down list.
– To have ANSYS Icepak calculate the loss coefficient for a particular grille type based on the free
area ratio of the grille, select Automatic. Then select the type of grille (Perforated thin vent,
Circular metal wire screen, or Two-plane screen, cyl. bars) in the Resistance type drop-down
list and specify the Free area ratio.
– To use the device-velocity method, select Device and select the method to be used to calculate
the Resistance velocity dependence. There are three options in the drop-down list: Linear,
Quadratic, and Linear+quadratic. Finally, specify the appropriate Loss coefficient and Free area
ratio for the Linear coefficient and/or Quadratic coefficient.
– To use the approach-velocity method, select Approach and select the method to be used to cal-
culate the Resistance velocity dependence. Finally, specify the appropriate Loss coefficient for
the Linear coefficient and/or Quadratic coefficient.
Note:
When grilles are placed on domain boundaries, only quadratic loss coefficients
should be specified. If linear loss coefficients are specified for such grilles, they will
be ignored.
• To define a piecewise-linear profile for the pressure drop as a function of the speed of the fluid
through the grille, select Loss curve. ANSYS Icepak allows you to describe the curve either by posi-
tioning a series of points on a graph using the Pressure drop curve graphics display and control
window (described below), or by specifying a list of grille speed/pressure coordinate pairs using the
Curve specification panel (described below). These options are available under Edit.
Note:
You must define three points to create the curve by creating three points on the
Pressure drop curve panel or specifying three coordinate pairs in the Curve spe-
cification panel.
To load a previously defined curve, click Load. This will open the Load curve file selection
dialog box. Select the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog
Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file.
To save a curve, click Save. This will open the Save curve dialog box, in which you can specify
the filename and directory to which the curve data is to be saved.
Note:
The box to the right of Edit will be empty if you have not defined a curve for
the grille. This box will contain the first speed value if you have defined a curve.
b. To specify the external pressure, enter a value for the External total pressure. For flow into a grille,
the external pressure is the stagnation pressure. For flow out of a grille, the external pressure is the
static pressure. By default, the external pressure is the ambient pressure specified under Ambient
conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
c. Specify the Flow direction. There are three options:
• If the fluid flows into the cabinet normal to the grille, select Normal in.
• If the fluid flows out of the cabinet normal to the grille, select Normal out.
• To specify the flow angle of the fluid entering the cabinet through the grille, select Specified. Enter
values for the direction vector (X, Y, Z) for the flow. Only the direction of the vector is used by ANSYS
Icepak; the magnitude is ignored.
d. Specify the inlet or outlet species concentrations for the grille, if required. You can input the species
concentrations for the grille using the Species concentrations panel. To open this panel, select Species
in the Grilles panel and then click Edit. See Species Transport Modeling (p. 653) for details on modeling
species transport.
e. Enter a value for the External temperature of the external fluid. The default value of Ambient temper-
ature is the ambient temperature specified under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel
(see Ambient Values (p. 260)). This temperature is used if fluid flows into the cabinet through the vent,
and is ignored if fluid flows out of the cabinet through the vent.
• Using the Pressure drop curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Grille (p. 417)
• Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Pressure Drop Curve for a Grille (p. 419)
13.5.1. Using the Pressure drop curve Window to Specify the Curve for a
Grille
You can specify a pressure drop curve for a grille using the Pressure drop curve graphics display
and control window (Figure 13.6: The Pressure drop curve Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 418)).
To open the Pressure drop curve window, select Loss curve from the Pressure loss specification
drop-down list in the Grille panel and click Edit. Select Graph editor from the resulting list.
Grilles
Figure 13.6: The Pressure drop curve Graphics Display and Control Window
button. The selected area will then fill the Pressure drop curve window, with appropriate changes to the
axes. After you have zoomed into an area of the model, click Full range to restore the graph to its original
axes and scale.
• To set the minimum and maximum values for the scales on the axes, click Set range. This will open the
Set range panel (Figure 13.7: The Set range Panel (p. 419)).
• To load a previously defined curve, click Load. This will open the Load curve file selection dialog box.
Select the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details
hard-copy files. Click Done when you have finished creating the curve; this will store the curve and
close the Pressure drop curve window. Once the curve is defined, you can view the pairs of coordin-
ates defining the curve in the Curve specification panel. See Figure 13.8: The Curve specification
Panel (p. 420) for the pairs of coordinates for the curve shown in Figure 13.6: The Pressure drop curve
Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 418).
Note:
The curve you specify must intersect both the x and y axes.
13.5.2. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Pressure Drop
Curve for a Grille
You can define a pressure drop curve for a grille using the Curve specification panel (Figure 13.8: The
Curve specification Panel (p. 420)). To open the Curve specification panel, select Loss curve from the
Loss specification drop-down list in the Grille panel and click Edit. Select Text editor from the res-
ulting list.
Grilles
To define a curve, specify a list of coordinate pairs in the Curve specification panel. It is important
to give the numbers in pairs, but the spacing between numbers is not important. Click Accept when
you have finished entering the pairs of coordinates; this will store the values and close the Curve
To load a previously defined curve, click Load. This will open the Load curve file selection dialog
box. Select the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98)
for details on selecting a file. If you know the units used in the curve data you are loading, you should
select the appropriate units in the Curve specification panel before you load the curve. If you want
to view the imported data after you have loaded them, using different units than the default units
in the Curve specification panel, select Fix values for Speed units and/or Pressure units and select
the appropriate units from the unit definition list.
units m/s N/m2)
units m/s N/m2
10
Note:
If you want to load a curve from an Excel file, make sure that you also save the file as
formatted text (space delimited) before reading it into ANSYS Icepak.
To save a curve, click Save. This will open the Save curve dialog box, in which you can specify the
filename and directory to which the curve data is to be saved.
Once the pairs of coordinates have been entered, you can view the curve in the Pressure drop curve
graphics display and control window. See Figure 13.6: The Pressure drop curve Graphics Display and
Control Window (p. 418) for the curve for the values shown in Figure 13.8: The Curve specification
Panel (p. 420).
Chapter 14: Sources
Sources represent regions in the model within which heat flux originates. Sources can be used to rep-
resent current and voltage for Joule heating simulation. Source geometries include prism, cylinder, el-
lipsoid, elliptical cylinder, rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, inclined and CAD. Sources can be used to
specify the primary field variable of temperature. For transient problems, you can also define a period
during which the source is active. Two-dimensional sources can exchange radiation with other objects
in the model.
To configure a source in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and dimensions)
and temperature options. For a transient simulation, you must also specify parameters related to the
source coefficients.
In this chapter, information about the characteristics of a source is presented in the following sections:
• Thermal Options (p. 423)
• Source Usage (p. 424)
• Adding a Source to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 424)

Source location and dimension parameters vary according to source geometries. Source geometries
include rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, inclined, prism, cylinder, ellipsoid, elliptical cylinder and CAD.
These geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312).
14.2. Thermal Options

Energy sources are specified using one of the following options: total heat, per unit area/volume, fixed
value, temperature dependent, joule heating, LED source or transient. These options are described below
and in the section describing user inputs for heat source parameters. Note that the variable s represents
the input value in each text field.
• Total heat sets the total power output over the plane or through the volume to the value s. ANSYS Icepak then
computes the source per-unit-area (or volume) value by dividing by the area of the plane or the volume of
the 3D region.
• Per unit area/volume sets the flux of heat per unit area of the source (positive) or sink (negative) or per
unit volume of the volume to the value s.
• Fixed value sets the temperature of the fluid on the plane to the value s.
• LED source models temperature dependent power.
Sources
• Temperature dependent sets the flux of heat per unit area of the source (positive) or sink (negative) or per
unit volume of the volume to the value
where T is the temperature computed by ANSYS Icepak, and C and s are user-specified values. Note
that the Temperature dependent option for temperature sources is designed to model temperature-
maintaining sources, such as thermistors, which are used to modulate temperature fluctuations. For
such sources, the coefficient C must be negative. A positive value for the coefficient C will result in
runaway temperatures.
• Joule heating is available only for 2D sources and allows you to specify joule heating type inputs (current
and resistivity).
14.3. Source Usage

Some general points regarding source usage are as follows:
• A volumetric source placed within a flow region can be regarded as a "transparent" object; that is, the fluid
flows through it. Its only effect is to add an appropriate source term to one of the governing equations being
solved.
• If a 2D source is suspended in a fluid, it takes on the properties of the fluid, but it does not allow any fluid
flow to pass through it; that is, it behaves like an impermeable wall element.
• In general, 2D flux sources should be placed on the surface of another object, such as a wall, block, or plate.
14.4. Adding a Source to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a source in your ANSYS Icepak model, click on the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click on the button to open the Sources panel, shown in Figure 14.1: The Sources Panel
(Geometry Tab) (p. 425) and Figure 14.2: The Sources Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 426).
Adding a Source to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 14.1: The Sources Panel (Geometry Tab)
Sources
Figure 14.2: The Sources Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a source to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a source. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an
2. Change the description of the source, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the source, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the source. There are nine different kinds
of geometry available for sources in the Shape drop-down list. The inputs for these geometries are described
5. In the Properties tab, specify the Thermal specification for the source. These options are described in
User Inputs for Thermal specification (p. 427).
6. Transient allows you to specify the power as a function of time. This option is available if you have selected
Transient under Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the
source, click Edit next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simula-
tions.
7. (2D sources only) Select Radiation to specify radiation as an active mode of heat transfer to and from the
source, if required. You can modify the default radiation characteristics of the source (for example, the
view factor) by using the Radiation specification panel. To open this panel, select Radiation and then
click Edit. See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for details on radiation modeling.
Specify the material in the Surface material drop-down list.
8. Voltage/current specification is available only for 2D sources. Select Current or Voltage in the Sources
panel and enter the appropriate value. The Transient option is available when Current is selected and allows
you to specify current as a function of time. This option is available if you have selected Transient under
Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the source, click Edit
next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
9. Specify a source of species within the computational domain, if required. You can input the species con-
centrations for the source by using the Species concentrations panel. To open this panel, select Species
in the Sources panel and click Edit. See Species Transport Modeling (p. 653) for details on modeling species
transport.
10. (Optional) Specify the Temperature limit to be used in the Power and temperature limit setup panel.
A warning message will be provided if the temperature of the source exceeds this specified limit. See Power
and Temperature Limit Setup (p. 769) for more information on temperature limit setup.
• User Inputs for Thermal specification (p. 427)
14.4.1. User Inputs for Thermal specification

The following options are available for specifying thermal specification in the Sources panel.
• Total power allows you to enter a value for the total power output over the plane of a 2D source or
through the volume of a 3D source.
– Constant allows you to specify the temperature of the source. The value of the ambient temperature
is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)). This
option is available only for 2D sources.
– Temperature dependent allows you to specify heat as a function of temperature. This option is not
available if the Transient option is selected. There are two options to specify the temperature depend-
ence of power: linear and piecewise linear. Select Temperature dependent in the Sources panel. Click
Edit next to Temperature dependent to open the Temperature dependent power panel (Fig-
ure 14.3: The Temperature dependent power Panel- Linear (p. 428)).
Sources
Figure 14.3: The Temperature dependent power Panel- Linear
Choose either the linear option or the piecewise linear option. If you choose the linear option
specify a value for the constant C. Define the temperature range for which the function is valid
by entering values (in Kelvin) for Low temperature and High temperature. The value of the
ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see
Ambient Values (p. 260)). If the temperature exceeds the specified value of High temperature,
then the power is given by substituting the value of High temperature into the equation at the
top of the Temperature dependent power panel. If the temperature falls below the specified
value of Low temperature, then the power is given by substituting the value of Low temperature
into the equation at the top of the Temperature dependent power panel.
Figure 14.4: The Temperature dependent power Panel- Piecewise linear
If you select the Piecewise linear option, click Text editor to open the Curve specification
panel. To define the temperature dependence of power, specify a list of temperatures and the
corresponding power values in the curve specification panel. It is important to give the numbers
in pairs, but the spacing between numbers is not important. Click Accept when you have finished
defining the curve; this will store values and close the Curve specification panel. ANSYS Icepak will
interpolate the data you provide in the Curve specification panel to create a profile for the entire
range of temperatures (Figure 14.5: Curve specification panel (p. 429)). If the temperature exceeds
the highest temperature specified in the curve, then the power is given by specified power at
the highest temperature. Similarly if the temperature drops below the lowest temperature specified
in the curve, the power is given by specified power at the lowest temperature.
Figure 14.5: Curve specification panel
Note:
→ For the piecewise linear option, the outside total power value is not used in computing
the power at any temperature. It is only used for the linear option.
→ The values entered are actual total powers and not power per unit area.
– Joule heating allows you to specify Joule heating type inputs (current and resistivity) for the source.
Voltage/current specification is not available for 3D sources. Select Joule heating under Total power
in the Sources panel. Click Edit next to Joule heating to open the Joule heating power panel (Fig-
ure 14.6: The Joule heating power Panel (p. 430)).
Sources
Figure 14.6: The Joule heating power Panel
Specify values for the Current, Resistivity, and the constant C to be entered into the fields at
the top of the panel.
You can also specify the current as a function of time for Joule heating type inputs by selecting
the Transient option next to Current. This option is available if you have selected Transient
under Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the
source, click Edit next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient
simulations.
Specify the temperature (Tref) at which the resistivity was measured. You must also specify the
direction of the length of the source that you want included in the equation. You can choose
Longest, X length, Y length, or Z length under the L drop-down list. ANSYS Icepak uses this
length in the equation at the top of the Joule heating power panel, and also calculates the area
of this face to be used in the equation. Specify the temperature range for which the function is
valid by entering values for Low temperature and High temperature. The value of the ambient
temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient
Values (p. 260)). Click Update to update the thermal specification of the source.
• Surface/volume flux enables you to specify:
– The flux of heat per unit area of the source for a 2D source by entering a value for the flux of heat per
unit area next to Surface heat.
– The flux of heat per unit volume of the source for a 3D source by entering a value for the flux of heat
per unit volume next to Volumetric heat.
– Constant allows you to specify the temperature of the source. The value of the ambient temperature
is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)). This
option is available only for 2D sources.
– Temperature dependent allows you to specify heat as a function of temperature. This option is not
available if the Transient option is selected. There are two options to specify the temperature depend-
ence of power: linear and piecewise linear. Select Temperature dependent in the Sources panel. Click
Edit next to Temperature dependent to open the Temperature dependent power panel (Fig-
ure 14.3: The Temperature dependent power Panel- Linear (p. 428)).
Figure 14.7: The Temperature dependent power Panel- Linear
specify a value for the constant C. Define the temperature range for which the function is valid
by entering values (in Kelvin) for Low temperature and High temperature. The value of the
ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see
Ambient Values (p. 260)). If the temperature exceeds the specified value of High temperature,
then the power is given by substituting the value of High temperature into the equation at the
top of the Temperature dependent power panel. If the temperature falls below the specified
value of Low temperature, then the power is given by substituting the value of Low temperature
into the equation at the top of the Temperature dependent power panel.
Figure 14.8: The Temperature dependent power Panel- Piecewise linear
defining the curve; this will store values and close the Curve specification panel. ANSYS Icepak will
interpolate the data you provide in the Curve specification panel to create a profile for the entire
range of temperatures (Figure 14.5: Curve specification panel (p. 429)). If the temperature exceeds
the highest temperature specified in the curve, then the power is given by specified power at
Sources
the highest temperature. Similarly, if the temperature drops below the lowest temperature spe-
cified in the curve, the power is given by specified power at the lowest temperature.
Note:
→ For the piecewise linear option, the outside total power value is not used in computing
→ The values entered are actual total powers and not power per unit area.
– Profile allows you to define a spatial profile for the Surface/volume flux. Select Profile and click Edit
to open the Curve specification panel.
Specify the lengths and the corresponding surface/volume flux values in the Curve specification
panel. The spacing between the numbers is not important as long as the numbers are given in
sets of four. Click Accept when you have finished defining the curve; this will store values and
close the Curve specification panel. ANSYS Icepak will interpolate the data you provide in the
Curve specification panel to create a profile for the entire range of surface/volume heat flux.
Note:
The interpolation method of the profile is specified in the Misc item under the Options
node in the Preferences panel. A description of interpolation methods can be found in
Miscellaneous Options (p. 239).
• Fixed temperature allows you to specify the temperature of the source. The value of the ambient tem-
perature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
This option is available only for 2D sources.
• LED source option allows you to model temperature dependent power. Default values are given for
Current and Efficiency. To define the temperature dependence of efficiency, select the Temperature
dependent check box and click Text editor next to efficiency to open the Curve specification panel and
specify a list of temperatures and the corresponding efficiency values. To display the efficiency-temperature
curve, click Graph editor. To define the temperature dependence of voltage, click Text editor next to
voltage to open the Curve specification panel and specify a list of temperatures and the corresponding
voltage values. To display the voltage-temperature curve, click Graph editor.
Note:
– Temperature values defined for the voltage-temperature curve will be used to re-calculate
new efficiency values.
– The LED source option is only available for use in steady-state solutions.
Figure 14.9: LED power settings Panel
Chapter 15: Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
Printed circuit board objects (PCBs) are two-dimensional rectangular objects representing printed circuit
boards. You can specify PCBs either as single boards or as racks of identical boards.
To configure a PCB in the model, you must specify its location and dimensions. In addition, you must
specify whether the PCB represents an individual board or a rack of boards, and the spacing between
boards in the rack.
In this chapter, information about the characteristics of a PCB is presented in the following sections:
• Types of PCBs (p. 435)
• Racks of PCBs (p. 438)
• Adding a PCB to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 439)

A PCB is defined as a rectangular or polygon object in ANSYS Icepak. The geometry of a rectangular
object is described in Rectangular Objects (p. 312) and polygon objects are described in Polygon Ob-
jects (p. 317).
15.2. Types of PCBs

Almost all electronic enclosures contain PCBs. PCBs are carriers of the traces and copper planes
(metalization) that form the circuitry. Because of the intricate and populated nature of the circuitry on
a PCB, it is not feasible to model the geometry of each and every trace wire. Therefore, the PCB object
in ANSYS Icepak uses three levels of simplification to represent printed circuit boards.
• Hollow PCBs (p. 435)
• Compact PCBs (p. 437)
• Detailed PCBs (p. 438)
• ECAD PCBs (p. 438)
15.2.1. Hollow PCBs

Hollow-type PCB objects are meant for capturing the flow obstruction and air heating effects associated
with a rack of PCBs. Hollow PCBs are useful for a quick analysis of system-level airflow patterns. If,
however, your modeling interest is the temperature of the components or board itself, it is not advis-
able to use a hollow PCB. This is because the hollow-type PCB is treated in a similar way as a hollow
Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
block. As a result, neither the normal nor the in-plane conductivity is modeled. Temperature predictions
for components as well as the board carrying power will be unrealistically high since the board is a
major heat spreader in most cases.
PCB Side and Component Specifications

To distinguish the individual sides of a hollow PCB from one other, they are referred to in ANSYS
Icepak as high and low, relative to the coordinate direction normal to the PCB. The high side of a PCB
faces the higher coordinate values; the low side faces the lower values.
For each side of a hollow PCB, you can specify two independent component characteristics: the average
component height and the number of components. The number of components can be defined as
a total number of components for the side or as the number of components per unit area of the
board. By default, the component height and number of components are zero.
Components on a PCB prevent flow along the board to a height equivalent to their average height.
The PCB is treated as having a thickness equal to the specified average height, and no computation
for fluid flow or heat transfer is performed in that region, as shown in Figure 15.1: Component Flow
Suppression in a Hollow PCB (p. 436).
Note:
This suppression of the flow should be kept in mind when postprocessing the results of
the simulation.
ANSYS Icepak automatically locates the edge of a row of mesh elements at the specified component
height so as to model this region exactly.
Figure 15.1: Component Flow Suppression in a Hollow PCB
Side-Specific Heat Dissipation

You can specify heat dissipation from the side of a PCB in terms of the total heat dissipation for the
side, the heat dissipation per unit area, or the heat dissipation per component. If you specify heat
dissipation per unit area, the total heat dissipation depends on the size (area) of the PCB. If you specify
heat dissipation per component, the total heat dissipation depends on the number of components
on the side. Note, however, that the number of components can be specified on a per-unit-area basis.
Heat Dissipation from Both Sides

The amount of heat dissipated from either side of a PCB is specified as a percentage of the total heat
dissipated by the board. Therefore, for either side, a percentage of the heat (% current side) is dissipated
from the current side, and the remainder (100 % % current side) is dissipated from the other side.
Similarly, heat generated on the other side of the board is dissipated on its own side, but also dissipates
from the current side.
Types of PCBs
For the current side of a PCB, the total heat transferred to the fluid per unit area is given by
(15.1)
where H0 and Hc are the amounts of heat dissipated from components on the other side and current
side, respectively.
When any type of block is present on a PCB, the heat dissipation specified for the PCB is applied only
to the exposed surface of the PCB, that is, the portion not covered by a block. Similarly, if an average
component height value is specified, heat is dissipated only above the specified height.
15.2.2. Compact PCBs

Compact-type PCB objects lump the composite PCB solid into a homogeneous solid with directional
(orthotropic) conductivities. The in-plane conductivity (for example, the x-direction and z-direction
conductivities for a PCB in the x-z plane) is given by
(15.2)
The normal-direction conductivity (for example, in this case, the y-direction conductivity) is given by
(15.3)
The density and specific heat are determined using volume averaging:
(15.4)
where the summation is over the layers forming the PCB laminate (typically alternating between
copper and FR4 material) and
k
eff,i
=k
i
%covi/100
k
i
= ith layer conductivity
%cov
i
=i
th
layer covered with copper
t
i
= thickness of i
th
layer
ttotal = total thickness of the PCB
Z
i
= volume ratio for component i
15.2.3. Detailed PCBs

Detailed-type PCB objects model each layer of trace as an individual plane. The simplification involved
here is the treatment of each copper trace layer as a "smeared" plane with uniform effective properties.
The trace material layer thickness is usually very small, and therefore thin conducting plate entities
are used for the trace layers in a detailed PCB. The conductivity, specific heat, and density of each
copper layer are volume-averaged based on the percent coverage:
(15.5)
15.2.4. ECAD PCBs

ECAD-type PCB objects accurately model the traces and vias in the PCB by importing ECAD files. Since
the precise geometry of the traces and vias are imported from the ECAD database, ECAD-type PCBs
are the most detailed and accurate of the four types of PCBs in ANSYS Icepak. However the actual
geometry of the traces and vias is not meshed along with the rest of the CFD model. Instead, the
effect of the traces and vias is modeled in each of the CFD mesh cells by computing orthotropic
conductivities from the imported trace and via geometries. Each of the metal and dielectric layers is
modeled separately, thereby maintaining a high degree of accuracy.
15.3. Racks of PCBs

A rack of PCBs is defined as a row of two or more identical boards. The position of the boards begins
at the coordinates of the first board and extends in specified increments in the positive or negative
coordinate direction normal to the first board as shown in Figure 15.2: Rack of Four PCBs (p. 439). To
construct a rack of PCBs, you must specify the number of boards in the rack and the spacing between
the boards.
All PCBs in a given rack are identical, and each possesses the properties and characteristics assigned to
the first board in the rack. To specify a rack of PCBs with variable spacing between the boards, you
must create a series of boards, each specified separately.
Adding a PCB to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 15.2: Rack of Four PCBs
15.4. Adding a PCB to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a PCB in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar and
then click the button to open the Printed circuit boards panel, shown in Figure 15.3: The Printed
circuit boards Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 440) and Figure 15.4: The Printed circuit boards Panel (Properties
Tab) (p. 441).
Figure 15.3: The Printed circuit boards Panel (Geometry Tab)
Figure 15.4: The Printed circuit boards Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a PCB to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a PCB. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an Ob-
2. Change the description of the PCB, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the PCB, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the shape, position and size of the PCB. The inputs for a rectangular object
are described in Rectangular Objects (p. 312) and the inputs for a polygon object are described in Two-Di-
mensional Polygons (p. 317). See Resizing an Object (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Repositioning
an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object.
• (optional) The traces and vias in the PCB can be accurately modeled by directly importing ECAD data
(ODB++, Gerber, EDB, ANF, or IPC2581 files). Choose ODB++ Design, ANSYS EDB, Ansoft Neutral ANF,
Gerber files, ASCII Neutral BOOL, or IPC2581 from the Import ECAD file drop-down list to display the
Trace file panel. Select the associated file and click Open to import the file. After the file has been specified
and imported, ANSYS Icepak assigns ECAD data to the PCB and displays the trace and via information
in the Board layer and via information panel. You can modify the board dimensions in the Board
layer and via information panel.
The Trace file panel (Figure 15.5: PCB Trace file panel (p. 442)) is displayed when importing an
EDB, ANF, BOOL, or IPC2581 file. Select a file and click Open to import the file.
Figure 15.5: PCB Trace file panel
You can modify various imported dimensions like the layer thicknesses, etc. by clicking the Trace
layers and vias button (only available after importing a gerber, anf, odb++, or IPC2581 file). You
can change the values in the Board layer and via information panel. See Importing Trace
Files (p. 183) for details.
Modeling trace heating is available for PCBs. See Trace Heating (p. 191) for details.
If you want to remove the BOOL, ANF, Gerber, EDB, ODB++, or IPC2581 file associated with the
PCB you can do so by clicking the Clear ECAD button in the Geometry tab.
In the Properties tab, specify type of PCB by selecting Compact, Detailed, or Hollow in the Pcb
type drop-down list. The lower part of the panel will change depending on your selection of the
Pcb type.
5. Define the Rack specification for the PCB. ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify the number of boards in
the rack of PCBs. Enter the number of boards next to Number in rack. The number of boards in the rack
is 1 by default.
If you specify more than one board, you must also specify the Rack spacing between the boards.
If you specify a positive value for the Rack spacing, the boards will be generated in the positive
direction of the axis normal to the plane of the PCB. If you specify a negative value for the Rack
spacing, the boards will be generated in the negative direction of the axis normal to the plane of
the PCB. By default the spacing is set to zero.
Note:
For a rack of PCBs, any power specification is applied to each individual PCB in the rack.
6. Specify the Radiation properties for the Low side and the High side of the PCB.
If you select Low side under Radiation in the Printed circuit boards panel (Figure 15.4: The Printed
circuit boards Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 441)) and then click Edit, ANSYS Icepak will open the Low
side surface properties panel (Figure 15.6: The Low side surface properties Panel (p. 443)). If you
select High side and then click Edit, ANSYS Icepak will open the High side surface properties
panel, which is identical to the Low side surface properties panel.
Figure 15.6: The Low side surface properties Panel
a. Specify the Material to be used for the current side of the PCB. By default, this is specified as default.
This means that the material specified for the side of the PCB is defined in the Basic parameters panel
(see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material for the current side of
the PCB, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details
Note:
This step is not necessary for hollow PCBs because you have already performed it in
step a of Board specification of Hollow PCB above.
b. If the side of the PCB is subject to radiative heat transfer, select Radiation. You can modify the default
radiation characteristics of the PCB (for example, the view factor). See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for
details on radiation modeling.
7. Define the Board specification for the PCB.
• For a Compact or a Detailed PCB:
a. Specify the Substrate Thickness and then specify the Substrate Material to be used for the PCB.
To change the substrate material for the PCB, select a material from the Substrate Material drop-
down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
b. (detailed PCB only) Specify whether you want the effective thickness of the substrate to be conserved
by toggling the Conserve effective thickness option.
The trace layers are represented in the detailed PCB model using thin conducting plates. In
PCBs with several metalization/trace layers, the dielectric material thickness can be significantly
lower than the overall PCB thickness due to the total thickness of the metalization/trace layers.
This effect will be accounted for if this option is turned on. If this option is turned off, the
metalization/trace layers will not be considered when calculating the effective substrate
thickness.
c. Specify the Heat dissipation of the boards in the rack.
– For a Compact PCB, specify the Total power of the PCB to a constant value or using SIwave spatial
profiles.
For SIwave spatial profiles, click Edit and select the SIwave powermap files. In the SIwave
powermap profiles dialog, click Browse to select the SIwave powermap files for each layer.
Click the Info button to display the contours and show the power settings of the SIwave
powermap profile for each layer. Click Summary to display the Powermap summary panel,
which displays information for all powermaps selected in the SIwave powermap profiles
panel. Click Accept when all SIwave powermap profiles have been selected.
– For a Detailed PCB, select Upper/Lower and specify the Upper face power and Lower face power
of each board in the rack, or select Total and specify the Total power of the PCB.
d. Select Simple or Detailed for Trace layer type. If Simple is selected, specify the High surface
thickness, Low surface thickness, and Internal layer thickness and then specify the % coverage
for each under Trace layer parameters. Finally, specify the Number of internal layers and select
the Trace Material.
e. If Detailed is selected, you can create additional layers by clicking the Add layer button. Specify the
Layer thickness, % coverage and Layer Material for each layer under Trace layer parameters.
Click Delete layer to remove the last created layer. Finally, specify the Trace Material.
f. The trace is the flat metal path that connects the contact sites (or pads) for the leads of components
on the layer. The % coverage is the portion of the layer that is covered by traces.
For a Compact PCB, the thermal conductivity of the boards in the rack is defined to be ortho-
gonal. The Effective conductivity (plane) and Effective conductivity (normal) are computed
internally as the average of the conductivities of the substrate and the trace materials. Since
the substrate thickness is greater than the combined trace layer thickness, the effective con-
ductivity is generally much closer to the conductivity of the substrate.
g. For a Compact PCB, you can edit the vias by clicking Configure Vias, which will display the Configure
vias panel. Click Add to add as many vias as needed. Click Clear to remove all vias.
Click Edit to edit a row. Click the delete button ( ) to delete a row. If you delete a row, the
rows below it shift up and are re-numbered sequentially.
Figure 15.7: The Configure vias Panel
In the Compact Vias- Filled [Vias1] panel, select the Plane and specify the Location of the
vias. Enter the following Via Details and click Accept.
– Number of vias/unit Area
– Via Diameter
– Thickness of Electroplating
– Plate material
– Fill material
Figure 15.8: Compact Vias- Filled [Vias1]
• For a Hollow PCB:
ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify different physical characteristics for each side of the PCB. If
you select Low side in the Printed circuit boards panel and then click Edit parameters, ANSYS
Icepak will open the PCB low side specification panel (Figure 15.9: The PCB low side specification
Panel (p. 446)). If you select High side and then click Edit parameters, ANSYS Icepak will open
the PCB high side specification panel, which is identical to the PCB low side specification
panel.
Figure 15.9: The PCB low side specification Panel
To define the physical characteristics for the low side or the high side of the PCB, follow the steps
below.
a. Specify the Surface material to be used for the current side of the PCB. By default, this is specified
as default. This means that the material specified for the side of the PCB is defined under Default
surface in the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To
change the material for the current side of the PCB, select a material from the Material drop-down
list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
Note:
The material that you select will also be selected as the surface material in the
Low side surface properties panel (see Figure 15.6: The Low side surface
properties Panel (p. 443)).
b. To specify an average height for the components on the current side of the PCB, enter a value next
to Component height.
c. Percentage of board allows you to specify the percentage of heat dissipated into the fluid from the
current side of the PCB.
d. Specify the amount of heat dissipation from the current side of the PCB. There are three options for
specifying the Thermal condition:
– Select Power and enter the Total power dissipated from the current side of the board.
– Select Heat flux and enter the Total heat flux dissipated from the current side of the board.
– Select Per component and enter the amount of heat dissipated per component from the current
side of the board. If you select this option, you can also specify the number of components as
either the Total number of components or the Number per area on the current side of the board.
These values are used to compute the heat dissipation for the PCB.
• For an ECAD PCB:
If ECAD data are imported into the PCB, the PCB type is automatically set to ECAD. When the
PCB type is ECAD, the per layer thermal properties are computed at any location using the ECAD
traces (See Importing Trace Files into ANSYS Icepak (p. 182).
Specify the Total power of the PCB to a constant value or using SIwave spatial profiles.
For SIwave spatial profiles, click Edit and select the SIwave powermap files. In the SIwave
powermap profiles dialog, click Browse to select the SIwave powermap files for each layer. Click
the Info button to display the contours and show the power settings of the SIwave powermap
profile for each layer. Click Summary to display the Powermap summary panel, which displays
information for all powermaps selected in the SIwave powermap profiles panel. Click Accept
when all SIwave powermap profiles have been selected.
Chapter 16: Enclosures
Enclosure objects are three-dimensional representations of bay stations and other types of enclosures
that have electronics or heat generating components inside them.
Enclosures may have up to six sides. Each side is modeled as a separate plate object, and can possess
physical and thermal characteristics that differ from the other sides. To configure an enclosure in the
model, you must specify its location and dimensions. For each side of an enclosure, you can specify
whether it is open to the ambient or represented by a rectangular plate object. Enclosure sides can
have thin or thick walls and can also have radiation or heat dissipation imposed on them.
A full enclosure object is equivalent to building an enclosure with six plate objects touching each other
at the edges. This allows heat transfer through (and, if the enclosure is open, mass transfer) through
the enclosure. See Plates (p. 453) for more information about plate objects.
Note:
There are enclosure macros available in ANSYS Icepak that can be used to create specific
kinds of enclosures called JEDEC test chambers (see JEDEC Test Chambers (p. 723) for details).
You should use the enclosure object if you want to customize the design of your enclosure
or if you want to parameterize any of the inputs for the enclosure (see Parameterizing the
Model (p. 689) for details on parameterizing your model).
Information about the characteristics of an enclosure is presented in the following sections:
• Adding an Enclosure to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 449)

An enclosure is represented by rectangular plate objects, but is defined in a similar way to a prism object
in ANSYS Icepak. The geometry of both rectangular and prism objects is described in Geometry (p. 312).
16.2. Adding an Enclosure to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include an enclosure in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Enclosures panel, shown in Figure 16.1: The Enclosures
Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 450) and Figure 16.2: The Enclosures Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 451).
Enclosures
Figure 16.1: The Enclosures Panel (Geometry Tab)
Adding an Enclosure to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 16.2: The Enclosures Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding an enclosure to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create an enclosure. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying
an Object (p. 306) for details on copying an existing object.
2. Change the description of the enclosure, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the enclosure, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the position and size of the source. The inputs for a prism object are described
5. In the Properties tab, specify the Surface material and the Solid material for the enclosure. By default,
these are specified as default for the sides. This means that the material specified as the Surface material
for the sides is defined under Default surface in the Basic parameters panel and that the material specified
as the Solid material for the sides is defined under Default solid in the Basic parameters panel (see Default
Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change either material for the sides, select a material from
the Surface material or Solid material drop-down lists. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on ma-
terial properties.
6. Specify parameters for the enclosure.
a. Specify the Boundary type for each side. The following options are available:
• Open specifies that the enclosure side is open to the rest of the cabinet.
Enclosures
• Thick specifies that the side will behave as a conducting thick plate.
• Thin specifies that the side will behave as a conducting thin plate.
See Plates (p. 453) for more information about plates.
b. (thick or thin boundaries only) Specify the Thickness of each side of the enclosure.
c. (thick or thin boundaries only) Specify the Power dissipated by each side of the enclosure.
d. (thick or thin boundaries only) If the side of the enclosure is subject to radiative heat transfer, turn on
the appropriate Radiation option. Click the appropriate Edit button to open the Radiation specification
panel, where you can modify the default radiation characteristics of the side (for example, the view
factor). See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for details on radiation modeling.
Chapter 17: Plates
Plates are objects that are impervious to fluid flow. They can possess a thickness and are defined by
both their geometry and their type. Plate geometries include rectangular, 2D polygon, circular, inclined
and 2D CAD.
Plate types are defined by their associated thermal models, including adiabatic thin, conducting thick,
conducting thin, hollow thick, or contact resistance. Adiabatic thin plates do not conduct heat either
across or in the plane of the plate. Conducting thick plates can conduct heat in either direction and
they possess a thickness. Conducting thin plates can conduct heat in either direction and have no
physical thickness. Hollow thick plates can conduct heat in the plane of the plate but not across the
plate. Contact resistance plates model resistances to heat transfer due to barriers such as surface coatings
or glues. Fluid plates are also available and can be used to cut a hole into a solid plate.
Information about the characteristics of a plate is presented in the following sections:
• Defining a Plate in ANSYS Icepak (p. 453)
• Thermal Model Type (p. 454)
• Surface Roughness (p. 455)
• Using Plates in Combination with Other Objects (p. 455)
• Adding a Plate to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 455)
17.1. Defining a Plate in ANSYS Icepak

In ANSYS Icepak, plate sides are referred to as high and low, relative to the coordinates of the plane
perpendicular to the plate (see Figure 17.1: High/Low Side Plate Definition (p. 454)). The no-slip boundary
condition applies at any plate surface in contact with the fluid and, for turbulent flows, you can specify
a surface roughness for each side of the plate. The sides of a plate can exchange radiation with other
objects in the model.
Plates
Figure 17.1: High/Low Side Plate Definition
To configure a plate in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and dimensions)
and type, as well as the thermal characteristics, and the material from which each side is made.

The location and dimension parameters for a plate vary according to the geometry of the plate. Plate
geometries include rectangular, 2D polygon, circular, inclined and 2D CAD. These geometries are de-
scribed in Geometry (p. 312).
• Plate Thickness (p. 454)
17.2.1. Plate Thickness

When a rectangular, 2D polygon, or circular plate is specified with a non-zero thickness, the thickness
extends in either the positive or the negative coordinate direction (normal to the plane of the plate),
depending on whether the thickness is specified as a positive or negative value. For an inclined plate,
ANSYS Icepak distributes the specified thickness in equal portions on both sides of the plate.
17.3. Thermal Model Type

Plates are defined according to their associated thermal models, which can be specified as adiabatic
thin, conducting thick, conducting thin, hollow thick, or contact resistance.
Adiabatic thin plates have zero thickness and do not conduct heat in any direction, either normal to
the plate or along the plane of the plate.
Conducting thick plates can conduct heat either through or along the plane of the plate and can do
so anisotropically, that is, according to thermal conductivities specific to each direction (defined as part
of the properties of the solid material specified for the plate). They must possess a physical thickness;
Adding a Plate to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
the thickness must be physical so that ANSYS Icepak can mesh the interior of the plate. For transient
simulations, you can specify both density and specific heat for the plate (defined as part of the properties
of the solid material specified for the plate), thereby imparting a thermal mass. If a conducting thick
plate is specified without thermal mass, it can conduct heat but it cannot accumulate heat.
Conducting thin plates have the same properties as conducting thick plates, except that they have no
physical thickness. They can possess only an effective thickness.
Contact resistance plates represent barriers to heat transfer either between objects or between an
object and the adjacent fluid. You can specify the resistance of the barrier in terms of a thermal con-
ductivity or a contact resistance. The thermal-conductivity-based resistance is defined by the thermal
conductivity (defined as part of the properties of the solid material specified for the plate) and the plate
thickness. The plate must be specified with a constant material conductivity; that is, the conductivity
must not be a function of temperature. Contact resistance plates can possess an effective thickness, in
which case ANSYS Icepak will not mesh the interior of the plate.
Hollow thick plates represent three-dimensional regions of the model for which only side characteristics
are important. ANSYS Icepak does not mesh or solve for temperature or flow within regions bounded
by the sides of a hollow plate.
17.4. Surface Roughness

In fluid dynamics calculations, it is common practice to assume that boundary surfaces are perfectly
smooth. In laminar flow, this assumption is valid, because the length scales of typical rough surfaces
are much smaller than the length scales of the flow. In turbulent flow, however, the length scales of
the flow eddies are much smaller than laminar length scales; therefore, it is sometimes necessary to
account for surface roughness. Surface roughness acts to increase resistance to flow, leading to higher
rates of heat transfer.
ANSYS Icepak assumes, by default, that all surfaces of a plate are hydrodynamically smooth, and applies
standard no-slip boundary conditions. For turbulent-flow simulations in which roughness is significant,
however, you can specify a roughness factor for the entire plate or for each individual side of the plate.
The roughness factor is defined as part of the properties of the surface material for the plate. The purpose
of the roughness factor is to approximate the average height of the surface texture on the plate.
17.5. Using Plates in Combination with Other Objects

Plates can be used alone or in conjunction with other modeling objects to create complex objects in
order to perform sophisticated thermal simulations. For example, plates and blocks can be used to build
a complex PCB configuration that allows for a more detailed representation of a PCB than the simplified
PCB object provided in ANSYS Icepak and described in Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) (p. 435). A plate is
also used to create the PCB macro described in Printed Circuit Board (PCB) (p. 728).
17.6. Adding a Plate to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a plate in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar and
then click the button to open the Plates panel, shown in Figure 17.2: The Plates Panel (Geometry
Tab) (p. 456) and Figure 17.3: The Plates Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 457).
Plates
Figure 17.2: The Plates Panel (Geometry Tab)
Figure 17.3: The Plates Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a plate to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a plate. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an Ob-
2. Change the description of the plate, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the plate, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the plate. There are five different kinds
of geometry available for plates in the Shape drop-down list. The inputs for these geometries are described
5. In the Properties tab, specify the thermal model for the plate by selecting Conducting thick, Hollow
thick, Contact resistance, Conducting thin, Adiabatic thin, or Fluid from the Thermal model drop-down
list. The lower part of the panel will change depending on your selection.
6. Specify the characteristics related to the selected Thermal model. These options are described below.
7. Specify the properties for the Low side and the High side of the plate. These options are described in User
Inputs for the Low- and High-Side Properties of the Plate (p. 464).
8. (circular plates only) Specify the speed of Rotation (rpm).
Plates
9. (optional) Specify the Temperature limit to be used to provide a warning message in the Power and
temperature limit setup panel, if the temperature of the plate exceeds this specified limit. See Power and
Temperature Limit Setup (p. 769) for more information on temperature limit setup.
• User Inputs for the Thermal Model (p. 458)
• User Inputs for the Low- and High-Side Properties of the Plate (p. 464)
17.6.1. User Inputs for the Thermal Model

The following thermal models are available:
Conducting Thick Plates

To specify a conducting thick plate, select Conducting thick under Thermal model in the Plates
panel. The user inputs for the Conducting thick thermal model are shown below.
The steps for defining a plate with a Conducting thick thermal model are as follows:
1. Specify the Thickness of the plate.
2. Specify the Solid material for the plate. By default, this is specified as default for the plate. This means
that the material specified as the Solid material for the plate is defined under Default solid in the Basic
parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the Solid material
for the plate, select a material from the Solid material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339)
for details on material properties.
3. Specify the total power dissipated by the plate. Select the options from the drop-down list. There are
four options for specifying the total power:
• Constant allows you to specify a constant value of the Total power.
• Temp dependent allows you to specify power as a function of temperature. This option is not available
if the Transient option is selected. There are two options to specify the temperature dependence of
power: linear and piecewise linear. Select Temp dependent across from Total power in the Plates
panel, and enter a value of the Total power. Click Edit next to Temp dependent; this opens the
Temperature dependent power panel (Figure 17.5: The Temperature dependent power Panel (p. 462)).
Choose either the Linear option or the Piecewise linear option. If you choose the linear option
specify a value for the constant C. The value in the equation shown in the panel is either the
Total power or the power Per unit area/volume specified in the Plates panel. Define the
temperature range for which the function is valid by entering values (in Kelvin) for Low tem-
perature and High temperature. The value of the ambient temperature is defined under
Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)). If the temper-
ature exceeds the specified value of High temperature, then the power is given by substituting
the value of High temperature into the equation at the top of the Temperature dependent
power panel. If the temperature falls below the specified value of Low temperature, then the
power is given by substituting the value of Low temperature into the equation at the top of
the Temperature dependent power panel. Click Update to update the thermal specification
of the plate.
If select the Piecewise linear option, click Text editor to open the Curve specification panel.
To define the temperature dependence of power, specify a list of temperatures and the corres-
ponding power values in the curve specification panel. It is important to give the numbers in
pairs, but the spacing between numbers is not important. Click Accept when you have finished
defining the curve; this will store the values and close the Curve specification panel. ANSYS
Icepak will interpolate data you provide in the Curve specification panel to create a profile for
the entire range of temperatures (Figure 17.6: Curve specification Panel (p. 463)). If the temper-
ature exceeds the highest temperature specified in the curve, then the power is given by the
specified power at the highest temperature. Similarly if the temperature drops below the lowest
temperature specified in the curve, the power is given by specified power at the lowest temper-
ature.
Note:
For the piecewise linear option, the outside total power value is not used in comput-
ing the power at any temperature. It is only used for the linear option.
• Transient allows you to specify the total power as a function of time. This option is available if you
have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. Select Transient under
Total power and enter a value for the Total power. To edit the transient parameters for the plate,
click Edit next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
• Joule heating allows you to specify Joule heating type inputs (current and resistivity). Select Joule
under Total power in the Plates panel. Click Edit next to Joule heating; this opens the Joule heating
power panel (Figure 17.4: The Joule heating power Panel (p. 459)).
Figure 17.4: The Joule heating power Panel
Plates
Specify values for the Resistivity, Current, and the constant C to be entered into the equations
at the top of the panel.
plate, click Edit next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient
simulations.
Specify the temperature (Tref) at which the resistivity was measured. You must also specify the
direction of the length (L) of the plate that you want included in the equation. You can choose
Longest, X length, Y length, or Z length in the L drop-down list. ANSYS Icepak uses this length
in the equation at the top of the Joule heating power panel, and also calculates the area of
this face to be used in the equation. Specify the temperature range for which the function is
valid by entering values for Low temperature and High temperature. The value of the ambient
Values (p. 260)). Click Update to update the thermal specification of the plate.
Hollow Thick Plates

To specify a hollow thick plate, select Hollow thick under Thermal model in the Plates panel. The
user inputs for the Hollow thick thermal model are shown below.
The steps for defining a plate with a Hollow thick thermal model are as follows:
1. Specify the Thickness of the plate.
2. Specify the Total power dissipated by the plate.
Contact Resistance Plates

To specify a contact resistance plate, select Contact resistance under Thermal model in the Plates
panel. The user inputs for the Contact resistance thermal model are shown below.
The steps for defining a plate with a Contact resistance thermal model are as follows:
1. If you want to specify an additional resistance, select Additional resistance. You can specify the Resist-
ance by selecting one of the following options from the drop-down list and entering appropriate values:
• Conductance allows you to specify a value for the Conductance. The inverse of this value will be used
to calculate the contact resistance of the plate.
• Thermal resistance allows you to specify a value for the Thermal resistance to heat transfer.
• Thermal impedance allows you to specify a value for the Thermal impedance. ANSYS Icepak computes
the thermal resistance of the plate as Z/A where Z is the thermal impedance of the plate and A is the
area of the plate.
• Thickness allows you to specify a value for the Effective thickness of a specified Solid material. The
values of the thickness and the thermal conductivity of the solid material will be used to calculate the
contact resistance of the plate. The resistance is computed as d/k, where d is the effective thickness
of the plate and k is the thermal conductivity of the solid material (defined as part of the properties
of the solid material specified for the plate).
By default, the Solid material is specified as default for the plate. This means that the material
specified as the Solid material for the plate is defined under Default solid in the Basic para-
meters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the Solid ma-
terial for the plate, select a material from the Solid material drop-down list. See Material
Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
2. Enter a value for the Total power dissipated by the plate.
Conducting Thin Plates

To specify a conducting thin plate, select Conducting thin under Thermal model in the Plates
panel. The user inputs for the Conducting thin thermal model are shown below.
The steps for defining a plate with a Conducting thin thermal model are as follows:
1. Specify the Effective thickness for the plate.
2. Specify the Solid material for the plate. By default, this is specified as default for the plate. This means
that the material specified as the Solid material for the plate is defined under Default solid in the Basic
for the plate, select a material from the Solid material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339)
Plates
3. Specify the total power dissipated by the plate. Select the options from the drop-down list. There are
two options for specifying the total power:
• Constant allows you to specify a constant value of the Total power.
• Temp dependent allows you to specify heat as a function of temperature. This option is not available
if the Transient option is selected. There are two options to specify the temperature dependence of
power: linear and piecewise linear.
Figure 17.5: The Temperature dependent power Panel
Select Temp dependent across from Total power in the Plates panel. Click Edit next to Temp
dependent to open the Temperature dependent power panel (Figure 17.5: The Temperature
dependent power Panel (p. 462)).
specify a value for the constant C. The value in the equation shown in the panel is either the
Total power or the power Per unit area/volume specified in the Plates panel. Define the
temperature range for which the function is valid by entering values (in Kelvin) for Low tem-
perature and High temperature. The value of the ambient temperature is defined under
Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)). If the temper-
ature exceeds the specified value of High temperature, then the power is given by substituting
the value of High temperature into the equation at the top of the Temperature dependent
power panel. If the temperature falls below the specified value of Low temperature, then the
power is given by substituting the value of Low temperature into the equation at the top of
the Temperature dependent power panel.
ature exceeds the highest temperature specified in the curve, then the power is given by specified
power at the highest temperature. Similarly if the temperature drops below the lowest temper-
ature specified in the curve, the power is given by specified power at the lowest temperature.
Figure 17.6: Curve specification Panel
Note:
– The piecewise linear option is available only for Conducting thin plates.
– For the piecewise linear option, the outside total power value is not used in computing
Adiabatic Thin Plates

An adiabatic plate does not conduct heat in any direction, either normal to the plate or along the
plane of the plate.
To specify an adiabatic thin plate, select Adiabatic thin under Thermal model in the Plates panel.
There are no additional inputs for an adiabatic thin plate.
Fluid Plates
To specify a fluid plate, select Fluid under Thermal model in the Plates panel. The only input for
this model is the Thickness of the plate.
Note that the Side specification options in the Plates panel are not available with the Fluid thermal
model. A fluid plate can only be used to cut a hole into a solid plate, as shown in Figure 17.7: Using
a Fluid Plate (p. 464).
Plates
Figure 17.7: Using a Fluid Plate
17.6.2. User Inputs for the Low- and High-Side Properties of the Plate
ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify different physical characteristics for each side of the plate. If you
select Low side next to Side specification in the Plates panel (Figure 17.3: The Plates Panel (Properties
Tab) (p. 457)) and then click Edit, ANSYS Icepak will open the Low side surface properties panel
(Figure 17.8: The Low side surface properties Panel (p. 464)). If you select High side and then click
Edit, ANSYS Icepak will open the High side surface properties panel, which is identical to the Low
side surface properties panel.
Figure 17.8: The Low side surface properties Panel
To define the physical characteristics for the low side or the high side of the plate, follow the steps
below.
1. Specify the surface Material to be used for the current side of the plate. This material defines the
roughness and emissivity for this side of the plate. By default, this is specified as default, which means
that the material specified for the side of the plate is defined in the Basic parameters panel (see Default
Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material for the current side of the plate, select
a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
2. (For conducting thick or hollow thick plates only) If you want to specify an additional resistance to heat
transfer for the current side of the plate, select Resistance. You can specify the resistance by selecting
one of the following options from the drop-down list and entering appropriate values:
• Conductance allows you to specify a value for the Conductance (Conductance = hA). The inverse of
this value will be used to calculate the additional resistance of the current side of the plate.
• Thermal resistance allows you to specify a value for the thermal resistance (Thermal resistance =
). This value will be used to calculate the additional resistance of the current side of the plate.
• Thermal impedance allows you to specify a value for the Thermal impedance. ANSYS Icepak computes
the thermal resistance of the plate as Z/A where Z is the thermal impedance of the plate and A is the
area of the plate.
• Thickness allows you to specify a value for the Thickness of a specified Solid material. The values
of the thickness and the thermal conductivity of the solid material will be used to calculate the addi-
tional resistance of the current side of the plate.
3. If the side of the plate is subject to radiative heat transfer, select Radiation. You can modify the default
radiation characteristics of the plate (for example, the view factor). See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for
details on radiation modeling.
Chapter 18: Walls
Walls are objects that constitute all or part of the cabinet boundary. Walls can be specified with respect
to their thickness, velocity, and heat flux. Wall geometries include rectangular, 2D polygon, circular, in-
clined and CAD.
By default, the cabinet sides are zero-thickness walls with zero velocity and zero heat flux boundary
conditions. To modify the characteristics of the cabinet boundaries, you must create and specify thermal
conditions on external walls. To construct a wall internal to the enclosure, you must specify a thickness
for the wall. The inner surface of an external wall is in direct contact with the enclosure fluid, and its
outer surface is exposed to the external environment. A no-slip velocity boundary condition is applied
at the inner surface of the wall. For turbulent flows, you can also specify the surface roughness of the
wall, the effect of which is to increase resistance to the flow.
Throughout this section, reference will be made to the inside and outside of a wall. The inside of the
wall is the side in contact with the fluid in the cabinet; the outside of the wall is the side exposed to
the conditions external to the cabinet. For a wall with zero thickness, the inner and outer sides of the
wall coincide; however, the inner and outer surface materials can be different.
To configure a wall in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and dimensions),
velocity, thickness, thermal characteristics, and the material the wall is made from.
Information about the characteristics of a wall is presented in the following sections:
• Wall Velocity (p. 469)
• Thermal Boundary Conditions (p. 469)
• External Thermal Conditions (p. 472)
• Constructing Multifaceted Walls (p. 474)
• Adding a Wall to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 476)

Wall location and dimension parameters vary according to the wall geometry. Wall geometries include
rectangular, 2D polygon, circular, inclined and CAD. These geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312).
• Wall Thickness (p. 468)
Walls
18.1.1. Wall Thickness

For walls with non-zero thickness, ANSYS Icepak automatically extends the wall inward or outward
from the specified plane of the wall. The direction of this extension is determined by the sign of the
specified thickness relative to the coordinate axis normal to the plane of the wall. If the thickness
value is positive, then the expansion is in the positive direction of the coordinate axis normal to the
wall, as shown in Figure 18.1: Wall Thickness Direction (p. 468). If the thickness value is negative, the
expansion is in the negative direction.
Figure 18.1: Wall Thickness Direction
Walls with non-zero thickness can conduct heat either through or along the plane of the wall, and
can do so anisotropically, that is, according to thermal conductivities specific to each direction (defined
as part of the properties of the solid material specified for the wall). They must possess a physical
thickness so that ANSYS Icepak can mesh the interior of the wall. Effective-thickness walls have the
same properties as non-zero-thickness walls, except that they have no physical thickness; they can
possess only an effective thickness.

ANSYS Icepak assumes, by default, that all surfaces of a wall in contact with a fluid are hydrodynamically
smooth, and applies standard no-slip boundary conditions. For turbulent-flow simulations in which
roughness is significant, however, you can specify a roughness factor for the entire wall. This roughness
factor is defined as part of the properties of the surface material specified for the wall. The purpose of
the roughness factor is to approximate the average height of the surface texture on the wall.
Thermal Boundary Conditions
18.3. Wall Velocity

In most cases, walls represent stationary objects, but occasionally circumstances arise in which the
model requires walls that move. For example, if the moving belt shown in Figure 18.2: Moving
Walls (p. 469) is located at the cabinet boundary, it can be represented as a wall moving at a fixed velocity.
Moving walls always have zero thickness.
Figure 18.2: Moving Walls
When a wall is specified as moving, it is allowed to move only in the plane of the wall, that is, there is
no translation of the wall outside its plane. Also, fluid in contact with the wall is pulled along with the
wall because of the no-slip condition. In such cases, the velocity of the wall relative to the stationary
enclosure must be set in the plane of the wall. For the example shown in Figure 18.2: Moving Walls (p. 469),
the wall must be specified with a velocity of V in the x direction and zero velocity in the y direction.
ANSYS Icepak automatically imposes a velocity of zero in the direction normal to the plane of the wall
(the z direction in this example).
18.4. Thermal Boundary Conditions

External walls can have two distinct thermal boundary conditions: a specified heat flux or a fixed tem-
perature. In both cases, the wall is assumed to have zero thickness by default. When neither parameter
is known, the external wall can model conditions applied to the outer side of the wall that enable ANSYS
Walls
Icepak to compute the heat flux and the temperature on the inside of the wall, as shown in Fig-
ure 18.3: Thermal Boundary Conditions (p. 470).
Figure 18.3: Thermal Boundary Conditions
• Specified Heat Flux (p. 470)
• Specified Temperature (p. 471)
18.4.1. Specified Heat Flux

The simplest thermal boundary condition for a wall is that of a specified heat flux. In this case, the
amount of heat that can pass through the wall is specified as a constant value or as a spatial
boundary profile, expressed as power per unit area (heat flux). For an adiabatic wall, the heat flux is
zero. For walls with non-zero thickness, the heat flux is applied on the outer surface of the wall, as
shown in Figure 18.4: Specified Heat Flux or Specified Temperature (p. 471). An example of the use of
this capability might be modeling solar loading. For transient problems, you can specify the variation
of heat flux with time.
Thermal Boundary Conditions
Figure 18.4: Specified Heat Flux or Specified Temperature
18.4.2. Specified Temperature

In most cases, the temperature at the inside surface of a wall is unknown. However, if the temperature
is known (for example, if the wall abuts some material or object whose absolute temperature is known
or easily determined), the temperature can be directly applied as the thermal boundary condition at
the inside surface of the wall, either as a constant value or as a spatial boundary profile. For walls
with non-zero thickness, the temperature is applied on the outer surface of the wall, as shown in
Figure 18.4: Specified Heat Flux or Specified Temperature (p. 471). For transient problems, you can
specify the variation of temperature with time.
Walls
18.5. External Thermal Conditions

In some situations, neither the heat flux nor the temperature on the inner side of the external wall is
known. In this case, the external wall and the heat transfer from the surface of the wall to the external
environment can be modeled as a wall with a specified thickness. Alternatively, a zero-thickness wall
can be specified with a convective and/or radiative heat transfer condition applied directly to the wall.
To compute heat transfer through a wall with non-zero thickness to the external environment, the energy
equation is used. For these calculations, you must specify the conductivity of the wall (k, defined as
part of the properties of the solid material specified for the wall) and the wall thickness (see Fig-
ure 18.5: Wall with Non-Zero Thickness (p. 472)). For transient problems, you must also specify the
density and specific heat of the wall (defined as part of the properties of the solid material specified
for the wall).
Figure 18.5: Wall with Non-Zero Thickness
Heat can also be lost or gained through the outside surface of an external wall by convective heat
transfer and radiative heat transfer. The inner surface of an external wall can also convect heat or radiate
to objects within the cabinet. These two types of heat transfer conditions can be applied to walls with
either zero or non-zero thickness.
• Convective Heat Transfer (p. 472)
• Radiative Heat Transfer (p. 473)
18.5.1. Convective Heat Transfer

The convective heat transfer boundary condition can be written as
External Thermal Conditions
(18.1)
where qconv is the heat gain or loss, hc is the heat transfer coefficient, Twall is the computed wall
temperature, and Tambient is the external specified ambient temperature, that is, the temperature of
the external fluid. From Equation 18.1 (p. 473), if the wall temperature is greater than the ambient
temperature, an amount of heat proportional to the temperature difference is lost to the environment
from the cabinet. Similarly, if the wall temperature is lower than the external temperature, heat is
transferred into the cabinet. In contrast, the specified heat flux option prescribes a specified heat gain
or loss at the wall independent of the wall or ambient temperatures.
The heat transfer coefficient can be specified as a constant value, as a spatial profile, or as a function
of temperature. For transient problems, you can specify the variation of the heat transfer coefficient
with time.
In circumstances where heat transfer through the wall is not required (for example, if the wall is thin
and made of a highly conducting material), the thickness of the wall can be set to zero. In this case,
the convective heat transfer boundary condition is applied directly to the inside surface of the external
wall.
18.5.2. Radiative Heat Transfer

The radiative heat transfer boundary condition provides for heat transfer between the room wall and
a remote surface. It can be written as
(18.2)
where qrad is the heat gain or loss due to radiation (that is, the net radiant flux from the wall surface),
Tremote is the temperature of the remote surface, σ is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant, F is a view factor
specifying the fraction of radiant energy that is intercepted by the wall, and e is the surface emissivity
of the wall (defined as part of the properties of the surface material specified for the wall). An example
of the use of this capability might be a room within a room whose walls are at a constant temperature,
as shown in Figure 18.6: Radiative Heat Transfer (p. 474). In this case, the room walls exchange radiant
energy with the remote surfaces.
Walls
Figure 18.6: Radiative Heat Transfer
In circumstances where heat transfer through the wall is not required (for example, if the wall is thin
and made of a highly conducting material), the thickness of the wall can be set to zero. In this case
the radiative heat transfer boundary condition is applied directly to the inside surface of the external
wall.
18.6. Constructing Multifaceted Walls

When an adiabatic block is used to change the shape or size of a cabinet, or to mask a portion of the
cabinet to be excluded from the computational domain, the sides of the block represent enclosure
boundaries. You can position an external wall on one or more of the block surfaces, as shown in Fig-
ure 18.7: Blocked-Out Volumes (p. 475). The main reason for using a wall in this way is that an external
wall might provide better control of heat transfer behavior than the surface of a block.
Constructing Multifaceted Walls
Figure 18.7: Blocked-Out Volumes
It is not necessary to separate an external wall into sections in order to accommodate vents, openings,
or fans. ANSYS Icepak automatically removes the wall definition from the space occupied by the vents,
openings, or fans; in effect, it cuts the appropriately sized holes in the wall to accommodate these objects,
as shown in Figure 18.8: Wall with Overlaid Objects (p. 475).
Figure 18.8: Wall with Overlaid Objects
This same approach can be used to construct walls that are made up of different materials. Consider
the example shown in Figure 18.9: Multifaceted Walls (p. 476), where a wall is composed of two different
materials: Wall 1 is made of Material 1 and Wall 2 is made of Material 2. Wall 1 should be created first,
then Wall 2. The second wall definition will override the first when Wall 2 is overlaid on Wall 1, effectively
cutting a comparably-sized area out of Wall 1 and substituting Wall 2 into the hole.
Walls
Figure 18.9: Multifaceted Walls
18.7. Adding a Wall to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a wall in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar and
then click the button to open the Walls panel, shown in Figure 18.10: The Walls Panel (Geometry
Tab) (p. 477) and Figure 18.11: The Walls Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 478).
Adding a Wall to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 18.10: The Walls Panel (Geometry Tab)
Walls
Figure 18.11: The Walls Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a wall to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a wall. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an Ob-
2. Change the description of the wall, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the wall, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the wall. There are five different kinds of
geometry available for walls in the Shape drop-down list. The inputs for these geometries are described
5. In the Properties tab, specify the type of the wall by selecting Stationary, Symmetry, or Moving next to
Wall type. The lower part of the panel will change depending on your selection of the Wall type.
6. Specify the characteristics related to the selected Wall type. These options are described in the following
sections.
• User Inputs for a Symmetry Wall (p. 479)
• User Inputs for a Stationary or Moving Wall (p. 479)
18.7.1. User Inputs for a Symmetry Wall

The velocity component normal to a symmetry wall is set to zero. This option allows you to model
half of a cabinet in the case where the cabinet is geometrically symmetric about a center plane. When
the Symmetry option is selected, you cannot specify any thermal data and ANSYS Icepak automatically
specifies a zero heat flux condition at the symmetry plane.
There are no additional inputs for a symmetry wall.
18.7.2. User Inputs for a Stationary or Moving Wall

To specify a stationary wall or a moving wall, select Stationary or Moving next to Wall type in the
Walls panel. The user inputs for a stationary wall are shown below. The user inputs for a moving wall
are almost identical to those for a stationary wall, except that the motion of the wall must also be
specified.
The steps for defining a stationary wall or a moving wall are as follows:
1. Select Stationary or Moving to specify whether the wall is stationary or moving. For a stationary wall,
the flow velocity is zero at the wall.
2. (For stationary wall only) Specify the Wall thickness. When the wall thickness is non-zero, the heat flow
through the wall is computed based on the conductivity of the wall, the computed inner wall temperature
on the inner surface of the wall, and the conditions applied at the outer surface of the wall.
If the thickness is non-zero, the wall is expanded inward or outward from the plane of the wall.
If the thickness is positive, the wall is expanded to the specified thickness in the positive direction
of the coordinate axis that is normal to the plane of the wall. If the thickness is specified with a
negative sign, the expansion is in the negative direction of the coordinate axis normal to the plane
of the wall.
Walls
3. (For stationary rectangular walls only) Select the Effective thickness option if you want the specified
Wall thickness to be only an effective thickness.
4. (For stationary wall only) If you specify a non-zero thickness for the wall, you must also specify the Solid
material for the wall. By default, this is specified as default for the wall. This means that the material
specified as the Solid material for the wall is defined under Default solid in the Basic parameters
panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the Solid material for the wall,
select a material from the Solid material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on
5. Specify the External material for the wall. By default, this is specified as default for the wall. This means
that the material specified as the External material for the wall is defined under Default surface in
the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the Ex-
ternal material for the wall, select a material from the External material drop-down list. The surface
roughness and emissivity are defined as part of the surface material parameters. You can edit these values
if you select Edit definition in the materials list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
6. If you specify a non-zero thickness for a stationary wall, or if you select a moving wall, you can specify
the Internal material for the wall. By default, this is specified as default for the wall. This means that
the material specified as the Internal material for the wall is defined under Default surface in the Basic
parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the Internal mater-
ial for the wall, select a material from the Internal material drop-down list. The surface roughness and
emissivity are defined as part of the surface material parameters. You can edit these values if you select
Edit definition in the materials list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
Note:
For a zero-thickness wall, changing the External material does not automatically
change the Internal material. In these cases, the Internal material will be set to the
default surface material unless you have changed the Internal material prior to spe-
cifying the zero-thickness wall.
7. (For moving wall only) Set the Velocity vector (X, Y, Z) for the movement of the wall. Only the components
of velocity in the plane of the wall can be set to non-zero values. The component of velocity normal to
the wall is automatically set to zero.
8. Specify the Thermal specification for the wall. There are three options:
• Select Heat flux from the External conditions drop-down list, if not already selected, and specify the
Heat flux for the wall. To specify a uniform fixed rate of heat transfer through the wall, enter a value
in the Heat flux text entry box. To define a spatial profile for the rate of heat transfer through the wall,
select Profile and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described below).
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the Heat flux as a function of time.
This option is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic
parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the heat flux, select Transient and click
Edit in the Walls panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simula-
tions.
Note:
ANSYS Icepak cannot use both a spatial profile and a transient profile for the outside
heat flux. If you specify both profile types, ANSYS Icepak will use the transient profile
and ignore the spatial profile.
• Select Temperature from the External conditions drop-down list and specify the Temperature of
the wall. To specify a uniform fixed temperature on the outer surface of the wall, enter a value in the
Temperature text entry box. To define a spatial profile for the temperature on the outer surface of
the wall, select Profile and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described below).
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the Temperature as a function of
time. This option is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic
parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the outside temperature, select Transient
and click Edit in the Walls panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient
simulations.
Note:
ANSYS Icepak cannot use both a spatial profile and a transient profile for the outside
temperature. If you specify both profile types, ANSYS Icepak will use the transient
profile and ignore the spatial profile.
• Select Heat transfer coefficient from the External conditions drop-down list and specify the external
conditions for the wall. The Wall external thermal conditions option allows you to account for heat
loss or gain at the outer surface of the wall through convective or radiative heat transfer. To specify
the external conditions for the wall, click Edit. ANSYS Icepak will open the Wall external thermal
conditions panel (Figure 18.12: The Wall external thermal conditions Panel (p. 482)).
Walls
Figure 18.12: The Wall external thermal conditions Panel
a. To activate convective heat transfer at the outer surface of the wall, select Heat transfer coeff in
the Wall external thermal conditions panel. To specify a uniform heat transfer coefficient, enter
the value of the heat transfer coefficient (hc in Equation 18.1 (p. 473)) in the text entry field and select
the Constant option (default). Enter the Ref temperature (T remote in Equation 18.2 (p. 473)). The
value of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters
panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)). To define a spatial profile for the heat transfer coefficient, select
the Spatial profile option and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described below).
To define a heat transfer coefficient that varies as a function of temperature, select the Temp depend-
ent option and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described below). You can also
define the heat transfer coefficient as a function of temperature difference (relative to the ambient
temperature). To define a heat transfer coefficient that varies as a function of temperature difference,
select dT dependent and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described below).
The heat transfer coefficient can also be set automatically using existing empirical Nusselt
correlations for forced convection and natural convection flows. These correlations depend
on the geometry of the wall, fluid properties, Reynolds number (for forced convection flows),
and Rayleigh number (for natural convection flows). To specify the heat transfer coefficient
using correlations select the Use correlation option and click Edit to open the Flow dependent
heat transfer panel (Figure 18.13: The Flow dependent heat transfer Panel (p. 483)).
Note:
Use correlation is not available when wall shape is CAD.
Figure 18.13: The Flow dependent heat transfer Panel
In this panel, you can select either Forced convection (default) or Natural convection.
• If you have selected the Forced convection option
i. To change the default Fluid material for the external flow, select a material from the Fluid
material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
ii. Select Turbulent or Laminar flow regime in the Flow type drop-down list.
iii. To specify the Flow direction, select the appropriate direction from the Flow direction drop-
down list. For a wall object, the flow can be in either direction in the plane of the wall.
iv. Specify the type of the heat transfer coefficient used. For forced convection situations, there
are empirical correlations to define a local value of the heat transfer coefficient. To specify a
locally varying heat transfer coefficient, select the Local values option. To specify an average
heat transfer coefficient for the entire wall surface, select the Average value option.
v. To specify the free stream velocity, enter the value of the external flow velocity in the Free
stream velocity text entry field.
• If you have selected the Natural convection option
i. To change the default Fluid material for the external natural convection flow, select a material
from the Fluid material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
ii. Specify the ambient external temperature for the fluid surrounding the wall in the Ambient
temperature entry field.
iii. Specify the orientation of the surface with respect to gravity. The heat transfer coefficients for
natural convection flow depend on the orientation of the wall surface relative to the direction
of gravity. To specify the orientation of the surface, select one of the following three options
in the Surface drop-down list: Vertical, Top, and Bottom.
For example, if gravity is in the negative Y direction, the XY and YZ planes are the Ver-
tical surfaces, the high XZ plane is the Top surface, and the low XZ plane is the Bottom
surface. To specify the direction of the gravity, select the appropriate axis from the
Gravity direction drop-down list.
Walls
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the Heat trans coeff as a
function of time. This option is available if you have selected Transient under Time
variation in the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the heat
transfer coefficient, select Transient and click Edit in the Wall external thermal condi-
tions panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
Note:
ANSYS Icepak cannot use both a spatial profile and a transient profile for the
heat transfer coefficient. If you specify both profile types, ANSYS Icepak will
use the transient profile and ignore the spatial profile.
Specify the ambient external temperature (that is, Tambient in Equation 18.1 (p. 473)) next
to Ambient temperature for the convective heat transfer boundary condition. The value
of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic para-
meters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
b. To activate radiative exchange of heat between the exterior surface of the wall and a remote surface,
select Radiation in the Wall external thermal conditions panel. Then specify the following para-
meters: Ref temperature (T remote in Equation 18.2 (p. 473)) and View factor. The value of the ambient
Values (p. 260)).
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the reference temperature as a
function of time. To define the variation of reference temperature as a function of time, select
Transient next to Ref temperature, and click Edit. This will open the Transient temperature
panel. For details on specifying the transient temperature see User Inputs for Transient Simu-
lations (p. 627).
View factor of the remote surface (that is, the fraction of radiant energy that is intercepted by
the wall). The default View factor is 1.0.
c. Click Done in the Wall external thermal conditions panel to accept your changes and close the
panel.
9. (optional) Specify the radiative heat transfer parameters for the inner surface of the wall. This option is
available if you have selected On next to Radiation in the Basic parameters panel. You can modify the
default radiation characteristics of the inner surface of the wall (for example, the view factor) by using
the Radiation specification panel. To open this panel, select Inner surface radiation in the Walls
panel and then click Edit. See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for details on radiation modeling.
10. For Stationary walls, the flow velocity at the wall is always set to zero (i.e., a no-slip boundary condition).
For models where the no-slip condition is not appropriate (for example, in flows where the static pressure
is very low), you can enable Slip flow boundary, which sets only the normal component of the velocity
to zero at the wall.
18.7.2.1. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Spatial Boundary Profile
You can define a spatial boundary profile using the Curve specification panel (Figure 18.14: The
Curve specification Panel (p. 485)). To open the Curve specification panel, select Profile in the
Walls panel or Spatial profile in the Wall external thermal conditions panel, and click Edit.
You can also define the variation of the heat transfer coefficient with temperature or temperature
difference using the Curve specification panel. To open the Curve specification panel, select
Temperature or dT dependent in the Wall external thermal conditions panel, and click Edit.
To define a spatial boundary profile, specify a list of (x, y, z) coordinates and the corresponding
values in the Curve specification panel. For example, the first line in Figure 18.14: The Curve spe-
cification Panel (p. 485) specifies an outside heat flux of 1 W/m2 at (0.25, 0.25, 0). The data in Fig-
ure 18.14: The Curve specification Panel (p. 485) specify a variation of heat flux on the plane
0.25≤x≤0.75, 0.25≤y≤0.75, z=0. The values in the right-hand column are the rate of heat transfer
through the wall, the temperature on the outer surface of the wall, or the heat transfer coefficient
at the outer surface of the wall, depending on your selection under Thermal data in the Walls
panel.
To define a temperature/heat transfer coefficient curve, specify a list of temperature/heat transfer

coefficient pairs in the Curve specification panel. It is important to give the numbers in pairs, but
the spacing between numbers is not important.
Click Accept when you have finished defining the profile or curve; this will store the values and
close the Curve specification panel. ANSYS Icepak will interpolate the data you provide in the
Curve specification panel to create a profile for the whole boundary.
Note:
If the starting point of the wall object is located at ( x0 y0 z0 ), then the first point
of the profile should be (x0 y0 z0 a0 ), where a0 is the corresponding value for that
point. However, if the first point in the profile has a different value, for example (x1
Walls
y1 z1 a0 ), ANSYS Icepak will automatically translate the first point to (x0 y0 z0 a0 ),

and the rest of the profile points will be shifted by (x1 −x0 , y1 −y0 , z1 −z0 ). This
translation of point locations will not affect the values of the variables (an ), and is
also useful if the opening is ever translated within the model. In this way, you will
not have to recreate the profile file or re-enter values in the Curve specification
panel. This translation feature also applies to other objects that allow the specification
of point profiles (that is, openings, blocks, and resistances).
To load a previously defined profile or curve, click on Load. (See Saving a Contour Plot (p. 908) for
details on saving contour data and using them as a profile.) This will open the Load curve file se-
lection dialog box. Select the file containing the profile or curve data and click Accept. See File
Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file. If you know the units used in the profile
or curve data you are loading, you should select the appropriate units in the Curve specification
panel before you load the profile or curve data. If you want to view the imported data after you
have loaded it, using different units than the default units in the Curve specification panel, select
the relevant Fix values options and then select the appropriate units from the unit definition lists.
If you want to load a curve file that you have created outside of ANSYS Icepak, you will need to
make sure that the first three lines of the file before the data contain the following information:
2. the unit specifications for the file, which can be obtained from the Curve specification panel (for ex-
ample, units m W/m2)
units m W/m2
Note:
• If you want to load a curve from an Excel file, make sure that you also save the file as
in the Preferences panel. A description of interpolation methods can be found in Miscel-
laneous Options (p. 239).
To save a profile or curve, click Save. This will open the Save curve dialog box, in which you can
specify the filename and directory to which the profile or curve data are to be saved.
Chapter 19: Periodic Boundaries
Periodic boundary conditions are used when the physical geometry of interest and the expected pattern
of the flow/thermal solution have a periodically repeating nature. ANSYS Icepak allows for translational
periodic boundaries with no pressure drop across the periodic planes. ANSYS Icepak does not allow for
rotational periodic boundaries or periodic boundaries with imposed pressure drop across the periodic
planes.
Periodic boundary conditions are used when the flows across two opposite planes in your computational
model are identical. Figure 19.1: Example of Translational Periodicity - Physical Domain (p. 487) illustrates
a typical application of translational periodic boundary conditions. In this example, the boundaries form
periodic planes in a rectilinear geometry. Periodic planes are always used in pairs as illustrated in Fig-
ure 19.2: Example of Translational Periodicity - Modeled Domain (p. 488).
Figure 19.1: Example of Translational Periodicity - Physical Domain
Periodic Boundaries
Figure 19.2: Example of Translational Periodicity - Modeled Domain
ANSYS Icepak treats the flow at a periodic boundary as though the opposing periodic plane is a direct
neighbor to the cells adjacent to the first periodic boundary. Thus, when calculating the flow through
the periodic boundary adjacent to a fluid cell, the flow conditions at the fluid cell adjacent to the op-
posite periodic plane are used.
Information about the characteristics of a periodic boundary is presented in the following sections:
• Adding a Periodic boundary to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 489)

The location and dimension parameters for a periodic boundary vary according to the geometry of the
periodic planes. Periodic boundary geometries include rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, and inclined.
These geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312).
Note:
The geometries of both sections of a periodic pair making up a periodic boundary must be
identical that is, if a periodic surface, Side0, is rectangular, its corresponding periodic pair
surface, Side1 must be rectangular and of the same dimensions.
Adding a Periodic boundary to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
19.2. Adding a Periodic boundary to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a periodic boundary in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation
toolbar and then click the button to open the Periodic boundaries panel, shown in Figure 19.3: The
Periodic boundaries Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 489). ]
ANSYS Icepak provides the ability to calculate streamwise-periodic (fully-developed) fluid flow. These
flows are encountered in a variety of applications, including flows in compact heat exchanger channels
and flows across tube banks. In such flow configurations, the geometry varies in a repeating manner
along the direction of the flow, leading to a periodic fully-developed flow regime in which the flow
pattern repeats in successive cycles. Other examples of streamwise-periodic flows include fully-developed
flow in pipes and ducts. These periodic conditions are achieved after a sufficient entrance length, which
depends on the flow Reynolds number and geometric configuration.
Note:
ANSYS Icepak supports translational periodicity.
Figure 19.3: The Periodic boundaries Panel (Geometry Tab)
Periodic Boundaries
Figure 19.4: The Periodic boundaries Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding periodic boundaries to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a periodic boundary. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and
Copying an Object (p. 306) for details on copying an existing object.
2. Change the description of the periodic boundary, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the periodic boundary, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. On the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of both surfaces, Side0 and Side1 of the
periodic boundary. There are four different kinds of geometry available in the Shape drop-down list. The
inputs for these geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312). See Resizing an Object (p. 291) for details
on resizing an object and Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object.
Note:
You must specify identical geometries and dimensions for the Side0 and Side1
sections of a periodic boundary.
5. On the Properties tab, select Streamwise periodicity to enable the streamwise periodicity options.
Adding a Periodic boundary to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
6. Select Mass flow to specify the mass flow rate or Pressure gradient (Pa/m) to specify the pressure
gradient.
• If you selected the Mass Flow, enter the desired value for the mass flow rate.
• If you selected the Pressure gradient, enter the desired value for the pressure gradient in SI units (Pa/m).
7. Specify a Bulk temperature for the temperature of the fluid upsteam of the periodic boundary.
8. Click Done.
Chapter 20: Blocks
A block is a three-dimensional modeling object. Block geometries include prism (rectangular box), cyl-
inder, 3D polygon, ellipsoid, elliptical cylinder and 3D CAD. Block types include solid, hollow, fluid, and
network.
Physical and thermal characteristics that need to be specified vary according to the block type. All types
of blocks (or individual sides of the blocks) can exchange radiation with other objects in the model.
Blocks exist within the cabinet, so any part of their non-contact surfaces may be exposed to the enclosure
fluid. By default, the no-slip condition for fluid velocity applies at all block surfaces. For turbulent flows,
you can specify a roughness parameter.
To configure a solid, hollow, or fluid block in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location
and dimensions) and type, as well as its physical and thermal characteristics. For a network block, you
must specify the plane of the board (PCB) and define the thermal resistance network for the block.
Information about the characteristics of a block is presented in the following sections:
• Block Type (p. 493)
• Physical and Thermal Specifications (p. 495)
• Block-Combination Thermal Characteristics (p. 495)
• Network Blocks (p. 502)
• Adding a Block to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 505)

Block location and dimension parameters vary according to block geometry. Block geometries include
prism, cylinder, 3D polygon, ellipsoid, elliptical cylinder, and 3D CAD. These geometries are described
in Geometry (p. 312). Note that network blocks can only have prism geometries.
20.2. Block Type

There are four types of ANSYS Icepak blocks: solid, hollow, fluid, and network. Although they share
certain specifications, each is unique in purpose and characteristics:
• Solid blocks represent actual solid objects and can possess physical and thermal characteristics such as
density, specific heat, thermal conductivity, and total heat flux. ANSYS Icepak considers the interior of a
solid block to be part of the computational domain and includes the block internal temperature distribution
as part of the model solution.
Blocks
• Hollow blocks represent three-dimensional regions of the model for which only side characteristics are im-
portant. ANSYS Icepak does not mesh or solve for temperature or flow within regions bounded by the sides
of a hollow block. Hollow-block surfaces can be specified as adiabatic (impervious to heat flow) or as pos-
sessing a fixed, uniform temperature or heat flux.
• Fluid blocks are regions of the model where fluid properties can be specified independently of those specified
for the Default fluid in the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)).
Individual side parameters for fluid blocks are specified in the same manner as those for solid and hollow
blocks. If individual side parameters are specified on a side of a fluid block, a zero thickness wall is defined
for that side of the block.
• A network block is a simplified representation of an IC (integrated circuit) package. The common packages
are BGA (ball grid arrays), PGA (pin grid arrays), TSOP (thin small outline packages), and so on. Network
blocks are characterized as a network of thermal resistances connecting the junction (j) to the case (c) and
the printed circuit board (b). The region inside the package is replaced by this network representation and
the power assigned to the junction. A simple network block is shown in Figure 20.1: A Simple Network
Block (p. 494).
Figure 20.1: A Simple Network Block

ANSYS Icepak assumes, by default, that all surfaces of a block are hydrodynamically smooth, and applies
standard no-slip boundary conditions. For turbulent-flow simulations in which roughness is significant,
however, you can specify a roughness factor for the entire block or (for solid, hollow, and fluid blocks)
each individual side of the block. The roughness factor is defined as part of the properties of the surface
material specified for the block. The purpose of the roughness factor is to approximate the average
height of the surface texture on the block.
Block-Combination Thermal Characteristics
20.4. Physical and Thermal Specifications

Block physical and thermal specifications vary according to block type:
• Solid block specifications include parameters related to material properties.
• Hollow block specifications, on the other hand, include only parameters related to the block surface itself,
such as temperature, heat flux, species, and whether or not the surface is adiabatic.
• Fluid block specifications relate to the properties of the fluid within the block.
• Network block specifications include the junction-to-case resistance (Rjc ) and the junction-to-board resistance
(Rjb ). These are simplified representations of the complex composition of an IC package.
In addition to specifying parameters for the entire block, ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify parameters
for each individual side of the block for solid, hollow, and fluid blocks. Side-specific parameters include
those related to surface thermal characteristics (for example, temperature and heat flux) as well as radi-
ation.
If you specify the side of a block as adiabatic, ANSYS Icepak treats it as impervious to heat flow in the
direction normal to its surface. When a block side is specified as fixed temperature, ANSYS Icepak assigns
a constant temperature to the side. If you specify a block side as fixed heat, ANSYS Icepak assumes
that it emits or absorbs heat uniformly at a constant rate. You can specify a fixed heat flux in terms of
either total heat flux or heat flux per unit area.
Note:
You cannot specify parameters for individual sides for a network block.
20.5. Block-Combination Thermal Characteristics

Solid, hollow, and fluid blocks can be combined with other blocks and objects to achieve a wide variety
of complex shapes. In combining blocks to create custom objects, special care must be taken to ensure
that the assignment of thermal characteristics achieves the intended representation of the object being
modeled. The following examples illustrate the general rules that govern heat transfer in objects created
by combining two or more objects.
Note:
Network blocks should not overlap or be combined in any way. The rules of combination
for the solid, hollow, or fluid blocks do not apply to network blocks.
• Blocks with Coincident Surfaces (p. 496)
• Blocks with Intersecting Volumes (p. 497)
• A Block and an Intersecting Plate (p. 500)
• Blocks Positioned on an External Wall (p. 501)
• Cylinder, Polygon, Ellipsoid, or Elliptical Cylinder Blocks Positioned on a Prism Block (p. 501)
Blocks
20.5.1. Blocks with Coincident Surfaces

When a model involves two blocks with coincident surfaces (see Figure 20.2: Blocks with Coincident
Surfaces (p. 496)), ANSYS Icepak employs two basic rules to govern the thermal characteristics in the
region of contact:
Figure 20.2: Blocks with Coincident Surfaces
• If both blocks are specified as conducting solid blocks, ANSYS Icepak computes the amount of heat
transferred between the blocks. To apply a thermal resistance between the blocks at the contact surface
(representing, for example, a coating layer between the blocks), locate and specify a plate at the region
of coincidence (see Plates (p. 453)).
• When one (or both) of the blocks is specified as hollow, no heat transfer occurs across the coincident
surface. Figure 20.3: Heat Flux for Blocks with Coincident Surfaces (p. 497) shows an example configuration
where Block A is a non-conducting, solid block and Block B is a hollow block with a specified constant
heat flux. Block A insulates the coincident region with respect to heat flow, so heat is transferred away
from Block B only on those surfaces exposed to the enclosure fluid.
Figure 20.3: Heat Flux for Blocks with Coincident Surfaces
20.5.2. Blocks with Intersecting Volumes

Blocks with intersecting volumes follow rules similar to those outlined above for blocks with coincident
surfaces. Intersecting blocks, such as those shown in Figure 20.4: Blocks with Intersecting
Volumes (p. 498), however, differ from blocks with coincident surfaces in that the characteristics of
the intersecting region are those of the last block created.
Blocks
Figure 20.4: Blocks with Intersecting Volumes
Consider, for example, a block configuration such as that shown in Figure 20.5: Intersecting-Volume
Properties (p. 499), where Block B is created after Block A. The intersecting region (shaded) possesses
the characteristics and parameters of Block B, regardless of which block is solid, hollow, or fluid in
type, because Block B was the last block created.
Figure 20.5: Intersecting-Volume Properties
If Block A is specified as a conducting solid block with a specified heat flux and Block B is a hollow
block, ANSYS Icepak distributes the entire specified heat flux for Block A only in its non-intersecting
volume. If, on the other hand, Block A is hollow and Block B is a conducting solid block with a specified
heat flux, ANSYS Icepak distributes the power for Block B throughout its entire volume, including the
coincident region. If both blocks are conducting solid blocks, ANSYS Icepak distributes specified heat
flux and calculates temperature distributions throughout the entire volumes of both blocks, using
the thermal properties of Block B in the coincident region.
A Block and a Plate with Coincident Surfaces

When a block is positioned on a plate (see Figure 20.6: Block Positioned on a Plate (p. 500)), two rules
govern the manner in which the thermal characteristics of the plate affect those of the block:
Blocks
Figure 20.6: Block Positioned on a Plate
• If the block is a conducting solid block and the plate has a non-zero thickness, the plate can be considered
as a conducting solid block, and the rules governing blocks with coincident surfaces apply. If the plate is
specified with zero thickness, there is no heat transfer from the block to the plate.
• If the block is specified as fixed heat or fixed temperature, it can transfer heat to the plate but cannot receive
heat from the plate.
20.6. A Block and an Intersecting Plate

Blocks and plates can be combined in a number of ways to produce complex objects. For example, a
plate can be embedded in a block to introduce anisotropic conductivity. When a block and a plate in-
tersect (see Figure 20.7: Plate Intersecting a Block (p. 500)) two rules govern the manner in which the
thermal characteristics of the plate affect those of the block:
Figure 20.7: Plate Intersecting a Block
• The thermal characteristics of a plate intersecting a conducting solid block override those of the block, re-
gardless of which object is created first. A plate with zero conductivity, for example, acts as an insulator
within the block.
Cylinder, Polygon, Ellipsoid, or Elliptical Cylinder Blocks Positioned on a Prism Block
• If the block is specified as adiabatic, fixed heat, or fixed temperature, the presence of the plate has no effect
(that is, the portion of the plate within the block is ignored).
20.7. Blocks Positioned on an External Wall

When a block is located on an external wall (see Figure 20.8: Block on an External Wall (p. 501)), the
thermal interaction between the wall and block is governed by the following rules:
Figure 20.8: Block on an External Wall
• A conducting solid block on an external wall exchanges heat with the wall. If the block is specified as dissip-
ating power, the side coincident with the wall transfers its heat to the wall.
• If a block in contact with a wall is specified as adiabatic, there is no heat transfer between the block and the
wall. If the block is specified as fixed heat or fixed temperature, it can transfer heat to the wall but cannot
receive heat transferred from the wall.
20.8. Cylinder, Polygon, Ellipsoid, or Elliptical Cylinder Blocks Positioned

on a Prism Block
When a prism block is in surface contact with a cylinder, polygon, ellipsoid, or elliptical cylinder block
(see Figure 20.9: Multiple Blocks in Contact (p. 502)), the rules outlined above governing blocks with
coincident surfaces apply:
Blocks
Figure 20.9: Multiple Blocks in Contact
• If both blocks with coincident surfaces are designated as conducting solid blocks, ANSYS Icepak calculates
the amount of heat transferred between the blocks.
• If one (or both) blocks is non-conducting, no heat transfer occurs between the blocks, and ANSYS Icepak com-
putes heat transfer only from those surfaces exposed to the enclosure fluid as specified for each block. In
Figure 20.9: Multiple Blocks in Contact (p. 502), for example, if Block A is a non-conducting solid block and
Blocks B and C are conducting blocks, heat is not allowed to flow from Block B to Block C (or vice versa)
through Block A. Furthermore, the entire heat flux (if any) specified for Blocks B and C is transferred to the
fluid through the non-coincident surfaces.
20.9. Network Blocks

ANSYS Icepak provides four types of network representations to describe IC (integrated circuit) packages.
They are, in increasing order of complexity:
• Two-Resistor Model (p. 502)
• Star Network Model (p. 503)
• Fully Shunted Network Model (p. 504)
• General Network Model (p. 504)
20.9.1. Two-Resistor Model

This is the simplest type of network block. The details of the IC package composition are represented
by two resistance values: the junction-to-case (Rjc ) resistance and the junction-to-board (Rjb ) resistance.
The power dissipated by the package is assigned to the junction. A two-resistor network block is
shown in Figure 20.10: A Two-Resistor Network Block (p. 503).
Network Blocks
Figure 20.10: A Two-Resistor Network Block
20.9.2. Star Network Model

In this model, the junction-to-case resistance is separated into five resistances: one junction-to-case
resistance to the top of the case and four junction-to-case resistances to the sides of the case. The
four side resistances are assumed to have the same value. A star network block is shown in Fig-
ure 20.11: A Star Network Block (p. 503).
Figure 20.11: A Star Network Block
Blocks
20.9.3. Fully Shunted Network Model

This model builds on the star network model by providing shunt resistances between adjacent sides.
This represents a more complex thermal path within the IC package. It is assumed that all the shunt
resistance values are the same, that is, the composition of the IC package is symmetric. A fully shunted
network block is shown in Figure 20.12: A Fully Shunted Network Block (p. 504).
Figure 20.12: A Fully Shunted Network Block
20.9.4. General Network Model

This is the most general representation of the resistive network model. It provides the possibility of
constructing complicated multi-chip packages by allowing up to three junctions or nodes. These
junctions are located along the line connecting (xS, yS, zS) to (xE, yE, zE), as shown in Figure 20.13: Loc-
ation of Junctions for a General Network Block (p. 505). Junction 1 is located one third of the way
along this line, junction 2 is located in the center of the line, and junction 3 is located two thirds of
the way along the line.
Adding a Block to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 20.13: Location of Junctions for a General Network Block
You can provide different values for each resistance and different power levels at each of the junction
nodes in the model. You can use a general network block to construct partially shunted network
models or to construct fully shunted network models where the shunt resistance values are different.
20.10. Adding a Block to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a block in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Blocks panel, shown in Figure 20.14: The Blocks Panel
(Geometry Tab) (p. 506) and Figure 20.15: The Blocks Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 507).
Blocks
Figure 20.14: The Blocks Panel (Geometry Tab)
Figure 20.15: The Blocks Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a block to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a block. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an
2. Change the description of the block, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the block, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the block. There are six different kinds of
geometry available for blocks in the Shape drop-down list. The lower part of the panel will change depend-
ing on the shape. The inputs for these geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312). See Resizing an Ob-
Blocks
ject (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning
an object.
Note:
You must specify a prism geometry for a network block.
For CAD shapes, specify the center and z-axis if you want to define a rotating object with some
given RPM. If you want to import ECAD into the CAD shape, you need to specify the Center, Z-axis,
and X-axis to orient the ECAD to the CAD shape. In this case, the z-axis is the stacking direction
and the x-axis is the local x-axis of the ECAD with respect to the CAD shape. To help define the axes,
you can double-click Z-axis or X-axis in the Blocks panel and then select positions on CAD shape
in the graphics window. The axes of the components are calculated from the selected points. For
the x-axis, select two points that correspond to the local x-axis of the ECAD. For the z-axis, select
three points to define a plane where the z-axis is the normal vector.
Note:
Icepak cannnot model trace layers separately.
5. (solid blocks only) You can import trace files (Gerber, ANF, BOOL+INFO, EDB, ODB++, and IPC2581) for
solid blocks by clicking on the Import ECAD file drop-down list. See Importing Trace Files (p. 183) for details.
6. In the Properties tab, specify the type of the block by selecting Solid, Hollow, Fluid, or Network next to
Block type. The lower part of the panel will change depending on your selection of Block type.
7. Define the Surface specification for a block of the selected type. The options for surface specification are
described in User Inputs for the Block Thermal Specification (p. 513).
8. (solid, hollow, and fluid blocks only) Define the Thermal specification (or Fluid specification) for a block
of the selected type. The options for thermal (or fluid) specification are described in User Inputs for the
Block Thermal Specification (p. 513).
9. (network blocks only) Define the thermal resistance network by selecting the Network type and specifying
the thermal resistances and the power dissipated by the junction. The types of network blocks and the
resistances are described in User Inputs for Network Blocks (p. 521).
10. (hollow blocks only) Specify the concentration of species at the surface of the block, if required. You can
input the concentrations of the species at the surface of the block using the Species concentrations
panel. To open this panel, select Species in the Blocks panel and click Edit. See Species Transport Model-
ing (p. 653) for details on modeling species transport.
11. (optional) Specify the Temperature limit to be used to provide a warning message in the Power and
temperature limit setup panel, if the temperature of the block exceeds this specified limit. See Power
and Temperature Limit Setup (p. 769) for more information on temperature limit setup.
Note:
If you are running a transient case involving a thermal resistance network, it is recommen-
ded that you use a network object, which allows you to specify heat capacities to the
network nodes. Heat capacity is an important property in transient analysis, and cannot
be specified for network blocks. See Networks (p. 373) for more information about network
objects.
• User Inputs for the Block Surface Specification (p. 509)
• User Inputs for the Block Thermal Specification (p. 513)
• User Inputs for Network Blocks (p. 521)
20.10.1. User Inputs for the Block Surface Specification

Define the Surface specification for a solid, hollow, or network block. The Surface specification can
optionally be included for a fluid block also. The surface specification allows you to specify thermal
and physical surface properties for the block. The user inputs for the surface specification are shown
below.
1. Specify the Surface material to be used for the block. This material defines the roughness and emissivity
of the surface of the block. By default, the Surface material is specified as default for each type of block.
This means that the material specified on the surface of the block is defined under Default surface in
the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the Surface
material for the block, select a material from the Surface material drop-down list. The surface roughness
parameters and emissivity are defined as part of the surface material parameters. You can edit these
values if you select Edit definition in the materials list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on
2. Choose the options to be included for the specification of the surface. The following options are available:
• (solid and hollow blocks only) Specify the value of the Area multiplier. This is the factor by which the
surface area of all sides of the block will be increased (for example, for modeling serrated surfaces),
and is set to 1 by default. Area multiplier enhances the diffusive flux for the faces associated with the
wall boundary zone only. The equation for the effective area of the block surface ( ), which is used
in the solution, is as follows
(20.1)
where is the Area multiplier and is the area of the object.
• Select Radiation to specify radiation as an active mode of heat transfer to and from the block. This
option is available if you have selected On next to Radiation in the Basic parameters panel. You can
modify the default radiation characteristics of the block (for example, the view factor) by using the
Radiation specification panel. To open this panel, select Radiation in the Properties tab of the
Blocks panel and then click Edit. See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for details on radiation modeling.
Blocks
• (solid, hollow, and fluid blocks only) Select Individual sides to specify thermal and physical surface
properties for individual sides of the block using the Individual side specification panel (Fig-
ure 20.16: The Individual side specification Panel (p. 510)). To open this panel, select Individual sides
under Surface specification in the Blocks panel and then click Edit.
Note:
Do not define Individual sides specifications for blocks touching zero-slack assem-
blies. To simulate these boundary conditions, create a 2D object, such as a wall or
plate.
Figure 20.16: The Individual side specification Panel
The steps for specifying thermal and physical properties for individual sides of the block are as
follows:
a. Select the side of the block where you want to define individual properties by selecting one of the
options under Which side. The Which side options vary according to block geometry as shown
in Table 20.1: Which side Options for Block Geometries (p. 511).
Table 20.1: Which side Options for Block Geometries
Geometry Which side options

Prism Min X, Max X, Min Y, Max Y, Min Z, Max Z
Cylinder Bottom, Top, Sides
Polygon Bottom, Top, Side 1, Side 2, Side 3, and so on.
Ellipsoid Sides, Inner
E. cylinder Sides
Note:
Note that the numbers of the sides of a polygon block are defined relative to the
lowest numbered adjacent vertex. Side 1, for example, is the side of the block
located between vertices 1 and 2. Side 2 is the side of the block located between
vertices 2 and 3.
Note:
The Block side or point specified is in respect to the starting point to the end of
the block.
b. Specify the Surface material to be used for the currently selected side of the block. This material
defines the roughness and emissivity of the surface of the block. By default, the Material is specified
as default. This means that the material specified on the currently selected surface is defined under
Default surface in the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materi-
als (p. 261)). To change the Material for an individual side, select a material from the Material drop-
c. Enable Thermal properties for the currently selected side of the block. The following Thermal
condition options are available:
– Fixed heat specifies a constant, uniform heat flux into or out of the block surface. You can define
the heat flux as either per unit surface area (Power / area) or as a fixed value (Total power) for
the currently selected side of the block.
– Fixed temperature specifies a constant uniform temperature for the currently selected side of
the block. The value of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the
Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify temperature as a function of
time. This option is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in the
Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for temperature, select Transient
and click Edit in the Individual side specification panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627)
for more details on transient simulations.
Blocks
– External conditions (solid blocks only) allows you to specify a Heat transfer coefficient and
an Reference temperature for the volume of space on the immediate exterior of the currently
selected side of the solid block. The value of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient
conditions in the Basic parameters panel.
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the heat transfer coefficient
as a function of time. This option is available if you have selected Transient under Time
variation in the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for external
conditions, select Transient and click Edit in the Individual side specification panel.
See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
– Internal conditions (hollow blocks only) allows you to specify a Heat transfer coefficient and
an Ambient temperature for the volume of space on the immediate interior of the currently
selected side of the hollow block.
– Area multiplier (solid or hollow blocks only) allows you to specify a factor by which the surface
area of the currently selected side of the block will be increased (for example, for modeling ser-
rated surfaces).
– Resistance (solid or hollow blocks only) allows you to specify an additional resistance to heat
transfer for the currently selected side of the block. You can specify the resistance by selecting
one of the following options from the drop-down list and entering appropriate values:
→ Conductance allows you to specify a value for the Conductance (Conductance= hA). The
inverse of this value will be used to calculate the additional resistance of the current side of
the plate.
→ Thermal resistance allows you to specify a value for the thermal resistance (Thermal resist-
ance = ). This value will be used to calculate the additional resistance of the current side
of the plate.
→ Thermal impedance allows you to specify a value for the thermal impedance (Thermal im-
pedance = ) This value will be used to compute the additional resistance of the current side
of the plate.
→ Thickness allows you to specify a value for the Thickness of a specified Solid material. The
values of the thickness and the thermal conductivity of the solid material will be used to cal-
culate the additional resistance of the current side of the plate.
Additionally, you can specify the current side to be a Conducting thin side. If this option
is enabled, the additional resistance to heat transfer can be applied anisotropically accord-
ing to the thermal conductivities specific to each direction.
Note:
The Surface material specification for the currently selected side does
not apply to Fluid blocks unless Thermal Properties are enabled.
d. Specify the Radiation properties for the currently selected side of the block. This option is available
if you have selected On next to Radiation in the Basic parameters panel. The properties that can
be specified for individual sides are the same as those that can be specified for the whole block.
See Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for details on radiation modeling.
e. Click Accept in the Individual side specification panel.
f. Repeat these steps for each side of the block.
20.10.2. User Inputs for the Block Thermal Specification

Define the Thermal specification for the block. The thermal specification allows you to specify thermal
properties for the block.
The following models are available:
Solid and Fluid Blocks

The user inputs for the thermal specification for a solid or fluid block are shown below.
1. Specify the Solid material for a solid block or the Fluid material for a fluid block. By default, both are
specified as default. This means that the solid and fluid materials specified are defined in the Basic
or Fluid material, select a new material from the relevant material drop-down list. See Material Proper-
ties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
2. (fluid blocks only) Specify whether the interior of the block is to be modeled as a laminar zone by toggling
the Laminar Flow option. Note that this option is only available when one of the turbulence models has
been enabled in the Basic parameters panel.
3. Specify the total power dissipated by the solid or fluid block. The options for specifying the total power
can be found in the drop-down list:
• Constant allows you to specify a constant value for the Total power.
• Temp dependent allows you to specify power as a function of temperature. There are two options
to specify the temperature dependence of power: linear and piecewise linear. Select Temp dependent
next to Total power in the Blocks panel, and enter a value of the Total power. Click Edit next to
Temp dependent; this opens the Temperature dependent power panel (Figure 20.17: The Temper-
ature dependent power Panel (p. 514)).
Blocks
Figure 20.17: The Temperature dependent power Panel
Choose either the Linear option or the Piecewise linear option. If you choose the Linear option
specify a value for the constant C. The value in the equation at the top of the Temperature
dependent power panel is the Total power specified in the Blocks panel. Define the temper-
ature range for which the function is valid by entering values (in Kelvin) for Low temperature
and High temperature. The value of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient
conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)). If the temperature ex-
ceeds the specified value of High temperature, then the power is given by substituting the
value of High temperature into the equation at the top of the Temperature dependent power
panel. If the temperature falls below the specified value of Low temperature, then the power
is given by substituting the value of Low temperature into the equation at the top of the
Temperature dependent power panel. Click Update to update the thermal specification of
the block.
ature exceeds the highest temperature specified in the curve, then the power is given by specified
power at the highest temperature. Similarly if the temperature drops below the lowest temper-
ature specified in the curve, the power is given by specified power at the lowest temperature.
For interactive editing and display of power-temperature curve, select the Graph editor option.
Figure 20.18: Curve specification Panel
Note:
For the piecewise linear option, the outside total power value is not used in comput-
ing the power at any temperature. It is only used for the linear option.
have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. Select Transient in
the drop-down list across from Total power and enter a value for the Total power. To edit the transient
parameters for the block, click Edit next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details
on transient simulations.
• Joule heating allows you to specify Joule heating type inputs (current and resistivity). Select Joule
heating in the drop-down list across from Total power in the Blocks panel. Click Edit next to Joule
heating; this opens the Joule heating power panel (Figure 20.19: The Joule heating power Panel with
Constant Inputs (p. 516)).
There are two options for specifying joule heating inputs namely, Constant and Varying. The
Constant specification implies that the current density is assumed constant throughout the
block. The Varying specification models the situation where the current density is varying and
will be computed in each mesh cell during the simulation. This approach solves an additional
conservation equation for the electric potential. It determines the joule heating power accurately
for objects with non-uniform cross sections and is recommended for polygonal blocks.
The user inputs for the Constant option are described below.
Specify values for the Current, Resistivity, and the constant C to be entered into the equation
at the top of the panel.
Blocks
plate, click Edit next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient
simulations.
Specify the temperature (Tref) at which the resistivity was measured. You also need to specify
the direction of the length (L) of the block that you want included in the equation. You can
choose Longest, X length, Y length, Z length in the L drop-down list. ANSYS Icepak uses this
length in the equation at the top of the Joule heating power panel, and also calculates the
area of this face to be used in the equation. Specify the temperature range for which the
function is valid by entering values for Low temperature and High temperature. The value of
the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel
(see Ambient Values (p. 260)). Click Update to update the thermal specification of the block.
Figure 20.19: The Joule heating power Panel with Constant Inputs
The user inputs for the Varying option are described below.
Specify values for Resistivity, the constant C, and Tref to be entered into the equation at the
top of the panel.
The current or voltage can be specified for two or more sides of the block. By default, two
sides namely, Side 1 and Side 2 are available in the panel. For each of these sides, a unique
surface of the block needs to be selected from the sides drop-down list. A list of available sides
for each geometry type is shown in Table 20.1: Which side Options for Block Geometries (p. 511).
Note:
To avoid solution convergence difficulties, you should not specify current at both
the inlets and outlets; the same holds true for specifying voltage. Therefore, if current
is selected at the inlets, then you should specify voltage at the outlets and vice-versa.
Additional sides can be created by clicking on the Add side button. Newly created sides can
be deleted by clicking on the Delete button.
Note:
The same setting can be specified in source objects and the use of source object is
recommended. Refer to User Inputs for Thermal specification (p. 427).
Figure 20.20: The Joule heating power Panel with Varying Inputs
Blocks
• Spatial profile allows you to use a spatial power profile that you have specified in the Basic parameters
panel. See Specifying a Spatial Power Profile (p. 262) for details about creating a spatial power profile
file.
Note:
The inverse distance weighted method is used to interpolate the values of the spatial
profile onto the block cell centroids. A description of this interpolation method can
be found in Miscellaneous Options (p. 239).
• LED source option allows you to model temperature dependent power. Default values are given for
Current and Efficiency. To define the temperature dependence of efficiency, select the Temperature
dependent check box and click Text editor next to efficiency to open the Curve specification panel
and specify a list of temperatures and the corresponding efficiency values. To display the efficiency-
temperature curve, click Graph editor. To define the temperature dependence of voltage, click Text
editor next to voltage to open the Curve specification panel and specify a list of temperatures and
the corresponding voltage values. To display the voltage-temperature curve, click Graph editor.
Note:
– Temperature values defined for the voltage-temperature curve will be used to re-calculate
new efficiency values.
– The LED source option is only available for use in steady-state solutions.
Figure 20.21: The LED power settings Panel
• The SIwave profile option allows to you import a SIwave spatial profile. Click Edit and select the SIwave
powermap files. In the SIwave powermap profiles dialog, click Browse to select the SIwave powermap
files for each layer. Click the Info button to display the contours and show the power settings of the
SIwave powermap profile for each layer. Click Summary to display the Powermap summary panel,
which displays information for all powermaps selected in the SIwave powermap profiles panel. Click
Accept when all SIwave powermap profiles have been selected.
4. (optional) Specify external heat transfer parameters for the block by turning on the External conditions
option. Click the adjacent Edit button to open the Block thermal conditions panel (Figure 20.22: The
Block thermal conditions Panel for a Solid or Fluid Block (p. 519)).
To specify a uniform heat transfer coefficient, enter the value of the heat transfer coefficient in
the External heat trans coeff text entry field and select the Constant option (default). To define
a heat transfer coefficient that varies as a function of temperature, select the Temperature option
and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described in Using the Curve specification
panel to Specify a Spatial Boundary Profile (p. 485)). You can also define the heat transfer coefficient
as a function of temperature difference (relative to the ambient temperature). To define a heat
transfer coefficient that varies as a function of temperature difference, select Temperature differ-
ence and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel.
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the External heat trans coeff as a
function of time. This option is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in
the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the heat transfer coefficient,
select Time and click Edit in the Block thermal conditions panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627)
Figure 20.22: The Block thermal conditions Panel for a Solid or Fluid Block
5. (fluid cylindrical blocks only) Enable MRF modeling of fans by selecting Use rotation for MRF.
6. (solid cylindrical blocks only) Specify the speed of Rotation (rpm).
7. (fluid blocks only) The option to fix values of velocities in ANSYS Icepak allows you to essentially set a
boundary condition for the velocities within the cells of the fluid block. When a velocity is fixed in a given
cell, the transport equation for that velocity is not solved in the cell. The fixed value is used for the calcu-
lation of face fluxes between the cell and its neighbors. The result is a smooth transition between the
fixed value of a velocity and the values at the neighboring cells.
Important:
You can fix values for velocity only if you are using the pressure-based segregated
solver. Note that this option cannot be used when the coupled-solver is enabled.
The ability to fix the flow has applications in the thermal simulation of avionics in space. In such
applications, specifying a fixed value for the flow in the fluid region can aid in the calculation of
radiative heat transfer for the components. For such models, convective heat transfer is not a
major mode of heat transfer. By specifying fixed low values for the flow variables, solution of flow
Blocks
equations can be disabled in the domain without disabling radiative heat transfer within the do-
main.
Hollow Blocks
Define the thermal specification for the hollow block. There are two options: fixed heat and fixed
temperature. The user inputs for the thermal specification of the hollow block are shown below.
• Fixed heat specifies a constant uniform heat flux into or out of all block surfaces. You can define the heat
flux either as per unit surface area (Power / area) or as a fixed value (Total power) for the entire block.
• Fixed temperature specifies a constant uniform temperature for all the block surfaces. The value of the
ambient temperature is defined under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient
Values (p. 260)).
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify temperature as a function of time. This
option is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic parameters
panel. To edit the transient parameters for temperature, select Transient and click Edit in the
Blocks panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
• Internal conditions (optional) allows you to specify internal heat transfer parameters for the block. Click
the adjacent Edit button to open the Block thermal conditions panel (Figure 20.23: The Block thermal
conditions Panel for a Hollow Block (p. 520)).
Figure 20.23: The Block thermal conditions Panel for a Hollow Block
To specify a uniform heat transfer coefficient, enter the value of the heat transfer coefficient in the
Internal heat transfer coeff text entry field and select the Constant option (default). To define a
heat transfer coefficient that varies as a function of temperature, select the Temperature option
and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel (described in Using the Curve specification
panel to Specify a Spatial Boundary Profile (p. 485)). You can also define the heat transfer coefficient
as a function of temperature difference (relative to the ambient temperature). To define a heat
transfer coefficient that varies as a function of temperature difference, select Temperature difference
and click Edit to open the Curve specification panel.
If you are setting up a transient simulation, you can specify the Internal heat trans coeff as a
function of time. This option is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in
the Basic parameters panel. To edit the transient parameters for the heat transfer coefficient, select
Time and click Edit in the Block thermal conditions panel. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for
more details on transient simulations.
• Rotation (rpm) (for cylindrical blocks only) allows you to specify the rotational speed of a cylindrical block.
20.10.3. User Inputs for Network Blocks

Define the thermal resistance network for the network block.
Two-Resistor Model
To specify a network block using the two-resistor model (see Figure 20.10: A Two-Resistor Network
Block (p. 503)), select Two resistor under Network type in the Blocks panel. The user inputs for the
two-resistor network block are shown below.
1. Specify the side of the block where the board (PCB) is located. You can select a side from the Board side
drop-down list in the Network parameters section.
2. Specify the junction-to-case resistance (Rjc ) and the junction-to-board resistance (Rjb ).
3. Specify the power dissipated by the IC package next to Junction power.
4. Specify the Mass of the IC package.
5. Specify the Specific heat of the IC package.
6. Specify the thermal resistance at the interface between the face node and any object connected to the
face node (Interface resistance).
Blocks
Star Network Model

To specify a network block using the star network model (see Figure 20.11: A Star Network
Block (p. 503)), select Star network under Network type in the Blocks panel. The user inputs for the
star network block are shown below.
2. Specify the junction-to-top (of the case) resistance (Rjc ).
3. Specify the junction-to-sides (of the case) resistance (Rjc-sides).
4. Specify the junction-to-board resistance (Rjb ).
5. Specify the power dissipated by the IC package next to Junction power.
Fully Shunted Network Model

To specify a network block using the fully shunted model (see Figure 20.12: A Fully Shunted Network
Block (p. 504)), select Full shunt under Type in the Blocks panel. The user inputs for the fully shunted
network block are shown below.
2. Specify the junction-to-top (of the case) resistance (Rjc ).
3. Specify the junction-to-sides (of the case) resistance (Rjc-sides).
4. Specify the junction-to-board resistance (Rjb ).
5. Specify the Shunt resistance, which is the resistance between the adjacent sides of the block.
6. Specify the Junction power dissipated by the package.
General Network Model

To specify a network block using the general network model, select General under Type in the Blocks
panel. The user inputs for the general network block are shown below.
Blocks
1. Specify the power, mass, and specific heat respectively by entering values for Int node 1 power, Int
node 2 mass, Int node 3 specific heat and so on in the Network parameters section. (See Fig-
ure 20.13: Location of Junctions for a General Network Block (p. 505) for the location of the junctions for
a general network block.)
2. Specify the values of the resistances between the sides of the block, the junctions inside the block, and
the junctions and the sides of the block. You will use the Network resistances panel (Figure 20.24: The
Network resistances Panel (p. 524)) to specify the resistances. To open this panel, click Edit resistance
matrix in the Blocks panel.
Figure 20.24: The Network resistances Panel
Specify the resistances in the resistance matrix. A simple example is shown in Figure 20.25: Simple
Example of Three Resistances in a General Network Block (p. 525), showing the resistances defined
in Figure 20.24: The Network resistances Panel (p. 524):
• Min Y is connected to Int 2 with a resistance of 1 C/W.
• Max X is connected to Min Y with a resistance of 2 C/W.
• Int 1 is connected to Int 2 with a resistance of 3 C/W.
Figure 20.25: Simple Example of Three Resistances in a General Network Block
Chapter 21: Fans
Fans are two- or three-dimensional modeling objects. A fan is used to move fluid into, out of, or within
the cabinet. Fan geometries include circular, rectangular, inclined, 2D polygon and CAD. Fan types include
fixed flow and characteristic curve. Fixed flow fans are always located on a cabinet wall and must be
specified either as intake (drawing fluid into the cabinet) or exhaust (expelling fluid from the cabinet).
Characteristic curve fans can be located anywhere within the cabinet or on the cabinet boundary.
Fans are always associated with a magnitude and direction of flow. Circular fans can possess a central
hub of non-zero radius and rectangular fans can have a rectangular hub. The hub is impervious to flow
but can transfer heat to and from the fluid. The magnitude of the flow can be specified either as a fixed
value or as a function of pressure drop across the fan.
Information about the characteristics of a fan is presented in the following sections:
• Defining a Fan in ANSYS Icepak (p. 527)
• Flow Direction (p. 531)
• Fans in Series (p. 532)
• Fans in Parallel (p. 532)
• Fans on Blocks (p. 533)
• Specifying Swirl (p. 533)
• Fixed Flow (p. 534)
• Fan Characteristic Curve (p. 534)
• Additional Fan Options (p. 535)
• Adding a Fan to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 536)
21.1. Defining a Fan in ANSYS Icepak

Figure 21.1: Intake and Exhaust Fans (p. 528) shows two fans on the cabinet boundary; one defined as
an intake fan and the other defined as an exhaust fan. The intake fan draws fluid into the cabinet. By
default, ANSYS Icepak assumes that the intake fluid is at ambient temperature. The exhaust fan expels
fluid from the cabinet in a direction determined by the local flow conditions. By default, the fluid exits
the cabinet at the temperature computed for the fluid within the cabinet at the intake side of the fan.
Fans
Figure 21.1: Intake and Exhaust Fans
Characteristic curve fans can be defined as exhaust, intake, or internal. Internal fans are located entirely
within the cabinet (see Figure 21.2: Internal Fan Placement (p. 528)) and are surrounded by fluid on all
sides. The direction of flow through an internal fan can be specified as positive or negative, relative to
the coordinate axis normal to the plane of the fan.
Figure 21.2: Internal Fan Placement
To configure a fan in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and dimensions), its
type, the flow rate associated with the fan, and the swirl. For a transient simulation, you must also
specify parameters related to the strength of the fan for a characteristic curve fan. You can also specify
the species concentrations and turbulence parameters at the fan.

Fan location and dimension parameters vary according to fan geometry. Fan geometries include circular,
rectangular, inclined, 2D polygon and CAD. These geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312).
21.2.1. Simple Fans

A simple fan is a two-dimensional fan that can have circular, rectangular, inclined, polygonal, or CAD
geometry.
Geometry, Location, and Dimensions
Circular fans can include hubs. You must specify the size of the hub or inner radius (Int radius),
and its overall size or outer radius (Radius), as shown in Figure 21.3: Circular Fan Definition (p. 529).
Figure 21.3: Circular Fan Definition
Rectangular fans can also include a hub. To create a hub for a rectangular fan, you must specify the
equivalent radius for the hub if it were to be created as a circular hub for a circular fan; that is, you
specify r in Figure 21.4: Rectangular Fan Hub Definition (p. 529).
Figure 21.4: Rectangular Fan Hub Definition
ANSYS Icepak will create a rectangular hub with the area πr2 . ANSYS Icepak uses the area of the
rectangular hub and the ratio of the lengths of the sides of the rectangular fan (d1 and l1 in Fig-
ure 21.4: Rectangular Fan Hub Definition (p. 529)) to calculate the lengths of the sides of the rectangular
hub (d2 and l2 in Figure 21.4: Rectangular Fan Hub Definition (p. 529)):
Fans
(21.1)
If the fan is square, then d2 = l2 = x, and

(21.2)
21.2.2. Fans on Solid Blocks

A fan on a solid block, or housing, is a three-dimensional fan that can have circular (cylindrical) or
rectangular (prism) geometry. The housing is a prism block of specified equal length and width that
encases the fan. The thickness of the housing is equal to the specified height of the fan. The fan itself
can be located on either of two faces of the prism block that are in the plane of the fan, as shown
in Figure 21.5: 3D Fans with Housing (p. 530).
Both circular and rectangular fans with housing can also include hubs. For a circular 3D fan, you must
specify the radius of the hub (Hub radius) and its overall size or outer radius (Radius). For a rectan-
gular 3D fan, you must specify the length of the sides of the hub (Hub side length) and the length
of the sides of the fan (Side length).
Figure 21.5: 3D Fans with Housing
Flow Direction
21.3. Flow Direction

Exhaust fans always expel fluid from the cabinet. The flow exits the cabinet in a direction perpendicular
to the fan. You can not change the flow direction of exhaust fans.
For intake fans, the flow direction can be normal or along a specified vector to the plane of the fan. If
the flow direction is normal to the fan, the direction of flow is always into the cabinet regardless of the
fan location. If the flow direction is specified by a vector, the the flow direction is fixed by the specified
vector. When the flow direction is specified by a vector, the direction vector must properly specified
such that the flow direction is into the cabinet. For example, if the fan is located at the maximum x
plane of the cabinet, the x component of the flow direction must point in the negative x-axis direction.
See Figure 21.6: Intake Fan Flow Direction (p. 531).
Figure 21.6: Intake Fan Flow Direction
Internal fans can be located anywhere inside the cabinet. Fluid flows through the fan in a direction
perpendicular to it. You must specify the direction of flow (positive or negative) for an internal fan. For
a rectangular, 2D polygon, or circular fan, if flow is in the direction of increasing axis coordinates, the
inward direction is positive. If flow is in the direction of decreasing coordinates, the inward direction is
negative. For an inclined fan, the positive and negative directions are defined with respect to the axis
of rotation for the inclined fan:
• If the axis of rotation of the inclined fan is the x axis, the positive inward direction is the positive y direction,
and the negative inward direction is the negative y direction.
• If the axis of rotation of the inclined fan is the y axis, the positive inward direction is the positive z direction,
and the negative inward direction is the negative z direction.
• If the axis of rotation of the inclined fan is the z axis, the positive inward direction is the positive x direction,
and the negative inward direction is the negative x direction.
Fans
21.4. Fans in Series

Fans can be arranged in series (see Figure 21.7: Fans in Series (p. 532)). There are two major advantages
of placing several small fans in series rather than using a single large fan to achieve a given flow rate:
• Fans placed in series can be made active and inactive individually, so you can create different air flow patterns.
• Fans placed in series can direct air flows into localized streams.
Figure 21.7: Fans in Series
21.5. Fans in Parallel

Fans can also be positioned in parallel (see Figure 21.8: Fans in Parallel (p. 532)). Two or more fans placed
in parallel can increase flow with respect to a single fan of equivalent power.
Figure 21.8: Fans in Parallel
Specifying Swirl
21.6. Fans on Blocks

Fans can be combined with blocks to account for the dimensions of an actual fan. The treatment of
fans used in conjunction with blocks varies according to the fan type. When a hollow block is placed
against a cabinet wall to mask a region of the cabinet, an exhaust/intake fan can be positioned on any
one of the exposed surfaces of the block (see Figure 21.9: Fan on a Block (p. 533)). Fans used in this way
must be exhaust/intake in type despite the fact that they are located within the cabinet and not on a
cabinet wall, because, in effect, the interior surfaces of this block are cabinet walls, that is, they represent
part of the enclosure.
Note:
Exhaust/intake fan and block combinations cannot involve a conducting solid block.
Figure 21.9: Fan on a Block
Internal fans can be placed on any conducting solid block within the cabinet to give the fan a thickness.
ANSYS Icepak will automatically "bore a hole" through the block on both sides of the fan to allow fluid
flow to and from the fan. Note that the face through which the fan bores a hole must not be located
on the cabinet boundary. Note that only conducting thick plates and conducting solid blocks can be
used for this purpose.
21.7. Specifying Swirl

To specify the swirl for a fan, you must specify the swirl magnitude or the rotational speed of the fan.
21.7.1. Swirl Magnitude
21.7.2. Fan RPM
Fans
21.7.1. Swirl Magnitude

By default, ANSYS Icepak assumes that fluid exits the fan in the direction normal to the plane of the
fan. Alternatively, you can specify a swirl magnitude. This skews the flow direction in the θ direction,
that is, the direction of blade revolution. Swirl magnitude is defined by
(21.3)
where uθ(r) is the velocity in the direction of revolution, uz(r) is the velocity in the direction normal
to the fan, r is the radial coordinate, R is the outer radius of the fan, and S is the swirl magnitude (S
= 0 by default).
Note:
The swirl option is not available for fans with CAD shaped geometry.
21.7.2. Fan RPM

Instead of using a specified swirl magnitude, ANSYS Icepak can also enable the swirl factor to change
as a function of the operating point on the fan curve. This is achieved by specifying the RPM (revolu-
tions per minute) of the fan. The swirl magnitude (the ratio of the tangential velocity to the axial ve-
locity) can then change as the fan operating point changes on the fan curve. For example, if the flow
rate through the fan decreases, the swirl magnitude will increase, and if the flow rate through the
fan increases, the swirl magnitude will decrease. Fan RPM is defined by
(21.4)
where is the radial coordinate, and it is assumed that only 5% of the maximum tangential velocity
of the fan is transferred to the fluid.
21.8. Fixed Flow

In real-world applications, the performance of a fan is described by its characteristic curve, as described
in the following section. In ANSYS Icepak, you can also specify a constant total mass flow or volume
flow rate.
21.9. Fan Characteristic Curve

The relationship between volumetric flow rate and the pressure drop across the fan (static pressure)
is described by the fan characteristic curve, which is usually supplied by the fan manufacturer. Fig-
ure 21.10: Tube-axial Fan Curve (p. 535) shows a characteristic curve for a common tube-axial fan. The
total volumetric flow rate, Q, is plotted against fan static pressure, pfs.
Additional Fan Options
Figure 21.10: Tube-axial Fan Curve
For a linear fan characteristic curve, only the volume flow rate at zero static pressure, Q0 , and the fan
static pressure at zero flow rate, p0 , need to be specified. The equation for a linear fan characteristic
curve is
(21.5)
In most cases, the linear characteristic curve does not adequately approximate the true fan characteristic
curve over its entire operational range, so it is best to specify the actual fan curve, if possible.
Fan static pressure is computed by:

(21.6)
where pintake is the pressure averaged over the face of the intake side of the fan, and pdischarge is the
pressure averaged over the face of the discharge side of the fan.
For internal fans, both pintake and pdischarge are computed by ANSYS Icepak. For an intake fan, pdischarge
is computed by ANSYS Icepak and pintake is the ambient pressure. The value of the ambient pressure
is specified under Ambient conditions in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient Values (p. 260)).
For an exhaust fan, pdischarge is the ambient pressure, and pintake is computed by ANSYS Icepak. The
default ambient pressure is zero (gauge pressure) and this should be satisfactory in almost all situations.
The accuracy of the fan flow rate used by ANSYS Icepak is directly related to the accuracy with which
the fan static pressure is computed. This, in turn, depends on how accurately pressure losses in the
entire system are modeled. Therefore, care should be taken to model all features of the system that
contribute to the overall nature of the pressure distribution in the system.
You can create a report of the fan operating point (pressure rise and volume flow rate) for a character-
istic curve fan, as described in Fan Operating Points Report (p. 954).
21.10. Additional Fan Options

For specific types of fans, there are additional inputs that may be required.
21.10.1. Fan Efficiency
21.10.2. Fan Resistance Modeling
Fans
21.10.1. Fan Efficiency

For a 3D fan, you can specify the efficiency by inputting a volumetric heat source on the hub. This
power source is the percentage of the total work done by the fan’s motor (W) that is lost as thermal
energy to the hub block. The equation for calculating the power, P, of a fan is:
(21.7)
where e is the efficiency.
21.10.2. Fan Resistance Modeling

Certain types of fans are equipped with vent-like guards that function as a resistance to the air flow.
For 3D fans in ANSYS Icepak, you can specify that the side of the housing opposite the fan be modeled
as a grille object to account for such a resistance.
To account for the case of a failed 3D fan, you can also specify that the side of the housing that is in
the plane of the fan function as a grille object. In the case of a failed 2D fan, the planar fan object
can be made to function as a grille object.
See Grilles (p. 409) for more information about grilles.
21.11. Adding a Fan to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a fan in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar and
then click the button to open the Fans panel, shown in Figure 21.11: The Fans Panel (Geometry
Tab) (p. 537) and Figure 21.12: The Fans Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 538).
Adding a Fan to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 21.11: The Fans Panel (Geometry Tab)
Fans
Figure 21.12: The Fans Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a fan to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a fan. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an Ob-
2. Change the description of the fan, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the fan, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Info tab, enter the Manufacturer and Model number, if known.
5. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the fan. There are five different kinds of
geometry available for fans in the Shape drop-down list for 2D fans and two kinds of geometry available
in the Fan shape drop-down list for 3D fans. The inputs for these geometries except for CAD are described
Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object. Additional geometric parameters for specific types of
fans are as follows:
• 2D fans:
If you specify a circular fan, you can specify the size of the hub or inner radius (Int radius). If you
specify a rectangular fan, you can specify the equivalent radius for the rectangular hub (Internal
hub equiv. radius).
• 3D fans:
For all 3D fans, you will need to specify the Size and Height of the housing under Case inform-
ation. You can additionally specify whether the housing is located on the High side or Low side
from the fan. Selecting High side means that the housing extends in the direction of increasing
coordinate value from the fan. For example, if the fan was in the x-y plane, then the housing
would extend in the positive z direction. Selecting Low side, then, extends the housing in the
direction of negative coordinate value. Also, under Orientation, you can set a 3D fan at an incline
by specifying the axis of rotation (Rotate axis) and defining the Angle.
If you specify a circular fan, you can specify the Hub radius. If you specify a rectangular fan, you
can specify the length of the sides of the hub (Hub side length).
Note:
The decoration (p. 243) shown on the fan object in the graphic display window is not
displayed when the fan is a CAD object.
6. In the Properties tab, select the type of fan in the Fan type drop-down list. This will specify whether the
fan is on the cabinet boundary or inside the cabinet. There are three options:
• Intake specifies that the fan is an intake fan. The following inputs are required for an intake fan.
a. Specify the flow Direction. There are two options:
– If the fluid flows into the cabinet normal to the fan, select Normal.
– To specify the flow angle of the fluid entering the cabinet through the fan, select Given. Enter
values for the direction vector (X, Y, Z) for the flow. Only the direction of the vector is used by
ANSYS Icepak; the magnitude is ignored.
• Exhaust specifies that the fan is an exhaust fan. The fluid is defined to exit the cabinet through the fan
in a direction normal to the plane of the fan. You do not need to specify a flow direction for an exhaust
fan.
• Internal specifies that the fan is an internal fan. Specify the facing direction of the intake relative to the
axis perpendicular to the Normal direction. The Positive and Negative options specify the inward dir-
ection normal to the fan as pointing toward high or low coordinates, respectively.
7. Specify the type of Fan flow in the Fan flow tab. There are different options for the fixed flow and charac-
teristic curve fans.
• For a fixed flow fan, select the Fixed option. You can then specify a Volume flow rate or a Mass flow
rate.
Fans
• For a characteristic curve fan, the following options are available:
– Linear enables you to specify values defining a linear fan curve. Specify the Flow rate at zero fan
static pressure, and a static pressure at zero flow (Head).
– Non-linear enables you to define the characteristic curve as a curve consisting of piecewise-continuous
line segments. ANSYS Icepak enables you to describe the curve either by positioning a series of points
on a graph using the Fan curve graphics display and control window (described below), or by specifying
a list of fan static pressure/volume flow rate coordinate pairs using the Curve specification panel
(see Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Curve for a Characteristic Curve Fan Type (p. 543)).
These options are available under Edit.
Note:
The box to the right of Save will be empty if you have not defined a curve for
the fan. This box will contain the volume flow value if you have defined a curve.
• For intake fans, the following options are available under Intake settings:
– Specify the Total temperature. This is the temperature of the fluid being drawn into the model, and
is specified as ambient by default. The value of the ambient temperature is defined under Ambient
– Specify the Gauge pressure. This is the pressure upstream of the intake fan (i.e., pressure value outside
of the computational domain).
8. Specify the inlet or outlet species concentrations for the fan, if required. Select Species and click the Edit
button to open the Species concentrations panel. For details on settings species parameters see Species
Transport Modeling (p. 653) for details on modeling species transport.
9. Specify the Swirl for the fan in the Swirl tab. You can specify a Magnitude for the swirl or an RPM for the
fan.
10. (3D fans only) Specify the Hub power in the Options tab. This value is the amount of energy, in the form
of a volumetric heat source, that is absorbed by the hub from the motor. The hub power is an indirect
specification of the fan’s efficiency.
11. (3D fans only) Specify whether there is a Guard on the fan housing in the Options tab. Turning this option
on will cause the side of the housing that is opposite the fan to act as a grille. To have ANSYS Icepak calculate
the loss coefficient, enter a value for the Free Area ratio.
12. Specify whether the fan is Failed in the Options tab. Turning this option on will cause the fan object (or,
for a 3D fan, the side of the housing in the same plane as the fan) to act as a grille. To have ANSYS Icepak
calculate the loss coefficient, select the Free Area ratio option and enter a value. To define a piecewise-
linear profile for the pressure drop as a function of the speed of the fluid through the failed fan, select the
Pressure Loss Curve option, and specify a loss curve as you would for a grille. See Adding a Grille to Your
ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 414) for details.
13. (For transient simulations only) Specify the Transient strength for the fan in the Options tab. This option
is available if you have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. To edit
the transient parameters for the fan, click Edit next to Transient strength. See Transient Simulations (p. 627)
The transient fan strength multiplier scales the total pressure of the fan. The total pressure of the
fan is the sum of the static pressure (fan curve) and dynamic pressure:
(21.8)
Note:
The transient option is not available for CAD shaped fans.
14. Specify the Operating RPM in the Options tab. This is a "working" RPM value that will be used in conjunction
with the nominal RPM from an existing fan curve to dynamically update the fan curve as follows:
(21.9)
where N1 is the nominal RPM of the fan curve, N2 is the operating RPM, p1 is the static pressure
from the fan curve, p2 is the updated static pressure, Q1 is the volumetric flow rate from the fan
curve, and Q2 is the updated volumetric flow rate.
The nominal RPM can be specified in the RPM field on the Swirl tab. The fan curve will be scaled
based on the operating RPM and the nominal RPM. If the nominal RPM is zero, and a non-zero RPM
is specified for Operating RPM, the fan curve will not be scaled.
Note also that fan curves can be similarly updated based on variations in altitude. The nominal
altitude is defined to be sea level, and the working altitude is specified in the Basic parameters
panel. See Ambient Values (p. 260) for details.
15. Specify the Hub material and Case material. By default, these are specified as default for the fan. This
means that the material specified as the Hub material and the Case material is defined under Default
solid in the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the
material, select a new material from the relevant material drop-down list. You can also view the definition
of the material, edit the definition of the material, or create a new material using the material drop-down
list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
• Using the Fan curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Characteristic Curve Fan Type (p. 542)
• Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Curve for a Characteristic Curve Fan Type (p. 543)
• Loading a Pre-Defined Fan Object (p. 545)
Fans
21.11.1. Using the Fan curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Characteristic
Curve Fan Type
You can specify a curve for a Characteristic curve fan type using the Fan curve graphics display and
control window (Figure 21.13: The Fan curve Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 542)). To open
the Fan curve window, select Non-linear under Fan flow in the Fans panel and click Edit. Select
Graph editor from the resulting list.
Figure 21.13: The Fan curve Graphics Display and Control Window
button. The selected area will then fill the Fan curve window, with appropriate changes to the axes. After
you have zoomed into an area of the model, click Full range to restore the graph to its original axes and
scale.
Select the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See Using the Curve specification Panel to
Specify the Curve for a Characteristic Curve Fan Type (p. 543) for details about creating a curve file outside
of ANSYS Icepak. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file.
hardcopy files.
Click Done when you have finished creating the curve; this will store the curve and close the Fan
curve window. Once the curve is defined, you can view the pairs of coordinates defining the curve
in the Curve specification panel. See Figure 21.15: The Curve specification Panel (p. 544) for the pairs
of coordinates for the curve shown in Figure 21.13: The Fan curve Graphics Display and Control Win-
dow (p. 542).
Note:
The curve you specify must intersect both the x and y axes.
21.11.2. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Curve for a
Characteristic Curve Fan Type
You can define a curve for a Characteristic curve fan type using the Curve specification panel
(Figure 21.15: The Curve specification Panel (p. 544)). To open the Curve specification panel, select
Fans
Non-linear under Fan flow in the Fans panel and click Edit. Select Text editor from the resulting
list.
in the Curve specification panel, select Fix values for Volume flow units and/or Pressure units
and select the appropriate units from the unit definition list.
2. the unit specifications for the file, which can be obtained from the Curve specification panel (e.g., units
m3/s N/m2)
3. the number of data points in the file (e.g., 10)
units m3/s N/m2
10
Note:
If you want to load a curve from an Excel file, make sure that you also save the file as
Once the pairs of coordinates have been entered, you can view the curve in the Fan curve graphics
display and control window. See Figure 21.13: The Fan curve Graphics Display and Control Win-
dow (p. 542) for the curve for the values shown in Figure 21.15: The Curve specification Panel (p. 544).
21.11.3. Loading a Pre-Defined Fan Object

You can load a pre-defined fan object using the Libraries node in the Model manager window.
Libraries Main library Fans
ANSYS Icepak has many types of fans that are built in to the fans library, although you can add to
or remove items from the library as necessary. For more information about using libraries, see Editing
the Library Paths (p. 241).
To load a fan from the fans library, you can do it directly from the Model manager window, or you
can use the built-in search function to locate a particular fan from the library.
Loading a Fan Using the Model manager Window

To load a pre-defined fan using the Model manager window, open the fans library node and right-
click on the desired fan item. There are two options in the resulting pull-down menu.
• Load as object loads the selected fan into your ANSYS Icepak model, where you can edit it as you would
any other object.
• Edit as project opens a new ANSYS Icepak project and loads the selected fan item into the new cabinet.
The default name of the new project will be of the name of the fan item (e.g., delta.FFB0612_24EHE).
Loading a Fan Using the Search Tool

To load a pre-defined fan using the built-in search function, right-click the Libraries node and select
Search fans from the resulting pull-down menu. This will open the Search fan library panel (Fig-
ure 21.16: The Search fan library Panel (p. 546)).
Fans
Figure 21.16: The Search fan library Panel
To create a list of search results, use the following procedure,
1. In the Search fan library panel, narrow your search by turning on options in the two tabs next to Criteria.
• Physical contains search criteria related to the physical characteristics of the fans stored in ANSYS
Icepak’s libraries. The following options are available:
– Min fan size specifies a minimum length of the sides of the housing.
– Max fan size specifies a maximum length of the sides of the housing.
– Min fan height specifies a minimum fan height.
– Max fan height specifies a maximum fan height.
– Manufacturer specifies the manufacturer of the fan.
– Model number specifies the model number of the fan.
Note that Min fan size and Max fan size are valid criteria for all 3D fans as well as 2D circular
and 2D rectangular fans. Min fan height and Max fan height are valid only for 3D fans.
• Thermal/flow contains search criteria related to the transport characteristics of the fans stored in
ANSYS Icepak’s libraries. The following options are available:
– Min flow rate searches for all fans with a maximum flow rate greater than the input value.
– Min pressure searches for all fans with head greater than the input value.
2. Click Search. ANSYS Icepak will create a list of fans meeting the search criteria in the fields next to Results.
3. Click the Name, Size, or Max Flowrate entry of a fan in the list to display more specific information in
the Details field. A pressure vs. flow rate curve for the selected fan will also be displayed under Preview.
4. Click Create to add the fan object to the model.
Chapter 22: Blowers
A blower is a composite modeling object that can be used to represent impellers and centrifugal blowers.
Often used in conjunction with heat sinks, blowers are similar to 3D fan objects, but instead allow air
to be expelled in a direction perpendicular to the incoming flow. They may have single or dual inlets,
and are composed of at least two openings and either a hollow block or a pair of walls.
To configure a blower in your model, you must specify its position and dimensions and provide inform-
ation about the inlet and outlet openings.
Information about the characteristics of a blower is presented in the following sections:
• Impellers (p. 549)
• Centrifugal Blowers (p. 550)
• Specifying Blower Properties (p. 551)
• Adding a Blower to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 552)
22.1. Impellers
Impellers, or type 1 blower objects (see Figure 22.1: Impeller Definition (p. 550)), are designed to model
motorized impellers. They consist of two aligned circular wall objects that are separated by a ring-shaped
air-outlet opening and either one or two air-inlet openings. Air is drawn into the impeller though the
opening(s) on the top and/or bottom of the device and is then redirected 90° before being expelled
circumferentially into the cabinet.
Blowers
Figure 22.1: Impeller Definition
22.2. Centrifugal Blowers

Centrifugal blowers, or type 2 blower objects (see Figure 22.2: Centrifugal Blower Definition (p. 551)),
consist of a hollow prism block, an air-outlet opening, and either one or two air-inlet openings. Air is
drawn into the blower though the inlet opening(s) and is then redirected 90° C. The flow is then con-
centrated in one direction though a single circular or rectangular outlet opening.
Specifying Blower Properties
Figure 22.2: Centrifugal Blower Definition
22.3. Specifying Blower Properties

You can specify internal properties for both types of blowers. For both impellers and centrifugal blowers,
you can specify a characteristic curve for the air flow rate. Additionally, you can specify a swirl component
for the flow for an impeller, as the outlet air direction is skewed by the blade revolution.
• Blower Characteristic Curve (p. 551)
• Specifying Swirl (p. 551)
22.3.1. Blower Characteristic Curve

The relationship between volumetric flow rate and the pressure drop across the blower (static pressure)
is described by the blower characteristic curve, which is usually supplied by the manufacturer. Similar
to a fan, the total volumetric flow rate, Q, is plotted against the static pressure, p. For more information
about characteristic curves, see Fan Characteristic Curve (p. 534).
22.3.2. Specifying Swirl

To specify the swirl for an impeller, you must specify the impeller blade angle and the rotational
speed (RPM) of the impeller blades. The tangential air velocity, utan , changes as the blower operating
point changes on the blower curve (as shown in Equation 22.1 (p. 551) -- Equation 22.3 (p. 551)):
(22.1)
where is the angular velocity of the blades,

(22.2)
and
(22.3)
Blowers
where
h = height of impeller blades (case height)

r = radius of inlet opening
N = RPM of impeller blades
Q = Volumetric flow rate (from characteristic curve)
β = impeller blade angle measured with respect to -ωr
(see Figure 22.3: Geometry for Impeller Swirl Calculation (Top View) (p. 552))
Figure 22.3: Geometry for Impeller Swirl Calculation (Top View)
22.4. Adding a Blower to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a blower in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Blowers panel, shown in Figure 22.4: The Blowers Panel
(Geometry Tab) (p. 553) and Figure 22.5: The Blowers Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 554).
Adding a Blower to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 22.4: The Blowers Panel (Geometry Tab)
Blowers
Figure 22.5: The Blowers Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a blower to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a blower. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an
2. Change the description of the blower, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the blower, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Info tab, enter the Manufacturer and Model number, if known.
5. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the blower. (See also Resizing an Ob-
ject (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning
an object.)
• Impellers:
a. For an impeller, select either Type 1 single inlet or Type 1 dual inlet in the Blower type drop-down
list. For a dual-inlet impeller, the inlet openings will be aligned on the top and bottom of the impeller
and will have the same inlet and hub radii.
b. Specify the plane in which the impeller lies (Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y) in the Plane drop-down list.
c. Under Blower information, enter values for the Center point of the base side (xC, yC, zC), the Radius,
the air Inlet radius, and (optionally) the Inlet hub radius.
d. Under Case information, enter a value for the Height of the impeller.
e. Under Case location from blower, specify the direction in which the impeller should extend from
its base side by selecting Low side for the negative coordinate direction or High side for the positive
coordinate direction.
• Centrifugal blowers:
a. For a centrifugal blower, select either Type 2 single inlet or Type 2 dual inlet in the Blower type
drop-down list. For a dual-inlet centrifugal blower, the inlet openings will be aligned on opposite
sides of the device and will have the same size, shape, and hub radii. See Figure 22.6: Centrifugal
Blowers Geometry Panel (p. 556) for an example of inputs used for a centrifugal blower.
b. Under Case information and Location, select Start/end in the Specify by drop-down list and enter
values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end coordinates (xE, yE, zE, as appropriate) of the
base, or select Start/length and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS).
c. Specify the shape of the inlet opening(s) by selecting Circular or Rectangular in the Inlet shape
drop-down list.
d. Specify the shape of the outlet opening by selecting Circular or Rectangular in the Outlet shape
drop-down list.
e. Specify the Inlet side in the drop-down list. For a single-inlet blower, you can select any of the six
sides of the case (Min X, Min Y, Min Z, Max X, Max Y, Max Z). For a dual-inlet blower, you can select
any pair of sides that face the same coordinate direction (Min/max X, Min/max Y, Min/max Z).
f. Specify the Outlet side in the drop-down list. Your options will be limited to those sides that are
perpendicular to the side(s) containing the inlet opening(s). For example, if the inlet opening was
located on the Min X side of the case, you could specify the outlet opening to be on the Min Y, Max
Y, Min Z, or Max Z sides of the case.
g. Specify the geometry of the inlet opening(s).
– Circular inlets: Under Circular inlet, specify a value for the Radius and, optionally, the Hub radius.
– Rectangular inlets: Under Rectangular inlet, specify values for the length and width of the opening
(that is, Size X, Size Y, or Size Z depending on the direction of the opening) and, optionally, the
Hub radius. Also, specify the offset distances from the center of the face (that is, Offset X, Offset
Y, or Offset Z).
h. Specify the geometry of the outlet opening.
– Circular outlets: Under Circular outlet, specify a value for the Radius.
Blowers
– Rectangular outlets: Under Rectangular outlet, specify values for the length and width of the
opening (that is, Size X, Size Y, or Size Z depending on the direction of the opening) and the offset
distances from the center of the face (that is, Offset X, Offset Y, or Offset Z).
Figure 22.6: Centrifugal Blowers Geometry Panel
6. In the Properties tab, specify the internal properties of the blower.
a. Under Blower flow, define the characteristic curve for the blower as a curve consisting of piecewise-
continuous line segments. ANSYS Icepak allows you to describe the curve either by positioning a series
of points on a graph using the Blower curve graphics display and control window (see Using the Fan
curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Characteristic Curve Fan Type (p. 542) for a description of the
similar Fan curve window), or by specifying a list of blower static pressure/volume flow rate coordinate
pairs using the Curve specification panel (see Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Curve
for a Characteristic Curve Fan Type (p. 543)). These options are available under Edit.
box. Select the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog
Note:
The box to the right of Save will be empty if you have not defined a curve for the
blower. This box will contain the first volume flow value if you have defined a curve.
b. (For type 2 blowers only) Specify the Exhaust exit angle for centrifugal blowers.
c. (For impellers only) Under Swirl, specify the Fan blade angle and the RPM.
Note:
For a blowers rotating clockwise, make sure to specify the RPM as a negative value.
If a blower is rotating counter-clockwise, make sure to specify the RPM as a positive
value. For example, using the right-hand rule, a blower in the x-y plane that is rotating
counter-clockwise will have its normal pointing in the positive z direction. If the same
blower was rotating clockwise, the normal would point in the negative z direction.
Note:
If the impeller Fan blade angle is unknown and specified as 0, a default value of 1
radian is used.
d. Under Power, specify the Blower power. This value is the amount of energy, in the form of a volumetric
heat source, that is absorbed by the blower from the motor. The blower power is an indirect specification
of the blower’s efficiency, similar to the hub power for a fan.
Chapter 23: Resistances
Resistances represent partial obstructions to flow within the cabinet. Resistance geometries include
prism, cylinder, and 3D polygon. These types of resistances are three-dimensional and represent flow
resistance due to components such as wires, cables, and insulation materials packed within a portion
of the cabinet.
Rectangular, circular, inclined, and 2D polygon resistances are 2D shapes and are designed to model
planar flow obstructions such as screens, grilles, and permeable baffles. See Grilles (p. 409) for more in-
formation on 2D resistances.
The effect of any resistance is modeled as a pressure drop through its area or volume. Alternatively,
the pressure drop across the resistance can be calculated using either the approach-velocity method
or the device-velocity method, both of which require a user-specified velocity loss coefficient. The
approach-velocity and device-velocity methods differ from each other only by virtue of a factor called
the free area ratio. The calculated pressure drop can be proportional either to the fluid velocity itself,
or to the square of the velocity. It is common practice to employ the linear relationship for laminar flow
and the quadratic relationship for turbulent flow. In the general case, a combination of the linear and
quadratic relationships may more accurately model the pressure drop/volumetric flow curve. ANSYS
Icepak also provides a power-law method for calculating the pressure drop through a 3D resistance.
Note:
You cannot use the hexahedral mesher if a resistance is placed on an inclined conducting
thick plate.
To configure a 3D resistance in the model, you must specify its geometry (including location and dimen-
sions), the pressure drop model, and the relationship between resistance and velocity. You must also
specify the fluid material for the resistance and the total power dissipated by the resistance.
Information about the characteristics of a 3D resistance is presented in the following sections:
• Pressure Drop Calculation for a 3D Resistance (p. 560)
• Adding a Resistance to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 561)

3D resistance location and dimension parameters vary according to resistance geometries. Resistance
geometries include prism, cylinder, and 3D polygon. These geometries are described in Geometry (p. 312).
Resistances
23.2. Pressure Drop Calculation for a 3D Resistance

For a 3D resistance, ANSYS Icepak provides a power-law method for calculating the pressure drop across
the resistance:
(23.1)
where Δp is the pressure drop across the 3D resistance, v is the velocity, and C and n are constants.
Alternatively, ANSYS Icepak can calculate the pressure drop resulting from a resistance either by the
approach-velocity method or by the device-velocity method. Because the resistance to the fluid flow
due to a volumetric resistance may be different in each of the three coordinate directions, you must
provide the loss coefficient and the method to calculate the pressure drop in each direction for a 3D
resistance.
The approach-velocity method relates the pressure drop to the fluid velocity:
(23.2)
where lc is the user-specified loss coefficient (for each coordinate direction in 3D), ρ is the fluid density,
vapp and is the approach velocity. The approach velocity in Equation 23.2 (p. 560) is the component of
the approach velocity in the appropriate coordinate direction (x y, or z) as computed by ANSYS Icepak.
The velocity dependence can be linear (n = 1), quadratic (n = 2), or a combination of linear and quad-
ratic.
The device-velocity method relates the pressure drop induced by the resistance to the fluid velocity:
(23.3)
where is the device velocity. The velocity dependence can be linear (n = 1), quadratic (n = 2), or a
combination of linear and quadratic.
The difference between the approach-velocity and device-velocity methods is in the velocity used to
compute the pressure drop. The device velocity is related to the approach velocity by
(23.4)
where is the free area ratio. The free area ratio is the ratio of the area through which the fluid can
flow unobstructed to the total planar area of the obstruction.
Note:
The loss coefficient used in the equation for the device velocity is not the same as the loss
coefficient used in the equation for the approach velocity. The loss coefficients in Equa-
tion 23.2 (p. 560) and Equation 23.3 (p. 560) are related to the flow regime of the problem:
• For a viscous flow regime (e.g., laminar flow, slow flow, very dense packing), you should select a linear velocity
relationship:
(23.5)
• For an inertial flow regime (e.g., turbulent flow), you should select a quadratic velocity relationship:
Adding a Resistance to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
(23.6)
• For a combination of these two types of flow, you should select a linear+quadratic velocity relationship:
(23.7)
You can obtain the loss coefficients in several ways:
• experimental measurements
• computational measurements
• from a reference. (The loss coefficients for many grille and vent configurations are available in [ 11 (p. 1011)
].)
23.3. Adding a Resistance to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a resistance in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Resistances panel, shown in Figure 23.1: The Resistances
Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 562) and Figure 23.2: The Resistances Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 563).
Resistances
Figure 23.1: The Resistances Panel (Geometry Tab)
Figure 23.2: The Resistances Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a resistance to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a resistance. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying
an Object (p. 306) for details on copying an existing object.
2. Change the description of the resistance, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the resistance, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Geometry tab, specify the geometry, position, and size of the resistance. There are three different
kinds of geometry available for resistances in the Shape drop-down list. The inputs for these geometries
are described in Geometry (p. 312). See Resizing an Object (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Re-
positioning an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object.
Resistances
5. In the Properties tab, specify the characteristics for the grille.
a. Select the Pressure loss specification in the drop-down list. The following options are available:
• To specify the loss coefficient, select Loss coefficient and then select the method to be used to cal-
culate the velocity loss coefficient. The following options are available in the Velocity loss coefficient
drop-down list.
– To use the device-velocity method, select Device and select the method to be used to calculate
the Resistance velocity dependence. There are three options in the drop-down list: Linear,
Quadratic, and Linear+quadratic. Finally, specify the linear and/or quadratic Loss coefficient
and Free area ratio for each of the three coordinate directions.
– To use the approach-velocity method, select Approach and select the method to be used to cal-
culate the Resistance velocity dependence. Finally, specify the linear and/or quadratic Loss
coefficient for each of the three coordinate directions.
– To calculate the pressure drop using a power-law method, select Power law. Specify the Coefficient
(C in Equation 23.1 (p. 560)) and the Exponent (n in Equation 23.1 (p. 560)).
Note:
You must specify these inputs in SI units.
• To define a piecewise-linear profile for the pressure drop as a function of the speed of the fluid
through the resistance in the three coordinate directions, select Loss curve. ANSYS Icepak allows
you to describe the curve(s) either by positioning a series of points on a graph using the Resistance
curve graphics display and control window, or by specifying a list of resistance speed/pressure co-
ordinate pairs using the Curve specification panel. These options are available in the Edit drop-
down lists for the X-direction, Y-direction, and Z-direction under X, Y or Z-direction loss curve.
For details about using the Resistance curve and Curve specification panels, see Using the Pressure
drop curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Grille (p. 417) and Using the Curve specification Panel
to Specify the Pressure Drop Curve for a Grille (p. 419).
To load a previously defined curve, click the appropriate Load button. This will open the Load
curve file selection dialog box. Select the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See
File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file.
To save a curve, click the appropriate Save button. This will open the Save curve dialog box,
in which you can specify the filename and directory to which the curve data is to be saved.
Note:
The boxes to the right of the Edit drop-down lists will be empty if you have not
defined a curve for the resistance in a particular direction. Each box will contain
the first speed value if you have defined a curve for that direction.
b. Specify the Fluid material for the resistance. By default, this is specified as default for the resistance.
This means that the material specified as the Fluid material for the resistance is defined under Default
fluid in the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change
the Fluid material for the resistance, select a material from the Fluid material drop-down list. See
Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
c. Specify whether the interior of the resistance is to be modeled as a laminar zone by toggling the
Laminar Flow option. Note that this option is only available when one of the turbulence models has
been enabled in the Basic parameters panel.
d. For some problems in which the principal axes of the resistance are not aligned with the coordinate
axes of the domain, the flow direction can be specified by toggling the Flow direction option and
specifying two direction vectors. The third direction, which is not explicitly defined, is normal to the
plan defined by the two specified direction vectors. The second direction must be normal to the first.
If you fail to specify two normal directions, the solver will ensure that they are normal by ignoring any
component of the second direction that is in the first direction. You should therefore be certain that
the first direction is correctly specified.
e. Specify the total power dissipated by the resistance. There are two options for specifying the total
power.
• Constant allows you to specify a constant value for the Total power.
have selected Transient under Time variation in the Basic parameters panel. Select Transient
under Total power and enter a value for the Total power. To edit the transient parameters for the
resistance, click Edit next to Transient. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient
simulations.
• Spatial profile allows you to use a spatial power profile that you have specified in the Basic para-
meters panel. See Specifying a Spatial Power Profile (p. 262) for details about creating a spatial power
profile file.
Note:
The interpolation method of the profile is specified in the Misc item under the
Options node in the Preferences panel. A description of interpolation methods
can be found in Miscellaneous Options (p. 239).
f. Specify a volume source of species within the computational domain, if required. You can input the
species concentrations for the resistance by using the Species concentrations panel. To open this
panel, select Species in the Resistances panel and click Edit. See Species Transport Modeling (p. 653)
for details on modeling species transport.
Chapter 24: Heat Sinks
A heat sink is a three-dimensional modeling object. You can create a simplified model of a heat sink,
or you can generate a detailed heat sink. The detailed heat sink allows you to specify more information
about the pins/fins of the heat sink. A heat sink can exchange radiation with other objects in the
model.
To configure a heat sink in your model, you must specify its position and dimensions, provide information
about the pins/fins, specify the material for the base of the heat sink and the material for the fins (or
in the area where the fins are located for a simplified heat sink), and define the thermal resistance of
the heat sink.
Information about the characteristics of a heat sink is presented in the following sections:
• Simplified Heat Sinks (p. 567)
• Detailed Heat Sinks (p. 570)
• Adding a Heat Sink to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 572)
24.1. Simplified Heat Sinks

Simplified heat sink objects (see Figure 24.1: Simplified Heat Sink Definition (p. 568)) are designed to
model finned heat sinks. They consist of a base and a prism-shaped volume representing the fin region.
The heat sink base models heat transfer from the fins through the base of the heat sink to any object
connected to the base. The prismatic volume models flow resistance due to the presence of the fins.
ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify a thermal conductivity for the prismatic volume separately from
that of the enclosure fluid. The thermal conductivity of the prismatic volume should be specified at an
effective value that takes into account both the fluid and the fins.
Heat Sinks
Figure 24.1: Simplified Heat Sink Definition
Heat sink types include pin and longitudinal. Pin-type heat sinks have fins separated from each other
in both directions parallel to the base; thus, fluid is allowed to flow parallel to the base in either direction,
as well as in the direction normal to the base. Longitudinal heat sinks have fins that run parallel to each
other across the length of the heat sink base. Consequently, for longitudinal heat sinks, fluid is allowed
to flow in only one direction across the base, as well as in the direction normal to the base.
• Modeling a Simplified Heat Sink (p. 568)
• Modeling Compact Heat Sinks Using Geometry-Based Correlations (p. 569)
24.1.1. Modeling a Simplified Heat Sink

The simplified heat sink consists of two components: the heat sink base and a prismatic volume
representing the finned region. The prismatic volume accounts for the fact that, in an actual heat
sink, the path of least resistance for an approaching fluid is around, rather than through, the finned
region. ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify the characteristics of both components using the Heat
sinks panel.
It is a simple matter to specify the characteristics of the heat sink base, but proper specification of
the characteristics of the prismatic volume requires special consideration. In particular, you must es-
timate the overall fluid thermal conductivity within the volume (by specifying a flow material). The
estimate must account for differences between the actual heat sink and the simplified heat sink with
respect to available heat transfer area and the characteristics of flow past the fins. In addition, you
must specify flow loss coefficients that model the resistance to flow in the finned region.
The area available for heat transfer in the simplified heat sink is substantially less than that available
in the actual heat sink. In the actual heat sink, heat conducts from the base through the fins before
Simplified Heat Sinks
convecting into the passing air stream. Consequently, the entire fin area, as well as the exposed base
area, is available for heat transfer.
Note:
In the simplified heat sink, only the base area is available for heat transfer.
To account for the effect of surface area and flow characteristics on heat transfer, ANSYS Icepak allows
you to specify a flow conductivity for the fluid within the prismatic volume representing the finned
region. The flow conductivity must be specified such that the simplified heat sink dissipates heat
at a rate equivalent to that of the actual heat sink. The heat transfer coefficient is given by
(24.1)
which can be rearranged to provide an estimate of the flow conductivity, k (for laminar heat transfer
from a flat, horizontal plate):
(24.2)
where ρ is the density of the fluid, μ is the viscosity of the fluid, cp is the specific heat of the fluid,
v∞ is the velocity of the fluid outside the boundary layer that forms on the heat sink base, and L is
the length of the heat sink in the major flow direction.
Equation 24.2 (p. 569) indicates that, for a fluid with constant properties (that is, μ, ρ and cp are con-
stant), the flow conductivity k is primarily a function of the heat transfer coefficient and the velocity
of the fluid outside the boundary layer that forms on the heat sink base, v ∞. The heat transfer
coefficient can be estimated either from the manufacturer’s specifications or by setting equal to
the overall heat transfer coefficient (U) for the actual heat sink. (The value of U depends on the power
output from the heat source, the maximum heat sink base temperature, and the total base area.) The
velocity, v ∞ , can be estimated by building and solving an ANSYS Icepak model of the actual heat
sink, then constructing a plane-cut view of velocity in the region between two fins. Note that for a
flat, horizontal plate with no fins, v ∞ is equal to the velocity of the approaching fluid. In the finned
region of the actual heat sink, however, v ∞ is substantially less than the fluid approach velocity.
24.1.2. Modeling Compact Heat Sinks Using Geometry-Based Correlations

A compact heat sink is a simplified heat sink that uses geometry-based correlations to model the
flow and thermal resistances imposed on the fin array.
Flow Resistance
The fins of a compact heat sink are modeled as a 3D resistance object. Thus, the resistance imposed
on the incoming flow by the heat sink fin array is accounted for by specifying an appropriate loss
coefficient for the 3D resistance.
(24.3)
where C1 and C2 are the linear and quadratic loss coefficients, and vapp is the approach velocity.
See Pressure Drop Calculation for a 3D Resistance (p. 560) for more information about calculating the
pressure drop for 3D resistances.
Heat Sinks
Thermal Resistance
The enhancement of heat transfer due to the presence of fins is accounted for by assigning an appro-
priate fluid thermal conductivity to the 3D resistance.
(24.4)
(24.5)
where Ch is a constant equal to 1.08. The flat-plate boundary layer correlation for very low Prandtl
numbers is used due to the resultant high effective fluid thermal conductivity (1 W/m-K).
The heat sink thermal resistance depends on the heat sink material, the fin geometry, and the velocity
magnitude of the approaching air. The curve for the thermal resistance fits the following relation:
(24.6)
where the coefficient Cr and the exponent nr vary by heat sink material and fin geometry.
From Equation 24.4 (p. 570) - Equation 24.6 (p. 570), the following relation can be derived for the effective
thermal conductivity:
(24.7)
The effective heat transfer coefficient is calculated based on the base area of the heat sink using a
one-dimensional fin conduction model.
(24.8)
where Nfin is the number of fins, k is the thermal conductivity of the fins, H is the fin height, is the
average heat transfer coefficient, and m is defined as
(24.9)
where P is the perimeter of the fin cross section.
24.2. Detailed Heat Sinks

In addition to the simplified heat sink described above, ANSYS Icepak provides a detailed heat sink,
which is intended for use in the design of heat sinks.
Detailed heat sinks are designed to model finned heat sinks or heat sinks with pins. They consist of a
base, fins or pins, and (optionally) a thermal interface resistance that models the heat transfer from the
fins or pins through the base of the heat sink to any object connected to the base.
There are four types of detailed heat sinks available in ANSYS Icepak:
• Extruded heat sinks consist of a base and fins that run parallel to each other across the length of the base.
You specify the number of fins, their dimensions, and the direction in which the fluid will flow across the
base. An example of an extruded heat sink is shown in Figure 24.2: Extruded Heat Sink (p. 571).
Detailed Heat Sinks
Figure 24.2: Extruded Heat Sink
• Cross cut extrusion heat sinks have rectangular fins separated from each other in both directions parallel
to the base. You specify the number of fins in the two directions parallel to the plane of the base, and the
dimensions of the fins. An example of a cross cut extrusion heat sink is shown in Figure 24.3: Cross Cut Ex-
trusion Heat Sink (p. 571).
Figure 24.3: Cross Cut Extrusion Heat Sink
• Cylindrical pin heat sinks have cylindrical or tapered pins separated from each other in both directions par-
allel to the base. You specify the number of pins in the two directions parallel to the plane of the base, and
the dimensions of the pins. The pins can be in-line or staggered. An example of a cylindrical pin heat sink
is shown in Figure 24.4: Cylindrical Pin Heat Sink With Staggered Pins (p. 572).
Heat Sinks
Figure 24.4: Cylindrical Pin Heat Sink With Staggered Pins
• Bonded fin heat sinks have the same type of geometry as extruded heat sinks. For a bonded fin heat sink,
you can specify a contact resistance between the base of the heat sink and the fins.
24.3. Adding a Heat Sink to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a heat sink in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Heat sinks panel, shown in Figure 24.5: The Heat sinks
Panel (Geometry Tab) (p. 573) and Figure 24.6: The Heat sinks Panel (Properties Tab) (p. 574).
Adding a Heat Sink to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 24.5: The Heat sinks Panel (Geometry Tab)
Heat Sinks
Figure 24.6: The Heat sinks Panel (Properties Tab)
The procedure for adding a heat sink to your model is as follows:
1. Create a heat sink. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an
2. Change the description of the heat sink, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the heat sink, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. Specify the position and size of the heat sink. (See also Resizing an Object (p. 291) for details on resizing an
object and Repositioning an Object (p. 292) for details on repositioning an object).
a. In the Geometry tab, specify the plane in which the base lies (Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y) in the Plane drop-down
list under Base dimensions.
b. Under Location, select Start/end in the Specify by drop-down list and enter values for the start co-
ordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end coordinates (xE, yE, zE, as appropriate) of the base, or select Start/length
and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths of the sides (xL, yL, zL, as appro-
priate) of the base. The height of the base is defined by the Base height (described below), so one of
the endpoint coordinates will be grayed out.
c. Specify the height of the base next to Base height.
d. Specify the Overall height of the heat sink (the height of the base and pins/fins).
e. (optional, detailed heat sinks only) Specify the End height of the pins/fins. The end height is the height
of the pins/fins on the ends of the array.
5. In the Properties tab, specify the type of the heat sink by selecting Simple or Detailed in the Type drop-
down list.
6. Specify the Flow direction parallel to the base by selecting X, Y, or Z in the drop-down list. Note that only
two options will be available based on the plane you selected for the base.
7. Specify the characteristics related to the selected Fin type. These options are described below.
8. In the Flow/thermal tab, select Radiation if the heat sink is subject to radiative heat transfer. You can
modify the default radiation characteristics of the heat sink (for example, the view factor) by using the
Radiation specification panel. To open this panel, select Radiation and then click Edit. See Radiation
• User Inputs for a Simplified Heat Sink (p. 575)
• Detailed Heat Sinks (p. 570)
24.3.1. User Inputs for a Simplified Heat Sink

To specify a simplified heat sink, select Simple in the Type drop-down list in the Properties tab of
the Heat sinks panel.
The steps for defining a simplified heat sink are as follows:
1. Specify whether the heat sink fins are Longitudinal or Pins in the Simplified fin type drop-down list.
2. (longitudinal fins only) Specify whether to Use geometry-based correlations. If this option is turned
on, you will need to specify the fin geometry. In the Fin setup tab, there are three options for specifying
the geometry of the fins:
• Count/thickness specifies the number of fins (Count) and their Thickness. Select Effective thickness
only if you want the thickness of the fins to be an effective thickness.
• Count/spacing specifies the number of fins (Count) and their Spacing.
• Thickness/spacing specifies the Thickness of the fins and their Spacing. Select Effective thickness
only if you want the thickness of the fins to be an effective thickness.
3. Specify whether the finned region of the heat sink is to be modeled as a laminar zone by toggling the
Laminar Flow option. This option is available only when one of the turbulence models has been enabled
in the Basic parameters panel. In this way, it is possible to "turn off" turbulence modeling (that is, disable
Heat Sinks
turbulence production and turbulent viscosity, but transport the turbulence quantities) in a specific fluid
zone, which is useful if you know that the flow in a certain region is laminar.
Note:
This option should be enabled if you are modeling a simplified heat sink using geometry-
based correlations for turbulent flow, because the geometry-based correlations are
more accurate for laminar flow.
4. In the Flow/thermal data tab, specify whether to include a thermal resistance by toggling the Resistance
option. If this option is enabled, there are two choices:
• To define a constant value, select Constant and enter a value in the text entry box.
• To define a piecewise linear profile for the thermal resistance as a function of the speed of the fluid
through the fins, select Curve. ANSYS Icepak allows you to describe the curve either by positioning a
series of points on a graph using the Resistance curve graphics display and control window (described
below), or by specifying a list of speed/resistance pairs using the Curve specification panel (described
below). These options are available under Edit.
Note:
This option is not available if you are modeling longitudinal fins using geometry-
based correlations.
5. Specify the material for the prismatic 3D resistance object representing the finned region (Flow material),
and the Base material. By default, these are specified as default for the heat sink. This means that the
material specified as the Flow material is defined under Default fluid in the Basic parameters panel
(see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)), and the material specified as the Base material
is defined under Default solid. To change the material, select a new material from the relevant material
drop-down list. You can also view the definition of the material, edit the definition of the material, or
create a new material using the material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
Note that if you have turned on the Use geometry-based correlations option for longitudinal
fins, you will need to specify the Fin material instead of the Flow material.
6. In the Pressure loss tab, there are two options in the Loss specification drop-down list.
• To specify the loss coefficient, select Loss coefficient and specify the Linear and Quadratic coefficients
parallel to the fin surface (In plane) and normal to the fin surface (Normal).
• To define a piecewise-linear profile for the pressure drop parallel to the base (In plane) and normal
to the base (Normal) as a function of the speed of the fluid through the heat sink, select Pressure
drop curve. ANSYS Icepak allows you to describe the curve either by positioning a series of points on
a graph using the Pressure drop curve graphics display and control window (see Using the Pressure
drop curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Grille (p. 417) for details), or by specifying a list of heat
sink speed/pressure coordinate pairs using the Curve specification panel (see Using the Curve spe-
cification Panel to Specify the Pressure Drop Curve for a Grille (p. 419) for details). These options are
available under Edit.
To save a curve, click on Save. This will open the Save curve dialog box, in which you can
specify the filename and directory to which the curve data is to be saved.
Using the Resistance curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Heat Sink
You can specify a thermal resistance curve for a heat sink using the Resistance curve graphics display
and control window (Figure 24.7: The Resistance curve Graphics Display and Control Window for a
Heat Sink (p. 578)). To open the Resistance curve window, turn on the Resistance option and select
Curve in the Flow/thermal data tab in the Heat sinks panel and then click Edit. Select Graph editor
from the resulting list.
Heat Sinks
Figure 24.7: The Resistance curve Graphics Display and Control Window for a Heat Sink
See Using the Pressure drop curve Window to Specify the Curve for a Grille (p. 417) for details about
creating, editing and viewing a curve.
Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify the Curve for a Heat Sink
You can define a thermal resistance curve for a heat sink using the Curve specification panel (Fig-
ure 24.8: The Curve specification Panel for a Heat Sink (p. 579)). To open the Curve specification
panel, turn on the Resistance option and select Curve in the Flow/thermal data tab in the Heat
sinks panel and then click Edit. Select Text editor from the resulting list.
Figure 24.8: The Curve specification Panel for a Heat Sink
in the Curve specification panel, select Fix values for Speed units and/or Resistance units and
select the appropriate units from the unit definition list.
units m/s C/W)
units m/s C/W
10
Heat Sinks
Note:
• If you want to load a curve from an Excel file, make sure that you also save the file as formatted
text (space delimited) before reading it into ANSYS Icepak.
in the Preferences panel. A description of interpolation methods can be found in Miscellaneous
Options (p. 239).
Once the pairs of coordinates have been entered, you can view the curve in the Resistance curve
graphics display and control window. See Figure 24.7: The Resistance curve Graphics Display and
Control Window for a Heat Sink (p. 578) for the curve for the values shown in Figure 24.8: The Curve
specification Panel for a Heat Sink (p. 579).
24.3.2. User Inputs for a Detailed Heat Sink

To specify a detailed heat sink, select Detailed in the Type drop-down list in the Properties tab of
the Heat sinks panel.
The steps for defining a detailed heat sink are as follows:
1. Specify the Detailed Fin type by selecting Extruded, Cross cut extrusion, Bonded fin, or Cylindrical
pin in the drop-down list. The upper right part of the panel will change depending on your selection of
Detailed fin type.
• The user inputs for the Extruded heat sink and the Bonded fin heat sink are shown below.
There are three options for specifying the geometry of the fins in the Fin spec drop-down list:
– Count/thickness specifies the number of fins (Count) and their Thickness. Select Effective thickness
only if you want the thickness of the fins to be an effective thickness (extruded fins only).
– Count/spacing specifies the number of fins (Count) and their Spacing.
– Thickness/spacing specifies the Thickness of the fins and their Spacing. Select Effective thickness
only if you want the thickness of the fins to be an effective thickness (extruded fins only). Select
Adjust to fit if you want the spacing to be adjusted so that the fins are aligned at the edges of the
heat sink.
For heat sinks that have bases larger than the fin footprints, you can specify the Offset of the
fins in the direction parallel to the base. For example, if you selected X-Z under Plane, the
available directions will be X and Z.
• The user inputs for the Cross cut extrusion heat sink are shown below.
Specify the geometry of the fins in the directions parallel to the base. The directions that are
available depend on your choice of Plane. For example, if you selected X-Z under Plane, the
available directions will be X and Z. There are three options for specifying the fin geometry in
the Fin spec drop-down list:
– Count/thickness specifies the number of fins (Count) and their Thickness.
– Count/spacing specifies the number of fins (Count) and their Spacing.
– Thickness/spacing specifies the Thickness of the fins and their Spacing. Select Adjust to fit if you
want the spacing to be adjusted so that the fins are aligned at the edges of the heat sink.
For heat sinks that have bases larger than the fin footprints, you can also specify the Offset of
the fins in the direction parallel to the base.
• The user inputs for the Cylindrical pin heat sink are shown below.
The steps for defining a cylindrical pin heat sink are as follows:
a. Specify the Pin alignment. There are two options: In-line and Staggered.
Heat Sinks
b. Specify the number of pins in the directions parallel to the base of the heat sink next to Pin count.
c. For heat sinks that have bases larger than the fin footprints, specify the Offset of the fins in the
direction parallel to the base. For example, if you selected X-Z under Plane, the available directions
will be X and Z.
d. Specify the geometry of the pins next to Pin type:
– Cylinder instructs ANSYS Icepak to create pins in the shape of a cylinder. Specify the Pin radius
in the Bot text entry field.
– Cone instructs ANSYS Icepak to create tapered pins. Specify the Pin radius at the bottom of the
cone (nearest the base) under Bot and at the Top of the cone (farthest from the base).
2. Specify the Base material and the Fin material or Pin material in the Flow/thermal data tab. By default,
these are specified as default for the heat sink. This means that the material specified as the Base ma-
terial and the Fin material or Pin material is defined under Default solid in the Basic parameters
panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material, select a new ma-
terial from the relevant material drop-down list. You can also view the definition of the material, edit the
definition of the material, or create a new material using the material drop-down list. See Material
Properties (p. 339) for details.
3. (Optional) Specify the thermal resistance at the interface between the base and any object connected
to the base. In the Interface tab, enable the Interface resistance option and click Edit to open the In-
terface thermal resistance panel (Figure 24.9: The Interface thermal resistance Panel (p. 582)).
Figure 24.9: The Interface thermal resistance Panel
There are two options for specifying the contact resistance:
• Compute allows ANSYS Icepak to compute the thermal resistance at the interface. The resistance is
computed as d∕k, where d is the effective thickness of the thermal resistance at the interface and k is
the thermal conductivity of the solid material (defined as part of the properties of the solid material
specified for the thermal resistance).
Specify the Effective thickness and the Solid material for the thermal resistance. By default,
the solid material is specified as default for the thermal resistance. This means that the mater-
ial specified as the Solid material for the thermal resistance is defined under Default solid in
the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change
the Solid material for the thermal resistance, select a material from the Solid material drop-
• Specified allows you to specify a value of the contact resistance to heat transfer (Resistance).
4. (Bonded fin heat sinks only) Specify the thermal resistance at the interface between the base and the
fins. Under Interface resistance, click Edit next to Fin bonding to open the Bonding thermal resistance
panel, which is the same as the Interface thermal resistance panel shown in Figure 24.9: The Interface
thermal resistance Panel (p. 582).
The options for specifying the bonding thermal resistance are the same as those for specifying
the interface thermal resistance and are described above.
Chapter 25: Packages
Packages are composite modeling objects representing microelectronic packages. Given a minimal
amount of input, you can create a package in ANSYS Icepak to model the thermal characteristics of
different devices at the system, subsystem, board, or package level.
There are two classes of packages available in ANSYS Icepak. Detailed packages capture most of the
details of the device, and are used for package-level modeling. Compact packages use approximations
for the repetitive feature of a device, such as leads and solder balls, and are used for system, subsystem,
or board-level modeling.
To configure a package object in the model, you must specify its location and dimensions, as well as
various component geometries and heat-dissipation characteristics.
Information about the characteristics of a package is presented in the following sections:
• Detailed Packages (p. 585)
• Compact Conduction Model (CCM) Packages (p. 588)
• Junction-to-Case Characterization Model (p. 588)
• Junction-to-Board Characterization Model (p. 589)
• Adding a Package to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 590)
• Delphi Package Characterization (p. 613)

A package is defined similar to a rectangular object in ANSYS Icepak. The geometry of a rectangular
object is described in Rectangular Objects (p. 312).
25.2. Detailed Packages

To model a device at the package level, it can be as simple as a package on a board with wall-heat-
transfer boundary conditions applied to every surface that is exposed to air. For such a simple model,
you can model almost all of the details of the package. As an example of a detailed package, a cross-
section of a typical ball grid array (BGA) package is shown in Figure 25.1: Example of a BGA Pack-
age (p. 586).
Packages
Figure 25.1: Example of a BGA Package
Of the components shown in Figure 25.1: Example of a BGA Package (p. 586), some can be modeled in
detail, and others are approximated.
• Detailed Features (p. 586)
• Approximated Features (p. 586)
25.2.1. Detailed Features

The die and mold are volumetric solids made of user-specified materials. The die also has a power
source distributed uniformly on its surface and can be of specified dimensions. For lead-frame packages
(for example, QFPs), each lead is modeled as an angled conducting thin plate of user-specified mater-
ial and dimensions. For BGA packages (such as PBGAs), each solder ball is modeled as a discrete cuboid
for which the cross-sectional area is that of a cylinder with the specified solder diameter.
Wire bonds connect signals between the die and the leads (in lead-frame packages) or substrate traces
(in BGA packages) and are made of gold. In a detailed lead-frame package model, each bond wire is
modeled as a conducting thin plate. In a detailed BGA model, the bond wires are lumped into a
planar thin conducting entity connecting the die with the trace edge. The properties of the lumped
entity are volume-averaged, with the conductivity being isotropic.
The adhesive and the die attach are modeled as contact resistances of user-specified material and
thickness. The die paddle or flag is modeled as a volumetric solid, also with a user-specified material
and thickness.
25.2.2. Approximated Features

Substrates are usually encountered in BGA packages. The substrate is the medium that houses the
traces that carry the signals from the bond wire to the solder balls. A signal from a trace in one layer
is connected to trace in another layer by means of vias. Vias are cylindrical holes that are either plated
or filled with copper. Some BGA packages also have thermal vias that enhance the heat transfer
between the die and the thermal balls.
The substrate is represented as solid block. The effect of the copper content in the vias is incorporated
in the form of averaged properties. The density and specific heat are averaged based on volume using
Equation 25.1 (p. 587).
Detailed Packages
(25.1)
where Zi is the volume ratio for component i.
The substrate conductivity is modeled as orthotropic. Conductivity in the direction normal to the
substrate plane is determined using thermal resistances in parallel (Equation 25.2 (p. 587)).
(25.2)
where ki is the conductivity of component i (that is, the conductivities of the lead and the mold, re-
spectively). is the cross-sectional area ratio for component i. For example, the cross-sectional
area ratio for the lead would be
(25.3)
Thermal resistances of the substrate and vias in the in-plane direction are in series. Equation 25.4 (p. 587)
is used for the conductivity in the plane directions.
(25.4)
where is the ratio of the length of component i to the total length of the composite in the
heat flow direction. For example, for the lead would be equal to the lead width divided by
the lead pitch.
At the detailed level, each layer of trace is represented as a thin conducting entity (similar to a con-
ducting thin plate) with volume-averaged properties (see Equation 25.1 (p. 587)). A typical substrate
may be constructed as shown in Figure 25.2: Two-Layer Substrate (p. 587) using standard ANSYS Icepak
objects.
Figure 25.2: Two-Layer Substrate
Packages
25.3. Compact Conduction Model (CCM) Packages

To model a package at the board, subsystem, or system level, you can use the compact conduction
model (CCM). In the CCM, all repetitive features, such as the leads or the solder balls, are approximated
using effective orthotropic conductivities. Certain features are not modeled in the CCM so that the
model is simple enough to use at system levels.
• Lead-Frame Packages (p. 588)
• Ball Grid Array (BGA) Packages (p. 588)
25.3.1. Lead-Frame Packages

For a lead-frame-type package, the lead wires and wire bonds are lumped into thin conducting entities
that connect the die side with the package side. The lead wires that connect the package side with
the mounting PCB are also conducting thin entities. The conductivity, density, and specific heat of
these entities are volumetrically averaged using Equation 25.1 (p. 587).
25.3.2. Ball Grid Array (BGA) Packages

For a BGA-type package, solder balls are approximated as a contact resistance with the height of the
balls and an effective conductivity (Equation 25.1 (p. 587)). The density and specific heat are volume
averaged using Equation 25.1 (p. 587).
The substrate is modeled as a solid object with orthotropic properties. The in-plane conductivity is
determined using Equation 25.2 (p. 587), where the area ratio is the ratio of the total copper trace
thickness to the thickness of the substrate. The conductivity normal to the plane is either the conduct-
ivity of the substrate material or the parallel conductivity using Equation 25.2 (p. 587) in substrates
with vias. The parallel conductivity in the normal direction is determined using the fraction of the
cross-sectional area occupied by vias.
25.4. Junction-to-Case Characterization Model

The junction-to-case (JC) thermal resistance, Rjc , can be determined using a model of the package sur-
rounded with adiabatic surfaces on all sides except the package top (see Figure 25.3: JC Characteriza-
tion (p. 589)), where a constant heat-transfer-coefficient boundary condition is applied.
Junction-to-Board Characterization Model
Figure 25.3: JC Characterization
(25.5)
where
dq = heat dissipated through each surface element

T
cs = temperature of discrete case surface
T
amb = constant ambient temperature
dAs
= area of the surface element
Rjc can then be determined by
(25.6)
where Tdie is the maximum die temperature. Tc,mean is the average case temperature, which can be
determined by generating a temperature report for the wall object covering the case. q is the full power
dissipated through the case, which is equal to the power generated by the die since all other surfaces
are adiabatic. See Generating Reports (p. 935) for details about generating reports.
25.5. Junction-to-Board Characterization Model

The junction-to-board (JB) thermal resistance, Rjb , can be determined using a model of the package
mounted on a board that is 5 mm wider than the package on all sides. All surfaces are insulated except
for the periphery of the board (see Figure 25.4: JB Characterization (p. 590)), which is subject to an iso-
thermal boundary condition.
Packages
Figure 25.4: JB Characterization
Rjb can then be determined by
(25.7)
Note that if Tiso is set to 0° C and if q is 1 W, then Rjb will be the same as Tdie .
25.6. Adding a Package to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a package in your ANSYS Icepak model, click the button in the Object creation toolbar
and then click the button to open the Packages panel, shown in Figure 25.5: The Packages Panel
(Dimensions Tab) (p. 591)--Figure 25.8: The Packages Panel (Die/Mold Tab) (p. 594).
Adding a Package to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
Figure 25.5: The Packages Panel (Dimensions Tab)
Packages
Figure 25.6: The Packages Panel (Substrate Tab)
Figure 25.7: The Packages Panel (Solder Tab)
Packages
Figure 25.8: The Packages Panel (Die/Mold Tab)
The procedure for adding a package to your ANSYS Icepak model is as follows:
1. Create a package. See Creating a New Object (p. 289) for details on creating a new object and Copying an
2. Change the description of the package, if required. See Description (p. 310) for details.
3. Change the graphical style of the package, if required. See Graphical Style (p. 311) for details.
4. In the Dimensions tab, specify the type of package in the Package type drop-down list. The available
options are PBGA (plastic ball grid array), Cavity Down BGA, FPBGA (fine pitch ball grid array), Flip-Chip,
QFP (quad flat pack), QFN (quad flat no leads), DUAL, Stacked Die, and Package on Package. See User
Inputs for BGA Packages (p. 597), User Inputs for Lead-Frame Packages (p. 603),User Inputs for Stacked Die
Packages (p. 605), and User Inputs for Package on Package (p. 608) for inputs specific to different types of
packages.
5. Specify the Package thickness. This value is the combined thickness of the entire package.
6. Specify the position and size of the package. The inputs for a rectangular object are described in Rectan-
gular Objects (p. 312). See Resizing an Object (p. 291) for details on resizing an object and Repositioning an
7. Specify the type of package model in the Model type drop-down list. The available options are Compact
Conduction Model (CCM), Detailed, Characterize JC, and Characterize JB.
Note:
• The graphical display will change depending on the type of model that you select, but the
inputs will remain the same (for example, inputs for a detailed PBGA package are the same
as for a CCM PBGA package). Some inputs for CCM packages, however, will not be used. See
Compact Conduction Model (CCM) Packages (p. 588) for details.
• Only the Detailed model type is available with Stacked Die.
Specify the type of Symmetry for the package. There are three options:
• Full will display the entire package in the graphics window. The flow and/or energy equations will be
solved over the entire package geometry.
• Half will display one half of the package in the graphics window. The flow and/or energy equations will
be solved over the part of the package that is displayed.
• Quarter will display one quarter of the package in the graphics window. The flow and/or energy equations
will be solved over the part of the package that is displayed.
8. (Optional) The package can be created by directly importing ECAD data (EDB, ODB++, ANF, or IPC2581
files). Choose ODB++ Design, ANSYS EDB, Ansoft Neutral ANF, ASCII Neutral BOOL+INFO, or IPC2581
from the Import ECAD file drop-down list to display the Trace file panel. Select the associated file and
click Open to import the file. After the file has been specified and imported, ANSYS Icepak creates the
various components of the package and displays the trace and via information in the Board layer and via
information panel. You can modify the substrate dimensions in the Board layer and via information
panel.
The ANF file option can be used to import the substrate data (including traces and vias), the wire
bonds and die dimensions for BGA type packages. The ANF file option does not import the solder
ball number or locations.
If you want to remove the ANF, EDB, ODB++, or IPC2581 file associated with the package, you can
do so by clicking the Clear ECAD button in the Dimensions tab.
9. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Dimensions panel (for example, Fig-
ure 25.10: The Flip-Chip Dimensions Panel (p. 596)) and view a schematic drawing of the package dimensions.
10. Select the Component visibility button to display a check box of all package components. Toggle com-
ponents to turn on or off visibility.
Packages
Figure 25.9: The Component Visibility Panel
11. Figure 25.10: The Flip-Chip Dimensions Panel
• User Inputs for BGA Packages (p. 597)
• User Inputs for Lead-Frame Packages (p. 603)
• User Inputs for Stacked Die Packages (p. 605)
• User Inputs for Package on Package (p. 608)
• Loading a Pre-Defined Package Object (p. 611)
25.6.1. User Inputs for BGA Packages

To specify a BGA package, select PBGA, Cavity Down BGA, FPBGA, or Flip-Chip from the Package
type drop-down list in the Dimensions tab of the Packages panel (Figure 25.5: The Packages Panel
(Dimensions Tab) (p. 591)).
The steps for defining a BGA package are as follows:
1. Specify the substrate parameters in the Substrate tab (Figure 25.6: The Packages Panel (Substrate
Tab) (p. 592)).
a. Specify the Substrate thickness.
b. Specify the Substrate material to be used for the package. To change the substrate material for the
package, select a material from the Substrate material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339)
c. Specify the Number of thermal vias in the substrate.
d. Specify the Via diameter and the Via plate thickness.
e. Specify the Top trace coverage %. This value is the percentage of the top trace layer volume repres-
ented by the copper coverage.
f. Specify the Bottom trace coverage %. This value is the percentage of the bottom trace layer volume
represented by the copper coverage.
g. Specify the 1st int. layer coverage %. This value is the percentage of the first intermediate layer
volume represented by the copper coverage.
h. Specify the 2nd int. layer coverage %. This value is the percentage of the second intermediate layer
volume represented by the copper coverage.
i. Specify the Trace material. You can change the trace material by selecting a material from the Trace
material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
j. Specify the Trace thickness. This is the thickness of each trace layer in the substrate.
k. You can modify the values of an imported trace by clicking the Edit traces button (only available
after importing a anf, BOOL+INFO, ODB++, or IPC2581 file). You can change the values in the Board
layer and via information panel. See Importing Trace Files (p. 183) for details.
l. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Substrate panel (for example, Fig-
ure 25.11: The PBGA Substrate Panel (p. 598)) and view a schematic drawing of the package substrate.
Packages
Figure 25.11: The PBGA Substrate Panel
2. Specify the solder parameters in the Solder tab (Figure 25.7: The Packages Panel (Solder Tab) (p. 593)).
a. Specify the number of rows and columns of solder balls by entering values in the fields.
b. Specify the Array type. There are two options:
• Full specifies that the ball grid will encompass the entire underside of the package.
• Peripheral specifies that the main ball grid will encompass only the periphery of the underside of
the package.
c. (peripheral arrays only) Specify the number of rows and columns of solder balls that are to be removed
from the center of the grid by entering values in the fields next to # of rows suppressed.
d. (peripheral arrays only) Specify whether to include Central thermal balls in the array by selecting
Yes or No.
If you select Yes, specify the number of rows and columns of balls that are to be added to the
center of the array by entering values in the fields next to # of central rows.
Note:
This option is not available for cavity-down BGA packages.
e. Specify the Pitch.
f. Specify the Ball diameter and Ball height.
g. Specify the Ball material. To change the Ball material for the package, select a material from the
Ball material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
h. Select Block or Cylinder to represent the solder balls or solder bumps.
Note:
Cylindrical geometry will imply larger mesh counts and increased computational
costs.
i. (PBGA and FPBGA packages only) Specify the Mask thickness. This is the thickness of the solder
mask.
j. (PBGA and FPBGA packages only) Specify the Mask material. You can change the mask material by
selecting a material from the Mask material drop-down list.
k. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Solder panel (for example, Fig-
ure 25.12: The FPBGA Solder Panel (p. 599)) and view a schematic drawing of the package solder.
Figure 25.12: The FPBGA Solder Panel
3. Specify the die and mold parameters in the Die/Mold tab (Figure 25.8: The Packages Panel (Die/Mold
Tab) (p. 594)).
a. Specify properties for the Die.
i. If there is more than one die, you can select the appropriate die from the Current die drop-down
list.
ii. In the Die settings tab, specify the die Material. You can change the die material by selecting a
material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
iii. Specify the die Size and Thickness. To specify the size, enter values for the length and width of
the die in the two fields next to Size.
iv. Specify the Total power source that is distributed on the die surface. For half and quarter sym-
metry, you should still input the full power. There are two options to describe total power:
Packages
• Constant enables you to specify a constant value for the Total power. This option is default
for steady state problems and Compact Conduction Model (CCM) model types.
• Temp dependent enables you to specify power as a function of temperature. Click the Edit
button to display the Temperature dependent power panel. Inputs for the Temperature
dependent power panel are described in Solid and Fluid Blocks (p. 513).
Note:
Transient problems are not supported for the Temp dependent option.
v. (For cavity-down BGA packages only) Specify the Cavity depth.
b. (For flip-chip packages only) Specify properties for the Die underfill.
i. Specify the die underfill Material. You can change the die underfill material by selecting a mater-
ial from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material prop-
erties.
ii. Specify the die underfill Thickness.
c. (For PBGA or FPBGA packages only) Specify effective properties for the Die pad.
i. Specify the die pad Material. You can change the die pad material by selecting a material from
the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
ii. Specify the die pad Size and Thickness. To specify the size, enter values for the length and width
of the die in the two fields next to Size.
d. (For PBGA, cavity-down BGA, and FPBGA packages only) Specify properties for the Die attach.
i. Specify the die attach Material. You can change the die attach material by selecting a material
from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
ii. Specify the die attach Thickness.
e. Specify the Top side radiation properties for the package.
If you select Top side radiation and then click Edit, ANSYS Icepak will open the Top side
surface properties panel (Figure 25.13: The Top side surface properties Panel (p. 600)).
Figure 25.13: The Top side surface properties Panel
i. Specify the Surface material to be used for the top side of the package. By default, this is specified
as default. This means that the material specified for the side of the package is defined in the
Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the
material for the top side of the package, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See
Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
ii. If the top side of the package is subject to radiative heat transfer, select Radiation. You can
modify the default radiation characteristics of the package (for example, the view factor). See
Radiation Modeling (p. 665) for details on radiation modeling.
f. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Die panel (for example, Figure 25.14: The
Cavity Down BGA Die Panel (p. 601)) and view a schematic drawing of the package die.
Figure 25.14: The Cavity Down BGA Die Panel
g. (For PBGA, cavity-down BGA, and FPBGA packages only) In the Interconnects tab, specify properties
for the Wire bonds.
i. Click Edit wire bonds to modify wire bonds. See Figure 25.15: The Edit Wire Bonds Panel (p. 602)
to view wire bond properties.
Packages
Figure 25.15: The Edit Wire Bonds Panel
ii. Specify the wire bond Material. You can change the wire bond material by selecting a material
from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
iii. Specify the wire bond Diameter.
iv. (For PBGA and FPBGA packages only) Specify the Average Length of the wire bonds.
h. (For PBGA, cavity-down BGA, and FPBGA packages only) Specify the mold Material. You can change
the mold material by selecting a material from the Material drop-down list next to Mold. See Mater-
ial Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
i. (For cavity-down BGA packages only) Specify the material for the Heat spreader. You can change
the heat spreader material by selecting a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material
j. (For flip-chip and package on packages only) Specify solder bump properties.
i. Specify Bump diameter.
ii. Specify Bump material. You can change bump material by selecting a material from the drop-
down list.
iii. Select Simple or Detailed for the Solder bump model.
k. (For flip-chip packages only) Specify whether to include an Optional heatsink by selecting Yes or
No. If you select Yes, specify the properties for the heat sink.
i. Specify the Heatsink thickness.
ii. Specify the Heatsink material. You can change the heat sink material by selecting a material
from the Heatsink material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
25.6.2. User Inputs for Lead-Frame Packages

To specify a lead-frame package, select QFP (that is, leads on all four sides), QFN (that is, no leads),
or DUAL (that is, leads on only two sides) from the Package type drop-down list in the Dimensions
tab of the Packages panel (Figure 25.5: The Packages Panel (Dimensions Tab) (p. 591)).
There is no substrate or solder in a lead-frame package, and thus you will only have to specify the
die and mold parameters in the Die/Mold tab (Figure 25.8: The Packages Panel (Die/Mold Tab) (p. 594)).
The steps for defining a lead-frame package are as follows:
1. Specify properties for the Die in the Die settings tab.
a. Specify the die Material. You can change the die material by selecting a material from the Material
drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
b. Specify the die Size and Thickness. To specify the size, enter values for the length and width of the
die in the two fields next to Size.
c. Specify the Total power source that is distributed on the die surface. For half and quarter symmetry,
you should still input the full power. There are two options to describe total power:
• Constant enables you to specify a constant value for the Total power. This option is default for
steady state problems and Compact Conduction Model (CCM) model types.
• Temp dependent enables you to specify power as a function of temperature. Click the Edit button
to display the Temperature dependent power panel. Inputs for the Temperature dependent
power panel are described in Solid and Fluid Blocks (p. 513).
Note:
2. Specify properties for the Die pad in the Die settings tab.
a. Specify the die paddle Material. You can change the die paddle material by selecting a material from
b. Specify the die paddle Size and Thickness. To specify the size, enter values for the length and width
of the die in the two fields next to Size.
3. Specify properties for the Die attach in the Die settings tab.
a. Specify the die attach Material. You can change the die attach material by selecting a material from
b. Specify the die attach Thickness.
4. Specify properties for the Wire bonds in the Interconnects tab.
a. Specify the wire bond Material. You can change the wire bond material by selecting a material from
b. Specify the wire bond Diameter.
Packages
c. Specify the Average Length of the wire bonds.
5. Specify properties for Leads in the Interconnects tab.
a. Specify the lead Material. You can change the lead material by selecting a material from the Mater-
ial drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
b. (DUAL packages only) Specify the direction in which the leads will extend (Lead direction). For ex-
ample, if the package is in the X-Z plane, you could specify the leads to extend in the X or Z direction.
c. Specify the Number of leads. For QFP packages, this value should be a multiple of four so that each
side of the quad pack will have the same number of leads. For DUAL packages, this value should be
an even number.
d. Specify the Lead pitch. This value is the distance between the leads.
e. Specify the Lead thickness and Lead width.
f. Specify the Lead foot length. This value is the distance that the "foot" of each lead extends beyond
the boundaries of the package or for QFN packages only, specify the Lead exposed length. This
value is the distance that each lead is inside the boundaries of the package.
g. Specify the mold Material. You can change the mold material by selecting a material from the Ma-
terial drop-down list in the Mold group box. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
h. Specify the Airgap under package (if applicable), which is the distance between the underside of
the package and the vertical leads connecting to the board below.
6. Specify properties in the External tab.
• Specify the solder beneath the package. Select a material from the Material drop-down list and enter
a Thickness.
• If there is land beneath the die pad, enable Include land under die pad and select a material from
the Material drop-down list and enter a Thickness.
7. Specify the Top side radiation properties for the package.
If you select Top side radiation and then click Edit, ANSYS Icepak will open the Top side surface
properties panel (Figure 25.13: The Top side surface properties Panel (p. 600)).
a. Specify the Material to be used for the top side of the package. By default, this is specified as default.
This means that the material specified for the side of the package is defined in the Basic parameters
panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material for the top side
of the package, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339)
b. If the top side of the package is subject to radiative heat transfer, select Radiation. You can modify
the default radiation characteristics of the package (for example, the view factor). See Radiation
8. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Die panel (for example, Figure 25.14: The
Cavity Down BGA Die Panel (p. 601)) and view a schematic drawing of the package die.
25.6.3. User Inputs for Stacked Die Packages

To specify a stacked die package, select Stacked Die from the Package type drop-down list in the
Dimensions tab of the Packages panel (Figure 25.5: The Packages Panel (Dimensions Tab) (p. 591)).
Note:
Icepak can import stacked die packages that consist of both wirebonds and solder bumps.
The Die/Mold tab is designed for different die types; for example, you can specify Die
underfill information for dies containing solder bumps and Die pad information for dies
containing wirebonds when importing a stacked die package.
The steps for defining a Stacked Die package are as follows:
1. Specify board layer and via information in the Substrate tab (Figure 25.6: The Packages Panel (Substrate
Tab) (p. 592)).
a. You can modify the values of an imported trace by clicking the Edit traces button (only available
after importing a ANF, BOOL+INFO, ODB++, or IPC2581 file). You can change the values in the Board
b. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Substrate panel (for example, Fig-
ure 25.11: The PBGA Substrate Panel (p. 598)) and view a schematic drawing of the package substrate.
a. Specify the Ball diameter and Ball height.
b. Specify the Ball material. To change the Ball material for the package, select a material from the
Ball material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
c. Specify the Mask thickness. This is the thickness of the solder mask.
d. Specify the Mask material. You can change the mask material by selecting a material from the Mask
material drop-down list.
e. Select Block or Cylinder to represent the solder balls or solder bumps.
Note:
Cylindrical geometry will imply larger mesh counts and increased computational
costs.
f. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Solder panel (for example, Fig-
ure 25.12: The FPBGA Solder Panel (p. 599)) and view a schematic drawing of the package solder.
3. Specify properties for the Die in the Die/Mold tab (Figure 25.8: The Packages Panel (Die/Mold Tab) (p. 594)).
Packages
a. Select the Current die from the drop-down list. The properties specified above will be for that par-
ticular die.
Note:
The die pad inputs are considered only for the bottom die.
b. If the imported file does not contain die stack information, a warning message will be displayed.
Click Edit next to Die stack and enter die stack information by double-clicking the appropriate box
in the Die stack information panel.
• Stack id identifies a particular stack in the event there are multiple stacks of dies.
• Layer is the number associated with the die being defined.
• X1, Y1, X2 and Y2 are die coordinates.
• Thickness is the height of the die.
c. Specify the die Material in the Die settings tab. You can change the die material by selecting a ma-
terial from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material prop-
erties.
d. Specify the die Size and Thickness. To specify the size, enter values for the length and width of the
die in the two fields next to Size.
e. Specify the Total power source that is distributed on the die surface. For half and quarter symmetry,
Note:
f. Specify the die pad Material in the Die settings tab. You can change the die pad material by selecting
a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
g. Specify the die pad Size and Thickness. To specify the size, enter values for the length and width of
the die in the two fields next to Size.
h. Specify the die attach Material. You can change the die attach material by selecting a material from
i. Specify the die attach Thickness.
j. In the Interconnects tab, click Edit wire bonds to modify wire bonds. See Figure 25.15: The Edit Wire
Bonds Panel (p. 602) to view wire bond properties.
Specify the wire bond Material. You can change the wire bond material by selecting a mater-
ial from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
k. Specify the wire bond Diameter.
l. Specify the Average Length of the wire bonds.
m. Specify the mold Material. You can change the mold material by selecting a material from the Ma-
terial drop-down list next to Mold. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material properties.
n. Specify the Material to be used for the top side of the package. By default, this is specified as default.
This means that the material specified for the side of the package is defined in the Basic parameters
panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material for the top side
of the package, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339)
o. If the top side of the package is subject to radiative heat transfer, select Radiation. You can modify
the default radiation characteristics of the package (for example, the view factor). See Radiation
p. Specify the Top side radiation properties for the package.
Packages
q. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Stacked Die panel (for example, Fig-
ure 25.16: Schematic Showing the Stacked Dies (p. 608)) and view a schematic drawing of the package
dimensions.
Figure 25.16: Schematic Showing the Stacked Dies
25.6.4. User Inputs for Package on Package

To specify package on package, select Package on Package from the Package type drop-down list
in the Dimensions tab of the Packages panel (Figure 25.5: The Packages Panel (Dimensions
Tab) (p. 591)).
The steps for defining package on package are as follows:
1. Specify board layer and via information in the Substrate tab (Figure 25.6: The Packages Panel (Substrate
Tab) (p. 592)).
a. You can modify the values of an imported trace by clicking the Edit traces button (only available
after importing a ANF, BOOL+INFO, ODB++, or IPC2581 file). You can change the values in the Board
b. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Substrate panel and view a schematic
drawing of the package substrate.
a. Click Edit locations to display the Edit solder location panel. Specify the location of the top and
bottom rows.
Note:
By default, each row is specified as bottom. If the default setting is not changed,
a warning message is displayed. If the location of the rows is specified as both top,
an error message will be displayed as this input is invalid.
b. Specify bottom or top in the Specify location drop-down list when updating the Solder tab.
c. Specify the Ball diameter and Ball height.
d. Specify the Mask thickness. This is the thickness of the solder mask.
e. Specify the Mask material. You can change the mask material by selecting a material from the Mask
material drop-down list.
f. Select Block or Cylinder to represent the solder balls or solder bumps.
Note:
Note: Cylindrical geometry will imply larger mesh counts and increased computa-
tional costs.
g. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package Solder panel and view a schematic
drawing of the package solder.
3. Specify properties for the Die in the Die/Mold tab (Figure 25.8: The Packages Panel (Die/Mold Tab) (p. 594)).
a. Select the Current die from the drop-down list. The properties specified above will be for that par-
ticular die.
Note:
The die pad inputs are considered only for the bottom die.
b. In the Die settings tab, specify the die Material. You can change the die material by selecting a
material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
c. Specify the die Size and Thickness. To specify the size, enter values for X and Y in the two fields next
to Size.
Packages
d. Specify the Total power source that is distributed on the die surface. For half and quarter symmetry,
Note:
e. Specify properties for the Die underfill in the Die settings tab.
i. In the Die settings tab, specify the die underfill Material. You can change the die underfill mater-
ial by selecting a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for
details on material properties.
ii. Specify the die underfill Thickness.
f. In the Interconnects tab, specify solder bump properties.
i. Specify Bump diameter.
ii. Specify Bump material. You can change bump material by selecting a material from the drop-
down list.
iii. Select Simple or Detailed for the Solder bump model.
g. Specify the Top side radiation properties for the package.
i. Specify the Material to be used for the top side of the package. By default, this is specified as
default. This means that the material specified for the side of the package is defined in the Basic
parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material
for the top side of the package, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material
ii. If the top side of the package is subject to radiative heat transfer, select Radiation. You can
modify the default radiation characteristics of the package (for example, the view factor). See
h. (Optional) Click the Schematic button to open the Package on Package Die panel (for example,
Figure 25.17: Schematic Showing Package on Package Die Panel (p. 611)) and view a schematic
drawing of the package dimensions.
Figure 25.17: Schematic Showing Package on Package Die Panel
25.6.5. Loading a Pre-Defined Package Object

You can load a pre-defined package object using the Libraries node in the Model manager window.
Libraries Main library packages
ANSYS Icepak has many types of packages that are built in to the packages library, although you can
add to or remove items from the library as necessary. For more information about using libraries, see
Editing the Library Paths (p. 241).
To load a package from the packages library, you can do it directly from the Model manager window,
or you can use the built-in search function to locate a particular package from the library.
Loading a Package Using the Model manager Window

To load a predefined package using the Model manager window, open the packages library node
in the Library tab and right-click the desired package item. There are two options in the resulting
pull-down menu.
• Load as object loads the selected package into your ANSYS Icepak model, where you can edit it as you
would any other object.
• Edit as project opens a new ANSYS Icepak project and loads the selected package item into the new
cabinet. The default name of the new project will be of the name of the package item (for example,
128_BGA_12X12_4peripheral_p1.00).
Loading a Package Using the Search Tool

To load a predefined package using the built-in search function, right-click the Libraries node in the
Library tab and select Search packages from the resulting pull-down menu. This will open the Search
package library panel (Figure 25.18: The Search package library Panel (p. 612)).
Packages
Figure 25.18: The Search package library Panel
To create a list of search results, use the following procedure,
1. In the Search package library panel, narrow your search by turning on options in the Physical tab next
to Criteria. The Physical tab contains search criteria related to the physical characteristics of the packages
stored in ANSYS Icepak’s libraries. The following options are available:
• Package type searches for all packages of the specified type. You can choose from PBGA, FPBGA,
Cavity-Down BGA, and QFP in the drop-down list.
• Min package dimension specifies a minimum length for the side of the package.
• Max package dimension specifies a maximum length for the side of the package.
Delphi Package Characterization
• Min balls per row/Total number of Leads specifies either the minimum number of solder balls per
row (BGA-type packages) or the minimum number of total leads (lead-frame packages).
• Max balls per row/Total number of Leads specifies either the maximum number of solder balls per
row (BGA-type packages) or the maximum number of total leads (lead-frame packages).
• Pitch (BGA-type packages only) searches for all packages with a ball pitch (in mm) equal to or greater
than the specified value. You can choose from 0.5, 0.8, 1.0, 1.27, and 1.5 in the drop-down list.
• Number of peripheral rows (BGA-type packages only) searches for all packages with at least the
specified number of peripheral rows. You can choose from 4, 5, 6, or Full in the drop-down list. If you
select Full, ANSYS Icepak will search for all packages that have a full array of solder balls.
2. Click Search. ANSYS Icepak will create a list of packages meeting the search criteria in the fields next to
Results.
3. Click the Name, Size, or Balls/Leads entry of a package in the list to display more specific information
in the Details field.
4. Click Create to add the package object to the model.
25.7. Delphi Package Characterization

Delphi stands for Development of Libraries of Physical models for an Integrated Design. A Delphi network
model is an advanced network representation of microelectronic packages. This model is characterized
by a set of thermal resistances connecting internal node(s) with several surface nodes. The resistance
values are obtained by running the detailed package model for multiple sets of boundary conditions
and minimizing cost (error) function. This way one may reduce the boundary condition dependency
on the network model.
Perform the initial setup steps in Microsoft Excel and in ANSYS Icepak before including a Delphi package
in your ANSYS Icepak model. These steps are done only once and are described below.
• To include a Delphi package in your ANSYS Icepak model, perform the following prerequisite steps in Microsoft
Excel.
– Ensure your system has Microsoft Office 11 or higher.
– Launch Microsoft Excel and click the Office Button. Click the Excel Options button at the bottom of the
panel.
Packages
– Select Add-Ins from the list of Excel Options. Select Solver Add-in and click Go....
– In the Add-Ins panel, select the Solver Add-In option and click OK to enable this option.
Packages
– Click the Office button and select Trust Center from the list of Excel Options, and then click Trust Center
Settings...
– Select Macro Settings from the list of Trust Center options. Select the option, Enable all macros (not
recommended; potentially dangerous code can run) and click OK.
Note:
It is acceptable to enable all macros (not recommended; potentially dangerous code

can run) in this case.
Packages
• To create a Delphi model of a package in your ANSYS Icepak model, perform the following prerequisite
steps in ANSYS Icepak.
– Go to the Edit menu and select Preferences. The Preferences panel is displayed. Click Misc.
– Ensure the Microsoft Excel location is correct in the Preferences panel. If the location is not correct,
click the Browse button and navigate to the appropriate directory. Click All projects.
Figure 25.19: The Preferences Panel - Misc
Creating a Delphi Network Model from an Existing Detailed Package Model

There are two steps to this process. The first step is to run the Extract Delphi Network macro within
ANSYS Icepak. This macro creates wall objects at the boundaries of the model, runs different boundary
condition scenarios by changing the heat transfer coefficients at the boundaries and records the max-
imum and the die temperature as well as the heat flow through the boundaries. The temperature and
the heat flux values, recorded by the macro, while running different boundary conditions are used by
an Excel program to create an optimized thermal network which minimizes the normalized differences
in die temperature and boundary heat fluxes of the network model when compared to the detailed
model.
Generating the Temperature and Heat Flow Data

Create a sufficiently detailed representation of your package.
Packages
• The package may be created in any plane. But the top must be facing a positive direction. The macro assumes
this while designating top-inner and top-outer faces.
• Make sure that the external sides of the package do not contain any thin objects (that is, thin sources, walls
or zero thickness plates). This is because the extraction procedure is going to create wall objects that will
wrap around the package (for the purpose of imposing trial BCs). Priority conflicts between the wrapping
walls and the thin objects in the package can result in those objects not being considered, thus resulting
in inaccurate characterization.
– CCM type package objects always have thin plates for solder ball representation. Hence, do not use CCM
type package objects. Instead, you may use Detailed or Characterize JC or JB option.
– Remove the external walls, if any, before running the Extract Delphi Network macro. This can happen if
you had already run a Delphi extraction run, which would have created walls. Characterize JC option in
package macro will also create wall objects. Please remove them before running the macro.
– Avoid using separately meshed assemblies. If you were given a package model with assemblies, drag and
drop all objects into the model folder and delete the empty assemblies. The wall objects created by the
macro are not meshed if boundaries of separately meshed assemblies interfere with the walls.
– A general rule of thumb is to keep the die power at or below 5000 W/m2. For example, if your die size is
10 mm X 10 mm, you should set the die power at 0.5 W. This is to ensure excessive temperature rise is
avoided for the low heat transfer coefficient BC cases. This is to avoid the max temperature limit of 5000
K, which is set in the Fluent solver by default.
– Ensure that the ambient temperature is 20°C.
Note:
– Recommended but not necessary: Drag and drop the source object (die) into the monitors
folder in the tree menu. If this is a package object, drag and drop the entire object.
– Special characters such as "., $, #, @" should be avoided in the project name for creation of the
Delphi network macro.
The procedure for running the Extract Delphi Network macro is as follows:
• In ANSYS Icepak, click Macros >Modeling > IC Packages > Extract Delphi Network (Figure 25.20: Launching
the Macro (p. 621)).
Figure 25.20: Launching the Macro
Figure 25.21: The Macro Interface: Select Package Type
Packages
Figure 25.22: Arrangement of Interconnects (pins/balls)
Figure 25.23: Choose to Have Side Nodes for the Delphi Package
Figure 25.24: Choose the number of boundary conditions
• The resulting interface will ask some simple questions about your package (Figure 25.22: Arrangement of
Interconnects (pins/balls) (p. 622) – Figure 25.24: Choose the number of boundary conditions (p. 622)). For
example, the type of the package, the arrangements of the pins or the solder balls, the use of side faces in
the Delphi model, the number of trials, and so on. Please provide the necessary information.
• Select Accept. ANSYS Icepak will generate a mesh and run multiple trials.
If your package does not belong to one of the package types listed, contact ANSYS support. There
are simple workarounds for most single-die packages.
• If you had set up point monitors, make sure that the component temperature does not exceed 4700°C. If
this happens, it means that the power imposed on the component is too high. Rerun the macro after imposing
a reduced power. (Note that the network created is independent of the power imposed.)
Figure 25.25: Instructions on Delphi Model Creation
After the completion of all trials, ANSYS Icepak will attempt to launch a Microsoft Excel based network
extractor. If you have pre-configured appropriate settings you will see an Excel interface as shown in
Figure 25.26: Image of the Excel Based Optimizer (p. 624). Click the big orange box. The Excel optimizer
will run through the optimization process and create the Delphi network model in a new ANSYS Icepak
project folder.
Packages
Figure 25.26: Image of the Excel Based Optimizer
Procedure for Using an Already Created Delphi Network Model in a System

Level Thermal Analysis
1. After you obtain the Delphi Network
• The folder will contain an ANSYS Icepak model and an excel error chart.
• Open the model in ANSYS Icepak. This will open an ANSYS Icepak model containing the network object.
You may like to save the model to a common location where you can access it. Refer to Editing the
Libraries Paths (p. 241) on setting up libraries.
2. Incorporating the Delphi model into a system model
• Open the model in which you would like to use the network model.
• Merge the network model into this model. If you have set up a parts library, you may simply drag and
drop the model from your libraries folder in the model tree.
• Translate and rotate the assembly to the desired location.
3. Assigning power
• The network model obtained will not have any power imposed. To assign power to the network junction,
edit the network object – select the Properties tab, click on the Edit Network/Create nodes button.
• An image showing the network representation will show up.
– If the network is not clearly visible, click Reset Location
– If the resultant network is disorganized, you may reorganize by pressing the left mouse button and
dragging the nodes. If it is difficult to say which one is the junction node, reorganizing will help. A
reorganized network model can be seen in Figure 25.27: Editing the Network Object: Assigning
Power (p. 625)
• Double-click the Junction node. Input the power value. The power in the junction node should corres-
pond to the power dissipated in the die. The procedure is exemplified in Figure 25.27: Editing the Network
Object: Assigning Power (p. 625). The physical location of the different network faces can be checked
by selecting the faces in the edit region at the lower-right hand side of the user interface. The respective
faces can be seen using the selected solid view option (Figure 25.28: Checking the Location of a Face
Object in the Model. Make Pictures without Annotation Lines (p. 626)).
Figure 25.27: Editing the Network Object: Assigning Power
Packages
Figure 25.28: Checking the Location of a Face Object in the Model. Make Pictures without
Annotation Lines
Chapter 26: Transient Simulations
ANSYS Icepak can solve the equations for conservation of mass, momentum, and energy in time-depend-
ent form. Thus ANSYS Icepak can be used to simulate a wide variety of time-dependent phenomena,
including transient heat conduction and convection, as well as transient species transport.
Activating time dependence is sometimes useful when attempting to solve steady-state problems that
tend toward instability (for example, natural convection problems in which the Rayleigh number is close
to the transition region). It is possible in many cases to reach a steady-state solution by integrating the
time-dependent equations.
ANSYS Icepak uses a fully-implicit time-integration scheme for transient analysis. This chapter provides
details about setting up a transient simulation in ANSYS Icepak and postprocessing the results. See Time
Discretization (p. 1000) for details about the theory of transient simulations.
Information on transient simulations is divided into the following sections:
• User Inputs for Transient Simulations (p. 627)
• Specifying Variables as a Function of Time (p. 638)
• Postprocessing for Transient Simulations (p. 644)
26.1. User Inputs for Transient Simulations

To solve a transient problem, you will follow the procedure outlined below:
1. Enable the Transient option in the Transient setup tab of the Basic parameters panel (Figure 26.1: The
Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) (p. 628)). To open the Basic parameters panel, double-click
the Basic parameters item under the Problem setup node in the Model manager window.
Transient Simulations
Figure 26.1: The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab)
2. Enter the starting and ending times for the simulation in the Start and End text fields.
3. To edit the default transient parameters (if required), click Edit parameters. This will display the Transient
parameters panel shown in Figure 26.2: The Transient parameters Panel (p. 628).
Figure 26.2: The Transient parameters Panel
a. Specify a value for the Time step. The default value is 0.001 s.
b. Specify whether ANSYS Icepak should use a uniform or non-uniform time step.
User Inputs for Transient Simulations
• Enable Varying to specify a non-uniform time step. There are five options in the drop-down list:
Note:
If Varying is not enabled, the time step will be uniform.
– Linear (ts = i + a t) specifies a linear variation of the time step with time:
(26.1)
where Δt is the time step at time t, Δt0 is the initial time step, and a is a constant. Enter
values for the Δt0 and the Factor (a).
– Square Wave specifies a square-wave profile for the time step variation. If the variation of time
step required is regular/periodic with time, then this option can be used instead of the Piecewise
constant option. To specify a square-wave profile, click Edit to open the Square wave time-step
parameters panel (Figure 26.3: The Square Wave Time-Step Parameters Panel (p. 629)).
Figure 26.3: The Square Wave Time-Step Parameters Panel
To understand the meaning of the various parameters in the Square Wave Time-Step
Parameters panel, see Figure 26.4: The Square Wave Inputs for Time Step Variation (p. 629).
Figure 26.4: The Square Wave Inputs for Time Step Variation
– Piecewise constant specifies a piecewise constant variation of the time step. Select Piecewise
constant in the Transient parameters panel and click Edit. Enter a list of the time/time-step pairs
in the Piecewise value pairs (time / time-step) parameters box. It is important to give the
numbers in pairs, but the spacing between the numbers is not important. An example of the ar-
rangement of the time/time-step pairs is shown below:
(26.2)
ANSYS Icepak will use the time/time-step pairs such that if t< t1 , the time step Δt is given
by
(26.3)
Similarly, if t1 ≤t<t 2 ,
(26.4)
– Piecewise linear specifies a piecewise linear variation of the time step. Select Piecewise linear
in the Transient parameters panel and click Edit. Enter a list of the time/time-step pairs in the
Piecewise value pairs (time / time-step) parameters box. It is important to give the numbers in
pairs, but the spacing between the numbers is not important. An example of the arrangement of
the time/time-step pairs is shown below:
(26.5)
ANSYS Icepak will use the time/time-step pairs such that if ts <t≤t1 , the time step Δt is a
linear function that varies between Δt0 and Δt1 :
(26.6)
where ts is the Start time specified in the Basic parameters panel, and Δt0 is the Time
step increment specified at the top of the Transient parameters panel.
Similarly, for t1 <t≤ t2 , Δt is a linear function that varies between Δt1 and Δt2 :
(26.7)
– Automatic time step function is determined based on the estimation of the truncation error asso-
ciated with the time integration scheme. If the truncation error is smaller than a specified tolerance,
the size of the time step is increased; if the truncation error is greater, the time step size is decreased.
An estimation of the truncation error can be obtained by using a predictor-corrector type

of algorithm [31] (p. 1012) in association with the time integration scheme. At each time step,
a predicted solution can be obtained using a computationally inexpensive explicit method
(forward Euler for the first-order unsteady formulation, Adams-Bashford for the second-order
unsteady formulation). This predicted solution is used as an initial condition for the time
step, and the correction is computed using the nonlinear iterations associated with the im-
plicit formulation. The norm of the difference between the predicted and corrected solutions
is used as a measure of the truncation error. By comparing the truncation error with the
desired level of accuracy (that is, the truncation error tolerance), ANSYS Icepak is able to
adjust the time step size by increasing it or decreasing it.
In cases where the truncation error remains above the specified tolerance, ANSYS Icepak will
try to meet the tolerance within 5 attempts. If this tolerance is met, then the iteration moves
on to the next time step. An explicit scheme is used to predict the solution at each time
step, then the explicit prediction is corrected with an implicit scheme. The truncation error,
which is a function of the difference between the predicted and corrected solutions at a
specific time is used to calculate the next time step. However, if the calculated truncation
error is greater than the tolerance limit, we revert from the currently performed iteration,
which is moving from the nth step to n+1th step by performing the iteration with a smaller
time step. Since the truncation error is proportional to the time step, decreasing the time
step reduces the truncation error. This can be done until the truncation error goes below
the tolerance limit.
Specifying Parameters for Automatic Time Stepping

The parameters that control automatic time stepping are in the Automatic time-step
parameters panel. This panel is displayed when clicking the Edit button across from
Automatic.
Figure 26.5: Automatic time-step parameters panel
→ Number of fixed time steps specifies the number of fixed-size time steps that should be per-
formed before the size of the time step starts to change. The size of the fixed time step is the
value specified for Time step.
It is a good idea to perform a few fixed-size time steps before switching to automatic
time stepping. Sometimes spurious discretization errors can be associated with an impulsive
start in time. These errors are dissipated during the first few time steps, but they can ad-
versely affect the adaptive time stepping and result in extremely small time steps at the
beginning of the calculation.
Important:
When the solution tends to exhibit incomplete convergence, rather than in-
creasing the time step size or keeping the same time step size in the next step,
ANSYS Icepak reduces the time step size by at least half for the next time step
(making sure that the time step size does not go below the specified minimum
time step size.
→ Minimum/Maximum time step size specify the upper and lower limits for the size of the time
step. If the time step becomes very small, the computational expense may be too high; if the
time step becomes very large, the solution accuracy may not be acceptable to you. You can set
the limits that are appropriate for your simulation.
→ Minimum/Maximum step change factor limit the degree to which the time step size can
change at each time step. Limiting the change results in a smoother calculation of the time step
size, especially when high-frequency noise is present in the solution. If the time step change
factor, , is computed as the ratio between the specified truncation error tolerance and the
computed truncation error, the size of time step is computed as follows:
• If , is increased to meet the desired tolerance.
• If , is increased, but its maximum possible value is .
• If , is unchanged.
• If , is decreased.
→ Truncation error tolerance specifies the threshold value to which the computed truncation
error is compared. Increasing this value will lead to an increase in the size of the time step and
a reduction in the accuracy of the solution. Decreasing it will lead to a reduction in the size of
the time step and an increase in the solution accuracy, although the calculation will require
more computational time. For most cases, the default value of 0.01 is acceptable.
c. Specify the Solution save interval. This value tells ANSYS Icepak how often during the solution pro-
cedure the results should be saved. Every tenth time step is saved by default.
You can select the Varying button next to the Solution save interval field to set up a piecewise
constant interval schedule. Click the Edit button to open the Piecewise constant save interval
parameters panel and enter pairs of time save intervals. The save interval value will be dynam-
ically determined for the given flow time from the pairs.
Note:
• Only steps that have been saved can be used during postprocessing. Large amounts of
data can be generated from a transient simulation, so you should decide how much data
should be saved for postprocessing. If you are only interested in the solution at the end
of the transient simulation, then very little intermediate data need be saved. If you are
interested in animating and studying the transient effects in detail, then almost every
time step should be saved.
• In transient simulations, the .fdat file is saved at regular intervals based on the Solution
save interval. The .dat file is saved only at the end of the simulation.
d. Click Accept in the Transient parameters panel to store the new settings.
4. Specify the initial conditions for the fluid in your model in the Transient setup tab of the Basic parameters
panel (Figure 26.1: The Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) (p. 628)). For a transient simulation,
this corresponds to the initial physical state of the fluid. See Initial Conditions (p. 262) for more details on
setting initial conditions.
5. Specify an ambient value of temperature by entering the ambient Temperature under Ambient conditions
in the Defaults tab of the Basic parameters panel (Figure 26.6: The Basic parameters Panel (Default
tab) (p. 633)).
Figure 26.6: The Basic parameters Panel (Default tab)
6. To define the variation of ambient temperature as a function of time, select Transient next to Temperature,
and then click Edit. This will open the Transient temperature panel shown in the figures below.
a. Select the method for the calculation of the variation of ambient temperature with time. The following
options are available, and described in more detail in Specifying Variables as a Function of Time (p. 638).
• Linear specifies a linear variation of ambient temperature with time. Enter a value for the coefficient
a in Equation 26.9 (p. 638).
• Power law specifies a power law variation of ambient temperature with time. Enter values for the
coefficients a and n in Equation 26.10 (p. 638).
• Exponential specifies an exponential variation of ambient temperature with time. Enter a value for
the coefficients a and b in Equation 26.11 (p. 639).
• Sinusoidal specifies a sinusoidal variation of ambient temperature with time. Enter values for the
period T, the phase shift t0 , and the coefficient a in Equation 26.12 (p. 639).
• Piecewise linear specifies a piecewise linear variation of ambient temperature with time. There are
two ways to define the piecewise linear variation: the Time/value curve window and the Curve
specification panel. These methods are described in Specifying Variables as a Function of Time (p. 638).
Note:
The base temperature specified next to Temperature should be the same value as
the ambient temperature at the start of the simulation.
• Square wave specifies a square wave variation of ambient temperature with time. Specify the Phase,
the On time, the Off time, and the Off value for the square wave, as described in Specifying Variables
as a Function of Time (p. 638).
b. Click Done in the Transient temperature panel when you have finished specifying the variation of
ambient temperature with time.
7. Once you have set the desired parameters in the Basic parameters panel, click Accept to store the new
settings.
8. Specify the transient characteristics of the objects in your ANSYS Icepak model. You can specify transient
characteristics for the following objects:
• Solid or fluid block: Specify the total power as a function of time by selecting the Transient option in
the Properties tab of the Blocks panel (see Blocks (p. 493)) and clicking Edit. The Transient power
panel used to define the transient power of the block is very similar to the Transient temperature
panel. You must also specify the Start time and the End time for the transient simulation for the block.
the Joule option in the Properties tab of the Blocks panel (see Blocks (p. 493)) and clicking Edit.
From the Joule heating power panel, select the Transient option next to Current and click Edit.
The Transient current panel used to define the transient current for Joule heating power of the
block is very similar to the Transient temperature panel. You must also specify the Start time
and the End time for the transient simulation for the block.
• Fan: Specify the transient strength of a characteristic curve fan by turning on Transient strength in
the Properties tab of the Fans panel (see Fans (p. 527)) and clicking Edit. The Transient fan strength
panel used to define the transient strength of the fan is similar to the Transient temperature panel,
except that it contains only the Piecewise linear and Square wave options.
The transient fan strength multiplier scales the total pressure of the fan. The total pressure of the
fan is the sum of the static pressure (fan curve) and dynamic pressure:
(26.8)
• Opening: For a free opening, you can specify the static pressure, temperature, x velocity, y velocity, or
z velocity for flow across the opening as a function of time, by turning on the Transient option in the
Properties tab of the Openings panel (see Openings (p. 393)) and clicking Edit. The Transient pressure,
Transient temperature, Transient X velocity, Transient Y velocity, and Transient Z velocity panels
are very similar to the Transient temperature panel. You must also specify the Start time and the End
time for the transient simulation for the opening.
You can also specify the species concentrations as a function of time (see Species Transport
Modeling (p. 653) for information on species transport). Select Species in the Openings panel and
click the Edit button to open the Species concentration panel. The Transient species panel is
used to define the transient species concentrations for the openings.
For a recirculation opening, you can specify the Start time and the End time of the period when
the opening is active.
• Wall: You can specify the rate of heat transfer through the wall or the temperature on the outer surface
of the wall as a function of time, by turning on the Transient option in the Properties tab of the Walls
panel (see Openings (p. 393)) and clicking Edit. You can also specify the heat transfer coefficient as a
function of time by turning on the Transient option in the Wall external thermal conditions panel. To
open the Wall external thermal conditions panel, select Heat transfer coefficient in the Walls panel
and click Edit. The Transient power/area, Transient temperature, and Transient heat tr coeff panels
are very similar to the Transient temperature panel. You must also specify the Start time and the End
time for the transient simulation for the wall.
• Conducting thick plate: Specify the total power as a function of time by selecting Transient in the
Properties tab of the Plates panel (see Plates (p. 453)) and clicking Edit. The Transient power panel
used to define the transient power of the plate is very similar to the Transient temperature panel. You
must also specify the Start time and the End time for the transient simulation for the plate.
the Joule option in the Properties tab of the Plates panel (see Plates (p. 453)) and clicking Edit.
From the Joule heating power panel, select the Transient option next to Current and click Edit.
The Transient current panel used to define the transient current for Joule heating power of the
plate is very similar to the Transient temperature panel. You must also specify the Start time
and the End time for the transient simulation for the plate.
• Source: Specify the power as a function of time by turning on the Transient option in the Properties
tab of the Sources panel (see Sources (p. 423)) and clicking Edit. The Transient power panel used to
define the transient power of the source is very similar to the Transient temperature panel. You must
also specify the Start time and the End time for the transient simulation for the source.
For 3D sources, you can also specify the current as a function of time for Joule heating type inputs
by selecting the Joule heating option in the Properties tab of the Sources panel (see
Sources (p. 423)) and clicking Edit. From the Joule heating power panel, select the Transient
option next to Current and click Edit. The Transient current panel used to define the transient
current for Joule heating power of the source is very similar to the Transient temperature panel.
You must also specify the Start time and the End time for the transient simulation for the source.
• Resistance: Specify the total power as a function of time by selecting Transient in the Properties tab
of the Resistances panel (see Resistances (p. 559)) and clicking Edit. The Transient power panel used
to define the transient power of the resistance is very similar to the Transient temperature panel. You
must also specify the Start time and the End time for the transient simulation for the resistance.
Note:
The Start time and the End time can be different for different objects.
9. Set the maximum number of iterations to be performed per time step under Iterations/timestep in the
Basic settings panel (Figure 26.7: The Basic settings Panel for a Transient Simulation (p. 638)). To open this
panel, double-click the Basic settings item under the Solution settings node in the Model manager
window. If the Convergence criteria are satisfied before this number of iterations is performed, the solution
will advance to the next time step. The default value of 20 iterations/time step should be acceptable for
most cases. If you find that the solution is not converging at each time step, you can increase the Itera-
tions/timestep value and/or decrease the size of the Time step increment specified in the Transient
parameters panel (Figure 26.2: The Transient parameters Panel (p. 628)).
Figure 26.7: The Basic settings Panel for a Transient Simulation
10. Start the calculation using the Solve panel. To open this panel, click Run solution in the Solve menu. Click
Start solution to start the calculation.
Files will be saved at the frequency specified next to Solution save interval in the Transient parameters
panel (Figure 26.2: The Transient parameters Panel (p. 628)). A separate file is saved for each time step
for which data are saved.
26.2. Specifying Variables as a Function of Time

For transient simulations, you can specify variables that vary as a function of time. You can specify dif-
ferent kinds of variations, including linear, power law, exponential, sinusoidal, piecewise linear, and
square wave:
• linear:
(26.9)
where t is the time, st is the value of the variable at time t, s0 is the value of the variable at t = 0,
and a is a constant.
• power law:
(26.10)
Specifying Variables as a Function of Time
and a and n are constants.
• exponential:
(26.11)
and a and b are constants.
• sinusoidal:
(26.12)
where t is the time, st is the value of the variable at time t, s0 is the value of the variable at t = 0, T
is the period, t0 is the phase shift, and a is a constant.
• piecewise linear:
(26.13)
where f(t) is a function of time, st is the value of the variable at time t, and s0 is the value of the
variable at t = 0. See Using the Time/value curve Window to Specify a Piecewise Linear Variation With
Time (p. 642) for information on defining f(t) using the Time/value curve window; see Using the Curve
specification Panel to Specify a Piecewise Linear Variation With Time (p. 643) for details on defining
f(t) using the Curve specification panel.
• square wave:
(26.14)
where st is the value of the variable at time t and s0 is the value of the variable at t = 0. f(t) is a
function of time as shown in Figure 26.8: Definition of a Square Wave (p. 639).
Figure 26.8: Definition of a Square Wave
The Phase is the time between t = 0 and the first peak of the square wave. The On time is the time
that the square wave is at its peak value. The Off time is the time between peak values of the square
wave. The Off value is the value of the square waves between the peaks of the wave. The peak value
is the specified value of the transient quantity (for example, 293 for Temperature in Figure 26.1: The
Basic parameters Panel (Transient setup Tab) (p. 628)).
• Displaying the Variation of Transient Parameters with Time (p. 640)
• Using the Time/value curve Window to Specify a Piecewise Linear Variation With Time (p. 642)
• Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Piecewise Linear Variation With Time (p. 643)
26.2.1. Displaying the Variation of Transient Parameters with Time

After you have specified the transient parameters for your ANSYS Icepak model (for example, time
step, temperature, power, and so on) you can display the variation of these parameters with time
using the Transients panel (Figure 26.9: The Transients Panel (p. 640)). To open the Transients panel,
click the View button under Time variation in the Transient setup tab of the Basic parameters
panel.
Figure 26.9: The Transients Panel
The following functions are available for viewing the variation of transient parameters:
• To display specified variation plots of the transient parameters as a function of time (for example, time,
ambient temp, power), toggle the check boxes in the upper left of the panel.
• To update the variation plots after having made changes in the Basic parameters panel, the Transient
parameters panel, the Transient temperature panel, or any similar transient parameter panel, click Up-
date.
• To display variation plots of all defined transient parameters, click Show all.
• To import all previously defined piecewise linear curves, click Load All. This will open the Load all curves
file selection dialog box and override any existing data. Select the file containing the curve data and click
Open. The files are in csv format and have the following format.
Note:
If the number of columns for curve data is more than 200, you should add another curve
data section.
# Curve data
# name, variable, time, value, name, variable, time, value,
block.1, power, 0.0, 0.0, block.2, power, 0.0, 0.0,
block.1, power, 0.3, 0.3, block.2, power, 0.9, 0.6,
block.1, power, 0.6, 0.6,,,,,
block.1, power, 0.9, 0.9,,,,,
# Curve data
#
# name, variable, time, value,
block.3, power, 0.0, 0.0
# Curve data
# name, variable, time, value, name, variable, time, value,
resistance.1, power, 0.0, 0.0, wall.1, heat flux, 0.0, 0.0,
,,,,wall.1, heat flux, 0.9, 0.25,
# Base value
#
# name, variable, value, unit, value, unit
block.1, power, 1.0, W
resistance.1, power, 2.0, W
wall.1, heat flux, 2.0, W/m2
Note:
– When the fan flow characteristic is nonlinear, the fan flow curve has to be loaded manually.
– When you select Load All to import all curves, deselect all objects, otherwise the curve data
for the current object will not be imported.
• To save all curves, click Save All. This will open the Save all curves dialog box, in which you can specify
the filename and directory to which the curve data is to be saved. The files are in CSV format.
• To display the time-step points on the variation plots, turn on the Timesteps option.
• To non-dimensionalize the y axis of the variation plot; that is, divide each parameter value by the base
value of the parameter, turn on the Nondimensional option.
26.2.2. Using the Time/value curve Window to Specify a Piecewise Linear

Variation With Time
You can specify a piecewise linear variation of a variable with time using the Time/value curve
graphics display and control window (Figure 26.10: The Time/value curve Graphics Display and Control
Window (p. 642)). To open the Time/value curve window, select Piecewise linear in the Transient
temperature panel or in any similar transient parameter panel, and click Edit. Select Graph editor.
Figure 26.10: The Time/value curve Graphics Display and Control Window
• To delete a point on the curve, right-click on the point.
button. The selected area will then fill the Time/value curve window, with appropriate changes to the
axes. After you have zoomed into an area of the model, click Full range to restore the graph to its original
axes and scale.
Select the file containing the curve data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details
hard-copy files.
Click Done when you have finished creating the curve; this will store the curve and close the
Time/value curve graphics display and control window. Once the curve is defined, you can view the
pairs of coordinates defining the curve in the Curve specification panel. See Figure 26.12: The Curve
specification Panel (p. 644) for the pairs of coordinates for the curve shown in Figure 26.10: The
Time/value curve Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 642).
26.2.3. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Piecewise Linear

Variation With Time
You can define a piecewise linear variation of a variable with time using the Curve specification
panel (Figure 26.12: The Curve specification Panel (p. 644)). To open the Curve specification panel,
select Piecewise linear in the Transient temperature panel or in any similar transient parameter
panel, and click Edit. Select Text editor from the resulting list.
Once the pairs of coordinates have been entered, you can view the piecewise linear curve in the
Time/value curve graphics display and control window. See Figure 26.10: The Time/value curve
Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 642) for the piecewise linear curve for the values shown in
Figure 26.12: The Curve specification Panel (p. 644).
26.3. Postprocessing for Transient Simulations

An ANSYS Icepak solution to a transient problem consists of a set of solutions, each of which describes
the state of the model at a specific time step in the process. There are four ways to examine the results
of your transient simulation:
• Examining Results at a Specified Time (p. 644)
• Creating an Animation (p. 645)
• Generating a Report (p. 647)
• Creating a History Plot (p. 647)
26.3.1. Examining Results at a Specified Time

You can examine the results at a particular time step or value (a "snapshot") using the Post-processing
time panel (Figure 26.13: The Post-processing time Panel (p. 645)). To open this panel, select Transient
settings in the Post menu or click on the button in the Postprocessing toolbar.
Postprocessing for Transient Simulations
Post Transient settings
Figure 26.13: The Post-processing time Panel
To examine the results of the transient simulation at a particular time step or value (a snapshot), follow
the steps below.
1. Specify the contour or vector data to be displayed in the relevant postprocessing panel (see Examining
the Results (p. 877) for more details on specifying postprocessing objects).
2. Specify either a single time value or a particular time step in the transient simulation to be used for the
snapshot. To specify a single time value, select Time value in the Post-processing time panel (Fig-
ure 26.13: The Post-processing time Panel (p. 645)) and enter the value. To specify a particular time step,
select Time step in the Post-processing time panel and enter the time step.
If you specify the time step to be used (for a snapshot analysis), ANSYS Icepak employs the solution
results at the specified time step. If you specify a time value that does not exactly correspond to
a stored time step, ANSYS Icepak interpolates the snapshot solution between solutions for the
time steps before and after the specified value.
3. Click Update to display the solution results at the specified time or time step.
4. Click Animate to open the Transient animation panel. Animating a transient solution using this panel
is described in further detail in Creating an Animation (p. 645).
5. Click Forward or Backward to display the solution results at a time value or time step incremented from
the specified Time value or Time step. To display results at the next or previous time value, select Time
value, input the time value increment (Δt) in the Increment field, then click Forward or Backward. To
display results at the next or previous time step, select Time step and click Forward or Backward.
26.3.2. Creating an Animation

You can create an animation of the results for your transient simulation using the Post-processing
time panel (Figure 26.13: The Post-processing time Panel (p. 645)). To open this panel, select Transient
settings in the Post menu or click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar.
Post Transient settings
To create an animation showing how relevant contours and/or vectors change over time, follow the
steps below.
1. Specify the contour or vector data to be displayed in the relevant postprocessing panel (see Examining
the Results (p. 877) for more details on specifying postprocessing objects).
2. Select Time value in the Post-processing time panel (Figure 26.13: The Post-processing time Pan-
el (p. 645)).
3. Click Animate to open the Transient animation panel (Figure 26.14: The Transient animation Pan-
el (p. 646)).
Figure 26.14: The Transient animation Panel
4. Specify the Start time and End time for the animation. By default, the Start time is zero and the End
time is the time corresponding to the solution end time.
5. Specify either the number of steps or the number of "frames" per second.
• Steps specifies the number of steps, that is, the number of frames ANSYS Icepak should display between
the starting frame and the ending frame. ANSYS Icepak will interpolate smoothly between the starting
frame and the ending frame that you define, creating the specified number of frames. Note that the
number of steps includes the starting and ending frames.
• Delay (ms) specifies the time between each frame in the animation in milliseconds. Note that the
delay value is added to the time taken by ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot for the animation. The
time it takes ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot is dependent on the speed of your system.
6. If you want ANSYS Icepak to play the animation only in the graphics window, and you want the playback
to repeat continuously, turn on the Loop mode option. To play the animation once from start to finish,
turn off the Loop mode option. You can also use the Loop mode option if you want to save an animated
GIF or FLI file, as described in Saving an Animation (p. 894).
7. To save the animation to a file, select the Write to file option. See Saving an Animation (p. 894) for details
on saving an animation. Note that when the Write to file option is selected, the Delay (ms) field becomes
the Frames/s field. The Frames/s field designates the number of animation frames displayed per second.
8. If you selected the Write to file option in the step above, define the region of the graphics window that
should be written to the file. See Specifying the Print Region (p. 155) for details about specifying the Print
region.
9. Click Animate to start the animation. To stop the animation during playback, click the Interrupt button
in the upper right hand corner of the ANSYS Icepak interface.
26.3.3. Generating a Report

You can generate a report for a specified time in the transient simulation by creating a Solution
overview, Summary report, Full report, or a Point report.
To create a Solution overview, click Solution overview and then Create in the Report menu.
Report Solution overview Create
To open the Define summary report panel, click Summary report in the Report menu.
To open the Define full report panel, click Full report in the Report menu.
Report Full report
To open the Define point report panel, click Point report in the Report menu.
Report Point report
You can generate a report at a specified time or a specified time step in the transient analysis by
entering a value for either Time or Step under Report time in the relevant panel. See Generating
Reports (p. 935) for more information on generating reports.
26.3.4. Creating a History Plot

A history plot shows the change in a specified variable over time at specified points in the model.
Time is plotted on the x axis and the variable value is plotted on the y axis. By including a number
of points in a single plot, you can compare various locations in the model with respect to the value
of a specified variable as a function of time.
You can examine how a variable changes over time at selected points in the model using the History
plot panel (Figure 26.15: The History plot Panel (p. 648)). To open this panel, select History plot in
the Post menu or click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar.
Post History plot
Figure 26.15: The History plot Panel
To create a history plot, follow the steps below.
1. Select the Variable to be plotted on the vertical axis. Temperature is selected by default in the Variable
list. To change the variable to be displayed, select a new variable from the Variable drop-down list. See
Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955) for information on variables.
2. Specify the interval of the transient simulation to be examined by entering values for the Start time and
the End time. This interval will be plotted on the horizontal axis.
3. There are three options to specify the location of the point of interest for the history plot:
• Add location allows you to specify the coordinates of a point. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates or
select From screen to select the points on the screen with the left button. Click the Done button. The
point will appear in the Right-click points to remove list.
• Add post object allows you to select an existing point object from the Selection panel (Fig-
ure 26.16: The Selection Panel (p. 648)).
Figure 26.16: The Selection Panel
In the Selection panel, select the point in the list and click Okay. The point will appear in the
Right-click points to remove list in the History plot panel. See Displaying Results at a
Point (p. 901) for details on creating a point object.
• Add point allows you to select an existing point from the point drop-down list or create a new point,
as described below.
4. Click Create to display the XY time history plot of the selected variable at the point(s) specified. Click
Close to close the History plot panel without creating a history plot.
Points
ANSYS Icepak allows you to create points that can be used to specify the location at which ANSYS
Icepak should create a history plot. Points can also be used to specify the location at which ANSYS
Icepak should create a point report (see Point Reports (p. 948)), define the location of a point object
for postprocessing (see Displaying Results at a Point (p. 901)), and define the location of a point
monitor (see Monitoring the Solution (p. 836)).
To select a point, click the Add point button in the History plot panel (Figure 26.15: The History plot
Panel (p. 648)) and select a point from the Add point drop-down list. The point drop-down list can
be used to create a new point or edit an existing point.
Creating a New Point
To create a new point, click the Add point button in the History plot panel and select New point
from the point drop-down list. This will open the Create point panel (Figure 26.17: The Create point
Panel (p. 650)). Enter a name in the Name field and then specify the location of the point in the
model. There are two ways to do this:
• Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
• Click a surface to align with using the (Nearest, Edge, Object, Vertex, Face, or Plane button) and click a
location in the graphics window with your left mouse button to select the location of the point.
Specify whether Temperature, Pressure, Velocity or Species will be monitored at the point. Click
Accept when you have finished creating the point. To create another point, click New and click Close
to close the Create point panel.
Figure 26.17: The Create point Panel
Editing an Existing Point
To edit an existing point, select the point in the Model manager window and right-click to display
the object's context menu. Select Edit. ANSYS Icepak will open the Modify point panel (Figure 36.5: The
Modify point Panel (p. 838)). You can edit the name in the Name text entry field and then edit the
location of the point in one of two ways:
• Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
• Click a surface to align with using the (Nearest , Edge, Object, Vertex, Face or Plane button) and click a
location in the graphics window with your left mouse button to select the location of the point.
Click Done when you have finished editing the point, and ANSYS Icepak will close the Modify point
panel.
Deleting Points
If there are points in the History plot panel (Figure 26.15: The History plot Panel (p. 648)) that you no
longer need, you can easily delete them. To remove specified points, right-click the individual point
names in the Right-click points to remove list and click Remove points. The point will be permanently
removed from the point drop-down list in the History plot panel.
Activating and Deactivating Points
By default, all points that you create will be available in your current ANSYS Icepak model. You can
temporarily remove a point from all of the point drop-down lists by turning off the Active option for
the point in the Create point panel (Figure 26.17: The Create point Panel (p. 650)). You can repeat this
for each point that you want to temporarily remove from your model. When a point is deactivated,
it is simply removed from the point drop-down lists, not deleted from ANSYS Icepak. Since it still exists,
you can easily add it to the point drop-down lists again by turning the Active option back on.
Note that, if you deactivate a point that is currently being used in your ANSYS Icepak model, ANSYS
Icepak will still use the point. Deactivating a point only removes it from the point drop-down lists so
that it cannot be selected.
Chapter 27: Species Transport Modeling
ANSYS Icepak can model species transport with up to twelve species included in the calculation. ANSYS
Icepak models the mixing and transport of species by solving conservation equations describing con-
vection and diffusion for each component species. This chapter describes the species modeling options
in ANSYS Icepak. See Species Transport Equations (p. 962) for details about the theory of species transport
in ANSYS Icepak.
Information about species transport is provided in the following sections:
• Overview of Modeling Species Transport (p. 653)
• User Inputs for Species Transport Simulations (p. 654)
• Postprocessing for Species Calculations (p. 664)
27.1. Overview of Modeling Species Transport

The basic steps for setting up a problem involving species transport are listed below.
1. Enable species transport, and specify the species to be included in the calculation.
2. Check and/or set the properties of the individual species in the model (for example, viscosity, specific heat).
3. Set species concentrations for the objects in your model.
In many cases, you will not need to modify any physical properties of individual species because ANSYS
Icepak will use the species properties specified in the materials database. Some properties, however,
may not be defined as you want them in the database. You may also want to check the database values
of other properties to be sure that they are correct for your particular application. The properties of a
species can be viewed and/or edited using the Materials panel (see Editing an Existing Material (p. 342)).
You can also create a new material as described in Creating a New Material (p. 350).
For each of the species (that is, fluid materials) in the model, you (or the database) must define the
following physical properties:
• volumetric expansion coefficient, which can be a function of temperature
• molecular weight which is used in the gas law and/or in the calculation of mole-fraction inputs or outputs
• viscosity, which can be a function of temperature
• thermal conductivity and specific heat (in problems involving solution of the energy equation), which can
be functions of temperature or (for thermal conductivity only) velocity
• density
Species Transport Modeling
• mass diffusion coefficients, which govern the mass diffusion fluxes (Equation 40.8 (p. 963) and Equa-
tion 40.9 (p. 963)), and can be a function of temperature
Descriptions of these property inputs are provided in Editing an Existing Material (p. 342).
27.2. User Inputs for Species Transport Simulations

To solve a problem involving species transport in ANSYS Icepak, you will follow the procedure outlined
below:
1. Enable the calculation of species transport in the Basic parameters panel. To open the Basic parameters
panel (Figure 27.1: Basic parameters (Advanced tab) (p. 655)), double-click the Basic parameters item under
the Problem setup node in the Model manager window. Problem setup Basic parameters
Enable the calculation of species transport located below the Species group box.
Note:
When species modeling is enabled, species transport equations will be solved in all
fluid zones defined in the domain (i.e., individual fluid zones cannot be excluded
from species transport modeling).
User Inputs for Species Transport Simulations
Figure 27.1: Basic parameters (Advanced tab)
2. To define the species to be included in the problem, click Edit next to Enable to open the Species
definitions panel shown in Figure 27.2: The Species definitions Panel (p. 656).
Figure 27.2: The Species definitions Panel
a. Type the Number of species to be included in the calculation and press Enter on the keyboard. The
number of species you enter will then become enabled in the panel.
Note:
The maximum number of species you can define is 12.
b. Select the species to be included in the calculation from the drop-down lists under Species (use the
scroll bar if needed). You can also view the properties of a currently selected material, edit the definition
of a material, or create a new material using the materials list, as described in Material Properties (p. 339).
Note:
Note that the most abundant species must appear at the top of the Species list.
The default species is air and water vapor (h20).
c. Select the concentration units and specify the Initial concentration for each species to be included in
the calculation.
i. Select the concentration units for each species in your calculation from the fraction menu to the
right of the Initial concentration entry field for the species (Figure 27.3: The fraction menu (p. 657)).
Figure 27.3: The fraction menu
The following options are available:
fraction is the mass fraction of the species

gr/lbm is a humidity ratio (moisture content/dry air content) and is available only for
water h2o
g/kg is a humidity ratio and is available only for water (h2o)
RH is the relative humidity and is available only for water (h2o)
PPMV is the parts per million by volume (106 times the mole fraction) of the species
kg/m3 is the density of the species
ii. Specify the Initial concentration for each species in your calculation.
Note:
Note that you will set initial concentrations explicitly only for the last N-1 species
in the panel. The solver will internally convert your inputs to mass fractions for all
species and then compute the mass fraction of the most abundant species (the
first species in the list) by subtracting the total of the initial mass fractions from
1.
d. Click Accept in the Species definitions panel to store the definition of the species to be used in the
calculation.
3. Specify the species concentrations for the objects to be included in your ANSYS Icepak model. Note that,
for 2D objects, you will set concentrations explicitly only for the last N-1 species for each object. The solver
will internally convert your inputs to mass fractions for all species and then compute the mass fraction of
the most abundant species (the first species in the list in the Species definitions panel shown in Fig-
ure 27.2: The Species definitions Panel (p. 656)) by subtracting the total of the mass fractions for the object
from 1.
For 3D objects, you will set volume source parameters explicitly for all N species for each object.
For volume sources, each species can have a source, including the most abundant species.
a. Select the Species option in the relevant Object panel and click Edit. This will open the Species con-
centrations panel.
b. Enter values for the species concentrations for the object.
• Hollow block, fan or grille:
i. Select the check box for each Species for which you want to set a concentration in the Species
concentrations panel (Figure 27.5: The Species concentrations for a Free Opening (p. 659)).
Note:
ANSYS Icepak will apply a zero gradient (zero flux) boundary condition for all
the species that are not selected in the Species concentrations panel.
ii. Select the concentration units from the fraction menu (Figure 27.3: The fraction menu (p. 657))
and enter a value for the Concentrations of each Species that you have selected.
Figure 27.4: The Species concentrations Panel for a Hollow Block, Fan or Grille
• Free opening:
Note:
and enter a value for the Concentration of each Species that you have selected. To specify a
uniform concentration for a species, enter a value in the Concentration text entry box for the
species. To define a spatial profile for the concentration of a species, select Profile for the species
and click Edit to open the panel (see Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Spatial
Boundary Profile (p. 663) for details).
Figure 27.5: The Species concentrations for a Free Opening
• 3D resistance:
i. Select the check box for each Species for which you want to set a volume source in the Species
Note:
If you deselect a species, Icepak will not introduce the species into the domain
through that resistance.
ii. Enter a value for the Volume source (the mass of the species entering the domain per second)
of each Species that you want to include in the calculation. Enter a negative value for the species
Volume source if the species is leaving the domain through the resistance.
Figure 27.6: The Species concentrations Panel for a 3D Resistance
• 2D source:
Note:
and enter a value for the Concentration of each Species that you have selected.
Figure 27.7: The Species concentrations Panel for a 2D Source
• 3D source:
i. Select the check box for each Species for which you want to set a volume source in the Species
Note:
If you deselect a species, Icepak will not introduce the species into the domain
through that source.
ii. Enter a value for the Volume source (the mass of the species entering the domain per second)
of each Species that you want to include in the calculation. Enter a negative value for the species
Volume source if the species is leaving the domain through the source.
Figure 27.8: The Species concentrations Panel for a 3D Source
c. To perform a transient calculation for a species, select the check box under Transient for the species.
To edit the parameters for the transient simulation for the species, click Edit under Transient for the
species. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for more details on transient simulations.
d. Click Done to store the new settings and close the Species concentrations panel.
4. If your model contains a recirculation opening, you can specify the increase or decrease of species in the
recirculation loop. Select the Species filter option in the Openings panel and click Edit. This will open
the Species filter efficiency panel shown in Figure 27.9: The Species filter efficiency Panel (p. 661).
Figure 27.9: The Species filter efficiency Panel
For each species in the calculation, there are two options:
Filter fraction is the fraction of the Species type that is removed from the model in the recir-
culation loop.
Augment factor is the factor by which the Species type increases in the recirculation loop.
5. Define the rest of your problem in the usual way.
6. If necessary, modify the solution controls for your simulation. These controls are in the Advanced solver
setup panel. To open the Advanced solver setup panel, first click the Settings > Advanced option in the
Solve menu.
Solve Settings Advanced
This opens the Advanced solver setup panel (Figure 27.10: The Advanced solver setup Panel (p. 662)).
Figure 27.10: The Advanced solver setup Panel
a. Select a discretization scheme for each of the species in your model. See Choosing the Discretization
Scheme (p. 831) for details on the discretization schemes in ANSYS Icepak.
b. Modify the under-relaxation factors for each of the species in your model, as required. See Setting Under-
Relaxation Factors (p. 833) for details on setting under-relaxation factors in ANSYS Icepak.
c. Select a multigrid scheme for each of the species in your model. See Selecting the Multigrid
Scheme (p. 834) for details on selecting a multigrid scheme in ANSYS Icepak.
d. Set linear solver advanced controls. See Selecting Linear Solver Advanced Controls (p. 835) for details
on setting linear solver controls in ANSYS Icepak.
7. Start the calculation using the Solve panel. To open this panel, click Run solution in the Solve menu. Click
Start solution to start the calculation.
27.2.1. Using the Curve specification Panel to Specify a Spatial Boundary

Profile
You can define a spatial boundary profile for the mass fraction of a species at a free opening using
the Curve specification panel (Figure 27.11: The Curve specification Panel (p. 663)). To open the Curve
specification panel, select Profile in the Species concentrations panel (Figure 27.5: The Species
concentrations for a Free Opening (p. 659)) and click Edit.
To define a profile, specify a list of (x, y, z) coordinates and the corresponding values in the Curve
specification panel. For example, the first line in Figure 27.5: The Species concentrations for a Free
Opening (p. 659) specifies a mass fraction of 0.05 at (0.25, 0.25, 1). The data in Figure 27.5: The Species
concentrations for a Free Opening (p. 659) specify a variation of mass fractions on the plane 0.25
≤x≤0.75, $0.25≤ y ≤ 0.75, z=1. The values in the right-hand column are the mass fractions of the
species. Click Accept when you have finished defining the profile; this will store the values and close
the Curve specification panel. ANSYS Icepak will interpolate the data you provide in the Curve
specification panel to create a profile for the whole boundary.
To load a previously defined profile, click Load. (See Contour Attributes (p. 904) for details on saving
contour data and using them as a profile.) This will open the Load curve file selection dialog box.
Select the file containing the profile data and click Accept. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for
details on selecting a file. If you know the length units used in the profile data you are loading, you
should select the appropriate units in the Curve specification panel before you load the profile. If
you want to view the data after you have loaded them, using different length units than the default
units in the Curve specification panel, select the Fix values option and then select the appropriate
units from the Length units list.
To save a profile, click Save. This will open the Save curve dialog box, in which you can specify the
filename and directory to which the profile data are to be saved.
27.3. Postprocessing for Species Calculations

ANSYS Icepak provides postprocessing options for displaying, plotting, and reporting the results of the
species calculations. You can generate graphical plots or reports of the following quantities:
• species (mole)
• species (mass)
• relative humidity
These variables are contained in the Variable and Value drop-down lists that appear in the postpro-
cessing and reporting panels. See Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955) for their definitions.
Chapter 28: Radiation Modeling
ANSYS Icepak uses surface-to-surface, discrete ordinates or ray tracing approach for modeling radiation.
Heating or cooling of surfaces due to radiation can be included in your model. This chapter describes
how to include radiation in your ANSYS Icepak model. See Radiation (p. 980) for details about the theory
behind ANSYS Icepak’s radiation model.
Information about radiation modeling is presented in the following sections:
• When to Include Radiation (p. 665)
• Surface-to-surface Radiation Modeling (p. 665)
• Discrete Ordinates Radiation Modeling (p. 675)
• Ray tracing Radiation Modeling (p. 676)
28.1. When to Include Radiation

Typical applications well suited for simulation using radiation heat transfer include the following:
• Surface-to-surface radiant heating or cooling
• Coupled radiation, convection, and/or conduction heat transfer
You should include radiation heat transfer in your simulation when the radiant heat flux,
, is large compared to the heat transfer rate due to convection or conduction.
Typically this will occur at high temperatures where the fourth-order dependence of the radiation heat
flux on absolute temperature implies that radiation will dominate. Also, radiation is typically more im-
portant for natural convection problems than for forced convection problems of interest in electronics
cooling.
If you need to include radiation heat transfer from exterior walls of your model, you can include an
external radiation boundary condition for walls.
28.2. Surface-to-surface Radiation Modeling

The surface-to-surface radiation model in ANSYS Icepak provides an economical way to account for ra-
diation effects in most applications. The surface-to-surface model uses form factors (also known as view
factors) that are calculated for surfaces of ANSYS Icepak objects. The method of computing form factors
in ANSYS Icepak does not account specifically for symmetry boundaries when ANSYS Icepak computes
form factors to or from surfaces that are adjacent to symmetry boundaries.
Radiation Modeling
28.2.1. Radiation Modeling for Objects

ANSYS Icepak allows you to specify that any or all objects exchange radiative energy with other objects
in the model or with a specified remote temperature if you are using the surface-to-surface radiation
model. For radiation, the heat transfer rate is defined as
(28.1)
where Tsurface is the temperature of the object surface, Tremote is the temperature of the surface to
which the object radiates heat, σ is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant, F is a view factor specifying the
fraction of radiant energy that is intercepted by the surface of the object, and e is the emissivity of
the surface of the object (defined as part of the properties of the surface material specified for the
object).
If you specify an object as radiating energy to and from a specified temperature, you must specify a
remote temperature and an appropriate view factor.
If you specify an object as radiating energy to other objects in the model, ANSYS Icepak automatically
calculates the view factors and computes the radiative heat flux based on calculated object temper-
atures. If the sum of the view factors for a radiating object is less than 1, ANSYS Icepak will define
the remainder to radiate to the radiation temperature (Radiation temp) specified under Ambient
28.3. User Inputs for Radiation Modeling

To solve a problem involving the surface-to-surface radiation model in ANSYS Icepak (the default radiation
model), you will follow the procedure outlined below:
1. Enable the calculation of radiation in the General setup tab of the Basic parameters panel. To open the
Basic parameters panel (Figure 28.1: The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 667)), double-click
the Basic parameters item under the Problem setup node in the Model manager window.
Enable the calculation of radiation by selecting On next to Radiation. Note that On is selected by
default, but if you do not specify any surfaces to be included in the radiation calculation, it will be
ignored and radiation will not be computed. If you have defined some radiating surfaces in your
model, you can turn off the calculation of radiation by selecting Off next to Radiation in the Basic
parameters panel. After, turning on radiation, select Surface to surface radiation model to enable
it.
User Inputs for Radiation Modeling
Figure 28.1: The Basic parameters Panel (General setup Tab)
2. Specify the objects to be included in the radiation calculation. You can do this in two ways:
• Select the radiation option in each object panel (i.e., the Walls panel, the Blocks panel, and so on) and
specify the radiation parameters for each object or surface (described below). The view factors can then
be calculated in one of two ways:
– Open the Form factors panel and click Compute. You can also display, save, and edit the view factors,
as described in User Inputs for Specification of Radiation Using the Form factors Panel (p. 670).
– If you do not compute the view factors before you start the calculation, ANSYS Icepak will compute
them for you at the start of the calculation.
If you have already calculated the view factors for your model and you do not want ANSYS Icepak to
recalculate them, select Don’t recompute in the Form factors panel (Figure 28.4: The Form factors
Panel (p. 671)).
• Specify the objects in the Form factors panel (described in User Inputs for Specification of Radiation
Using the Form factors Panel (p. 670)).
3. Define the rest of your problem in the usual way.
Radiation Modeling
4. Start the calculation using the Solve panel. To open this panel, click Start solution in the Solve menu.
If you have enabled radiation on surfaces in your model, you can turn off the calculation of radiation
by selecting the Disable radiation calculations option in the Solve panel.
• User Inputs for Specification of Radiation in Individual Object Panels (p. 668)
• User Inputs for Specification of Radiation Using the Form factors Panel (p. 670)
28.3.1. User Inputs for Specification of Radiation in Individual Object Panels

The calculation of radiation for the various objects can be specified in their respective object panels.
You can choose the object surfaces to radiate either to a fixed temperature or to other surfaces in
the model.
The procedure for specifying radiation in your model using individual object panels is described below.
1. Turn on radiation for the object. You will do this in different ways for different kinds of objects.
• Block: You can specify radiation for the whole block or for individual sides of the block.
– For the whole block, select the Radiation option in the Properties tab of the Blocks panel. Click
Edit to access the Radiation specification panel (Figure 28.2: The Radiation specification Pan-
el (p. 669)).
– (fluid, solid, and hollow blocks only) For individual sides of the block, select the Individual sides
option in the Properties tab of the Blocks panel. Click Edit to open the Individual side specification
panel. Select Radiation properties to access the radiation properties, which are the same as those
shown in Figure 28.2: The Radiation specification Panel (p. 669).
• 2D source: Select the Radiation option in the Properties tab of the Sources panel. Click Edit to access
the Radiation specification panel (Figure 28.2: The Radiation specification Panel (p. 669)).
• Plate: Select the Low side or High side option under Side specification in the Properties tab of the
Plates panel and click Edit to open the Low (or High) side surface properties panel. Select Radiation
to access the radiation properties, which are the same as those shown in Figure 28.2: The Radiation
specification Panel (p. 669).
• PCB: Select the Low side or High side option under Radiation in the Properties tab of the Printed
circuit boards panel and click Edit to open the Low (or High) side surface properties panel. Select
Radiation to access the radiation properties, which are the same as those shown in Figure 28.2: The
Radiation specification Panel (p. 669).
• Package: Select the Top side radiation in the Die/Mold tab of the Packages panel and click Edit to
open the Top side surface properties panel. Select Radiation to access the radiation properties,
which are the same as those shown in Figure 28.2: The Radiation specification Panel (p. 669).
• Heat sink object: Select the Radiation option in the Properties tab of the Heat sinks panel. Click Edit
to access the Radiation specification panel (Figure 28.2: The Radiation specification Panel (p. 669)).
• Enclosure object: Select the Radiation option for the desired side of the enclosure in the Properties
tab of the Enclosures panel. Click Edit to access the Radiation specification panel (Figure 28.2: The
Radiation specification Panel (p. 669)).
• Wall: Select the Inner surface radiation option in the Properties tab of the Walls panel and click
Edit to access the Radiation specification panel (Figure 28.2: The Radiation specification Panel (p. 669)).
Figure 28.2: The Radiation specification Panel
2. Specify the nature of the surface(s) with which the object or surface exchanges radiation by selecting
one of the options in the drop-down list in the Radiation specification panel.
• Reference temperature specifies a fixed temperature to which the selected sides of the object radiate
heat. Enter a Temperature and a View factor. The default view factor is 1.0 and the value of the am-
bient temperature is defined under Ambient values in the Basic parameters panel (see Ambient
Values (p. 260)).
• All objects specifies that the object or surface exchanges radiation with all other objects and surfaces
also specified as subject to radiation with heat transfer. ANSYS Icepak computes the radiative heat
flux to and from the object or surface based on the calculated temperatures and view factors (with
respect to the object or surface) for each object or surface.
• Selected objects specifies that the object or surface exchanges radiation only with selected objects
and surfaces in the model. Click Select to open the Radiation object selection panel (Figure 28.3: The
Radiation object selection Panel (p. 669)). This panel contains a list of available objects and surfaces.
Figure 28.3: The Radiation object selection Panel
Radiation Modeling
The Radiation object selection panel lists all objects and surfaces currently defined as subject
to radiative heat transfer. To select one or more objects or surfaces from the list, left-click the
name(s) of the object(s) and surface(s) and click Done.
Click Accept in the Radiation specification panel when you have finished the specification.
3. Specify the material to be used for the currently selected side of the object or surface. This material
defines the roughness and emissivity of the object or surface, and is specified in different ways for different
kinds of objects.
• Block: You can specify material properties for the whole block or for individual sides of the block.
– For the whole block, specify the material under Surface material in the Properties tab of the Blocks
panel.
– (fluid, solid, and hollow blocks only) For individual sides of the block, select the Individual sides
option in the Properties tab of the Blocks panel. Click Edit to open the Individual side specification
panel and specify the Surface Material.
• 2D source: Specify the material next to Material in the Sources panel.
• Plate: Select the Low side or High side option under Side specification in the Plates panel. Click
Edit to open the Low (or High) side surface properties panel and specify the Material.
• PCB: Select the Low side or High side option under Radiation in the Printed circuit boards panel.
Click Edit to open the Low (or High) side surface properties panel and specify the Material.
• Package: Select the Top side radiation option in the Die/Mold tab of the Packages panel. Click Edit
to open the Top side surface properties panel and specify the Material.
• Heat sink object: Specify the material next to Surface material in the Heat sinks panel.
• Enclosure object: Specify the material next to Surface material in the Enclosures panel.
• Wall: Specify the material next to Internal material for a non-zero thickness wall in the Walls panel.
If the wall has zero thickness, specify the External material (which is used for both the inside and the
outside of a zero-thickness wall).
By default, the material is specified as default. This means that the material specified on the object
or surface is defined under Default surface in the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid,
Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material for an object or surface, select a ma-
terial from the material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on material
properties.
4. Calculate the view factors using the Form factors panel, as described in the following section.
28.3.2. User Inputs for Specification of Radiation Using the Form factors
Panel
The calculation of radiation for blocks, 2D sources, plates, PCBs, packages, heat sink objects, enclosure
objects, and walls can be specified using the Form factors panel. To open the Form factors panel
(Figure 28.4: The Form factors Panel (p. 671)), select Radiation form factors in the Model menu, click
the button in the Model and solve toolbar or click the Options button next to Surface to
surface radiation model in the General setup tab of the Basic parameters panel.
Model Radiation form factors
Figure 28.4: The Form factors Panel
Specifying the Objects to Include in the Radiation Calculation

All objects can receive radiant energy regardless of their ability to radiate energy themselves. To
specify that an object will receive radiant energy from other objects in the model, click the name of
the object in the Include objects list using the left mouse button. Any object that has been specified
to take part in the view factor calculation (i.e., receive radiant energy) will be highlighted in blue in
the Include objects list. To include all objects in the Include objects list in the radiation calculation,
click All at the bottom of the list. To deselect an object in the Include objects list, click the name of
Radiation Modeling
the object in the Include objects list using the left mouse button. To deselect all objects in the Include
objects list, click None at the bottom of the list.
Note:
If any sides of the cabinet have been specified as wall, opening, or grille objects, you will
be able to include radiation to these sides. For those sides of the cabinet that have the
Default specification (i.e., an adiabatic wall), radiant energy from other objects will be lost
to these sides using a partial enclosure model. View factor calculations will be disabled for
these walls, which will instead be treated like a black body with the default Radiation
temperature specified in the Basic parameters panel.
All the objects that can radiate energy are listed under Participating objects. To specify that an object
will radiate, click the name of the object in the Participating objects list using the left mouse button.
Any object that has been specified to radiate to at least one other object or surface will be highlighted
in blue in the Participating objects list. To include all objects in the Participating objects list in the
radiation calculation, click All at the bottom of the list. To deselect an object in the Participating
objects list, click the name of the object in the Participating objects list using the left mouse button.
To deselect all objects in the Participating objects list, click None at the bottom of the list.
Computing View Factors

When you have selected the objects you want to participate in the radiation model, click Compute
to compute the view factors. The Compute button will change to Terminate when the process begins
allowing you to stop the process at any time. The computation of the view factors may take a few
seconds to a few minutes, depending on the size of the model.
To calculate the view factors, ANSYS Icepak first creates a coarse mesh. It then discards the volume
mesh and coarsens the surface mesh. The Coarse tol option allows you to specify the angular tolerance
to be used during coarsening; i.e., it specifies the minimum angle between adjacent facets of the
surface mesh for which coarsening will not happen. A small value allows higher accuracy, but ANSYS
Icepak will take more time to compute the mesh. A value of 1 (degree) is usually sufficient. To disable
coarsening completely, enter a value of 1.
There are two methods available in ANSYS Icepak for calculating the view factors: the hemicube
method and the adaptive method. The hemicube method uses a differential area-to-area method
and calculates the view factors on a row-by-row basis. The view factors calculated from the differential
areas are summed to provide the view factor for the whole surface. This method originated from the
use of the radiosity approach in the field of computer graphics [ 5 (p. 1011) ].
To use the hemicube method to compute the view factors, select Hemicube in the Method drop-
down list. You can choose the refinement level to be used to calculate the view factors. To change
the refinement level, click the number to the right of Ref level in the Form factors panel (Fig-
ure 28.4: The Form factors Panel (p. 671)) and select a new number from the drop-down list. There are
seven refinement levels available in ANSYS Icepak. A higher level allows higher accuracy, but ANSYS
Icepak will take more time to compute the mesh. It is recommended that you use the hemicube
method for large complex models, because it is faster than the adaptive method for these types of
models.
The adaptive method calculates the view factors on a pair-by-pair basis using a variety of algorithms
(analytic or Gauss quadrature) that are chosen adaptively depending on the proximity of the surfaces.
To maintain accuracy, the order of the quadrature increases the closer the faces are together. For
surfaces that are very close to each other, the analytic method is used. ANSYS Icepak determines the
method to use by performing a visibility calculation. The Gaussian quadrature method is used if none
of the rays from a surface are blocked by the other surface. If some of the rays are blocked by the
other surface, then either a Monte Carlo integration method or a quasi-Monte Carlo integration
method is used.
Two options are available in the Form factors panel for the Adaptive method: Coarse and Refined.
If you select the Coarse option, 16 visibility samples will be taken from each surface. If you select the
Refined option, 64 visibility samples will be taken from each surface. The calculation of the view
factors will be significantly faster if you select the Coarse option, but the Refined option provides
higher accuracy. It is recommended that you use the adaptive method for simple models, because it
is faster than the hemicube method for these types of models.
If you make a change to your model and you do not want to recompute the view factors when you
calculate a solution, select Don’t recompute in the Form factors panel.
Displaying View Factors

To view the computed view factors for an object, click the name of the object in the Display object
values list. The name of the selected object will be displayed under Display object sides, and the
sides of the object that will participate in the radiation calculation will be listed in the Display object
sides list. ANSYS Icepak displays arrows in the graphics window indicating which objects the selected
object will radiate to, the names of the sides that are radiated to, and the values of the view factors.
An example is shown in Figure 28.5: A Plate Radiates to Two Blocks (p. 674), where a plate will radiate
to two blocks.
Radiation Modeling
Figure 28.5: A Plate Radiates to Two Blocks
To display the view factors for all objects in the Display object values list, click All at the bottom of
the Display object values list. To remove all the view factors from the graphics window, click None
at the bottom of the Display object values list. It is recommended that you select just one or two
objects at a time in the Display object values list; otherwise, the display of view factors in the
graphics window will become cluttered. You can also display the view factors for just one side of an
object by first selecting the object in the Display object values list and then selecting the side of
the object in the Display object sides list. To display the view factors for all the sides in the Display
object sides list, click All at the bottom of the Display object sides list. To remove these view factors
from the graphics window, click None at the bottom of the Display object sides list. If you select a
heat sink object in the Display object values list, ANSYS Icepak will display the view factors for the
radiation between the heat sink object and the other objects in the model, and also the view factors
for the radiation between the parts of the heat sink object. To remove the view factors for the radiation
between the parts of the heat sink object from the graphics window, deselect Show with self in the
Form factors panel (Figure 28.4: The Form factors Panel (p. 671)). To redisplay these view factors, select
Show with self.
Another way to control the number of view factors displayed in the graphics window is to specify a
value for Display min or Load min. View factors that are smaller than the specified Load min value
will not be loaded into the ANSYS Icepak model, and so cannot be viewed or used in the calculation.
View factors that are smaller than the specified Display min value will not be displayed in the
graphics window, but they will be loaded into the model and used in the computation.
Discrete Ordinates Radiation Modeling
Saving the Computed View Factors

To save the computed view factors, click Save. ANSYS Icepak will save the view factors to a file. To
reload the view factors, click the Load button. If you click Compute, ANSYS Icepak will automatically
load the view factors after they have been computed.
To export the view factors to an ASCII file, click the Export button. You can reuse the ASCII file in
other ANSYS Icepak jobs, and you can edit the file and add view factors to it using a text editor. To
import an ASCII file, click the Import button and select the file to be imported.
Modifying the Computed View Factors

If you want to modify the view factors, click Modify. This will open the Modify form factors panel
(Figure 28.6: The Modify form factors Panel (p. 675)).
Figure 28.6: The Modify form factors Panel
You can modify any of the computed view factors by selecting the name of the surface which is radi-
ating in the From object list and the name of the surface which is being radiated to in the To object
list. Define the new view factor by entering a value in the Value text entry box and then click Modify.
Modified view factors are shown in pink in the graphics window; the computed view factors are
shown in blue. Click Reset to reset the modified value back to the computed value.
28.4. Discrete Ordinates Radiation Modeling

To choose the discrete-ordinates radiation model, select the Discrete ordinates radiation model in
the General setup tab of the Basic parameters panel. Clicking Options will allow you to set parameters
for the angular discretization and frequency of radiation calculations.
Selecting the Discrete ordinates radiation model enables the discrete ordinates convergence criteria
setting in the Basic settings panel (Figure 36.3: The Basic settings Panel (p. 836)) and the discrete ordinates
discretization scheme in the Advanced solver setup panel (Figure 36.2: The Advanced solver setup
Panel (p. 832)).
Radiation Modeling
Figure 28.7: The Discrete ordinates parameters Panel
You can control the frequency with which the radiation field is updated as the continuous phase solution
proceeds. The Flow iterations per radiation iteration parameter is set to 1 by default. This implies
that the radiation calculation is performed once every iteration of the solution process. Increasing the
number can speed the calculation process, but may slow overall convergence. Theta divisions (Nθ)
and Phi divisions (Nφ) will define the number of control angles used to discretize each octant of the
angular space. A finer angular discretization can be specified to better resolve the influence of small
geometric features or strong spatial variations in temperature, but larger numbers of Theta divisions
and Phi divisions will add to the cost of the computation. Theta pixels and Phi pixels are used to
control the pixelation that accounts for any control volume overhang. For problems involving gray-diffuse
radiation, the default pixelation of 1 × 1 is usually sufficient. For problems involving symmetry, periodic,
or semi-transparent boundaries, a pixelation of 3 × 3 is recommended and will achieve acceptable results.
The computational effort, as a result of increasing the pixelation, is less than the computational effort
caused by increasing the divisions. You should be aware; however, that increasing the pixelation adds
to the cost of computation.
28.5. Ray tracing Radiation Modeling

To choose ray tracing radiation model, select Ray tracing radiation model in the General setup tab
of the Basic parameters panel. Clicking Options will allow you to set parameters for the clusters and
view factor computation.
Ray tracing Radiation Modeling
Figure 28.8: The Ray tracing parameters Panel
You can control the frequency with which the radiation field is updated as the continuous phase solution
proceeds. The Flow iterations per radiation iteration parameter is set to 1 by default. This implies
that the radiation calculation is performed once every iteration of the solution process.
You can control the maximum number of iterations of the radiation calculation during each global iter-
ation by changing the Maximum radiation iterations. The default setting of 5 means that the radiosity
will be updated up to 5 times. The actual number of iterations will be less if the convergence criterion
is exceeded at any point during these iterations.
Your input for Faces per surface cluster will control the number of radiating surfaces. By default, each
is set to 20, so the number of surface clusters (radiating surfaces) will be equal to the total number of
surface mesh elements divided by 20. For larger problems, you may want to reduce the number of
surface clusters by increasing the faces per surface cluster to reduce both the size of the view factor
file and the memory requirement. Such a reduction in the number of clusters, however, comes at the
cost of some accuracy. The surfaces that are not adjacent to fluid regions will not participate in radiation.
Adjust the value of the Resolution. Increasing this value will help reduce the numerical errors caused
by the finite-resolution approach used to compute the projected areas of the surface clusters and the
resulting view factors. By default, it is set to 5. In most cases, however, the default settings will be suffi-
cient.
Note:
• While using this method to model radiation, it is not possible to view the view factors generated.
They are however, available for review by unzipping and viewing the file with the extension
s2s.gz
• The ray tracing radiation model is not supported with periodic or symmetric boundary conditions.
• Ray tracing radiation is not calculated on zero-slack assembly interfaces.
Chapter 29: Optimization
ANSYS Icepak uses the Dynamic-Q optimization method to solve constrained-design-optimization
problems. See Optimization (p. 987) for details about the theory behind ANSYS Icepak’s optimization
method.
Information about solving design-optimization problems using ANSYS Icepak is presented in the following
sections:
• When to Use Optimization (p. 679)
• User Inputs for Optimization (p. 679)
29.1. When to Use Optimization

Design optimization can be used for a variety of CFD problems. Some examples include the following:
• Heat sink optimization
• Placement of components
• Placement of fans, openings, grilles
• Flow baffle design
• PCB rack spacing design
• Optimizing system flow rates
• Grille design
ANSYS Icepak’s optimization method is particularly suited for problems with a large number of design
variables and constraint functions. The maximum number of design variables allowed is 50 and the
maximum number of constraint functions is 10.
29.2. User Inputs for Optimization

To solve an optimization problem in ANSYS Icepak, you will follow the procedure outlined below.
Optimization
1. Define all the required design variables in the appropriate input fields in the same way you would define
parameters. For more information on how to define parameters see Defining a Parameter in an Input
Field (p. 690).
Note:
Boolean parameters and fan failure cannot be defined as design variables for optimization
problems.
2. To enable the optimization, select Optimization in the Setup tab of the Parameters and optimization
panel. To open the Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 29.1: The Parameters and optimization
Panel (Setup Tab) (p. 681)), select Run optimization in the Solve menu or click the button in the
Model and solve toolbar.
Solve Run optimization
User Inputs for Optimization
Figure 29.1: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Setup Tab)
3. Define the range of design variables.
a. Select the design variable from the list in the Design variables tab of the Parameters and optimization
panel (Figure 29.2: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables Tab) (p. 682)). Expanding
a design variable’s tree node displays objects and properties associated with the variable.
b. Specify the starting value of the variable in the Base value field.
c. Specify the minimum and maximum values the variable can take in the Min value constraint and Max
value constraint fields.
d. If the design variable can only take values in multiples of a number, select Allow only multiples and
specify the lowest multiple in the provided field. For example, the fin count for a heat sink can be spe-
cified only in multiples of 1.
Optimization
Figure 29.2: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables Tab)
4. Define functions in the Functions tab of the Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 29.3: The Para-
meters and optimization Panel (Functions Tab) (p. 683)). These functions will be set as objective or constraint
functions.
Figure 29.3: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Functions Tab)
Functions are classified as Primary functions and Compound functions. Primary functions can
be defined using design variables and accessible solution data. Compound functions are functions
of Primary functions. Compound functions cannot be created without creating Primary functions.
a. To create a primary function, click the New button under Primary functions. This will open the Define
primary function panel (Figure 29.4: The Define primary function Panel (p. 684)).
Optimization
Figure 29.4: The Define primary function Panel
i. Primary functions can be defined in different ways by selecting one of the following options in
the Define primary function panel:
• Function type enables you to define a primary function by selecting one of the following ANSYS
Icepak predefined functions from the drop-down list: Report summary, Post-processing object,
Point probe, Design variable, Difference, Object parameter, Object dimension, and Global
value.
ii. Under Function type, enter or specify the required inputs.
• Report summary enables you to define a primary function by selecting one of the user predefined
summary reports from the drop-down list, and by selecting one of the following functions corres-
ponding to the report: Min, Max, Mean, St dev, and Total. See Defining Reports (p. 840) for more
information on defining summary reports.
• Post-processing objects enables you to define a primary function by selecting one of the user
predefined post objects from the drop-down list (for example, object faces and plane cuts), and
by selecting one of the following functions corresponding to the object: Min, Max, Mean, St dev,
and Total. See Defining Postprocessing Objects (p. 840) for more information on defining post
objects.
• Point probe enables you to define a primary function by selecting one of the user defined point
object reports from the drop-down list. See Displaying Results at a Point (p. 901) for more inform-
ation on defining point reports.
• Design variable enables you to define a primary function by selecting one of the design variables
from the drop-down list. See Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the Parameters and
optimization Panel (p. 696) for more information on defining design variables.
• Difference enables you to define a primary function using differences of mean values of post-
processing variables across two opposing faces of an object. To use the difference function, select
an Object, Variable, and Direction from the drop-down lists. The function value is calculated by
subtracting the mean values of a post-processing variable computed across two sides of an object
(for example, High X and Low X). For example, this function can be used to determine the pressure
drop across a heat sink by selecting the difference in the pressures at the leading and trailing
sides of the heat sink.
• Object parameter enables you to define a primary function by selecting an object from the
Object drop-down list, and by selecting an appropriate object property from the Property drop-
down list. Only certain object properties (for example, geometry, power, and radiation parameters)
can be used to define primary functions.
• Global value enables you to define a primary function by selecting one of the following ANSYS
Icepak predefined functions from the drop-down list: Global maximum temperature, Total
power, Maximum temperature of objects, Mean temperature of objects, Thermal resistance
of heatsink, Surface area of objects, Volume of objects, and Mass of objects.
Figure 29.5: The Global value Drop-down List
iii. If this is a constraint function, check the Constraint box, click Min value or Max value, and enter
the constraint value.
b. To create a compound function, click the New button under Compound functions. This will open the
Define compound function panel (Figure 29.6: The Define compound function Panel (p. 685)). In the
Define compound function panel, specify the Function name and the Definition of the compound
function. To define the compound function, the appropriate primary functions should be used. In the
Definition box, the primary function name must be preceded by a $ sign.
Figure 29.6: The Define compound function Panel
c. Specify an objective function.
i. Select one of the previously defined functions from the Objective function drop-down list, in the
Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 29.3: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Functions
Tab) (p. 683)).
Optimization
ii. To maximize the objective function, select Maximize value, otherwise, the objective function will
be minimized by default.
Note:
If a function is neither a constraint function nor an objective function, the function value
is merely reported with the optimization results.
5. Choose which functions to make inactive or active.
a. To make a function inactive, choose the function under Selected functions in the Parameters and
optimization panel (Figure 29.3: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Functions Tab) (p. 683)) and
place the function in the Inactive functions list by clicking the Remove button. Note that placing the
function in the Inactive functions list does not delete the function. Functions placed in the Inactive
functions list are not reported with the optimization results.
b. To activate a function, choose the function under Inactive functions and click the Add button.
Note:
To delete a function, select the function under Primary functions or Compound functions
and click the Delete button.
6. Start the optimization process by clicking the Run button in the Parameters and optimization panel.
When ANSYS Icepak starts performing calculations, the Optimization run window will open and
ANSYS Icepak will display all the function values, design variables, and the running times for each
optimization iteration. In addition, the function values and design variables are plotted versus iteration
number. The plots are displayed on the left hand side of the Optimization run window (Fig-
ure 29.7: The Optimization run Panel (p. 686)).
Figure 29.7: The Optimization run Panel
The graphics window is fully interactive. For example, at any time during the calculation, you can
zoom in on a specific portion of the graph. This graphics window is similar to the Monitor graphics
display (see The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 871)).
Other options available in this window include turning off variation of certain function or variable
values as a function of optimization iteration number and plotting of design variables.
To turn off the display of certain variation plots of functions or variables as functions of iteration
number (for example, objective function, design variables), click the legend line showing the function
or variable. To display the variable again, click the appropriate legend line.
To plot a design variable against a function, click the Plot button in the Optimization run window.
From Selection panels, select the x axis and y axis variables. The plots show the variation of the
design variables against the selected function for each constant value of the remaining variables.
For more information on plotting and reporting of design variables see Function Reporting and
Plotting (p. 709).
Chapter 30: Parameterizing the Model
ANSYS Icepak enables you to parameterize your model, so that you can determine the effect of various
object sizes or other characteristics on the solution.
Information about parameterization is divided into the following sections:
• Overview of Parameterization (p. 689)
• Defining a Parameter in an Input Field (p. 690)
• Defining Check Box Parameters (p. 693)
• Defining Radio Button Parameters (Option Parameters) (p. 695)
• Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the Parameters and optimization Panel (p. 696)
• Deleting Parameters (p. 699)
• Defining Trials (p. 699)
• Running Trials (p. 704)
• Function Reporting and Plotting (p. 709)
30.1. Overview of Parameterization

A design process requires the evaluation of a number of available options to determine the most ap-
propriate case that meets the primary design requirement (for example, smallest size of the cabinet,
lowest fan speed that cools the given system to the specified temperature, smallest vent size that meets
the system requirements, appropriate size and type of a heat sink to cool the system). All of these design
scenarios require you to change different parameters and calculate multiple solutions to optimize the
design. By studying the results of these multiple calculations, you can identify the trends that affect
the performance of the system and you can optimize the design of your model.
ANSYS Icepak provides a convenient way to specify the range of values for geometric sizes and locations,
boundary conditions (for example, fan curves, vent loss coefficients), and material properties in a single
model building exercise. ANSYS Icepak then instructs the solver to run the different trials that you
selected. This process saves the time required to build or specify each model separately and run each
of the trials yourself in a sequential manner.
Parameters in ANSYS Icepak are numeric or string constants that you can use in your model instead of
actual numeric or string inputs, so that you can easily change their values to model different designs.
For example, if you wanted to assign the flow rate for a fan to be the numeric value 0.01, you can
specify a parameter called flowrate and assign a value of 0.01 to this parameter. You can assign
more than one value to a parameter, to define trial calculations that you want to perform for your
model. Each trial represents a combination of parameter values, so it is possible to perform multiple
trials for your model. In addition, different design scenarios can be tested parametrically by parameter-
Parameterizing the Model
izing options. For example, the effect of changing the type of a heat sink in a design, from an extruded
heat sink to a pin-fin heat sink, can be tested by performing two trials, made by turning on/off appro-
priate heat sinks. Similarly, the effect of turbulence can be tested by setting up a parameter for Flow
regime radio buttons in the Basic parameters panel.
There are four ways to define a parameter in ANSYS Icepak:
• Enter a parameter in an input field for an object, material, problem setup default, or solver default (Defining
a Parameter in an Input Field (p. 690)).
• Enter a check box parameter for an object, material, or problem setup default (Defining Check Box Paramet-
ers (p. 693)).
• Enter a parameter (Option Parameter) for a problem setup default (Defining Radio Button Parameters
(Option Parameters) (p. 695)) or solver default.
• Define a parameter in the Parameters and optimization panel (Defining a Parameter (Design Variable)
Using the Parameters and optimization Panel (p. 696)).
Note:
Parameters can be used for all inputs for all objects, but they cannot be used for macros.
Once the parameters have been defined, you can redefine the initial value and specify additional values
using the Parameters and optimization panel (Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the
Parameters and optimization Panel (p. 696)).
You can use the parameters to define the trial calculations that you want to perform for your model
(Defining Trials (p. 699)), and finally, you can instruct ANSYS Icepak to run the trials (Running Trials (p. 704))
and to plot the results (Function Reporting and Plotting (p. 709)).
30.2. Defining a Parameter in an Input Field

A parameter can be defined in an input field for any object, material, problem setup defaults, and
solver defaults. For example, if you want to specify a parameter for the volumetric flow rate of a fan,
you can define a parameter called flowrate in the Volumetric text entry field under Fixed flow, in
the Fans panel, as shown below.
Defining a Parameter in an Input Field
You can specify any combination of alphanumeric characters and symbols (except spaces) for the
parameter name.
Caution:
When you specify a parameter in the input field for an object or material, you must always
preface the parameter name with the $ sign. For instance, in the example above, the input
for the volume flow rate for the fan is $flowrate. An example of specifying a parameter
for a scaling factor when defining the anisotropic conductivity of a material is shown below.
If the parameter you define is related to the geometry of an object or the properties of a material, ANSYS
Icepak will ask you to enter a value for the parameter when you click Update or Done in the Object
panel or the Materials panel. For example, if you specify a parameter for the radius of the fan ($radius),
ANSYS Icepak will ask you to provide an initial value for the radius in the Param value panel (Fig-
ure 30.1: The Param value Panel (p. 692)).
Figure 30.1: The Param value Panel
When you click Done in the Param value panel, ANSYS Icepak will update the display of the object in
the graphics window using the specified initial value. You can define more than one value for a para-
meter using the Parameters and optimization panel (see Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using
the Parameters and optimization Panel (p. 696)).
If the parameter you specified is related to the physical characteristics of the object (excluding the
geometry), ANSYS Icepak will set the initial value of the parameter to be zero. You will then be
prompted to enter an initial value for the parameter upon opening the Parameters and optimization
panel. You can redefine the initial value and specify additional values using the Parameters and optim-
ization panel (see Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the Parameters and optimization Pan-
el (p. 696)).
Simple arithmetic operations such as addition, division, and multiplication can be used with a combin-
ation of parameters and/or numeric inputs. For example, you can specify the volume flow rate for the
fan to be equal to
($a*($flowrate)/ $b + 0.1)
Note:
If you use an arithmetic expression to define a parameter, the expression must be enclosed
in parentheses.
Note:
By default, integer arithmetic is performed for division if both the divisor and dividend
are entered as integers. If you want floating point division to be performed, then either
the divisor or dividend should be entered as a floating point number. For example,
$a/10 will give a quotient of 0 if $a is defined as 1, while $a/10.0 will give a quotient
of 0.1 if $a is 1.
Note that the definition of a parameter is independent of units; that is, parameters are purely numeric
inputs. In the above example for the volume flow rate of a fan, ANSYS Icepak will calculate the expression
($a*($flowrate)/ $b + 0.1)
Defining Check Box Parameters
by substituting the values of the parameters into the expression and then the unit (for example, ft 3/s)
will be added to the final value of the expression.
To enable you to most efficiently define common parameters for copies of an object (for example, a
rack of PCBs), ANSYS Icepak will automatically copy the parameters that you have defined for an object
when you copy the object. The copied parameters will then be used for all copies of the object, rather
than using the current parameter values. Parameters used for geometric entries will automatically be
summed to the values of the corresponding geometric entries that you will request for each copy of
the object. For example, if you define the geometric xE coordinate of an object with a parameter $a
and then make copies of the object that are translated in the direction, then the xE field for the
copies will be
$a + d
where d is the prescribed offset of the copy of the object.
30.3. Defining Check Box Parameters

A parameter can be defined to turn on/off a check box parametrically. To define a check box parameter,
right-click any check-box option in the Object, Materials, or Basic parameters panel. For example, to
define the existence or nonexistence of an object, right-click the Active check box in the Info tab of
the object panel. This will open the Active parameter panel (Figure 30.2: The Active parameter Pan-
el (p. 693)).
Figure 30.2: The Active parameter Panel
There are two ways to define the Active parameter:
• Specify the variable name that will be set to be equal to the object’s name. In the Active parameter panel,
select ON if variable is equal to this object’s name, and enter the Variable name. ANSYS Icepak will ask
you to provide an initial value for the variable in the Param value panel (Figure 30.1: The Param value
Panel (p. 692)). The name of the object or some other name must be entered, enclosed within quotation
marks.
• Specify an expression and the numeric value of the expression. In the Active parameter panel, select ON
if expression is equal to a specified value, and enter the Expression and the Value. Also, provide an initial
value for the variable in the Param value panel (Figure 30.1: The Param value Panel (p. 692)).
Note:
The variable name and the expression must be preceded by a $ sign.
To turn off the parameterization for a check box, first select Not Parameterized, then select On.
30.3.1. Examples
1. Consider a model with two heat sinks (extruded and pin fin). To selectively turn on/off the activity of the
heat sinks, you can define the active parameters as follows:
a. Set the parameter values for the extruded heat sink to 0 (not active) and 1 (active). Open the Active
parameter panel for the heatsink.1, and select ON if expression is equal to a specified value.
In the Expression text entry box enter $extruded_on, and in the Value text entry box enter 1, as
shown in Figure 30.3: The Active parameter Panel for the Extruded Heat Sink (p. 694). ANSYS Icepak
will ask you to provide an initial value for the variable in the Param value panel. Enter 1 and click
Done. To set another value of the parameter to 0, for which the heat sink will not be Active, you will
use Parameters and optimization panel (see Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the
Figure 30.3: The Active parameter Panel for the Extruded Heat Sink
b. Set the parameter values for the pin fin heat sink to "heatsink.2" (active) or "off" (not active).
As described above, open the Active parameter panel for the heatsink.2, and select ON if variable
is equal to this object’s name. In the Variable text entry box enter $pin_fin_on, as shown in
Figure 30.4: The Active parameter Panel for the Pin Fin Heat Sink (p. 695). ANSYS Icepak will ask you
to provide an initial value for the variable in the Param value panel. Enter "heatsink.2" and click
Done. To set another value of the parameter to "off", for which the heat sink will not be Active,
you will use Parameters and optimization panel (see Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using
the Parameters and optimization Panel (p. 696)).
Defining Radio Button Parameters (Option Parameters)
Figure 30.4: The Active parameter Panel for the Pin Fin Heat Sink
2. This example will demonstrate the use of Boolean expressions. Consider a model with five plates in which
you would like to replace one plate with a grille in each of five trials by selectively turning on/off the
activity of plates and grilles. Five grilles need to be defined with the same locations as the plates. You
can define the active parameters as follows:
a. For each plate, respectively, define the following Boolean expressions in the Active parameter
panel, under Expression, after selecting ON if expression is equal to a specified value:
($grille!=1), ($grille!=2), ($grille!=3), ($grille!=4), and ($grille!=5). Under
Value, enter 1 for every plate, which means logical true (every other number is false). After you
specified the expression for the first plate, ANSYS Icepak will ask you to provide an initial value for
the variable in the Param value panel. Enter 1 and click Done.
b. For each grille, respectively, define the following Boolean expressions in the Active parameter
panel, under Expression, after selecting ON if expression is equal to a specified value:
($grille==1), ($grille==2), ($grille==3), ($grille==4), and ($grille==5). Under
Value, enter 1 for every grille. To set values of the parameter to 2, 3, 4, and 5 to determine which
grille will be active in each trial, you will use Parameters and optimization panel (see Defining a
Parameter (Design Variable) Using the Parameters and optimization Panel (p. 696)).
Note:
A check box parameter in the Basic parameters panel can only be defined using an ex-
pression and a numeric value of the expression.
30.4. Defining Radio Button Parameters (Option Parameters)

A parameter can be defined to select a radio-button option, parametrically, from the Basic parameters,
Parallel settings, or Advanced solver setup panel. To define an Option parameter, right-click any
radio-button option in the Basic parameters, Parallel settings, or Advanced solver setup panel. For
example, to define the Flow regime parametrically, right-click the Laminar or Turbulent radio button,
next to Flow regime, in the Basic parameters panel. This will open the Option parameter panel
(Figure 30.5: The Option parameter Panel (p. 696)).
Figure 30.5: The Option parameter Panel
In this panel, specify the expression that represents the name of the parameter (for example, flow_re-
gime). The value of the expression will determine the option. The default value of the parameter is 0.
The options, along with the values that enable them, are listed in the panel (Figure 30.5: The Option
parameter Panel (p. 696)). For example, the default value of the flow_regime parameter is 0, which enables
Laminar flow. To set another value of the parameter to 1, which enables Turbulent flow option, you
will use Parameters and optimization panel (see Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the
Note:
• The expression must be preceded by a $ sign.
• If the value of the specified expression is not equal to any of the predefined values listed in the
Option parameter panel, then the default option is used for that value.
30.5. Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the Parameters and

optimization Panel
You can define additional new parameters, also called design variables, or edit existing parameters using
the Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 30.6: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Setup
Tab) (p. 697), Figure 30.7: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables Tab) (p. 698)). To open
this panel, click the button in the Model and solve toolbar.
Defining a Parameter (Design Variable) Using the Parameters and optimization
Panel
Figure 30.6: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Setup Tab)
In the Design variables tab, the Parameters and optimization panel displays all the parameter names
that are currently defined, along with their associated values (Figure 30.7: The Parameters and optimiz-
ation Panel (Design variables Tab) (p. 698)).
Figure 30.7: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design variables Tab)
To define a new parameter, click New in the Design variables tab and enter the name of the parameter
in the New design variable name? field in the Define design variable dialog box. ANSYS Icepak will
add the new parameter to the list in the Parameters and optimization panel. You can specify any
combination of alphanumeric characters and symbols (except spaces) for the parameter name. Enter
the value(s) of the parameter. There are two ways of specifying values for parameters:
• Select Discrete, and in the text entry field enter multiple values for a parameter separated by commas or
spaces.
• Select In range, and enter Start value, End value, and Increment.
Click Apply to update the list of available trials corresponding to the new set of parameters (see Defining
Trials (p. 699)).
Defining Trials
To edit previously defined parameters, enter the new value for the parameter in the corresponding
Base value field. You can then enter multiple values for a parameter using one of the above two
methods.
Opening up a design variable’s tree displays the object(s) and properties associated with the variable.
Note:
You can use a parameter in the definition of another parameter’s values, but you must precede
the parameter name with a $ sign in the Base value field of the Parameters and optimiza-
tion panel.
Once you have defined or edited parameters, you can click the Run button at the bottom of the Para-
meters and optimization panel to begin solving your ANSYS Icepak model. Once ANSYS Icepak begins
solving, trials are displayed in the Parametric trials panel.
30.6. Deleting Parameters

If you have parameters defined in your model that you no longer need, you can delete these parameters
from your model. To delete a parameter, select the parameter in the Design variables tab of the
Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 30.7: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Design
variables Tab) (p. 698)), and click the Delete button.
ANSYS Icepak will delete the parameter only if it is not being used anywhere in your model.
To delete all parameters (design variables) and replace all their uses with their present values, click the
Delete all variables button.
30.7. Defining Trials

Parameters in ANSYS Icepak are used to define the trial calculations that you want to perform for your
model. Each trial represents a combination of parameter values. ANSYS Icepak calculates possible
combinations from the list of parameters specified in the Design variables tab of the Parameters and
optimization panel and lists them in the Trials tab of the panel (Figure 30.8: The Parameters and op-
timization Panel (Trials Tab) (p. 700)). Alternatively, you can select Define trials in the Solve menu.
Solve Define trials
Figure 30.8: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Trials Tab)
There are three ways of listing possible combinations from the list of parameters in the Design variables
tab of the Parameters and optimization panel: listing all combinations and listing "by column" and
user-defined trials using "selected values". To choose one of the three options, select Parametric trials
in the Setup tab of the Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 30.6: The Parameters and optimiz-
ation Panel (Setup Tab) (p. 697)).
• All combinations lists all possible combinations from the list of parameters specified in the Design variables
tab of the Parameters and optimization panel.
• By Column controls the number of trial combinations, by selecting Variable is "by columns" for certain
parameters in the Design variables tab. If this option is selected for some of the parameters, then the
number of trial combinations will be the number of all possible combinations of parameters that are not
defined "by column" (that is, parameters for which the option Variable is "by columns" is not selected).
For example, if you define the parameters p, u and v that can take the following values:
(30.1)
then
Defining Trials
if p is defined "by column", there would be 4∗2 = 8 trials;

if u is defined "by column", there would be 3∗2 = 6 trials;
if v is defined "by column", there would be 3∗4 = 12 trials,
if both p and u are defined "by column", there would be 2 trials;
if both p and v are defined "by column", there would be 4 trials;
if both u and v are defined "by column", there would be 3 trials.
If a parameter that had been defined "by column" has fewer defined values than the combination of
other parameters, ANSYS Icepak will use the last value specified for that parameter until all trials have
been defined.
• Selected values enables you to define their own set of trial combinations and also define new design variable
values. The process starts by defining the parameters using one of the available options (see Overview of
Parameterization (p. 689)). You can define multiple values for the parameters (as in Defining a Parameter
(Design Variable) Using the Parameters and optimization Panel (p. 696)) or merely use the initial values
defined and enter new values in the Trials tab of the Parameters and optimization panel. By default, a
single trial using the base values of all parameters is available in the Trials tab. You can create new trials by
clicking New. Upon clicking New, a new trial is created with the previous trial’s parameter values. The
parameter values can be changed by entering new values in the Design variables text entry fields or by
double-clicking on the text entry field to open the Design variable panel and selecting a value from a list
of those already defined on the Design variables tab. In this way, you can create as many trials as desired.
• Import and Export of Trial Data (p. 701)
• Selecting Trials (p. 702)
30.7.1. Import and Export of Trial Data

To import or export trials using CSV file format, select the Export or Import button in the Setup tab
of the Parameters and optimization panel to display the Trial data or Trial variables dialog box.
Specify the filename and save the file.
Figure 30.9: Trials data Panel
An example of the csv file format is given below. Note that trial information is displayed in this example
as the Selected values option is enabled in the Setup tab of the Parameters and optimization
panel. If All combinations or By columns is enabled, trial information is not displayed.
# Trials data
#
Trials, random
#
# Variable information
# Variable Name, Discrete/In range, Values
zc, discrete, 0.1, 0.1, 0.165
#
# Trial Name, Trial selected, Restart ID, Order, Variable & values
# Trials information
tr_zc_0.1,0,,1,zc,0.1
tr_zc_0.165,0,,2,zc,0.165
tr_finThick_0.762_zc_0.1,0,,3,finThick,0.762,zc,0.1
tr_finThick_0.762_zc_0.1,0,,4,finThick,0.762,zc,0.1
tr_zc_0.1,0,,5,zc,0.1
30.7.2. Selecting Trials

Select the trials that you want to run from the list of possible trials in the Trials tab of the Parameters
and optimization panel (Figure 30.8: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Trials Tab) (p. 700)). Turn
the Select option on or off for a trial in the list to toggle its selection state. Click Set above a trial to
make it the first one to be run by ANSYS Icepak. Note that as you click Set for a particular trial, ANSYS
Icepak will update the graphics window to reflect the geometry that is defined by the values of the
parameters used in that trial. This enables you to inspect the effect of changes to the geometry of
Defining Trials
objects in the model corresponding to each trial. To further change the order in which the trials are
run, you can enter the appropriate values in the text boxes next to Order.
To speed up convergence of subsequent trials, you can run any trial (except for the first one) using
the solution from a previous trial as an initial condition. To do so, enter a trial name in the Restart
ID text entry fields or double-click on the text entry field to open the Restart ID selection panel and
select a trial from the list. Select the Full restart check box to use the previously calculated solution
of the selected Restart ID trial and continue the solution with updated parameter values. Note that
the geometry and the mesh must be identical for the two trials. Also, the Fast trials option must be
unchecked.
Figure 30.10: The Parameters and optimization Panel Displaying Restart ID Options (Trials Tab)
Additional options in the Trials tab include the following:
• Reset enables naming of trials by names, numbers or values.
• New adds an additional trial in the Trials tab. It is available only when the Selected values option for
Parametric trials is enabled.
• Clear removes all trials in the Trials tab.
• Show only changing displays only parameters that are changing.
• Trials across top changes the display of trials from vertical to horizontal.
30.8. Running Trials

Once you have selected the trials that you want to run, you will instruct ANSYS Icepak to run the trials.
30.8.1. Running a Single Trial
30.8.2. Running Multiple Trials
30.8.1. Running a Single Trial

To run a single trial in your ANSYS Icepak model, follow the steps below.
1. Select Single trial (current values) in the Setup tab of the Parameters and optimization panel (Fig-
ure 30.6: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Setup Tab) (p. 697)).
2. (Optional) To request that ANSYS Icepak generate one or more function values after the run, define the
appropriate function in the Functions tab of the Parameters and optimization panel, as described in
Optimization (p. 679).
3. Set the solver controls for the trial. You will use the Solve panel to set the solver controls. (See Setting
the Solver Controls (p. 841) for more details on setting the solver controls.) To open the Solve panel, select
Run solution in the Solve menu.
Solve Run solution
a. To view information about the trial that will be performed, click the View trials button in the Solve
panel. ANSYS Icepak will list information about the trial in the Message window and also open the
Parameters and optimization panel if it is not already displayed.
Note:
Trial information can also be viewed from selecting the View trials button in the
Setup tab. Figure 30.11: Trials panel (p. 705) will be displayed.
Running Trials
Figure 30.11: Trials panel
b. If you want ANSYS Icepak to generate a report when the trial is complete, select Write report when
finished in the Solve panel. See Defining Reports (p. 840) for details on defining a report to be gen-
erated when the calculation is complete.
c. Click Start solution in the Solve panel to start the calculation.
Note:
You can also start the solution from the Parameters and optimization panel by clicking
the Accept button. This will open the Start solution panel. To start the solution, click Yes.
ANSYS Icepak will set the values of the parameters to those specified for the trial selected in the Trials
tab of the Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 30.8: The Parameters and optimization Panel
(Trials Tab) (p. 700)), and then perform the calculation. When the calculation is finished, ANSYS Icepak will
save the results of the simulation and generate a function report (if requested) and display it on the
screen. It will also generate a summary report (if requested). You can then perform postprocessing
in the usual way (as described in Examining the Results (p. 877)) and you can view the results of the
reports that ANSYS Icepak has generated, as described in Summary Reports (p. 943).
You can also stop the solver during the trial calculation using the Terminate button in the Monitor
window (see The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 871) for details). The
Terminate trials dialog appears. Click Stop to terminate the trials. The message Finished trials
appears in the Message window when the solver is done. Note that the Monitor windows will remain
open until you close them by clicking Done.
30.8.2. Running Multiple Trials

To run multiple trials for your ANSYS Icepak model, follow the steps below.
1. Select Parametric trials in the Setup tab of the Parameters and optimization panel and select one of
the three options: All combinations, By columns, or Selected values. For more details on defining trials
see Defining Trials (p. 699).
2. If you are running ANSYS Icepak on a multiprocessor machine, you can specify the number of trials that
ANSYS Icepak should run simultaneously on your machine in the Num concurrent text entry field in the
Setup tab. For example, if you enter 2 in the Num concurrent field, ANSYS Icepak will run two trials
simultaneously. When one of the trials has finished, ANSYS Icepak will start the third trial, and so on.
Note:
• The number of trials that ANSYS Icepak can run simultaneously is limited by the number
of available ANSYS Icepak licenses.
• Turn off the Allow fast trials (single .cas file) option in the Setup tab when running sev-
eral trials simultaneously.
If you have chosen to submit multiple trials to a script file, you may want to turn on the Script
file option. If this option is enabled, ANSYS Icepak will automatically launch the script file after all
of the case files have been written for the different trials. This option will be useful in times when
you lock the screen after instructing ANSYS Icepak to write a script file for running multiple trials.
3. Select the trials to be run in the Trials tab of the Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 30.8: The
Parameters and optimization Panel (Trials Tab) (p. 700)), as described in Selecting Trials (p. 702). At this
point, you may want to toggle the naming scheme of the trials, by clicking on Reset. The Trial naming
dialog will open, and you will be able to choose between Numbered or Values. Selecting Numbered
enables the Set trial name prefix panel to be displayed. Instead of using the default naming scheme,
trial, you can input any string of your choice for a trial name. See Figure 30.12: Set trial name prefix (p. 707).
Selecting Values enables you to enter a naming scheme that uses values of the parameters in each trial
name.
Note:
The trial Name should not include spaces. If included, a space is replaced with an un-
derscore.
Running Trials
Figure 30.12: Set trial name prefix
4. (Optional) To request that ANSYS Icepak generate one or more function values after the run, define the
appropriate function in the Functions tab of the Parameters and optimization panel, as described in
Optimization (p. 679).
5. Set the solver controls for the trials. You will use the Solve panel to set the solver controls. (See Setting
the Solver Controls (p. 841) for more details on setting the solver controls.) To open the Solve panel
(Figure 30.13: The Solve Panel (p. 708)), select Run solution in the Solve menu.
Solve Run solution
Figure 30.13: The Solve Panel
a. If you want ANSYS Icepak to generate a report when each trial is complete, select Write report when
finished in the Results tab of the Solve panel. See Defining Reports (p. 840) for details on defining
a report to be generated when the calculation is complete.
b. Click Start solution in the Solve panel to start the calculation.
Note:
You can also start the solution from the Parameters and optimization panel by clicking
the Accept button. This will open the Start solution panel. To start the solution click Yes.
If you entered 1 next to Num concurrent in the Parameters and optimization panel, ANSYS Icepak will
set the values of the parameters to those specified for the first trial selected in the Trials tab of the
Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 30.8: The Parameters and optimization Panel (Trials
Tab) (p. 700)), and then start the calculation, using a solution ID of trial000. When the calculation
is finished, ANSYS Icepak will save the results of the simulation and generate a report or a function
value (if requested). ANSYS Icepak will then set the values of the parameters to those specified for
the second trial in the Trials tab of the Parameters and optimization panel, and start a new calcu-
lation. When this calculation is complete, ANSYS Icepak will save the results of the simulation using
a new solution ID (trial001), and generate a report. This process of setting the values of the
Function Reporting and Plotting
parameters, performing the calculation, saving the results, and generating reports is repeated until
all the selected trials have been completed.
If you have specified that ANSYS Icepak should run two or more calculations simultaneously, ANSYS
Icepak will set the values of the parameters to those specified for the first trial selected in the Trials
tab of the Parameters and optimization panel (Figure 30.8: The Parameters and optimization Panel
(Trials Tab) (p. 700)), and then start the calculation, using a solution ID of trial000, ANSYS Icepak will
then set the values of the parameters to those specified for the second trial selected in the Trials tab
of the Parameters and optimization panel, and start a second calculation with a new solution ID
(trial001), and so on. When the first calculation is finished, ANSYS Icepak will save the results of
the simulation and generate a report (if requested). ANSYS Icepak will then set the values of the
parameters to those specified for the next trial selected in the Trials tab of the Parameters and op-
timization panel, and start a new calculation. When the second calculation is complete, ANSYS Ice-
pak will save the results of the simulation, generate a report (if requested), and start the next trial,
and so on. This process of setting the values of the parameters, performing the calculation, saving
the results, and generating reports is repeated until all the selected trials have been completed.
You can then perform postprocessing in the usual way, specifying which trial results you want to
examine by selecting the appropriate solution ID. See Selecting a Solution Set to be Examined (p. 929)
for details. You can also view the results of the reports that ANSYS Icepak has generated, as described
in Summary Reports (p. 943).
You can also stop the solver during the trial calculation using the Terminate button in the Monitor
window (see The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 871) for details). The
Terminate trials dialog appears. Click Continue to terminate the current trial and proceed to run
the next trial. Click Stop to terminate the current and all remaining trials. The message Finished
trials appears in the Message window when the solver is done. Note that the Monitor windows
will remain open until you close them by clicking Done.
30.9. Function Reporting and Plotting

As ANSYS Icepak starts performing the trials, the Parametric trials panel will open and ANSYS Icepak will
display all the function values defined a priori, as well as parameters and running times for each trial
(Figure 30.14: The Parametric trials Panel (p. 710)). If the post functions have not been defined before
running the trials, they can be defined after the trial solutions have finished. The post function values
can then be displayed by clicking the Recompute button in the Parametric trials panel.
Figure 30.14: The Parametric trials Panel
The function values reported in the Parametric trials panel can be plotted against the parameters. To
create plots of functions versus parameters, follow the steps below:
1. If the Parametric trials panel is not already opened, select Show optimization/param results from the
Report menu to open the Parametric trials panel.
Report Show optimization/param results
2. In the Parametric trials panel (Figure 30.14: The Parametric trials Panel (p. 710)), click the Plot button to
open the Selection panel (Figure 30.15: The Select Panel (X axis selection) (p. 710)). In the Selection panel,
select the design variable for the x axis (for example, Thickness), and click Okay.
Figure 30.15: The Select Panel (X axis selection)
3. In the Selection panel (Figure 30.16: The Select Panel (y axis selection) (p. 711)), select the function for the
y axis (for example, Kloss) and click Accept. This will display the plot (for example, Kloss vs Thickness),
as shown in Figure 30.17: Plot (p. 711). For more information on modifying the range and appearance of
the plot, printing, saving, and reloading plot data, see Trials Plots (p. 923).
Function Reporting and Plotting
Figure 30.16: The Select Panel (y axis selection)
Figure 30.17: Plot
4. To display another plot, click the Plot button in the Parametric trials panel again, and repeat steps 2 and
3, to make x and y axis selections. You can repeat this step multiple times, which will enable you to view
multiple plots at the same time.
Chapter 31: State-Space Characterization
31.1. Overview
State-space characterization can significantly reduce the model size and transient simulation time for
linear time-invariant (LTI) systems. This approach represents the thermal problem as a system that
processes a set of input signals (or simply inputs) yielding a set of output signals (or simply outputs).
For a typical thermal problem, the inputs are heat sources at certain locations, and the outputs are
temperature rise at specified locations [32 (p. 1012)].
31.2. When to Use State-Space Characterization

The state-space approach is generally valid for linear systems consisting of forced convection flow and
insignificant radiative heat transfer.
31.3. Perform State-Space Characterization

1. Open the Parameters and Optimization panel.
Figure 31.1: The Parameters and Optimization Panel (Setup Tab)
2. In the Trial type area, select State-space.
3. Select the State-space tab.
State-Space Characterization
Figure 31.2: The Parameters and Optimization Panel (State-space Tab)
4. From the Input drop-down list, select the objects to include in the characterization. For input signals, you
can select any object defined in the model. Use the Shift or Control key to select multiple objects.
5. From the Output drop-down list, select the objects or monitor points to include in the characterization.
For output signals, you can select a combination of objects and monitor points.
6. Under Solution type, select Steady state or Transient.
Twin Builder
7. To run the initial steady-state solution, in the Solution ID field, enter a name to be applied to the solution
data file and click Run to calculate the solution.
Note:
When you run a steady-state solution, the following parameters are automatically set (if
not already):
• Steady state is enabled.
• Power for the selected Input objects is set to 0.
• Sequential solution of flow and energy equations is enabled.
When you click Run, if certain model settings, such as Radiation, are enabled, a warning
message appears. You can proceed with the steady-state solution or modify the settings.
8. For the transient trials, in the Input object power field, enter the power value for the input objects specified
in the steady-state solution you will use as a starting value for each of the trials.
9. For Transient setup, click Set to accept the current Transient setup parameters or click Edit to open the
Basic Parameters panel. Modify parameters as needed. See User Inputs for Transient Simulations (p. 627)
for more information about the Transient setup tab parameters.
10. In the Steady state solution ID field, enter the name of the steady-state solution as a starting value for
the transient trials or click Select to open a File selection dialog box and locate a steady-state solution in
your directory structure.
11. In the Trial ID prefix field, enter a prefix label to be applied to the trial data file.
12. Click Run trials to begin the transient trials.
31.4. Twin Builder

When all the transient trials are complete, ANSYS Icepak generates files consisting of the relevant data,
such as input and output names and power values. These files will be used by ANSYS Twin Builder to
generate the state-space model.
Chapter 32: Krylov Reduced-order Models
32.1. Overview
ANSYS Icepak allows you to use the Krylov model-order reduction technique to create a thermal reduced-
order model (ROM). The inputs for a thermal ROM are power as a function of time, applied uniformly
to certain regions of a device, and the outputs are temperature as a function of time, at certain points
in space. The Krylov ROMs created by Icepak yield the temperature at all cells in the computational
mesh.
32.2. When to Use Krylov ROM Simulation

A Krylov ROM may be used, with some restrictions, as a replacement for a full-CFD transient simulation.
The use of the ROM involves two steps: constructing the ROM and running (also called evaluating) it.
Of the two steps, construction is the more time-consuming, but it only has to be done once. Afterwards,
the ROM may be reused with different time-dependent heat-sources and evaluation time-points.
Therefore, the ROM is particularly useful for solving the same problem with many different heat-sources.
However, in many cases, the total time for constructing and running the ROM just once will still be
much less than running a single full-CFD transient simulation. The accuracy of the ROM is controlled
(almost completely) by a single parameter: the ROM order. Increasing the order increases the construction
time, linearly, and the running time, negligibly.
Krylov ROM simulation should not be used when simulation scenarios contain the following:
• Natural convection
• When radiative heat transfer is significant
• Presence of species transport
• Solar loading
• Temperature dependent powers (including the LED source option)
• Joule heating
• Single precision
• When submitting solutions to the Remote Solve Manager
32.3. Creating and Using a Krylov ROM

1. From the Solve menu, select Create Krylov ROM. The Create Krylov ROM panel Setup tab is displayed.
Krylov Reduced-order Models
Figure 32.1: Create Krylov ROM (Setup Tab)
2. From the Inputs drop-down list, select the objects to include as inputs, and click Accept. The heat power
applied to these objects will be the ROM inputs. Heat power applied to any other objects will remain con-
stant.
Note:
Only block objects and 2D source objects should be selected as inputs.
3. Click the Evaluate tab and, for each Object, click Edit under Transient power to specify the object's
transient heat power in a Graph editor or Text editor. For information on the Graph editor, see Using
the Temperature value curve Window (p. 354). For information on the Text editor, see Using the Curve
specification Panel (p. 356).
Creating and Using a Krylov ROM
4. Click the Setup tab. Next to Solution Settings, click Edit to open the Basic Settings panel and modify
the settings as needed. For information on the Basic Settings panel, see Initializing the Solution (p. 835).
Note:
Errors in a steady-state solution may be amplified, moderately, when this solution is used
to construct the ROM. Therefore, it is best to use lower tolerances and a few more itera-
tions than usual.
5. Enter a Solution ID for the steady-state solution. Before constructing the ROM, this steady-state solution
must be computed. It will then be used as the temperature at t = 0 for when the ROM is evaluated. Any
heat power previously applied to the ROM inputs will be set to zero for this steady-state solution.
6. Click Run to run the steady-state solution.
Figure 32.2: Create Krylov ROM (Construct Tab)
7. On the Construct tab, enter the Order for the ROM you want to create. The Order of a ROM equals the
number of modes (or basis functions) used to approximate the temperature distribution as a function of
time.
8. Enter the Steady state solution ID or click Select to browse for an available solution.
Krylov Reduced-order Models
9. Click Construct Krylov ROM to create the Krylov ROM. Fluent opens and creates the ROM files.
Note:
After ROM creation is complete, additional information is displayed in the Message

window.
Figure 32.3: Create Krylov ROM (Evaluate Tab)
10. On the Evaluate tab, enter the Order for the ROM you want to evaluate. The value must be less than or
equal to the Order you entered on the Construct tab.
Note:
Once a model has been constructed with a certain order, it is useful to evaluate it with
several smaller orders, so as to ascertain whether the order chosen for constructing the
ROM was sufficient. All quantities of interest should converge as the order is increased.
11. In the Evaluation times field, enter the time steps (in seconds) at which you want to evaluate the transient
solution. The density of these time points does not affect the accuracy of the solution. They are just times
at which the solution is exported from the ROM to Icepak. Include a space between each time step.
Creating and Using a Krylov ROM
12. Enter the Steady state solution ID or click Select to browse for an available solution. The ROM to be
evaluated is the one that was created with this steady-state solution ID.
13. Enter the Transient solution ID to which the ROM transient solution will be written.
14. If you want to display heat flux data with the transient solution, select Write heat flux data.
Note:
The evaluation is slower with Write heat flux data enabled.
15. Click Evaluate ROM to start the transient ROM simulation.
Note:
If you want to evaluate a ROM with different transient power values for any of the inputs,
after you edit one or more objects'Transient power, you must run a steady-state solution
on the Setup tab before evaluating the ROM with the new heat power specification.
16. Use the following post-processing tools to evaluate the time steps in the transient simulation.
• Post-processing time panel. See Examining Results at a Specified Time (p. 644) for more information.
• Transient animation panel. See Creating an Animation (p. 645) for more information.
Chapter 33: Using Macros
Macros can help streamline the process of building your ANSYS Icepak model. This chapter describes
some of the macros available in ANSYS Icepak and how you can use them. Information is organized
into the following sections:
Note:
For a definition of each ANSYS Icepak macro, see The Macros Menu (p. 73).
• JEDEC Test Chambers (p. 723)
• Printed Circuit Board (PCB) (p. 728)
• Detailed Heat Sink (p. 735)
• Heat Pipes (p. 739)
• Data Center Components (p. 741)
• Transient Temperature Dependent Power (p. 752)
• Debug Divergence (p. 755)
• TEC Macros (p. 757)
• Power Dependent Power (p. 760)
• Create Bonding Wires (p. 765)
• Solar Flux Calculator (p. 767)
33.1. JEDEC Test Chambers

ANSYS Icepak provides macros for two test chambers based on standards from the EIA/JEDEC (Electronic
Industries Alliance Joint Electron Device Engineering Council). One chamber (described in Forced-Con-
vection Test Chamber (p. 724)) is designed for determining the thermal resistance under forced-convection
conditions. Another chamber (described in Natural-Convection Test Chamber (p. 726)) is designed for
determining the thermal resistance under conditions of natural convection.
• Forced-Convection Test Chamber (p. 724)
• Natural-Convection Test Chamber (p. 726)
Using Macros
33.2. Forced-Convection Test Chamber

ANSYS Icepak’s forced-convection (moving-air) test chamber is based on the JESD51-6 standard from
EIA/JEDEC [ 13 (p. 1011) ]. It consists of a cabinet with two openings at opposite sides, and one or more
conducting plates representing the test board.
Adding a Forced-Convection Test Chamber to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include a forced-convection test chamber in your ANSYS Icepak model, go to the Macros menu.
Under Geometry, select IC Packages and then JEDEC Test Chamber. This will open the Create JEDEC
Test Chamber panel, shown in Figure 33.1: The Create JEDEC Test Chambers Panel (Forced Convec-
tion) (p. 724).
Macros Modeling IC Packages JEDEC Test Chamber
Figure 33.1: The Create JEDEC Test Chambers Panel (Forced Convection)
The procedure for adding a forced-convection test chamber to your model is as follows:
1. Specify the type of chamber by selecting Forced Convection under JEDEC test enclosures.
Forced-Convection Test Chamber
2. Specify the dimensions of the device you want to test. ANSYS Icepak will use this information to build a
test chamber with the appropriate dimensions to test your device.
a. Specify the plane in which the board lies by selecting Y-Z, X-Z, or X-Y in the Plane drop-down list.
ordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end coordinates (xE, yE, zE, as appropriate) of the device, or select Start/length
priate) of the device. The coordinate on the axis that is normal to the Plane of the device is specified
only for the starting point. For the ending point, this same value is used. For example, if the device is
in the X-Y plane, you specify xS, yS, zS, xE, and yE, and ANSYS Icepak automatically sets zE equal to
zS when creating the test chamber.
3. Model board as plate gives you the option for modeling a board as a block in order to use the trace and
via import feature.
4. Specify the Number of Package leads/balls (I/O) in the device that you are characterizing.
5. Specify whether to model the Board Type as 1s PCB or 2s2p PCB. A board with two layers will be modeled
with only a top and bottom substrate layer, while a board with four layers will be modeled with a top layer,
a bottom layer, and two intermediate layers.
6. Input value for Signal Layer Thickness and for Power Layer Thickness. Power Layer Thickness is enabled
only when 2s2p PCB type is selected.
7. Specify whether the Model Type is Compact or Detailed.
A compact board will be represented by a single thick plate regardless of how many layers it contains.
The effect of copper layers is accounted for in the form of directional conductivities of the solid
material assigned to the thick plate.
A two-layer detailed board will be modeled by two thick plates representing the top (metal) trace
layer and the plate with isotropic conductivity (dielectric) underneath the trace layer. A four-layer
detailed board includes two additional thin conducting plates that are embedded inside the
dielectric to represent two intermediate trace layers.
8. Specify whether the Package Type is Leaded or Array.
9. If you want the test chamber to be available as an assembly in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create
assembly. If you want the test chamber to be available as individual objects, deselect Create assembly.
10. If you have created an assembly and want to change the name of the test chamber, enter a new name in
the Name text entry field. The default name is jedec.n, where n is the next sequential number among
numbered test chambers.
11. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Create JEDEC Test Chambers panel and create
the chamber.
When you create the test chamber, ANSYS Icepak will automatically resize the cabinet to be just large
enough to contain the chamber. You can complete your model definition by creating the device to be
tested and placing it on the test board.
Using Macros
33.3. Natural-Convection Test Chamber

ANSYS Icepak’s natural-convection (still-air) test chamber is based on the JESD51-2 standard from
EIA/JEDEC [ 12 (p. 1011) ]. It consists of a cabinet with six non-adiabatic walls, a solid conducting block
representing the support for the test board, and one or more conducting plates representing the test
board.
Adding a Natural-Convection Test Chamber to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include a natural-convection test chamber in your ANSYS Icepak model, go to the Macros menu.
Under Geometry, select IC Packages and then JEDEC Test Chamber. This will open the Create JEDEC
Test Chambers panel, shown in Figure 33.2: The Create JEDEC Test Chamber Panel (Natural Convec-
tion) (p. 726).
Macros Modeling IC Packages JEDEC Test Chamber
Figure 33.2: The Create JEDEC Test Chamber Panel (Natural Convection)
The procedure for adding a natural-convection test chamber to your model is as follows:
Natural-Convection Test Chamber
1. Specify the type of chamber by selecting Natural Convection under JEDEC test enclosures.
2. Specify the dimensions of the device you want to test. ANSYS Icepak will use this information to build a
test chamber with the appropriate dimensions to test your device.
ordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end coordinates (xE, yE, zE, as appropriate) of the device, or select Start/length
priate) of the device. The coordinate on the axis that is normal to the Plane of the device is specified
only for the starting point. For the ending point, this same value is used. For example, if the device is
in the X-Y plane, you specify xS, yS, zS, xE, and yE, and ANSYS Icepak automatically sets zE equal to
zS when creating the test chamber.
3. Model board as plate gives you the option for modeling a board as a block in order to use the trace and
via import feature.
4. Specify the Number of Package leads/balls (I/O) in the device that you are characterizing.
5. Specify whether to model the Board Type as 1s PCB or 2s2p PCB. A board with two layers will be modeled
with only a top and bottom substrate layer, while a board with four layers will be modeled with a top layer,
a bottom layer, and two intermediate layers.
6. Input value for Signal Layer Thickness and for Power Layer Thickness. Power Layer Thickness is enabled
only when 2s2p PCB type is selected.
7. Specify whether the Model Type is Compact or Detailed.
A compact board will be represented by a single thick plate regardless of how many layers it contains.
The effect of copper layers is accounted for in the form of directional conductivities of the solid
material assigned to the thick plate.
A two-layer detailed board will be modeled by two thick plates representing the top (metal) trace
layer and the plate with isotropic conductivity (dielectric) underneath the trace layer. A four-layer
detailed board includes two additional thin conducting plates that are embedded inside the
dielectric to represent two intermediate trace layers.
8. Specify whether the Package Type is Leaded or Array.
9. If you want the test chamber to be available as an assembly in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create
assembly. If you want the test chamber to be available as individual objects, deselect Create assembly.
10. If you have created an assembly and want to change the name of the test chamber, enter a new name in
the Name text entry field. The default name is jedec.n, where n is the next sequential number among
numbered test chambers.
11. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Create JEDEC Test Chambers panel and create
the chamber.
When you create the test chamber, ANSYS Icepak will automatically resize the cabinet to be just large
enough to contain the chamber. You can complete your model definition by creating the device to be
tested and placing it on the test board.
Using Macros
33.4. Printed Circuit Board (PCB)

The PCB macro in ANSYS Icepak allows you to create block and plate objects with orthotropic conduct-
ivities that can be used to model a printed circuit board (PCB). Note that the PCB macro is different
from the PCB object that you can create by clicking on the button in the Object creation toolbar
(see Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) (p. 435)). The PCB object is used to create a specified number of boards
in a rack. The PCB macro creates a solid block object as well as conducting plate objects (if specified)
with orthotropic conductivities that model just one printed circuit board.
To configure a PCB macro in your model, you must specify the position and thickness of the board, the
number of copper layers, and the thickness of each copper layer.
ANSYS Icepak creates a custom material to represent the properties of the PCB. (See Material Proper-
ties (p. 339) for details on materials.) This material has different thermal conductivities parallel to and
normal to the plane of the board (kparallel and knormal , respectively). ANSYS Icepak calculates the two
thermal conductivities based on your inputs and creates the custom material. The thermal conductivities
are calculated using the following equations:
(33.1)
(33.2)
where kcu is the conductivity of the copper in the PCB (ANSYS Icepak always uses a value of 400 W/m-
K for this macro), ksubs is the conductivity of the substrate in the PCB (ANSYS Icepak always uses a value
of 0.2 W/m-K for this macro), hpcb is the thickness of the PCB, and hcu is the total thickness of copper
in the PCB. ANSYS Icepak calculates hcu using
(33.3)
• Adding a PCB to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 728)
• Adding PCB Attachments to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 730)
33.4.1. Adding a PCB to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include a PCB in your ANSYS Icepak model, select PCB and then PCB - Detailed and Compact in
the Macros menu. This will open the Create PCB - Detailed and Compact panel, shown in Fig-
ure 33.3: The Create PCB - Detailed and Compact Panel (p. 729).
Macros Geometry PCB PCB - Detailed and Compact
Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
Figure 33.3: The Create PCB - Detailed and Compact Panel
The procedure for adding a PCB to your model is as follows:
1. Specify the position and size of the PCB.
a. Specify the Plane in which the PCB lies (YZ, XZ, or XY).
b. Under Substrate, enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths of the sides
(Length and Width) of the PCB. The height of the PCB is defined by the Total Thickness (described
below).
c. Specify the total thickness of the PCB next to Total Thickness.
2. Specify the Material of the substrate. By default, the Material is specified as Epoxy-glass fiber. To
change the Material, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339)
Using Macros
3. Under Tracing Layers, specify the High surface thickness, Low surface thickness, and Internal layer
thickness and then specify the Percent coverage for each. Finally, specify the Number of internal
layers and the Material of the tracing layers. By default, the Material is specified as Cu-Pure. To change
the Material, select a material from the Material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details
4. Specify the Model representation. There are two options:
• Compact creates the PCB as a solid block object with the specified dimensions. The block’s conduct-
ivity is computed internally as the average of the conductivities of the substrate and the trace materials.
Since the substrate thickness is greater than the combined trace layer thickness, the conductivity is
generally much closer to the conductivity of the substrate.
• Detailed creates the PCB as a combination of block and plate objects. The substrate is represented
by a solid block. The high surface, low surface, and internal layers are represented by conducting thin
plates.
5. Specify whether you want the PCB to be available as an assembly or as individual objects.
• If you want the PCB to be available as an assembly in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create internal
part and specify a name in the Name text entry field. The default name is resl.n, where n is the next
sequential number among numbered PCBs. ANSYS Icepak will also use the information you provided
in the Create PCB - Detailed and Compact panel to create the custom material.
• If you want the PCB to be available as individual block or plate objects, deselect Create internal part.
The individual block and plate elements that make up the PCB will be created with the default names
pc-board.n for the substrate, low-layer.n for the lower trace layer (detailed only), high-layer.n for
the higher trace layer (detailed only), and int-layer.n for the internal trace layers (detailed only), where
n is the next sequential number among similar objects.
6. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Create PCB - Detailed and Compact panel and
create the PCB.
After the PCB has been created and positioned in your ANSYS Icepak model, it cannot be modified
using the Create PCB - Detailed and Compact panel. You can edit the PCB by editing the block or
plates that were created by ANSYS Icepak. You can also view the properties of the custom material
or edit the custom material, if required. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
To create a rack of PCBs, select the PCB to be copied in the plate Edit panel, and then use the Copy
object panel (described in Copying an Object Using the Copy object Panel (p. 306)) to copy the PCB.
33.4.2. Adding PCB Attachments to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include PCB attachments in your ANSYS Icepak model, selectMacros Geometry PCB . You
can then select one of the following features: Wedgelock, Bolt, or Stiffener.
Wedgelock
Wedgelocks are used to define a location on the board where the board is clamped to a heat sink or
cold plate at a defined temperature. Wedgelocks can be anywhere on the board and can have its
own cold plate temperature. Wedgelocks are used to generate a contact force between the board
edge and a cold plate. Therefore, the heat is transferred from the board on the side opposite of the
wedgelock to a cold plate or heat sink. This enhanced contact force increases the efficiency of the
heat transfer between the board and cold plate.
Figure 33.4: Wedgelock with Conduction Plates
The procedure for adding a wedgelock to your model is as follows:
1. Go to Macros Geometry PCB Wedgelock to display the Create Wedgelock panel.
Figure 33.5: The Create Wedgelock Panel
2. Click the arrow in PCB/Board text box to select a PCB/Board. Click Accept in the drop-down list.
3. Enter the wedgelock dimensions using either Start/length or Start/end specifications.
4. Select the place where the device is clamped to the board in the Board_side drop-down list.
5. Enter the thermal Resistance of the device.
6. Next enter the temperature of the surface the board is being clamped to in the Cold Boundary Temp
edit box.
Using Macros
7. Click the Accept button at the bottom of the panel to apply your changes and close the panel.
Bolt
Bolts are used to define a location on the board where the board is bolted to a heat sink or cold plate
at a defined temperature. Bolts can be anywhere on the board and can have its own cold plate tem-
perature.
The procedure for adding a bolt to your model is as follows:
1. Go to Macros Geometry PCB Bolt to display the Create Bolt panel.
Figure 33.6: The Create Bolt Panel
3. Enter the location of the bolt with respect to the PCB in the X, Y, and Z text boxes.
4. Enter the contact area of the bolt in the Contact Area text box.
5. Select the side of the board the bolt is attached to in the Board_side drop-down list.
6. Enter the thermal Resistance of the bolt.
7. Next enter the temperature of the surface the bolt is being clamped to in the Cold Boundary Temp edit
box.
Stiffener
Stiffeners are items that are either bolted or bonded to the board surface. They are represented three-
dimensionally on the board as well as in the air solution. Stiffeners enhance the heat transfer over
the board by adding a thermal path from the board surface, across the bond or bolted interface,
three-dimensionally through the stiffener and back to the board surface. Stiffeners also impact the
air flow over the board. They can be used to direct air flow across the board. Heat is also transferred
from the sides of the stiffener to the air, acting like a fin.
Stiffeners can be used to represent any rectangular shaped homogeneous object on the board. This
could be an aluminum piece that spans the board to add structural rigidity to the board. It could also
be sheet metal used to direct air flow across the board. The stiffener impacts both the air flow over
the board as well as the heat transfer in the board. The stiffener can be bolted at specific locations
or it can be continuously bonded to the board. Convection is accounted from all surfaces of the
stiffener to the local air. Therefore they act as a fin on the board adding convective surfaces area to
the board. The figure below shows such an example.
Figure 33.7: Stiffener
The procedure for adding a stiffener to your model is as follows:
1. Go to Macros Geometry PCB Stiffener to display the Create Stiffener panel.
Using Macros
Figure 33.8: The Create Stiffener Panel
3. Enter the stiffener dimensions using either Start/length or Start/end specifications.
4. Select the place where the stiffener is clamped to the board in the Board_side drop-down list.
5. Select the Stiffener material in the drop-down list.
6. Select Bond or Bolt attachment. The Details group box will change depending on your selection.
• If you select Bond, then enter the Bond material and Thickness in the Details group box.
• If you select Bolt, then enter the Resistance, Tie Position, and values in the Curve specification
panel in the Details group box. The Curve specification panel is displayed when you click the Edit
button and select Text editor. The values represent the tie down point and the position of the tie
down along the length of the stiffener.
Detailed Heat Sink
33.5. Detailed Heat Sink

Detailed heat sink macros are designed to model finned heat sinks or heat sinks with pins. They consist
of a separate solid blocks representing the heat sink base, fins or pins, and (optionally) a plate to
model thermal resistance caused by interface between the base and any object connected to the base.
There are four types of detailed heat sinks available in ANSYS Icepak: extruded, cross cut extrusion,
cylindrical pin, and bonded fin. These are described in Detailed Heat Sinks (p. 570).
Note that there is a heat sink object available in ANSYS Icepak that can also be used to create a detailed
heat sink (see Detailed Heat Sinks (p. 570) for details). You should use the detailed heat sink macro if
you want to customize the design of your detailed heat sink after you have created it (for example, if
you want the heat sink to have pins of varying heights). You should use the heat sink object if you want
to parameterize any of the inputs for the heat sink (see Parameterizing the Model (p. 689) for details on
parameterizing your model).
• Adding a Detailed Heat Sink Macro to Your ANSYS Icepak Model (p. 735)
33.5.1. Adding a Detailed Heat Sink Macro to Your ANSYS Icepak Model
To include a detailed heat sink macro in your ANSYS Icepak model, go to the Macros menu. Under
Geometry, select Heatsinks and then Detailed Heatsink. This will open the Create Detailed Heatsink
panel, shown in Figure 33.9: The Create Detailed Heatsink Panel (p. 736).
Macros Geometry Heatsinks Detailed Heatsink
Using Macros
Figure 33.9: The Create Detailed Heatsink Panel
The procedure for adding a detailed heat sink to your model is as follows:
1. Specify the Heat sink type by selecting Extruded, Cross Cut Extrusion, Cylindrical Pin, or Bonded
Fin. The middle part of the panel will change depending on your selection of Heat sink type.
2. Specify the position and size of the base of the detailed heat sink.
ordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end coordinates (xE, yE, zE, as appropriate) of the base, or select Start/length
and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths of the sides (xL, yL, zL, as ap-
propriate) of the base. The height of the base is defined by the Base height (described below), so
one of the endpoint coordinates will be grayed out.
c. Specify the height of the conducting solid base next to Base height.
Detailed Heat Sink
3. Specify the total height of the base and fins/pins next to Overall height.
4. Specify the characteristics of the fins/pins. These characteristics are related to the selected Heat sink
type and are described below.
5. Specify the Base material and the Fin material or Pin material. By default, these are specified as default
for the heat sink. This means that the material specified as the Base material and the Fin material or
Pin material is defined under Default solid in the Basic parameters panel (see Default Fluid, Solid, and
Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the material, select a new material from the relevant material drop-
down list. You can also view the definition of the material, edit the definition of the material, or create
a new material using the material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
6. (Optional) Specify the thermal resistance at the interface between the base and any object connected
to the base. Select Interface thermal resistance and specify the contact resistance. There are two options:
• Compute resistance allows ANSYS Icepak to compute the resistance at the interface. The resistance
is computed as d∕k, where d is the effective thickness of the plate at the interface and k is the thermal
conductivity of the solid material (defined as part of the properties of the solid material specified for
the plate).
Specify the Effective thickness and the Solid material for the plate. By default, the solid ma-
terial is specified as default for the plate. This means that the material specified as the Solid
material for the plate is defined under Default solid in the Basic parameters panel (see Default
Fluid, Solid, and Surface Materials (p. 261)). To change the Solid material for the plate, select a
material from the Solid material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details on
• Specify resistance allows you to specify a value of the contact Resistance to heat transfer.
7. (For Bonded Fin heat sinks only) Specify the thermal resistance at the interface between the base and
the fins. Under Bonding thermal resistance, specify the contact resistance. The options for specifying
the Bonding thermal resistance are the same as those for specifying the Interface thermal resistance
and are described above.
8. Specify whether you want the detailed heat sink to be available as an assembly or as individual objects.
• If you want the heat sink to be available as an assembly in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create
assembly and specify a name in the Name text entry field. The default name is heatsink.n, where n
is the next sequential number among numbered heat sinks.
• If you want the heat sink to be available as individual block and plate objects, deselect Create assembly.
The individual block and plate elements that make up the base and fins/pins of the heat sink will be
created with the default names hsbase.n for the base, hsfin.n for fins, hspin.n for pins, hsattach.n
for an interface thermal resistance, and hsbond.n for a bonding interface resistance, where n is the
next sequential number among similar objects.
9. If you want to save the current heat sink specifications to be reused in your current model, click the Save
button to open the Macro information dialog box. (See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details
on using dialog boxes.) ANSYS Icepak will save the specifications in a subdirectory named de-
tailed_heatsink_info.
To load heat sink specifications that you have saved in this manner, click the Load button and
select the heat sink specifications to be loaded.
Using Macros
10. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Create Detailed Heatsink panel and create the
heat sink.
Note:
After the heat sink has been created and positioned in your ANSYS Icepak model, it cannot
be modified using the Create Detailed Heatsink panel. There are two ways to modify an
existing heat sink:
• If you selected the Create assembly option in the Create Detailed Heatsink panel, you can
edit the heat sink in the same way you edit an assembly (see Editing Objects in an As-
sembly (p. 365)).
• If you did not select the Create assembly option in the Create Detailed Heatsink panel, you
must individually select and modify the heat sink’s block objects and plate objects.
User Inputs for Extruded Heat Sink and Bonded Fin Heat Sink
To specify the characteristics for an extruded heat sink or a bonded fin heat sink, select Extruded or
Bonded Fin under Heat sink type in the Create Detailed Heatsink panel. The user inputs for the
Extruded heat sink and the Bonded Fin heat sink are shown below.
The steps for defining these heat sinks are as follows:
1. Specify the Flow direction parallel to the base. The flow directions that are available depend on your
choice of Plane. For example, if you selected Y-Z in the Plane drop-down list, the available flow directions
will be Y and Z.
2. Specify the geometry of the fins. There are three options:
• Specify the Fin count and the Fin thickness.
• Specify the Fin count and the Fin spacing.
• Specify the Fin thickness and the Fin spacing.
User Inputs for Cross Cut Extrusion Heat Sink

To specify the characteristics for a cross cut extrusion heat sink, select Cross Cut Extrusion under
Heat sink type in the Create Detailed Heatsink panel. The user inputs for the Cross Cut Extrusion
heat sink are shown below.
Heat Pipes
The steps for defining a cross cut extrusion heat sink are as follows:
1. Specify the geometry of the fins in one direction parallel to the base. The directions that are available
depend on your choice of Plane. For example, if you selected Y-Z in the Plane drop-down list, the
available directions will be Y direction and Z direction. There are three options for specifying the fin
geometry:
• Specify the Fin count and the Fin thickness.
• Specify the Fin count and the Fin spacing.
• Specify the Fin thickness and the Fin spacing.
2. Specify the geometry of the fins in the other direction parallel to the base. The inputs will be the same
as those described above.
User Inputs for Cylindrical Pin Heat Sink

To specify the characteristics for a cylindrical pin heat sink, select Cylindrical Pin under Heat sink
type in the Create Detailed Heatsink panel. The user inputs for the Cylindrical Pin heat sink are
shown below.
The steps for defining a cylindrical pin heat sink are as follows:
1. Specify the Pin alignment. There are two options: In-line and Staggered.
2. Specify the number of pins in the directions parallel to the base of the heat sink next to Pin count.
3. Specify the geometry of the pins next to Pin type:
• Cylinder instructs ANSYS Icepak to create pins in the shape of a cylinder. Specify the Radius of the
pins.
• Cone instructs ANSYS Icepak to create tapered pins. Specify the Radius of the pins at the bottom of
the cone (nearest the base) under Bot and at the Top of the cone (farthest from the base).
33.6. Heat Pipes

A heat pipe is a device that transfers heat from one area to the other passively. The working principle
of a heat pipe is based on boiling and condensation of the working fluid. The fluid evaporates at one
end of the pipe called the evaporator, and condenses at the other end called the condenser. The
evaporator section is attached to the heat source and the condenser is normally attached to a heat
sink. The vapor moves from the evaporator to the condenser due to pressure difference that exists
between these two sections. The condensed liquid moves back to the evaporator through capillary action
of a wick.
Using Macros
33.6.1. Adding a Heat Pipe to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include a heat pipe in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Geometry, Other, and then Network Heat
Pipe – Straight in the Macros menu. This will open the Create Straight Network Heatpipe panel,
shown in Figure 33.10: The Create Straight Network Heatpipe Panel (p. 740).
Macros Geometry Other Network Heat Pipe – Straight
Figure 33.10: The Create Straight Network Heatpipe Panel
The procedure for adding a heat pipe to your model is as follows:
1. Specify the plane of the heat pipe by selecting YZ, XZ, or XY.
Note:
The resulting Flow Direction is displayed.
Data Center Components
2. Specify the position of the heat pipe. Enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, and zS) and the
lengths or widths of the sides (X width or X length, Y width or Y length, or Z width or Z length).
3. Specify the length of the evaporator section wherein the heat enters the heat pipe.
4. Specify the length of the condenser section wherein the heat leaves the heat pipe.
5. Enter the Thermal Resistance provided by heat pipe manufacturer.
6. Enter the side Thermal Resistance for the heat pipe. This is a measure of temperature difference by
which an object resists a heat flow in the radial direction of heat pipe.
7. Select the material of the heat pipe (Pipe material) and the Surface. By default these are specified as
Cu-Pure. To change the material, select a new material from the relevant material drop-down list. You
can also view the definition of the material, edit the definition of the material, or create a new material
using the material drop-down list. See Material Properties (p. 339) for details.
8. After the heat pipe has been created and positioned in your ANSYS Icepak model, it cannot be modified
using the Heat pipe panel. You can modify an existing heat pipe by doing the following:
• If you selected the Create assembly option in the Create Straight Network Heatpipe panel, you
can edit the heat pipe in the same way you edit an assembly (see Editing Objects in an As-
sembly (p. 365)).
• If you did not select the Create assembly option in the Create Straight Network Heatpipe panel,
you must individually select and modify the heat pipe's network object and hollow block object.
9. If you want to save the current heat pipe specifications to be reused in your current model, click the
Save button to open the Macro information dialog box (which is the same as the File selection dialog
box described in File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98)).
To load heat pipe specifications that you have saved in this manner, click the Load button and
select the heat pipe specifications to be loaded.
33.7. Data Center Components

• CRAC macro (p. 741)
• PDU Macro (p. 744)
• Rack Macro (p. 746)
• Tile Object (p. 749)
33.7.1. CRAC macro

The Computer Room Air Conditioning (CRAC) macro allows you to create hollow block and fan objects
to represent the CRAC in a data center in your ANSYS Icepak model and assign properties to the
supply fans.
The CRAC macro can be used to reduce the number of steps required to create a hollow block and
fans to form the CRAC unit and turning vane (if there is any).
Using Macros
Adding a CRAC to Your ANSYS Icepak model

To include a CRAC in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Geometry, Data Center Components, and
then CRAC in the Macros menu. This will open the Create CRAC panel shown in Figure 33.11: The
Create CRAC Panel (p. 742).
Macros Geometry Data Center Components CRAC
Figure 33.11: The Create CRAC Panel
The procedure for adding CRAC to your model is as follows:
1. Enter a Name for the CRAC unit.
2. Select Start/end and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and end coordinates (xE, yE, zE)
of the CRAC, or select Start/length and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths
of the sides (xL, yL, zL) of the CRAC.
3. Select the Flow direction:
• Select the flow direction (+x, -x, and so on) to place the supply side of the CRAC unit along the specified
direction.
4. Select the Fan Specifications:
• Simple: Place the fans covering the entire face depending on the flow direction.
• Detailed: Opens a separate panel as shown in Figure 33.12: The Detailed Fan Specifications Pan-
el (p. 743).
Figure 33.12: The Detailed Fan Specifications Panel
– Number of Supply Fans: Allows selecting the number of fans on the supply side (maximum = 4).
– Return dimensions: Allows specifying the input dimensions (length and width) of the supply and
returning fans.
5. Specify the Volume flow rate or Mass flow rate under Intake fan specifications options.
6. Specify the Supply temperature under Intake fan specifications options.
7. Turn on the Turning vane option if there is a turning vane attached in the CRAC unit.
• Select the direction of the flow in the Turning vane.
8. Specify the Supply plenum height.
Note:
The turning vane height will be equal to the supply plenum height.
9. Specify whether you want the CRAC to be available as one part or as individual objects.
Using Macros
• If you want the CRACs to be available as one part in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create assembly
and specify a name in the Name text entry field. The default name is CRAC.n where n is the next
sequential number among numbered CRACs.
• If you want the CRACs to be available as individual objects, deselect Create assembly. ANSYS Icepak
will create one hollow block with fan objects.
• If you want to save the current CRAC specifications to be reused in your current model or to be used
in a different model, click the Save button to open the Macro information panel (which is the same
as the File selection panel) described in File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98). ANSYS Icepak will save
the specifications in a subdirectory named crac_info. To load CRAC specifications that you have
saved in this manner, click the Load button and select the CRAC specifications to be loaded.
10. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Create CRAC panel and create the CRAC.
Modifying an Existing CRAC

After the CRAC has been created and positioned in your ANSYS Icepak model, it cannot be modified
using the Create CRAC panel. There are two ways to modify an existing CRAC:
• If you selected the Create assembly option in the Create CRAC panel, you can edit the CRAC in the same
way that you edit a part. (See Editing Objects in an Assembly (p. 365)).
• If you did not select the Create assembly option in the Create CRAC panel, you must individually select
and modify the hollow block and fan objects that make up the CRAC.
33.7.2. PDU Macro

The Power Distribution Unit (PDU) macro allows you to create a fluid block, partitions, and vent objects
to represent the PDU in a data center in your ANSYS Icepak model and assign properties to the fluid
block and vents.
The PDU macro can be used to reduce the number of steps required to create a fluid block, four
partitions, and two vent objects to form the PDU unit.
Adding a PDU to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include a PDU in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Geometry, Data Center Components, and
then PDU in the Macros menu. This will open the Create PDU panel shown in Figure 33.13: The
Create PDU Panel (p. 745).
Macros Geometry Data Center Components PDU
Figure 33.13: The Create PDU Panel
The procedure for adding PDU to your model is as follows:
1. Enter a Name for the PDU.
of the PDU, or select Start/length and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths
of the sides (xL, yL, zL) of the PDU.
3. Select the PDU flow direction.
4. Select the Top face (flow will go out from this face) direction (+x, -x, and so on) under Top face.
5. Specify the heat rejected from the PDU in the Heat output text entry field.
6. Specify the Percent open area on top and Percent open area on bottom.
7. Specify whether you want the PDU to be available as one part or as individual objects.
Using Macros
• If you want the PDU to be available as one part in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create assembly
and specify a name in the Name text entry field. The default name is PDU.n where n is the next se-
quential number among numbered PDUs.
• If you want the PDU to be available as individual objects, deselect Create assembly. ANSYS Icepak
will create one fluid block, four partitions, and two vent objects.
• If you want to save the current PDU specifications to be reused in your current model or to be used
the specifications in a subdirectory named PDU_info. To load PDU specifications that you have
saved in this manner, click the Load button and select the PDU specifications to be loaded.
8. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Create PDU panel and create the PDU.
Modifying an Existing PDU

After the PDU has been created and positioned in your ANSYS Icepak model, it cannot be modified
using the Create PDU panel. There are two ways to modify an existing PDU:
• If you selected the Create assembly option in the Create PDU panel, you can edit the PDU in the same
• If you did not select the Create assembly option in the Create PDU panel, you must individually select
and modify the fluid block, partitions or vent objects that make up the PDU.
33.7.3. Rack Macro

The Rack macro allows you to create a hollow block and recirculation opening objects to represent
the Rack in a data center in your ANSYS Icepak model and assign properties to the recirculation
openings.
The Rack macro can be used to reduce the number of steps required to create a hollow block and
recirculation openings to form the Rack unit.
Adding a Rack to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include a Rack in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Geometry, Data Center Components, and
then Rack (Front to Top) or Rack (Front to Rear) in the Macros menu. This will open the Create
Rack (Front to Top) or Create Rack (Front to Rear) panel.
Macros Geometry Data Center Components Rack (Front to Top) or Rack (Front to Rear)
• Figure 33.14: The Create Rack (Front to Rear) Panel (p. 747) shows the Rack (Front to Rear) Rack type. The
Rack (Front to Rear) option should be chosen when flow enters from one face of the Rack and leaves
from the other face in the same direction.
• Figure 33.15: The Create Rack (Front to Top) Panel (p. 748) shows the Rack (Front to Top) Rack Type. The
Rack (Front to Top) option should be chosen when flow enters from the front face and leaves from the
top face of the Rack.
Figure 33.14: The Create Rack (Front to Rear) Panel
Using Macros
Figure 33.15: The Create Rack (Front to Top) Panel
The procedure for adding a Rack to your model is as follows:
1. Enter a Name for the Rack.
of the Rack, or select Start/length and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths
of the sides (xL, yL, zL) of the Rack.
3. Select the Flow direction.
• In Rack (Front to Rear), select the direction of the flow below the Flow direction option.
• In Rack (Front to Top), select the position of the inlet face below the Inlet option and location of
outlet face below the Outlet option.
4. Specify the Temperature rise or Heat load under Thermal specifications.
5. Specify the Volume flow or Mass flow rate under Flow specifications.
6. Specify the Number of racks in a row.
7. Specify the direction on which Racks are to be copied under Create additional racks along option.
8. Specify whether you want the Rack to be available as one part or as individual objects.
9. If you want the Racks to be available as one part in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create assembly
and specify a name in the Name text entry field. The default name is rack.n where n is the next se-
quential number among numbered Racks.
• If you want the racks to be available as individual objects, deselect Create assembly. ANSYS Icepak
will create one hollow block and one recirculation opening objects.
• If you want to save the current Rack specifications to be reused in your current model or to be used
the specifications in a subdirectory named rack_info. To load Rack specifications that you have
saved in this manner, click the Load button and select the Rack specifications to be loaded.
10. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Rack panel and create the Rack.
Modifying an Existing Rack

After the Rack has been created and positioned in your ANSYS Icepak model, it cannot be modified
using the Rack panel. There are two ways to modify an existing Rack:
• If you selected the Create assembly option in the Create Rack panel, you can edit the Rack in the same
• If you did not select the Create assembly option in the Create Rack panel, you must individually select
and modify the hollow block and recirculation opening objects that make up the Rack.
33.7.4. Tile Object

The Tile macro allows you to create resistance and opening objects to represent the Tile in a data
center in your ANSYS Icepak model and assign properties to the 3D resistance.
Using Macros
The Tile macro can be used to reduce the number of steps required to create the 3D resistance and
openings on top and bottom on the resistance.
Adding a Tile to Your ANSYS Icepak Model

To include a Tile in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Geometry, Data Center Components and then
Tile in the Macros menu. This will open the Create Tile panel shown in Figure 33.16: The Create Tile
Panel (p. 750)
Macros Geometry Data Center Components Tile
Figure 33.16: The Create Tile Panel
The procedure for adding Tiles to your model is as follows:
1. Enter a Name for the Tile.
2. Specify the Number of Tiles and Offset between tiles (if there is any).
3. Specify the direction on which Tiles are to be copied under Create additional tiles along option.
4. Select a Plane on which tiles are located.
of the Tile, or select Start/length and enter values for the start coordinates (xS, yS, zS) and the lengths
of the sides (xL, yL, zL) of the Tile.
6. Specify the % Open area (fractional) under Tile specifications.
• Choose the Uniform option if all the Tiles have uniform % opening.
• Choose the Varying option if the Tiles have non-uniform % opening.
– Click the Edit button, a % Open area for individual tiles window will pop up.
– Specify the % open area for each Tile. Your input values should be equal to the Number of Tiles.
If you specify the less number of inputs for the % open area than the required one, the 0.5
will be used for the Tile for which the % open areas have not been specified. Similarly, if
you specify more number of input values for the % open area than the required one, then
the last entries will be ignored.
Note:
The Tile macro uses the perforated plate correlation to compute the loss coefficient
(for pressure drop calculations) in tile thickness direction (Ref: I. E. Idelchick.,
Handbook of Hydraulic Resistances. Hemisphere Publishing Corp., 2nd edition,
1986.).
7. Specify whether you want the Tile to be available as one part or as individual objects.
Using Macros
• If you want the Tile to be available as one part in your ANSYS Icepak model, select Create assembly
and specify a name in the Name text entry field. The default name is tile.n where n is the next
sequential number among numbered Tiles.
• If you want the Tile to be available as individual resistance or opening objects, deselect Create as-
sembly. ANSYS Icepak will create one 3D resistance object and two opening objects.
• If you want to save the current Tile specifications to be reused in your current model or to be used
the specifications in a subdirectory named tile_info. To load Tile specifications that you have
saved in this manner, click the Load button and select the Tile specifications to be loaded.
8. Click Accept to accept the parameters entered into the Tile panel and create the Tile/Tiles.
Modifying an Existing Tile

After the Tile has been created and positioned in your ANSYS Icepak model, it cannot be modified
using the Create Tile panel. There are two ways to modify an existing Tile:
• If you selected the Create assembly option in the Create Tile panel, you can edit the Tile in the same
• If you did not select the Create assembly option in the Create Tile panel, you must individually select
and modify the resistance or opening objects that make up the Tile.
33.8. Transient Temperature Dependent Power

The transient temperature dependent power macro allows you to associate time-dependent power
with temperature-dependent powermaps.
33.8.1. Create a Temperature-Dependent Powermap

Before you run the macro, you must first create a temperature-dependent powermap file.
1. Open a new plain text file.
2. Create the temperature column. The units must be in Celsius.
3. Create a mode column containing the power multipliers. These power multipliers are used to scale the
base power (s0 in the piecewise linear transient power formula). Use the tab key to create even columns.
4. Repeat step 3 until all modes are defined.
Note:
The maximum number of modes is 99. The image below contains three modes.
Transient Temperature Dependent Power
Figure 33.17: Example Powermap File
33.8.2. Set Transient Object Properties

Before you run the macro, you must also set transient properties.
Note:
Block objects are the only object type compatible with this macro.
1. In ANSYS Icepak, double-click a block object.
2. On the Properties tab, enter the Total Power.
3. Select Transient from the drop-down list and click Edit.
4. Under Type, select Piecewise linear and click Text Editor.
5. Create the time column.
6. Create the mode column. Press tab next to each time value and enter a number corresponding to a
temperature-dependent mode defined in the temperature-dependent powermap. The second column
in the powermap file corresponds to mode 1, the third column mode 2, the fourth column mode 3, and
so on.
7. Repeat steps 1-6 for each object with transient power.
Using Macros
Figure 33.18: Curve Specification Panel
33.8.3. Run the Macro

After the temperature-dependent powermap is created and the transient properties are set, run the
macro to solve the model.
1. From the Macros menu, select Modeling Transient T-dependent Power.
Figure 33.19: Transient Temperature Dependent Power Panel
2. In the Transient Temperature Dependent Power panel, click Select to open the Power matrix file
selection dialog.
3. Navigate to the temperature-dependent powermap you created, select it, and click Open.
4. Enter a Solution ID.
5. Click Accept to run the solution.
Debug Divergence
33.9. Debug Divergence

When a solution fails to converge, you must debug the divergence. The following is an overview of the
steps taken to debug divergence:
• Terminate the solution when a residual reaches a high value, for example 1e2 or 1e3.
• Use plane cuts to identify the problem region within the model.
• Use an isosurface to reveal the extent of the problem region.
• Inspect object properties (such as power values and materials).
• Analyze the mesh for distortion or high aspect ratio elements. Use the Quality tab in the Mesh control
panel to verify that face alignment > 0.05, and skewness > 0.02.
With the Debug Divergence macro, you can solve and debug a solution or debug a saved diverged
solution. The macro automates the process of identifying the region of divergence. It automatically
terminates the solution when a divergence limit is met and creates three plane cuts that display the
mesh, an isosurface with 95% the maximum value of the diverging quantity (temperature for energy,
speed for continuity), and a monitor point for analysis. These post-processing objects are deleted when
you re-run the solution.
The macro can be used along with the following features:
• Parallel
• Species Modeling
• Radiation
33.9.1. Limitations
The Debug Divergence macro has some limitations:
• It cannot be used with parametric and optimization studies.
• It cannot be run simultaneously with some other macros, such as the thermostat, TEC, heat sink calibration,
and DELPHI extraction macros.
• The macro does not check divergence for residuals associated with Joule heating or species modeling.
• Changes made to the mesh after running the macro will not be reflected in the plane cuts. The plane cuts
correspond to the loaded solution.

When a solution fails to converge, perform the following steps to run the Debug Divergence macro
and automate the debugging process.
1. From the Macros menu, select Productivity Debug Divergence.
Using Macros
Figure 33.20: Debug Divergence Panel
2. In the Debug Divergence panel, enter values for the following settings:
• Start checking divergence after initial [ ] iteration(s) is the number of iterations the solution will
run without checking for divergence. This avoids unintended terminations resulting from high residuals
due to solution initialization.
• Check for solution divergence every [ ] iteration(s) is the number of iterations the solution will run
between checking for the Solution Termination Criteria.
• Flow (continuity equation) is the residual divergence limit for the continuity equation. The solution
will terminate when the limit is met.
• Temperature (energy equation) is the residual divergence limit for the energy equation. The solution
will terminate when the limit is met.
• Select Solve and Debug Solution to solve the model or Debug Diverged Solution if the model has
an associated saved diverged solution.
• Solution ID is the name for the solution data.
3. Click Accept.
• If you selected Solve and Debug Solution under Additional Options, Icepak runs the solution.
• If you selected Debug Diverged Solution under Additional Options, the Version selection panel
appears. Select a version and click Okay to load the solution.
When the solution terminates or the solution is loaded, the following post-processing objects are
created:
• 3 plane cuts (cut.div.cas.x, cut.div.cas.y, and cut.div.cas.z): The plane cuts are created
at the location where the diverging variable has the maximum value.
TEC Macros
• 1 isosurface (iso.div.cas): The isosurface variable is either speed or temperature. Speed is used
in the case continuity diverges, and temperature when energy diverges.
• 1 monitor point (point.div.cas): The monitor point is created at the location where the diverging
variable has the maximum value.
4. Use the plane cuts, isosurface, and monitor point to analyze the problem region.
5. Make adjustments to object properties (such as power values, materials, boundary conditions, etc.) and/or
improve mesh quality and rerun the solution.
Note:
The Help button can be used to open a text file containing additional information re-
garding macro usage.
33.10. TEC Macros

The TEC macro creates custom thermoelectric coolers (TECs) that are not included in the standard library.
33.10.1. TEC
Figure 33.21: Create Thermoelectric Cooler Panel
1. From the Macros menu, select Modeling Thermoelectric Cooler TEC.
2. In the Create Thermoelectric Cooler panel, specify the following parameters:
Using Macros
• Plane: Specify the plane on which to place the TEC.
• Dimensions: Specify the size of the TEC. Change the unit from the drop-down list if necessary.
• Cold Side: Select the cold side of the TEC.
• Operating parameter: Specify the current that flows through the TEC.
• Geometric parameters: Specify the number of couples; the height, pitch, and area/height of the
thermoelectric elements; and the thickness of the ceramic base. Change the unit from the drop-down
list if necessary.
• Material properties: Specify the material for the elements and base.
3. Select the Create assembly check box if you want ANSYS Icepak to create an assembly in the model
tree that houses all the objects that compose the TEC.
4. If you want to save the current TEC settings to load during a later session, click Save and use the Macro
information panel to navigate to a location on your hard drive. Specify the name of the text file at the
end of the desired path as shown below. You can then use the Load button to load the saved text file.
Figure 33.22: Macro Information Panel
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the TEC.
6. When all parameters are set, click Accept. The TEC objects are created and displayed in the graphics and
Model manager windows.
33.10.2. Run TEC

1. From the Macros menu, select Modeling Thermoelectric Cooler Run TEC.
TEC Macros
Figure 33.23: Run TEC Panel
2. Under Material properties, select Specify material properties to set the Coefficients values or select
Use Laird properties to use pre-defined Laird values.
3. If you selected Specify material properties, enter values for Seebeck coefficient (V/K), Electrical res-
istivity (Ohm-cm), and Thermal conductivity (W/(cm-K)) under a0, a1, a2, and a3. The default coeffi-
cients shown are compatible with most Marlow TECs.
4. Under TEC Simulation Mode, select Specify I and calculate T to enter an Operating Current (A) value
and calculate a Desired Tc (C) during the solution. Or select Specify T and calculate I to enter a Desired
Tc (C) and calculate Operating Current (A) during the solution.
5. Under TEC objects list, enter the following parameters:
• Operating Current (A): Only available for the Specify I and calculate T simulation mode. If you loaded
a TEC from the standard library, the maximum operating current is shown. Note that modifying this
value will not be saved the next time the panel is open.
• Desired Tc (C): Only available for the Specify T and calculate I simulation mode.
• G-factor (cm): If you loaded a TEC from the standard library, the G-factor is shown.
• # of TEC Couples: If you loaded a TEC from the standard library, the # of TEC Couples is shown.
Using Macros
• Update Current Interval: If you selected Specify T and calculate I, enter how many iterations you
would like to wait before the TEC current is updated.
6. If you want to save the coefficients and/or TEC properties and load them in a later session, select Coeffi-
cients and/or TEC properties under Load and Write options and click Save. Use the TEC coefficients
data panel to navigate to a location to save the file.
7. If you want to save the panel parameters and load them in a later session, click Save and use the Macro
information panel to navigate to a location on your hard drive. Specify the name of the text file at the
end of the desired path as shown below. You can then use the Load button to load the saved text file.
Figure 33.24: Macro Information Panel
8. Click Accept to run the solution.
33.11. Power Dependent Power

Using the Power Dependent Power macro, you can perform steady-state or transient simulations while
dynamically controlling the power of a source based on the power consumed by remote sources. You
can define up to 20 target sources, each capable of having 10 remote sources. The power of a target
source is its baseline power plus the linear sum of the power of its remote sources.
(33.4)
where P = power, i = Source index, s = Source, = Multiplier coefficent, C = Baseline power, n =

Number of remote sources, and t = Target.
33.11.1. Limitations
The following are limitations of the Power Dependent Power macro:
Power Dependent Power
• Only 2D source objects can be used.
• Solution restarts are not permitted.
• Source names cannot contain spaces or special characters.
• Source names must begin with a letter.
• The macro does not update if source names change.
• A target source cannot be a remote source for another target source.
33.11.2. Set Up Target and Remote Sources
33.11.2.1. Set Up Target Sources

For each target source, set a baseline total power.
1. In the model tree, double-click a target source.
Using Macros
Figure 33.25: Sources Panel (Target Source)
2. Click the Properties tab.
3. Enter the baseline power value in the Total Power field.
4. Ensure Constant is selected.
5. Click Update and Done.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 until all target sources have a baseline power defined.
33.11.2.2. Set Up Remote Sources

For each remote source, set a total power.
1. In the model tree, double-click a remote source.
Power Dependent Power
Figure 33.26: Sources Panel (Remote Source)
2. Click the Properties tab.
3. Define the remote source power. Remote sources can be set as:
• Linear
• Piecewise linear
• Temperature dependent
• Transient
Using Macros
• Constant
Note:
Each target source must contain at least one remote source with temperature
dependent or transient power.
Note:
For transient simulations, ensure Transient is selected in the Basic Parameters

panel > Transient setup tab.

1. From the Macros > Modeling menu, select Power Dependent Power.
Figure 33.27: Power Dependent Power Panel
2. Under General Specification, select a value for Specify Number of Target Sources.
3. In the Specify Solution ID field, enter a name for the solution.
Create Bonding Wires
4. Under Target and Remote Source Specification, click New and use the Select Target Sources
and Select Remote Sources drop-down lists to create target and remote sources pairs.
Note:
Target sources can share remote sources.
5. Click Edit to display the Remote Source Multipliers panel.
Figure 33.28: Remote Source Multipliers Panel
6. For each remote source, enter a value in the Multiplier column.
7. Click Accept to save the values and close the Remote Source Multipliers panel.
Note:
Your selections in the Power Dependent Power panel are not saved unless you
click Save. The Load button can be used to populate macro inputs from a previ-
ously saved input file.
Note:
You can click View to display the Input Summary, which contains an overview
of each target source and its remote sources and multipliers.
8. Click Accept to run the solution. After the solution is complete, a file (solution ID_pdp.out) is created
in the project folder. This file contains the power for all target and remote sources at each time step
or iteration depending on whether the solution was run in transient or steady state. The time is
displayed in seconds and the power in Watts.
33.12. Create Bonding Wires

The Create Bonding Wires macro allows you to model wire bonds to connect integrated circuits and
packages in your model.
Using Macros
Figure 33.29: Create Bonding Wires Panel
1. From the Macros menu, select Geometry > Packages > Bonding Wire.
2. In the Creating Bonding Wires panel, select the Input Unit.
3. Under Wire plane, select the plane on which to model the bonding wires.
4. Under Wire details, specify the following parameters:
• Leadframe Height: Specify the distance between the top of the PCB and the top of the leadframe.
• Die Height: Specify the distance between the top of the PCB and the top of the die.
• Wire Top Height: Specify the distance between the top of the PCB and the top of the wire.
• Wire Width: Specify the width of the bonding wire.
• Wire Effective Thickness: Specify effective thickness of wire. Along with width, this determines the ef-
fective cross sectional area of the wire.
5. Under Data Order, select the order in which the data is specified.
6. Select the Wire Data Unit.
7. Next to Wire Data, click File Selection.
8. Browse to your working directory with the text file containing the wire bond specifications, select the file,
and click Accept. Below is an example of a wire bond file with 8 pins. Here, the format is x1, y1, x2, y2.
Solar Flux Calculator
Figure 33.30: Create Bonding Wires Panel
9. In the Create Bonding Wires panel, click Accept to create the bonding wire geometry in your model.
33.13. Solar Flux Calculator

The Solar Flux Calculator macro allows you to calculate the solar flux onto your model based on its
orientation, its geographical position, and the time and date.
Figure 33.31: Solar Flux Calculator Panel
1. From the Macros menu, select Modeling > Solar Flux Calculator.
2. Under Surface Specification, select one of the following options:
Using Macros
• Horizontal surface: Select to specify that the model will be flat on a horizontal surface.
• Vertical surface tilt: Select to specify that the model will be at an incline and specify the angle.
3. If you selected Vertical surface tilt, under Face direction specified by, select one of the following options:
• Compass: Select to specify that the model is facing one of the cardinal directions.
• Relative to South: Select and specify the degrees relative to the South direction the model is facing.
4. Specify the Time.
5. Specify the Date.
6. Specify the Local Latitude.
7. Specify the Local Longitude.
8. Click Compute. The following data is displayed in the Message window:
• Time of sunrise and sunset
• The apparent solar time
• Direct normal of solar irradiation flux
• Direct component of solar irradiation flux
• Diffuse irradiance (Ed)
• Total short-wave irradiance (Et)
Chapter 34: Power and Temperature Limit Setup
This chapter provides information about setting up and reviewing the power of objects and temperature
limits, as well as comparing the temperature limits with the object temperatures.
• Setting Up the Power and Temperature Limit Values (p. 769)
• Comparing the Object Temperatures with the Temperature Limits (p. 771)
34.1. Setting Up the Power and Temperature Limit Values

To review or change the power of objects, and to specify the temperature limits, you will use the Power
and temperature limit setup panel (Figure 34.1: The Power and temperature limit setup Panel (p. 769)).
To open the Power and temperature limit setup panel, click the button in the Model and solve
toolbar.
Figure 34.1: The Power and temperature limit setup Panel
You can change the power of an object by double-clicking the box in the Power column next to that
object in the Object column. Similarly, you can change the temperature limit of an object by double-
Power and Temperature Limit Setup
clicking the appropriate box in the Temperature limit column. Note that the Total power will be listed
at the bottom of the table, as shown in Figure 34.1: The Power and temperature limit setup Panel (p. 769).
The power of network objects cannot be changed in the Objects tab. In the Networks tab the internal
node values can be viewed and edited. Upon updating the Networks tab, the total power of all networks
will be updated. The Objects tab will display the total power of all objects.
Figure 34.2: Power and temperature limit setup Panel - Networks tab
When temperature values are specified in the appropriate temperature limit boxes, ANSYS Icepak can
identify all objects that exceed their limits or all objects that have temperatures close to their limits.
You can also specify a default temperature limit in the Default temperature limit box. To set the
temperature limits of all objects to the specified default value, click All to default. To unset the temper-
ature limits of all objects, click Unset all.
To export the table, click the Export button. This will open the Save table panel (Figure 34.3: The Save
table Panel (p. 771)). In the Save table panel, specify the File name as the Comma Separated Values
file (.csv file).
Comparing the Object Temperatures with the Temperature Limits
Figure 34.3: The Save table Panel
34.2. Comparing the Object Temperatures with the Temperature Limits

Once the solution of your model has been calculated, you can compare the temperature values of objects
with the temperature limits. To do this, you will use the Power and temperature limit setup panel
(Figure 34.4: The Power and temperature limit setup Panel (p. 772)).
To open the Power and temperature limit setup panel, click the button in the Model and solve
toolbar, or select Power and temperature values in the Post menu.
Post Power and temperature values
Power and Temperature Limit Setup
Figure 34.4: The Power and temperature limit setup Panel
You can change the Temperature limit of an object, specify the Default temperature limit, and export
the table, as described in Setting Up the Power and Temperature Limit Values (p. 769).
If you click the Show too hot button, all the objects with temperature values greater than their specified
temperature limits will be highlighted in red in the graphics window, and the appropriate warning
message will appear in the Message window. For example:
Too hot: plate.2.9: 25.00616 20.0
If you click the Show marginal button, all the objects with temperature values greater than 95% of
their specified temperature limits will be highlighted in yellow in the graphics window, and the appro-
priate warning message will appear in the Message window. For example:
Close: plate.2.6: 31.9215 = 32.0.
Chapter 35: Generating a Mesh
This chapter provides information about generating a computational mesh for your ANSYS Icepak model.
• Mesh Quality and Type (p. 774)
• Guidelines for Mesh Generation (p. 776)
• Creating a Minimum-Count Mesh (p. 780)
• Refining the Mesh Globally (p. 783)
• Refining the Mesh Locally (p. 793)
• Reusing Mesh (p. 806)
• Controlling the Meshing Order for Objects (p. 808)
• Non-Conformal Meshing Procedures for Assemblies (p. 808)
• Displaying the Mesh (p. 810)
• Checking the Mesh (p. 819)
• Loading an Existing Mesh (p. 828)
35.1. Overview
Once you have finished designing your model, you need to generate the computational mesh that is
used as the basis of the solution procedure. The mesh consists of discrete elements located throughout
the computational domain. Within each element, ANSYS Icepak solves the equations that govern the
flow and heat transfer in the cabinet.
A good computational mesh is an essential ingredient for a successful and accurate solution. If the
overall mesh is too coarse, the resulting solution may be inaccurate. If the overall mesh is too fine, the
computational cost may become prohibitive. In summary, the cost and accuracy of the solution are
directly dependent on the quality of the mesh.
ANSYS Icepak automates the mesh generation procedure, but enables you to customize the meshing
parameters in order to refine the mesh and optimize trade-offs between computational cost and solution
accuracy. You can apply such modified parameters at a global level (affecting the entire computational
domain) or to specific modeling objects. This flexibility provides you with an efficient mesh generation
process that you can influence as much (or as little) as you want.
The meshing procedure that ANSYS Icepak follows is based on a set of rules that govern how each type
of object is to be meshed. ANSYS Icepak operates on a "cocooning" methodology whereby each object
Generating a Mesh
is meshed individually, as tightly as your specifications permit, in order to resolve the physics of the
solution optimally. In every case, optimal resolution of the physics depends on the specific problem to
be solved. The mesh elements are smaller near objects (as shown in Figure 35.1: Mesh with Small Elements
Near Objects and Large Elements in Open Spaces (p. 774)), to take into account thermal and velocity
gradients that are often present near the boundaries of an object. By contrast, the open spaces between
objects are meshed with large elements, to minimize computational costs.
Figure 35.1: Mesh with Small Elements Near Objects and Large Elements in Open Spaces
35.2. Mesh Quality and Type

This section describes:
35.2.1. Mesh Quality
35.2.2. Hex-Dominant and Hexahedral Meshes
35.2.1. Mesh Quality

As mentioned in Overview (p. 773), the quality of the mesh is one of the most critical aspects of a CFD
model. A good mesh is essential for a good solution. A good mesh requires proper resolution,
smoothness, low skewness, and an appropriate number of elements. The main requirements can be
summarized as follows:
• The mesh must be fine near objects where the gradients of temperature and velocity may be very large
(for example, heated blocks or plates, cabinet walls with nearby objects). See Figure 35.1: Mesh with Small
Elements Near Objects and Large Elements in Open Spaces (p. 774) for an example.
Mesh Quality and Type
• The expansion ratio from one mesh element to the next should be kept in the range between 2 and 5,
although in some critical areas a lower value might be better. The mesh in Figure 35.1: Mesh with Small
Elements Near Objects and Large Elements in Open Spaces (p. 774) shows good expansion ratios.
• An equilateral element (cube or equilateral tetrahedron) is optimal. Since it is generally not possible to
have only optimal elements, you should instead focus on maintaining a low aspect ratio and regular (not
skewed) shape for each element. This will reduce the number of long, thin elements and the number of
distorted elements, both of which can decrease accuracy and destabilize the solution. Figure 35.2: Elements
with Low and High Skew (p. 775) shows examples of elements with low and high skew.
Figure 35.2: Elements with Low and High Skew
• It is also possible to have non-conformal meshing in a certain region of the model to improve grid quality
and/or to reduce the mesh count. A bounding box can be applied to a certain region, and the mesh inside
this region need not match the mesh outside the region. See Particle Trace Attributes (p. 913) for more
information on particle traces.
• For an efficient calculation, the mesh should be coarser in areas where the gradients of velocity and
temperature are small. Since there are no small changes in flow behavior to be captured, it would be
wasteful to have a fine mesh in such regions. The cost of the calculation will be directly proportional to
the number of elements in the mesh, so it is best to concentrate the elements where you need them, and
reduce the number of elements elsewhere.
35.2.2. Hex-Dominant and Hexahedral Meshes

There are two types of meshers available in ANSYS Icepak: hex-dominant and hexahedral. The hex-
dominant mesher is the default mesher. Hex-dominant is a robust and highly automated unstructured
mesh generator that can handle grids of virtually unlimited size and complexity, consisting mostly of
hexahedral elements but including triangular or pyramidal cells. The hex-dominant mesher can do
everything the hexahedral mesher can do. It uses advanced meshing algorithms to allow the most
appropriate cell type to be used to generate body-fitted meshes for the most general CAD geometries.
The hexahedral unstructured mesher is widely used and an appropriate mesher. However, for geomet-
rically complicated models that include, for example, spherical or ellipsoidal objects, the hex-dominant
mesher (the default option) will generally produce a better mesh than the hexahedral mesher. In fact,
the hex-dominant mesher is required if your model includes CAD shaped objects, ellipsoids, elliptical
cylinders, or polygonal ducts.
Generating a Mesh
Additionally, an ANSYS Icepak hexahedral mesh can be generated as Cartesian or unstructured. The
hexahedral Cartesian mesher can create better quality cells for some simple problems, but may not
approximate geometry that is either curved or not aligned with the model axes, as well as the un-
structured hexahedral mesher. The Cartesian mesher will turn off O-grid type meshes around objects,
and will use stair-stepping to approximate inclined and curved faces.
It is generally recommended to use Mesher-HD for most applications. Additionally the mesh setup
(global or object based) is similar for the hexahedral and hex-dominant mesher except for the multi-
level meshing part. Hence, for information on the procedures for hex-dominant meshing, refer to
Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778).
35.3. Guidelines for Mesh Generation

For best results, mesh generation should be an iterative procedure. Guidelines for approaching mesh
generation are presented in this section, and specific instructions for the procedures mentioned here
are provided in the sections that follow. The hex-dominant meshing procedure is presented in Hex-
Dominant Meshing Procedure (p. 776). Similar procedures are also valid for the mesher that is detailed
in Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778).
• Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure (p. 776)
• Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778)
Note:
If an error occurs while generating mesh, additional information may be available in the
Message window.
35.3.1. Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure

The recommended approach to hex-dominant mesh generation is as follows:
1. Generate a mesh using ANSYS Icepak’s default parameters for a coarse mesh (see Creating a Minimum-
Count Hex-Dominant Mesh (p. 780)), using Mesher-HD. The resulting mesh (called the minimum-count
mesh) contains the minimum number of elements required to adequately represent the model geometry
and satisfy the default meshing rules.
You can compute an approximate solution on this initial mesh to determine quickly if the calculation
runs properly and the results seem reasonable, before proceeding to refine the mesh and compute
a more accurate solution. This initial calculation will also enable you to estimate the total compu-
tational cost.
2. Generate a refined mesh.
a. Set the Max X size, Max Y size and Max Z size values to about to about 1/20 of the cabinet dimensions.
b. Select the Normal mesh resolution.
c. Generate the mesh.
d. If the mesh is invalid, an error dialog box will be displayed indicating where the error occurred.
Guidelines for Mesh Generation
See Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh (p. 790) for details.
3. Examine the mesh, using plane cuts and diagnostics (as described in (as described in Displaying the
Mesh (p. 810) and Checking the Mesh (p. 819)), to see if it satisfies the following requirements:
• The number of elements between solid faces should be at least 2.
• There should be at least 4 or 5 elements on each flow object (openings, grilles, resistances, fans).
• The mesh quality should satisfy the requirements outlined in Mesh Quality and Type (p. 774).
4. If the mesh does not satisfy these requirements, use the object-specific meshing controls to refine the
mesh locally and improve the mesh quality. Suggestions are listed below:
• Refine the mesh around the objects where the temperature and velocity gradients are expected to
be high (for example, heated blocks and plates, objects blocking or diverting the flow, fans).
• If the element count on the face of an object is low, use the X, Y, or Z count (or the corresponding
parameter) to change it.
• Use high and low element size and ratio to refine the mesh around objects. You can also use the in-
ward/outward size and ratio to refine the mesh.
See Refining the Mesh Locally (p. 793) for details.
Additional options for improving the mesh are as follows:
• If your model includes a small number of objects, and the element count or spacing on all of them is
low, you can use the Init element height option to turn on O-grid cocooning and place graded ele-
ments on the faces of all objects. This option should be used only when the number of objects is not
too large; otherwise, the mesh count can become very large. See Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant
Mesh (p. 783) for details.
• In some cases, setting Max O-grid height to a small enough value relative to the object size will yield
better mesh quality by localizing the cocooning action of the mesher. Note the value of Max O-grid
height should be higher than that of Init element height, and that a value of 0 for Max O-grid height
leaves the O-grid height unbounded. See Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh (p. 783) for
details.
• Aligning faces that are nearly aligned (see Figure 35.4: Aligning Nearly-Aligned Faces (p. 779)) will
generally reduce the overall mesh size and result in better convergence (due to the improved aspect
ratio of the elements). You can align faces by modifying the coordinates of the appropriate object(s),
or by using the alignment tools (see The Object modification Toolbar (p. 91)).
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.3: Aligning Nearly-Aligned Faces
• Rectangular objects are generally easier to mesh than circular objects. In some cases, you may be able
to improve the mesh quality without affecting the solution by replacing circular objects (fans, openings,
and so on) with rectangular objects of the same type.
• You can use fluid blocks to refine or otherwise improve mesh locally. Unless you change their material
properties, fluid blocks do not alter the flow or temperature distribution inside the cabinet because
they are, by default, made of air, which is the material inside the rest of the cabinet as well.
5. Calculate a solution on the refined mesh.
6. For optimal accuracy, refine the mesh further, calculate a solution, and compare it with the solution for
the previous mesh. Repeat until the solution is grid-independent (that is, until it no longer changes with
each new mesh).
35.3.2. Hexahedral Meshing Procedure

The recommended approach to hexahedral mesh generation is as follows:
1. Generate a mesh using ANSYS Icepak’s default parameters for a coarse mesh (see Creating a Minimum-
Count Hexahedral Mesh (p. 782)), using the Hexa unstructured mesher. The resulting mesh (called the
minimum-count mesh) contains the minimum number of elements required to adequately represent
the model geometry and satisfy the default meshing rules.
You can compute an approximate solution on this initial mesh to determine quickly if the calculation
runs properly and the results seem reasonable, before proceeding to refine the mesh and compute
a more accurate solution. This initial calculation will also enable you to estimate the total compu-
tation cost.
2. Generate a refined mesh.
a. Set the Max X size, Max Y size, and Max Z size values to about 1/20 of the cabinet dimensions in
the corresponding directions.
b. Select the Normal mesh resolution.
c. Generate the mesh.
d. If the mesh is invalid, an error dialog box will be displayed indicating where the error occurred.
See Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh (p. 790) for details.
Guidelines for Mesh Generation
3. Examine the mesh, using plane cuts and diagnostics (as described in Displaying the Mesh (p. 810) and
Checking the Mesh (p. 819)), to see if it satisfies the following requirements:
• The number of elements between solid faces should be at least 2.
• There should be at least 4 or 5 elements on each flow object (openings, grilles, resistances, fans).
• The mesh quality should satisfy the requirements outlined in Mesh Quality and Type (p. 774).
4. If the mesh does not satisfy these requirements, use the object-specific meshing controls to refine the
mesh locally and improve the mesh quality. Suggestions are listed below:
• Refine the mesh around objects where the temperature and velocity gradients are expected to be
high (for example, heated blocks and plates, objects blocking or diverting the flow, fans).
• If the element count on the face of an object is low, use the X, Y, or Z count (or the corresponding
parameter) to change it.
• Use high and low element size and ratio to refine the mesh around objects. You can also use the in-
ward/outward size and ratio to refine the mesh.
See Refining the Mesh Locally (p. 793) for details.
Additional options for improving the mesh are as follows:
• If your model includes a small number of objects, and the element count or spacing on all of them is
low, you can use the Init element height option to turn on O-grid cocooning (Hexa unstructured
and Mesher-HD only) and place graded elements on the faces of all objects. This option should be
used only when the number of objects is not too large; otherwise, the mesh count can become very
large. See Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh (p. 790) for details.
• In some cases, setting the Max O-grid height to a small enough value relative to the object size will
yield better mesh quality by localizing the cocooning action of the mesher. Note that the value of Max
O-grid height should be higher than that of Init element height, and that a value of 0 for Max O-
grid height leaves the O-grid height unbounded. See Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh (p. 790)
for details.
• Aligning faces that are nearly aligned (see Figure 35.4: Aligning Nearly-Aligned Faces (p. 779)) will
generally reduce the overall mesh size and result in better convergence (due to the improved aspect
ratio of the elements). You can align faces by modifying the coordinates of the appropriate object(s),
or by using the alignment tools (see The Object modification Toolbar (p. 91)).
Figure 35.4: Aligning Nearly-Aligned Faces
Generating a Mesh
• Rectangular objects are generally easier to mesh than circular objects. In some cases, you may be able
to improve the mesh quality without affecting the solution by replacing circular objects (fans, openings,
and so on) with rectangular objects of the same type. For models with circular objects you may also
want to consider using the hex-dominant mesher described in Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure (p. 776)
instead of the hexahedral mesher.
• You can use fluid blocks to refine or otherwise improve the mesh locally. Unless you change their
material properties, fluid blocks do not alter the flow or temperature distribution inside the cabinet
because they are, by default, made of air, which is the material inside the rest of the cabinet as well.
5. Calculate a solution on the refined mesh.
6. For optimal accuracy, refine the mesh further, calculate a solution, and compare it with the solution for
the previous mesh. Repeat until the solution is grid-independent (that is, until it no longer changes with
each new mesh).
35.4. Creating a Minimum-Count Mesh

As discussed in Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure (p. 776) and Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778),
the minimum-count mesh is useful for computing an initial solution. ANSYS Icepak generates a minimum-
count mesh using the minimum number of elements necessary to represent the geometry and satisfy
the default meshing rules for the objects in your model.
35.4.1. Creating a Minimum-Count Hex-Dominant Mesh
35.4.2. Creating a Minimum-Count Hexahedral Mesh
35.4.1. Creating a Minimum-Count Hex-Dominant Mesh

The steps you should follow to create a minimum-count hex-dominant mesh for your model are listed
below:
1. Open the Mesh control panel (Figure 35.5: The Mesh control Panel for the Hex-Dominant Mesher (p. 781)),
or by clicking the button in the Model and solve toolbar.
Model Generate mesh
Creating a Minimum-Count Mesh
Figure 35.5: The Mesh control Panel for the Hex-Dominant Mesher
2. Click on the Settings tab (the default when the panel is opened for the first time) to access the controls
for mesh generation. Keep the default selection of Mesher-HD in the Mesh type drop-down list.
3. Select Coarse in the Mesh parameters drop-down list to update the panel with the default settings for
a coarse mesh.
4. Click Generate. ANSYS Icepak will generate the minimum-count mesh, which you can view as described
in Displaying the Mesh (p. 810).
As discussed in Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure (p. 776), you will generally want to refine the min-
imum-count mesh after computing an initial solution. ANSYS Icepak provides several parameters for
refining the mesh globally (that is, throughout the entire computational domain) and locally (that is,
on or near individual objects in the model). See Refining the Mesh Globally (p. 783) and Refining the
Mesh Locally (p. 793) for details.
Generating a Mesh
35.4.2. Creating a Minimum-Count Hexahedral Mesh

The steps you should follow to create a minimum-count hexahedral mesh for your model are listed
below:
1. Open the Mesh control panel (Figure 35.6: The Mesh control Panel for the Hexahedral Mesher (p. 782))
, or by clicking on the button in the Model and solve toolbar.
Model Generate mesh
Figure 35.6: The Mesh control Panel for the Hexahedral Mesher
2. Click on the Settings tab (the default when the panel is opened for the first time) to access the controls
for mesh generation. Select Hexa unstructured for the Mesh type.
3. Select Coarse in the Mesh parameters drop-down list to update the panel with the default settings for
a coarse mesh.
Refining the Mesh Globally
4. Click Generate. ANSYS Icepak will generate the minimum-count mesh, which you can view as described
in Displaying the Mesh (p. 810).
As discussed in Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778), you will generally want to refine the minimum-
count mesh after computing an initial solution. ANSYS Icepak provides several parameters for refining
the mesh globally (that is, throughout the entire computational domain) and locally (that is, on or
near individual objects in the model). See Refining the Mesh Globally (p. 783) and Refining the Mesh
Locally (p. 793) for details.
35.5. Refining the Mesh Globally

As discussed in Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure (p. 776) and Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778)
you will generally want to refine the minimum-count mesh after computing an initial solution. The steps
you should follow to refine the mesh globally (that is, throughout the entire computational domain)
are presented here for hex-dominant and hexahedral meshes. See Refining the Mesh Locally (p. 793) for
information about refining the mesh on or near individual objects in the model.
• Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh (p. 783)
• Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh (p. 790)
35.5.1. Global Refinement for a Hex-Dominant Mesh

The hex-dominant mesher (Mesher-HD) uses a domain decomposition approach for generating a
mesh for your Icepak model. During domain decomposition, objects are grouped into meshing blocks.
For each meshing block, Mesher-HD will automatically determine which meshing approach to use
based on the shapes of the objects. For brick and axis aligned cylindrical shapes, O-grid/block-structured
mesh is generated. For brick only shapes, a Cartesian mesh is generated. If the meshing block contains
bricks, axis-aligned cylinders, and uniform polygons with a well-defined extrusion direction, the 2D
cut cells approach is used.
In 2D cut cells, the shape outlines are projected onto a plane whose normal is aligned to the extrusion
axis. The mesh faces in the plane are projected and subdivided to recover mesh edges that conform
to the shape outline. The mesh cells are then generated by extruding the mesh faces on the plane
in the extrusion axis according to the “thickness” of each object. If multi-level meshing is enabled,
the mesh in the plane is first refined based on the size distribution computed using the proximity
and curvature size functions, and/or the mesh-levels that you specified for the objects. For meshing
blocks with shapes without any predefined axis (such as CAD objects), the 3D cut cells approach is
used.
In 3D cut cells, a Cartesian mesh is generated to fill the entire meshing block extents. As with 2D cut
cells, the Cartesian cells are projected onto the boundaries and feature lines of the shapes. The cells
are then decomposed to generate a shape-conformal mesh. If multi-level meshing is enabled, the
initial Cartesian mesh is refined according to the size requirements and per-object meshing level. If
stair-stepped meshing is enabled, the projection and decomposition steps are skipped and the resulting
mesh will be strictly Cartesian. You can control the behavior of Mesher-HD via the Mesh control
panel.
1. Open the Mesh control panel (Figure 35.5: The Mesh control Panel for the Hex-Dominant Mesher (p. 781))
by selecting Generate mesh in the Model menu, or by clicking on the button in the Model and
solve toolbar.
Generating a Mesh
Model Generate mesh
2. Click on the Settings tab to access the controls for mesh generation.
3. Select Mesher-HD in the Mesh type drop-down list.
4. Concurrency controls the number of assemblies (if meshed separately) that are meshed at the same
time when you click on Generate.... You can change the meshing concurrency to speed up the total
meshing time by meshing multiple assemblies concurrently, especially on multi-core computers.
5. Turn on the Max X size, Max Y size, and Max Z size specifications, and set each one to the desired
maximum element length in each direction. Typical values are about 1/20 of the cabinet dimensions in
6. In the Minimum gap section of the Settings tab, specify the minimum distances separating objects in
your model in the X, Y, and Z coordinate directions.
This specification is used by ANSYS Icepak whenever the distance between two objects is less
than this value, but greater than the model’s zero tolerance. If the minimum gap specified for any
of the three coordinate directions is more than the size of the smallest object in that coordinate
direction, ANSYS Icepak will display a Minimum separation warning. You can let ANSYS Icepak de-
termine the appropriate minimum gap by clicking Change value and mesh in the Minimum
separation warning panel.
7. In the Global tab, you can modify the default settings, which are defined as follows:
• Mesh parameters specify default settings based on Normal or Coarse. For most cases, you should
use the Normal setting, which will generate a mesh with an appropriate mesh resolution. If Coarse
is used, a mesh with a minimum resolution (smaller mesh count) will be generated.
• Min elems in gap specifies the minimum number of elements between adjacent objects.
• Min elems on edge specifies the minimum number of elements on each edge of each object.
• Max size ratio specifies the maximum ratio of the sizes of adjacent elements (for the whole model).
• No O-grids (Hexa unstructured mesher and Mesher-HD only) indicates whether or not objects will
have O-grids around them. This option is off by default, indicating that ANSYS Icepak will put O-grids
around all objects, including those that contain other objects.
• Allow stair-stepped meshing (Mesher-HD only) disables projection and decomposition during 3D
cut cell meshing. The boundary mesh will not be conformal and the resulting mesh will only approx-
imate the shapes of your geometries. Stair-stepped meshing should only be used if resolving the shape
of the geometry is not important. By default, stair-stepped meshing is disabled.
• Mesh assemblies separately indicates whether or not ANSYS Icepak should generate a non-conformal
mesh for the assemblies that have the Mesh separately option turned on. This option enables you
to turn off (or on) all defined non-conformal meshing for the entire model. See Non-Conformal
Meshing Procedures for Assemblies (p. 808) for more information on non-conformal meshing.
• Set uniform mesh params has two options: Use average and Keep XYZ max sizes. Use average
creates a uniform mesh with the same mesh size in all coordinate directions. The mesh size is computed
by averaging the specified max element sizes. Keep XYZ max sizes creates a uniform mesh in each
coordinate direction using the corresponding max element size. The resulting mesh has constant
spacing in each coordinate direction but the spacing can be different if the max element sizes are
different. Using uniform mesh params results in lower mesh count and improved quality. It is recom-
mended to use uniform meshing params when multi-level meshing is used. If this option is enabled
then 3D cut cells and stair step meshing ignores the object-0based params to keep the mesh uniform
and generates better quality meshes. To provide object-based control on meshing, meshing levels
can be used for the objects defined under Edit levels.
8. In the Local tab, you can enable Object params to assign object-specific meshing parameters. Click Edit
to display the Per-object meshing parameters panel. See Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Para-
meters (p. 795) for details.
9. In the Multi-level tab, you can modify the default settings, which are defined as follows:
• Allow multi-level meshing enables local refinement from a starting Cartesian mesh generated using
the max sizes you specified. Multi-level meshing is useful if you have a large variation of length scales
in your model. The refinement can be controlled such that the initial mesh is refined in an area where
the mesh needs to be finer in order to resolve some geometrical features or gaps. This will significantly
reduce the overall mesh count while providing adequate mesh resolution where it is needed. Multi-
level meshing applies to 2D and 3D cut cell as well as stair-stepped meshing.
• Max levels is the maximum number of levels that may be required to achieve the desired mesh refine-
ment based upon curvature/proximity. For a given coarse mesh the desired proximity/curvature based
refinement may be achieved even before reaching the max levels.
• Edit levels enables you to specify refinement levels for selected objects. Per-object meshing levels
can be used in conjunction with the max level and size functions.
During 3D cut cell meshing, the mesh is refined based on max level and size function require-
ments. If the per-object meshing level is specified for an object, the mesh around that object
will be refined to that level, even if the per-object meshing level is greater than the max level
you specified. This enables you to localize control of the mesh refinement process whereas the
use of size functions would have refined the mesh everywhere in your model where the size
requirement is not met.
When Enable per-object size function is enabled, the size functions (proximity and/or curvature)
are used to subdivide the mesh around the object up to the max level specified for the object.
When Enable per-object size function is disabled, the mesh is subdivided to the max-level
everywhere on the object.
To specify a per-object meshing level, you must enter a non-zero level for each object. If the
object meshing level is zero, the mesh around that object will be refined based on the max
level and size function specifications.
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.7: Multi-level meshing max levels
• Buffer layers is used in conjunction with multi-level meshing. The default value is zero, which means
refinement is not propagated to adjacent layers. When you set this value to a number greater than
zero, such as 1 or 2, refinement is propagated to additional mesh layers, which helps in generating
better meshes in the region of under-resolved geometry.
• Proximity size function if enabled, computes the closest distance at any point on an object to its
neighboring objects (including itself ). If no per object meshing level is specified, the mesh around that
object will be recursive refined until the mesh size is smaller than the closest distance or if the refine-
ment level has reached the max level you specified.
• Curvature size function if enabled, computes the radius of curvature at any point on an object. Sim-
ilar to the Proximity size function, if the per object meshing level is not specified, the mesh around
that point will be recursive refined until mesh size is smaller than the radius of curvature or if the re-
finement level has reached the max level you specified.
• Edit size regions enables you to specify a refinement size in a region. While the proximity and curvature
size functions allow you to control refinement of the mesh near the objects, the size region refinement
method allows you to refine a region defined by a bounding box anywhere in the domain. Multiple
size regions can be defined and the size region bounding boxes can overlap. The mesh in the overlapped
regions will be determined by the smallest size defined.
To define a size region, click on the Edit size regions button. Click on New to add a new size
region. You can change the dimension of the size region by changing the respective start and
end entries in the dimension frame. Use the Size entry to specify the maximum size in the region.
Click Accept to apply your changes. The geometry of the bounding box and the maximum size
you specified will be updated in the graphics window.
To delete a size region, select the region in the Regions list box and click on Delete button.
When you are done, click on Done to close the Mesh size regions panel.
Note:
Size regions are used only when 3D cut cell method is active.
Figure 35.8: Edit size regions panel
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.9: Mesh size region
10. Click Generate mesh. ANSYS Icepak will generate the globally refined mesh, which you can view as de-
scribed in Displaying the Mesh (p. 810).
Note:
If the global mesh has not changed, the mesh will not be regenerated.
11. In the Options tab, you can modify the default settings, which are defined as follows:
• Min elems on cyl face specifies the minimum number of elements on the circular face of a cylindrical
object (for example, a cylindrical block). If you consider the mesh around the cylinder to be box-like,
this is the minimum number of intervals on each edge of the box.
• Min elems on tri face specifies the minimum number of elements on the triangular face of an object
(for example, a polygonal block with a triangular face). If you consider the mesh around the triangle
to be box-like, this is the minimum number of intervals on each edge of the box.
• Max O-grid height (Hexa unstructured mesher and Mesher-HD only) specifies the distance of the
cocooning from the surface of the object (see Figure 35.11: O-Grid Height (p. 792)).
Figure 35.10: O-Grid Height
• (only for models with a small number of objects) To increase the number of elements on or near all
objects, and reduce the mesh spacing on or near all objects, turn on the Init element height option
and specify a value.
The Init element height specifies the maximum height of the first element layer generated on
the surface of any modeling object (for example, PCB, block, or fan). By default, ANSYS Icepak uses
its own internal rules to determine the height of the first element on the surface of an object
(the initial height).
Note:
This option should be used only when the number of objects is not too large;
otherwise, the mesh count can become very large.
• No group O-grids (Hexa unstructured mesher and Mesher-HD only) groups axis aligned cylindrical
objects if they are separated by a small gap to generate O-grids.
• Max elements specifies the maximum number of elements in the mesh.
12. In the Misc tab, you can modify the default settings, which are defined as follows:
• Allow min gap changes enables ANSYS Icepak to automatically set appropriate minimum gap values
without using the Minimum separation warning panel.
• Enforce 3D cut cell meshing for all objects is a meshing technique used to body-fit the mesh to
certain complicated shapes like CAD, ellipsoids, elliptical cylinders and intersecting cylinders. It is used
when Enable 2D Multi-Level Meshing option is switched on. When Enforce 3D cut cell meshing
Generating a Mesh
for all objects is switched on, all objects irrespective of their shapes will be meshed using this cut cell
technique.
• Optimize mesh in thickness direction for package and PCB geometries are applicable to the hex-
dominant mesher (Mesher-HD) only. When this option is on, the mesher will try to put single elements
in the thickness direction of each of the objects and/or gaps like solderballs, die, and so on that are
enclosed by a package or pcb except for trace heating layers (where more than one element may be
desired in the thickness direction).
• Enable 2D Multi-level Meshing (Mesher-HD only) starts with coarse background meshes and then
refines the mesh to resolve fine-level features. Lastly, a 3D cut-cell technique is used for fitting the
mesh. Multi-level meshing can be used with the stair-stepped meshing option or the uniform mesh
params option. It can be used on CAD objects, non-uniform polygons, spheres, ellipsoids and intersect-
ing cylinders.
– By default Anisotropic refinement enables you to refine the mesh in adapting to the geometry.
This option yields lower cell count but quality of cells may be affected depending on the geometry.
– In general Isotropic refinement enables you to refine the mesh regardless of the geometry. This
option yields higher cell count as compared to anisotropic refinement but quality of cells may be
better, as aspect ratio is maintained in 2D.
35.5.2. Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh

The procedure for globally refining a hexahedral mesh is as follows:
1. Open the Mesh control panel (Figure 35.6: The Mesh control Panel for the Hexahedral Mesher (p. 782))
by selecting Generate mesh in the Model menu, or by clicking on the button in the Model and
solve toolbar.
Model Generate mesh
2. Click on the Settings tab to access the controls for mesh generation.
3. Select Hexa unstructured in the Mesh type drop-down list.
4. Concurrency controls the number of assemblies (if meshed separately) that are meshed at the same
time when you click on Generate.... You can change the meshing concurrency to speed up the total
meshing time by meshing multiple assemblies concurrently, especially on multi-core computers.
5. Turn on the Max X size, Max Y size, and Max Z size specifications, and set each one to the desired
maximum element length in each direction. Typical values are about 1/20 of the cabinet dimensions in
6. In the Minimum gap section in the Settings tab, specify the minimum distances separating objects in
your model in the X, Y, and Z coordinate directions.
This specification is used by ANSYS Icepak whenever the distance between two objects is less
than this value, but greater than the model’s zero tolerance. If the minimum gap specified for any
of the three coordinate directions is more than the size of the smallest object in that coordinate
direction, ANSYS Icepak will display a Minimum separation warning. You can let ANSYS Icepak de-
termine the appropriate minimum gap by clicking the Change value and mesh in the Minimum
separation warning panel. You can choose to let ANSYS Icepak automatically set appropriate
minimum gap values without using the Minimum separation warning panel by selecting Allow
minimum gap changes in the Misc tab.
7. In the Global tab, you can modify the default settings, which are defined as follows:
• Mesh parameters specify default settings based on Normal or Coarse. For most cases, you should
use the Normal setting, which will generate a mesh with an appropriate mesh resolution. If Coarse
is used, a mesh with a minimum resolution (smaller mesh count) will be generated.
• Min elems in gap specifies the minimum number of elements between adjacent objects.
• Min elems on edge specifies the minimum number of elements on each edge of each object.
• Max size ratio specifies the maximum ratio of the sizes of adjacent elements (for the whole model).
• No O-grids (Hexa unstructured mesher only) indicates whether or not objects will have O-grids
around them. This option is off by default, indicating that ANSYS Icepak will put O-grids around all
objects, including those that contain other objects.
• Mesh assemblies separately indicates whether or not ANSYS Icepak should generate a non-conformal
mesh for the assemblies that have the Mesh separately option turned on. This option enables you
to turn off (or on) all defined non-conformal meshing for the entire model. See Non-Conformal
Meshing Procedures for Assemblies (p. 808) for more information on non-conformal meshing.
8. In the Local tab, Object params is used to assign object-specific meshing parameters. Click Edit to display
the Per-object meshing parameters panel. See Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters (p. 795)
for details.
9. In the Options tab, you can modify the default settings, which are defined as follows:
• Min elems on cyl face specifies the minimum number of elements on the circular face of a cylindrical
object (such as a cylindrical block). If you consider the mesh around the cylinder to be box-like, this is
the minimum number of intervals on each edge of the box.
• Min elems on tri face specifies the minimum number of elements on the triangular face of an object
(for example, a polygonal block with a triangular face). If you consider the mesh around the triangle
to be box-like, this is the minimum number of intervals on each edge of the box.
• Max O-grid height (Hexa unstructured mesher only) specifies the distance of the cocooning from
the surface of the object (see Figure 35.11: O-Grid Height (p. 792)).
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.11: O-Grid Height
• (only for models with a small number of objects) To increase the number of elements on or near all
objects, and reduce the mesh spacing on or near all objects, turn on the Init element height option
in the Options tab and specify a value.
The Init element height specifies the maximum height of the first element layer generated on
the surface of any modeling object (for example, PCB, block, or fan). By default, ANSYS Icepak uses
its own internal rules to determine the height of the first element on the surface of an object
(the initial height).
Note:
This option should be used only when the number of objects is not too large;
otherwise, the mesh count can become very large.
• No group O-grids (Hexa unstructured mesher only) indicates whether or not objects with other
objects inside them (for example, an enclosure that has blocks inside it) will have O-grids around them.
This option is off by default, indicating that ANSYS Icepak will put O-grids around all objects, including
those that contain other objects.
• Max elements specifies the maximum number of elements in the mesh.
10. In the Misc tab, Allow min gap changes enables ANSYS Icepak to automatically set appropriate minimum
gap values without using the Minimum separation warning panel.
Refining the Mesh Locally
11. Click Generate mesh. ANSYS Icepak will generate the globally refined mesh, which you can view as de-
scribed in Displaying the Mesh (p. 810).
Note:
If the global mesh has not changed, the mesh will not be regenerated.
35.6. Refining the Mesh Locally

As discussed in Hex-Dominant Meshing Procedure (p. 776) and Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778),
you will generally want to refine the minimum-count mesh after computing an initial solution. Steps
for refining the mesh locally (that is, on or near individual objects in the model) are presented in this
section. See Refining the Mesh Globally (p. 783) for information about refining the mesh throughout the
entire computational domain.
35.6.2. Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters
35.6.3. Defining Meshing Parameters for Multiple Objects
35.6.4. Meshing Parameters for Cabinets
35.6.5. Meshing Parameters for Blocks
35.6.6. Meshing Parameters for Enclosures
35.6.7. Meshing Parameters for Fans
35.6.8. Meshing Parameters for Blowers
35.6.9. Meshing Parameters for Grilles
35.6.10. Meshing Parameters for Heat Exchangers
35.6.11. Meshing Parameters for Heat Sink Objects
35.6.12. Meshing Parameters for Networks
35.6.13. Meshing Parameters for Openings
35.6.14. Meshing Parameters for Packages
35.6.15. Meshing Parameters for PCBs
35.6.16. Meshing Parameters for Plates
35.6.17. Meshing Parameters for Resistances
35.6.18. Meshing Parameters for Sources
35.6.19. Meshing Parameters for Traces
35.6.20. Meshing Parameters for Walls
35.6.21. Meshing Parameters for Assemblies

The general procedure for performing local mesh refinement is the same for hex-dominant and
hexahedral meshes; only the object-specific parameters differ between mesh types. The steps you
should follow to refine the mesh locally are listed below:
Generating a Mesh
1. Open the Mesh control panel (Figure 35.5: The Mesh control Panel for the Hex-Dominant Mesher (p. 781)
or Figure 35.6: The Mesh control Panel for the Hexahedral Mesher (p. 782) by selecting Generate mesh
in the Model menu, or by clicking on the button in the Model and solve toolbar).
Model Generate mesh
2. Click on the Settings tab at the top of the panel to access the controls for mesh generation.
3. Select the appropriate Mesh type (Mesher-HD, Hexa unstructured or Hexa cartesian) in the drop-
down list.
4. Turn on the Object params option in the Local tab and click the Edit button beside it to open the Per-
object meshing parameters panel (Figure 35.12: The Per-object meshing parameters Panel (p. 794)),
which enables you to define meshing parameters specific to each object in the model.
Figure 35.12: The Per-object meshing parameters Panel
If you want to turn off the use of object-specific meshing parameters you can click the Disable
all button.
5. (optional) To create a separate mesh region around a specific object, select the object in the project tree
and enable Mesh object separately.
6. To define meshing parameters for an object, select the object in the tree in the Per-object meshing
parameters panel, and turn on the Use per-object parameters option. This will enable you to set the
object’s meshing parameters. The parameters for each type of object are described in Meshing Parameters
for Cabinets (p. 796) -- Meshing Parameters for Walls (p. 805). To specify a meshing parameter, turn on the
option, and then enter the desired value under Requested. (If you have already generated a mesh, the
values for the current mesh will appear under Actual.)
7. After you have set all of the desired object-specific meshing parameters, click Done in the Per-object
meshing parameters panel and then return to the Mesh control panel and click Generate mesh. ANSYS
Icepak will generate the locally refined mesh, which you can view as described in Displaying the
Mesh (p. 810).
35.6.2. Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters

The following types of object-specific meshing parameters are used in ANSYS Icepak:
• The element count is the number of divisions into which an edge is subdivided (that is, the number of
elements that lie along the edge). Counts can be associated with the edges of an object.
• The initial element height is the height of the first element on the surface of an object in the direction
normal to that surface, pointing outside of the object.
• The inward height is the height of the first element on the surface of an object in the direction normal to
that surface, pointing inside of the object.
• The element height ratio is the ratio of the height of a given element to the height of an adjacent element
in the row one level nearer to the object, on the outside of the object. Together with the initial element
height, this parameter controls mesh grading and density in the region near the surface of a modeling
object, on the outside of the object.
• The inward ratio is the ratio of the height of a given element to the height of an adjacent element in the
row one level nearer to the object, on the inside of the object. Together with the initial element height,
this parameter controls mesh grading and density in the region near the surface of a modeling object, on
the inside of the object.
• Planar surfaces and objects are considered to have high and low ends. Such surfaces and objects
(unless they are inclined) are always aligned with a coordinate plane and normal to one of the coordinate
directions. If, for example, a surface lies in the x-y plane, the z axis is normal to the plane. The high side of
a plane or object is the side for which the normal points in the direction of increasing coordinate value.
The low side is the side for which the normal points in the direction of decreasing coordinate value. Fig-
ure 35.13: High- and Low-Side Surface Definition (p. 795) shows an example of high- and low-side surface
definitions for two surfaces aligned with the x-z and y-z planes.
Figure 35.13: High- and Low-Side Surface Definition
Generating a Mesh
Note that you will specify meshing parameters for each separate object in an assembly, accessed by
expanding the assembly tree node in the Model manager window. By contrast, you will specify
parameters for separate meshing of each assembly that you create, if you want to use non-conformal
meshing. See Mesh Quality and Type (p. 774) for more information about non-conformal meshing,
and Non-Conformal Meshing Procedures for Assemblies (p. 808) for information on the procedure to
set up non-conformal meshing around assemblies.
35.6.3. Defining Meshing Parameters for Multiple Objects

If you have two or more objects of the same type and shape (for example, two prism blocks), you
can assign object-specific meshing parameters to all of them at the same time in the Per-object
mesh parameters panel. To accomplish this, hold down the Control key, and click the left mouse
button on the name of each of the objects for which you want to use the same meshing parameters.
When you then set the desired meshing parameters, they will apply to all selected objects.
Note that you can define the same meshing parameters only for objects of the same type and shape.
You cannot, for example, define the same meshing parameters for a prism block and a cylinder block.
Similarly, you cannot define the same meshing parameters for a circular fan and a circular grille.
35.6.4. Meshing Parameters for Cabinets

The meshing parameters for a cabinet, shown in Figure 35.14: The Meshing Parameters Available for
a Cabinet (p. 796) for a hexahedral mesh, are as follows:
Figure 35.14: The Meshing Parameters Available for a Cabinet
• For hexahedral and hex-dominant meshes:
– Initial element heights in the inward direction from each of the six surfaces that make up the cabinet
boundaries (Low X height, Low Y height, Low Z height, High X height, High Y height, High Z height).
See Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters (p. 795) for definitions of the high and low sides.
• For hexahedral and hex-dominant meshes only:
– Element height ratios in the inward direction from each of the six surfaces that make up the cabinet
boundaries (Low X ratio, Low Y ratio, Low Z ratio, High X ratio, High Y ratio, High Z ratio). See
Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters (p. 795) for an explanation of the element height ratio.
35.6.5. Meshing Parameters for Blocks

The meshing parameters for a block are described separately for each block shape.
• Prism Blocks (p. 797)
• Cylinder Blocks (p. 798)
• 3D Polygon Blocks (p. 798)
• Ellipsoid Blocks (p. 799)
Prism Blocks
The meshing parameters for a prism block, shown in Figure 35.15: The Meshing Parameters Available
for a Block (p. 797) for a hexahedral mesh, are as follows:
Figure 35.15: The Meshing Parameters Available for a Block
Generating a Mesh
– Initial element heights in the outward direction from each of the six surfaces of the block (Low X height,
Low Y height, Low Z height, High X height, High Y height, High Z height). See Definitions of Object-
Specific Meshing Parameters (p. 795) for definitions of the high and low sides.
– Number of elements in each direction on the block’s edges (X count, Y count, Z count).
– Element height ratios in the outward direction from each of the six surfaces of the block (Low X ratio,
Low Y ratio, Low Z ratio, High X ratio, High Y ratio, High Z ratio). See Definitions of Object-Specific
Meshing Parameters (p. 795) for an explanation of the element height ratio.
– Initial element height in the inward direction from the surfaces of the block (Inward height).
– Initial element height ratio in the inward direction from the surfaces of the block (Inward ratio).
Cylinder Blocks
The meshing parameters for a cylinder block are as follows:
– Initial element heights in the outward direction from the bottom circular surface (Low end height) and
the top circular surface (High end height).
– Initial element height in the outward direction from the block’s cylindrical side surface (Side height).
– Number of elements along the diameter of the circular surfaces (Diameter count) and along the side
of the cylinder (Side count).
– Initial element height in the inward direction from the cylindrical side surface (Inward height).
– Element height ratios in the outward direction from the bottom circular surface (Low end ratio) and
the top circular surface (High end ratio).
– Element height ratios in the outward direction from the block’s cylindrical side surface (Side ratio) and
in the inward direction from the cylindrical side surface (Inward ratio).
3D Polygon Blocks
The meshing parameters for a 3D polygon block are as follows:
• Number of elements along each side of the block (Side 1 count, Side 2 count, and so on) and along the
height of the block (Height count).
• Initial element heights in the outward direction from each side of the block (Side 1 height, Side 2 height,
and so on) and from the bottom and top surfaces of the block (Bottom height, Top height).
• Element height ratios in the outward direction from each side of the block (Side 1 ratio, Side 2 ratio, and
so on) and from the bottom and top surfaces of the block (Bottom ratio, Top ratio).
Ellipsoid Blocks
The meshing parameters for an ellipsoid block are as follows:
• For hex-dominant meshes only:
– Initial element heights in the outward direction from the curved surface of the block (Curved surface
size).
– Initial element heights in the outward direction from the flat surfaces of the ellipsoid block that appear
if you deactivate one or more octants of the block (Flat (internal) surface size).
Note:
Ellipsoidal blocks cannot be meshed with the hexahedral mesher.
Elliptical Cylinder Blocks
Note:
It is recommended that you use mesher-HD when your model contains elliptical cyl-
inder blocks.
35.6.6. Meshing Parameters for Enclosures

The meshing parameters for an enclosure are as follows:
– Size for elements in the Cartesian directions (X element size, Y element size, Z element size).
– Initial element height of the first element next to the enclosure (Element height).
– Element height ratio in the direction normal to the enclosure (Element ratio).
35.6.7. Meshing Parameters for Fans

The meshing parameters for a rectangular or circular 3D fan are as follows:
• Number of elements along the edges of the fan (Casing X element count, Casing Y element count,
Casing Z element count).
• Number of elements along the diameter of the fan (Fan Diameter count).
• Number of elements along the diameter of the hub (Hub Diameter count).
• Initial element height of the first element next to the fan (Element height).
• Element height ratio in the direction normal to the fan (Element ratio).
Generating a Mesh
The meshing parameters for a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined fan are the same as for
a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined grille. See Meshing Parameters for Grilles (p. 801) for
details.
Note that the following meshing parameters are also available for a circular fan:
• For hexahedral and hex-dominant meshes only, and 2D circular fans only:
– Number of elements along the diameter of the fan (Diameter count).
– Initial element heights in the direction normal to the fan (Low end height, High end height). See
Definitions of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters (p. 795) for definitions of the high and low sides.
If the fan is on an external wall, only the appropriate high or low side facing the interior of the
cabinet is applicable.
– Initial element heights in the inward direction (Inward height), measured from the outer radius.
– Initial element heights in the outward direction (Outward height), measured from the inner radius.
If the inner radius of the fan is zero, the Outward height is not applicable.
– Element height ratios in the direction normal to the fan (Low end ratio, High end ratio). See Definitions
of Object-Specific Meshing Parameters (p. 795) for definitions of the high and low sides.
If the fan is on an external wall, only the appropriate high or low side facing the interior of the
– Element height ratios in the inward direction (Inward ratio), measured from the outer radius.
– Element height ratios in the outward direction (Outward ratio), measured from the inner radius.
If the inner radius of the fan is zero, the Outward ratio is not applicable.
35.6.8. Meshing Parameters for Blowers

The meshing parameters for a blower are described separately for each blower type.
Impellers
The meshing parameters for a type 1 blower, or impeller, are as follows:
• Number of elements along the diameter of the circular surfaces (Casing diameter count) and along the
side of the blower (Casing side count).
• Initial element height of the first element next to the blower (Element height).
• Element height ratio in the direction normal to the blower (Element ratio).
Centrifugal Blowers
The meshing parameters for a type 2 blower, or centrifugal blower, are as follows:
• Number of elements along the edges of the blower (Casing X element count, Casing Y element count,
Casing Z element count).
• Initial element height of the first element next to the blower (Element height).
• Element height ratio in the direction normal to the blower (Element ratio).
35.6.9. Meshing Parameters for Grilles

The meshing parameters for a grille are described separately for each grille shape.
Circular Grilles
The meshing parameters for a circular grille, shown in Figure 35.16: The Meshing Parameters Available
for a Circular Grille (p. 801) for a hexahedral mesh, are as follows:
Figure 35.16: The Meshing Parameters Available for a Circular Grille
– Number of elements along the diameter of the grille (Diameter count).
– Initial element heights in the direction normal to the grille (Low end height, High end height). See
If the grille is on an external wall, only the appropriate high or low side facing the interior of the
– Initial element heights in the inward direction (Inward height), measured from the outer radius.
– Element height ratios in the direction normal to the grille (Low end ratio, High end ratio). See Definitions
– Element height ratios in the inward direction (Inward ratio), measured from the outer radius.
Generating a Mesh
Rectangular Grilles
The meshing parameters for a rectangular grille are as follows:
– Number of elements along the edges of the grille (X count, Y count; Y count, Z count; or X count, Z
count; depending on the plane in which the grille lies).
– Initial element height in the inward direction (Inward height) for both coordinate directions on the
surface of the grille.
– Element height ratios in the inward direction (Inward ratio) for both coordinate directions on the surface
of the grille.
Note:
Only two of the three parameters (number of elements, inward height, and inward
ratio) can be specified for any coordinate direction. The third parameter is determ-
ined from the other two.
Inclined Grilles
The meshing parameters for an inclined grille are as follows:
– Number of elements in the coordinate direction along which the grille is inclined (X count, Y count, or
Z count), and in the other two directions (Y-Z count, X-Z count, or X-Y count).
2D Polygon Grilles
The meshing parameters for a 2D polygon grille are as follows:
• For hexahedral, and hex-dominant meshes:
– Number of elements along each side of the grille (Side 1 count, Side 2 count, and so on).
– Initial element heights in the outward direction from the bottom and top surfaces of the grille (Bottom
height, Top height).
– Element height ratios in the outward direction from the bottom and top surfaces of the grille (Bottom
ratio, Top ratio).
35.6.10. Meshing Parameters for Heat Exchangers

The meshing parameters for a rectangular, circular, inclined, or 2D polygon heat exchanger are the
same as for a rectangular, circular, inclined, or 2D polygon grille. See Meshing Parameters for
Grilles (p. 801) for details.
35.6.11. Meshing Parameters for Heat Sink Objects

The meshing parameters for the base of a heat sink object are as follows:
• Number of elements along the edges of the base of the heat sink (Base X element count, Base Y element
count, Base Z element count).
• Initial element height of the first element next to the base, on all sides of the base (Base element height).
• Initial element ratio to be used in conjunction with the initial element height (Base element ratio).
The meshing parameters for the volume that models flow resistance due to the presence of the fins
or pins for a simplified heat sink object are as follows:
• Number of elements along the edges of the volume that models flow resistance for the heat sink (Pins X
element count, Pins Y element count, Pins Z element count).
• Minimum number of cells between the fins or pins (Cells between pins).
• Initial element height of the first element next to the pins, on all sides of the pins (Pins element height).
• Initial element ratio to be used in conjunction with the initial element height (Pins element ratio).
The meshing parameters for the fins or pins of a detailed heat sink object are the same as for the
volume that models flow resistance due to the presence of the fins or pins for a simplified heat sink
object.
35.6.12. Meshing Parameters for Networks

The meshing parameters for a network face are the same as for a rectangular grille. See Meshing
Parameters for Grilles (p. 801) for details.
35.6.13. Meshing Parameters for Openings

The meshing parameters for a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined opening are the same as
for a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined grille. See Meshing Parameters for Grilles (p. 801)
Generating a Mesh
for details. For Recirc openings, you can set parameters for Extract and Supply shapes by expanding
the opening in the model tree in the Per-object params panel.
Figure 35.17: The Per-object meshing parameters Panel (Recirc Openings)
35.6.14. Meshing Parameters for Packages

The meshing parameters for packages are the same as for enclosures. See Meshing Parameters for
Enclosures (p. 799) for details.
35.6.15. Meshing Parameters for PCBs

The meshing parameters for PCBs are the same as for enclosures. See Meshing Parameters for Enclos-
ures (p. 799) for details.
35.6.16. Meshing Parameters for Plates

The meshing parameters for a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined plate are the same as for
a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined grille. See Meshing Parameters for Grilles (p. 801) for
details.
Note that you can specify the number of elements in the direction of the plate thickness using Inward
height, or Thickness count for an inclined plate. If the plate has a zero thickness, this parameter is
not applicable.
35.6.17. Meshing Parameters for Resistances

The meshing parameters for a prism, cylinder, or polygon resistance are the same as for a prism, cyl-
inder, or polygon block. See Meshing Parameters for Blocks (p. 797) for details.
35.6.18. Meshing Parameters for Sources

The meshing parameters for a prism, cylinder, ellipsoid, or elliptical cylinder source are the same as
for a prism, cylinder, ellipsoid, or elliptical cylinder block. See Meshing Parameters for Blocks (p. 797)
for details.
The meshing parameters for a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined source are the same as
for a rectangular, circular, 2D polygon, or inclined grille. See Meshing Parameters for Grilles (p. 801)
for details.
35.6.19. Meshing Parameters for Traces

The meshing parameters for a trace can be described separately for each trace geometry. The general
recommendations are as follows:
• Mesher-HD is recommended.
• Enclose trace block objects in a non-conformal assembly.
• Use appropriate mesh sizes and minimum gap values.
35.6.20. Meshing Parameters for Walls

The meshing parameters for a wall are described separately for each wall shape.
Rectangular Walls
The meshing parameters for a rectangular wall, shown in Figure 35.18: The Meshing Parameters
Available for a Wall (p. 805) for a hexahedral mesh, are as follows:
Figure 35.18: The Meshing Parameters Available for a Wall
Generating a Mesh
– Number of elements along the edges of the wall (X count, Y count; Y count, Z count; or X count, Z
count; depending on the plane in which the wall lies).
– Initial element height in the direction normal to the wall (Element height).
– Initial element height in the inward direction (Inward height) for both coordinate directions on the
surface of the wall.
– Element height ratio in the direction normal to the wall (Element ratio).
– Element height ratio in the inward direction (Inward ratio) for both coordinate directions on the surface
of the wall.
Note:
Only two of the three parameters (number of elements, inward height, and inward
ratio) can be specified for any coordinate direction. The third parameter is determ-
ined from the other two.
Circular, 2D Polygon, and Inclined Walls

The meshing parameters for a circular, 2D polygon, or inclined wall are the same as for a circular, 2D
polygon, or inclined grille, except no distinction is made between low and high end (side) for a wall.
See Meshing Parameters for Grilles (p. 801) for details.
35.6.21. Meshing Parameters for Assemblies

The meshing parameters for the bounding box of an assembly are essentially a combination of the
per-object parameters for a hollow block and a cabinet, and are available only for hexahedral meshes.
The external meshing parameters for an assembly begin with Outside and are the same as those for
a hollow block (see Meshing Parameters for Blocks (p. 797)), with the exception that the inward height
and inward ratio are not applicable. The internal meshing parameters begin with Inside, and are the
same as those for a cabinet (see Meshing Parameters for Cabinets (p. 796)), with the addition of Inside
X max size, Inside Y max size, and Inside Z max size. These three parameters are similar to the
global maximum size parameters (that is, Max X size, Max Y size, Max Z size) for the entire ANSYS
Icepak model (see Global Refinement for a Hexahedral Mesh (p. 790)), except that they apply to the
interior of the assembly bounding box.
35.7. Reusing Mesh

By default, mesh is created for all objects in the model each time it is generated. You can reuse mesh
for specific objects or shapes if a mesh has been generated for them previously in a different project.
The supported mesh file types are the Icepak grid_output file or a Fluent .msh file.
On the Mesh control panel Local tab, enable Object params and click Edit mesh reuse to open the
Per-object mesh reuse panel.
Reusing Mesh
Figure 35.19: The Per-object mesh reuse Panel
1. Click Add to create an entry for mesh reuse.
2. In the Object drop-down list, select the object or shape for which you have previously generated mesh.
3. Click Browse and nagivate to the mesh file that contains the mesh for that select object or shape.
Note:
Click the Delete button ( ) to remove an entry.
4. In the Sort mesh by drop-down list, select Cells or Zones.
• Cells: Elements in the imported mesh file(s) are not presorted into groups. Sorting of elements to Icepak
objects is done element-by-element.
• Zones: Elements in the imported mesh file(s) are presorted into groups/zones that correspond to Icepak
objects. Sorting of elements is done zone-by-zone.
Note:
Sorting by Zones results in a faster meshing process, reducing the overall meshing
time.
5. Click Done when you have finished creating entries for mesh reuse.
When you generate the mesh, mesh from the selected mesh files is used in your project.
Generating a Mesh
35.8. Controlling the Meshing Order for Objects

By default, objects are meshed in the order in which they were created. If two or more objects intersect,
meshing the objects in the creation order may not give the result that you want. For such cases, you
can modify the meshing order by changing the object priorities for the intersecting objects. The object
with a higher priority (higher number) will retain the mesh where it intersects with an object with a
lower priority.
To modify the meshing priorities, select Edit priorities in the Model menu.
Model Edit priorities
This will open the Object priority panel (Figure 35.20: The Object priority Panel (p. 808)), which enables
you to change the meshing order of the objects that have been created. Assembly objects can be in-
cluded as well, simply click the check box next to Include assemblies to add them to the list. Then
double-click the Priority field and edit the priorities as required. Click on the Reset button to undo all
your changes and restore the object priorities to their currently saved values. After updating the panel,
click Accept to save the new meshing order. You can also change the priorities by dragging an object
up or down in the Model manager window.
Figure 35.20: The Object priority Panel
35.9. Non-Conformal Meshing Procedures for Assemblies

In ANSYS Icepak, assemblies of objects can be meshed separately. A region can be defined around a
particular assembly and this region can be meshed independently of the mesh outside it. At the interface
with the main model, there is a many-to-one transition between the mesh cells inside the region and
those outside it, and a non-conformal interface is created at the boundary between the meshes. This
allows for the embedding of a fine mesh within the sub-region around an assembly where it is needed,
and for a coarse mesh in the rest of the model. To use non-conformal meshing for assemblies, you will
use the following procedure:
1. Right-click on the assembly in the Model manager and select Edit object from the context menu.
Non-Conformal Meshing Procedures for Assemblies
2. In the Meshing tab of the Assemblies panel, turn on the Mesh separately option.
3. If required, add a "slack" region around the assembly.
a. Under Slack settings, enter the desired offset distances in the Min X, Y, Z and Max X, Y, Z directions.
Positive values prescribe a slack region toward the exterior of the assembly.
By default, the bounding box of the assembly has the exact extent necessary to enclose the objects
that make the assembly. Defining a slack region enables you to make the bounding box slightly
larger. This will make it possible to mesh more assemblies separately. Defining a non-zero slack
value is recommended but not necessary. It is recommended that the boundary box not touch a
CAD object except when the CAD surface is located on the boundary of the computational domain.
Where a foreign object crosses the bounding box of an assembly, the non-conformal interface will
cross through that object. See Editing Properties of an Assembly (p. 359) for more details on specifying
the slack distance around the bounding box of the assembly.
Note:
If slack values are defined as zero, ensure the assembly boundary does not touch 2D
objects like conducting thin plates, sides of network objects and network blocks.
Note:
If radiation for a side is specified, it is essential that the side does not touch the interface
of the assembly with zero slack.
Note:
If the cabinet type is set as NONE and if there is a symmetry wall at the boundary, then
the non-conformal interface can't touch the boundary wall.
Multiple assemblies can be meshed separately provided that:
• Assemblies are not partially embedded within one another (that is, the bounding box of one assembly
cannot intersect the bounding box of another assembly).
• For assemblies that are completely embedded within one another, there cannot be a common interface
where the slack values of any of the touching assemblies are defined as zero. Assemblies with zero slack
values can touch externally at a common interface.
4. If required, specify the Minimum gap that separates objects in the assembly. See Editing Properties of an
Assembly (p. 359) for more details on specifying the Minimum gap.
5. If required, specify the Mesh type to mesh the objects in the assembly. See Editing Properties of an As-
sembly (p. 359) for more details on specifying the Mesh type.
6. In the Mesh control panel, turn on the Mesh assemblies separately option.
Generating a Mesh
Note that the hexa-unstructured, hexa-cartesian and hex-dominant meshers can be used to mesh
assemblies separately, using non-conformal meshing. See Hexahedral Meshing Procedure (p. 778)
for more information on hexahedral meshing in ANSYS Icepak.
Note:
When the meshing procedure has been completed, any assembly that has been meshed
separately from the rest of the model will have its name displayed in a different color (default
is pink) in the Model manager window.
35.10. Displaying the Mesh

Once you have generated a mesh, you can examine it to determine if it meets your needs. ANSYS Ice-
pak provides tools for viewing the mesh on individual objects, as well as on cross-sectional planes that
extend throughout the cabinet.
35.10.1. Displaying the Mesh on Individual Objects
35.10.2. Displaying the Mesh on a Cross-Section of the Model
35.10.1. Displaying the Mesh on Individual Objects

The procedure for displaying the mesh on the surfaces or edges of objects or inside volumetric objects
is as follows:
1. Open the Mesh control panel by selecting Generate mesh in the Model menu, or by clicking on the
button in the Model and solve toolbar.
Model Generate mesh
2. Click on the Display tab to show the mesh display tools (see Figure 35.21: The Display Tab of the Mesh
control Panel (p. 811)).
Displaying the Mesh
Figure 35.21: The Display Tab of the Mesh control Panel
3. Select one or more of the following display options:
• Choose Surface to display the mesh on the exterior faces of objects. An example is shown in Fig-
ure 35.22: Display of Surface Elements (p. 812).
• Choose Volume to display the mesh inside volumetric objects (for example, cylinder blocks, prism
resistances). An example is shown in Figure 35.23: Display of Volume Elements (p. 813).
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.22: Display of Surface Elements
Displaying the Mesh
Figure 35.23: Display of Volume Elements
• Choose Cut plane to define the plane on which to display the mesh, using one of four methods. See
Displaying the Mesh on a Cross-Section of the Model (p. 815) for a description of these methods.
4. The generated surface mesh lines will be displayed on an object when the Wire option is on. The Wire
option is on by default and will appear as shown in Figure 35.22: Display of Surface Elements (p. 812). If
you want to color fill the generated surface mesh display on an object, use the Solid fill (object) option
or to fill a cut plane mesh, use the Solid fill (plane) option. When a Solid fill option is on, the solid and
wire shading object or plane mesh will appear as shown in Figure 35.24: Solid Display with Mesh
Lines (p. 814). When a Solid fill option is on and the Wire option is off, the generated object or plane
mesh will appear as shown in Figure 35.25: Solid Display without Mesh Lines (p. 814).
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.24: Solid Display with Mesh Lines
Figure 35.25: Solid Display without Mesh Lines
5. Specify the surface/volume for which you want to display the mesh:
• Choose All to display the mesh on all objects in the model.
Displaying the Mesh
• Choose Selected object to display the mesh only on the objects that are currently selected in the
Model manager window. You can select the object either in the graphics window or in the Model
manager window.
• Choose Selected shape to display the mesh only on objects of the shape currently selected in the
Model manager window. For example, if a rectangular plate is selected, the mesh will be displayed
only on 2D rectangular objects (for example, rectangular grille, rectangular fan, and so on).
• Choose Restrict to plane to only display object mesh faces and/or cells intersected by the plane.
• Choose Color by object to display object mesh faces and/or cells using the object color. Otherwise,
the mesh faces will be shown using the Surface mesh color and the mesh cells will be shown using
the Volume mesh color.
• Turn on the Display mesh option. You can change the color of the mesh on objects by clicking on
the colored box next to the Surface mesh color option and then choosing a color from the palette.
Note:
The generated surface mesh lines will change to either black or white depending on
the color applied as fill color. When only the Wire option is applied, the surface mesh
color option chosen is applied to generate surface mesh lines.
35.10.2. Displaying the Mesh on a Cross-Section of the Model

In addition to displaying the mesh on individual objects, as described in Displaying the Mesh on In-
dividual Objects (p. 810), you can also display the mesh on the intersection of a plane with the model
(that is, on a cross-section of the model). An example is shown in Figure 35.26: Mesh Display on a
Cross-Sectional Plane (p. 816).
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.26: Mesh Display on a Cross-Sectional Plane
The procedure for displaying the mesh on a cross-sectional plane is as follows:
1. Open the Mesh control panel by selecting Generate mesh in the Model menu, or by clicking on the
Model Generate mesh
2. Click on the Display tab to show the mesh display tools (see Figure 35.21: The Display Tab of the Mesh
control Panel (p. 811)).
3. Choose the Cut plane options.
• The radio buttons All, Solids only and Fluids only can be used to restrict the location of the plane
cut. Select All to generate a plane cut for the entire model. Select Solids only to generate a cut plane
on solid objects only. Select Fluids only to generate a plane cut on fluid objects only, including the
cabinet region.
• Click on Color by object to display the cut plane using the color of the object where the cut plane
intersects.
• To make the mesh plane transparent, enable the Plane transparency option and move the slider bar
to observe different levels of transparency.
Displaying the Mesh
• If you want to change the color of the mesh plane, click on the colored square next to Plane mesh
color, and select a new color. Acceptable entries include white (the default), red, blue, green, orange,
yellow, and so on
4. Define the plane location on which to display the mesh, using one of the following methods:
• Specify a plane cut through the center of the model that is aligned with any Cartesian axis by selecting
X plane through center, Y plane through center, or Z plane through center in the Set position
drop-down list.
• Specify a point on the plane and the normal direction to the plane:
a. Select Point and normal in the Set position drop-down list.
b. Enter the coordinates of a point on the plane (PX, PY, PZ).
Note:
If the Display mesh option is already turned on, you must press the Enter
key on your keyboard after entering each value.
c. Enter a vector defining the direction normal to the plane (NX, NY, NZ). For example, entering (1,
0, 0) for the vector will define a normal pointing in the x direction.
Note:
• Specify an equation that defines the plane:
a. Select the Coeffs (Ax + By + Cz = D) option.
b. Enter the coefficients A, B, C, and D for the equation

(35.1)
Note:
• Specify the plane using your mouse:
a. Use the Orient menu to specify the desired orientation. If you require a horizontal or vertical plane
through your model, choose the orientation such that the plane of the display screen is perpendic-
ular to the desired mesh-display plane. For example, if you want to display the mesh on a y-z or x-
y plane, choose Orient positive Y as the orientation so that the display-screen plane is the x-z
plane (see Figure 35.27: Specification of a Vertical Cross-Section (p. 818)). If you want to specify the
plane by selecting three points on it, orient your model as desired.
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.27: Specification of a Vertical Cross-Section
b. Select Horizontal - screen select, Vertical - screen select, or 3 points - screen select in the Set
position drop-down list.
c. If you selected Horizontal - screen select or Vertical - screen select, click your left mouse button
in the graphics window to indicate a point on the desired plane. ANSYS Icepak will display the
mesh on a horizontal or vertical plane perpendicular to the plane of the graphics screen and passing
through the selected point. In Figure 35.27: Specification of a Vertical Cross-Section (p. 818), the
vertical mesh plane is indicated by a vertical line passing through the model. Figure 35.28: Isometric
View of Cross-Sectional Mesh Display (p. 819) shows an isometric view of the same mesh plane.
If you selected 3 points - screen select, select the first, second, and third points on the
plane in the graphics window using the left mouse button. Each point must be on the edge
of an object or the cabinet. If it is not, ANSYS Icepak will move the point to the nearest
location on the edge of an object or the cabinet. ANSYS Icepak will display the mesh on the
plane defined by the three points.
Note:
If you display a hexahedral mesh on a plane that is not parallel or perpendicular

to the sides of the cabinet, the mesh elements may look like the elements of a
tetrahedral mesh. This is an optical illusion caused by ANSYS Icepak when it dis-
plays a hexahedral mesh on a plane that is not horizontal or vertical relative to
the sides of the cabinet.
Checking the Mesh
Figure 35.28: Isometric View of Cross-Sectional Mesh Display
5. Turn on the Display mesh option.
6. To advance the currently-displayed mesh plane through the cabinet so that you can easily view the mesh
on different cross-sectional planes, use the slider bar above Plane mesh color. ANSYS Icepak will move
the plane forward or backward along an axis normal to the mesh plane by a specified percentage of the
total cabinet length.
7. Select the Component visibility button to display a check box of all package components. Toggle
components to turn on or off visibility.
35.11. Checking the Mesh

ANSYS Icepak provides three ways to check the quality of your mesh: face alignment, element volume,
and skewness.
35.11.1. Checking the Face Alignment
35.11.2. Checking the Element Volume
35.11.3. Checking the Skewness
35.11.1. Checking the Face Alignment

Face alignment is a measure of mesh quality defined by
(35.2)
Generating a Mesh
where c0 and c1 are the centroids of two adjacent elements, and is the normal vector to the face
between the two elements, as shown in the 2D example in Figure 35.29: Definition of Face Align-
ment (p. 820).
Figure 35.29: Definition of Face Alignment
Adjacent mesh faces that are not aligned can result in long, narrow elements. A value of 1 indicates
perfect alignment. Values less than 0.15 indicate a severely distorted mesh.
The procedure for checking the face alignment is as follows:
1. Open the Mesh control panel by selecting Generate mesh in the Model menu, or by clicking the
Model Generate mesh
2. Click on the Quality tab to show the mesh diagnostic tools.
3. Select the Face alignment option. ANSYS Icepak will show a histogram of the face alignment, as shown
in Figure 35.30: The Face alignment Histogram in the Mesh control Panel (p. 821).
Checking the Mesh
Figure 35.30: The Face alignment Histogram in the Mesh control Panel
4. If you want to modify the range of face alignments viewed, enter a new value in the Min or Max field
and then press the Enter key on your keyboard or click Replot to update the histogram. To modify the
maximum height of the bars or the number of bars in the histogram, enter a new value in the Height
and/or Bars fields and click Replot. (Note that a Height of 0 instructs ANSYS Icepak to display the bars
of the histogram at their full height.) To return to the default ranges, click the Reset button.
5. To view the elements of the mesh within a particular range of face alignment, click on a bar in the histo-
gram, ANSYS Icepak will display the elements in the selected range in the graphics window. Select the
Solid option if you want to view these elements with solid shading. Select the Label option to show the
corresponding face alignment values.
6. If you want to find out which object the element belongs to, click on Probe. Use the left-mouse button
to select any element in the graphics window. The corresponding object name will be shown in the
graphics window momentarily as well as printed to the text window. To exit the probe mode, click middle
or right mouse button.
Generating a Mesh
35.11.2. Checking the Element Volume

Extremely small elements (on the order of 10-12 or lower) can lead to problems in the solver. It is
therefore important to check the minimum element volumes in your mesh. Although this situation
should and can be avoided in most models, if your model must have very small elements, you may
want to use the double precision version of the solver (see Selecting the Version of the Solver (p. 835)).
The procedure for checking the element volume is as follows:
Model Generate mesh
3. Select the Volume option. ANSYS Icepak will show a histogram of the element volume, as shown in
Figure 35.31: The Volume Histogram in the Mesh control Panel (p. 823).
Checking the Mesh
Figure 35.31: The Volume Histogram in the Mesh control Panel
4. If you want to modify the range of volumes viewed, enter a new value in the Min or Max field and then
press the Enter key on your keyboard or click Replot to update the histogram. To modify the maximum
height of the bars or the number of bars in the histogram, enter a new value in the Height and/or Bars
fields and click Replot. (Note that a Height of 0 instructs ANSYS Icepak to display the bars of the histogram
at their full height.) To return to the default ranges, click the Reset button.
5. To view the elements of the mesh within a particular range of element volume, click on a bar in the his-
togram, ANSYS Icepak will display the elements in the selected range in the graphics window. Select the
Solid option if you want to view these elements with solid shading. Select the Label option to show the
corresponding element volume values.
Generating a Mesh
35.11.3. Checking the Skewness

Skewness is one of the primary quality measures for a mesh. Skewness determines how close to ideal
(that is, equilateral or equiangular) a face or cell is (see Figure 35.32: Ideal and Skewed Triangles and
Quadrilaterals (p. 824)).
Figure 35.32: Ideal and Skewed Triangles and Quadrilaterals
Note:
Table 35.1: Skewness Ranges and Cell Quality (p. 824) lists the range of skewness values
and the corresponding cell quality.
Table 35.1: Skewness Ranges and Cell Quality
Value of Skewness Cell Quality

0 degenerate
Checking the Mesh
Value of Skewness Cell Quality

< 0.02 bad (sliver)
0.25 - 0.02 poor
0.5 - 0.25 fair
0.75 - 0.5 good
0.75 - 1 excellent
1 equilateral
According to the definition of skewness, a value of 1 indicates an equilateral cell (best) and a value
of 0 indicates a completely degenerate cell (worst). Degenerate cells (slivers) are characterized by
nodes that are nearly coplanar (collinear in 2D).
Highly skewed faces and cells are unacceptable because the equations being solved assume that the
cells are relatively equilateral/equiangular.
Two methods for measuring skewness are:
• Based on the equilateral volume (applies only to triangles).
• Based on the deviation from a normalized equilateral angle. This method applies to all cell and face shapes,
for example, pyramids and prisms.
The skewness method is equiangular for every element type.
Equilateral-Volume-Based Skewness
In the equilateral volume deviation method, skewness is defined as
(35.3)
where, the optimal cell size is the size of an equilateral cell with the same circumradius.
Table 35.1: Skewness Ranges and Cell Quality (p. 824) provides a general guide to the relationship
between cell skewness and quality.
The presence of cells that are fair or worse indicates poor boundary node placement. You should try
to improve your boundary mesh as much as possible, because the quality of the overall mesh can
be no better than that of the boundary mesh.
In 3D, most cells should be good or better, but a small percentage will generally be in the fair range
and there are usually even a few poor cells.
Skewness-Normalized Equiangular
In the normalized angle deviation method, skewness is defined (in general) as
(35.4)
where
Θmax = largest angle in the face or cell
Generating a Mesh
Θmin = smallest angle in the face or cell
Θe = angle for an equiangular face/cell (for example, 60 for a triangle, 90 for a square)
For a pyramid, the cell skewness will be the maximum skewness computed for any face. An ideal
pyramid (skewness = 1) is one in which the 4 triangular faces are equilateral (and equiangular) and
the quadrilateral base face is a square. The guidelines in Table 35.1: Skewness Ranges and Cell Qual-
ity (p. 824) apply to the normalized equiangular skewness as well.
The procedure for checking the skewness is as follows:
Model Generate mesh
3. Select the Skewness option. ANSYS Icepak will show a histogram of the skewness, as shown in Fig-
ure 35.33: The Skewness Histogram in the Mesh control Panel (p. 827).
Checking the Mesh
Figure 35.33: The Skewness Histogram in the Mesh control Panel
4. If you want to modify the range of skewness viewed, enter a new value in the Min or Max field and then
press the Enter key on your keyboard or click Replot to update the histogram. To modify the maximum
height of the bars or the number of bars in the histogram, enter a new value in the Height and/or Bars
fields and click Replot. (Note that a Height of 0 instructs ANSYS Icepak to display the bars of the histogram
at their full height.) To return to the default ranges, click the Reset button.
5. To view the elements of the mesh within a particular range of skewness, click on a bar in the histogram,
ANSYS Icepak will display the elements in the selected range in the graphics window. Select the Solid
option if you want to view these elements with solid shading. Select the Label option to show the cor-
responding skewness values.
Generating a Mesh
Figure 35.34: Skewness Labels
35.12. Loading an Existing Mesh

When you read an existing job into ANSYS Icepak, the mesh is not automatically loaded. If you have
already created a mesh for the model, you can load it into ANSYS Icepak by clicking the Load button
in the Mesh control panel (Figure 35.6: The Mesh control Panel for the Hexahedral Mesher (p. 782)).
Chapter 36: Calculating a Solution
Once you have built your model (see Chapters Networks (p. 373) -- Packages (p. 585)) and generated a
mesh (see Generating a Mesh (p. 773)), you are ready to calculate a solution. ANSYS Icepak allows you
to specify the parameters that control the solution procedure and to monitor the solution. The functions
that are needed to define the solution procedure are found in the Model manager window, under the
Problem setup and Solution settings nodes, and in the Solve menu. This chapter begins with an
overview of the Solve menu and the solution settings in the Model manager window, and then describes
how to define the solution procedure for your model. Once you have calculated a solution for your
simulation, you will go on to examine the results of the simulation, as described in Examining the Res-
ults (p. 877) and Generating Reports (p. 935).
• General Procedure for Setting Up and Calculating a Solution (p. 830)
• Choosing the Discretization Scheme (p. 831)
• Setting Under-Relaxation Factors (p. 833)
• Selecting the Multigrid Scheme (p. 834)
• Selecting Linear Solver Advanced Controls (p. 835)
• Selecting the Version of the Solver (p. 835)
• Initializing the Solution (p. 835)
• Monitoring the Solution (p. 836)
• Defining Postprocessing Objects (p. 840)
• Defining Reports (p. 840)
• Setting the Solver Controls (p. 841)
• Performing Calculations (p. 870)
• Diagnostic Tools for Technical Support (p. 874)
36.1. Overview
The Solve menu (Figure 36.1: The Solve Menu (p. 830)) is used in conjunction with the Problem setup
and Solution settings nodes of the Model manager window to define the solution parameters for
Calculating a Solution
Figure 36.1: The Solve Menu
The functions you need to define the solution parameters for your ANSYS Icepak simulation include the
following:
• specifying the parameters that control the solver
• changing the variables to be monitored during the solution calculation
• defining the solution procedure
Solution settings Basic settings or Solve Settings Basic
Solution settings Advanced settings or Solve Settings Advanced
• accessing or creating files for use by your technical support engineer
Solve Diagnostics
• defining the format for reports
Solve Define report
In addition to solution control functions, the Solve menu contains a function related to managing
multiple solution trials (Solve Define trials). This function is described in Parameterizing the Mod-
el (p. 689).
36.2. General Procedure for Setting Up and Calculating a Solution

Once you have built your model in ANSYS Icepak, you are ready to calculate a solution. The following
steps outline a general procedure you can follow:
1. Choose the discretization scheme (see Choosing the Discretization Scheme (p. 831)).
2. Set the under-relaxation factors (see Setting Under-Relaxation Factors (p. 833)).
Choosing the Discretization Scheme
3. Select the multigrid scheme (see Selecting the Multigrid Scheme (p. 834)).
4. Select the version of the solver (single precision or double precision) (see Selecting the Version of the
Solver (p. 835)).
5. Initialize the solution (see Initializing the Solution (p. 835)).
6. Enable the appropriate solution monitors (see Monitoring the Solution (p. 836)).
7. Define postprocessing objects prior to solving the model (see Defining Postprocessing Objects (p. 840)).
8. Define the reports that you want ANSYS Icepak to create when the solution is complete (see Defining Re-
ports (p. 840)).
9. Specify the parameters that control the solver (see Setting the Solver Controls (p. 841)).
10. Start calculating (see Performing Calculations (p. 870)).
The default settings for the first three items listed above are suitable for most problems and need not
be changed. The following sections outline how these and other solution parameters can be changed,
and when you may want to change them. The steps listed above apply for all steady-state calculations.
See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for information about unsteady solution procedures.
36.3. Choosing the Discretization Scheme

ANSYS Icepak allows you to choose the discretization scheme for the convection terms of each governing
equation. See Spatial Discretization (p. 993) for a complete description of the discretization schemes
available in ANSYS Icepak.
You can choose the discretization scheme to be used in the Advanced solver setup panel (Fig-
ure 36.2: The Advanced solver setup Panel (p. 832)).
Solution settings Advanced settings (or Solve Settings Advanced)
Figure 36.2: The Advanced solver setup Panel
The discretization scheme to be used for each of the equations that ANSYS Icepak solves is specified
under Discretization scheme in the Advanced solver setup panel. By default, all equations (except
the pressure equation) are solved using a first-order scheme. This scheme gives you a relatively quick
and accurate solution. The second-order scheme is available for cases in which you require a more
Setting Under-Relaxation Factors
accurate solution. Be aware, however, that a second-order solution may take longer to converge. Also,
for a second-order calculation it is recommended that you first compute a first-order solution and use
it as a starting point.
By default, the pressure equation is solved using the Standard scheme. The Body Force scheme is
also available, but it is recommended that you keep the default standard scheme for most cases. A
second-order scheme is available for cases in which you require a more accurate solution. The PRESTO
scheme is available for flows with high swirl numbers, high-Rayleigh-number natural convection, high-
speed rotating flows, and flows in strongly curved domains.
Note:
Under-relaxation factors are used for both the segregated (using SIMPLE) and coupled pres-
sure-velocity formulations.
For the temperature equation, the Secondary gradient option is used to include or exclude temperature
gradients in the discretization scheme. Secondary gradients may be important if you don't use Cartesian
meshes. By default, secondary gradients are excluded. To include secondary gradient, enable the Sec-
ondary gradient check button.
Note:
Including secondary gradient for highly skewed mesh can lead to convergence problems.
Icepak automatically disables secondary gradients if the mesh is skewed even if the Secondary
gradient option is on. Use the General setup tab on the Solve panel (Figure 36.10: The
Solve Panel (Results Tab) (p. 844)) to enable secondary gradients for skewed meshes.
36.4. Setting Under-Relaxation Factors

As discussed in Under-Relaxation (p. 995), ANSYS Icepak uses under-relaxation to control the update of
computed variables at each iteration. This means that all equations solved using ANSYS Icepak will have
under-relaxation factors associated with them.
You can set the under-relaxation factors in the Advanced solver setup panel (Figure 36.2: The Advanced
solver setup Panel (p. 832)).
Solution settings Advanced settings
(or Solve Settings Advanced)
The value of the "under-relaxation factor" for each of the equations that ANSYS Icepak solves is specified
under Under-relaxation in the Advanced solver setup panel. Because of the nonlinearity of the
equation set, it is necessary to reduce the change of a variable from one iteration to the next. This is
referred to as under-relaxation. For example, if the pressure under-relaxation factor is 0.3, the change
in pressure value from one iteration to the next will be restricted to 30% of the difference between the
initial value and the newly calculated value.
In ANSYS Icepak, the default under-relaxation parameters for all variables are set to values that are near
optimal for the largest possible number of cases. These values are suitable for many problems, but for
some particularly nonlinear problems (for example, some turbulent flows or high-Rayleigh-number
natural-convection problems) it is prudent to reduce the under-relaxation factors initially. If you click
Reset in the Basic settings panel (Figure 36.3: The Basic settings Panel (p. 836)), ANSYS Icepak adjusts
the under-relaxation factors to values that are recommended for the type of problem you are trying to
solve.
It is good practice to begin a calculation using the default settings in the Advanced solver setup
panel. For most flows, the default under-relaxation factors do not usually require modification. If the
solution exhibits unstable or divergent behavior, you may need to modify the under-relaxation factors;
however, inappropriate under-relaxation factors may decrease the rate of convergence for your problem.
If your solution displays divergent behavior, contact your technical support engineer.
36.5. Selecting the Multigrid Scheme

As discussed in Multigrid Method (p. 1001), ANSYS Icepak uses a multigrid scheme to accelerate solution
convergence. You can set the parameters related to the multigrid solver in the Advanced solver setup
panel (Figure 36.2: The Advanced solver setup Panel (p. 832)).
Solution settings Advanced settings (or Solve Settings Advanced)
You can specify parameters related to the multigrid solver under Linear solver in the Advanced solver
setup panel. The multigrid solver accelerates solution convergence by using a sequence of coarse grids
based on the computational grid created by ANSYS Icepak. Solutions can be computed more quickly
on a coarse grid, but coarse-grid solutions are not as accurate as fine-grid solutions. For this reason,
ANSYS Icepak uses the coarser grid levels to obtain a starting point for the final solution, which is obtained
for the actual ANSYS Icepak grid. The following options are available for the multigrid solver.
• Type specifies the multigrid cycle type for each equation that ANSYS Icepak solves. (See Multigrid
Cycles (p. 1002) for a description of the different multigrid cycles.) By default, the V cycle is used for the pressure
equation, the F cycle for temperature and joule heating potential, and the flex cycle is used for all other
equations. You should generally not need to modify these settings.
• Termination criterion controls the multigrid solver in different ways for different cycles. For the flex cycle,
the Termination criterion governs when the solver should return to a finer grid level (i.e., when the residuals
have improved sufficiently on the current level). For the V, W and F cycles, the Termination criterion de-
termines whether or not another cycle should be performed on the finest (original) grid level. If the current
residual on the finest level does not satisfy the Termination criterion, ANSYS Icepak will perform another
multigrid cycle.
For most cases, you should not need to modify the settings for the Termination criterion.
• Residual reduction tolerance dictates when a coarser grid level must be visited (due to insufficient improve-
ment in the solution on the current level). This parameter is used only by the flex cycle. With a larger value
of the Residual reduction tolerance, coarse levels will be visited less often (and vice versa).
For most cases, you should not need to modify the settings for the Residual reduction tolerance.
• Stabilization If desired, you can choose the bi-conjugate gradient stabilized method (BCGSTAB) for the
pressure, temperature and joule heating potential equations. This option can be used in situations involving
high temperature and/or pressure gradients to improve the convergence of the linear solver.
Initializing the Solution
36.6. Selecting Linear Solver Advanced Controls

In the Advanced solver setup panel (Figure 36.2: The Advanced solver setup Panel (p. 832)), set the
Linear solver advanced controls.
• Pre sweeps sets the number of relaxations to perform before moving to a coarser level.
• Post sweeps sets the number of relaxations to be performed after coarser level corrections have been
applied.
• Group size specifies the number of fine grid cells that will be grouped together to create a coarse grid
cell. The algorithm groups each cell with its strongest neighbor, then groups the cell and its strongest
neighbor with the neighbor's strongest neighbor, continuing until the desired coarsening is achieved.
Typical values for the group size are in the range from 2 to 10, with the default value of 2 for the Gauss-
Seidel smoother giving the best performance, but also the greatest memory use. When using the
pressure-based coupled solver with pseudo-transient enabled, the default value of 8 for the ILU
smoother gives the best performance. You should not adjust this parameter unless you need to reduce
the memory required to run a problem.
36.7. Selecting the Version of the Solver

In the Advanced solver setup panel (Figure 36.2: The Advanced solver setup Panel (p. 832)), select the
version of the solver you want to use in the Precision drop-down list.
• Single specifies that the single-precision version of the solver is to be used.
• Double specifies that the double-precision version of the solver is to be used.
Both single-precision and double-precision versions of ANSYS Icepak are available on all computer
platforms. For most cases, the single-precision solver will be sufficiently accurate, but certain types of
problems may benefit from the use of a double-precision solver. Several examples are listed below:
• For conjugate problems with high thermal-conductivity ratios and/or high-aspect-ratio grids, convergence
and/or accuracy may be impaired with the single-precision solver, due to inefficient transfer of boundary
information.
• If your geometry has features of very disparate length scales (for example, a quasi 2D model), single-precision
calculations may not be adequate to represent the node coordinates.
36.8. Initializing the Solution

Before starting your CFD simulation, you must supply ANSYS Icepak with the number of iterations to
be performed and the criteria ANSYS Icepak should use to check for convergence. You can specify the
number of iterations and the convergence criteria in the Basic settings panel (Figure 36.3: The Basic
settings Panel (p. 836)).
Solution settings Basic settings (or Solve Settings Basic)
Figure 36.3: The Basic settings Panel
The following values should be specified in the Solver setup panel.
1. Specify the Number of iterations to be performed by ANSYS Icepak during the calculation. This specifies
the number of solution iterations to be performed in a steady-state calculation. The calculation will stop
when these iterations have been performed or the Convergence criteria are satisfied, whichever happens
first. For relatively simple models, the default of 100 should be sufficient for the solution to converge, but
for more complex models you may need to increase this value. See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for details
on specifying the number of iterations for a transient simulation.
2. Specify the Convergence criteria. These are the solution-residual values used to determine convergence.
Solution residuals measure the error or imbalance in the conservation equations that ANSYS Icepak solves,
and are defined in Solution Residuals (p. 1008). When all solution residuals are less than or equal to their
specified convergence criteria, the solution will be considered converged. If you click Reset in the Basic
settings panel, ANSYS Icepak will adjust the convergence criteria to values that are suitable for the type
of problem you are trying to solve.
Note:
When you click Reset in the Basic settings panel, ANSYS Icepak computes approximate
values of the Reynolds, Peclet, Rayleigh, and Prandtl numbers, based on the physical
characteristics of the model you have defined, and displays them in the Message window.
See Determining the Flow Regime (p. 259) for more details on the Reynolds, Peclet, Rayleigh,
and Prandtl numbers.
36.9. Monitoring the Solution

The equations of flow and heat transfer are highly nonlinear. To solve these equations numerically, an
iterative procedure is required. Monitoring the convergence visually allows you to observe the ongoing
results of the iterative procedure for each of the primary variables, and to determine the rate of conver-
Monitoring the Solution
gence and how close the solution is to completion. See Solution Residuals (p. 1008) for more details on
solution convergence.
• Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837)
• Plotting Residuals (p. 839)
36.9.1. Defining Solution Monitors

The Solution monitor parameters panel (Figure 36.4: The Solution monitor parameters Panel (p. 837))
allows you to specify the variables to be monitored during the calculation. To open the Solution
monitor parameters panel, select Run solution in the Solve menu or click the button in the
Model and solve toolbar.
Solve Run solution
This opens the Solve panel. Next, select the Start monitor option from the Advanced tab of the
Solve panel and click the Edit parameters button. This will open the Solution monitor parameters
panel.
Figure 36.4: The Solution monitor parameters Panel
To define the solution monitors for your simulation, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the Variable for which the convergence is to be displayed. The following options are available:
• All enables the display of residuals for pressure, temperature, and the x, y, and z velocity components.
• None disables the display of all residuals.
• Continuity enables the display of the pressure residual.
• Energy enables the display of the temperature residual.
• X-Velocity, Y-Velocity, Z-Velocity enable, respectively, the residuals for the x-velocity, y-velocity, and
z-velocity components.
• DO-Intensity enables the display of the radiative transfer equation residual.
ANSYS Icepak will also display the names of the species that you have included in your problem
in the Variable list (for example, h2o in Figure 36.4: The Solution monitor parameters Panel (p. 837)).
You can enable the display of the residual for an individual species by selecting the name of the
species under Variable.
2. To specify the units for postprocessing the variables, click Output units. See Units for Postpro-
cessing (p. 220) for details on selecting units for postprocessing.
To accept any changes you have made to the panel and then close the panel, click Accept. To undo
all the changes you have made in the panel and restore all items in the panel to their original states
when the panel was opened, click the Reset button. To close the panel and ignore any changes made
to the panel, click Cancel.
Note that solution residuals and point monitors will be displayed in different Monitor graphics display
and control windows (see The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 871)).
Object Monitor Points

As noted at the bottom of the Solution monitor definition and Solution monitor parameters
panels, you can create per-object monitors in the Model manager window. To define a monitor point
for an object, drag the object from under the Model node into the Points node. Alternatively, you
can copy the object to the clipboard, right-click the Points node, and select Paste from clipboard
in the drop-down menu. Double-click the object item to open the Modify point panel (Figure 36.5: The
Modify point Panel (p. 838)).
Figure 36.5: The Modify point Panel
The monitor point is defined, by default, as the centroid (2D or 3D) of the selected object. The values
of the variables at this point are calculated as the average of the values at the vertices of the object.
You can modify the location of the point by entering the appropriate values under Location, or by
using the alignment tools under Align with. By using the alignment tools, you can align the point
with a selected point (Nearest), Edge, Object, Vertex, Face, or Plane. To select any of these elements
Monitoring the Solution
from the graphics window, you will use the left mouse button. To accept the modification, click the
middle mouse button, and to cancel the modification, click the right mouse button. On a per-object
basis, you can monitor the Temperature, Pressure, Velocity and Species mass fractions. Like solution
monitors, per-object monitors will be displayed in different Monitor graphics display windows.
Note that all objects are available for per-object monitoring, except networks.
Note that it is possible to change the display of the solution residuals and point monitors during the
solution calculation, as described in Changing the Solution Monitors During the Calculation (p. 873).
Object Monitor Surfaces

As noted at the bottom of the Solution monitor definition and Solution monitor parameters
panels, you can create per-object monitors in the Model manager window. To define a monitor
surface for an object, drag the object from under the Model node into the Surfaces node. Double-
click the object item to open the Modify surface panel (Figure 36.6: Object Monitor Surfaces (p. 839)).
Figure 36.6: Object Monitor Surfaces
The monitor surface is defined, by default, as a side of a selected object or all sides of an object. You
can modify the surface of an object that is monitored by selecting the appropriate side under Side.
On a per-object basis, you can monitor the Heat flow, Mass flow, Volume flow and Temperature.
Like solution monitors, per-object monitors will be displayed in different Monitor graphics display
windows.
Note that all objects are available for per-object monitoring, except networks.
Note that it is possible to change the display of the solution residuals and surface monitors during
the solution calculation, as described in Changing the Solution Monitors During the Calculation (p. 873).
36.9.2. Plotting Residuals

The solution residual history and point monitor history can be displayed using XY plots when the
solution has finished. For a solution residual plot, the number of iterations is plotted on the x axis
and the log-scaled residual values are plotted on the y axis. For a point monitor plot, the number of
iterations is plotted on the x axis and the point monitor values are plotted on the y axis.
The Solution monitor definition panel allows you to display XY plots of solution residual history
and point monitor history after the calculation has finished. In the Point monitor panel, you can save
and export the point monitor data to a .csv file. This option is available only after the calculation has
finished and the Solution monitor definition panel has been re-opened after its initial display. To
open the Solution monitor definition panel, select Solution monitor in the Solve menu.
Note that alternatively, you can open this panel by selecting Convergence plot in the Post menu.
This panel is very similar to the Solution monitor parameters panel (see Figure 36.4: The Solution
monitor parameters Panel (p. 837)). You can also specify a Solution ID for the solver calculation for
which you want to view the solution residuals and point monitors in the Solution monitor definition
panel. Click Create to display the solution residuals and point monitors for the selected calculation
in separate Solution residuals and Monitor graphics display and control windows.
The Solution residuals and Monitor graphics display and control windows used for displaying
solution residuals and point monitors when the solution has finished is very similar to the Solution
residuals window shown in Figure 36.24: The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Win-
dow (p. 872). The difference is that the Lower pri and Terminate buttons are not available when you
are viewing the plots after the solution has finished. See The Solution residuals Graphics Display and
Control Window (p. 871) for details on using the Solution residuals window.
36.10. Defining Postprocessing Objects

You can define the following postprocessing objects prior to solving the model, by using the options
in the Post menu or Postprocessing toolbar: Object face, Plane cut, Isosurface, and Point.
When you define a new postprocessing object, the object is added under the Post-processing node
in the Model manager window. Similarly, as in the case of modeling objects, each postprocessing object
has a unique object name, for example, iso.1. (see Figure 37.4: The Edit Window for postprocessing
objects (p. 882)).
For details on defining an Object face, Plane cut, Isosurface, and Point see Displaying Results on
Object Faces (p. 884), Displaying Results on Cross-Sections of the Model (p. 888), Displaying Results on
Isosurfaces (p. 896), and Displaying Results at a Point (p. 901), respectively.
To display the postprocessing objects defined prior to solving the model, you can load the solution
data using the Version selection panel. To open this panel, select Load solution ID in the Post menu,
or click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar.
36.11. Defining Reports

You can define a summary report for a variable on any or all objects in your ANSYS Icepak model. ANSYS
Icepak will generate the report after it has finished calculating the solution if you select Write report
when finished in the Solve panel (see Advanced Solution Control Options (p. 847)). You can use the
Define summary report panel (Figure 36.7: The Define summary report Panel (p. 841)) to define a
summary report for the results of your ANSYS Icepak simulation. To open the Define summary report
panel, select Define report in the Solve menu or click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar.
Solve Define report
Setting the Solver Controls
Figure 36.7: The Define summary report Panel
For details on how to define a summary report see Summary Reports (p. 943).
You can also create a summary report after ANSYS Icepak has finished the calculation, as described in
Summary Reports (p. 943).
36.12. Setting the Solver Controls

Before ANSYS Icepak executes the solution procedure, it allows you to set various controls for the
solution process. The procedure for setting the solver controls is described in Using the Solve Panel to
Set the Solver Controls (p. 842) and the solution control options are described in Advanced Solution
Control Options (p. 847) and Results Solution Control Options (p. 850). Parallel processing options are
described in Parallel Processing (p. 852).
• Using the Solve Panel to Set the Solver Controls (p. 842)
• Advanced Solution Control Options (p. 847)
• Results Solution Control Options (p. 850)
• Parallel Processing (p. 852)
• Batch Processing of ANSYS Icepak Projects on a Windows Machine (p. 868)
36.12.1. Using the Solve Panel to Set the Solver Controls

The Solve panel (Figure 36.8: The Solve Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 842) and Figure 36.9: The Solve
Panel (Advanced Tab) (p. 843)) allows you to specify the controls for the solution. To open the Solve
panel, select Run solution in the Solve menu or click the button in the Model and solve toolbar.
Solve Run solution
Figure 36.8: The Solve Panel (General setup Tab)
Figure 36.9: The Solve Panel (Advanced Tab)
Figure 36.10: The Solve Panel (Results Tab)
To set the controls for the solver, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the Solution ID. This defines a unique identifier for the solution results. ANSYS Icepak automatically
creates a default name that you can alter by typing a new name in the Solution ID text entry field. The
default name consists of the project name plus a two-digit sequential number, starting with 00.
Note:
The Solution ID should not include a plus symbol (+) or spaces. If a space is included,
it is replaced with an underscore.
2. Specify the type of the solver calculation (the Solution type). There are two options:
• New specifies that the calculation is a new one. Any previous data stored under the specified Solution
ID will be overwritten.
• Restart specifies that the calculation is the continuation of a solution that has converged or that was
previously terminated before completion, either because you intentionally stopped the calculation
to look at the results, or because the calculation reached the iteration limit you specified before con-
vergence was achieved. When ANSYS Icepak saves the results of a simulation, it saves two files: pro-
jectname.dat and projectname.fdat. The projectname.fdat file (binary format) contains
all the information about the results of the simulation; the projectname.dat file (ASCII format)
contains a subset of all the results of the simulation (velocity, pressure, and temperature data). You
can choose which of these data files ANSYS Icepak should use when it restarts the calculation by se-
lecting Interpolated data or Full data in the Solve panel, as described below.
If you choose the Restart option, you must specify the solution ID of the previous calculation
from which you want to continue. You can either enter the solution ID in the Restart text entry
box, or select the solution ID using the Version selection panel. Click Select to open a File
selection dialog box.
Note:
If the solution ID you specify in the Solution ID field is the same as the solution
ID in the Restart box, the results of the previous calculation will be overwritten.
If you want to retain the previous results, be sure to enter a new name in the
Solution ID field.
There are two options for restarting a calculation:
– Interpolated data instructs ANSYS Icepak to restart the calculation using the projectname.dat
file. This is the default option and you should use it if you have calculated a solution on a coarse
mesh for your model and then you have refined the mesh. You will decrease the time to calculate
a solution on the fine mesh if you start your calculation using the results obtained for the coarse
mesh.
– Full data instructs ANSYS Icepak to restart the calculation using the projectname.fdat file. You
should use this option if you have previously calculated the flow solution for your problem and you
want to use this solution data when you solve for temperature. Note that the geometry and mesh
must be identical for the two problems.
3. Enable the appropriate basic solution control options in the General setup tab of the Solve panel (Fig-
ure 36.8: The Solve Panel (General setup Tab) (p. 842)). The following options are available:
• Disable radiation instructs ANSYS Icepak not to calculate radiation parameters for the model. See
• Disable varying joule heating instructs ANSYS Icepak to turn off joule heating powers for all block
objects with varying joule heating enabled. Otherwise, ANSYS Icepak treats the current density as
varying and consequently solves an additional conservation equation for the electric potential.
• Use model-based flow intialization instructs ANSYS Icepak to automatically evaluate inlet and outlet
conditions to use optimal values for solution varibles.
• Disable flow and turbulence equations for restarts instructs ANSYS Icepak to solve for temperature
without solving the flow and turbulence equations. This option allows Icepak to utilize the flow and
turbulence- related results of a converged solution to perform temperature calculations. To enable
this option, ensure that flow is checked on in the Basic Parameters panel, select Restart option in
the Solve panel and provide the appropriate data file for the restart. This “frozen flow” option may be
appropriate when the user is interested in obtaining temperature results while freezing the effect of
flow and turbulence.
• Sequential solution of flow and energy equations instructs ANSYS Icepak to solve the flow equations
first and then solve the energy equation. This is suitable for cases where there is no coupling between
the flow and energy equations (for example, forced convection problems with no gravity). This option
may reduce the time required to obtain a solution.
• Temperature secondary gradients for skewed meshes Secondary gradients are used primarily as
a corrective measure when the flux vector may not be parallel to the mesh face normal. However, in-
cluding secondary gradients when the mesh is highly skewed can lead to convergence problems.
Icepak disables temperature secondary gradient if the skewness of the mesh is less than 0.64. Enabling
Temperature secondary gradients for skewed meshes will include secondary gradients when the
skewness of the mesh is less than 0.64. Check the Temperature secondary gradients for skewed
meshes option to include secondary gradients for meshes with mesh skewness below 0.64.
• Alternative secondary gradient formulation at wall surfaces Enabling secondary gradients might
improve the accuracy of the results; however the solution convergence might be adversely affected
in some cases. In order to aid convergence, we can disable secondary gradients only on wall zones
but turn them on everywhere else in the domain.
• Enable solver corrections for skewed meshes instructs ANSYS Icepak to enable solver numeric cor-
rections for elements with poor quality values.
• Coupled pressure-velocity formulation Enabling coupled formulation indicates that you are using
the pressure-based coupled algorithm which offers some advantages over the default segregated
pressure-velocity formulation using the SIMPLE algorithm. The pressure-based coupled algorithm
obtains a more robust and efficient single phase implementation for steady-state flows. Click the Op-
tions button to display the Coupled p-v formulation options panel. The following options are
available:
– Pseudo transient enables an option to apply the pseudo transient under-relaxation method, which
is a form of implicit under-relaxation. Note that this method can only be used when running a steady-
state simulation.
– High order term relaxation enables the relaxation of high order terms to aid in the solution beha-
vior of flow simulations when higher order spatial discretization is used.
Note:
Under-relaxation factors for the coupled pressure-based solver option should be

specified in the Advanced solver setup panel. The same values will be used for both
the SIMPLE pressure-velocity formulation and the coupled pressure-velocity formula-
tion.
4. Set the appropriate advanced solution controls in the Advanced tab of the Solve panel (Figure 36.9: The
Solve Panel (Advanced Tab) (p. 843)). See Advanced Solution Control Options (p. 847) for details.
• Start monitor instructs ANSYS Icepak to display the convergence history for the calculation while the
calculation is in progress. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) for details on enabling the display of
solution residuals and point monitors.
5. Set the appropriate results solution controls in the Results tab of the Solve panel (Figure 36.10: The
Solve Panel (Results Tab) (p. 844)). See Advanced Solution Control Options (p. 847) for details.
• Write overview of results when finished instructs ANSYS Icepak to generate an overview of results
when it has finished the calculation.
• Write report when finished instructs ANSYS Icepak to generate a report when it has finished the
calculation. See Defining Reports (p. 840) for details on defining a report to be generated when the
calculation is complete.
• Write XML-based report when finished instructs ANSYS Icepak to generate an XML file containing
solution overview data and an image file in PNG format to be processed by ANSYS Engineering
Knowledge Manager. See Metadata Files (p. 146) for more information.
6. Specify whether you want the solution to be run in serial or in parallel. To run the solution in serial, keep
the default selection of Serial in the Parallel settings panel (Figure 36.14: The Parallel settings Pan-
el (p. 853)). See Parallel Processing (p. 852) for details about running a solution in parallel.
7. Click Start solution to start the calculation.
You can click Cancel to close the Solve panel without accepting the specifications and without
starting the calculation, or you can click Dismiss to close the Solve panel and accept the specifications
but without starting the calculation.
36.12.2. Advanced Solution Control Options

To set the advanced controls for the solver, follow the steps below.
1. Click the Advanced tab in the Solve panel (Figure 36.9: The Solve Panel (Advanced Tab) (p. 843))
2. Specify the computer on which you want the solution to run. There are four options:
• This computer runs the solution on the computer you are currently using.
• Another computer runs the solution on another computer on your network. To specify parameters
related to the remote execution, click Edit parameters next to Another computer. This will open the
Remote execution parameters panel (Figure 36.11: The Remote execution parameters Pane
(Linux) (p. 847) and Figure 36.12: The Remote execution parameters Panel (Windows) (p. 848)).
Figure 36.11: The Remote execution parameters Pane (Linux)
Figure 36.12: The Remote execution parameters Panel (Windows)
a. Specify the name of the host computer to which the project is to be submitted next to Remote
host.
b. Specify the user account name on the remote computer next to User on remote host. By default,
this is the same as the user account you used to log onto the machine on which you are currently
running ANSYS Icepak.
c. In the Remote launch command field, enter the protocol: rsh, ssh, or plink.
d. (Linux machines only) Specify the Remote path to project directory, which is the project directory
on the remote computer. The default is the project directory path on the current machine.
e. (Windows machines only) Specify the Remote Share drive by entering a drive letter followed by
a colon (for example, X:). this is the shared drive that will be used to mount the project directory
on the remote computer. The drive letter that you enter must not be previously mapped on the
remote computer.
f. Specify the Remote path to ICEPAK_ROOT, which tells the remote computer the location where
ANSYS Icepak is installed on the local computer. For example, if ANSYS Icepak 2020 R1 has been
installed under /usr/local on a local Linux machine, there will be an ansys_inc directory
present as /usr/local/ansys_inc. You would then need to set your PATH environment
variable to include /usr/local/ansys_inc/bin.
On a Windows machine, follow the steps given on the ANSYS customer site under the search
term “Running Icepak Network Parallel”.
In the Remote execution parameters panel, you must then specify the full network path
to the local installation of ANSYS Icepak unless the local path has been mapped as a network
drive on the remote machine or ANSYS Icepak has been installed on the remote machine.
In either of these exceptions, you can specify an appropriate drive letter as a part of the
path.
g. (Linux machines only) Specify the Remote path to FLUENT_INC, which is the location where ANSYS
Icepak’s version of the Fluent solver was installed (that is, ICEPAK_ROOT /Fluent.Inc).
h. Click Accept to accept any changes made to the panel and close the panel.
You can click Reset to undo all the changes made in the panel and restore all items to their
original states when the panel was opened, or click Cancel to close the panel and ignore any
changes made to the panel.
• Batch queue uses a file which specifies inputs and outputs. An example of batch processing on a
Windows machine is described in Batch Processing of ANSYS Icepak Projects on a Windows Ma-
chine (p. 868).
• Script file specifies that the commands necessary to run the solution are to be output to a script file.
The commands in the script file can be used to run the solution on the computer you are currently
using or on a remote computer. The default name for the script file is ident.SCRIPT, where ident
is the identifier specified in the Solution ID field. This option can also be used to batch process a
number of ANSYS Icepak projects.
You can run ANSYS Icepak under LSF by selecting Use LSF under the Script file option. Platform
Computing’s LSF software is a distributed computing resource management tool that you can
use with either the serial or the parallel version of ANSYS Icepak. Contact Platform directly for
support of their product.
Note:
Running ANSYS Icepak under LSF is not supported on Windows.
The requirements are as follows:
– LSF 6.0 - 7.0, available from Platform Computing at http://www.platform.com
– ANSYS Icepak 16.0 and above
The LSF components are included in all versions of LSF packages that are able to be downloaded
from the Platform ftp site (ftp.platform.com). If you are a current LSF customer, contact
Platform support personnel for downloading instructions at [email protected]. New
LSF customers should contact the Platform sales department.
3. Enable the appropriate advanced solution control options. The following options are available in the
Advanced tab of the Solve panel (Figure 36.9: The Solve Panel (Advanced Tab) (p. 843)):
• Reuse existing solver input files enables the use of a pre-existing case file and script file. This is
typically used if you want to continue from a previous solution, without changing any parameters in
the problem.
• Reuse existing meshes allows you to use an existing mesh to avoid regenerating the mesh when
there were no changes to the model geometry.
• Don't start solver allows you to set up the solver parameters without actually running the solver.
• Merge zones when possible instructs ANSYS Icepak to optimize the solver by merging zones
whenever possible before writing the model information to a Fluent case file. This option is enabled
for all objects by default. You can click Edit to open the Object zone merging panel and enter 1 for
objects you don't want to merge.
• Merge NC interfaces when possible instructs ANSYS Icepak to optimize the solver by merging the
non-conformal interfaces whenever possible before writing the model information to a Fluent case
file.
• Start monitor instructs ANSYS Icepak to display the convergence history for the calculation while the
calculation is in progress. See Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) for details on enabling the display of
solution residuals and point monitors.
• Show diagnostic output from solver prints the numeric values of the residuals to a separate window.
36.12.3. Results Solution Control Options

To set the results controls for the solver, follow the steps below:
1. Click the Results tab in the Solve panel (Figure 36.10: The Solve Panel (Results Tab) (p. 844))
2. Specify the reports on which you want the solution to run. There are two options:
• If Write overview of results when finished is selected in the Solve panel, ANSYS Icepak will generate
an overview of results when it has finished the calculation.
• If Write report when finished is selected in the Solve panel, ANSYS Icepak will generate the report(s)
that you defined in the Define summary report panel (see Defining Reports (p. 840)).
• If Write XML-based report when finished is selected, ANSYS Icepak will generate an XML file containing
solution overview data and an image file in PNG format to be processed by ANSYS Engineering
Knowledge Manager. See Metadata Files (p. 146) for more information.
3. Enable the Workflow data results control option.
• CFD Post/Mechanical data instructs ANSYS Icepak to export .cfd.dat and .cfd.cas files that can be
read by CFD-Post and transfer temperature data (.loads and .loadsummary files) from ANSYS Icepak
to Mechanical. In the case of a transient problem, each time step will be written out as well with the
same extensions. The files are written out by enabling CFD Post/Mechanical data in the Solve panel.
If this option was not enabled prior to solving, you also have the option of exporting data using the
Post>Workflow data menu in ANSYS Icepak.
4. Enable the Solver data solution control options.
• Auto-save interval specifies the frequency with which ANSYS Icepak should save the results of a non-
transient calculation. A value of 100 specifies that ANSYS Icepak should save the results after every
100 iterations.
• Compress solution after reporting instructs ANSYS Icepak to compress some solver-related files
when it has finished the calculation to reduce the usage of disk space. This will not affect postprocessing
of the solution.
• Write interpolated restart data file directs ANSYS Icepak to write out interpolated data in the pro-
jectname.dat file. This option is enabled by default.
• Write full restart data file directs ANSYS Icepak to write restart data in the projectname.fdat
file. This option is enabled by default.
• Write electric current density vector computes integrals of the current density vector at each current
inlet/outlet in Fluent and writes it to a .resd output file.
• Create heat flux vectors in CFD-Post instructs the ANSYS Icepak solver to export thermal conductiv-
ities and other variables that can be read by CFD-Post in order to create heat flux vectors. This data
can be written out only by enabling the Create heat flux vectors in CFD-Post option in the Results
tab of the Solve panel prior to obtaining the solution.
• Export instructs ANSYS Icepak to export the results of the simulation to a NASTRAN, PATRAN, or I-deas
file when the simulation is complete. Note that this option is available only if you are using the
serial solver. Select a file format from the drop-down list to the right of Export solution data. The
following formats are available:
– Nastran: A single file containing coordinates, connectivity, velocity, pressure, heat flux, and temper-
ature is written.
– Patran: Two files are written. One is a PATRAN neutral file with a .ptr extension, which contains
coordinate, connectivity, and zonal information; the other is a PATRAN nodal file with a .ptn exten-
sion, which contains nodal values of velocity, pressure, heat flux, and temperature.
– IDEAS: A single file containing coordinates, connectivity, velocity, pressure, heat flux, and temper-
ature is written.
– → Specify the name of the file for the solution data in the text entry box to the right of Export. You
can enter your own filename, which can be a full pathname to the file (beginning with a / character
on Linux or a drive letter on Windows) or a pathname relative to the directory in which ANSYS
Icepak was started. Alternatively, you can choose a filename by clicking on the Browse button.
This will open the Export panel (Figure 36.13: The Export Panel (p. 851)). Select the desired file
and click Open.
Figure 36.13: The Export Panel
36.12.4. Parallel Processing

The parallel version of the solver simultaneously computes the solution using multiple compute nodes
(processes). The solver will partition the mesh into multiple subdomains and each partition will reside
on a different compute node. These processes can be compute nodes on a multiple-CPU workstation,
or a cluster of Windows machines. In general, as the number of compute nodes increases, the turn-
around time for the solution will decrease. However, parallel efficiency decreases as the ratio of
communication to computation increases, so you should use parallel processing only for suitably
large problems.
Note:
Due to limitations imposed by several MPI implementations, ANSYS Fluent performance

on heterogeneous clusters involving either operating system or processor family differences
may not be optimal, and in certain cases cause failures. You are urged to use caution in
such parallel operating environments.
You will set up all the parameters for the parallel version of the solver in the Parallel settings panel
(Figure 36.14: The Parallel settings Panel (p. 853)).
Solution settings Parallel settings (or Solve Settings Parallel)
Figure 36.14: The Parallel settings Panel
The following options are available in the Parallel settings panel:
• Serial specifies that the solution should be run as a serial process.
• Parallel specifies that the solution should be run as a parallel process on a dedicated parallel computer.
See below for further details on parallel processing.
• Network parallel specifies that the solution should be run as a parallel process on a network of computers.
See below for further details on parallel processing.
• Job Scheduler specifies that the solution be run as a parallel process on a network of computers by spe-
cifying only the head node name. See below for further details on parallel processing.
• Use remote Linux nodes specifies that the Job Scheduler will run the solution as a parallel process on
network of Linux computers. See below for further details on parallel processing.
Note:
The first time that you try to run ANSYS Icepak in network parallel or in job scheduler,
you need to set the password. After entering an initial password, you will not need
to enter it again as it will be obtained through the cache. Note that if the password
is changed, you will need to enter a new one. Once the username and password
have been verified and encrypted into the Windows registry, the parallel solver will
launch.
• GPU computing can be used to accelerate certain solver related operations. See below for further details
on GPU computing.
Dedicated Parallel Machine

To run ANSYS Icepak on a dedicated parallel machine (that is, a multiprocessor workstation), select
Parallel in the Parallel settings panel (Figure 36.14: The Parallel settings Panel (p. 853)) and specify
the number of processors to be used in the # processors field.
Using Graphics Processing Units (GPUs) with Icepak

Graphics Processing Units (GPUs) can be used to accelerate certain solver operations like view factor
computations using the ray-tracing radiation method and the multi-grid solver for the coupled pressure-
velocity formulation. You can enable GPU acceleration using the Parallel settings panel.
When using the coupled pressure-velocity formulation, GPU computing cannot be used with the
Serial configuration.
The computing platform must be either 64-bit Linux (SLES11 and above, RHEL 5.4 and above) or 64-
bit Windows. As with any CPU system, the problem size that can be solved using a single GPU will
depend on the amount of memory available on the GPU. Furthermore, the machines must be equipped
with one of the configurations listed in the tested and supported graphics cards document, which
can be found on the Platform Support page on the ANSYS website.
36.12.5. Optimizing the Parallel Solver Performance

The parallel solver performance can be degraded by frequent monitor point outputs and solution
saves. The parallel solver performance can be optimized by controlling the frequency of the monitor
outputs and the solution save interval. You can specify how often you would like to save monitor
point data by entering the frequency in the Specify monitor point output frequency number-entry
field. Specify monitor point output frequency is set to 10 by default.
For optimum parallel solver performance, by default the solution is saved only once at the end of
the solution. You can, however, request ANSYS Icepak to automatically save at specified intervals
during a parallel non-transient calculation by selecting Auto-save interval in the Parallel settings
panel and entering the specified Auto-save interval in the Solve panel (Figure 36.10: The Solve
Panel (Results Tab) (p. 844)). The Auto-save interval is set to 100 by default.
Partitioning the Grid
36.13. Partitioning the Grid

The default option for partitioning the grid is the Principal Axes method. This method bisects the domain
based on a coordinate frame aligned with the principal axes of the domain. There is another option,
called METIS, that can be used for grid partitioning, by selecting the Use Metis for partitioning option
in the Parallel settings panel. METIS is a software package for partitioning irregular graphs developed
by Karypis and Kumar at the University of Minnesota and the Army HPC Research Center. It uses a
multilevel approach in which the vertices and edges on the fine graph are coalesced to form a coarse
graph. The coarse graph is partitioned, and then uncoarsened back to the original graph. During
coarsening and uncoarsening, algorithms are applied to permit high-quality partitions. Detailed inform-
ation about METIS can be found in its manual [ 16 (p. 1011) ].
36.13.1. Workstation Cluster
Note:
When entering ANSYS software version numbers in file paths, ensure you use the
current software version.
To run ANSYS Icepak on a network of computers, you need to provide ANSYS Icepak with a list of
names of the computers that you want to use. This "node" file is a text file that you create that contains
a list of machines, one per line, to be used by ANSYS Icepak in the calculation. An example of a node
file is shown below.
balin
bilbo
bofur
dain
dwalin
Note:
The network must contain either all Linux machines or all Windows machines.
To run ANSYS Icepak on a network of computers, select Network parallel in the Parallel settings
panel (Figure 36.14: The Parallel settings Panel (p. 853)). You must specify the name of the node file
in the Node file text entry field. You can enter your own filename, which can be a full pathname to
the file (beginning with a / character on Linux or a drive letter on Windows) or a pathname relative
to the directory in which ANSYS Icepak was started. Alternatively, you can choose a filename by
clicking on the Browse button located next to the Node file text field and then selecting the file in
the resulting Node file for parallelism dialog box.
To make changes to the node file you selected, click Edit node file under Node file in the Parallel
settings panel and then create or select the file in the resulting File panel. ANSYS Icepak will open
the node file in a text editor, where you can edit the list of machines. Save your changes and exit the
text editor to return to the Parallel settings panel in ANSYS Icepak.
Note that you do not need to specify the number of processors when using the Network parallel
option. The number of processors is equal to the number of machines listed in the node file.
For Windows networks, you must also specify the Shared path, which is the directory where ANSYS
Icepak’s version of the Fluent solver is installed. If the solver is installed on a Windows server, you
should enter the following in the Shared path text entry box:
\\server_name\ANSYS Inc\v193\fluent
where servername is the name of the server where ANSYS Icepak’s version of the Fluent solver is
installed and ANSYS Inc is the shared solver folder. If the solver is installed on a Windows machine,
you should enter the following in the Shared path text entry box:
\\computer_name\ANSYS Inc\v193\fluent
where computer_name is the name of the Windows machine where ANSYS Icepak’s version of the
Fluent solver is installed and ANSYS Inc is the shared solver folder.
The Use shared path for UDF file option should be off by default for network parallel runs on Windows
machines. ANSYS Icepak generates a user-defined function (UDF) if model properties are varied, and
the Fluent solver will look in the Shared path directory for the UDF file if this option is enabled.
For more detailed information about configuring ANSYS Icepak for Windows clusters, visit the ANSYS
customer site and search for the solution “Running Icepak Network Parallel”.
36.14. Starting Parallel ANSYS Icepak with the Job Scheduler

The Job Scheduler allows you to manage multiple jobs and tasks, allocate computer resources, and
send tasks to compute nodes, and monitor jobs.
Select Job Scheduler in the Parallel settings panel. Once selected, you can then enter the number of
processors and the machine name in the Head node text field.
You must also specify the Shared path, which is the directory where ANSYS Icepak’s version of the
Fluent solver is installed. The solver folder needs to be shared, which would be ANSYS Inc. If the
solver is installed on a Windows server, you should enter the following in the Shared path text field:
\\server_name\ANSYS Inc\v193\fluent
where servername is the name of the server where ANSYS Icepak’s version of the Fluent solver is in-
stalled and ANSYS Inc is the shared solver folder.
The Use shared path for UDF file option should be off by default for netparallel runs on Windows
machines. ANSYS Icepak generates a user-defined function (UDF) if model properties are varied, and
the Fluent solver will look in the Shared path directory for the UDF file if this option is enabled.
For more detailed information about configuring ANSYS Icepak for Windows clusters, visit the ANSYS
customer site and search for the solution “Running Icepak Network Parallel”.
Note:
Interpreted UDFs are not supported for the Infiniband interconnect. The solver automat-
ically switches to the ethernet option when interpreted UDFs are present in the model.
Starting Parallel ANSYS Icepak with the Job Scheduler
36.14.1. Configure Icepak for Network Parallel
36.14.1.1. Install and Configure Icepak
Note:
When entering ANSYS software version numbers in file paths, ensure you use the
current software version.
To run solutions in parallel mode, install Icepak on the head node of the cluster and share the Icepak
and Fluent directories.
1. Share the ANSYS Inc directory at the following location: C:\Program Files\ANSYS
Inc\v193\fluent.
2. Change the permissions to Full Control.
Figure 36.15: Shared Directories
3. Create a working directory (e.g., Working) where your models will be saved.
4. Share the Working directory.
5. Change the permissions to Full Control.
6. Map a network drive to the Working directory.
• Click the Start Menu > Computer.
• Click Map Network Drive from the menu near the top of the screen.
Figure 36.16: Map Network Drive
• Select a Drive letter and then click Browse and navigate to your working directory (e.g.,
K:\Working).
Figure 36.17: Map Network Drive Panel
36.14.1.2. Installing IBM MPI

1. To install IBM MPI, double-click the ANSYS installation setup.exe file.
2. On the initial screen, click Install MPI for ANSYS Parallel Processing.
Figure 36.18: ANSYS Installation - Initial Screen
3. On the next screen, click Install IBM MPI to launch the installation wizard.
Figure 36.19: ANSYS Installation - Second Screen
4. Complete the IBM MPI installation wizard. Reference the associated help file, which opens as the wizard
launches. Ensure that you restart your computer when finished.
Note:
On the Service Listening Port step, add the default Firewall port that IBM MPI uses
(8636) to the Firewall Exceptions list.
Note:
To cache your Windows password, open a Command Prompt window and run:
"%AWP_ROOT193%\commonfiles\MPI\IBM\9.1.4.3\Windows\setpcmpi-
password.bat"
Note:
You must install IBM MPI on all computers, and the IBM-MPI Service must be running.
On each computer, check Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services to
verify that the IBM MPI services have been installed and are running.
Launching Icepak and Using IBM MPI
Note:
When entering ANSYS software version numbers in file paths, ensure you use the current
software version.
1. Create a host (node) text file that will identify the computers and the number of cores you wish to run
the solver on. For example, if you wish to run on 2 cores on computer1 and 2 cores on computer2 your
node file would look like the example below.
Figure 36.20: Example of Host File
Note:
You must enter the carriage return after you enter in the last machine name.
2. Save the host file to your working directory.
3. Launch Icepak and open your model.
4. From the Solve menu, select Settings > Parallel.
Figure 36.21: Parallel Settings Panel
5. Under Configuration, select Network parallel.
6. Next to the Compute node file text box, click Browse and choose the host file you created previously.
7. In the Solver shared path text box, enter the UNC path to the computer on which Icepak is installed
and the shared ANSYS Inc directory. (e.g., \\computer_name\ANSYS Inc\v193\fluent).
Note:
On Linux, the directory is named ansys_inc.
8. Click Accept.
36.14.1.3. Configure Icepak Network Parallel for Microsoft 2012 Server

The following are requirements for configuring client machines to submit jobs to Microsoft 2012
Server:
• Client machines must be running Microsoft Windows 7 or Windows 8.1.
• Client machines must have the Microsoft 2012 Server Client Utilities installed.
• Client machines must have a have a high-end graphics card with the latest graphics driver from
the vendor installed. Contact ANSYS for recommendations.
Note:
All pre- and post-processing is done on the client machines. Only the Icepak solve
jobs will be submitted to the cluster.
Note:
You must first install and configure Microsoft HPC properly so that the compute
nodes can access the headnode. If Microsoft HPC is not configured properly
contact Microsoft for support before you attempt to install Icepak.
1. Install Icepak on the Headnode. See Install and Configure Icepak (p. 857).
2. Install the Microsoft 2012 Server Client Utilities on the client machines from the headnode network
share called \\HEADNODE\REMINST or from the CD. On the client computer, choose Start > Run and
type \\HEADNODE\REMINST (where HEADNODE is the actually name of the HEADNODE on the cluster).
2. Double-click on the setup.exe file. The installer will prompt you to install required programs.
Launching Icepak using Microsoft 2012 HPC Server/Job Scheduler

1. On the client machine, launch Icepak and open your model.
Note:
When submitting jobs to a Microsoft Job Scheduler you cannot open models from
your local drive if the directory has not been shared or mapped to a drive letter.
2. From the Solve menu, select Settings > Parallel.
Figure 36.22: Parallel Settings Panel
3. Under Configuration, select Job Scheduler.
Note:
The following Job Scheduler settings can be set using the stated environmental
variables below:
• Job template (FL_CCP_JOB_TEMPLATE): Job Template allows you to create a custom

submission policy to define the job parameters for an application. The cluster ad-
ministrator can use job templates to manage job submission and optimize cluster
usage.
• Node group (FL_CCP_NODE_GROUP): Node Group allows you to specify a collection

of nodes. Cluster administrators can create groups and assign nodes to one or
more groups.
To create an environmental variable, right-click on Computer in the Windows

Start menu and select Properties. Click Advanced system settings to open
the System Properties dialog box. On the Advanced tab, click Environmental
Variables. In the Environmental Variables dialog box under System vari-
ables, click New and enter the name and value of the variable in the New
System Variable dialog box.
4. Under Job Scheduler options:
• In the # processors text box, enter the number of processors to use.
• In the Cluster head node name text box, enter the name of the head node.
• In the Solver shared path text box, enter the UNC path to the Headnode and the shared ANSYS
Inc directory. (e.g., \\computer_name\ANSYS Inc\v193\fluent).
Note:
On Linux, the directory is named ansys_inc.
• Click Accept.
36.14.2. Configure Remote Linux Nodes

The procedure for how to configure SSH (using Putty) to SSH to Linux Nodes from Windows for ANSYS
Icepak is described in this section.
1. Download and install Putty, Puttygen, Plink, Pscp, Puttytel, from: http://www.chiark.green-
end.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/download.html.
Note:
You should install the whole package at once, as opposed to installing each file indi-
vidually.
2. Choose the Start menu, All Programs, Putty, PuTTYGen to create a cryptographic key.
3. Click Generate, moving the mouse as instructed.
4. Change Key comment to include your Windows username.
5. Do not enter a Key passphrase.
Note:
If your Linux/UNIX cluster uses OpenSSH you will need to convert the key to OpenSSH
format. Check with your Systems Administrator. Choose the Conversions menu and
choose Export OpenSSH key.
6. Choose Save private key file without passphrase to C:\temp\ssh-priv.ppk (or any directory that does
not have spaces in the name, important for successful ANSYS Icepak launch).
7. Click on the Save public key button to save a copy of the public key without a passphrase. This will
save a local copy of the public key for future reference.
8. Open a SSH session to one of your cluster nodes, cd into ~/.ssh, and open the authorized_keys file in
your favorite editor (for example, VI or EMACS).
9. Select all of the text in the edit box entitled Public key for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys
file, copy it, and paste it into the edit session you opened in Step 8.
10. Save and close the edit session for the authorized_keys file.
11. Chmod 600 .ssh/ authorized_keys
12. Add and Modify the Windows environment variables by going into Control Panel, System Advanced,
Environment Variables.
• Append the PuTTY install directory to Path variable, for example, C:\Program Files\Putty. You must
add this to the System Environment variable area.
• Add a KEYPATH environment variable with full path to private key file, such as C:\temp\ssh-priv.ppk.
You can use a user variable if the key file is used only by you. Use a system variable if other users are
sharing the key file.
Testing the Key

As an initial test, run the following from the command prompt (quotes around %KEYPATH% are re-
quired):
plink -i "%KEYPATH%" username@linuxmachinename pwd
1. If plink prompts you to store the key in cache, select Yes.
2. If plink prompts you to trust key, select yes.
Note:
Before configuring the ANSYS Icepak launcher on Windows to submit jobs to the Linux/UNIX
cluster, verify that you have tested the key using the above procedure and that the user-
name and password are identical on the Windows machine and the Linux/UNIX machine(s).
All computers that you are trying to launch ANSYS Icepak from Windows must be able to communicate
with the Windows machine.
Launching ANSYS Icepak from a Windows Machine and submitting to a Linux Cluster
(or Linux Machines)
1. Launch ANSYS Icepak by choosing the Start > ANSYS 2020 R1 > ANSYS Icepak
2. Click the Solve menu Settings Parallel to open the Parallel settings panel.
3. Under Configuration, select Job Scheduler and Use remote Linux nodes. The Linux Job Scheduler
options appear.
4. In the # processors field, enter the number of nodes.
5. In the Remote solve path field, enter the location of the Fluent installation on the Linux machine.
6. In the Remote working directory field, enter the home directory on the remote cluster. This will be
used as a scratch area for temporary files that are created on the nodes.
7. In the Remote spawn command field, enter the protocol: rsh, ssh, or plink.
8. In the Copy to remote command field, enter the command options for copying files to the "Remote
working directory" (if needed). The following is the syntax used to copy files to remote working directory:
CMD file1 file2 ... fileN USER@remote_cluster_head_node:remote_work-

ing_dir
where file1, file2, ..., fileN are Icepak generated files that must be copied to the remote working
directory. remote_cluster_head_node and remote_working_dir are the entries from Step 6. For
example, if you are using pscp (part of PuTTY tool), you can enter
cmd "pscp -i C:/users/joe/authenticate_key" user "joe"
and Icepak will generate the copy command by replacing the CMD field with "pscp -i
C:/users/joe/authenticate_key" and USER with "joe".
9. Select the Distributed Resource Management System you're using: LSF, SGE, or PBSPro.
• For LSF, specify the LSF queue.
• For SGE, specify the SGE qmaster and SGE queue.
36.14.3. Batch Processing of ANSYS Icepak Projects on a Windows Machine

ANSYS Icepak can be used in a batch mode in which inputs are obtained from and outputs are
stored in files. Generally you will perform problem setup and postprocessing of results in an interactive
mode. However, when you perform calculations for several ANSYS Icepak projects outside of ANSYS
Icepak, you may want to run the projects in batch mode. This allows the computer resources to be
prioritized, enables you to control the process from a file (eliminating the need for you to be present
during the calculation), and also provides a record of the calculation history (residuals) in an output
file.
To process multiple ANSYS Icepak projects in batch mode, follow the steps below:
1. Set up the first project in ANSYS Icepak.
2. Save the project to a batch file using the Solve panel (Figure 36.23: The Solve Panel for Batch Pro-
cessing (p. 869)).
Solve Run solution
Figure 36.23: The Solve Panel for Batch Processing
a. Select the Script file option under Submission options and enter the name of the batch file in the
Script file text entry box using a .bat extension.
b. Turn on the Don’t start solver option.
c. Click Start solution in the Solve panel to save the batch file. The contents of a typical batch file are
shown below.
set ICEPAK_LICENSING=1
set FLUENT_INC=C:/Program Files/ANSYS Inc/v160/Icepak/bin//../icepak16.0/Fluent.Inc
set path=%fluent_inc%\..\bin.win64_amd;%path%
set LM_LICENSE_FILE=C:/Program Files/ANSYS Inc/v160/Icepak/bin//../icepak16.0/..
/license/license.dat
set FLUENT_ARCH=win64
set FLUENT_LICENSE_PATH=C:/Program Files/ANSYS Inc/v160/Icepak/bin//../icepak16.0
/Fluent.Inc\..\..\license\win64
set FLUENT_WAIT=yes
del project01.resd
del project01.*.out
"C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v160\Icepak\bin\\..\icepak16.0\Fluent.Inc\ntbin\win64\
fluent.exe" 3d -g -i project01.uns_in
del project01.uns_pid
3. Repeat the steps above to create batch files for all the projects you want to run in batch mode.
4. Using a text editor, combine all the individual batch files into a combined batch file with a .bat extension.
Note that you must add a cd (change directory) command before each individual batch file to ensure
that the file is executed in the correct directory. An example is shown below, where the batch files for
project1 and project10 are combined into a single batch file.
cd C:\icepak\project1
set ICEPAK_LICENSING=1
set LM_LICENSE_FILE=C:/Program Files/ANSYS Inc/v160/Icepak/bin//../icepak16.0/../license/license.dat
set FLUENT_WAIT=yes
del project1.resd
del project1.*.out
"C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v160\Icepak\bin\\..\icepak16.0\Fluent.Inc\ntbin\win64\fluent.exe"
3d -g -i project1.uns_in
cd set ICEPAK_LICENSING=1
set LM_LICENSE_FILE=C:/Program Files/ANSYS Inc/v160/Icepak/bin//../icepak16.0/../license/license.dat
set FLUENT_LICENSE_PATH=C:/Program Files/ANSYS Inc/v160/Icepak/bin//../icepak16.0/Fluent.Inc
\..\..\license\win64
set FLUENT_WAIT=yes
del project10.resd
del project10.*.out
"C:\Program Files\ANSYS Inc\v160\Icepak\bin\\..\icepak16.0amma\Fluent.Inc\ntbin\win64\fluent.exe"
3d -g -i project10.uns_in
5. Open Windows Explorer and double-click the combined batch file to start the execution of the batch
process.
6. When the batch process is complete, you can use ANSYS Icepak to examine the results for the individual
projects, as described in Examining the Results (p. 877).
36.15. Performing Calculations

The following sections provide information about what ANSYS Icepak does when a calculation is started,
during the calculation, and when the calculation ends. Information is also provided about judging the
convergence of your solution.
36.15.1. Starting the Calculation
36.15.2.The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window
36.15.3. Changing the Solution Monitors During the Calculation
36.15.4. Ending the Calculation
36.15.5. Judging Convergence
Performing Calculations
36.15.1. Starting the Calculation

When you click the Start solution button in the Solve panel (Figure 36.8: The Solve Panel (General
setup Tab) (p. 842)), ANSYS Icepak performs various preprocessing operations, including checking the
model, saving a project file, and creating a case file for the solver. The solver will then begin to calcu-
late. See Solution Procedures (p. 991) for theoretical information on the solution procedures.
If Show diagnostic output from solver is selected in the Solve panel (the default setting), a separate
window will open and the solver will print the numeric values of the residuals to the window.
If Start monitor is selected in the Solve panel (the default setting), ANSYS Icepak will display the
convergence history for the calculation in the Solution residuals graphics display and control window.
See The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 871) for details on the Solution
residuals graphics display and control window.
If Sequential solution of flow and energy equations is selected in the Solve panel, ANSYS Icepak will
first solve the flow equations, and then solve the energy equation alone. See Advanced Solution
Control Options (p. 847) for details.
The solver runs as a background task separate from ANSYS Icepak, so you can work on another
model once the solver starts to solve the current model.
ANSYS Icepak will save the results of the calculation for non-transient problems at the frequency
specified next to Auto-save interval in the Solve panel. See Advanced Solution Control Options (p. 847)
for details. For a transient simulation, ANSYS Icepak will save the results at the frequency specified
next to Solution save interval in the Transient parameters panel, as described in User Inputs for
Transient Simulations (p. 627).
36.15.2. The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window

ANSYS Icepak opens the Solution residuals graphics display and control window (Figure 36.24: The
Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 872)) by default when the solver starts to
perform calculations, and displays the convergence history for the calculation.
Figure 36.24: The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window
The Solution residuals window is fully interactive. For example, at any time during the calculation,
you can zoom in on a specific portion of the graph. To zoom into an area, position the mouse
pointer at a corner of the area to be zoomed, hold down the left mouse button and drag open a se-
lection box to the desired size, and then release the mouse button. The selected area will then fill
the Solution residuals window, with appropriate changes to the axes. After you have zoomed into
an area, click Full range to restore the graph to its original axes and scale.
Other options available in the Solution residuals window include the following:
• X log converts the horizontal axis to a logarithmic scale.
Performing Calculations
• Y log converts the vertical axis to a logarithmic scale.
• Symbols displays data points on the plotted line.
• Lines displays the plotted line.
• X grid displays the vertical grid lines on the plot.
• Y grid displays the horizontal grid lines on the plot.
• Done cancels the monitor and closes the Solution residuals window, but does not terminate the solver.
• Lower pri changes the solver to a lower priority on the machine permanently for the duration of the cal-
culation.
• Terminate stops the solver project after the current iteration is completed. ANSYS Icepak acknowledges
the termination request in the Message window, but the solver does not stop until the Solution
(projectname) is finished message appears. Note that the Terminate button does not close
the Solution residuals window.
• Print generates a hardcopy of the residuals in the Solution residuals window. See Saving Image Files (p. 152)
for details on saving an image file.
• Set range allows you to specify a range for the values of a variable at a monitor point.
• Full range allows you to restore the graph to its original axes and scale, if you have used the Set range
option.
Note:
You can change the solution-residual display in the Solution residuals window during
the calculation, as described in Changing the Solution Monitors During the Calcula-
tion (p. 873).
36.15.3. Changing the Solution Monitors During the Calculation

During the calculation, ANSYS Icepak will update the solution residuals, point and surface monitors
after each iteration. You can change the display of the convergence monitors while the solver is
running using the Solution monitor definition panel.
This panel is very similar to the Solution monitor parameters panel (see Figure 36.4: The Solution
monitor parameters Panel (p. 837)). You can also specify a Solution ID of the solver calculation you
want to monitor in the Solution monitor definition panel. The default Solution ID will correspond
to the solution ID for the current calculation when the solver is running. You can make changes to
the Solution monitor definition panel while the solver is running. Click Create to make the changes
appear in the Solution residuals graphics display and control windows.
36.15.4. Ending the Calculation

The solution will stop after the specified number of iterations or if the convergence criteria are met.
You can also stop the solver during the calculation using the Terminate button in the Monitor window
(see The Solution residuals Graphics Display and Control Window (p. 871) for details). The message
Solution (projectname) is finished appears in the Message window when the solver
is done. Note that the Solution residuals windows will remain open until you close them by clicking
Done.
Note:
If Sequential solution of flow and energy equations is enabled when you terminate a
calculation, the flow equations will stop calculating and the energy equations will continue
until you click the Terminate button again.
If Write overview of results when finished is selected in the Solve panel, ANSYS Icepak will generate
an overview of results when it has finished the calculation.
If Write report when finished is selected in the Solve panel, ANSYS Icepak will generate the report(s)
that you defined in the Define summary report panel (see Defining Reports (p. 840)).
If Compress solution after reporting is selected in the Solve panel, ANSYS Icepak will compress
some solver-related files when it has finished the calculation to reduce the usage of disk space. This
will not affect postprocessing of the solution.
If Export is selected in the Solve panel, ANSYS Icepak will export the solution data to the file specified
in the Export solution data text entry box (see Advanced Solution Control Options (p. 847) for details).
36.15.5. Judging Convergence

There are no universal metrics for judging convergence. Residual definitions that are useful for one
class of problem are sometimes misleading for other classes of problems. For most ANSYS Icepak mod-
els, the default convergence criterion is sufficient. This criterion requires that the scaled residuals
defined by Equation 40.172 (p. 1009) and Equation 40.174 (p. 1009) in Solution Residuals (p. 1008) decrease
to 10-3 for all equations except the energy and joule equations, for which the criterion is 10−7.
36.16. Diagnostic Tools for Technical Support

ANSYS Icepak includes a number of tools designed to aid your technical support engineer in
troubleshooting problems in the solver execution. These tools are intended for diagnostic purposes
only. The Diagnostics sub-menu provides access to these tools. To open the Diagnostics sub-menu,
select Diagnostics in the Solve menu.
Solve Diagnostics
The following options are available for diagnostic purposes.
• Edit .cas file opens a text-editor window in which you can edit the case file that contains the model inform-
ation used by the solver.
• Edit .diag file opens a text-editor window in which you can edit or view the diagnostic file created for input
to the solver. Typically, this will be of use to your technical support engineer in diagnosing the problem.
• Edit .uns_out file opens a text-editor window in which you can edit or view the residuals file created by
the solver. This is useful to either check the amount of time taken by the solver, or to check for any errors
printed out during the course of the solution.
Diagnostic Tools for Technical Support
• Edit optimization log opens a text-editor window in which you can edit or view the optimization log created
by ANSYS Icepak. This is useful to get detailed information regarding the optimization run. The quantities
reported are the values of design variables for all trials performed, the corresponding objective and constraint
functions, and the relative changes in each of these quantities.
To combine all relevant files for your model into a single file that you can send to your technical support
engineer, select Pack from the File menu.
File Pack
This opens the File selection dialog box, in which you can select a name for the packaged file. See File
Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file.
Chapter 37: Examining the Results
netANSYS Icepak provides a number of different methods for examining the results of your simulation
(also referred to as postprocessing your results). You can create graphical displays of data on different
portions of the model, or two-dimensional (XY) plots of solution data.
• Overview: The Post Menu and Postprocessing Toolbar (p. 877)
• Graphical Displays (p. 880)
• XY Plots (p. 918)
• Selecting a Solution Set to be Examined (p. 929)
• Zoom-In Modeling (p. 929)
• Display Powermap Property (p. 931)
37.1. Overview: The Post Menu and Postprocessing Toolbar

This section describes:
37.1.1.The Post Menu
37.1.2.The Postprocessing Toolbar
37.1.1. The Post Menu

The Post menu is accessible from the Main Menu bar. When you select Post in the Main Menu bar,
a set of options is displayed as shown in Figure 37.1: The Post Menu (p. 878).
Examining the Results
Figure 37.1: The Post Menu
The Post menu contains all of the functions you need to examine your results in ANSYS Icepak. These
functions include the following:
• Displaying results on one or more faces of an object based on nodes (Post Object face (nodes))
• Displaying results on one or more faces of an object based on facets (Post Object face (facets))
• Displaying results on a cross-section of the model (Post Plane cut)
• Displaying results on an isosurface (Post Isosurface)
• Displaying results at a point (Post Point)
• Displaying results at a point on a surface (Post Surface probe)
• Displaying the locations of the minimum and maximum values of postprocessing variables (Post
Min/max locations)
• Plotting a variable along a line through the model (Post Variation plot)
• Plotting a variable for a transient solution along a line through the model (Post 3D Variation plot)
• Plotting a variable over different solutions (Post Trials plot)
Overview: The Post Menu and Postprocessing Toolbar
• Plotting nodal temperatures of network objects and network blocks versus solution iteration / time (Post
Network temperature plot)
• Selecting a specific solution set to be examined (Post Load solution ID)
• Loading postprocessing objects from a file (Post Load post object from file)
• Saving postprocessing objects to a file (Post Save post objects to file)
• Rescaling vectors to their original sizes (Post Rescale vectors)
• Creating zoom-in models (Post Create zoom-in model)
• Writing a data file (Post Workflow data CFD Post/Mechanical data)
• Displaying powermap values (Post Display powermap property)
In addition to these functions, the Post menu contains options for plotting solution residuals (Post
Convergence plot, described in Calculating a Solution (p. 829)), solution variable histories over
time (Post History plot, described in Transient Simulations (p. 627)). Functions for units (Post
Postprocessing units) and transient simulations (Post Transient settings) are described in
Chapters Unit Systems (p. 215) and Transient Simulations (p. 627), respectively. Also, there is an option
for comparing the temperature values of objects with the temperature limits and changing the tem-
perature limits (Post Power and temperature values, described in Power and Temperature Limit
Setup (p. 769)).
If you have saved any postprocessing objects in your project file using the Save postprocessing
objects option in the Save project panel (as described in Saving a Project File (p. 149)), ANSYS Ice-
pak will ask you if you want to load them when you enter the Post menu for the first time.
37.1.2. The Postprocessing Toolbar

The Postprocessing toolbar (Figure 37.2: The Postprocessing Toolbar (p. 879)) contains options that
enable you to examine your results using ANSYS Icepak’s postprocessing objects. A description of
the Postprocessing toolbar options is provided below.
Figure 37.2: The Postprocessing Toolbar
• Object face ( ) enables you to display results on object faces in the model.
• Plane cut ( ) enables you to display results on cross-sections of the model.
• Isosurface ( ) enables you to display results on defined isosurfaces in the model.
• Point ( ) enables you to display results at points in the model.
• Surface probe ( ) enables you to display results at a point on a surface in the model.
• Variation plot ( ) enables you to plot a variable along a line through the model.
• History plot ( ) enables you to plot solution variable histories over time.
• Trials plot ( ) enables you to plot trial solution variables.
• Transient settings ( ) opens the Postprocessing time panel where you can set parameters for tran-
sient simulations.
• Load solution ID ( ) enables you to select a specific solution set to be examined.
• Summary report ( ) opens the Define summary report panel where you can specify a summary report
• Power and temperature values ( ) opens the Power and temperature limit setup panel where you
can compare the temperature values of objects with the temperature limits.
37.2. Graphical Displays

This section describes the following graphical displays:
37.2.1. Overview of Generating Graphical Displays
37.2.2.The Significance of Color in Graphical Displays
37.2.3. Managing Postprocessing Objects
37.2.4. Displaying Results on Object Faces
37.2.5. Displaying Results on Cross-Sections of the Model
37.2.6. Displaying Results on Isosurfaces
37.2.7. Displaying Results at a Point
37.2.8. Contour Attributes
37.2.9. Vector Attributes
37.2.10. Particle Trace Attributes
37.2.1. Overview of Generating Graphical Displays

ANSYS Icepak enables you to view solution results for the variables listed in Variables for Postprocessing
and Reporting (p. 955) in four types of locations in the domain:
• On one or more faces of a selected object in the model (for example, the side of a PCB or the face of a
block)
• On a cross-sectional plane that extends throughout the cabinet or a truncated plane
• on a surface (called an isosurface) defined by single or multiple values of a specified variable, such as
temperature
Graphical Displays
• At a particular point in the model, which can be easily moved to examine results at various locations
Note:
Displaying Results on Object Faces (p. 884)--Displaying Results at a Point (p. 901) describe
how to display results on these four types of locations in the model, which are referred to
as postprocessing objects. Managing Postprocessing Objects (p. 881) describes how to
manage these postprocessing objects (for example, how to delete, deactivate, and save
them).
In the specified portion of the domain, you can display the data in the following ways:
• Contours of a specified variable, such as temperature or pressure
• Vectors of a specified variable
• Particles released from the object or surface
• Mesh on the specified object or surface in a specified color
Parameters that control contour, vector, and particle displays are described in Contour Attributes (p. 904)
-- Particle Trace Attributes (p. 913).
37.2.2. The Significance of Color in Graphical Displays

Contour, vector, and particle displays are associated with a color spectrum representing the range of
values for the variable being displayed (for example, temperature). The spectrum ranges from violet
(minimum value) to red (maximum value).
ANSYS Icepak displays a legend (in the graphics window) showing the color spectrum and its associated
values for the currently-selected postprocessing object. To reposition the legend, hold down the
Control key, press and hold down the middle mouse button, and drag the legend to any location in
the graphics window.
The default color spectrum is evenly distributed across the range of values for the specified variable
(that is, each band of the color spectrum is associated with an equal portion of the variable range).
It is possible, however, to change the ranges in order to increase or decrease the size of the color
band associated with a particular portion of the variable range. To do so, hold down the Control key,
press and hold down the right mouse button, and drag the legend value lines up or down the spec-
trum. To return the legend to its original appearance, select Rescale vectors in the Post menu.
You can change the format of the labels that define the color divisions in the legend using the Settings
panel. See Configuring a Project (p. 234) for details of the data formats available in ANSYS Icepak, and
how to specify the precision for each of the available formats.
37.2.3. Managing Postprocessing Objects

Once you have created postprocessing objects (according to the instructions in Displaying Results
on Object Faces (p. 884) -- Displaying Results at a Point (p. 901)), you can manipulate them using the
Postprocessing node in the Model manager window, shown in Figure 37.3: The Postprocessing Node
in the Model manager Window (p. 882).
Figure 37.3: The Postprocessing Node in the Model manager Window
When you define a new postprocessing object using one of the options in the Post menu or Postpro-
cessing toolbar (that is, Object face, Plane cut, Isosurface, Surface probe, or Point), the object is
added under the Postprocessing node in the Model manager window. As is the case for modeling
objects, each postprocessing object has a unique object name, such as iso.1. In the Model manager
window shown in Figure 37.3: The Postprocessing Node in the Model manager Window (p. 882), for
example, one of each type of postprocessing object is listed.
Summary data associated with the postprocessing object selected in the Model manager window
is displayed in the Edit window (Figure 37.4: The Edit Window for postprocessing objects (p. 882)).
The values displayed are the global and object-specific minima and maxima, location of the maximum
of the variable that is being plotted, total, mean, and standard deviation of the variable, and area of
the postprocessing object (or a value of the specified variable and the location for a point object).
You can save the object’s summary information listed in the Edit window, by clicking the Save button.
This will open the Save summary data panel, in which you can select or specify the name of your
summary file.
Figure 37.4: The Edit Window for postprocessing objects
The following sections describe the ways in which you can manipulate postprocessing objects.
Activating and Deactivating Postprocessing Objects

By default, all postprocessing objects that you create will remain in the graphics window. If you have
created several postprocessing objects, the display can become very cluttered, making it difficult to
examine your results carefully. In such cases, you can remove an object from the display temporarily
by selecting it in the Model manager window, right-clicking to open the context menu, and turning
off the Active option. You can repeat this for each object that you do not want to include in the
display. You can also deactivate an object by selecting it in the Model manager window and dragging
it to the Inactive node in the Model manager window. When an object is deactivated, it is simply
removed from the display, not deleted from ANSYS Icepak. Since it still exists, you can add it to the
display again by turning the Active option back on, or by dragging the object from the Inactive
node into the Postprocessing node of the Model manager window.
Graphical Displays
Modifying Postprocessing Objects

If you want to modify an existing postprocessing object (for example, select different faces of an object
for display), double-click the postprocessing object in the Model manager window, or right-click the
postprocessing object and select the Edit option in the context menu. ANSYS Icepak will open the
appropriate panel (for example, the Object face or Isosurface panel), where you can make the desired
changes to the object.
Deleting Postprocessing Objects
To delete a postprocessing object, select the object in the Model manager window and click the
button. The object will be removed from the display. Alternatively, you can right-click the selected
object in the Model manager window and select Delete from the drop-down list. You can also drag
the selected postprocessing object into the Trash node of the Model manager window.
Note:
Unlike other ANSYS Icepak objects, postprocessing objects are permanently deleted
when a delete operation is performed.
Rescaling Vectors in the Display

If one or more postprocessing objects include vectors, zooming in or out on the display will cause
both the model and the vectors to increase or decrease in size. To redisplay the model with the vectors
drawn at their original sizes, select Rescale vectors in the Post menu.
Saving and Reloading Postprocessing Objects

After creating a number of postprocessing objects, you may want to save them to a file so that you
can reuse them the next time you view this model in ANSYS Icepak. To save all existing postprocessing
objects to a file, select Save post objects to file in the Post menu. Enter a name in the File name
text field in the resulting File selection dialog box, and click Save to save the file.
To read the postprocessing objects back into ANSYS Icepak, select Load post objects from file in
the Post menu. Enter the appropriate filename in the File name text field in the resulting File selection
dialog box, and click Open to load the objects from the file.
Saving, Reloading, and Clearing ANSYS Icepak Views

After obtaining a certain ANSYS Icepak view during postprocessing, you may want to save the view
so that you can revisit it at a later time during your ANSYS Icepak session. To save an ANSYS Ice-
pak view, select Save user view in the Orient menu. ANSYS Icepak will open a Save user view panel,
prompt you for a view name, and save the current view using your specified name. The new view
name is attached to the list of user views at the bottom of the Orient menu. To reload the view back
into ANSYS Icepak at a later time during the same session, select the view name listed at the bottom
of the Orient menu. To remove all saved views from the listing, select Clear user views in the Orient
menu.
Note:
Views are only temporarily saved during a particular ANSYS Icepak work session. The views
are not saved when you quit ANSYS Icepak.
37.2.4. Displaying Results on Object Faces

An ANSYS Icepak object face is defined as a surface consisting of one or more faces of one or more
modeling objects. Note that an object face can be specified not only for single objects or all objects
of a single type, but for groups as well. (You will need to create the group, as described in Grouping
Objects (p. 333), before displaying the results on a group of objects.) By default, all sides of an object
are selected as the object face. Thus, all six sides of a block make up its default object face. Fig-
ure 37.5: Block Object Face (p. 884) shows a block for which only two sides and the top are specified
as parts of the object face.
Figure 37.5: Block Object Face
An object face can be used to isolate a single object in the model, such as a block employed as a
power supply, to determine the effects of the simulation on the surface of the object. In conjunction
with particle traces, an object face can also be instrumental in observing flow. For example, if the
surface of a fan is defined as an object face and particles are introduced, the flow from the fan’s surface
through the model can be observed.
Defining an Object Face (Node)

To define a postprocessing object face to display nodal values that have been interpolated to the
nodes, you will use the Object face panel (Figure 37.6: The Object face Panel (p. 885)). To open the
Graphical Displays
panel, click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar or select Object face (node) in the Post
menu.
Post Object face (node)
Figure 37.6: The Object face Panel
Note:
Object and Object sides in the panel refer to modeling objects (for example, PCBs, grilles,
fans), not postprocessing objects.
Object face in the panel refers to postprocessing objects, not modeling objects (for example,
PCBs, grilles, fans).
The procedure for defining an object face based on nodes is as follows:
1. In the Name field, enter a new name for the object face. The default name is face.n , where n is a sequential
number distinct for each object face created. You can keep the default name if you want, but a customized
name is generally more useful.
2. To select the specific modeling object for which you want to create an object face, select the desired
object (for example, plate.1) in the Object drop-down list. The object name is displayed in the text field
(for example, object plate.1).
3. To specify more than one object for which you want to create the object face, select the desired object
(for example, plate.1) from the Object drop-down list, hold down the Control key, and select another
object from the list. When multiple objects are selected, the object names are listed in the Object text
field separated by spaces.
To select multiple items that are listed consecutively in the drop-down list, you can select the first
item, hold down the Shift key, and then select the last item in the list. All items between the first
selected item and the last selected item will be selected. Click Filter to display the Filter object
list by type panel and select which object types to display. Click Sync to set the selections in the
object tree to those selected in the model tree.
4. Specify which sides of the modeling object should be included in the object face by enabling/disabling
the corresponding options for Object sides. Only those sides appropriate for the object selected in the
Object list will be available. Rectangular-block specifications, for example, include Min X, Max X, Min
Y, Max Y, Min Z, and Max Z. Cylindrical and polygonal blocks, on the other hand, include Top, Bottom,
and Sides. (For a rectangular block, Min X and Max X represent the sides of the block on the axis with
the minimum and maximum values, respectively.) By default, all object sides are active.
5. To make an object face transparent, enable the Transparency option and move the slider bar to observe
different levels of transparency. You can also enter a value ≥0 (opaque) and ‹1.0 (highly transparent)
followed by clicking Display/Update/Done to apply changes.
6. Specify which type of display you want to show on the object face by turning on the appropriate option:
Show mesh, Show contours, Show vectors, or Show particle traces. (You can choose more than one,
but the resulting display may become too busy.)
7. To modify the default attributes of a contour, vector, or particle display, click the corresponding Para-
meters button. See Contour Attributes (p. 904) -- Particle Trace Attributes (p. 913) for details. If you choose
to display the mesh, you can specify the mesh color by selecting a color in the drop-down color palette.
To display the color palette, click the small color rectangle next to the Show mesh option.
8. Click Define to define the object face according to the specifications in the panel, without loading the
data. If the data had already been loaded, this button will be called the Display button. The Define (or
Display) button will change to the Update button, which you can use to update the object face if you
make further changes to the specifications in the panel. To create and display the object face by loading
the data, click the Create button.
Modifying an Existing Object Face

If you want to modify an existing object face, make the desired changes to the entries in the Object
face panel, and then click Update. If you start to make changes but then want to return to the ori-
ginal settings in the panel, click Reset. ANSYS Icepak will update the panel with the settings that
were last saved (that is, the settings that were present when you last clicked Create, Update, or
Done).
Creating another Object Face

If you are already in the Object face panel and you want to create a new object face, click New at
the bottom of the panel. ANSYS Icepak will increment the number on the default Name and clear
the previous settings so that you can start defining a new object face.
Graphical Displays
Deactivating or Deleting an Object Face

If you want to temporarily remove the object face from the display, you can turn off the Active option
at the top of the Object face panel. This has the same effect as turning off the Active option in the
postprocessing object context menu, described in Managing Postprocessing Objects (p. 881).
If you want to permanently delete the object face from ANSYS Icepak, click the Delete button at the
bottom of the Object face panel. This has the same effect as the button, described in Managing
Postprocessing Objects (p. 881).
Defining an Object Face (Facet)

To define a postprocessing object face to display computed face centroid variable values, you will
use the Object face (facet) panel (Figure 37.7: The Object face (facet) Panel (p. 887)). To open the
panel, select Object face (facet) in the Post menu.
Post Object face (facet)
Figure 37.7: The Object face (facet) Panel
The procedure for defining an object face based on facets is as follows:
Note:
Object faces are saved and can be selected from the drop-down list. Click New to
create a new object face, and click Delete to remove one from the list.
1. To select the specific modeling object for which you want to create an object face, select the desired
object in the Object drop-down list. The object name is displayed in the text field.
2. To specify more than one object for which you want to create the object face, select the desired
object from the Object drop-down list, hold down the Control key, and select another object from
the list. When multiple objects are selected, the object names are listed in the Object text field
separated by spaces.
To select multiple items that are listed consecutively in the drop-down list, you can select
the first item, hold down the Shift key, and then select the last item in the list. All items
between the first selected item and the last selected item will be selected. Click Filter to
display the Filter object list by type panel and select which object types to display.
3. To select which variable to display, select the desired variable from the Contours of drop-down list.
4. Specify which sides of the modeling object should be included in the object face by enabling/dis-
abling the corresponding options for Object sides. Only those sides appropriate for the object se-
lected in the Object list will be available. Rectangular-block specifications, for example, include Min
X, Max X, Min Y, Max Y, Min Z, and Max Z. Cylindrical and polygonal blocks, on the other hand,
include Top, Bottom, and Sides. (For a rectangular block, Min X and Max X represent the sides of
the block on the axis with the minimum and maximum values, respectively.)
5. To specify the minimum and maximum values in the displayed value range, select Specified under
Color Levels and enter values for Min and Max.
6. If you want to display the mesh, select Show mesh under Contour options.
7. Select the values to display:
• To display values inside the selected object(s), select Use values adjacent to objects. If selected,
the sign on the Heat flux and Heat transfer coefficient values reflect the heat entering the se-
lected object(s).
• To display values outside the selected object(s), deselect Use values adjacent to objects. If
deselected, the sign on the Heat flux and Heat transfer coefficient values reflect the heat leaving
the selected object(s).
8. Click Display to display the object face.
9. Optionally, click Save profile to save the object face data to a file so that you can read it back into
ANSYS Icepak. See Saving a Contour Plot (p. 908).
37.2.5. Displaying Results on Cross-Sections of the Model

To display results on a cross-section of the model, you will need to create a plane cut. An ANSYS
Icepak plane cut is defined as the region of a specified plane that intersects the model. Plane cuts
Graphical Displays
enable you to examine areas between objects in the model (in which the fluid alone exists), as well
as regions inside objects that contain a fluid or solid material.
There are three ways to specify the plane:
• Specify a point on the plane and the normal to the plane (see Figure 37.8: Plane Cut Defined by Point and
Normal (p. 889)).
Figure 37.8: Plane Cut Defined by Point and Normal
• Specify the equation for the plane.
• Use the mouse to specify the plane in the graphics window.
Defining a Plane Cut

To define a plane cut, you will use the Plane cut panel (Figure 37.9: The Plane cut Panel (p. 890)). To
open the panel, click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar or select Plane cut in the Post
menu.
Post Plane cut
Figure 37.9: The Plane cut Panel
The procedure for defining a plane cut is as follows:
1. In the Name field, enter a new name for the plane cut. The default name is cut.n , where n is a sequential
number distinct for each plane cut created. You can keep the default name if you want, but a customized
2. Define the plane using one of the following four methods:
• Specify a plane through the center of the model:
a. Select X plane through center, Y plane through center, or Z plane through center in the Set
position drop-down list under Plane location in the Plane cut panel. The plane cut created is
perpendicular to the specified axis. For example, selecting Y plane through center creates a plane
in the x-z plane located in the center of the model.
• Specify a point on the plane and the normal direction to the plane:
a. Select Point and normal in the Set position drop-down list.
b. Enter the coordinates of a point on the plane (PX, PY, PZ).
c. Enter a vector defining the direction normal to the plane (NX, NY, NZ). For example, entering (1,
0, 0) for the vector will define a normal pointing in the x direction.
• Specify an equation that defines the plane:
a. Select Coeffs (Ax + By + Cz = D) in the Set position drop-down list.
Graphical Displays
b. Enter the coefficients A, B, C, and D for the equation

(37.1)
• Specify the plane using your mouse:
a. Use the Orient menu or the Orientation commands toolbar to specify the desired orientation. If
you require a horizontal or vertical plane through your model, choose the orientation such that
the plane of the display screen is perpendicular to the desired plane cut. For example, if you want
to display results on a y-z or x-y plane, choose Orient positive Y as the orientation so that the
display-screen plane is the x-z plane. If you want to specify the plane by selecting three points on
it, orient your model as desired.
b. Select Horizontal-screen select, Vertical-screen select, or 3 Points-screen select in the Set po-
sition drop-down list in the Plane cut panel.
c. If you selected the Horizontal-screen select or Vertical-screen select option, click your left mouse
button in the graphics window to indicate a point on the desired plane. ANSYS Icepak will create
a plane cut that is a horizontal or vertical plane perpendicular to the plane of the graphics window
and passing through the selected point.
If you selected the 3 Points-screen select option, select the first, second, and third points
on the plane in the graphics window using the left mouse button. Each point must be on
the edge of an object or the cabinet. If it is not, ANSYS Icepak will move the point to the
nearest location on the edge of an object or the cabinet.
Note:
The procedure for defining the plane cut with your mouse is the same as for defining
a plane for displaying the mesh. See Displaying the Mesh on a Cross-Section of the
Model (p. 815) for additional information (including diagrams).
3. To make a plane cut transparent, enable the Transparency option and move the slider bar to observe
followed by clicking Display/Update/Done to apply the changes.
4. Specify which type of display you want to show on the plane cut by turning on the appropriate option:
Show mesh, Show contours, Show vectors, or Show particle traces. You can choose more than one,
but the resulting display may become too busy.
To display the color palette, click the small color rectangle next to the Show mesh option. Note that,
when 3D multi-level meshing is used, the plane-cut mesh may differ from the mesh displayed by the
Mesh control panel. The following two figures highlight the differences:
Figure 37.10: 3D Multi-Level Plane-cut Mesh Display
Figure 37.11: 3D Multi-Level Plane-cut Mesh Display with Mesh control Panel
6. Click Define to define the plane cut according to the specifications in the panel, without loading the
Display) button will change to the Update button, which you can use to update the plane cut if you
Graphical Displays
make further changes to the specifications in the panel. To create and display the plane cut by loading
7. To advance the currently-displayed plane cut through the cabinet so that you can easily view results on
different cross-sectional planes, use the slider bar under Plane location. You can also generate an anim-
ation of the plane cut moving through the cabinet, as described in the following section.
Modifying an Existing Plane Cut

If you want to modify an existing plane cut, make the desired changes to the entries in the Plane
cut panel, and then click Update. If you start to make changes but then want to return to the original
settings in the panel, click Reset. ANSYS Icepak will update the panel with the settings that were last
saved (that is, the settings that were present when you last clicked Create, Update, or Done).
Creating another Plane Cut

If you are already in the Plane cut panel and you want to create a new plane cut, click New at the
bottom of the panel. ANSYS Icepak will increment the number on the default Name and clear the
previous settings so that you can start defining a new plane cut.
Animating a Plane Cut

If you want to create an animation that progresses from one static view of a plane cut to the next,
go to the Animation section of the Plane cut panel (Figure 37.9: The Plane cut Panel (p. 890)).
To create an animation showing how relevant contours, vectors, particle displays, and/or the mesh
change as you move through the cabinet, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the starting plane cut (Start) and the ending plane cut (End) for the animation. A Start of 0 and
an End of 1 indicates that the animation will begin at one end of the cabinet and finish at the opposite
end. The direction of the animation through the cabinet is defined by the direction of the normal to the
plane specified in the Plane cut panel.
2. Specify the number of steps (Steps), that is, the number of plane cuts ANSYS Icepak should display
between the starting plane and the ending plane. ANSYS Icepak will interpolate smoothly between the
starting plane and the ending plane that you define, creating the specified number of planes. Note that
the number of steps includes the starting and ending planes.
3. Specify the Delay (ms) or the time between each frame in the animation in milliseconds. This will de-
termine the duration of the animation. For example, if you specify 10 plane cuts next to Steps, and then
specify 500 as the Delay (ms), ANSYS Icepak will create a five-second animation of the plane cuts. Note
that the delay value is added to however long it takes ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot for the animation.
The time it takes ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot is dependent on the speed of your system.
GIF or FLI file, as described below.
5. To save the animation to a file, select the Write to file option and click the Write button. This displays
the Save animation file selection dialog box where you can save animations in MPEG, AVI, animated
GIF, FLI, or Flash format. See below for details about saving animations.
Note that when the Write to file option is selected, the Delay (ms) field becomes the Frames/s
field. The Frames/s field designates the number of animation frames displayed per second.
Saving an Animation You can save an animation to an MPEG, AVI, animated GIF, FLI, or Flash file
using the Save animation file selection dialog box. In either format, there are two options for you
to consider when saving an animation file: Print region and Scale factor. These options are available
when you click the Options... button in the Save animation file selection dialog box.
Print region enables you to define the region of the graphics window that should be written to the
file. See Specifying the Print Region (p. 155) for details about specifying the Print region.
The Scale factor is the factor by which ANSYS Icepak will scale the image of the graphics window
when it creates the file. If you specify a Scale factor of less than 1 for any of the files described below,
you may want to thicken the outlines of the cabinet and the objects in the graphics window; otherwise
these outlines might not appear in the animation file. You can use the Graphical styles panel (de-
scribed in Editing the Graphical Styles (p. 243)) to thicken the lines.
Saving a MPEG File To save the animation as an MPEG file, select MPEG files (*.mpg) in the Files
of type drop-down list. Specify a filename in the File name text field and click Save. Note that you
must specify the Scale factor for the MPEG file. If the MPEG file is to be viewed on a Windows machine,
a Scale factor of 0.3 is recommended.
ANSYS Icepak will play the animation in the graphics window and save each frame to a separate
scratch file. It will then combine all the files into a single MPEG file that you can view using an MPEG
player.
For MPEG files to be played properly, you must use one of the following frame rates: 23.976, 24, 25,
29.97, 30, 50, 59.94, or 60.
Saving an AVI File To save the animation as an AVI file, select AVI files (*.avi) in the Files of type
drop-down list. Specify a filename in the File name text field and click Save. You can specify a Scale
factor for the animation, as described above.
scratch file. It will then combine all the files into a single AVI file. You can then import the AVI file
into Microsoft PowerPoint and use the animation in a presentation.
Saving an Animated GIF File To save the animation as an animated GIF file, select GIF files (*.gif)
in the Files of type drop-down list. Specify a filename in the File name text field and click Save. You
can specify a Scale factor for the animated GIF file, as described above. If you want the playback of
the animation in the GIF file to repeat continuously, select the Loop mode option.
To save the animation as an animated GIF file, select GIF files (*.gif) in the Files of type drop-down
list. Specify a filename in the File name text field and click Save. You can specify a Scale factor for
Graphical Displays
the animated GIF file, as described above. If you want the playback of the animation in the GIF file
to repeat continuously, select the Loop mode option.
scratch file. It will then combine all the files into a single animated GIF file that you can view using
a web browser. You can also import the animated GIF file into Microsoft PowerPoint and use the
animation in a presentation.
Saving an Autodesk FLI File To save the animation as an FLI file (an Autodesk animation file
format), select FLI files (*.fli) in the Files of type drop-down list. Specify a filename in the File name
text field and click Save. You can specify a Scale factor for the animation, as described above. If you
want the playback of the animation in the FLI file to repeat continuously, select the Loop mode option.
scratch file. It will then combine all the files into a single FLI file (for example, movie.fli) that you
can view using a web browser if you have an FLI viewer plug-in. It will also create an HTML file (for
example, movie.html) that can be viewed using a web browser. ANSYS Icepak also creates Java
applets that enable you to view the HTML file as an animation.
When you view the HTML file in a web browser, the following commands are available:
• To continue the animation in the chosen direction (forward or backward), use the Space bar on your
keyboard.
• To play the animation forward, use the . key.
• To play the animation backward, use the , key.
• To reverse the direction of the animation during playback, use the r key.
• To speed up the animation, use the + key.
• To slow down the animation, use the - key.
• To return to the original animation speed, use the 0 (zero) key.
Note that ANSYS Icepak also produces two additional files when it creates the FLI file: fliplay.class
and flickframe.class. All four files (for example, movie.fli, movie.html, fliplay.class,
and flickframe.class) must be present for the animation in the HTML file to be played back.
Saving a Flash File
To save the animation as a Flash file, select Flash files (*.swf) in the Files of type drop-down list.
Specify a filename in the File name text field and click Save. You can specify a Scale factor for the
animation, as described above.
scratch file. It will then combine all the files into a single Flash file. You can then import the Flash file
into Microsoft PowerPoint and use the animation in a presentation.
Clipping a Plane Cut

If you have created a plane cut, but you do not want to use the whole plane cut to display data, you
can clip it to create a new plane cut that spans a specified sub-range. The clipped plane cut consists
of those points on the selected plane cut where the x, y, and z values are within the specified range.
To clip an existing plane cut, turn on the Enable clipping option in the Clip to box section in the
Plane cut panel (Figure 37.9: The Plane cut Panel (p. 890)).
Enter values for Min X, Min Y, Min Z, Max X, Max Y, and Max Z, and click Update.
These values can also be automatically determined by aligning the appropriate edges of the clipped
plane cut to the existing edges of objects or bounding boxes of assemblies. The procedure is similar
to that described in Aligning an Object with Another Object in the Model (p. 300).
For example, to set the Min X value, you would first click Min X displayed in orange in the Plane cut
panel, then click the edge in the graphics window that you want to align with the Min X edge of the
clipped plane cut box.
Just as with other postprocessing objects, data associated with the clipped plane cut object (for ex-
ample, specified variable as well as global and object-specific minima and maxima) are displayed in
the Edit window (Figure 37.4: The Edit Window for postprocessing objects (p. 882)), and you can save
them in a file by using the Save button.
Deactivating or Deleting a Plane Cut

If you want to temporarily remove the plane cut from the display, you can turn off the Active option
at the top of the Plane cut panel. This has the same effect as turning off the Active option in the
If you want to permanently delete the plane cut from ANSYS Icepak, click the Delete button at the
bottom of the Plane cut panel. This has the same effect as the button, described in Managing
37.2.6. Displaying Results on Isosurfaces

An isosurface is defined as a surface representing a single value or multiple values of any primary or
derived solution variable, such as temperature. Isosurfaces can take virtually any shape and are
sometimes discontinuous. An example is shown in Figure 37.12: Isosurface Example (p. 897).
Graphical Displays
Figure 37.12: Isosurface Example
An isosurface can be used to examine surfaces of a single value or multiple values for a given solution
variable. For example, an isosurface can be helpful if you are trying to determine how quantities such
as temperature or pressure are convected through a model.
Defining an Isosurface
To define an isosurface, you will use the Isosurface panel (Figure 37.13: The Isosurface Panel (p. 898)).
To open the panel, click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar or select Isosurface in the
Post menu.
Post Isosurface
Figure 37.13: The Isosurface Panel
The procedure for defining an isosurface is as follows:
1. In the Name field, enter a new name for the isosurface. The default name is iso.n, where n is a sequential
number distinct for each isosurface created. You can keep the default name if you want, but a customized
2. Specify the variable on which the isosurface is based. Select the desired variable (for example, Temper-
ature) from the Variable drop-down list. The available variables are described in Variables for Postpro-
cessing and Reporting (p. 955).
3. Specify a single Value or multiple Value(s) of the specified Variable that defines the isosurface. Enter
multiple values separated by spaces. To display the range of values for the selected Variable, click
Variable range. The values present in the solution are displayed in the Message window.
4. To make an isosurface transparent, enable the Transparency option and move the slider bar to observe
followed by clicking Display/Update/Done to apply the changes.
5. Specify which type of display you want to show on the isosurface by turning on the appropriate option:
Show mesh, Show contours, Show vectors, or Show particle traces. (You can choose more than one,
but the resulting display may become too busy.)
To display the color palette, click the small color rectangle next to the Show mesh option.
7. Click Define to define the isosurface according to the specifications in the panel, without loading the
Display) button will change to the Update button, which you can use to update the isosurface if you
make further changes to the specifications in the panel. To create and display the object face by loading
Graphical Displays
Modifying an Existing Isosurface

If you want to modify an existing isosurface, make the desired changes to the entries in the Isosurface
panel, and then click Update. If you start to make changes but then want to return to the original
settings in the panel, click Reset. ANSYS Icepak will update the panel with the settings that were last
saved (that is, the settings that were present when you last clicked Create, Update, or Done).
Creating another Isosurface

If you are already in the Isosurface panel and you want to create a new isosurface, click New at the
bottom of the panel. ANSYS Icepak will increment the number on the default Name and clear the
previous settings so that you can start defining a new isosurface.
Animating an Isosurface
If you want to create an animation that progresses from one static view of an isosurface to the next,
go to the Animation section of the Isosurface panel (Figure 37.13: The Isosurface Panel (p. 898)).
To create an animation showing how relevant contours, vectors, particle displays, and/or the mesh
change as you move through the cabinet, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the starting isosurface (Start) and the ending isosurface (End) for the animation. A Start of 20
and an End of 30 indicates that the animation will begin with the display of an isosurface value of 20,
and finish with the display of an isosurface value of 30.
2. Specify the number of steps (Steps), that is, the number of isosurfaces ANSYS Icepak should display
between the starting value and the ending value. ANSYS Icepak will interpolate smoothly between the
starting value and the ending value that you define, creating the specified number of isosurfaces. Note
that the number of steps includes the starting and ending isosurface values.
termine the duration of the animation. For example, if you specify 10 isosurfaces next to Steps, and then
specify 500 as the Delay (ms), ANSYS Icepak will create a five-second animation of the isosurfaces. Note
that the delay value is added to however long it takes ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot for the animation.
The time it takes ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot is dependent on the speed of your system.
GIF or FLI file, as described below.
5. To save the animation to a file, select the Write to file option and click the Write button. This displays
the Save animation file selection dialog box where you can save animations in MPEG, AVI, animated
GIF, FLI, or Flash format. See below for details about saving animations.
Saving an Animation
You can save an animation to an MPEG, AVI, animated GIF, FLI, or Flash file using the Save animation
file selection dialog box. See Saving an Animation (p. 894) for details.
Clipping an Isosurface
If you have created an isosurface, but you do not want to use the whole isosurface to display data,
you can clip it to create a new isosurface that spans a specified sub-range. The clipped isosurface
consists of those points on the selected isosurface where the x, y, and z values are within the specified
range.
To clip an existing isosurface, turn on the Enable clipping option in the Clip to box section of the
Isosurface panel (Figure 37.13: The Isosurface Panel (p. 898)).
Enter values for Min X, Min Y, Min Z, Max X, Max Y, and Max Z, and click Update.
isosurface to the existing edges of objects or bounding boxes of assemblies. The procedure is similar
to that described in Aligning an Object with Another Object in the Model (p. 300).
For example, to set the Min X value, you would first click Min X displayed in orange in the Isosurface
panel, then click the edge in the graphics window that you want to align with the Min X edge of the
clipped isosurface box.
Just as with other postprocessing objects, data associated with the clipped isosurface object (for ex-
ample, specified variable as well as global and object-specific minimum and maximum values) are
displayed in the Edit window (Figure 37.4: The Edit Window for postprocessing objects (p. 882)), and
you can save them in a file by using the Save button.
Deactivating or Deleting an Isosurface

If you want to temporarily remove the isosurface from the display, you can turn off the Active option
at the top of the Isosurface panel. This has the same effect as turning off the Active option in the
If you want to permanently delete the isosurface from ANSYS Icepak, click the Delete button at the
bottom of the Plane cut panel. This has the same effect as the button, described in Managing
Graphical Displays
37.2.7. Displaying Results at a Point

A point is defined as a geometric location in the model and is specified either as a three-dimensional
coordinate or as a mesh node number. After a point has been created, you can move it through the
model interactively (as described later in this section).
As the point is dragged through the model, its current location will be displayed and continuously
updated on the postprocessing objects Edit panel (described in Managing Postprocessing Ob-
jects (p. 881)). The value of the velocity field and the variable for which the point is defined are also
displayed, thereby allowing you to interactively acquire information about the solution. If you select
the option to leave a trail behind the point, its path through the model will be clearly marked by a
continuous curve, as shown in Figure 37.14: Point Object (p. 901). If the option to display the vector
is selected, the vector associated with the selected vector variable at the point’s current location will
also be shown.
Figure 37.14: Point Object
If the option to display particles is selected, particle traces starting from the point will be displayed.
A point object can be used to probe the model, either to determine the value of a solution variable
at a specific point (for example, the location of a thermocouple in a physical model) or as a starting
point for a broader analysis.
Note:
When using a point object, you may find it necessary to re-orient the model (for example,
along the coordinate axes) in order to avoid visual confusion regarding the exact location
of the point relative to the rest of the model.
Defining a Point
To define a point, you will use the Point panel (Figure 37.15: The Point Panel (p. 902)). To open the
panel, click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar or select Point in the Post menu.
Post Point
Figure 37.15: The Point Panel
The procedure for defining a point is as follows:
1. In the Name field, enter a new name for the point. The default name is point.n , where n is a sequential
number distinct for each point created. You can keep the default name if you want, but a customized
2. Specify the solution variable associated with the point. Select the desired variable (for example, Temper-
ature) from the Variable drop-down list. The available variables are described in Variables for Postpro-
cessing and Reporting (p. 955).
3. Enter the coordinates of the point (separated by spaces) next to Position.
4. (Optional) Specify the size of the point (in pixel units) in the Point size field. The default size is 4; if the
point is too small for you to see easily, you may want to increase the Point size.
5. (Optional) If you want to mark the point path by a visible trail as you move it from its initial location
through the model (as shown in Figure 37.14: Point Object (p. 901)), turn on the Leave trail option.
6. (Optional) If you want to show the magnitude and direction of the velocity at the current location of the
point (as shown in Figure 37.14: Point Object (p. 901)), turn on the Show vector option. To modify the
default vector definition, click Edit attributes. See Vector Attributes (p. 909) for details.
7. (Optional) If you want to display particle traces starting from the current location of the point, turn on
the Show particles option. To modify the default particle-trace definition, click Edit attributes. See
Particle Trace Attributes (p. 913) for details.
8. Click Define to define the point according to the specifications in the panel, without loading the data.
If the data had already been loaded, this button will be called the Display button. The Define (or Display)
button will change to the Update button, which you can use to update the point if you make further
changes to the specifications in the panel. To create and display the object face by loading the data,
click the Create button.
Graphical Displays
Moving a Point Interactively

As mentioned earlier, you can move a point through the model interactively. Hold down the Shift
key, press and hold down any one of the mouse buttons, and drag the point through the model in
the graphics display. As the point is dragged through the model, its current location will be displayed
and continuously updated in the Edit window (described in Managing Postprocessing Objects (p. 881)).
Modifying an Existing Point

If you want to modify an existing point, make the desired changes to the entries in the Point panel,
and then click Update. If you start to make changes but then want to return to the original settings
in the panel, click Reset. ANSYS Icepak will update the panel with the settings that were last saved
(that is, the settings that were present when you last clicked Create, Update, or Done).
Creating another Point

If you are already in the Point panel and you want to create a new point, click New at the bottom
of the panel. ANSYS Icepak will increment the number on the default Name and clear the previous
settings so that you can start defining a new point.
Deactivating or Deleting a Point

If you want to temporarily remove the point from the display, you can turn off the Active option at
the top of the Point panel. This has the same effect as turning off the Active option in the postpro-
cessing objects context menu, described in Managing Postprocessing Objects (p. 881).
If you want to permanently delete the point from ANSYS Icepak, click the Delete button at the bottom
of the Plane cut panel. This has the same effect as the button, described in Managing Postpro-
cessing Objects (p. 881).
Displaying the Value of a Variable at a Point

To display the value of a variable at a point on any postprocessing object that is displayed in the
graphics window, select Surface probe in the Post menu or click the button.
Post Surface probe
Click the postprocessing object in the graphics window using the left mouse button. ANSYS Icepak will
display the value of the variable at the point you selected in the graphics window. Additionally, the
value of the variable and the coordinate location of the point will be printed in the Message window.
If you cannot see the value in the graphics window, press the F9 key on the keyboard to switch the
mode of the mouse to the graphics manipulation functions described in Manipulating Graphics With
the Mouse (p. 128) and then rotate the model in the usual way. Use the F9 key to return to the Surface
probe function.
Displaying Minimum and Maximum Point Values

If you would like ANSYS Icepak to report the location of the minimum and maximum values of an
available postprocessing variable, select Min/max locations in the Post menu to open the Min/max
locations panel (Figure 37.16: The Min/max locations Panel (p. 904)).
Post Min/max locations
Figure 37.16: The Min/max locations Panel
In the Min/max locations panel, click the name of the variable for which you want ANSYS Icepak to
display the locations of the minimum and maximum values. ANSYS Icepak will display the points in
the graphics window along with their coordinate locations and their values. The values and coordinate
locations of the points will be also be printed in the Message window. The variables available in the
Min/max locations panel are described in Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955).
37.2.8. Contour Attributes

Contours are representations of the variation of a specified variable drawn as lines or solid bands. An
individual contour follows a single value of a variable and can curve around or through objects.
Contour plots are used to examine how a variable changes locally or throughout the model, and are
often useful for locating severe gradients and conditions (for example, hot spots on the surfaces of
objects).
Line contours (for example, Figure 37.17: Contour Plot (p. 905)) resemble topological maps. Solid con-
tours can be specified as either smooth or bands. For smooth contours the colors change in continuous
gradations from one boundary of the contour to the other. For banded contours, the colors change
abruptly at the contour boundaries.
Graphical Displays
Figure 37.17: Contour Plot
Overview of Defining a Contour Plot

If you have selected Show contours as the type of display to be shown on an object face, plane cut,
or isosurface (in the Object face, Plane cut, or Isosurface panel), you can click the associated Para-
meters button to modify the definition of the contour plot. Figure 37.18: The Object face contours
Panel (p. 906) shows an example of the Object face contours panel.
Figure 37.18: The Object face contours Panel
In the Object face contours panel, the Plane cut contours panel, or the Isosurface contours panel,
you can specify the variable to be plotted, the type of contour plot (line or solid), the color levels for
the plot, and several characteristics of the contour lines or solid contours. When you are satisfied with
the new settings, click Apply to see the results in the graphics window.
Selecting the Variable to be Plotted

To choose the variable to be displayed, select the desired variable (for example, Temperature) from
the Variable drop-down list. The available variables are described in Variables for Postprocessing and
Reporting (p. 955).
Specifying a Line or Solid Contour Plot

To specify whether you want a line contour plot or a solid contour plot (or both), turn on the Solid
or Line option for Contour options. If you select both, the contours will be displayed as solid color
bands with lines superimposed on them.
For line contour plots, you will specify how the line color is determined, and for solid contour plots
you will specify the shading. For both, you will also specify how the spacing or band width between
contours is determined.
Constant or Variable Color for a Line Contour Plot
There are two ways to color the lines on a line contour plot. To vary the color of the lines based on
the value of the variable being plotted, select the Variable option in the Line color drop-down list.
To have a single color for all the lines, select the Fixed option in the Line color drop-down list and
then specify a color in the Color drop-down color palette.
Graphical Displays
Shading for a Solid Contour Plot
There are two ways to shade the contours on a solid contour plot. To vary the colors smoothly in
continuous gradations from one boundary of the contour to the other, select the Smooth option
under Shading options. For plane cut contours, you can view smooth shading in 3D, click on 3D
and enter scale and ref values. The scale values are arbitrary numbers that aid in visualization. The
ref value, enabled for 3D plotting only, refers to the user set ambient condition value of a physical
quantity under consideration. Changing the ref value repositions the plane surface position such that
the base of 3D contour would have its value set as the ref value. To have the colors change abruptly
at the contour boundaries, select the Banded option.
Note:
You can use the Surface probe to select points on 3D shaded contours. See Displaying
the Value of a Variable at a Point (p. 903). The reference values are by default set to
the minimum value of the lower and upper boundary of the displayed data.
Specifying the Line Spacing or Band Width
For both line and solid contour plots, there are three ways to specify the line spacing or band width:
• Specify the number of contour levels or bands explicitly:
1. Select the Fixed option in the Level spacing drop-down list.
2. Enter the number of lines or bands in the Number field.
3. Specify how the maximum and minimum levels of the contour range should be determined:
– To set the color levels explicitly, select Specified under Color levels and enter the Min and Max
values.
– To have ANSYS Icepak compute the levels for you, select Calculated, and then choose Global limits,
This object, or Visible on screen from the drop-down list as the method used to compute the
levels. Global limits uses the maximum and minimum values of the variable throughout the whole
model. This object uses the maximum and minimum values of the variable for the current postpro-
cessing object only. Visible on screen uses the maximum and minimum values of the variable for
all postprocessing objects currently visible in the graphics window.
• Specify the width of the bands or the size of the interval between lines explicitly:
1. Select the Interval option in the Level spacing drop-down list.
2. Specify the band width or the size of the interval between lines in the Increment field. The units for
the Increment are the units of the variable being plotted.
3. Specify the minimum value for the contour range in the Start value field.
ANSYS Icepak will generate subsequent intervals by repeatedly adding the Increment to the Start
value.
• Specify the individual values for each line or band as discrete values of the variable:
1. Select the Input option in the Level spacing drop-down list.
2. In the field to the right of Input levels, enter the desired values for the contour lines or bands separated
by spaces (for example, 5 10 15).
You can specify as many values as you want with the Input option. If you enter more values than
the text field can accommodate, the numbers entered first will disappear at the left side of the
field, but will not be lost as data. You can drag the middle mouse button across the text field to
view the hidden values at the beginning or end of the field, or use the left and right arrows on
your keyboard.
Displaying the Value of a Variable on a Line
To display the value of a variable on a line, click Display and enter a number in the Interval text box.
Interval represents the number of sections of a line where the values will be displayed. The default
value is 4. The format or precision of these values can be controlled using the Display section of the
Preferences panel.
Specifying the Color Levels

The color spectrum for a line or solid contour plot is distributed across a range of values for the
variable being plotted. There are two ways to specify the minimum and maximum limits for this
range:
• To set the color levels explicitly, select Specified under Color levels and enter the Min and Max values.
• To have ANSYS Icepak compute the color levels for you, select Calculated under Color levels, and then
select Global limits, This object, or Visible on screen from the drop-down list as the method used to
compute the color levels. Global limits uses the maximum and minimum values of the variable
throughout the whole model. This object uses the maximum and minimum values of the variable for the
current postprocessing object only. Visible on screen uses the maximum and minimum values of the
variable for all postprocessing objects currently visible in the graphics window.
Note:
The selection of Specified or Calculated differs from the selection associated with the
Fixed option for line spacing or band width. The range for the line spacing or band width
indicates the minimum and maximum values that should be plotted, and the range for
the color indicates the minimum and maximum values associated with the color spectrum.
It is possible for the color range to be wider than the range of values being plotted, in
which case not all colors in the spectrum will be used.
Saving a Contour Plot

After creating a contour plot, you can save the contour data to a file so that you can read it back into
ANSYS Icepak as a profile. This is useful if you have solved a large complicated problem and you want
to zoom in to a specific region of your model and solve this region in more detail. You can use the
contour data as the boundary conditions for the region you want to study in more detail, and then
calculate a solution only for this region.
To save contour data, create a contour plot for one of the boundaries of the region to be studied in
detail, and then click Save profile in the associated contour panel (for example, Figure 37.18: The
Object face contours Panel (p. 906)). Enter a name for the contour plot in the resulting File selection
dialog box and click Accept to save the data. You can then create a wall or an opening at the same
Graphical Displays
boundary of the region to be studied in detail. To use the contour data as the boundary condition
for the wall or opening, define a spatial profile on the wall or opening using the contour data. (For
information on specifying a spatial profile for an opening, see Openings (p. 393); for a wall, see
Walls (p. 467).)
Note:
The shape and size of the plane containing the contour data you save does not have to
be exactly the same shape and size as the opening or wall that you specify. For example,
if you save contour data on a plane of size 10 cm 10 cm, and you use this data to define
a boundary profile for an opening, the size of the opening does not have to be 10 cm
10 cm. If the size of the opening is 5 cm 5 cm, ANSYS Icepak will use the contour data
in this area and ignore the contour data outside this area. If the size of the opening is
15 cm 15 cm, ANSYS Icepak will use the contour data at the edge of the 10 cm 10 cm
plane in the area of the opening that is larger than 10 cm 10 cm.
37.2.9. Vector Attributes

An ANSYS Icepak postprocessing vector is an arrow, of which the length and direction represent the
magnitude and direction of the velocity at a specific location in the model. In addition, the color of
the arrow can represent the value of a scalar solution variable at the vector location. Figure 37.19: Vector
Plot (p. 910) shows an example vector plot.
Figure 37.19: Vector Plot
Overview of Defining a Vector Plot

If you have selected Show vectors as the type of display to be shown on an object face, plane cut,
or isosurface (in the Object face, Plane cut, or Isosurface panel), you can click the associated Para-
meters button to modify the definition of the vector plot in the corresponding vector panel (for ex-
ample, Figure 37.20: The Object face vectors Panel (p. 911)). If you are displaying the vector at a point,
you can turn on the Show vector option and click the Edit attributes button in the Point panel.
Graphical Displays
Figure 37.20: The Object face vectors Panel
In the Object face vectors panel, Plane cut vectors panel, or Isosurface vectors panel, you can
specify the distribution, color, and other characteristics of the vectors, and the color limits for the
plot. When you are satisfied with the new settings, click Apply to see the results in the graphics
window.
Specifying the Distribution of the Vectors

By default, a vector will be displayed at each node point on the surface of the postprocessing object.
(This is indicated by the selection of Mesh points for the Display options.) In regions where there
are more mesh elements (for example, near modeling objects), there will be more vectors than in
regions with fewer mesh elements (for example, in open spaces). If you prefer to display vectors that
are uniformly distributed, select the Uniform option for Display options. You can then specify the
total number of vectors in the field to the right of Uniform.
Specifying the Color of the Vectors

Vector color can be based on the magnitude of the velocity or on the value of a scalar variable. You
can also assign a single color to all vectors.
• To base the vector color on the magnitude of the velocity (the default), select Velocity magnitude in the
Color by drop-down list.
• To base the color on the value of a scalar variable, select Scalar variable in the Color by drop-down list
and then select the desired scalar variable (for example, Temperature) from the Color variable drop-
down list. The available variables are described in Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955).
• To display single-color vectors, select Fixed in the Color by drop-down list and then specify a color in the
Fixed color drop-down color palette.
If you choose a non-fixed vector color (that is, if you choose Velocity magnitude or Scalar variable),
the color spectrum for the vector plot will be distributed across a range of values for the velocity or
specified scalar variable. There are two ways to specify the minimum and maximum limits for this
range:
Scaling the Vectors

There are two ways to scale the size of the vectors:
• Specify a scaling factor for all vectors by selecting the Factor option for Scale and entering the factor in
the text field. The default factor of 1 results in a maximum vector size of approximately 1/2 inch on the
screen.
• Specify a scaling factor for the largest vector by selecting the Max pixels option for Scale and entering
the maximum number of pixels in the text field. The size of the largest vector on the screen will be set to
the specified number of pixels, and all other vectors will be scaled proportionally.
Limiting the Display of Vectors

If there are large differences in magnitude among displayed vectors, you may want to limit the display
of the larger vectors so that you can see the smaller vectors more easily. To limit the display, enter
the desired Cutoff magnitude. Any vector with a magnitude greater than the specified Cutoff
magnitude value will not be displayed.
Display of Vector Arrows

By default, the vectors are displayed with 2D arrow heads. You can display the vectors as other shapes
by clicking at the Arrow style drop-down list.
The different Arrow style options are:
• No arrow heads
• Open arrow heads
• 2D arrow heads
• 3D arrow heads
• Dart
• Diamond
• Rhomboid
Figure 37.21: Arrow Styles: 2D arrow heads and Rhomboid (p. 913) showcases two such arrow styles:
2D arrow heads and Rhomboid.
Graphical Displays
Figure 37.21: Arrow Styles: 2D arrow heads and Rhomboid
37.2.10. Particle Trace Attributes

A particle trace represents the path of a hypothetical "massless" particle through the model. The path
of the particle is based on the computed flow field. Particle traces provide information similar to that
obtained by introducing dye or smoke into the fluid of a real model. They are used primarily to observe
flow in the model (for example, to display the path of an air stream coming from a fan, as shown in
Figure 37.22: Particle Trace Plot (p. 914)).
Figure 37.22: Particle Trace Plot
Overview of Defining a Particle Trace Plot

If you have selected Show particle traces as the type of display to be shown on an object face, plane
cut, isosurface, or point (in the Object face, Plane cut, Isosurface, or Point panel), you can click the
associated Parameters button to modify the definition of the particle trace plot in the respective
particles panel (for example, see Figure 37.23: The Object face particles Panel (p. 915)).
Graphical Displays
Figure 37.23: The Object face particles Panel
In the Object face particles panel, Plane cut particles panel, Isosurface particles panel, or Point
particles panel, you can specify the marker style and size, the frequency of their position calculation,
their distribution, and other characteristics. When you are satisfied with the new settings, click Apply
to see the results in the graphics window.
Specifying Parameters for the Particle Position Calculation

The following parameters control the computation of the particle positions:
• The Start time specifies the time at which the particle traces begin.
• The End time specifies when the particle traces should end. ANSYS Icepak estimates an end time from
the time scale of the flow such that a particle introduced with the highest velocity occurring in the solution
will traverse the length of the enclosure. You can specify a smaller value if you want the particle traces to
end before they reach the end of the domain.
• Transient particle traces (used for transient simulations only) creates particle traces for a transient solution
at a particular time by utilizing the velocity vector field at that time.
• Reverse direction can be used to reverse the direction of the particle traces by tracing their path prior
to their introduction at an object face, plane cut, isosurface, or point (for example to display the path of
an air stream coming into and exiting the outlet grille shown in Figure 37.22: Particle Trace Plot (p. 914)).
Specifying the Distribution of the Particle Traces

By default, particles traces will be uniformly distributed. (This is indicated by the selection of Uniform
for the Display options.) You can specify the total number of particles to be released in the field to
the right of Uniform. If you prefer to display particles released from each node point on the surface
of the postprocessing object, select the Mesh points option for Display options. In regions where
there are more mesh elements, you can thin out or reduce the particle traces by changing the Skip
value. By default, Skip is set to 0 indicating that a particle trace is drawn for each cell in the domain.
If you increase Skip to 1, every other particle trace will be displayed. If you increase Skip to 2, every
third particle trace will be displayed and so on. The order of particle traces will determine which
particle traces are skipped or drawn; therefore, adaption and reordering will change the appearance
of the particle trace display when a non-zero Skip value is used.
Selecting the Display Style for the Particle Traces

You can display particle traces with cone-styled markers, dot-styled markers, or no markers.
In the Style group box (Figure 37.23: The Object face particles Panel (p. 915)), select the Trail check
box to display the particle traces. You can specify different particle trace widths by entering a value
in the Width field.
In the Marker drop-down list, you can select the marker style as cone, dot, or none. To change the
size of the markers, select the Size check box and specify a value in the adjacent field. The cone-
styled and dot-styled markers are shown in Figure 37.24: Cone-Styled Markers and Dot-Styled Markers
for Particle Traces (p. 916). Note that if you select none as the marker style, the particle traces will
appear without any markers.
Figure 37.24: Cone-Styled Markers and Dot-Styled Markers for Particle Traces
Graphical Displays
You can also change the marker spacing by going to Edit Preferences. Under the Defaults node,
select Postprocessing and specify a value for Particle trail marker spacing. See Postprocessing
Options (p. 249) of the Icepak User’s Guide for more information.
Animating the Particle Traces

By default, the complete particle trace will be displayed all at once. If you want to see the particle
trace appear gradually, as the particles move through the domain, you can animate them using the
Animation section of the Object face particles panel, Plane cut particles panel, Isosurface particles
panel, or Point particles panel.
To create an animation of a particle trace, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the starting animation "frame" (Start) and the ending frame (End) for the animation. The default
value for End is computed from the values found in the Particle options section of the corresponding
particles panel. Changing this default value will change the number of particle steps.
2. Specify the number of Steps, that is, the number of frames ANSYS Icepak should display between the
start and end of the animation. ANSYS Icepak will interpolate smoothly between the start and end of
the animation, creating the specified number of frames. Note that the number of steps includes the
starting and ending frames.
termine the duration of the animation. For example, if you specify 10 frames next to Steps, and then
specify 500 as the Delay (ms), ANSYS Icepak will create a five-second animation of the particle trace.
Note that the delay value is added to however long it takes ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot for the
animation. The time it takes ANSYS Icepak to create a snapshot is dependent on the speed of your system.
GIF or FLI file, as described in Saving an Animation (p. 894).
5. If you want ANSYS Icepak to save the animation to a file, select the Write to file option and click the
Write button. This displays the Save animation file selection dialog box where you can save animations
in MPEG, Flash, AVI, animated GIF, or FLI format. See Saving an Animation (p. 894) for details on saving
an animation.
Specifying the Color of the Particle Traces

Particle trace color can be based on the value of a scalar variable, or all particle traces can be the
same color.
• To base the color on the value of a scalar variable, select Scalar variable in the Color by drop-down list
and then select the desired scalar variable (for example, Temperature) from the Variable drop-down list.
The available variables are described in Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955).
• To display single-color particle traces, select Fixed in the Color by drop-down list and specify a color in
the Fixed color drop-down color palette.
If you choose a non-fixed particle color (that is, if you choose Scalar variable or Time), the color
spectrum for the particle trace plot will be distributed across a range of values for the specified variable.
There are two ways to specify the minimum and maximum limits for this range:
37.3. XY Plots
ANSYS Icepak enables you to create five types of XY plots: convergence, history, variation, trials and
network temperature. The first two are described in Defining Solution Monitors (p. 837) and Creating a
History Plot (p. 647), respectively, while the variation plot, trials plot and network temperature plots are
described here.
37.3.1. Variation Plots
37.3.2.Trials Plots
37.3.3. Network Temperature Plots
37.3.1. Variation Plots

A variation plot enables you to examine a variable along any line in 3D space through the model.
Figure 37.25: Variation Plot (p. 919) shows an example of 2D and 3D variation plots. The distance along
the line is plotted on the x axis and the corresponding value of the variable is plotted along the y
axis.
Note:
Time is shown on the z axis in 3D Variation plots.
XY Plots
Figure 37.25: Variation Plot
Generating a Variation Plot

To generate a 2D variation plot, you will use the Variation plot panel (Figure 37.26: 2D Variation
plot (p. 920)). To open the panel, click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar or select Variation
plot in the Post menu.
Post Variation plot
Figure 37.26: 2D Variation plot
The procedure for defining a 2D variation plot is as follows:
1. Select the variable to be plotted (for example, Temperature) from the Variable drop-down list. The
available variables are described in Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955).
2. Specify the initial point of the line (X, Y, Z) and the vector (X, Y, Z) that defines the direction of the line.
There are three methods available for defining the line:
• Enter the Point and Direction explicitly in the panel.
• Use your mouse to define the line in the graphics window:
a. Use the Orient menu or the Orientation commands toolbar to specify the desired orientation.
Choose the orientation such that the plane of the display screen is perpendicular to the desired
line. For example, if you want to display results on a line in the z direction, choose Home as the
orientation so that the display-screen plane is the x- y plane.
b. Click From screen in the Variation plot panel.
c. Click your left mouse button in the graphics window to indicate a point on the desired line. The
resulting line will be normal to the plane of the graphics window and pass through the selected
point.
ANSYS Icepak will update the Point and Direction to reflect the line definition.
• Define the line from two existing point objects:
a. Click From point objects in the Variation plot panel.
XY Plots
b. In the Model manager window, select two point objects from the Postprocessing node. If there
are only two postprocessing point objects to choose from, ANSYS Icepak will automatically use
them. If there are more than two point objects, ANSYS Icepak will open a Selection panel that will
prompt you to choose two postprocessing point objects. The first point you select defines the
initial point, and the direction is defined as the vector from the first point to the second point.
ANSYS Icepak will update the Point and Direction to reflect the line definition.
3. Click Create to display the plot.
To create and define a 3D variation plot go to Post 3D Variation Plot. A 3D variation plot is only
available for transient problems.
Figure 37.27: 3D Variation plot
Modifying the Range of the Variation Plot (2D)

Once you have generated the variation plot, you can easily zoom in on a specific portion of the plot.
To zoom on an area, position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area to be zoomed, hold down
the left mouse button and drag open a selection box window to the desired size, and then release
the mouse button. The selected area will then fill the plot window, with appropriate changes to the
axes. After you have zoomed into an area, click the Full range button to restore the graph to its ori-
ginal axes and scale. In addition, you can set the minimum and maximum values for the scales on
the axes by clicking on the Set range button. In the Set range panel enter values for Min X, Min Y,
Max X, and Max Y and enable the check boxes.
Modifying the Range of the Variation Plot (3D)

The 3D variation plot covers most of the features as in the 2D variation plot. In the 3D variation plot,
the Set range panel also includes Min Z and Max Z. Click Accept for the changes to take effect.
There is no zoom functionality provided like in the 2D variation plot.
Note:
For 3D variation plots, the Delete button will delete all time curves unlike for 2D variation
plots where you can selectively delete a particular time curve.
Modifying the Appearance of the Plot (2D plot only)

Several options for controlling the appearance of the plot are available at the bottom of the plot
window:
Clipping a Variation Plot

If you have created a variation plot, but you do not want to examine the entire line, you can clip it
to create a segment that spans a specified range. The clipped region consists of those points where
the x, y, and z values are within a specified range. To clip an existing line, turn on the Enable clipping
option in the Clip to box section of the 2D or 3D Variation plot panel. (Figure 37.28: The Clip to box
Section of the Variation Plot Panel (p. 922))
Figure 37.28: The Clip to box Section of the Variation Plot Panel
Enter values for Min X, Min Y, Min Z, Max X, Max Y and Max Z and click Create.
XY Plots
line to the existing edges of objects or bounding boxes of assemblies. The procedure is similar to
that described in Aligning an Object with Another Object in the Model (p. 300).
For example, to set the Min X value, you would first click Min X displayed in orange in the Variation
Plot panel, then click the edge in the graphics window that you want to align with the Min X edge
of the clipped plot cut box
Printing the Variation Plot

If you want to print an image of the variation plot, click the Print button at the bottom of the variation
plot window. You can print 2D and 3D variation plots. See Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details on
saving an image.
Resetting the Variation Plot (3D plot only)

If you want to reset a variation plot, click the Reset button at the bottom of the variation plot window.
Arrows pointing to the x and y coordinates will be displayed.
You can pick a point on a plot curve to know its coordinates on the 3D graph, using the mouse. The
coordinate displays a plotted point variable’s value, distance and its associated trial number. To aid
user in calculating the coordinate of a picked point, two arrows originating from picked point are
shown directing to X-Y axes as projections. The coordinate of picked point is also printed in the
message window. To remove arrows in the graph, use the Reset button.
Saving and Reloading Variation Plot Data

After generating a variation plot, you may want to save the data curve to a file so that you can reuse
it the next time you view this model in ANSYS Icepak. To save variation plot data to a file, click the
Save button at the bottom of the variation plot window. Enter a filename in the resulting Save curve
dialog box, and click Accept to save the file.
To read the data curve back into ANSYS Icepak, click the Load button at the bottom of the variation
plot window. Enter the appropriate filename in the resulting Load curve dialog box, and click Accept
to load the data.
37.3.2. Trials Plots

A trials plot enables you to compare variables at a particular point in 3D space between different
solutions for the current model. In the example shown in Figure 37.29: Trials Plot (p. 924), the trial
solution is plotted on the axis and the corresponding value of the variable (pressure) is plotted
along the axis. You may, however, select any variable to be plotted on the axis against the
axis variable, in which case the plot points will represent one variable as a function of the other at
the designated point in the model domain for the specified trials.
Figure 37.29: Trials Plot
Generating a Trials Plot

To generate a trials plot, you will use the Trials plot panel (Figure 37.30: The Trials plot Panel (p. 925)).
To open the panel, click the button in the Postprocessing toolbar or select Trials plot in the
Post menu.
Post Trials plot
XY Plots
Figure 37.30: The Trials plot Panel
The procedure for defining a trials plot is as follows:
1. Select the variables to be plotted (for example, Temperature) from the X Variable and Y Variable drop-
down lists. If you select Trial for either the X or Y axis, the name of the solutions specified below will
appear as the axis label. The other available variables are described in Variables for Postprocessing and
Reporting (p. 955).
2. Specify a set of solutions to compare using the Solution names field. You can type a solution name that
contains an asterisk or a question mark in place of characters or a character, respectively. For example,
typing rad* compares solutions radiation00, radiation01, and radiation02, but not no-
rad00. Typing rad? compares solutions rad1, rad2, and rad3, but not rad10, or rad100. Use the
default * to specify all solutions for the current model.
3. There are three options to specify the location of the point of interest for the trials plot:
• Add location enables you to specify the coordinates of a point. Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates or
select From screen to select the points on the screen with the left button. Click the Done button. The
point will appear in the Right-click points to remove list.
• Add post object enables you to select an existing point object from the Selection panel (Fig-
ure 37.31: The Selection Panel (p. 926)).
Figure 37.31: The Selection Panel
In the Selection panel, select the point in the list and click Okay. The point will appear in the
Right-click points to remove list in the Trials plot panel. See Displaying Results at a Point (p. 901)
for details on creating a point object.
• Add point enables you to select an existing point from the point drop-down list or create a new point.
See Points (p. 649) for details about creating points.
4. If there are points in the Trials plot panel that you no longer need, you can easily delete them. To remove
specified points, right mouse click the individual point names in the Right-click points to remove list
and click Remove points. The points will be permanently removed from the Add point drop-down list
in the Trials plot panel.
5. Click Create to display the XY trials plot of the selected variable(s) at the point(s) specified. Click Close
to close the Trials plot panel without creating a trials plot.
Modifying the Range of the Trials Plot

Once you have generated the trials plot, you can easily zoom in on a specific portion of the plot. To
zoom on an area, position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area to be zoomed, hold down the
left mouse button and drag open a selection box window to the desired size, and then release the
mouse button. The selected area will then fill the plot window, with appropriate changes to the axes.
After you have zoomed into an area, click the Full range button to restore the graph to its original
axes and scale.
Modifying the Appearance of the Plot

Several options for controlling the appearance of the plot are available at the bottom of the plot
window:
XY Plots
Printing the Trials Plot

If you want to print an image of the trials plot, click the Print button at the bottom of the trials plot
window. See Saving Image Files (p. 152) for details on saving an image.
Saving and Reloading Trials Plot Data

After generating a trials plot, you may want to save the data curve to a file so that you can reuse it
the next time you view this model in ANSYS Icepak. To save trials plot data to a file, click the Save
button at the bottom of the trials plot window. Enter a filename in the resulting Save curve dialog
box, and click Accept to save the file.
To read the data curve back into ANSYS Icepak, click the Load button at the bottom of the trials plot
window. Enter the appropriate filename in the resulting Load curve dialog box, and click Accept to
load the data.
37.3.3. Network Temperature Plots

A Network temperature plot enables you to display nodal temperatures of network objects and
network blocks plotted versus solution iteration for steady state simulations or time in the case of
transient simulations.
Note:
The Network temperature plot is only displayed when your model contains network ob-
jects or blocks and at least one internal node.
Figure 37.32: Network Temperature Curve
The following functions are available for viewing a curve:
• To zoom into an area of the curve, position the mouse pointer at a corner of the area to be zoomed,
hold down the left mouse button and drag open a selection box to the desired size, and then release
the mouse button. The selected area will then fill the Temperature/value curve window, with appro-
priate changes to the axes. After you have zoomed into an area of the model, click on Full range to
restore the graph to its original axes and scale.
Zoom-In Modeling
Figure 37.33: The Set Range Panel
• To set the minimum and maximum values for the scales on the axes, click Set range. This will open
the Set range panel (Figure 37.33: The Set Range Panel (p. 929)).
• Enter values for Min X, Min Y, Max X, and Max Y and enable the check boxes. If needed, click Reset
to restore the original values. Click Accept to view the Network temperature curve plot with the
defined range.
37.4. Selecting a Solution Set to be Examined

If there is more than one solution set available for your model, you can specify which solution version
you want to examine. To open the Version selection panel (Figure 37.34: The Version selection Pan-
el (p. 929)), click on the button in the Postprocessing toolbar or select Load solution ID in the
Post menu.
Post Load solution ID
Figure 37.34: The Version selection Panel
Select the desired solution set from the list at the bottom of the panel, and click Okay to load it. The
new solution will be applied automatically to the model in the graphics window.
37.5. Zoom-In Modeling

ANSYS Icepak enables you to model sub-systems with given results from a system model using a process
known as zoom-in or cascade modeling. This process creates a zoom-in model with the appropriate
profiles applied automatically to the boundaries of the sub-system.
To create a zoom-in model, you will use the Zoom-in modeling panel (Figure 37.35: The Zoom-in
modeling Panel (p. 930)). To open the panel, select Create zoom-in model in the Post menu.
Post Create zoom-in model
Figure 37.35: The Zoom-in modeling Panel
The procedure for creating a zoom-in model is as follows:
1. Specify a name for the zoom-in model project in the Zoom-in project text entry box. You can also click
Browse next to the text field and select the desired project name in the resulting File selection dialog
box. See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for more information on the File selection dialog box.
2. Specify the solution ID of the results from the previous system model. You can either enter the solution ID
in the Solution ID text entry box, or select the solution ID using the Version selection panel. Click Select
to open the Version selection panel. Note that you do not need to provide a file extension for the solution
ID.
3. Specify the coordinates for each of the zoom-in model boundaries (Min X, Max X, Min Y, Max Y, Min Z,
and Max Z). There are two methods available for choosing the coordinates:
• Enter the coordinate values in the appropriate text entry boxes and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
• Click Select to the right of the appropriate text entry box and then click the left mouse button on the
desired point in the graphics window. You may want to orient your view depending upon the coordinate
being selected to ensure a more accurate selection.
The boundaries of the zoom-in model will be displayed in the graphics window as you update them.
Once you have specified the boundaries, you can also change them in the graphics window by first
Display Powermap Property
holding down the Shift key on the keyboard and then dragging the desired boundary with the
right mouse button.
4. Select the type of boundary for each side of the zoom-in model. There are three options:
• Inflow boundaries are all open boundaries that have not been chosen as the outflow boundary. For inflow
boundaries, a velocity profile is used as a boundary condition.
• Outflow boundaries should only be defined as the plane or boundary through which the maximum
mass outflow occurs. For an outflow boundary, a static pressure profile is used as a boundary condition.
• Wall boundaries are all closed or solid boundaries. For wall boundaries, a fixed temperature profile is
used as a boundary condition.
By default, all walls in the zoom-in model will have a fixed temperature profile. While this is suitable
for most applications, it is not applicable for the case where the wall in question is an adiabatic
wall in the system-level model. In such a case, you will need to change the boundary condition
for the zoom-in model from the automatically-generated temperature profile to an adiabatic
boundary condition.
5. Click Accept to close the panel and create the zoom-in model. The Message window will print the details
of the process and alert you when the new project has been written.
Note that it is best to create plane cuts and display the velocity vectors in the system-level model at
the locations where you would like the zoom-in boundary to be before writing out the sub-system
model to a project file.
Note:
• Do not use the zoom-in modeling feature for natural convection problems if any of the boundary
conditions in the zoom-in model need walls with specified profiles of heat transfer coefficient.
• In cases where the zoom-in model boundary truncates any solid objects, it is necessary to create
additional walls in the zoom-in model to represent the boundaries of the solid objects. The
temperature profile at the boundary will have already been written out and can be loaded for
the new wall using the Load button in the Curve specification panel.
37.6. Display Powermap Property

When you import a powermap into ANSYS Icepak, you can visualize a source object's pre solve and
post solve powermap properties in 2D or 3D using the Display powermap property panel.
Figure 37.36: The Display powermap property Panel
From the Object drop-down list, select a block, PCB, or package object and click Accept. Click Filter
to display the Filter object list by type panel and select which object types to display. Click Sync to
set the selections in the object tree to those selected in the model tree. If no powermaps are associated
with the object, a message is displayed in the Messages window. If one or more powermaps are asso-
ciated with the object, the Powermap drop-down list is populated with the associated powermap
source assemblies. From the Powermap drop-down list, select one source assembly layer and click
Accept.
By default, the source object property data is displayed in 2D. Under Display Setting, select 3D to display
the data in 3D. Use the slider bar to define the relative size of the 3D sources. From the Side drop-down
list, select Min to display only values in the minimum side of the assembly, Max to display only values
on the maximum side of the assembly, or All to display values on both sides of the assembly.
Display Powermap Property
Figure 37.37: Powermap in 2D View
Figure 37.38: Powermap in 3D View
Under Property specification, select Heat Flux, Power, or Temperature to display from the Property
drop-down list. Temperature is only available when a solution is loaded. When you select Temperature,
choose to display the Min, Avg, or Max temperature. By default, the full range of values are displayed.
To modify the minimum and/or maximum value displayed in the range, select Min value and/or Max
value and enter a value.
If a model has been solved, the Use solution data option enables you to view the solution's property
values. By default, Use solution data is selected. Solution data includes two property values, one for
each side of the source (for example, Min Z and Max Z). If you want to view pre-solve property values
(T = 0), deselect the Use solution data check box. You can toggle the Use solution data check box
on and to compare the pre- and post-solve property values. Load solution to view result is only available
if the model has been solved and solution data is available.
Note:
To display values for pre-solve property value-shaded objects, you can use the Surface probe
( ). When selecting a point, click close to an object's edge or vertex.
Click View to display the source object property values. Click Close to close the Show powermap
properties panel and clear the data. Click Clear to clear the data and keep the panel open.
Chapter 38: Generating Reports
ANSYS Icepak provides tools to create reports of solution results and print them either to a file or to
the report window. These reports represent tables of any primary or derived solution variable for all
nodal mesh points that lie within a specified region of the model. The reports also include minimum
and maximum values of the variable within the region. The region can be the entire model, a zoomed-
in portion of the model, a region in the shape of a rectangular prism, the faces of one or more modeling
objects, or a point in the model. You can also create a report of internal node temperatures for network
blocks and a report of the fan operating point for characteristic curve fans.
These features are described in the following sections.
• Overview: The Report Menu (p. 935)
• Variables Available for Reporting (p. 936)
• HTML Reports (p. 939)
• Reviewing a Solution (p. 941)
• Summary Reports (p. 943)
• Point Reports (p. 948)
• Full Reports (p. 951)
• Network Block Values Report (p. 953)
• Fan Operating Points Report (p. 954)
38.1. Overview: The Report Menu

The Report menu is used to generate reports of results for your ANSYS Icepak model. When you select
Report in the Main Menu bar, a set of sub-menus is displayed, as shown in Figure 38.1: The Report
Menu (p. 936).
Generating Reports
Figure 38.1: The Report Menu
The Report menu contains all the functions you need to create reports of results for your simulation.
These functions include the following:
• creating an HTML report (Report HTML report)
• creating a solution overview (Report Solution overview)
• creating a summary report (Report Summary report)
• creating a point report (Report Point report)
• creating a full report (Report Full report)
• creating a report of network values (Report Network block values)
• creating an EM heat losses report (Report EM heat losses)
• creating a report of solar load values (Report Solar loads)
• creating a report of the fan operating point for characteristic curve fans (Report Fan operating points)
The Report menu contains a function related to saving a file that can be read into AutoTherm (Report
Write Autotherm file), described in Saving an AutoTherm File (p. 203), and a function that allows
you to view the optimization/parameterization results (Report Show optimization/param results),
described in Optimization (p. 679).
The Report menu also contains options to export package die thermal resistance data to Gradient
Firebolt, Cadence Encounter, and Sentinel TI and temperature data to SIwave as described in Gradient,
Cadence Thermal Resistance and SIwave Temperature Files (p. 214).
38.2. Variables Available for Reporting

Listed below are the variables that are available for reporting and the format in which each is reported.
Note that, for a summary report, the average value of a variable is calculated as the area-weighted av-
Variables Available for Reporting
erage. For a full report, ANSYS Icepak calculates the average value as the arithmetic mean of the nodal
values of the variable.
• $$ UX, UY, UZ, Speed, Pressure, Temperature, TKE, Epsilon, Viscosity ratio, Vorticity, X, Y, Z, K_X, K_Y,
K_Z, Electric Potential, species(mole), species(mass), and Wall YPlus are reported in the following format:
1. Number of nodes
2. Minimum, maximum, and average values of the variable
3. Node #, x, y, z, value (displayed if you deselect Only summary information in the Define full report
panel described in Full Reports (p. 951))
• $$ Heat flux, Joule heating density, Elec current density, Elect current density X, Elect current density
Y and Elect current density Z are reported in the following format:
1. Total heat flux
2. Surface area
3. Number of nodes
4. Minimum, maximum, and average pointwise values of heat flux
5. Node #, x, y, z, (displayed if you deselect Only summary information in the Define full report panel
described in Full Reports (p. 951))
Note that the reported pointwise value of heat flux ( ) represents heat flux normal to the surface of
the specified object.
• Heat flow, Heat flow (into Solid), Heat flow (into Fluid) and Radiative heat flow are reported in the fol-
lowing format:
1. Total heat flow
2. Surface area
3. Number of nodes
4. Minimum, maximum, and average pointwise values of the variable
• Mass flow is reported in the following format:
1. Total mass flow
2. Surface area
3. Number of nodes
4. Minimum, maximum, and average pointwise values of mass flow
Generating Reports
Note that the reported pointwise value represents mass flow normal to the surface of the specified
object.
• Volume flow is reported in the following format:
1. Total volume flow
2. Surface area
3. Number of nodes
4. Minimum, maximum, and average pointwise values of volume flow
Note that the reported pointwise value represents volume flow normal to the surface of the specified
object.
• Heat tr. coeff is reported in the following format:
1. Average heat transfer coefficient
2. Surface area
3. Number of nodes
4. Minimum, maximum, and average pointwise values of heat transfer coefficient
5. Node #, x, y, z, h (displayed if you deselect Only summary information in the Define full report panel
described in Full Reports (p. 951))
Note that the heat transfer coefficient (h) is determined relative to a user-defined reference temper-
ature (Ref temp).
• Velocity is reported in the following format:
1. Number of nodes
2. Minimum, maximum, and average velocity in the x, y, and z directions
3. Node #, x, y, z, ux , uy , uz (displayed if you deselect Only summary information in the Define full report
Note that the variables ux , uy , and uz represent velocity in the x, y, and z directions, respectively.
• Thermal resistance is reported in the following format:
1. Total thermal resistance (displayed only in the Report summary data panel)
Note:
Thermal resistance is only for heat sink objects.
HTML Reports
38.3. HTML Reports

You can create a web-based report displaying the results of your ANSYS Icepak simulation using the
HTML report panel. To open the HTML report panel (for example, Figure 38.2: The HTML report Pan-
el (p. 939)), select HTML report in the Report menu.
Report HTML report
Figure 38.2: The HTML report Panel
To create an HTML report, follow the steps below:
1. Specify a title for the report in the Report title field.
Generating Reports
2. Enter introductory notes in the Introductory text field.
3. Specify the level of detail you need to include in the report. You can choose from Problem specification,
Solution overview, Heat source information, Fan information, and Vent information. The HTML report
includes all of these options by default.
4. Specify postprocessing objects and data under Postprocessing data and figures. Use the Add drop-down
list to add postprocessing objects and data to the HTML report. Note that when you use the Add drop-
down list to add multiple items to the report, the Postprocessing data and figures section of the HTML
report panel expands and you must use the scroll bars to access the report data fields. There are three
categories of data you can include in the HTML report:
• Picture (.png etc.) allows you to include graphic images in your HTML report. To add a picture to the
report, use the following procedure:
a. Specify a width in pixels for the images using the Width for figures (pixels) field.
b. Enter a file name for the image file you want to include in the HTML report in the Picture file text
field, or browse the directory structure for a specific file by clicking Browse.
c. (Optional) To include text above and below the figure, use the Text above and Text below fields.
d. (Optional) To keep the image from being included in the generated HTML, turn off the Active option.
To remove the image from the HTML report panel, click Delete.
• Postprocessing object allows you to include postprocessing object data in your HTML report. To add
a postprocessing object to a report, use the following procedure:
a. Select a postprocessing object from your ANSYS Icepak model using the Post object drop-down list.
b. ANSYS Icepak preloads the Viewing position text field with position, rotation, scale, and centering
data for the current view. You can re-enter data into the field, or you can adjust the viewing position
in the ANSYS Icepak graphics window and click Current in the HTML report panel.
c. If there is more than one solution set available for your model, you will need to specify which solution
you want to include in the HTML report. Enter a solution ID in the Solution ID text field or click Select
to open the Version selection panel. See Selecting a Solution Set to be Examined (p. 929) for more
information about selecting a solution set.
d. (Optional) To include text above and below the figure, use the Text above and Text below fields.
e. (Optional) To keep the postprocessing object from being included in the generated HTML, turn off
the Active option.
To remove the postprocessing object from the HTML report panel, click Delete.
• Summary report allows you to include summary report data in your HTML report. To add a summary
report to an HTML report, use the following procedure:
a. Select the type of summary report (Fan operating points, Vent flow rates, Heat source values,
Network blocks, or User-defined) to include in the HTML report using the Summary type drop-
down list.
Reviewing a Solution
When the Summary type is User-defined, the Summary definition field becomes active, al-
lowing you to enter the file name of a summary. You can also click Browse to navigate through
your directory structure to locate the summary file.
b. If there is more than one solution set available for your model, you will need to specify which solution
you want to include in the HTML report. Enter a solution ID in the Solution ID text field or click Select
to open the Version selection panel. See Selecting a Solution Set to be Examined (p. 929) for more
information about selecting a solution set.
c. (Optional) To include text above and below the figure, use the Text above and Text below fields.
d. (Optional) To keep the summary report from being included in the generated HTML, turn off the
Active option.
To remove the summary report from the HTML report panel, click Delete. Click Clear to remove
all postprocessing data and objects from the HTML report panel.
To load a report format, click on Load. This opens the File selection dialog box, in which you
can specify the filename and the directory from which the chosen format is to be loaded. See File
To save the report format, click on Save. This opens the File selection dialog box, in which you
can specify the filename and the directory to which the chosen format is to be saved. See File
5. Click Write in the HTML report panel to create the report (or click Cancel to close the panel without cre-
ating the report).
38.4. Reviewing a Solution

You can create a summary for each solution that you generate in ANSYS Icepak. To create a summary
data file for a particular solution, select Solution overview and then Create in the Report menu. This
opens a Version selection panel where you can select the solution ID to use to create the summary
report. If you are creating a solution overview for a transient simulation, you can select Time(s) and
enter the time(s) you want to report in the solution overview or select Step and enter the step you
want to report.
Report Solution overview Create
Generating Reports
To view summary data stored for a particular solution, select Solution overview and then View in the
Report menu. This opens a File selection dialog box where you can open a solution overview file
(*.overview). Once an overview file is selected, the summary data is displayed in the Solution panel
(Figure 38.4: The Solution Panel (p. 942)).
Report Solution overview View
Figure 38.4: The Solution Panel
The Solution panel contains heat and mass transfer information for the objects in your ANSYS Ice-
pak model.
Summary Reports
38.5. Summary Reports

You can create a summary report for a variable on any or all objects in your ANSYS Icepak model. You
can use the Define summary report panel to create a summary report for the results of your ANSYS
Icepak simulation. To open the Define summary report panel (Figure 38.5: The Define summary report
Panel (p. 943)), select the Summary report option in the Report menu or click on the button in
the Postprocessing toolbar.
Figure 38.5: The Define summary report Panel
To create a summary report, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the Solution ID for which you wish to create a report. There are two options:
• Specified allows you to either enter the solution ID in the text entry box or select the solution ID using
the Version selection panel. Click Select to open the Version selection panel (Figure 38.6: The Version
selection Panel (p. 944)).
Generating Reports
Select the version you want to use to create the report in the list at the bottom of the Version
selection panel and click Okay to accept the selection.
• ID pattern allows you to generate a report on multiple solutions by entering a wild-card expression or
a text string in the ID pattern text field, and selecting either Transient only or Steady only solutions.
By default, ANSYS Icepak generates a report for all steady solutions, denoted using the * in the ID pattern
text field. For information on how to run multiple trials see Running Multiple Trials (p. 705).
You can type a solution name that contains an asterisk or a question mark in place of characters
or a character, respectively. For example, typing rad* will allow a report to be written for all
solutions whose names start with rad; typing rad? will allow a report to be written for all solutions
whose names consist of the word rad plus one character. Any solution whose id name matches
the pattern will be displayed in a bubble help window as you type in the text field. Only those
IDs shown in the bubble help will be considered when you click Write in the Define summary
report panel. Note that the list of ids shown in the bubble help will be further filtered by Transient
only or Steady only and other options (for example, report time) that you may have specified.
2. (Transient simulations only) Specify the Report time, which is the time in the transient analysis for which
the report is to be written. The time can be specified as a particular Time, time Step, or All times. See
3. Under Options, specify where ANSYS Icepak should write the report. There are four options:
• Write to window directs the report to the Report summary data panel (for example, Figure 38.7: The
Report summary data Panel (p. 944)).
Figure 38.7: The Report summary data Panel
Summary Reports
• Write to file directs the report to a file. ANSYS Icepak assigns a default name to the file, but it can be
overwritten with a user-specified name. The user-specified filename can be a full pathname to the file
or a pathname relative to the directory in which execution of ANSYS Icepak was initiated. You can also
click Browse to navigate through your directories to locate a file in which to write.
• Include point reports includes the point report (if previously defined) in the summary report.
• Trials/objects across top transposes the list of trials and objects (in the case of a single trial) and displays
them by column, as shown in Figure 38.8: The Report summary data Panel Displayed by Column (p. 945).
Figure 38.8: The Report summary data Panel Displayed by Column
• In ANSYS Icepak, you can choose to report the computed face centroid variable values or the nodal values
that have been interpolated to the nodes. By default, the Report facet values option is off and the in-
terpolated variable values are reported. Using the facet reporting option becomes especially important
while reporting face node temperatures of network objects and network blocks.
4. Click Edit units to specify the units for the report. See Units for Postprocessing (p. 220) for details on selecting
units for reports.
5. Click Edit columns to specify the variables you want to report. Only the variables selected will be written
out.
Generating Reports
Figure 38.9: Edit columns
6. Load a saved report or create a new report.
• To load a previously saved format (for example, a .summ file), click Load. Any one of many previously
saved formats can be loaded.
Note:
If more than 100 objects are loaded in at one time, the objects are displayed in the
Define summary report panel as read-only. You will need to toggle the ( ) button
to make edits to any of the objects.
• To define the format for a new report, click New and select the object, sides, and variable of interest on
the object.
– Objects specify the type of modeling object that represents the report region. In the Objects drop-
down list, you can select different types of objects from those available in the model. Note that groups
are also valid object types. Click Filter to display the Filter object list by type panel and select which
object types to display. Click Sync to set the selections in the object tree to those selected in the
model tree.
– (recirculation openings only) Specify whether you want to create a report for the supply or extract
section of the recirculation opening by selecting supply or extract in the Objects drop-down list.
Select All to create the report for both the supply and the extract sections of the opening.
– Sides specify the side or sides of the object to be included in the report region. The Sides options
include All, Min X, Max X, Min Y, Max Y, Min Z, Max Z, Top, Bottom, Sides, and Interior; however,
Summary Reports
only those options appropriate for the selected object are available for selection. All object sides are
active by default.
– To choose the variable to be reported, select the desired variable (for example, Temperature) from
the Value drop-down list. The available variables are described in Variables Available for Report-
ing (p. 936) and Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955).
Note:
For a summary report, the average value of a variable is calculated as the area-based
average.
If you select Heat tr. coeff under Value, you will need to specify the reference temperature for
the heat transfer coefficient. To specify the reference temperature, click the Edit button to the
right of the Value text field and enter the Ref temp in the Heat tr. coeff panel.
– If you select Heat flow or Heat flux under Value for openings, grilles, or fans, you will need to specify
the reference temperature for the heat flow or heat flux. To specify the reference temperature, click
the Edit button to the right of the Value text field and enter the Ref temp in the Heat flow or Heat
flux panel.
Note:
Values for Heat flux and Heat transfer coefficient reflect the heat leaving the se-
lected object.
7. If you want to report a combined (single) value for all the sides of an object, turn on the Comb option. To
report them separately, turn off Comb.
8. If you want to report summary data on the meshed region of a specified object, turn on the Mesh option.
This option is used when an object intersects with one or more objects and the mesh in the intersecting
region might not necessarily belong to it. By default, Icepak reports on the full mesh of the specified object.
Enabling the Mesh option allows you to report on the reduced mesh of the specified object.
9. (Optional) If you want to temporarily disable reporting on a specified object, toggle the check box under
the ( ) button to deactivate the report. You can also invert the active state of all summary objects by
clicking on the ( ) icon itself in the Define summary report panel. If you want to permanently remove
the object from the report, click the delete button ( ).
10. To change the order of items in a report, enter the appropriate values under Order. Also, you can right
mouse click on Order to display the Reorder and Sort options. The Reorder option allows you to order
items from zero to the total number of items in the report. For example, if you have five items in the report,
the items will be numbered from zero to five. The Sort option allows you to order items from lowest to
highest.
11. Save the report format by clicking Save. This opens the Report summary data dialog box, in which you
can specify the filename and the directory to which the chosen format is to be saved. See File Selection
Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file.
Generating Reports
12. Click Write in the Define summary report panel to create the report (or click Close to close the panel
without creating the report).
Note:
To clear the summary report and start over, click Clear.
You can also use the Define summary report panel to view the results of a previously created report.
To view the information in a previously generated report file, click on View file in the Define summary
report panel. ANSYS Icepak will open the File selection dialog box, in which you can select the report
you want to view. (See File Selection Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file.) When you click
Open in the File selection dialog box, ANSYS Icepak will open a window containing the information
in the selected report.
You can also define a summary report before ANSYS Icepak starts a calculation. ANSYS Icepak will create
the report when the calculation is complete. See Defining Reports (p. 840) for details.
38.6. Point Reports

You can create a report for a variable at any point in your ANSYS Icepak model. You can use the Define
point report panel to define a report for the results of your ANSYS Icepak simulation at a point in your
model. To open the Define point report panel (Figure 38.10: The Define point report Panel (p. 949)),
select Point report in the Report menu.
Report Point report
Point Reports
Figure 38.10: The Define point report Panel
To create a report at a point, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the Solution ID for which you wish to create a report. You can either enter the solution ID in the
Solution ID text entry box, or select the solution ID using the Version selection panel. Click Select to
open the Version selection panel (Figure 38.6: The Version selection Panel (p. 944)).
Select the version you want to use to create the report in the list at the bottom of the Version se-
lection panel and click Okay to accept the selection.
2. (transient simulations only) Specify the transient Report time, which is the time in the transient analysis
for which the report is to be written. The time can be specified as a particular Time, time Step, or All times.
See Transient Simulations (p. 627) for details on transient simulations.
3. Specify where ANSYS Icepak should write the report. There are two options:
• Write to window directs the report to the Report point data panel (for example, Figure 38.11: The Report
point data Panel (p. 950)).
Generating Reports
Figure 38.11: The Report point data Panel
• Write to file directs the report to a file. The filename can be a full pathname to the file or a pathname
relative to the directory in which execution of ANSYS Icepak was initiated. You can also click Browse to
navigate through your directories to locate a file in which to write.
4. Click Edit units to specify the units for the report. See Units for Postprocessing (p. 220) for details on selecting
units for reports.
5. Load a saved report or create a new report.
• To load a previously saved format (for example, a .rpt file), click Load. Any one of many previously
saved formats can be loaded.
• To define the format for a new report, click New, specify the point of interest, and select the variable of
interest.
a. Enter values for the coordinates of the point (separated by spaces) in the Point text entry field.
b. Choose the variable to be reported by selecting the desired variable (for example, Temperature)
from the Value drop-down list. The available variables are described in Variables Available for Report-
ing (p. 936) and Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting (p. 955).
6. (Optional) If you want to temporarily disable reporting on the specified point, toggle the check box ( )
to deactivate the report. If you want to permanently remove the point from the report, click the delete
button ( ).
7. Save the report format by clicking Save. This opens the Report summary data dialog box, in which you
can specify the filename and the directory to which the chosen format is to be saved. See File Selection
Dialog Boxes (p. 98) for details on selecting a file.
8. Click Write in the Define point report panel to create the report (or click Close to close the panel without
creating the report).
Note:
To clear the point report and start over, click Clear.
Full Reports
38.7. Full Reports

You can use the Define full report panel to customize the report of your results. To open the Define
full report panel (Figure 38.12: The Define full report Panel (p. 951)), select Full report in the Report
menu.
Report Full report
Figure 38.12: The Define full report Panel
To create a full report, follow the steps below.
1. Specify the name of the solution for which to generate the report next to Solution ID.
2. Specify the Variable to be reported. Temperature is selected by default in the Variable list. To change
the variable to be reported, select a new variable from the Variable drop-down list. The available variables
are described in Variables Available for Reporting (p. 936) and Variables for Postprocessing and Report-
ing (p. 955).
Note:
For a full report, the average value of a variable is calculated as the arithmetic mean of
the nodal values of the variable.
3. Define the region for which the report is to be generated under Report region. Three options are available:
Generating Reports
• Entire cabinet specifies the complete model. The value of the variable is reported at each node point
of the mesh.
• Sub region specifies a region of the model. If you want only a subdomain of the model, you must specify
the boundary coordinates that describe the subdomain. The parameters xS, yS, zS, xE, yE, and zE specify
the Start and End points of the rectangular region, with xS, yS, zS, xE, yE, and zE being the boundary
coordinates of the sub domain (i.e., xS xE, yS yE, and zS zE ).
• Specific objects specify that the report is to be generated for a particular object or collection of objects.
a. Specify the modeling object using the Specific object drop-down list. Select an object name from
the list of objects in the ANSYS Icepak model. The object name is displayed in the text field. (for ex-
ample, object fan.1). You can specify more than one object by holding down the Control key and
select another object from the list. Multiple names are listed in the Object text field separated by
spaces.
b. Specify the part of the object where you want the report to be generated. There are two options:
– All sides specify the entire object.
– Select sides specify the side or sides of the object to be included in the report region. The Select
sides options include Min X, Max X, Min Y, Max Y, Min Z, Max Z, Top, Bottom, and Sides; however,
only those options appropriate for the selected object are available for specification. All object
sides are active by default.
4. (transient simulations only) Specify the Report time, which is the time in the transient analysis for which
the report is to be written. The time can be specified as a particular Time, a time Step, or All times. See
5. Select from the following options available at the bottom of the Define full report panel.
• Only summary information includes only summary information in the report.
• Write to window directs the report to the Report window (for example, Figure 38.13: The Full report
for Temperature window (p. 953)).
Network Block Values Report
Figure 38.13: The Full report for Temperature window
• Write to file directs the report to a file. ANSYS Icepak assigns a default name to the file, but it can be
overwritten with a user-specified name. The user-specified filename can be a full pathname to the file
or you can browse to a pathname by clicking the Browse button.
6. Click Write to create the report, click Cancel to close the panel without creating the report, or click Done
to store the specifications in the panel and close the panel. If you modify the model (without closing the
current ANSYS Icepak session) and reopen the Define full report panel, its default parameters and specific-
ations will be those currently specified.
38.8. Network Block Values Report

You can create a report of the internal node temperatures for the network blocks in your ANSYS Ice-
pak model. To create the report, select Network block values in the Report menu.
Report Network block values
The Message window will report the internal node temperatures for the network blocks and network
objects in your model. An example is shown below.
Block block.1 internal node 1 temperature = 90.201 C

ANSYS Icepak automatically reports network node temperature values as well as other information at
the end of a solution. The report is accessible by selecting Solution overview from the Report menu.
See Reviewing a Solution (p. 941) for more information about the Solution overview option.
Generating Reports
38.9. EM Heat Losses Report

You can create a report of the EM volumetric and surface heat losses in your ANSYS Icepak model. To
create the report, select EM heat losses in the Report menu.
Report EM heat losses
The Message window will report the surface and volumetric heat losses for objects in your model. An
example is shown below.
Volumetric heat losses:
Total volumetric heat loss on ferrite is 1.111e+03(W)
Total volumetric heat loss on ferrite_1 is 1.110e+03(W)
===============================================================
Total volumetric heat loss is 2.2210e+03 (W)
Surface heat losses:

Total surface heat loss on ferrite is 1.853e+03(W)
Total surface heat loss on ferrite_1 is 1.850e+03(W)
===============================================================
Total surface heat loss is 3.7028e+03 (W)
38.10. Fan Operating Points Report

You can create a report of the fan and blower operating points for the characteristic curve of fans and
blowers in your model. To create a report, select Fan operating points in the Report menu.
Report Fan operating points
The Message window will report the volume flow rate and pressure rise for the characteristic curve of
fans and blowers in your model. An example is shown below.
Fan "fan.1" vol flow = 8.1875e-04 m3/s, press rise = 3.729e-01 N/m2
Fan "blower.1" vol flow = 9.270e-03 m3/s, press rise = 8.179e-01 N/m2
ANSYS Icepak automatically reports fan and blower operating point data as well as other information
at the end of a solution. The report is accessible by selecting Solution overview from the Post menu.
See Reviewing a Solution (p. 941) for more information about the Solution overview option.
Chapter 39: Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting
In ANSYS Icepak, variables are used within the various postprocessing and reporting operations for a
variety of purposes, such as determining the color spectrum to be applied to a contour plot. This chapter
provides definitions of the variables that are contained in the Contours of and Value drop-down lists
that appear in the postprocessing and reporting panels. See Examining the Results (p. 877) for details
on displaying and plotting variables and Generating Reports (p. 935) for details on generating reports.
Information in this chapter is presented in the following sections:
• General Information about Variables (p. 955)
• Definitions of Variables (p. 955)
39.1. General Information about Variables

ANSYS Icepak has two kinds of variables: scalar and vector. Scalar variables consist of a single value
at each point in the solution domain, and vector variables consist of three values (one for each coordinate
direction) at each point in the domain.
Scalar and vector variables are further divided into two types: primary and derived. A primary solution
variable is one for which ANSYS Icepak solves directly when performing the simulation. The primary
variables are pressure, temperature, and the three components of velocity. If you are modeling turbulence
with the two-equation (standard k-ε model, the enhanced two-equation model, or the RNG k-ε model),
the turbulent kinetic energy and dissipation rate will also be primary solution variables. Derived solution
variables are variables that ANSYS Icepak computes from the primary variables during postprocessing.
For example, heat flux is a derived variable computed from the temperature field.
Not all variables, either primary or derived, are available for all simulations. In an isothermal simulation,
for example, neither the temperature nor any derived variable based on temperature (for example, heat
flux) will be available for postprocessing analysis. For laminar solutions, or for turbulent solutions that
use the zero-equation turbulence model, the turbulent kinetic energy and dissipation will not be available.
39.2. Definitions of Variables

This section describes the following:
39.2.1. Velocity-Related Quantities
39.2.2. Pressure-Related Quantities
39.2.3.Temperature-Related Quantities
39.2.4. Radiation-Related Quantities
39.2.5. Species-Transport-Related Quantities
39.2.6. Position-Related Quantities
39.2.7.Turbulence-Related Quantities
Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting
39.2.8.Thermal Conductivity-Related Quantities

39.2.9. Joule Heating-Related Quantities
39.2.1. Velocity-Related Quantities

Velocity-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• UX is the x component of the velocity vector and is available when flow is computed.
• UY is the y component of the velocity vector and is available when flow is computed.
• UZ is the z component of the velocity vector and is available when flow is computed.
• Speed is the magnitude of the velocity vector and is available when flow is computed.
• Vorticity is a derived scalar quantity representing the magnitude of vorticity, |ω|, where ω is computed
from the velocity variable:
(39.1)
• Mass flow is a derived scalar quantity computed from the velocity field. The flow rate can be computed
only on the surface of model objects (typically, a fan, vent, or opening); it cannot be computed for plane
cuts or isosurfaces. The sign convention for mass flow values at all flow boundaries (internal and external)
is shown such that flow going in the direction of the coordinate axes is positive.
• Volume flow is a derived scalar quantity computed from the velocity field. The flow rate can be computed
only on the surface of model objects (typically, a fan, vent, or opening); it cannot be computed for plane
cuts or isosurfaces. The sign convention for volume flow values at all flow boundaries (internal and external)
is shown such that flow going in the direction of the coordinate axes is positive.
39.2.2. Pressure-Related Quantities

Pressure-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• Pressure is the relative static pressure of the fluid and is available when flow is computed.
39.2.3. Temperature-Related Quantities

Temperature-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• Temperature is available when temperature is computed.
• Heat flux is a derived scalar quantity computed from the temperature field. The heat flux can be computed
only on the surface of model objects; it cannot be computed for plane cuts or isosurfaces. Two types of
heat flux can be computed on an object face:
– the heat flux, , at a point on a surface (wall) is computed from
(39.2)
where k is the conductivity of the material, T is the temperature, and is the normal to the surface.
– the heat flux, , at flow boundaries (for example, openings, vents, fans) is computed from
Definitions of Variables
(39.3)
where ρ is the density of the fluid, cp is the specific heat, Tref is 298 K, and is the velocity.
• Heat flow is a derived scalar quantity computed from the temperature field. The heat flow can be com-
puted only on the surface of model objects; it cannot be computed for plane cuts or isosurfaces. Two
types of heat flow can be computed on an object face:
– the heat flow, qd , at a point on a surface (wall) is computed from
(39.4)
where A is the surface area of the face, k is the conductivity of the material, T is the temperature,
and is the normal to the surface.
– the heat flow, qc , at flow boundaries (for example, openings, vents, fans) is computed from
(39.5)
where A is the surface area of the face, ρ is the density of the fluid, cp is the specific heat, Tref
is 298 K, and is the velocity.
The Heat flow (into Solid) for a solid surface denotes the total heat flowing into the solid object
through the surface. It usually represents the conductive component of the heat transfer at the
surface. The Heat flow (into Fluid) for a solid surface denotes the total heat flowing into the fluid
domain through the surface. When there is no radiative heat transfer in the domain this value
represents the convective component of the heat transfer at the surface. When radiation is in-
cluded the value represents both the convective and radiative components of heat transfer. In
such cases the convective component can be determined by subtracting the radiative heat flow
value for the surface from the Heat flow (into Fluid) value.
• Heat tr. coeff is a derived scalar quantity computed from the temperature field.
The heat transfer coefficient is computed as

(39.6)
where q is the heat flux for the surface and Tref is a reference temperature. To specify the reference
temperature, click the Parameters button for the Contours of drop-down list or click the Edit
button under Params in the Define summary report panel. Specify the temperature next to Ref
temp in the Heat tr. coeff parameters panel (Figure 39.1: The Heat tr. coeff parameters Panel (p. 957)).
Figure 39.1: The Heat tr. coeff parameters Panel
Variables for Postprocessing and Reporting
39.2.4. Radiation-Related Quantities

Radiation-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• Radiative heat flow is a derived scalar quantity. It is available if you are solving your problem with radiation
effects. It can be computed only on surfaces of objects.
39.2.5. Species-Transport-Related Quantities

Species-transport-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• species (mole) is the mole fraction of a particular species in the mixture. For perfect-gas mixtures, the
mole fraction is equal to both the pressure fraction and the volume fraction, so the ppmv (parts per million
by volume) for a species is 106 times the mole fraction. Icepak displays the mole fraction for species (mole)
by default. To display the ppmv for the species, you can change the postprocessing units for concentration
to ppmv using the Postprocessing units panel (see Section 5.5 for details on changing units for postpro-
cessing). Typical concentration values in terms of mass per unit volume can be displayed by creating a
user-defined unit for concentration based on the local mole fraction and reference temperatures and
pressures. See Section 5.4.3 for details on creating a user-defined unit.
• species (mass) is the mass fraction of a particular species in the mixture.
• Relative humidity is the percentage fraction of water vapor present in the air/water-vapor mixture in
the room relative to a saturated air/water-vapor(h2o) mixture at the same temperature. These values will
be available only if a species calculation for water vapor (h2o) is performed.
39.2.6. Position-Related Quantities

Position-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• X, Y, Z are the Cartesian coordinates in the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis directions respectively. They are primary
variables in the sense that they are always available. These variables are useful for superimposing lines of
constant x, y, or z value on the model.
39.2.7. Turbulence-Related Quantities

Turbulence-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• TKE is the turbulent kinetic energy. It can be reported if the two-equation (standard k-ε) turbulence
model, the enhanced two-equation model, or the RNG k-ε turbulence model is used.
• Epsilon is the turbulent dissipation rate. It can be reported if the two-equation (standard k-ε) turbulence
model, the enhanced two-equation model, or the RNG k-ε turbulence model is used.
• Viscosity ratio is the ratio of the turbulent viscosity to the laminar viscosity. It can be reported if any of
the available turbulence models are used.
• Wall Yplus is a nondimensional parameter defined by the equation

(39.7)
Definitions of Variables
where = is the friction velocity, is the distance from point P to the wall, ρ is the
fluid density, and μ is the fluid viscosity at point P.
Note:
When the k-ω SST turbulence model is selected, TKE and Epsilon quantities are not ex-
ported.
39.2.8. Thermal Conductivity-Related Quantities

Thermal conductivity-related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• K_X is the x component of the orthotropic thermal conductivity vector and is available when traces are
imported.
• K_Y is the y component of the orthotropic thermal conductivity vector and is available when traces are
imported.
• K_Z is the z component of the orthotropic thermal conductivity vector and is available when traces are
imported.
These variables are useful to analyze the effect of traces on the orthotropic thermal conductivity of
PC Boards and package substrates.
Note:
These quantities are available only for blocks assigned with traces.
39.2.9. Joule Heating-Related Quantities

Joule heating related quantities that can be reported are as follows:
• Electric Potential is available when varying joule heating option is used for blocks.
• Elec current density is current density per unit area.
• Elect current density X, Elect current density Y, and Elect current density Z are the vector components
of the current density per unit area.
• Joule heating density is the joule heating power per unit volume.
Chapter 40: Theory
This chapter provides some theoretical background for the models, equations, and solution procedures
used by ANSYS Icepak.
Information is presented in the following sections:
• Governing Equations (p. 961)
• Turbulence (p. 963)
• Buoyancy-Driven Flows and Natural Convection (p. 979)
• Radiation (p. 980)
• Optimization (p. 987)
• Solution Procedures (p. 991)
• Krylov ROM Theory (p. 1010)
40.1. Governing Equations

ANSYS Icepak solves the Navier-Stokes equations for transport of mass, momentum, species, and energy
when it calculates laminar flow with heat transfer. Additional transport equations are solved when the
flow is turbulent (see Turbulence (p. 963)) or when radiative heat transfer is included (see Radi-
ation (p. 980)).
40.1.1.The Mass Conservation Equation
40.1.2. Momentum Equations
40.1.3. Energy Conservation Equation
40.1.1. The Mass Conservation Equation

The equation for conservation of mass, or continuity equation, can be written as follows:
(40.1)
For an incompressible fluid, this reduces to

(40.2)
40.1.2. Momentum Equations

Transport of momentum in an inertial (non-accelerating) reference frame is described by [ 2 (p. 1011)
]
Theory
(40.3)
where p is the static pressure, is the stress tensor (described below), and is the gravitational
body force. contains other source terms that may arise from resistances, sources, and so on.
The stress tensor is given by

(40.4)
where μ is the molecular viscosity, I is the unit tensor, and the second term on the right-hand side is
the effect of volume dilation.
40.1.3. Energy Conservation Equation
The energy equation for a fluid region can be written in terms of sensible enthalpy h ( ,
where Tref is 298.15 K) as
(40.5)
where k is the molecular conductivity, kt is the conductivity due to turbulent transport ( ),

and the source term Sh includes any volumetric heat sources you have defined.
In conducting solid regions, ANSYS Icepak solves a simple conduction equation that includes the heat
flux due to conduction and volumetric heat sources within the solid:
(40.6)
where ρ is density, k is conductivity, T is temperature, and Sh is the volumetric heat source.
Note:
Equation 40.6 (p. 962) is solved simultaneously with the energy transport equation,
Equation 40.5 (p. 962), in the flow regions to yield a fully coupled conduction/convection
heat transfer prediction.
40.2. Species Transport Equations

When you choose to solve conservation equations for species, Icepak predicts the local mass fraction
of each species, YI, through the solution of a convection-diffusion equation for the ith species. This
conservation equation takes the following general form:
(40.7)
where SI is the rate of creation by addition from user-defined sources. An equation of this form will be
solved for N –1 species where N is the total number of fluid phase species present in the system.
Turbulence
Mass Diffusion in Laminar Flows

is the diffusion flux of species i, which arises due to concentration gradients. Icepak uses the dilute
approximation, under which the diffusion ux can be written as
(40.8)
Here Di,m is the diffusion coefficient for species i in the mixture.
Mass Diffusion in Turbulent Flows

In turbulent flows, Icepak computes the mass diffusion in the following form:
(40.9)
where Sct is the turbulent Schmidt number, (with a default setting of 0.7).
Treatment of Species Transport in the Energy Equation

For many multicomponent mixing flows, the transport of enthalpy due to species diffusion
(40.10)
can have a significant effect on the enthalpy field and should not be neglected. In particular, when the
Lewis number
(40.11)
is far from unity, this term cannot be neglected. Icepak will include this term by default.
40.3. Turbulence
Eight turbulence models are available in ANSYS Icepak: the zero-equation (mixing-length) model, the
two-equation (standard k-ε) model, the RNG k-ε model, the realizable k-ε model, the enhanced two-
equation (standard k-ε with enhanced wall treatment) model, the enhanced RNG k-ε model, the enhanced
realizable k-ε model, the Spalart-Allmaras model and the k-ω SST model.
40.3.1. Zero-Equation Turbulence Model
40.3.2. Advanced Turbulence Models
40.3.1. Zero-Equation Turbulence Model

The mixing-length zero-equation turbulence model (also known as the algebraic model) uses the
following relation to calculate turbulent viscosity, μt:
(40.12)
The mixing length, , is defined as

(40.13)
Theory
where d is the distance from the wall and the von Kármán constant k = 0.419.
S is the modulus of the mean rate-of-strain tensor, defined as

(40.14)
with the mean strain rate Sij given by
(40.15)
40.3.2. Advanced Turbulence Models

In turbulence models that employ the Boussinesq approach, the central issue is how the eddy viscosity
is computed. The model proposed by Spalart and Allmaras [ 26 (p. 1012) ] solves a transport equation
for a quantity that is a modified form of the turbulent kinematic viscosity.
The standard k-ε, RNG and realizable k-ε models have similar forms, with transport equations for k
and ε. The major differences in the models are as follows:
• the method of calculating turbulent viscosity
• the turbulent Prandtl numbers governing the turbulent diffusion of k and ε
• the generation and destruction terms in the ε equation
This section describes the Reynolds-averaging method for calculating turbulent effects and provides
an overview of the issues related to choosing an advanced turbulence model in ANSYS Icepak. The
transport equations, methods of calculating turbulent viscosity, and model constants are presented
separately for each model. The features that are essentially common to both models follow, including
turbulent production, generation due to buoyancy, and modeling heat transfer.
Reynolds (Ensemble) Averaging

The advanced turbulence models in ANSYS Icepak are based on Reynolds averages of the governing
equations. In Reynolds averaging, the solution variables in the instantaneous (exact) Navier-Stokes
equations are decomposed into the mean (ensemble-averaged or time-averaged) and fluctuating
components. For the velocity components:
(40.16)
where and are the mean and instantaneous velocity components (i = 1, 2, 3).
Likewise, for pressure and other scalar quantities:

(40.17)
where φ denotes a scalar such as pressure or energy. Substituting expressions of this form for the
flow variables into the instantaneous continuity and momentum equations and taking a time (or en-
semble) average (and dropping the overbar on the mean velocity, ) yields the ensemble-averaged
momentum equations. They can be written in Cartesian tensor form as:
(40.18)
Turbulence
(40.19)
(40.20)
Note:
Equation 40.18 (p. 964) and Equation 40.20 (p. 965) are called "Reynolds-averaged" Navier-
Stokes (RANS) equations. They have the same general form as the instantaneous Navier-
Stokes equations, with the velocities and other solution variables now representing en-
semble-averaged (or time-averaged) values. Additional terms now appear that represent
the effects of turbulence. These "Reynolds stresses", , must be modeled in order to
close Equation 40.20 (p. 965).
For variable-density flows, Equation 40.18 (p. 964) and Equation 40.20 (p. 965) can be inter-
preted as Favre-averaged Navier-Stokes equations [ 8 (p. 1011) ], with the velocities repres-
enting mass-averaged values. As such, Equation 40.18 (p. 964) and Equation 40.20 (p. 965)
can be applied to density-varying flows.
Boussinesq Approach
The Reynolds-averaged approach to turbulence modeling requires that the Reynolds stresses in
Equation 40.20 (p. 965) be appropriately modeled. A common method employs the Boussinesq hypo-
thesis [ 8 (p. 1011) ] to relate the Reynolds stresses to the mean velocity gradients:
(40.21)
The Boussinesq hypothesis is used in the Spalart-Allmaras model and the k-ε models. The advantage
of this approach is the relatively low computational cost associated with the computation of the
turbulent viscosity, μt. In the case of the Spalart-Allmaras model, only one additional transport equation
(representing turbulent viscosity) is solved. In the case of the k-ε models, two additional transport
equations (for the turbulence kinetic energy, k, and the turbulence dissipation rate, ε) are solved, and
μt is computed as a function of k and ε. The disadvantage of the Boussinesq hypothesis as presented
is that it assumes μt is an isotropic scalar quantity, which is not strictly true.
Choosing an Advanced Turbulence Model

This section provides an overview of the issues related to the advanced turbulence models provided
in ANSYS Icepak.
The Spalart-Allmaras Model
The Spalart-Allmaras model is a relatively simple one-equation model that solves a modeled transport
equation for the kinematic eddy (turbulent) viscosity. This embodies a relatively new class of one-
equation models in which it is not necessary to calculate a length scale related to the local shear
layer thickness. The Spalart-Allmaras model was designed specifically for aerospace applications in-
volving wall-bounded flows and has been shown to give good results for boundary layers subjected
to adverse pressure gradients. It is also gaining popularity for turbomachinery applications.
Theory
On a cautionary note, however, the Spalart-Allmaras model is still relatively new, and no claim is made
regarding its suitability to all types of complex engineering flows. For instance, it cannot be relied on
to predict the decay of homogeneous, isotropic turbulence. Furthermore, one-equation models are
often criticized for their inability to rapidly accommodate changes in length scale, such as might be
necessary when the flow changes abruptly from a wall-bounded to a free shear flow.
The Standard k-ε Model
The simplest "complete models" of turbulence are two-equation models in which the solution of two
separate transport equations allows the turbulent velocity and length scales to be independently
determined. The standard k-ε model in ANSYS Icepak falls within this class of turbulence model and
has become the workhorse of practical engineering flow calculations in the time since it was proposed
by Launder and Spalding [ 18 (p. 1012) ]. Robustness, economy, and reasonable accuracy for a wide
range of turbulent flows explain its popularity in industrial flow and heat transfer simulations. It is a
semi-empirical model, and the derivation of the model equations relies on phenomenological consid-
erations and empiricism.
As the strengths and weaknesses of the standard k-ε model have become known, improvements
have been made to the model to improve its performance. One of these variants is available in ANSYS
Icepak: the RNG k-ε model [ 29 (p. 1012) ].
The RNG k-ε Model
The RNG k-ε model was derived using a rigorous statistical technique (called renormalization group
theory). It is similar in form to the standard k-ε model, but includes the following refinements:
• The RNG model has an additional term in its ε equation that significantly improves the accuracy for rapidly
strained flows.
• The effect of swirl on turbulence is included in the RNG model, enhancing accuracy for swirling flows.
• The RNG theory provides an analytical formula for turbulent Prandtl numbers, while the standard k-ε
model uses user-specified, constant values.
• While the standard k-ε model is a high-Reynolds-number model, the RNG theory provides an analytically-
derived differential formula for effective viscosity that accounts for low-Reynolds-number effects.
These features make the RNG k-ε model more accurate and reliable for a wider class of flows than
the standard k-ε model.
The Realizable k-ε Model
The realizable k-ε model is a relatively recent development and differs from the standard k-ε model
in two important ways:
• The realizable k-ε model contains a new formulation for the turbulent viscosity.
• A new transport equation for the dissipation rate, ε, has been derived from an exact equation for the
transport of the mean-square vorticity fluctuation.
The term "realizable" means that the model satisfies certain mathematical constraints on the Reynolds
stresses, consistent with the physics of turbulent flows. Neither the standard k-ε model nor the RNG
k-ε model is realizable.
Turbulence
An immediate benefit of the realizable k-ε model is that it more accurately predicts the spreading
rate of both planar and round jets. It is also likely to provide superior performance for flows involving
rotation, boundary layers under strong adverse pressure gradients, separation, and recirculation.
The Enhanced Two-Equation Models
The k-ε models are primarily valid for turbulent core flows (that is, the flow in the regions somewhat
far from walls). Consideration therefore needs to be given as to how to make these models suitable
for wall-bounded flows.
Turbulent flows are significantly affected by the presence of walls. Obviously, the mean velocity field
is affected through the no-slip condition that has to be satisfied at the wall. However, the turbulence
is also changed by the presence of the wall in non-trivial ways. Very close to the wall, viscous damping
reduces the tangential velocity fluctuations, while kinematic blocking reduces the normal fluctuations.
Toward the outer part of the near-wall region, however, the turbulence is rapidly augmented by the
production of turbulence kinetic energy due to the large gradients in mean velocity.
The near-wall modeling significantly impacts the fidelity of numerical solutions, inasmuch as walls
are the main source of mean vorticity and turbulence. It is in the near-wall region where the solution
variables have large gradients and where the momentum and other scalar transports are the greatest.
Therefore, accurate representation of the flow in the near-wall region determines successful predictions
of wall-bounded turbulent flows.
Numerous experiments have shown that the near-wall region can be largely subdivided into three
layers. In the innermost layer, called the "viscous sublayer", the flow is almost laminar, and the (mo-
lecular) viscosity plays a dominant role in momentum and heat or mass transfer. In the outer layer,
called the fully-turbulent layer, turbulence plays a major role. Finally, there is an interim region between
the viscous sublayer and the fully turbulent layer where the effects of molecular viscosity and turbu-
lence are equally important.
To more accurately resolve the flow near the wall, the enhanced two-equation models combine three
k-ε models (standard, RNG and realizable) with enhanced wall treatment.
Enhanced Wall Treatment
Enhanced wall treatment is a near-wall modeling method that combines a two-layer model with en-
hanced wall functions [ 3 (p. 1011) 9 (p. 1011) 14 (p. 1011) 15 (p. 1011) 27 (p. 1012) 28 (p. 1012) ].
In the two-layer model, the viscosity-affected near-wall region is completely resolved all the way to
the viscous sublayer. The two-layer approach is an integral part of the enhanced wall treatment and
is used to specify both ε and the turbulent viscosity in the near-wall cells. In this approach, the whole
domain is subdivided into a viscosity-affected region and a fully-turbulent region. The demarcation
of the two regions is determined by a wall-distance-based, turbulent Reynolds number.
If the near-wall mesh is fine enough to be able to resolve the laminar sublayer (typically ), then
the enhanced wall treatment will be identical to the traditional two-layer zonal model. However, the
restriction that the near-wall mesh must be sufficiently fine everywhere might impose too large a
computational requirement. Ideally, then, one would like to have a near-wall formulation that can be
used with coarse meshes (usually referred to as wall-function meshes) as well as fine meshes (low-
Reynolds-number meshes). In addition, excessive error should not be incurred for intermediate meshes
that are too fine for the near-wall cell centroid to lie in the fully turbulent region, but also too coarse
to properly resolve the sublayer.
Theory
To achieve the goal of having a near-wall modeling approach that will possess the accuracy of the
standard two-layer approach for fine near-wall meshes and will not significantly reduce accuracy for
wall-function meshes, ANSYS Icepak combines the two-layer model with enhanced wall functions to
result in the enhanced wall treatment.
Computational Effort: CPU Time and Solution Behavior
The standard k-ε model clearly requires more computational effort than the Spalart-Allmaras model
since an additional transport equation is solved. The realizable k-ε model requires only slightly more
computational effort than the standard k-ε model. However, due to the extra terms and functions in
the governing equations and a greater degree of nonlinearity, computations with the RNG k-ε model
tend to take 10-15% more CPU time than with the standard k-ε model.
Aside from the time per iteration, the choice of turbulence model can affect the ability of ANSYS
Icepak to obtain a converged solution. For example, the standard k-ε model is known to be slightly
over-diffusive in certain situations, while the RNG k-ε model is designed such that the turbulent vis-
cosity is reduced in response to high rates of strain. Because diffusion has a stabilizing effect on the
numerics, the RNG model is more likely to be susceptible to instability in steady-state solutions.
However, this should not necessarily be seen as a disadvantage of the RNG model, since these char-
acteristics make it more responsive to important physical instabilities such as time-dependent turbulent
vortex shedding.
The Spalart-Allmaras Model

In its original form, the Spalart-Allmaras model is effectively a low-Reynolds-number model, requiring
the viscous-affected region of the boundary layer to be properly resolved. In ANSYS Icepak, however,
the Spalart-Allmaras model has been implemented to use wall functions when the mesh resolution
is not sufficiently fine. This might make it the best choice for relatively crude simulations on coarse
meshes where accurate turbulent flow computations are not critical. Furthermore, the near-wall
gradients of the transported variable in the model are much smaller than the gradients of the trans-
ported variables in the k-ε models. This might make the model less sensitive to numerical error when
non-layered meshes are used near walls.
Transport Equation for the Spalart-Allmaras Model
The transported variable in the Spalart-Allmaras model, , is identical to the turbulent kinematic vis-
cosity except in the near-wall (viscous-affected) region. The transport equation for is
(40.22)
where Gν is the production of turbulent viscosity and Yν is the destruction of turbulent viscosity that
occurs in the near-wall region due to wall blocking and viscous damping. and Cb2 are constants
and ν is the molecular kinematic viscosity. is a user-defined source term. Note that since the tur-
bulence kinetic energy k is not calculated in the Spalart-Allmaras model, the last term in Equa-
tion 40.21 (p. 965) is ignored when estimating the Reynolds stresses.
Modeling the Turbulent Viscosity
The turbulent viscosity, μt , is computed from

(40.23)
Turbulence
where the viscous damping function, fv1 , is given by
(40.24)
and
(40.25)
Modeling the Turbulent Production
The production term, Gν , is modeled as

(40.26)
where
(40.27)
and
(40.28)
Cb1 and κ are constants, d is the distance from the wall, and S is a scalar measure of the deformation
tensor. By default in ANSYS Icepak, as in the original model proposed by Spalart and Allmaras, S is
based on the magnitude of the vorticity:
(40.29)
where Ωij is the mean rate-of-rotation tensor and is defined by
(40.30)
The justification for the default expression for S is that, for the wall-bounded flows that were of most
interest when the model was formulated, turbulence is found only where vorticity is generated near
walls. However, it has since been acknowledged that one should also take into account the effect of
mean strain on the turbulence production, and a modification to the model has been proposed
[[6 (p. 1011)6]] and incorporated into ANSYS Icepak.
This modification combines measures of both rotation and strain tensors in the definition of S:
(40.31)
where
(40.32)
with the mean strain rate, Sij , defined as
(40.33)
Including both the rotation and strain tensors reduces the production of eddy viscosity and con-
sequently reduces the eddy viscosity itself in regions where the measure of vorticity exceeds that of
strain rate. One such example can be found in vortical flows, that is, flow near the core of a vortex
Theory
subjected to a pure rotation where turbulence is known to be suppressed. Including both the rotation
and strain tensors more correctly accounts for the effects of rotation on turbulence. The default option
(including the rotation tensor only) tends to overpredict the production of eddy viscosity and hence
overpredicts the eddy viscosity itself in certain circumstances.
Modeling the Turbulent Destruction
The destruction term is modeled as

(40.34)
where
(40.35)
(40.36)
(40.37)
Cw1 , Cw2 , and Cw3 are constants, and is given by Equation 40.27 (p. 969). Note that the modification
described above to include the effects of mean strain on S will also affect the value of used to
compute r.
Model Constants
The model constants , and have the following default values [ 26 (p. 1012)
]:
(40.38)
(40.39)
Wall Boundary Conditions
At walls, the modified turbulent kinematic viscosity, , is set to zero.
When the mesh is fine enough to resolve the laminar sublayer, the wall shear stress is obtained from
the laminar stress-strain relationship:
(40.40)
If the mesh is too coarse to resolve the laminar sublayer, it is assumed that the centroid of the wall-
adjacent cell falls within the logarithmic region of the boundary layer, and the law-of-the-wall is em-
ployed:
(40.41)
where u is the velocity parallel to the wall, uτ is the shear velocity, y is the distance from the wall, κ
is the von Kármán constant (0.4187), and E = 9.793.
Convective Heat and Mass Transfer Modeling
Turbulence
In ANSYS Icepak, turbulent heat transport is modeled using the concept of Reynolds’ analogy to tur-
bulent momentum transfer. The "modeled" energy equation is thus given by the following:
(40.42)
where k, in this case, is the thermal conductivity, E is the total energy, and (τij)eff is the deviatoric
stress tensor, defined as
(40.43)
The term involving (τij)eff represents the viscous heating. The default value of the turbulent Prandtl
number is 0.85. Turbulent mass transfer is treated similarly, with a default turbulent Schmidt number
of 0.7.
Wall boundary conditions for scalar transport are handled analogously to momentum, using the ap-
propriate "law-of-the-wall".
Two-Equation (Standard k-ε) Turbulence Model

The two-equation turbulence model (also known as the standard k-ε model) is more complex than
the zero-equation model. The standard k-ε model [ 18 (p. 1012) ] is a semi-empirical model based on
model transport equations for the turbulent kinetic energy (k) and its dissipation rate (ε). The model
transport equation for k is derived from the exact equation, while the model transport equation for
ε is obtained using physical reasoning and bears little resemblance to its mathematically exact
counterpart.
In the derivation of the standard k-ε model, it is assumed that the flow is fully turbulent, and the
effects of molecular viscosity are negligible. The standard k-ε model is therefore valid only for fully
turbulent flows.
Transport Equations for the Standard k-ε Model
The turbulent kinetic energy,k, and its rate of dissipation, ε, are obtained from the following transport
equations:
(40.44)
and
(40.45)
In these equations, Gk represents the generation of turbulent kinetic energy due to the mean velocity
gradients, calculated as described later in this section. Gb is the generation of turbulent kinetic energy
due to buoyancy, calculated as described later in this section. C1ε ,C2ε , and C3ε are constants. σk and
σε are the turbulent Prandtl numbers for k and ε, respectively.
Modeling the Turbulent Viscosity
The "eddy" or turbulent viscosity , μt , is computed by combining k and ε as follows:
(40.46)
Theory
where Cμ is a constant.
Model Constants
The model constants C1ε , C2ε . C3μ , σk , and σε have the following default values [ 18 (p. 1012) ]:
(40.47)
These default values have been determined from experiments with air and water for fundamental
turbulent shear flows including homogeneous shear flows and decaying isotropic grid turbulence.
They have been found to work fairly well for a wide range of wall-bounded and free shear flows.
The RNG k-ε Model

The RNG-based k-ε turbulence model is derived from the instantaneous Navier-Stokes equations, using
a mathematical technique called "renormalization group" (RNG) methods. The analytical derivation
results in a model with constants different from those in the standard k-ε model, and additional
terms and functions in the transport equations for k and ε. A more comprehensive description of RNG
theory and its application to turbulence can be found in [ 4 (p. 1011) ].
Transport Equations for the RNG ε Model
The RNG k-ε model has a similar form to the standard ε model:
(40.48)
and
(40.49)
In these equations, Gk represents the generation of turbulent kinetic energy due to the mean velocity
gradients, calculated as described later in this section. Gb is the generation of turbulent kinetic energy
due to buoyancy, calculated as described later in this section. The quantities α k and αε are the inverse
effective Prandtl numbers for k and ε, respectively.
Modeling the Effective Viscosity
The scale elimination procedure in RNG theory results in a differential equation for turbulent viscosity:
(40.50)
where
(40.51)
Equation 40.50 (p. 972) is integrated to obtain an accurate description of how the effective turbulent
transport varies with the effective Reynolds number (or eddy scale), allowing the model to better
handle low-Reynolds-number and near-wall flows.
In the high-Reynolds-number limit, Equation 40.50 (p. 972) gives
Turbulence
(40.52)
with Cμ = 0.0845, derived using RNG theory. It is interesting to note that this value of Cμ is very close
to the empirically-determined value of 0.09 used in the standard k-ε model.
In ANSYS Icepak, the effective viscosity is computed using the high-Reynolds-number form in Equa-
tion 40.52 (p. 973).
Calculating the Inverse Effective Prandtl Numbers
The inverse effective Prandtl numbers α k and α ε are computed using the following formula derived
analytically by the RNG theory:
(40.53)
where α 0 = 1.0. In the high-Reynolds-number limit (μmol ∕μeff 1), α k = α ε ≈ 1.393.
The Rε Term in the ε Equation
The main difference between the RNG and standard k-ε models lies in the additional term in the ε
equation given by
(40.54)
where η≡Sk ∕ ε, η0 = 4.38, β = 0.012.
The effects of this term in the RNG ε equation can be seen more clearly by rearranging Equa-
tion 40.49 (p. 972). Using Equation 40.54 (p. 973), the last two terms in Equation 40.49 (p. 972) can be
merged, and the resulting ε equation can be rewritten as
(40.55)
where C2ε ∗ is given by
(40.56)
In regions where η<<η0 , the R term makes a positive contribution, and C2ε ∗ becomes larger than
C2ε . In the logarithmic layer, for instance, it can be shown that η≈3.0, giving C2ε ∗ ≈ 2.0, which is
close in magnitude to the value of C2ε in the standard k-ε model (1.92). As a result, for weakly to
moderately strained flows, the RNG model tends to give results largely comparable to the standard
k-ε model.
In regions of large strain rate (η η0 ), however, the R term makes a negative contribution, making the
value of C2ε ∗ less than C2ε . In comparison with the standard k-ε model, the smaller destruction of ε
augments ε, reducing k and eventually the effective viscosity. As a result, in rapidly strained flows,
the RNG model yields a lower turbulent viscosity than the standard k-ε model.
Theory
Thus, the RNG model is more responsive to the effects of rapid strain and streamline curvature than
the standard k-ε model, which explains the superior performance of the RNG model for certain classes
of flows.
Model Constants
The model constants C1ε and C2ε in Equation 40.49 (p. 972) have values derived analytically by the
RNG theory. These values, used by default in ANSYS Icepak, are C1ε = 1.42, C2ε = 1.68.
Modeling Turbulent Production in the k-ε Models

From the exact equation for the transport of k, the term Gk , representing the production of turbulent
kinetic energy, can be defined as
(40.57)
To evaluate Gk in a manner consistent with the Boussinesq hypothesis,

(40.58)
where S is the modulus of the mean rate-of-strain tensor, defined as

(40.59)
with the mean strain rate Sij given by
(40.60)
Effects of Buoyancy on Turbulence in the k-ε Models

When a non-zero gravity field and temperature gradient are present simultaneously, the k-ε models
in ANSYS Icepak account for the generation of k due to buoyancy (Gb in Equations Equa-
tion 40.44 (p. 971) and Equation 40.48 (p. 972)), and the corresponding contribution to the production
of ε in Equations Equation 40.45 (p. 971) and Equation 40.49 (p. 972).
The generation of turbulence due to buoyancy is given by

(40.61)
where Prt is the turbulent Prandtl number for energy. For the standard k-ε model, the default value
of Prt is 0.85. In the case of the RNG k-ε model, Prt = 1∕α, where α is given by Equation 40.53 (p. 973),
but with α 0 = 1∕Pr = k∕μcp. The coefficient of thermal expansion, β, is defined as
(40.62)
It can be seen from the transport equation for k (Equation 40.44 (p. 971) or Equation 40.48 (p. 972))
that turbulent kinetic energy tends to be augmented (Gb 0) in unstable stratification. For stable
stratification, buoyancy tends to suppress the turbulence (Gb <0). In ANSYS Icepak, the effects of
buoyancy on the generation of k are always included when you have both a non-zero gravity field
and a non-zero temperature (or density) gradient.
Turbulence
While the buoyancy effects on the generation of k are relatively well understood, the effect on ε is
less clear. In ANSYS Icepak, by default, the buoyancy effects on ε are neglected simply by setting Gb
to zero in the transport equation for ε (Equation 40.45 (p. 971) or Equation 40.49 (p. 972)).
The degree to which ε is affected by the buoyancy is determined by the constant C3ε . In ANSYS Icepak,
C3ε is not specified, but is instead calculated according to the following relation [ 7 (p. 1011) ]:
(40.63)
where v is the component of the flow velocity parallel to the gravitational vector and u is the com-
ponent of the flow velocity perpendicular to the gravitational vector. In this way, C3ε will become 1
for buoyant shear layers for which the main flow direction is aligned with the direction of gravity.
For buoyant shear layers that are perpendicular to the gravitational vector, 3ε will become zero.
Convective Heat Transfer Modeling in the k-ε Models

In ANSYS Icepak, turbulent heat transport is modeled using the concept of Reynolds’ analogy to tur-
bulent momentum transfer. The "modeled" energy equation is thus given by the following:
(40.64)
where E is the total energy and keff is the effective conductivity.
For the standard k-ε model,keff is given by
(40.65)
with the default value of the turbulent Prandtl number set to 0.85.
For the RNG k-ε model, the effective thermal conductivity is

(40.66)
where α is calculated from Equation 40.53 (p. 973), but with α 0 = 1∕Pr = k∕μcp.
The fact that α varies with μmol ∕μeff , as in Equation 40.53 (p. 973), is an advantage of the RNG k-
ε model. It is consistent with experimental evidence indicating that the turbulent Prandtl number
varies with the molecular Prandtl number and turbulence [ 17 (p. 1011) ]. Equation 40.53 (p. 973) works
well across a very broad range of molecular Prandtl numbers, from liquid metals (Pr≈10−) to paraffin
oils (Pr≈103), which allows heat transfer to be calculated in low-Reynolds-number regions. Equa-
tion 40.53 (p. 973) smoothly predicts the variation of effective Prandtl number from the molecular
value (α = ∕Pr) in the viscosity-dominated region to the fully turbulent value (α = 1.393) in the fully
turbulent regions of the flow.
k-ω SST Model

The k-ω SST model is based on the coupling of the SST k-ω transport equations, one for the intermit-
tency and one for the transition onset criteria, in terms of momentum-thickness Reynolds number.
An ANSYS empirical correlation (Langtry and Menter) has been developed to cover standard bypass
transition as well as flows in low-free-stream turbulence environments. The k-ω SST model can be
used as a low Reynolds number turbulence model. It also exhibits good behavior in adverse pressure
gradients and separating flow.
Theory
Transport Equations for the Transition SST Model
The transport equation for the intermittency is defined as:
(40.67)
The transition sources are defined as follows:
(40.68)
where is the strain rate magnitude, is an empirical correlation that controls the length of
the transition region, and and hold the values of 2 and 1, respectively. The destruction/re-
laminarization sources are defined as follows:
(40.69)
where is the vorticity magnitude. The transition onset is controlled by the following functions:
(40.70)
(40.71)
(40.72)
is the critical Reynolds number where the intermittency first starts to increase in the boundary
layer. This occurs upstream of the transition Reynolds number and the difference between the
two must be obtained from an empirical correlation. Both the and correlations are functions
of .
The constants for the intermittency equation are:

(40.73)
Separation-Induced Transition Correction
The modification for separation-induced transition is:
(40.74)
Here, is a constant with a value of 2.
Turbulence
The model constants in Equation 40.74 (p. 976) have been adjusted from those of Menter et al.
[30] (p. 1012) in order to improve the predictions of separated flow transition. The main difference is
that the constant that controls the relation between and was changed from 2.193, its value
for a Blasius boundary layer, to 3.235, the value at a separation point where the shape factor is 3.5
[30] (p. 1012). The boundary condition for at a wall is zero normal flux, while for an inlet, is equal
to 1.0.
The transport equation for the transition momentum thickness Reynolds number is
(40.75)
The source term is defined as follows:
(40.76)
(40.77)
(40.78)
(40.79)
The model constants for the equation are:

(40.80)
The boundary condition for at a wall is zero flux. The boundary condition for at an inlet
should be calculated from the empirical correlation based on the inlet turbulence intensity.
The model contains three empirical correlations. is the transition onset as observed in experiments.
This has been modified from Menter et al. [30] (p. 1012) in order to improve the predictions for natural
transition. It is used in Equation 40.75 (p. 977). is the length of the transition zone and is substi-
tuted in Equation 40.67 (p. 976). is the point where the model is activated in order to match both
and , and is used in Equation 40.71 (p. 976). At present, these empirical correlations are
proprietary and are not given in this User’s guide.
(40.81)
The first empirical correlation is a function of the local turbulence intensity, , and the Thwaites’
pressure gradient coefficient is defined as
(40.82)
where is the acceleration in the streamwise direction.
Theory
Coupling the Transition Model and SST Transport Equations
The transition model interacts with the SST turbulence model by modification of the -equation, as
follows:
(40.83)
(40.84)
(40.85)
where and are the original production and destruction terms for the SST model. Note that the
production term in the -equation is not modified. The rationale behind the above model formulation
is given in detail in Menter et al. [30] (p. 1012).
In order to capture the laminar and transitional boundary layers correctly, the mesh must have a
of approximately one. If the is too large (that is, > 5), then the transition onset location moves
upstream with increasing . It is recommended that you use the bounded second order upwind
based discretization for the mean flow, turbulence and transition equations.
Specifying Inlet Turbulence Levels
It has been observed that the turbulence intensity specified at an inlet can decay quite rapidly de-
pending on the inlet viscosity ratio ( ) (and hence turbulence eddy frequency). As a result, the
local turbulence intensity downstream of the inlet can be much smaller than the inlet value (see
Figure 40.1: Exemplary Decay of Turbulence Intensity (Tu) as a Function of Streamwise Distance
(x) (p. 979)). Typically, the larger the inlet viscosity ratio, the smaller the turbulent decay rate. However,
if too large a viscosity ratio is specified (that is, > 100), the skin friction can deviate significantly from
the laminar value. There is experimental evidence that suggests that this effect occurs physically;
however, at this point it is not clear how accurately the transition model reproduces this behavior.
For this reason, if possible, it is desirable to have a relatively low (that is, 1 – 10) inlet viscosity ratio
and to estimate the inlet value of turbulence intensity such that at the leading edge of the
blade/airfoil, the turbulence intensity has decayed to the desired value. The decay of turbulent kinetic
energy can be calculated with the following analytical solution:
(40.86)
For the SST turbulence model in the freestream the constants are:
(40.87)
The time scale can be determined as follows:

(40.88)
where is the streamwise distance downstream of the inlet and is the mean convective velocity.
The eddy viscosity is defined as:
(40.89)
The decay of turbulent kinetic energy equation can be rewritten in terms of inlet turbulence intensity
( ) and inlet eddy viscosity ratio ( ) as follows:
Buoyancy-Driven Flows and Natural Convection
(40.90)
Figure 40.1: Exemplary Decay of Turbulence Intensity (Tu) as a Function of Streamwise Distance
(x)
40.4. Buoyancy-Driven Flows and Natural Convection

The importance of buoyancy forces in a mixed convection flow can be measured by the ratio of the
Grashof and Reynolds numbers:
(40.91)
When this number approaches or exceeds unity, you should expect strong buoyancy contributions to
the flow. Conversely, if it is very small, buoyancy forces may be ignored in your simulation. In pure
natural convection, the strength of the buoyancy-induced flow is measured by the Rayleigh number:
(40.92)
where β is the thermal expansion coefficient:
(40.93)
and α is the thermal diffusivity:

(40.94)
Rayleigh numbers less than 108 indicate a buoyancy-induced laminar flow, with transition to turbulence
occurring over the range of 108 < Ra <1010.
Theory
ANSYS Icepak uses either the Boussinesq model or the ideal gas law in the calculation of natural-con-
vection flows, as described in the following sections.
• The Boussinesq Model (p. 980)
• Incompressible Ideal Gas Law (p. 980)
40.4.1. The Boussinesq Model

By default, ANSYS Icepak uses the Boussinesq model for natural-convection flows. This model treats
density as a constant value in all solved equations, except for the buoyancy term in the momentum
equation:
(40.95)
where ρ0 is the (constant) density of the flow, T0 is the operating temperature, and β is the thermal
expansion coefficient. Equation 40.95 (p. 980) is obtained by using the Boussinesq approximation
to eliminate ρ from the buoyancy term. This approximation is accurate as long as
changes in actual density are small; specifically, the Boussinesq approximation is valid when β(T−T0) 1
40.4.2. Incompressible Ideal Gas Law

In ANSYS Icepak, if you choose to define the density using the ideal gas law, ANSYS Icepak will compute
the density as
(40.96)
where R is the universal gas constant and pop is defined by you as the Oper. pressure in the Ad-
vanced problem setup panel (see Including Temperature-Dependent Density Effects (p. 257)). In this
form, the density depends only on the operating pressure and not on the local temperature field, or
molecular weight.
Definition of the Operating Density

When the Boussinesq approximation is not used, the operating density, ρ0, appears in the body-force
term in the momentum equations as (ρ−ρ0)g.
This form of the body-force term follows from the redefinition of pressure in ANSYS Icepak as
(40.97)
The hydrostatic balance in a fluid at rest is then

(40.98)
The definition of the operating density is thus important in all buoyancy-driven flows.
40.5. Radiation
This section discusses the following aspects of radiation:
40.5.1. Overview
Radiation
40.5.2. Gray-Diffuse Radiation

40.5.3.The Surface-to-Surface Radiation Model
40.5.4.The Discrete Ordinates (DO) Radiation Model
40.5.5.The Ray Tracing Radiation Model
40.5.1. Overview
The terms radiative heat transfer and thermal radiation are commonly used to describe heat transfer
caused by electromagnetic (EM) waves. All materials continually emit and absorb EM waves, or photons.
The strength and wavelength of emission depends on the temperature of the emitting material. At
absolute zero K, no radiation is emitted from a surface. For heat transfer applications, wavelengths
in the infrared spectrum are generally of greatest importance and are, therefore, the only ones con-
sidered in ANSYS Icepak.
While both conduction and convection (the other basic modes of heat transfer) require a medium
for transmission, radiation does not. Therefore, thermal radiation can traverse a long distance without
interacting with a medium. Also, for most applications, conductive and convective heat transfer rates
are linearly proportional to temperature differences. Radiative heat transfer rates, on the other hand,
are (for the most part) proportional to differences in temperature raised to the fourth power.
In electronics applications, where the medium of interest is typically air, any absorption (and hence
re-emission) and scattering of radiation can be ignored. For such applications, therefore, only "surface-
to-surface" radiation need be considered for analysis.
40.5.2. Gray-Diffuse Radiation

ANSYS Icepak’s radiation models assume the surfaces to be gray and diffuse. Emissivity and absorptivity
of a gray surface are independent of the wavelength. Also, by Kirchhoff’s law [ 19 (p. 1012) ], the
emissivity equals the absorptivity (ε = α ). For a diffuse surface, the reflectivity is independent of the
outgoing (or incoming) directions.
As stated earlier, for applications of interest, the exchange of radiative energy between surfaces is
virtually unaffected by the medium that separates them. Thus, according to the gray-body model, if
a certain amount of radiation (E) is incident on a surface, a fraction (ρE) is reflected, a fraction ( αE)
is absorbed, and a fraction (τE) is transmitted. Because for most applications the surfaces in question
are opaque to thermal radiation (in the infrared spectrum), the surfaces can be considered opaque.
The transmissivity, therefore, can be neglected. It follows, from conservation of energy, that α + ρ
= 1, since α = ε (emissivity), and ρ = 1−ε.
40.5.3. The Surface-to-Surface Radiation Model

The default radiation model used in ANSYS Icepak is the surface-to-surface radiation model. The energy
flux leaving a given surface is composed of directly emitted and reflected energy. The reflected energy
flux is dependent on the incident energy flux from the surroundings, which then can be expressed
in terms of the energy flux leaving all other surfaces. The energy reflected from surface k is
(40.99)
where qout,k is the energy flux leaving the surface, εk is the emissivity, σ is the Boltzmann constant,
and qin,k is the energy flux incident on the surface from the surroundings.
Theory
The amount of incident energy upon a surface from another surface is a direct function of the surface-
to-surface "view factor", Fjk . The view factor Fjk is the fraction of energy leaving surface k that is in-
cident on surface j. The incident energy flux qin,k can be expressed in terms of the energy flux leaving
all other surfaces as
(40.100)
where Ak is the area of surface k and Fjk is the view factor between surface k and surface j. For N
surfaces, using the view factor reciprocity relationship gives
(40.101)
so that
(40.102)
Therefore,
(40.103)
which can be written as
(40.104)
where Jk represents the energy that is given off (or radiosity) of surface k and Ek represents the
emissive power of surface k. This represents N equations, which can be recast into matrix form as
(40.105)
where K is an N×N matrix, J is the radiosity vector, and E is the emissive power vector.
Note:
Equation 40.105 (p. 982) is referred to as the radiosity matrix equation. The view factor
between two finite surfaces i and j is given by
(40.106)
where δi is determined by the visibility of dAj to dAi . δij = 1 if dAj is visible to dAi and 0
otherwise.
40.5.4. The Discrete Ordinates (DO) Radiation Model

The discrete ordinates (DO) radiation model solves the radiative transfer equation (RTE) for a finite
number of discrete solid angles, each associated with a vector direction fixed in the global Cartesian
system (x, y, z). The DO model solves for as many transport equations as there are directions . The
solution method is identical to that used for the fluid flow and energy equations.
Radiation
The DO Model Equations

The DO model considers the radiative transfer equation (RTE) in the direction as a field equation.
Thus, Equation 40.107 (p. 983) is written as
(40.107)
Angular Discretization and Pixelation
Each octant of the angular space 4 at any spatial location is discretized into N x N solid angles of extent,
called control angles. The angles are the polar and azimuthal angles respectively, and are measured
with respect to the global Cartesian system (x, y, z) as shown in Figure 40.2: The Angular Coordinate
System (p. 983). The theta and phi extents of the control angle, are constant. In two-dimensional cal-
culations, only four octants are solved due to symmetry, making a total of directions in all. In three-
dimensional calculations, a total of directions are solved. In the case of the non-gray model equations
are solved for each band.
Figure 40.2: The Angular Coordinate System
When Cartesian meshes are used, it is possible to align the global angular discretization with the
control volume face, as shown in Figure 40.3: The Face with No Control Angle Overhang (p. 984). For
generalized unstructured meshes however, control volume faces do not in general align with the
global angular discretization, as shown in Figure 40.4: The Face with Control Angle Overhang (p. 984)
leading to the problem of control angle overhang.
Theory
Figure 40.3: The Face with No Control Angle Overhang
Figure 40.4: The Face with Control Angle Overhang
Essentially, control angles can straddle the control volume faces, so that they are partially outgoing
to the face. Figure 40.4: The Face with Control Angle Overhang (p. 984) shows a 3D example of a face
with control angle overhang.
Radiation
Figure 40.5: The Face with Control Angle Overhang (3D)
The control volume face cuts the sphere representing the angular space at an arbitrary angle. The
line of intersection is a great circle. Control angle overhang may also occur as a result of reflection
and refraction. It is important in these cases to correctly account for the overhanging fraction. This
is done through the use of pixelation.
Each overhanging control angle is divided into pixels, as shown in Figure 40.6: The Pixelation
of Control Angle (p. 986)
Theory
Figure 40.6: The Pixelation of Control Angle
The energy contained in each pixel is then treated as incoming or outgoing to the face. The influence
of overhang can thus be accounted for within the pixel resolution. ANSYS Icepak allows you to choose
the pixel resolution. For problems involving gray-diffuse radiation, the default pixelation of 1 X 1 is
usually sufficient. For problems involving symmetry, periodic, specular, or semi-transparent boundaries,
a pixelation of 3 X 3 is recommended. You should be aware, however that increasing the pixelation
adds to the cost of computation.
40.5.5. The Ray Tracing Radiation Model

The ray paths are calculated and stored prior to the fluid flow calculation. At each radiating face, rays
are fired at discrete values of the polar and azimuthal angles. To cover the radiating hemisphere,
is varied from 0 to and from 0 to . Each ray is then traced to determine the control volumes
it intercepts as well as its length within each control volume. This information is then stored in the
radiation file (.s2s.gz), which is then read in before the fluid flow calculations begin.
Optimization
40.6. Optimization
ANSYS Icepak uses the Dynamic-Q optimization method to solve design optimization problems. The
Dynamic-Q method is an efficient constrained-optimization method consisting of applying a dynamic-
trajectory-optimization algorithm to successive quadratic approximations of the actual optimization
problem.
Due to its efficiency with respect to the number of function evaluations required for convergence, the
Dynamic-Q method is primarily intended for optimization problems where function evaluations are
computationally expensive. Such problems occur frequently in engineering applications where time
consuming numerical simulations may be used for function evaluations. Among others, these numerical
analysis may take the form of a computational fluid dynamics (CFD) simulation, a structural analysis by
means of the finite element method (FEM), or a dynamic simulation of a multibody system. Because
these simulations are usually computationally expensive to perform, and because the relevant functions
may not be known analytically, standard classical optimization methods are normally not suited to these
types of problems. Also the storage requirements of the Dynamic-Q method are minimal. The method
is therefore particularly suitable for problems where the number of variables n is large.
In the following sections, the Dynamic-Q methodology is presented as well as the dynamic trajectory
"leap-frog" algorithm, which is used for solving the quadratic subproblems.
• The Dynamic-Q Optimization method (p. 987)
• The Dynamic-Trajectory (Leap-Frog) Optimization Method for Solving the Subproblems (p. 989)
40.6.1. The Dynamic-Q Optimization method

Consider the general nonlinear optimization problem:
(40.108)
where f(x), gj(x), and hk(x) are scalar functions of x.
In the Dynamic-Q approach, successive subproblems P[i],i = 0, 1, 2, 3 … are generated, at successive

approximations xi to the solution x∗ , by constructing spherically quadratic approximations f (x), g j(x),
and h k(x) to functions f(x), gj(x), and hk(x), respectively. These approximation functions, evaluated at
a point xi , are given by
(40.109)
where A, Bj , and Ck are the Hessian matrices of the simple forms:

(40.110)
Theory
The identical entries along the diagonal of the Hessian matrices indicate that the approximate sub-
problems P[i] are indeed spherically quadratic.
For the first subproblem(i = 0), a linear approximation is formed by setting the curvatures a, bj, and
ck to zero. Thereafter, a, bj , and ck are chosen so that the approximating functions (Equa-
tion 40.109 (p. 987)) interpolate their corresponding actual functions at both xi and xi−1, which implies
that for i = 1, 2, 3, …
(40.111)
If the gradient vectors ∇f, ∇gj, and ∇hk are not known analytically, they may be approximated from
functional data by means of first-order forward finite differences. The particular choice of spherically
quadratic approximations in the Dynamic-Q algorithm has implications on the computational and
storage requirements of the method. Because the second derivatives of the objective function and
constraints are approximated using function and gradient data, the (n2 ) calculations and storage
locations, which would usually be required for these second derivatives, are not needed. The compu-
tational and storage resources for the Dynamic-Q method are thus reduced to (n). At most,4 + p + q
+ r + sn -vectors need to be stored (where p, q, r, and s are, respectively, the number of inequality
constraints, equality constraints, lower limit of variables, and upper limit of variables). These savings
become significant when the number of variables becomes large. For this reason it is expected, and
has also been shown by Snyman et al. [ 25 (p. 1012) ], that the Dynamic-Q method is well suited to
engineering problems, such as structural optimization problems, where a large number of variables
are present.
In many optimization problems, additional simple side constraints of the form occur, where
constants and represent, respectively, lower and upper bounds for variable xi . Because these
constraints are of a simple form (with zero curvature), they do not need to be approximated in the
Dynamic-Q method. Instead, they are explicitly treated as special linear inequality constraints. Con-
straints corresponding to lower and upper limits are of the forms, respectively,
(40.112)
Here, , where is the set of r subscripts corresponding to the set of variables

for which respective lower bounds are prescribed, and wm∈ = (w1, w2, …, ws), where is the set
of s subscripts corresponding to the set of variables for which respective upper bounds wm are pre-
scribed. The subscripts vl and wm are used since, in general, there will not be exactly n lower and
upper limits, that is usually r≠n and s≠n.
In order to obtain convergence to the solution in a controlled and stable manner, move limits are
placed on the variables. For each approximate subproblem P[i] this move limit takes the form of an
additional single inequality constraint
(40.113)
Optimization
where δ is an appropriately chosen step limit and xi−1 is the solution to the previous subproblem.
The approximate subproblem P[i], constructed at xi , to the optimization problem (Equa-

tion 40.108 (p. 987)), including simple side constraints (Equation 40.112 (p. 988)) and move limit
(Equation 40.113 (p. 988)), becomes
(40.114)
with a solution x∗i .
The Dynamic-Q algorithm can now be stated as follows:
1. Choose a starting point x0 and step limit δ. Set i: = 0.
2. Evaluate f(xi) gj(xi) and hk(xi) , as well as ∇f(xi )∇gj(xi), and ∇hk(xi). If termination criteria are satisfied,
then stop.
3. Construct a local approximation P[i] to the optimization problem at xi using Equation 40.109 (p. 987),
Equation 40.110 (p. 987), and Equation 40.111 (p. 988).
4. Solve the approximated subproblem P[i] (Equation 40.114 (p. 989)) using the constrained optimizer
LFOPC (see The Dynamic-Trajectory (Leap-Frog) Optimization Method for Solving the Subprob-
lems (p. 989)) with x0: =xi and get x∗i.
5. Set i:= i + 1, xi:= x∗(i−1) and return to step 2.
40.6.2.The Dynamic-Trajectory (Leap-Frog) Optimization Method for Solving

the Subproblems
In the Dynamic-Q method, generated subproblems are solved using the dynamic-trajectory ("leap-
frog") method for unconstrained optimization ([ 22 (p. 1012) ], [ 23 (p. 1012) ]) applied to penalty function
formulations for constrained optimization ([ 24 (p. 1012) ], [ 25 (p. 1012) ]).
In its unconstrained form, the Leap-Frog Optimizer (LFOP) determines the minimum of a function f(x)
by considering the associated dynamic problem of the motion of a particle of unit mass in an n-di-
mensional conservative force field. f(x) is the potential energy of a particle at a point x(t) at time t.
Therefore, the method requires the solution of the following equations of the motion:
(40.115)
with initial conditions

(40.116)
Theory
To explain how the dynamic-trajectory method works, consider the solution of the above problem
over the time interval [0, t]. It follows that
(40.117)
(40.118)
where T(t) is kinetic energy of the particle at time t, and K is a constant determined by the initial
values. The last expression in Equation 40.117 (p. 990) indicates that energy is conserved. It can also
be seen that ∇f=−∇T, therefore, as long as T increases, f decreases. This forms the basis of the dy-
namic-trajectory method.
The LFOP algorithm computes an approximation to the trajectory followed by the particle in the force
field. Whenever T is increasing along the trajectory, f is decreasing and the algorithm is minimizing
the function. However, whenever T is decreasing along the trajectory, the objective function (potential
energy) is increasing. An interfering strategy is then applied to extract kinetic energy from the particle.
The consequence of this strategy, based on an energy-conservation argument, is that a systematic
reduction in the potential energy f of the particle is obtained. The particle is thus forced to follow a
path to a local minimum at x∗ . The numerical integration of the initial value problem (Equa-
tion 40.115 (p. 989) and Equation 40.116 (p. 989)) is achieved using the "leap-frog" (Euler forward - Euler
backward) method. The method contains some heuristic elements relating to time step selection and
control.
The LFOP algorithm outlined above can be modified to handle constrained problems (LFOPC) by
means of the penalty-function approach [ 24 (p. 1012) ]. In particular, the penalty-function formulation
for constrained-quadratic-optimization problem P[i] is (by Snyman [ 24 (p. 1012) ])
(40.119)
where the vector of inequality constraints functions and , and
(40.120)
For simplicity, the penalty parameters α j and βk usually take on the same positive value α j = βk
= μ. It can be shown that as μ tends to infinity, the unconstrained minimum of Q(x) yields the solution
to the constrained problem Equation 40.114 (p. 989).
The dynamic-trajectory method is applied to the penalty-function formulation of the constrained

problem in the following three phases:
• Phase 0: Given some starting point x0 , apply LFOP with some overall penalty parameter μ = μ0(=102) to
Q(x,μ0) to get x∗(μ0).
• Phase 1: With x0: = x∗(μ0), apply LFOP with increased overall penalty parameter μ = μ1(=104 μ0 to Q(x, μ1)
to get x∗ (μ1). Identify the set of na active constraints corresponding to the set of subscripts Ia=(u1, u2, …,
una) for which guj(x∗(μ1))>0, j = 1, 2, …, na.
• Phase 2: With x0: = x∗(μ1), apply LFOP to
Solution Procedures
to get x∗ .
The LFOPC algorithm possesses a number of outstanding characteristics, which makes it highly suitable
for implementation in the Dynamic-Q methodology. The algorithm requires only gradient information
and no explicit line searches or function evaluations are performed. These properties, together with
the influence of the fundamental physical principles underlying the method, ensure that the algorithm
is extremely robust. This has been proven over many years of testing by Snyman [ 24 (p. 1012) ]. A
further desirable characteristic related to its robustness, and the main reason for its application in the
step 4 of the Dynamic-Q algorithm, is that if there is no feasible solution to the problem, the LFOPC
algorithm will still find the best possible compromised solution without breaking down. The Dynamic-
Q algorithm thus usually converges to a solution from an infeasible remote point without the need
to use line searches between subproblems. The LFOPC algorithm used by Dynamic-Q is identical to
that used in [ 24 (p. 1012) ] except for a minor change to LFOP which is advisable if the subproblems
become effectively unconstrained.
Given specified positive tolerances εx , εf , and εc , then at step i, termination of the algorithm occurs
if the normalized step size , or if the normalized change in the function value
, where fbest is the lowest previous feasible function value, and the current xi is
feasible. The point xi is considered feasible if the absolute value of the violation of each constraint
is less than εc .
40.7. Solution Procedures

The following procedures are discussed:
40.7.1. Overview of Numerical Scheme
40.7.2. Spatial Discretization
40.7.3.Time Discretization
40.7.4. Multigrid Method
40.7.5. Solution Residuals
40.7.1. Overview of Numerical Scheme

ANSYS Icepak will solve the governing integral equations for mass and momentum, and (when appro-
priate) for energy and other scalars such as turbulence. A control-volume-based technique is used
that consists of:
• Division of the domain into discrete control volumes using a computational grid.
• Integration of the governing equations on the individual control volumes to construct algebraic equations
for the discrete dependent variables ("unknowns") such as velocities, pressure, temperature, and conserved
scalars.
• Linearization of the discretized equations and solution of the resultant linear equation system to yield
updated values of the dependent variables.
Theory
The governing equations are solved sequentially (that is, segregated from one another). Because the
governing equations are non-linear (and coupled), several iterations of the solution loop must be
performed before a converged solution is obtained. Each iteration consists of the steps illustrated in
Figure 40.7: Overview of the Solution Method (p. 992) and outlined below:
1. Fluid properties are updated, based on the current solution. (If the calculation has just begun, the fluid
properties will be updated based on the initialized solution.)
2. The u, v and w momentum equations are each solved in turn using current values for pressure and face
mass fluxes, in order to update the velocity field.
3. Because the velocities obtained in Step 2 may not satisfy the continuity equation locally, a "Poisson-type"
equation for the pressure correction is derived from the continuity equation and the linearized momentum
equations. This pressure correction equation is then solved to obtain the necessary corrections to the
pressure and velocity fields and the face mass fluxes such that continuity is satisfied.
4. Where appropriate, equations for scalars such as turbulence, energy, and radiation are solved using the
previously updated values of the other variables.
5. A check for convergence of the equation set is made.
These steps are continued until the convergence criteria are met.
Figure 40.7: Overview of the Solution Method
Solution Procedures
Linearization
The discrete, non-linear governing equations are linearized to produce a system of equations for the
dependent variables in every computational cell. The resultant linear system is then solved to yield
an updated flow-field solution.
The manner in which the governing equations are linearized takes an "implicit" form with respect to
the dependent variable (or set of variables) of interest. For a given variable, the unknown value in
each cell is computed using a relation that includes both existing and unknown values from neigh-
boring cells. Therefore each unknown will appear in more than one equation in the system, and these
equations must be solved simultaneously to give the unknown quantities.
This will result in a system of linear equations with one equation for each cell in the domain. Because
there is only one equation per cell, this is sometimes called a "scalar" system of equations. A point
implicit (Gauss-Seidel) linear equation solver is used in conjunction with an algebraic multigrid (AMG)
method to solve the resultant scalar system of equations for the dependent variable in each cell. For
example, the x-momentum equation is linearized to produce a system of equations in which u velocity
is the unknown. Simultaneous solution of this equation system (using the scalar AMG solver) yields
an updated u-velocity field.
In summary, ANSYS Icepak solves for a single variable field (e.g., p) by considering all cells at the same
time. It then solves for the next variable field by again considering all cells at the same time, and so
on.
40.7.2. Spatial Discretization

ANSYS Icepak uses a control-volume-based technique to convert the governing equations to algebraic
equations that can be solved numerically. This control volume technique consists of integrating the
governing equations about each control volume, yielding discrete equations that conserve each
quantity on a control-volume basis.
Discretization of the governing equations can be illustrated most easily by considering the steady-
state conservation equation for transport of a scalar quantity φ. This is demonstrated by the following
equation written in integral form for an arbitrary control volume v as follows:
(40.121)
where
ρ = density
= velocity vector (= in 2D)
= surface area vector
Γφ = diffusion coefficient for φ
∇φ = gradient of in 2D)
Sφ = source of φ per unit volume
Equation 40.121 (p. 993) is applied to each control volume, or cell, in the computational domain. The
two-dimensional, triangular cell shown in Figure 40.8: Control Volume Used to Illustrate Discretization
Theory
of a Scalar Transport Equation (p. 994) is an example of such a control volume. Discretization Equa-
tion 40.121 (p. 993) on a given cell yields
(40.122)
where
N
faces
= number of faces enclosing cell
φf = value of φ convected through face f
= mass flux through the face
= area of face f(A) (= in 2D))

(∇φ)n = ∇φ normal to face f
V = cell volume
The equations solved by ANSYS Icepak take the same general form as the one given above and apply
readily to multi-dimensional, unstructured meshes composed of arbitrary polyhedra.
Figure 40.8: Control Volume Used to Illustrate Discretization of a Scalar Transport Equation
ANSYS Icepak stores discrete values of the scalar φ at the cell centers (c0 and c1 in Figure 40.8: Con-
trol Volume Used to Illustrate Discretization of a Scalar Transport Equation (p. 994)). However, face
values φf are required for the convection terms in Equation 40.122 (p. 994) and must be interpolated
from the cell center values. This is accomplished using an upwind scheme.
Upwinding means that the face value φf is derived from quantities in the cell upstream, or "upwind",
relative to the direction of the normal velocity vn in Equation 40.122 (p. 994). ANSYS Icepak allows
you to choose from two upwind schemes: first-order upwind, and second-order upwind. These schemes
are described below.
The diffusion terms in Equation 40.122 (p. 994) are central-differenced and are always second-order
accurate.
Solution Procedures
First-Order Upwind Scheme

When first-order accuracy is desired, quantities at cell faces are determined by assuming that the cell-
center values of any field variable represent a cell-average value and hold throughout the entire cell;
the face quantities are identical to the cell quantities. Thus when first-order upwinding is selected,
the face value φf is set equal to the cell-center value of φ in the upstream cell.
Second-Order Upwind Scheme

When second-order accuracy is desired, quantities at cell faces are computed using a multidimensional
linear reconstruction approach [ 1 (p. 1011) ]. In this approach, higher-order accuracy is achieved at
cell faces through a Taylor series expansion of the cell-centered solution about the cell centroid. Thus
when second-order upwinding is selected, the face value φf is computed using the following expres-
sion:
(40.123)
where φ and ∇φ are the cell-centered value and its gradient in the upstream cell, and Δs is the dis-
placement vector from the upstream cell centroid to the face centroid. This formulation requires the
determination of the gradient ∇φ in each cell. This gradient is computed using the divergence theorem,
which in discrete form is written as
(40.124)
Here the face values are computed by averaging φ from the two cells adjacent to the face. Finally,
the gradient ∇φ is limited so that no new maxima or minima are introduced.
Linearized Form of the Discrete Equation

The discretized scalar transport equation (Equation 40.122 (p. 994)) contains the unknown scalar variable
φ at the cell center as well as the unknown values in surrounding neighbor cells. This equation will,
in general, be nonlinear with respect to these variables. A linearized form of Equation 40.122 (p. 994)
can be written as
(40.125)
where the subscript nb refers to neighbor cells, and ap and anb are the linearized coefficients for φ
and φb .
The number of neighbors for each cell depends on the grid topology, but will typically equal the
number of faces enclosing the cell (boundary cells being the exception).
Similar equations can be written for each cell in the grid. This results in a set of algebraic equations
with a sparse coefficient matrix. For scalar equations, ANSYS Icepak solves this linear system using a
point implicit (Gauss-Seidel) linear equation solver in conjunction with an algebraic multigrid (AMG)
method which is described in Restriction, Prolongation, and Coarse-Level Operators (p. 1007).
Under-Relaxation
Because of the nonlinearity of the equation set being solved by ANSYS Icepak, it is necessary to
control the change of φ. This is typically achieved by under-relaxation, which reduces the change of
Theory
φ produced during each iteration. In a simple form, the new value of the variable φ within a cell de-
pends upon the old value, φold , the computed change in φ, Δφ, and the under-relaxation factor, α
, as follows:
(40.126)
Discretization of the Momentum and Continuity Equations

In this section, special practices related to the discretization of the momentum and continuity equations
and their solution are addressed. These practices are most easily described by considering the steady-
state continuity and momentum equations in integral form:
(40.127)
(40.128)
where is the identity matrix, is the stress tensor, and is the force vector.
Discretization of the Momentum Equation
The discretization scheme described earlier in this section for a scalar transport equation is also used
to discretize the momentum equations. For example, the x-momentum equation can be obtained by
setting φ = u:
(40.129)
If the pressure field and face mass fluxes were known, Equation 40.129 (p. 996) could be solved in the
manner outlined earlier in this section, and a velocity field obtained. However, the pressure field and
face mass fluxes are not known a priori and must be obtained as a part of the solution. There are
important issues with respect to the storage of pressure and the discretization of the pressure gradient
term; these are addressed later in this section.
ANSYS Icepak uses a co-located scheme, whereby pressure and velocity are both stored at cell centers.
However, Equation 40.129 (p. 996) requires the value of the pressure at the face between cells c0 and
c1, shown in Figure 40.8: Control Volume Used to Illustrate Discretization of a Scalar Transport Equa-
tion (p. 994). Therefore, an interpolation scheme is required to compute the face values of pressure
from the cell values.
Pressure Interpolation Schemes
The default pressure interpolation scheme in ANSYS Icepak is the standard scheme. This scheme in-
terpolates the pressure values at the faces using momentum equation coefficients [ 21 (p. 1012) ]. This
procedure works well as long as the pressure variation between cell centers is smooth. When there
are jumps or large gradients in the momentum source terms between control volumes, the pressure
profile has a high gradient at the cell face, and cannot be interpolated using this scheme. If this
scheme is used, the discrepancy shows up in overshoots/undershoots of cell velocity.
Flows for which the standard pressure interpolation scheme will have trouble include flows with large
body forces, such as in strongly swirling flows and in high-Rayleigh-number natural convection. In
such cases, it is necessary to pack the mesh in regions of high gradient to resolve the pressure variation
adequately.
Solution Procedures
Another source of error is that ANSYS Icepak assumes that the normal pressure gradient at the wall
is zero. This is valid for boundary layers, but not in the presence of body forces or curvature. Again,
the failure to correctly account for the wall pressure gradient is manifested in velocity vectors pointing
in/out of walls.
The other scheme available in ANSYS Icepak is the body-force-weighted scheme. This scheme computes
the face pressure by assuming that the normal acceleration of the fluid resulting from the pressure
gradient and body forces is continuous across each face. This works well if the body forces are known
a priori in the momentum equations (e.g., buoyancy and axisymmetric swirl calculations). This scheme
is good for high-Rayleigh-number natural convection flows.
Discretization of the Continuity Equation
Equation 40.127 (p. 996) may be integrated over the control volume in Figure 40.8: Control Volume
Used to Illustrate Discretization of a Scalar Transport Equation (p. 994) to yield the following discrete
equation
(40.130)
where Jf is the mass flux through face f, ρvn .
As described in Overview of Numerical Scheme (p. 991), the momentum and continuity equations are
solved sequentially. In this sequential procedure, the continuity equation is used as an equation for
pressure. However, pressure does not appear explicitly in Equation 40.130 (p. 997) for incompressible
flows, since density is not directly related to pressure. The SIMPLE (Semi-Implicit Method for Pressure-
Linked Equations) algorithm [ 20 (p. 1012) ] is used for introducing pressure into the continuity equation.
This procedure is outlined below.
To proceed further, it is necessary to relate the face values of velocity vn to the stored values of ve-
locity at the cell centers. Linear interpolation of cell-centered velocities to the face results in unphys-
ical checker-boarding of pressure. ANSYS Icepak uses a procedure similar to that outlined by Rhie and
Chow [ 21 (p. 1012) ] to prevent checkerboarding. The face value of velocity vn is not averaged linearly;
instead, momentum-weighted averaging, using weighting factors based on the aP coefficient from
Equation 40.129 (p. 996), is performed. Using this procedure, the face flow rate Jf may be written as
(40.131)
where Pc0 and Pc1 are the pressures within the two cells on either side of the face, and f contains
the influence of velocities in these cells (see Figure 40.8: Control Volume Used to Illustrate Discretization
of a Scalar Transport Equation (p. 994)). The term df is a function of P , the average of the momentum
equation aP coefficients for the cells on either side of face f.
Pressure-Velocity Coupling with SIMPLE

Pressure-velocity coupling is achieved by using Equation 40.131 (p. 997) to derive an equation for
pressure from the discrete continuity equation (Equation 40.130 (p. 997)). ANSYS Icepak uses the SIMPLE
(Semi-Implicit Method for Pressure-Linked Equations) pressure-velocity coupling algorithm. The SIMPLE
algorithm uses a relationship between velocity and pressure corrections to enforce mass conservation
and to obtain the pressure field.
Theory
If the momentum equation is solved with a guessed pressure field p∗ , the resulting face flux Jf ∗
computed from Equation 40.131 (p. 997)
(40.132)
does not satisfy the continuity equation. Consequently, a correction Jf ′ is added to the face flow rate
Jf ∗ so that the corrected face flow rate Jf
(40.133)
satisfies the continuity equation. The SIMPLE algorithm postulates that Jf ′ be written as
(40.134)
where is the cell pressure correction.
The SIMPLE algorithm substitutes the flux correction equations (Equation 40.133 (p. 998) and Equa-
tion 40.134 (p. 998)) into the discrete continuity equation (Equation 40.130 (p. 997)) to obtain a discrete
equation for the pressure correction p′ in the cell:
(40.135)
where the source term b is the net flow rate into the cell:
(40.136)
The pressure-correction equation (Equation 40.135 (p. 998)) may be solved using the algebraic multigrid
(AMG) method described in Restriction, Prolongation, and Coarse-Level Operators (p. 1007). Once a
solution is obtained, the cell pressure and the face flow rate are corrected using
(40.137)
(40.138)
Here α p is the under-relaxation factor for pressure (see Equation 40.126 (p. 996) and related description
for information about under-relaxation). The corrected face flow rate Jf satisfies the discrete continuity
equation identically during each iteration.
Coupled Pressure-Velocity Formulation

Selecting Coupled pressure-velocity formulation from the Solver options group box indicates that
you are using the pressure-based coupled algorithm which is described in this section.
The pressure-based solver allows you to solve your flow problem in either a segregated or coupled
manner. Using the coupled approach offers some advantages over the non-coupled or segregated
approach. The coupled scheme obtains a robust and efficient single phase implementation for steady-
state flows, with superior performance compared to the segregated SIMPLE solution scheme. For
transient flows, using the coupled algorithm is necessary when the quality of the mesh is poor, or if
large time steps are used.
The pressure-based segregated algorithm solves the momentum equation and pressure correction
equations separately. This semi-implicit solution method results in slow convergence.
Solution Procedures
The coupled algorithm solves the momentum and pressure-based continuity equations together. The
full implicit coupling is achieved through an implicit discretization of pressure gradient terms in the
momentum equations, and an implicit discretization of the face mass flux, including the Rhie-Chow
pressure dissipation terms.
In the momentum equations (Equation 40.129 (p. 996)), the pressure gradient for component is of
the form
(40.139)
Where is the coefficient derived from the Gauss divergence theorem and coefficients of the
pressure interpolation schemes. Finally, for any th cell, the discretized form of the momentum
equation for component is defined as
(40.140)
In the continuity equation, the balance of fluxes is replaced using the flux expression in Equa-
tion 40.131 (p. 997), resulting in the discretized form
(40.141)
As a result, the overall system of equations (Equation 40.140 (p. 999) and Equation 40.141 (p. 999)),
after being transformed to the -form, is presented as
(40.142)
where the influence of a cell on a cell has the form
(40.143)
and the unknown and residual vectors have the form
(40.144)
(40.145)
Note that Equation 40.142 (p. 999) is solved using the coupled AMG.
Theory
40.7.2.1. Pseudo Transient Under-Relaxation

The pseudo transient under-relaxation method is a form of implicit under-relaxation. Here, the under-
relaxation is controlled through the pseudo time step size. The pseudo time step size, which is
automatically calculated by the solver, can be the same or different for different equations solved.
(40.146)
where is the pseudo time step.
40.7.3. Time Discretization

In ANSYS Icepak the time-dependent equations must be discretized in both space and time. The
spatial discretization for the time-dependent equations is identical to the steady-state case (see Spatial
Discretization (p. 993)). Temporal discretization involves the integration of every term in the differential
equations over a time step Δt. The integration of the transient terms is straightforward, as shown
below.
A generic expression for the time evolution of a variable φ is given by

(40.147)
where the function F incorporates any spatial discretization. If the time derivative is discretized using
backward differences, the first-order accurate temporal discretization is given by
(40.148)
where
φ = a scalar quantity
n + 1 = value at the next time level, t + Δt
n = value at the current time level, t
Once the time derivative has been discretized, a choice remains for evaluating F(φ): in particular,
which time level values of φ should be used in evaluating F?
One method (the method used in ANSYS Icepak) is to evaluate F(φ) at the future time level:
(40.149)
This is referred to as "implicit" integration since φn+1 in a given cell is related to φn+1 in neighboring
cells through F(φn+1):
(40.150)
This implicit equation can be solved iteratively by initializing φi to φn and iterating the equation
(40.151)
until φi stops changing (that is, converges). At that point, φn+1 is set to φi .
Solution Procedures
The advantage of the fully implicit scheme is that it is unconditionally stable with respect to time
step size.
40.7.4. Multigrid Method

This section describes the mathematical basis of the multigrid approach used in ANSYS Icepak.
Approach
ANSYS Icepak uses a multigrid scheme to accelerate the convergence of the solver by computing
corrections on a series of coarse grid levels. The use of this multigrid scheme can greatly reduce the
number of iterations and the CPU time required to obtain a converged solution, particularly when
your model contains a large number of control volumes.
The Need for Multigrid
Implicit solution of the linearized equations on unstructured meshes is complicated by the fact that
there is no equivalent of the line-iterative methods that are commonly used on structured grids.
Because direct matrix inversion is out of the question for realistic problems and "whole-field" solvers
that rely on conjugate-gradient (CG) methods have robustness problems associated with them, the
methods of choice are point implicit solvers like Gauss-Seidel . Although the Gauss-Seidel scheme
rapidly removes local (high-frequency) errors in the solution, global (low-frequency) errors are reduced
at a rate inversely related to the grid size. Thus, for a large number of nodes, the solver "stalls" and
the residual reduction rate becomes prohibitively low.
Multigrid techniques allow global error to be addressed by using a sequence of successively coarser
meshes. This method is based upon the principle that global (low-frequency) error existing on a fine
mesh can be represented on a coarse mesh where it again becomes accessible as local (high-frequency)
error: because there are fewer coarse cells overall, the global corrections can be communicated more
quickly between adjacent cells. Because computations can be performed at exponentially decaying
expense in both CPU time and memory storage on coarser meshes, there is the potential for very
efficient elimination of global error. The fine-grid relaxation scheme or "smoother", in this case either
the point-implicit Gauss-Seidel or the explicit multi-stage scheme, is not required to be particularly
effective at reducing global error and can be tuned for efficient reduction of local error.
The Basic Concept in Multigrid
Consider the set of discretized linear (or linearized) equations given by

(40.152)
where φe is the exact solution. Before the solution has converged there will be a defect d associated
with the approximate solution φ:
(40.153)
We seek a correction ψ to φ such that the exact solution is given by

(40.154)
Substituting Equation 40.154 (p. 1001) into Equation 40.152 (p. 1001) gives
(40.155)
Theory
Now using Equation 40.153 (p. 1001) and Equation 40.155 (p. 1001) we obtain
(40.156)
which is an equation for the correction in terms of the original fine level operator A and the defect
d. Assuming the local (high-frequency) errors have been sufficiently damped by the relaxation scheme
on the fine level, the correction ψ will be smooth and therefore more effectively solved on the next
coarser level.
Restriction and Prolongation
Solving for corrections on the coarse level requires transferring the defect down from the fine level
(restriction), computing corrections, and then transferring the corrections back up from the coarse
level (prolongation). We can write the equations for coarse level corrections ψH as
(40.157)
where AH is the coarse level operator and R the restriction operator responsible for transferring the
fine level defect down to the coarse level. Solution of Equation 40.157 (p. 1002) is followed by an update
of the fine level solution given by
(40.158)
where P is the prolongation operator used to transfer the coarse level corrections up to the fine level.
Unstructured Multigrid
The primary difficulty with using multigrid on unstructured grids is the creation and use of the coarse
grid hierarchy. On a structured grid, the coarse grids can be formed simply by removing every other
grid line from the fine grids and the prolongation and restriction operators are simple to formulate
(e.g., injection and bilinear interpolation).
Multigrid Cycles
A multigrid cycle can be defined as a recursive procedure that is applied at each grid level as it moves
through the grid hierarchy. Four types of multigrid cycles are available in ANSYS Icepak: the V, W, F,
and flexible ("flex") cycles.
The V and W Cycles
Figure 40.9: V-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004) show the V and W
multigrid cycles (defined below). In each figure, the multigrid cycle is represented by a square, and
then expanded to show the individual steps that are performed within the cycle. You may want to
follow along in the figures as you read the steps below.
Solution Procedures
Figure 40.9: V-Cycle Multigrid
Theory
Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid
For the V and W cycles, the traversal of the hierarchy is governed by three parameters, β1 , β2 , and
β3 , as follows:
1. β1 "smoothings", (sometimes called pre-relaxation sweeps), are performed at the current grid level to
reduce the high-frequency components of the error (local error).
In Figure 40.9: V-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004) this step is
represented by a circle and marks the start of a multigrid cycle. The high-wave-number components
of error should be reduced until the remaining error is expressible on the next coarser mesh
without significant aliasing.
If this is the coarsest grid level, then the multigrid cycle on this level is complete. (In Figure 40.9: V-
Cycle Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004) there are 3 coarse grid levels,
Solution Procedures
so the square representing the multigrid cycle on level 3 is equivalent to a circle, as shown in the
final diagram in each figure.)
Note:
In ANSYS Icepak, β1 is zero (that is, pre-relaxation is not performed).
2. Next, the problem is "restricted" to the next coarser grid level using the appropriate restriction operator.
In Figure 40.9: V-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004), the restriction
from a finer grid level to a coarser grid level is designated by a downward-sloping line.
3. The error on the coarse grid is reduced by performing β2 multigrid cycles (represented in Figure 40.9: V-
Cycle Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004) as squares). Commonly, for fixed
multigrid strategies β2 is either 1 or 2, corresponding to V-cycle and W-cycle multigrid, respectively.
4. Next, the cumulative correction computed on the coarse grid is "interpolated" back to the fine grid using
the appropriate prolongation operator and added to the fine grid solution.
In Figure 40.9: V-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004) the prolongation
is represented by an upward-sloping line.
The high-frequency error now present at the fine grid level is due to the prolongation procedure
used to transfer the correction.
5. In the final step, β3 "smoothings" (post-relaxations) are performed to remove the high-frequency error
introduced on the coarse grid by the β2 multigrid cycles.
In Figure 40.9: V-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004), this relaxation
procedure is represented by a single triangle.
The Flexible Cycle
For the flexible cycle, the calculation and use of coarse grid corrections is controlled in the multigrid
procedure by the logic illustrated in Figure 40.11: Logic Controlling the Flex Multigrid Cycle (p. 1006).
This logic ensures that coarser grid calculations are invoked when the rate of residual reduction on
the current grid level is too slow. In addition, the multigrid controls dictate when the iterative solution
of the correction on the current coarse grid level is sufficiently converged and should thus be applied
to the solution on the next finer grid. These two decisions are controlled by the parameters α and
β shown in Figure 40.11: Logic Controlling the Flex Multigrid Cycle (p. 1006), as described in detail below.
Note that the logic of the multigrid procedure is such that grid levels may be visited repeatedly during
a single global iteration on an equation. For a set of 4 multigrid levels, referred to as 0, 1, 2, and 3,
the flex-cycle multigrid procedure for solving a given transport equation might consist of visiting grid
levels as 0-1-2-3-2-3-2-1-0-1-2-1-0, for example.
Theory
Figure 40.11: Logic Controlling the Flex Multigrid Cycle
The main difference between the flexible cycle and the V and W cycles is that the satisfaction of the
residual reduction tolerance and termination criterion determine when and how often each level is
visited in the flexible cycle, whereas in the V and W cycles the traversal pattern is explicitly defined.
The F Cycles
The multigrid F cycle is essentially a combination of the V and W cycles described in Multigrid
Cycles (p. 1002).
Recall that the multigrid cycle is a recursive procedure. The procedure is expanded to the next coarsest
grid level by performing a single multigrid cycle on the current level. Referring to Figure 40.9: V-Cycle
Multigrid (p. 1003) and Figure 40.10: W-Cycle Multigrid (p. 1004), this means replacing the square on the
current level (representing a single cycle) with the procedure shown for the 0–1 level cycle (the second
diagram in each figure). We see that a V cycle consists of:
(40.159)
and a W cycle:
(40.160)
An F cycle is formed by a W cycle followed by a V cycle:

(40.161)
As expected, the F cycle requires more computation than the V cycle, but less than the W cycle.
However, its convergence properties turn out to be better than the V cycle and roughly equivalent
Solution Procedures
to the W cycle. The F cycle is the default AMG cycle for the coupled equation set and for the scalar
energy equation.
The Residual Reduction Rate Criteria
The multigrid procedure invokes calculations on the next coarser grid level when the error reduction
rate on the current level is insufficient, as defined by
(40.162)
Here Ri is the absolute sum of residuals (defect) computed on the current grid level after the relaxation
on this level. The above equation states that if the residual present in the iterative solution after i
relaxations is greater than some fraction, β (between 0 and 1), of the residual present after the (i −
1)th relaxation, the next coarser grid level should be visited. Thus β is referred to as the residual re-
duction tolerance, and determines when to "give up" on the iterative solution at the current grid level
and move to solving the correction equations on the next coarser grid. The value of β controls the
frequency with which coarser grid levels are visited. The default value is 0.1. A larger value will result
in less frequent visits, and a smaller value will result in more frequent visits.
The Termination Criteria
Provided that the residual reduction rate is sufficiently rapid, the correction equations will be con-
verged on the current grid level and the result applied to the solution field on the next finer grid
level.
The correction equations on the current grid level are considered sufficiently converged when the
error in the correction solution is reduced to some fraction, α (between 0 and 1), of the original error
on this grid level:
(40.163)
Here, Ri is the residual on the current grid level after the ith iteration on this level, and R0 is the re-
sidual that was initially obtained on this grid level at the current global iteration. The parameter α ,
referred to as the termination criterion, has a default value of 0.1. Note that the above equation is
also used to terminate calculations on the lowest (finest) grid level during the multigrid procedure.
Thus, relaxations are continued on each grid level (including the finest grid level) until the criterion
of this equation is obeyed (or until a maximum number of relaxations has been completed, in the
case that the specified criterion is never achieved).
Restriction, Prolongation, and Coarse-Level Operators

The multigrid algorithm in ANSYS Icepak is referred to as an "algebraic" multigrid (AMG) scheme be-
cause, as we shall see, the coarse level equations are generated without the use of any geometry or
re-discretization on the coarse levels; a feature that makes AMG particularly attractive for use on un-
structured meshes. The advantage is that no coarse grids have to be constructed or stored, and no
fluxes or source terms need be evaluated on the coarse levels. This approach is in contrast with FAS
(sometimes called "geometric") multigrid in which a hierarchy of meshes is required and the discretized
equations are evaluated on every level. In theory, the advantage of FAS over AMG is that the former
should perform better for non-linear problems since non-linearities in the system are carried down
to the coarse levels through the re-discretization; when using AMG, once the system is linearized,
non-linearities are not "felt" by the solver until the fine level operator is next updated.
AMG Restriction and Prolongation Operators
Theory
The restriction and prolongation operators used here are based on the additive correction (AC) strategy
described for structured grids by Hutchinson and Raithby [ 10 (p. 1011) ]. Inter-level transfer is accom-
plished by piecewise constant interpolation and prolongation. The defect in any coarse level cell is
given by the sum of those from the fine level cells it contains, while fine level corrections are obtained
by injection of coarse level values. In this manner the prolongation operator is given by the transpose
of the restriction operator
(40.164)
The restriction operator is defined by a coarsening or "grouping" of fine level cells into coarse level
ones. In this process each fine level cell is grouped with one or more of its "strongest" neighbors,
with a preference given to currently ungrouped neighbors. The algorithm attempts to collect cells
into groups of fixed size, typically two or four, but any number can be specified. In the context of
grouping, strongest refers to the neighbor j of the current cell i for which the coefficient Aij is largest.
For sets of coupled equations Aij is a block matrix and the measure of its magnitude is simply taken
to be the magnitude of its first element. In addition, the set of coupled equations for a given cell are
treated together and not divided amongst different coarse cells. This results in the same coarsening
for each equation in the system.
AMG Coarse Level Operator
The coarse level operator AH is constructed using a Galerkin approach. Here we require that the defect
associated with the corrected fine level solution must vanish when transferred back to the coarse
level. Therefore we may write
(40.165)
Upon substituting Equation 40.153 (p. 1001) and Equation 40.158 (p. 1002) for dnew and φnew we have
(40.166)
Now rearranging and using Equation 40.153 (p. 1001) once again gives
(40.167)
Comparison of Equation 40.167 (p. 1008) with Equation 40.157 (p. 1002) leads to the following expression
for the coarse level operator:
(40.168)
The construction of coarse level operators thus reduces to a summation of diagonal and corresponding
off-diagonal blocks for all fine level cells within a group to form the diagonal block of that group’s
coarse cell.
40.7.5. Solution Residuals

During the solution process you can monitor the convergence dynamically by checking residuals. At
the end of each solver iteration, the residual sum for each of the conserved variables is computed
and stored, thus recording the convergence history. This history is also saved in the data file. The re-
sidual sum is defined below.
Solution Procedures
On a computer with infinite precision, these residuals will go to zero as the solution converges. On
an actual computer, the residuals decay to some small value ("round-off") and then stop changing
("level out"). For "single precision" computations (the default for workstations and most computers),
residuals can drop as many as six orders of magnitude before hitting round-off. Double precision
residuals can drop up to twelve orders of magnitude. Guidelines for judging convergence can be
found in Judging Convergence (p. 874).
After discretization, the conservation equation for a general variable φ at a cell P can be written as
(40.169)
Here aP is the center coefficient, anb are the influence coefficients for the neighboring cells, and b
is the contribution of the constant part of the source term Sc in S = Sc + SPφ and of the boundary
conditions. In Equation 40.169 (p. 1009),
(40.170)
The residual Rφ computed by ANSYS Icepak is the imbalance in Equation 40.169 (p. 1009) summed over
all the computational cells P. This is referred to as the "unscaled" residual. It may be written as
(40.171)
In general, it is difficult to judge convergence by examining the residuals defined by Equa-

tion 40.171 (p. 1009) since no scaling is employed. This is especially true in enclosed flows such as
natural convection in a room where there is no inlet flow rate of φ with which to compare the residual.
ANSYS Icepak scales the residual using a scaling factor representative of the flow rate of φ through
the domain. This "scaled" residual is defined as
(40.172)
For the momentum equations the denominator term aPφP is replaced by aP , where vP is the mag-
nitude of the velocity at cell P.
The scaled residual is a more appropriate indicator of convergence, and is the residual displayed by
ANSYS Icepak.
For the continuity equation, the unscaled residual is defined as
(40.173)
The scaled residual for the continuity equation is defined as
(40.174)
The denominator is the largest absolute value of the continuity residual in the first five iterations.
Theory
40.8. Krylov ROM Theory

The model-order reduction method used in Icepak is based on the so-called projection framework [
33 (p. 1012) ], [ 34 (p. 1012) ], in which a full-order state-space model is approximated by one of lower order.
For thermal problems, the full-order model is the set of ordinary differential equations (ODEs) obtained
after spatial discretization of the heat equation. Denoting the temperature as the vector , with
the number of computational cells in the discretization, the set of ODEs is,
(40.175)
where is a vector of input heat densities (possibly a function of time), and , and are matrices
of appropriate dimensions. In a projection method, the ODE unknowns are assumed to be contained,
at least approximately, in a sub-space of small dimension, i.e.,
(40.176)
where the basis vectors are assumed orthogonal, and the reduced amplitudes are denoted by
. The key point in this type of MOR method is that it is possible to derive a set of ODEs for the dynamics
of the reduced amplitudes, to solve this set quickly, and then to expand the solution to approximate
the full-order solution. The reduced order ODE set is obtained by inserting the above approximation in
the original ODE and forcing the residual to be orthogonal to the set of basis vectors . We have,
(40.177)
where the terms in parentheses are the reduced system matrices, which are of order , and which are
computed once and for all.
There are several methods that fall under the above projection framework, with the different methods
corresponding to different choices of the basis vectors . In this work we use the Krylov method, which
is particularly well suited for very large full-order models arising from discretization of the heat equation.
In the Krylov method, the basis vectors are derived using the Arnoldi method [ 35 (p. 1012) ], which
is a numerically stable method for computing an orthogonal basis to a Krylov sub-space. The Krylov
sub-space we use is
(40.178)
where and .
Bibliography
[1] T. J., Barth. The design and application of upwind schemes on unstructured meshes. Technical Report
AIAA-89-0366. AIAA 27th Aerospace Sciences Meeting. Reno, Nevada.
[2] G. K. Batchelor. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics. Cambridge Univ. Press. Cambridge, England.
[3] H. C. Chen and V. C. Patel.Near-Wall Turbulence Models for Complex Flows Including Separation. AIAA
Journal, 26(6), 1988. pg. 641-648.
[4] D. Choudhury. "Introduction to the Renormalization Group Method and Turbulence Modeling". Technical
Memorandum TM-107, 1993.
[5] M. F. Cohen and D. P. Greenberg."The hemi-cube: a radiosity solution for complex environments".
Computer Graphics, 19(3). 1985. pg. 31-40.
[6] J. Dacles-Mariani, G. G. Zilliac, J. S. Chow, and P. Bradshaw.Numerical/Experimental Study of a Wingtip

Vortex in the Near Field. AIAA Journal, 33(9). pg. 1561-1568. 1995.
[7] R. A Henkes, F. F. van der Flugt, and C. J. Hoogendoorn.Natural Convection Flow in a Square Cavity
Calculated with Low-Reynolds-Number Turbulence Models. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 34. pg. 1543-
1557. 1991.
[8] J. O. Hinze. Turbulence. McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.. New York. 1975.
[9] P. Huang, P. Bradshaw, and T. Coakley.Skin Friction and Velocity Profile Family for Compressible Tur-
bulent Boundary Layers. AIAA Journal, 31(9). pg. 1600-1604. September 1993.
[10] B. R. Hutchinson and G. D. Raithby.A Multigrid Method Based on the Additive Correction Strategy.
Numerical Heat Transfer, 9. pg. 511-537. 1986.
[11] I. E. Idelchick. Handbook of Hydraulic Resistances. 2nd Edition. Hemisphere Publishing Corp.,. 1975.
[12] JEDEC Solid State Products Engineering Council. Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment
Conditions--Natural Convection (Still Air). EIA/JEDEC Standard EIA/JESD51-2, Electronic Industries
Association. December 1995.
[13] JEDEC Solid State Technology Association. Integrated Circuit Thermal Test Method Environmental Con-
ditions--Forced Convection (Moving Air). JEDEC Standard JESD51-6,Electronic Industries Alliance.
March 1999.
[14] T. Jongen. Simulation and Modeling of Turbulent Incompressible Flows. PhD thesis, EPF Lausanne,
Lausanne, Switzerland. 1992.
[15] B. Kader. Temperature and Concentration Profiles in Fully Turbulent Boundary Layers. Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 24(9). pg. 1541-1544. 1993.
[16] V. Kumar and G. Karypis.METIS - A Software Package for Partitioning Unstructured Graphs, Partitioning
Meshes, and Computing Fill-Reducing Orderings of Sparse Matrices, Version 3.0. University of Min-
nesota and Army HPC Research Center. 1997.
[17] W. M. Kays. Turbulent Prandtl Number - Where Are We?. J. Heat Transfer,116. pg. 284-295. 1994.
Bibliography
[18] B. E. Launder and D. D. Spalding.Lectures in Mathematical Models of Turbulence. Academic Press.

London. 1972.
[19] M. F. Modest. Radiative Heat Transfer Series in Mechanical Engineering. 2nd Edition. McGraw Hill.
1993.
[20] S. V. Patankar. Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow. 2nd Edition. Hemisphere Publishing Corp.
Washington, D.C. 1980.
[21] C. M. Rhie and W. L. Chow.Numerical Study of the Turbulent Flow Past an Airfoil with Trailing Edge
Separation. AIAA Journal, 21(11). pg. 1523-1532. November 1983.
[22] J. A. Snyman. A New and Dynamic Method for Unconstrained Minimization. Applied Mathematical
Modeling, 6. pg. 449-462. 1982.
[23] J. A. Snyman. An improved Version of the Original Leap-Frog Method for Unconstrained Minimization.
Applied Mathematical Modeling, 7. pg. 216-218. 1983.
[24] J. A. Snyman. The LFOPC Leap-Frog Algorithm for Constrained Optimization. Computers and Mathem-
atics with Applications, 40. pg. 1085-1096. 2000.
[25] J. A Snyman, J. Roux, and N. Stander, A.Dynamic Penalty Function Method for the Solution of Struc-
tural Optimization Problems.. Applied Mathematical Modeling, 18. pg. 453-460. 1994.
[26] P. Spalart and S. Allmaras.A one-equation turbulence model for aerodynamic flows. Technical Report
AIAA-92-0439, American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics. February 1992.
[27] F. White and G. Chris.A Simple New Analysis of Compressible Turbulent Skin Friction Under Arbitrary
Conditions. Technical Report AFFDL-TR-70-133. February 1971.
[28] M. Wolfstein. The Velocity and Temperature Distribution of One-Dimensional Flow with Turbulence
Augmentation and Pressure Gradient. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 12. pg. 301-318. 1969.
[29] V. Yakhot and S. A. Orszag.Renormalization Group Analysis of Turbulence: I. Basic Theory. Journal of
Scientific Computing, 1(1). pg. 1-51. 1986.
[30] F. R. Menter, R. B. Langtry, S. R. Likki, Y. B. Suzen, P. G. Huang, and S. Volker. "A Correlation Based
Transition Model Using Local Variables Part 1 - Model Formulation". (ASME-GT2004-53452)2004.
[31] P. M. Gresho, R. L. Lee, and R. L. Sani. "On the Time-Dependent Solution of the Incompressible Navier-
Stokes Equations in Two and Three Dimensions". In Recent Advances in Numerical Methods in Fluids.
Pineridge Press, Swansea, UK. 1980.
[32] X. Hu, S. Lin, S. Stanton, and W. Lian. A State Space Thermal Model for HEV/EV Battery Modeling. SAE
International. (10.4271/2011-01-1364)2011.
[33] Grimme, E.J.. "Krylov projection methods for model reduction". Doctoral disseration, University of Illinois
at Urbana-Champaign. 1997.
[34] Antoulas, W.E.. "Approximation of Large-Scale Dynamical Systems". Advances in Design and Control,
6. SIAM. 2005.
[35] Arnoldi, W.E.. The Principal of Minimized Iterations in the Solution of the Matrix Eigenvalue Problem.
Quarterly of Applied Mathematics, 9(1). pg. 17-29. 1951.
resizing, 56
Index Appearance/Background Color2 , 237
Appearance/Background Style , 237
Symbols applications, 14
2D interpolation method Arrows, 96
constant, 239 Assemblies dialog box, 359
inverse distance weighted, 239 assembly, 357-358
least squares, 239 adding objects to, 358
copying, 366
creating, 357
A using a group, 339
accuracy
deleting, 367
diffusion terms, 994
editing, 359, 365
first-order, 832, 995
expanding into its components, 367
second-order, 832, 995
external, 360
Active , 310
internal, 360
active objects
loading, 366
saving, 151
merging, 367
Active parameter dialog box, 693
meshing, 806
Add marker dialog box, 62
moving, 366
add point, 649
saving, 366
adding objects to a group, 336
selecting, 365
Advanced solver setup dialog box, 93, 831
summary, 367
algebraic multigrid (AMG), 995, 1001
total area, 368
Align and morph edges button, 92
total volume, 368
Align and morph faces button, 92
translating, 360
Align and morph vertices button, 92
viewing, 365
Align centers button, 304
Assembly contents dialog box, 367
Align edges button, 302
Assembly node, 120
Align face centers button, 92, 305
assembly structure
Align faces button, 301
save, 151
Align object centers button, 92
augmentation efficiency, 660
Align vertices button, 303
auto-save interval, 854
All projects button, 235, 242
automatic mesh generation, 773
altitude effects
Autoscale button, 280
modeling, 266
AutoTherm
Ambient reflectance, 66
files, 161
ambient values, 260
saving, 203
animated GIF files, 894
animation
isosurface, 899
B
particle traces, 917 baffles, 410
plane cut, 893 band width for contour plots, 907
saving, 894 Basic parameters dialog box, 93
transient simulations, 645 Basic parameters panel, 250
Anisotropic tensor dialog box, 345 Basic settings dialog box, 93
annotations, 95, 238 Basic settings panel, 835
Annotations dialog box, 95 Reset button, 260, 834, 836
ANSYS Icepak, 7 transient simulations, 638
ANSYS Icepak environment variables, 20 batch
ANSYS Icepak Menus, 56 execution, 868
ANSYS Icepak Toolbars, 86 file, 868
ANSYS Icepak Windows bay stations, 449
Index
block, 493 trace object, 192

combination, 495, 501 boundary profiles, 403, 484
coincident surfaces, 496 Boussinesq approximation, 257, 980
intersecting volumes, 497 Boussinesq hypothesis, 965
creating, 505 bubble help, 110, 240
detailed heat sink macro, 735 building a model, 273
fixed heat, 495 buoyancy forces, 979
fixed temperature, 495
fluid, 494, 513 C
hollow, 494, 520 cabinet
individual sides, 495, 510 color, 284
joule heating, 515 creating, 275
meshing, 797 default, 275
3D polygon, 798 Edit window , 275
cylinder, 798 line width, 284
ellipsoid, 799 meshing, 796
elliptical cylinder, 799 mirroring, 282
prism, 797 moving, 280
network, 494, 502, 521, 953 name, 283
on external wall, 501 notes, 284
plate resizing, 276
intersecting volume, 500 to fit objects, 280
surface coincident, 499 rotating, 282
radiation, 509, 666 scaling, 279, 282
emissivity, 670 snap to grid, 282
specification, 668 translating, 282
resistance, 512 wall, 283, 467
solid, 493, 513 Cabinet dialog box, 276
surface roughness, 494 Cabinet node, 119
thermal properties, 495, 511, 513 CAD geometry, 159
transient simulations, 515, 636 cadence powermap files, 201
type, 493 calculating a solution, 829, 870
Block thermal conditions dialog box, 518, 520 in batch mode, 868
Blocks dialog box, 505 capabilities, 9
blower, 549 boundary conditions, 12
centrifugal, 550 general, 10
creating, 552 materials, 12
curve window, 556 meshing, 11
meshing, 800 model building, 10
operating point, 954 physical models, 12
swirl, 551 reporting, 13
Blowers dialog box, 552 solver, 13
board layer information, 187 visualization, 13
Board properties dialog box, 162 case files, 145
body forces, 833, 996 Cavity Down BGA Die dialog box, 601, 604
bolt, 730 Cavity Down BGA Dimensions dialog box, 595
boundaries Cavity Down BGA Solder dialog box, 599
periodic, 487 Cavity Down BGA Substrate dialog box, 597
boundary conditions cell values, 994
parameterization, 689 Check model button, 88
radiative heat transfer, 473 checking the design, 368, 370
species, 658 checking the mesh, 819
element volume, 822 contours, 904
face alignment, 819 control panels, 103
skewness, 824 control volume technique, 991
circular object, 314 convection, 979
meshing, 801 forced, 257
Clean up project data, 157 natural, 257
Clean up project data dialog box, 156 transient simulations, 627
co-located scheme, 996 conventions
coarse mesh keyboard, 6
hexahedral, 778 mouse, 6
cocooning, 773, 788, 791 used in this manual, 4
color, 244 convergence, 1008
cabinet, 284 criteria, 836, 992
contour plot, 906 history, 871
graphical displays, 881 judging, 874, 1008
group, 335 monitoring, 873
object, 311 conversion factors
particle trace, 917 units, 220
vector plot, 911 coordinate axes
color legend moving, 130
data format, 236 coordinate systems, 297
moving, 130 Copy assembly dialog box, 366
color levels Copy from button, 308
contour plot, 908 Copy object button, 91, 307, 349, 366
color spectrum, 881 Copy object dialog box, 307
changing, 130 copying
contour plot, 908 assembly, 366
data format, 236 group, 338
compare materials, 349
temperature limits, 771 mesh data, 150
Complex lighting, 66 object, 306, 308
Component selection dialog box, 164 solution data, 151
compressing project data, 156 Coupled algorithm, 998
compute nodes, 852 Create assemblies button, 90, 358
computing view factors, 672 Create blocks button, 91, 505
adaptive method, 672 Create blowers button, 91, 552
hemicube method, 672 Create Detailed Heatsink dialog box, 735
condenser, 387 Create enclosures button, 90, 449
conduction, 962 Create fans button, 91, 536
transient simulations, 627 Create grille button, 90, 414
configuring a project, 234 Create heat exchangers button, 90, 389
conjugate-gradient methods, 1001 Create heat sinks button, 91, 572
conservation equations Create image file button, 86, 227
discretization, 993 Create JEDEC Test Chamber dialog box, 724, 726
integral form, 996 Create Krylov ROM dialog box, 717
context menu Create materials button, 91, 350
set levels, 127 Create networks button, 90, 378
set orientation, 127 Create openings button, 90, 397
context menus Create packages button, 91, 590
graphics display, 121 Create PCB - Detailed and Compact dialog box, 728
context-specific help, 110 Create periodic boundaries button, 90, 489
continuity equation, 961 Create plates button, 90, 455
Index
Create printed circuit boards button, 90, 439 D

Create resistances button, 91, 561 data files, 146
Create sources button, 90, 424 date, 96, 130
Create walls button, 90, 476 default file location, 240
creating default materials, 261
assembly, 357 default project location, 240
block, 505 default script file location, 240
blower, 552 Define full report dialog box, 951
cabinet, 275 Define point report dialog box, 948
enclosure, 449 Define summary report dialog box, 840, 943
fan, 536 defining
grille, 414 isosurface, 897
group, 334 meshing parameters, 796
heat exchanger, 389 object face (facet), 887
heat sink object, 572 object face (node), 884
isosurface, 899 plane cut, 889
local coordinate system, 298 point, 901
materials, 350 postprocessing objects, 840
network, 378 project, 223
new point, 649 summary report, 840, 946
object, 289 Delete object button, 91, 352, 883
object face, 886 deleting
opening, 397 assembly, 367
package, 590 group, 339
PCB, 439 isosurface, 900
periodic boundary, 489 local coordinate system, 300
plane cut, 893 materials, 352
plate, 455 object, 290
point, 903 object face, 887
project, 229 parameters, 699
resistance, 561 plane cut, 896
source, 424 point, 650, 903
wall, 476 postprocessing objects, 883
cross-section delphi package, 613
displaying results, 888 density, 344, 346, 653
displaying the mesh, 815 incompressible ideal gas law, 980
CSV/Excel files, 193-194, 206 derived variables, 935, 955
cursors deselecting
classic display, 130 object, 289
curve specification, 658 design
Curve specification dialog box, 356, 403, 419, 429, 462, checking, 368, 370
485, 544, 578, 643 of heat sinks, 570, 735
custom assembly, 357 optimization, 689
customizing design variable
materials, 342, 350 creating a new design variable, 698
mesh parameters, 773 Detect gaps between overlapped objects, 247
units, 217 diagnostic
cylinder, 323 files, 145
elliptical, 327 tools, 874
meshing, 799 die stack information, 606
meshing, 788, 791, 798 Diffuse reflectance, 66
diffusion coefficient, 654
diffusivity, 347 Edit/Clear clipboard, 60
discrete ordinates (DO) Edit/Find menu, 60
radiation , 982 Edit/Preferences menu, 61
discrete values Edit/Redo menu, 60
storage points, 994 Edit/Show clipboard, 60
discretization, 831, 993, 1000 Edit/Snap to grid menu, 61
body force weighted interpolation schemes, 833 Edit/Undo menu, 60
first-order scheme, 995 editing
pressure interpolation schemes, 996 assembly, 359, 365
second-order scheme, 995 existing point, 650
spatial, 993 interactively, 244
temporal, 1000 isosurface, 899
DISPLAY , 20 local coordinate system, 299
Display object names button, 87 materials, 342
Display/Background Color 1 , 237 object, 290
displaying object face, 886
cut plane mesh, 125 plane cut, 893
mesh, 125, 810 point, 903
cross-section, 815 postprocessing objects, 883
individual objects, 810 view factors, 675
residuals, 839 electric potential, 937
results, 877 element
view factors, 673 count, 795
distributed compute gateway height, 795
ANSYS Icepak in Workbench, 139 outward height, 800
divergence, 834 outward ratio, 800
documentation, 20 volume, 822
double precision, 1009 ellipsoid, 326
solver, 835 meshing, 799
drilled holes, 160, 163 elliptical cylinder, 327
drop-down list, 106 meshing, 799
DUAL Die dialog box, 601, 604 EM heat losses, 954
DUAL Dimensions dialog box, 595 EM mapping
DUAL Solder dialog box, 599 files, 157
DUAL Substrate dialog box, 597 emissivity, 348, 666
dynamic head, 387 enclosure, 449
dynamic-q optimization method, 679, 987 creating, 449
meshing, 799
E radiation, 452
EC XML files, 177, 210 emissivity, 670
ECAD specification, 668
files, 157 Enclosures dialog box, 449
ECAD packages, 160, 171 energy equation, 962
Edit button, 276 Enforce 3D cut cell meshing, 246
Edit commands toolbar, 86 environment variables, 19
Edit menu, 59 ANSYS Icepak, 20
Edit object button, 91 system, 19
Edit units button, 222 Epsilon , 937
Edit window, 97 error reduction, 1001
cabinet, 275 rate, 1007
object, 285 examining
Edit/Annotations menu, 61 mesh, 810, 819
Index
hex-dominant, 777 Fan curve window, 542

hexahedral, 779 Fans dialog box, 536
results, 877 fans node, 112
exiting, 135 File commands toolbar, 86, 226
exporting File menu, 57
CAD geometry, 203 ANSYS Icepak in Workbench, 137
CSV/Excel files, 206 file selection
EC XML files, 210 current directory, 102
IDF files, 209 favorite button, 102
exporting solution data, 161, 203, 851 home, 102
external assembly, 360 new directory, 102
extract delphi network, 621 root directory, 102
File selection dialog box, 99
F File/Cleanup menu, 59, 157
F-cycle multigrid, 1006 File/Command prompt menu, 59
F1 key, 110 File/Create image file menu, 59
F9 key, 132 File/Export menu, 58
face alignment, 819 File/Import menu, 58, 159
face flow rate, 997 File/Merge project menu, 58, 147
fan, 527 File/New project menu, 58
characteristic curve, 527, 534, 542-543 File/Open project menu, 58, 232
circular, 529 File/Pack menu, 875
combination File/Pack project menu, 59, 156
parallel, 532 File/Print options dialog box, 59
series, 532 File/Print screen menu, 59
creating, 536 File/Quit menu, 59
efficiency, 536 File/Reload main version menu, 58
exhaust, 527, 531, 535, 539 File/Save project as menu, 58, 149
failed, 540 File/Save project menu, 58, 149
fixed flow, 527, 534 File/Shell window menu, 59
flow, 527 File/Unpack project menu, 59, 156
flow direction, 531, 539 files
flow rate, 539 AEDT script, 205
housing, 530 ANF, 182, 442, 508, 595
failed, 540 ANSYS Icepak, 144
guard, 540 AutoTherm, 161, 203
hub, 527, 529, 540 batch, 868
intake, 527, 531, 535, 539 cadence powermap, 201
internal, 528, 531, 535, 539 cadence thermal resistance, 214
library, 545 case, 145
search, 545 CSV/Excel, 193-194, 206
located on a block, 533 data, 146
meshing, 799 diagnostic, 145
operating point, 954 EC XML, 177, 210
pressure drop, 534 exporting, 203
rectangular, 529 Gerber, 508
resistance modeling, 536 gradient, 201
RPM, 534 gradient thermal resistance, 214
species, 658 grid, 145
static pressure, 534 IDF, 160, 209
swirl magnitude, 534 IDX, 171
transient simulations, 528, 541, 636 image, 152
format, 154 finned heat sink, 735
frame, 155 theory, 567, 570
label, 155 first-order accuracy, 832, 995
landscape, 154 Fix values , 219
portrait, 154 flex-cycle multigrid, 1005
PostScript options, 155 Flip-Chip Die dialog box, 601, 604
scaling, 154 Flip-Chip Dimensions dialog box, 595
importing, 159 Flip-Chip Solder dialog box, 599
JEDEC PTD/JEP30, 182, 214 Flip-Chip Substrate dialog box, 597
job , 145 floating toolbars, 109
log, 97 flow
mesh, 145 conductivity, 569
metadata, 146 heat, 937, 957
model, 145 mass, 937, 956
node, 855 radiative heat, 937
ODB++, 182, 442, 508, 595 regime, 255
opening, 98 variables, 253
optimization, 146 postprocessing, 254
input, 146 volume, 938, 956
log, 146 Flow dependent heat transfer dialog box, 483
output, 146 Fluent, 7, 13
postprocessing, 146 fluid material
tab, 146 default, 261
overview, 143 properties, 345
postprocessing, 146 flux
PostScript, 155, 239 heat, 937, 956
problem, 145 radiation, 666
problem setup, 145 font, 244
reading, 98 forced convection, 253, 257
Redhawk CTM, 201 forces
residual, 145, 874 inertial, 259
saving, 98 viscous, 259
transient simulations, 632 Form factors dialog box, 671
scratch, 158 Four viewing windows button, 87
script, 145, 849 FPBGA Die dialog box, 601, 604
selecting, 98 FPBGA Dimensions dialog box, 595
sentinel, 201 FPBGA Solder dialog box, 599
Sentinel TI, 204 FPBGA Substrate dialog box, 597
SIwave temperature files, 214 fraction menu, 657
solution, 158 frame
solver, 145 image, 155
input, 145
output, 145 G
stacked die, 201 gas law, 980
STEP, 193 Gauss-Seidel method, 1001
Total for project, 158 Generate mesh button, 88, 780, 782
Twin Builder, 214 geometric transformations
version, 158 cabinet, 280-281, 292
writing, 98 for merging model data, 148
filter efficiency, 660 object, 293, 308
Find in tree dialog box, 60 geometry
finite-volume scheme, 993 object, 312
Index
parameterization, 689 meshing, 410

gerber files, 186 pressure drop, 411
getting started, 7 pressure drop curve, 417
governing equations, 961 Pressure drop curve, 419
discretization, 993 species, 658
integral form, 996 stagnation pressure, 417
gradient files, 201 static pressure, 417
gradient powermap files, 201 vent, 409
Graph editor , 354, 417, 542, 577, 642 pressure drop, 410
graphical displays, 880 Grille dialog box, 414
color, 881 group, 94, 333
graphical styles activating, 339
editing, 243 adding objects, 336
graphical user interface (GUI), 55 color, 335
configuring, 234 copying, 338
graphics display and control window, 94 created during IDF import, 171
graphics driver, 19 created during IDX import, 177
Graphics file options dialog box, 153, 155-156 creating, 334
graphics tools for postprocessing, 877 assembly, 339, 358
graphics window, 18, 94 deactivating, 339
adding annotations, 95 deleting, 339
adding arrows, 96 displaying results, 884
adding lines, 96 editing object properties, 338
adding markers, 62, 96 including objects, 310
adding text, 96 line width, 336
isometric view, 67, 88 moving, 338
lighting options, 65 node, 112, 229
scale to fit, 68, 87 removing objects, 337
views, 67 renaming, 335
zooming, 67, 87, 135 saving, 339
Grashof number, 979 shading, 336
gravity, 257 texture, 336
grid, 773 transparency, 336
files, 145 GUI, 55
storage points, 994
grille, 409 H
approach velocity, 413, 416 heat exchanger, 387
creating, 414 creating, 389
device velocity, 413, 416 heat transfer, 388
flow direction, 411, 417 heat transfer coefficient, 388
free area ratio, 413, 416 meshing, 803
loss coefficient, 412-413, 416 pressure drop, 387
meshing, 801 Heat exchangers dialog box, 389
2D polygon, 802 heat flow, 937, 957
circular, 801 heat flux, 937, 956
inclined, 802 radiation, 666
rectangular, 802 heat pipes, 739
planar resistance, 410 heat sink, 567
approach velocity, 410 bonded fin, 572, 580, 738
device velocity, 410 creating object, 572
free area ratio, 410 cross cut extrusion, 571, 581, 738
loss coefficient, 410 cylindrical pin, 571, 581, 739
design, 570, 735 Home position button, 87
detailed, 570, 580, 735 HTC files
extruded, 570, 580, 738 exporting Sentinel TI, 204
longitudinal, 568 HTML report, 939
macro HTML report dialog box, 939
bonded fin, 738 hub, 529
cross cut extrusion, 738 housing, 530
cylindrical pin, 739 humidity ratio, 657
detailed, 735
extruded, 738 I
meshing, 803 I-deas, 851
pins, 568 icepak , 16
radiation, 575 icepak -unpack , 19
emissivity, 670 icepak -x , 19
specification, 668 icepak -xfast , 19
simplified, 567, 575 icepak projectname , 19
simplified flow conductivity, 569 ICEPAK_JOB_DIRECTORY , 20
simplified modeling, 568 ICEPAK_LIB_PATH , 20
thermal resistance curve, 577-578 ICEPAK_LICENSE_FILE , 20
heat sinks ideal gas law, 257-258, 980
flow resistance, 569 IDF files, 160, 209
thermal resistance, 570 board files, 161, 170
Heat sinks dialog box, 572 detailed import, 160, 162
heat sources, 962 drilled holes, 160, 163
Heat tr. coeff parameters dialog box, 957 exporting AutoTherm files, 161, 203
heat transfer, 665, 962 groups, 171
conducting solids, 962 library files, 161, 170
heat transfer coefficient, 388, 938, 957 Miscellaneous options, 169
heaters, 393 modeling components as 2D sources, 166
help, 20, 109 modeling components as 3D blocks, 166
bubble, 110 overview, 160
context-specific, 110 panel files, 161, 170
F1 key, 110 simple import, 160, 162
online, 109 IDF import dialog box, 161, 163, 165, 170
Help menu, 85 IDX files, 171
Help/About ANSYS Icepak menu, 85 board files, 172
Help/ANSYS Customer Portal menu, 85 groups, 177
Help/Help menu, 85 Miscellaneous options, 176
Help/Icepak on the Web menu, 85 modeling components as 2D sources, 174
Help/List shortcuts menu, 85 modeling components as 3D blocks, 174
hex-dominant mesh, 775 overview, 171
hexahedral mesh, 775 IDX import dialog box, 172-173
hidden line removal, 63 image, 152, 154
high end, 795 file format, 154
high side, 795 frame, 155
High side surface properties dialog box, 443, 464 label, 155
History plot button, 89, 647 landscape, 154
History plot dialog box, 647 options, 153
history plot for transient simulations, 647 portrait, 154
hollow block PostScript options, 155
species, 658 scaling, 154
HOME , 19 importing
Index
ANF, 183, 442, 595 JEDEC test chamber macro, 723

BOOL, 442 forced-convection, 724
CAD geometry, 159 natural-convection, 726
CSV/Excel files, 193-194 job files, 145
EC XML files, 177 Job Scheduler, 856
Gerber, 186 Joule heating
IDF files, 160 variables, 959
IDX files, 171 Joule heating power dialog box, 429, 459, 515
JEDEC PTD/JEP30 files, 182, 214
ODB++, 183, 442, 595 K
overview, 159 k-ω SST turbulence model, 975
STEP files, 193 keyboard
trace files, 183 shortcuts, 134
importing trace files known issues and limitations, 14
license requirements, 182 krylov rom, 717
improving the mesh
hex-dominant, 777 L
hexahedral, 779 label
Inactive, 94 image, 155
Inactive node, 115, 229 laminar flow, 255
inclined object, 315 landscape, 154
meshing, 802 Libraries node, 94, 112, 229
Individual side specification dialog box, 510 fans, 545
inertial forces, 259 packages, 611
information searching for fans, 545
die stack, 606 searching for packages, 611
initial conditions, 262 Library name and info dialog box, 242
initializing the solution, 835 library path, 241
interactive editing, 244 Lighting options dialog box, 65
Interactive editing dialog box, 281 line
Interface thermal resistance dialog box, 582-583 interval, 908
internal assembly, 360 line solvers, 1001
interpolation, 994, 996 line width, 244
interpolation method cabinet, 284
2D profile, 240 contour plot, 907
introduction, 7 group, 336
isometric view, 67, 88 object, 311
Isometric view button, 88 linearization, 993
isosurface Link dialog box, 385
clipping, 900 linux nodes
displaying results, 896 remote, 865
Isosurface button, 89, 897 Linux systems
Isosurface contours dialog box, 905 starting ANSYS Icepak on, 16
Isosurface dialog box, 897 startup options, 18
Isosurface particles dialog box, 914 list
Isosurface vectors dialog box, 910 drop-down, 106
iterations, 836 single selection, 105
transient simulations, 638 Load solution ID button, 929
iterative procedure, 992 loading
assembly, 366
J existing mesh, 828
JEDEC PTD/JEP30 files, 182, 214 postprocessing objects, 883
postprocessing views, 883 Macros menu, 73, 723
report format, 941 Macros/Geometry/Approximation menu, 74
trials plot, 927 Macros/Geometry/Approximation/1/4 Cylinder-Poly-
variation plot, 923 gonal menu, 74
Local coord systems dialog box, 93, 297 Macros/Geometry/Approximation/Circular-Polygonal
local coordinate systems, 297 menu, 74
creating, 298 Macros/Geometry/Approximation/Cylinder-Plates
deleting, 300 menu, 74
editing, 299 Macros/Geometry/Approximation/Cylinder-Polygonal
viewing definition of, 299 menu, 74
Local coords dialog box, 298 Macros/Geometry/Approximation/Hemisphere menu,
locations 74
min/max, 125 Macros/Geometry/Approximation/Polygonal enclosure
log file, 97 menu, 74
Logo, 96 Macros/Geometry/Approximation/Thin Adiabatic En-
loss coefficient, 387 closure menu, 74
low end, 795 Macros/Geometry/Data Center Components menu, 74
low side, 795 Macros/Geometry/Data Center Components/CRAC
Low side surface properties dialog box, 443, 464 menu, 74
low-Reynolds-number flows, 972 Macros/Geometry/Data Center Components/PDU
Lower pri button, 873 menu, 74
Macros/Geometry/Data Center Components/Rack (Front
M to Rear) menu, 74
macros, 723 Macros/Geometry/Data Center Components/Rack (Front
CRAC, 741 to Top) menu, 74
adding, 742 Macros/Geometry/Data Center Components/Tile menu,
modifying, 744 74
data center, 741 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks menu, 74
heat sink Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Align Heatsinks menu,74
bonded fin, 738 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Angled Fin Heatsink menu,
cross cut extrusion, 738 75
cylindrical pin, 739 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Circular Based Pin Fin -
detailed, 735 Generalized Pin menu, 75
extruded, 738 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Detailed Heatsink menu,
JEDEC test chambers, 723 75, 735
forced-convection, 724 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Folded Fin menu, 75
natural-convection, 726 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Lance + Offset - Blocks
PCB, 728 menu, 75
pdu Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Lance + Offset menu, 75
adding, 744 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Radial - Cylindrical Hub
PDU menu, 75
modifying, 746 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Radial - Cylindrical Hub
PDU object, 744 Triangular Fins menu, 75
power dependent power, 760 Macros/Geometry/Heatsinks/Skived menu, 75
rack, 746 Macros/Geometry/Packages - Network menu, 75
Rack Macros/Geometry/Packages - TO Devices menu, 76
adding, 746 Macros/Geometry/Packages menu, 75
modifying, 749 Macros/Geometry/PCB menu, 76
tile, 749 Macros/Geometry/PCB/Bolt menu, 76
adding, 750 Macros/Geometry/PCB/Compact Vias Filled menu, 76
Tile Macros/Geometry/PCB/Compact Vias II menu, 76
modifying, 752 Macros/Geometry/PCB/Compact Vias menu, 76
Index
Macros/Geometry/PCB/PCB - Detailed and Compact Macros/Productivity/Automatic Mesh Settings menu,

menu, 76, 728 79
Macros/Geometry/PCB/Stiffener menu, 76 Macros/Productivity/Change Background Color menu,
Macros/Geometry/PCB/Wedgelock menu, 76 79
Macros/Modeling/ IC Packages/Conduction Enclosure Macros/Productivity/Cleanup Object Names menu, 79
menu, 77 Macros/Productivity/Copy Assembly Settings menu,79
Macros/Modeling/ IC Packages/Extract Delphi Network Macros/Productivity/Debug Divergence menu, 79
menu, 77 Macros/Productivity/Delete Unused Materials menu,
Macros/Modeling/ IC Packages/Extract JC and JC menu, 79
77 Macros/Productivity/Delete Unused Parameters menu,
Macros/Modeling/ IC Packages/JEDEC Test Chamber 79
menu, 77 Macros/Productivity/Dimensionless Parameter Calculat-
Macros/Modeling/Extract Network Information menu, or menu, 79
77 Macros/Productivity/Export materials to Fluent menu,
Macros/Modeling/Heatsink Wind Tunnel menu, 76 79
Macros/Modeling/Heatsink Wind Tunnel/Create Wind Macros/Productivity/Find Zero-Slack Assemblies menu,
Tunnel menu, 76 80
Macros/Modeling/Heatsink Wind Tunnel/Process Wind Macros/Productivity/Macros Toolbar menu, 80
Tunnel - Plate-Fin Heatsink Configuration menu, 76 Macros/Productivity/Make All Objects Visible menu,80
Macros/Modeling/IC Packages/JEDEC Test Chamber Macros/Productivity/Mesh Settings Comparison menu,
menu, 724, 726 80
Macros/Modeling/Import Power Matrix File menu, 77 Macros/Productivity/Sort Inactive Node menu, 80
Macros/Modeling/Multi-Die Characterization menu,77 Macros/Rotate menu, 76
Macros/Modeling/Multi-Die Characterization Post Macros/Rotate/Groups of Prism Blocks menu, 76
menu, 77 Macros/Rotate/Individual Plates menu, 76
Macros/Modeling/Power Dependent Power Macro Macros/Rotate/Individual Polygonal Blocks menu, 76
menu, 78 Macros/Rotate/Individual Prism Blocks menu, 76
Macros/Modeling/Siwave Icepak Coupling/PCB Iterator Main library node, 112
menu, 77 Main window, 17, 56
Macros/Modeling/Solar Flux Calculator menu, 78 managing
Macros/Modeling/Source/Fan Thermostat menu, 78 postprocessing objects, 881
Macros/Modeling/Thermoelectric Cooler menu, 77 manuals, 20
Macros/Modeling/Transient Temperature Dependent using, 1
Power menu, 78 mass diffusion coefficients, 654
Macros/Other/ATX/Micro-ATX Chassis menu, 75 mass flow, 937, 956
Macros/Other/Network Heat Exchanger menu, 75 Match edges button, 306
Macros/Other/Network Heatpipe - Straight menu, 75 Match faces button, 305
Macros/Post Processing/AutomaticPostprocessing materials, 339
menu, 78 copying, 349
Macros/Post Processing/Ensight Export menu, 78 creating, 350
Macros/Post Processing/Export CSV Reports menu, 78 default, 261
Macros/Post Processing/Report Max Values menu, 78 deleting, 352
Macros/Post Processing/Temperature Field to ANSYS editing, 342
WB menu, 78 fluid, 345
Macros/Post Processing/Write Average Metal Fractions parameterization, 689
menu, 78 saving, 350
Macros/Post Processing/Write Detailed Report menu, solid, 344
78 conductivity, 344, 691
Macros/Productivity/Automatic Case Check Tool menu, summary, 368
78 surface, 347
Macros/Productivity/Automatic CutCell Meshing menu, temperature dependence, 341, 353
79 velocity dependence, 352
viewing properties, 349 blower, 800
Materials dialog box, 341, 345 cabinet, 796
Materials node, 120 circular object, 801
mathematical conventions, 5 cylinder, 798
menus ellipsoid, 799
ANSYS Icepak, 56 elliptical cylinder, 799
postprocessing context, 127 enclosure, 799
Merge project dialog box, 147 fan, 799
merging grille, 801
assembly, 367 heat exchanger, 803
model data, 146 heat sink object, 803
projects, 146 inclined object, 802
mesh, 773, 793 network, 803
checking, 819 opening, 803
element volume, 822 Packages, 804
face alignment, 819 PCB, 804
skewness, 824 plate, 804
controlling order for objects, 808 prism, 797
copying, 150 rectangular object, 802
defining parameters, 796 resistance, 804
displaying, 810 source, 805
cross-section, 815 traces, 805
individual objects, 810 wall, 805
files, 145, 157 partitioning, 855
global planar resistance, 410
parameters, 784 quality, 774
guidelines, 776 resistance, 559
hex-dominant, 775 skew, 775
examining, 777 units, 216
improving, 777 Mesh control dialog box, 780, 782
minimum-count, 780 mesh type, 246
object-specific controls, 777 Message window, 17, 97
procedure, 776 metadata
refining, 783 files, 146
hexahedral, 775 METIS, 855
coarse, 778 Microsoft Excel location, 240
examining, 779 Min/max locations dialog box, 903
improving, 779 minimum-count mesh
minimum-count, 778, 782 hex-dominant, 780
object-specific controls, 779 hexahedral, 778, 782
parameters, 791 mirroring
procedure, 778 cabinet, 282
refining, 778, 790, 793 merged model data, 149
loading, 828 object, 308
multi-level model, 94
parameters, 785 adding objects, 333
object-specific controls, 794-795 building, 273
parameters files, 157
2D polygon, 802 merging, 146
3D polygon, 798 parameterization, 689
assembly, 806 Model and solve toolbar, 88
block, 797 Model Display window, 94
Index
model file, 145 momentum equation, 961

Model manager window, 17, 92 monitor point
collapsing nodes, 227 frequency, 854
context menus, 111 Monitor window, 840
expanding nodes, 227 monitoring
Groups node, 229 convergence, 1008
Inactive node, 229 residuals, 1008
Libraries node, 229 solution, 836, 871, 873
fans, 545 Morph edges button, 92
packages, 611 Morph faces button, 92
searching for fans, 545 mounting holes, 160
searching for packages, 611 mouse, 110
Model node, 229 3Dconnexion, 133
Points node, 229 adding objects, 129
Postprocessing node, 229 changing color spectrum, 130
postprocessing objects, 881 changing controls, 130
Problem setup node, 228 controlling panel inputs, 111
Solution settings node, 229 cursors, 132
Surfaces node, 229 manipulating graphics, 128
Trash node, 229 Model manager window, 111
Model menu, 68, 275 moving color legend, 130
Model node, 117, 229 moving coordinate axes, 130
Model/Check model menu, 70, 370 moving date, 130
Model/Create material library menu, 69 moving title, 130
Model/Create object menu, 69, 117 pointer modes, 132
Model/Display/Material, 70 resizing objects, 130
Model/Display/Property, 71 rotating the model, 129
Model/Display/Type , 72 selecting objects, 129
Model/Edit grid cutouts menu, 69 switching modes, 131
Model/Edit overlaps menu, 69 translating objects, 130
Model/Edit priorities menu, 69, 808 translating the model, 129
Model/Find object menu, 117 zooming the model, 129
Model/Generate mesh menu, 69, 780, 782 Move all objects in model dialog box, 279, 281, 292
Model/Load assembly menu, 117 Move assembly dialog box, 366
Model/Merge project menu, 117 Move group dialog box, 338
Model/Object view/Flat menu, 117 Move object button, 91, 279, 366
Model/Object view/Types menu, 117 moving
Model/Object view/Types/subtypes menu, 117 assembly, 366
Model/Object view/Types/subtypes/shapes menu,118 cabinet, 280
Model/Paste from clipboard menu, 117 group, 338
Model/Power and temperature limits menu, 70 object, 292
Model/Radiation form factors menu, 69, 671 point, 903
Model/Sort menu, 117 MPEG file, 894
Model/Sort/Alphabetical menu, 117 multigrid solver, 834, 1001
Model/Sort/Creation order menu, 117 cycles, 1002
Model/Sort/Meshing priority menu, 117 F cycle, 1006
modeling flex cycle, 1005
species, 653 prolongation, 1002
Modify form factors dialog box, 675 residual reduction rate, 1005, 1007
Modify point dialog box, 838 restriction, 1002
Modify surface dialog box, 839 termination criteria, 1007
molecular weight, 347, 653 V cycle, 1002, 1005
W cycle, 1002, 1005 matching edges, 306
multiprocessor workstations, 854 matching faces, 305
using edit window , 300
N using object modification toolbar, 301
name vertices, 303
cabinet, 283 with another object, 300
object, 310 assembly, 357
NASTRAN, 851 attributes, 310
natural convection, 253, 257, 996-997 block, 493
Navier-Stokes equations, 961 blower, 549
near-wall flows, 972 circular, 314
network, 373 color, 311
creating, 378 controlling meshing order, 808
external heat exchangers, 375 copying, 306, 308
fully shunted, 522 creating, 289
general, 523 cylindrical, 323
IC packages, 373 defining mesh parameters, 796
meshing, 803 deleting, 290
nodes, 377 deselecting, 289
radiation, 380 displaying results, 884
star , 522 displaying the mesh, 810
transient simulations, 385 Edit window, 285
two-resistor, 521 editing, 290
network block, 494, 502, 521, 953 properties of like objects in a group, 338
Network editor dialog box, 381 ellipsoid, 326
network objects elliptical cylinder, 327
exporting, 208 enclosure, 449
importing, 199 excluding, 310
recirculation openings, 376 fan, 527
network resistances dialog box, 524 geometry, 312
Networks dialog box, 378 grille, 409
New directory button, 102 grouping, 333
New project button, 86, 226 heat exchanger, 387
New project dialog box, 18 heat sink, 567
New unit name dialog box, 219 high side, 795
Node dialog box, 383 inclined, 315
node file, 855 including
node values, 994 in a group, 310
Notes, 103 in model, 310
notes, 231 line width, 311
cabinet, 284 low side, 795
object, 310 minimum separation, 246
numerical scheme, 991 mirroring, 308
name, 310
O network, 373
object notes, 310
adding to group, 336 opening, 393
aligning package, 585
centers, 304 parameterization, 689
edges, 302 PCB, 435
face centers, 305 periodic boundary, 487
faces, 301 physical characteristics, 332
Index
plate, 453 flow direction, 396, 407

polygon free, 393-394, 400
2D, 317 heat flow, 396
3D, 319 mass flow rate, 395, 406
position, 312 meshing, 803
postprocessing pressure, 394
activating, 882 profiles, 403
deactivating, 882 recirculation, 393-395, 405
managing, 881 mass flow rate, 393
prism, 322 report, 946
radiation species, 660
modeling, 666 thermal specification, 396
surface-to-surface model, 668 species, 658
rectangular, 312 augmentation, 660
removing from group, 337 filtering, 660
report temperature, 394
full, 952 thermal specification, 396, 406
summary, 946 transient simulations, 402, 636
resistance, 559 opening a file, 98
resizing, 291 opening a project, 232
rotating, 293, 308 Openings dialog box, 397
scaling, 308 operating density, 259, 980
selecting, 289 operating point
shading, 63, 311 blower, 954
size, 312 fan, 954
source, 423 operating pressure, 258, 980
summary, 368 optimization, 679
texture, 311 dynamic-q method, 987
translating, 293, 308 files, 146
transparency, 311 input, 146
wall, 467 log, 146
Object creation toolbar, 89, 273 output, 146
Object dialog box, 285 postprocessing, 146
Object face (facet) dialog box, 887 tab, 146
Object face button, 89, 885 specification, 679
Object face contours dialog box, 905 Option parameter dialog box, 695
Object face dialog box, 885 Orient menu, 67
Object face particles dialog box, 914 Orient negative Z button, 88
Object face vectors dialog box, 910 Orient positive X button, 88
Object modification toolbar, 91, 274 Orient positive Y button, 88
Object priority dialog box, 808 Orient/Clear user views menu, 68, 884
Object selection dialog box, 308 Orient/Home position menu, 67
object-specific meshing controls, 794-795 Orient/Isometric view menu, 67
hex-dominant, 777 Orient/Nearest axis menu, 68
hexahedral, 779 Orient/Orient negative X menu, 67
Objects outside dialog box, 293 Orient/Orient negative Y menu, 67
One viewing window button, 87 Orient/Orient negative Z menu, 67
online help, 109 Orient/Orient positive X menu, 67
Open project button, 86, 226, 232 Orient/Orient positive Y menu, 67
Open project dialog box, 18, 101, 232 Orient/Orient positive Z menu, 67
opening, 393 Orient/Read user views from file menu, 68
creating, 397 Orient/Reverse orientation menu, 68
Orient/Save user view menu, 68, 884 running, 704
Orient/Scale to fit menu, 68 saving, 708
Orient/Write user views to file menu, 68 selecting, 702
Orient/Zoom in menu, 67 Parameters and optimization dialog box, 680, 696, 713
Orientation commands toolbar, 87 particle trace, 913
Output units button, 221 animation, 917
partition
P radiation, 666
package, 585 partitioning the mesh, 855
cavity-down BGA, 597 PATH , 20
CCM, 588 PATRAN, 851
BGA, 588 PBGA Die dialog box, 601, 604
lead-frame, 588 PBGA Dimensions dialog box, 595
creating, 590 PBGA Solder dialog box, 599
detailed, 585 PBGA Substrate dialog box, 597
BGA, 585 PCB, 435
lead-frame, 586 compact, 437
flip-chip, 597 components, 446
FPBGA, 597 creating, 439
JB, 589 detailed, 438
JC, 588 high side, 443, 446
library, 611 hollow, 435
search, 611 components height, 436
meshing, 804 components number, 436
node, 112 heat dissipation, 436
package on package (POP), 608 high side, 436
PBGA, 597 low side, 436
QFP, 603 side specification, 436
radiation, 601, 604, 607, 610, 666 low side, 443, 446
emissivity, 670 macro, 728
specification, 668 meshing, 804
top side, 600, 604, 607, 610 racks, 438, 442
Packages dialog box, 590 radiation, 443, 666
packing up a project, 19, 156, 875 emissivity, 670
panels, 103 specification, 668
parallel processing, 852 PCB attachments
efficiency, 852 bolt, 730
GPU, 854 stiffener, 730
on a dedicated parallel machine, 854 wedgelock, 730
on a multiprocessor workstation, 854 Peclet number, 259, 836
on a workstation cluster, 855 Per-object mesh parameters dialog box, 794
Job Scheduler, 856 Per-object parameters , 794
partitioning, 855 periodic boundaries, 487
Parallel settings dialog box, 93, 852 creating, 489
parallel solver, 852 Periodic boundaries dialog box, 489
optimize, 854 picture file, 157
Param value dialog box, 692 saving, 103, 151
parameterization, 689 planar resistance, 410
creating a new parameter, 690, 698 plane cut
deleting parameters, 699 clipping, 895
trials Plane cut button, 89, 889
defining, 699 Plane cut contours dialog box, 905
Index
Plane cut dialog box, 889 2D, 802

Plane cut particles dialog box, 914 3D, 798
Plane cut vectors dialog box, 910 portrait, 154
planning the analysis, 15 position
computational model, 15 object, 312
modeling goals, 15 Post menu, 81, 877
physical models, 15 Post-processing node, 114
solution procedure, 15 Post/3D Variation plot menu, 82
plate, 453 Post/Convergence plot menu, 82, 840
adiabatic thin, 453-454, 463 Post/Create zoom-in model menu, 83, 930
block surface coincident, 499 Post/Display powermap property menu, 83
conducting thick, 453-454, 458 Post/History plot menu, 83, 647
conducting thin, 453, 455, 461 Post/Isosurface menu, 82, 897
contact resistance, 453, 455, 460 Post/Load post objects from file menu, 83, 883
creating, 455 Post/Load solution ID menu, 83, 929
fluid, 453, 463 Post/Min/max locations menu, 82
high side, 453, 464 Post/Network temperature plot, 83
hollow thick, 453, 455, 460 Post/Object face (facet) menu, 82, 887
intersecting block, 500 Post/Object face (node) menu, 82, 885
joule heating, 459 Post/Plane cut menu, 82, 889
low side, 453, 464 Post/Point menu, 82, 901
meshing, 804 Post/Postprocessing units menu, 83, 221
modeling a PCB, 455 Post/Power and temperature values menu, 83
radiation, 465 Post/Rescale vectors menu, 83, 881, 883
emissivity, 670 Post/Save post objects to file menu, 83, 883
specification, 668 Post/Surface probe menu, 82
resistance, 465 Post/Transient settings menu, 83, 644
surface roughness, 455 Post/Trials plot menu, 83, 924
temperature dependence, 458, 462 Post/Variation plot menu, 82, 919
thermal model, 454, 458 Post/Workflow data menu, 83
thickness, 454 postprocessing, 877
transient simulations, 459, 637 animation, 645, 917
using with other objects, 455 cascade modeling, 929
Plates dialog box, 455 color, 881
plots contour attributes, 904
network temperature, 927 cross-section, 888
point, 94 files, 146, 157
add, 649 graphical displays, 880
creating new, 649 isosurface, 896
deleting, 650 clipping, 900
displaying results, 901, 903 min/max points, 903
editing, 650 node, 229
node, 94, 114 object face, 884
report, 948 object face (facet)
Point button, 89, 901 defining, 887
Point dialog box, 901 object face (node)
Point particles dialog box, 914 defining, 884
Point vectors dialog box, 910 objects
polygon activating, 882
2D, 317 deactivating, 882
3D, 319 defining, 840
meshing, 788, 791 managing, 881
Model manager window , 881 Print screen button, 86, 226
saving, 151 printed circuit board, 435
particle trace, 913 Printed circuit boards dialog box, 439
plane cut, 888 printing images, 152, 154
clipping, 895 file format, 154
defining, 889 frame, 155
point, 901 label, 155
solution ID, 929 landscape, 154
solution variables, 254 portrait, 154
species transport, 664 PostScript options, 155
transient simulations, 644 print region, 155
animation, 645 scaling, 154
trials plot, 923 printing text files, 239
units, 220 printing trials plots, 927
variables, 955 printing variation plots, 923
variation plot, 918 prism, 322
vectors, 909 meshing, 797
XY plot, 918 problem files, 145
zoom-in modeling, 929 problem parameters, 250
Postprocessing toolbar, 88 problem setup, 15
Postprocessing units dialog box, 221 wizard, 267
PostScript files, 155, 239 Problem setup node, 93
power and temperature Basic parameters, 228
setup, 769 Local coords, 229
Power and temperature limit setup dialog box, 769 Title/notes, 229
Power and temperature limits button, 88 profiles, 403, 484
Power and temperature values button, 89 species mass fraction, 663
power setup, 769 program structure, 8
Prandtl number, 259, 836 project
precision, 835, 1009 compressing data, 156
preferences configuring, 234
display options, 235 creating, 229
editing options, 238 defining, 223
meshing options, 246 merging, 146
miscellaneous options, 239, 619 notes, 231
postprocessing options, 249 opening, 232
printing options, 238 packing, 19, 156, 875
solution options, 247 parameters, 250
Preferences dialog box, 216, 234 reloading, 233
preferences panel removing data, 156
ANSYS Icepak in Workbench, 140 saving, 149, 231
pressure, 937, 956 active objects, 151
drop, 387 assembly structure, 151
interpolation schemes, 996 at specified frequency, 850
variable, 956 mesh data, 150
postprocessing, 254 picture files, 151
Pressure drop curve window, 417 postprocessing objects, 151
pressure-correction equation, 997 solution data, 151
pressure-velocity coupling, 997-998 transient simulations, 632
primary variables, 935, 955 scaling, 237
Print options dialog box, 86 title, 231
print region, 155 unpacking, 19, 156
Index
projects relaxation sweeps, 1004

recent, 151 reloading a project, 233
prolongation, 1002 Remote execution parameters dialog box, 847
pseudo transient removing
under-relaxation, 1000 object from group, 337
project data, 156
Q renaming
QFP Die dialog box, 601, 604 group, 335
QFP Dimensions dialog box, 595 renormalization group (RNG) theory, 972
QFP Solder dialog box, 599 report
QFP Substrate dialog box, 597 solution overview, 941
quality of mesh, 774 Report menu, 83, 935
Report point data dialog box, 949
R Report summary data dialog box, 944
radiation, 665 Report window, 952
discrete ordinates radiation model, 676 Report/EM heat losses menu, 84, 954
heat flow, 937, 958 Report/Export menu, 85
heat flux, 666 Report/Fan operating points menu, 84, 954
modeling, 254 Report/Full report menu, 84, 951
ray tracing model, 677, 986 Report/HTML report menu, 84, 939
solar load model, 263 Report/Network block values menu, 84, 953
specification, 666 Report/Point report menu, 84, 948
surface-to-surface model, 666, 981 Report/Show optimization/param results menu, 84
for individual objects, 668 Report/Solar loads menu, 84
objects to include in calculation, 671 Report/Solution overview/Create menu, 84, 941
using Form factors , 670 Report/Solution overview/View menu, 84, 942
view factors, 672 Report/Summary report menu, 84, 943
temperature, 666 Report/Write Autotherm file menu, 85, 203-204
variables, 253, 958 reports, 935
postprocessing, 255 EM heat losses, 954
radiation behavior, 346 fan operating point, 954
Radiation button, 88, 671 files, 157
Radiation object selection dialog box, 669 full, 951
Radiation specification dialog box, 669 transient simulation, 952
radiator, 387 HTML, 939
ray tracing radiation model, 986 loading format, 941
Rayleigh number, 259, 836, 979 network blocks
reading a file, 98 internal node temperatures, 953
real number entry, 105 point, 948
recent projects, 151 transient simulation, 949
rectangular object, 312 saving format, 941, 947, 950
meshing, 802 summary, 840, 943
Redo button, 87 transient simulation, 944
reference temperature, 957 transient simulations, 647
refining the mesh, 793 variables, 936, 955
globally, 783 rescaling vectors, 883
hex-dominant, 783 resetting variation plots, 923
hexahedral, 778, 790, 793 residual files, 145
locally, 793 residual reduction rate criteria, 1007
refrigeration circuits, 393 residuals, 836-837, 874
relative humidity, 657 definition of, 1009
relaxation scheme, 1001, 1005 monitoring, 1008
plotting, 839 blower curve, 556
reduction rate, 1007 contour plot, 908
scaling of, 1009 fan curve, 540, 543
resistance, 559 files, 98
approach velocity, 559-560, 564 grille curve, 416, 419
creating, 561 group, 339
device velocity, 559-560, 564 log files, 97
flow materials, 350
pressure drop, 560 picture file, 103, 151, 157
free area ratio, 559-560 postprocessing objects, 151, 883
heat transfer coefficient, 391 postprocessing views, 883
loss coefficient, 387, 559-560, 564 pressure drop curve, 577
meshing, 559, 804 project, 149, 231
power law, 559-560, 564 active objects, 151
pressure drop, 559-560 assembly structure, 151
species, 659 at specified interval, 850
transient simulations, 565, 637 mesh data, 150
Resistance curve window, 577 picture file, 151
Resistances dialog box, 561 postprocessing objects, 151
resizing solution data, 151
ANSYS Icepak Windows, 56 report
cabinet, 276 full, 953
object, 130, 291 point, 950
restarting the solution, 844 summary, 847, 945
Restore complex defaults, 67 report format, 941, 947, 950
restriction, 1002 resistance curve, 564
Reverse orientation button, 88 solution data, 851
Reynolds averaging, 964 thermal resistance curve, 576
Reynolds number, 259, 836, 979 trials plot, 927
Rotate about screen normal button, 87 variation plot, 923
rotating view factors, 675
cabinet, 282 scalar variables, 955
merged model data, 149 scale (in a GUI panel), 107
model, 129 scale to fit, 125
object, 293, 308 Scale to fit button, 87
roughness, 348 scaling
round-off error, 1009 cabinet, 279, 282
Run optimization button, 88 merged model data, 148
Run solution button, 88, 837, 842 object, 293, 308
project, 237
S vectors, 912
sample session, 20 scratch files, 158
Save image dialog box, 152 screens, 410
Save object dialog box, 206 script files, 145, 849
Save picture file, 103 Search fan library dialog box, 545
Save project button, 86, 149, 226 Search package library dialog box, 611
Save project dialog box, 100, 149 second-order accuracy, 832, 995
Save table dialog box, 770 Selected solid shading, 63
saving selecting
active objects, 151 assembly, 365
assembly, 366 files, 98
assembly structure, 151 object, 129, 289
Index
Selection dialog box, 351 discretization scheme, 831

Sentinel TI, 204 ending, 873
sequential solution, 992 examining results of, 877
serial solver, 853 initial conditions, 262
set levels, 127 initializing, 835
set orientation (see set orientation) linear solver advanced controls, 835
Set range dialog box, 356, 419, 543, 643 monitoring, 836, 871, 873
setting up a problem, 15 multigrid, 834
setup numerical scheme, 991
power and temperature, 769 overview, 941
shading, 63, 244 parallel, 852
contour plot, 907 parameters, 841
group, 336 under-relaxation, 833
hidden line, 125 plotting residuals, 839
object, 311 precision, 835
selected solid, 125 procedure, 833
solid, 125 restarting, 844
solid/wire, 125 reuse existing input files, 849
wire, 125 script file, 849
shift +right-click, 130 serial, 853
Shininess, 67 setup procedure, 830
SIMPLE algorithm, 997 under-relaxation, 833, 995
single-precision solvers, 835 variables, 252
single-selection list, 105 postprocessing, 254
SIwave powermap files, 201 version, 929
size Solution dialog box, 942
object, 312 Solution ID button, 89
skewness, 775, 824 Solution monitor definition dialog box, 840, 873
slider bar, 107 Solution monitor parameters dialog box, 837
snap to grid, 282 Solution residuals window, 94, 840, 871
Snap to grid dialog box, 282 Solution settings node, 93
Solar load model Advanced settings, 229
solar participation, 265 Basic settings, 229
user inputs, 263 Parallel settings, 229
solid material solve
default, 261 create krylov rom, 81
properties, 344 define report, 81
Solid specific heat dialog box, 353 define trials, 81
solution diagnostics, 81
accuracy, 994 patch temperatures, 80
batch file, 868 run optimization, 81
calculating, 829-830, 870 run solution, 81
on another computer, 847 settings, 80
cascade modeling, 929 solution monitor, 81
continuation of, 844 Solve dialog box, 842, 869
control, 841 Solve menu, 80, 829
advanced options, 847 Solve/Create Krylov ROM menu, 81
results options, 850 Solve/Define report menu, 81, 840
convergence, 874, 1008 Solve/Define trials menu, 81, 699
criteria, 836 Solve/Diagnostics menu, 81, 874
copying data, 151 Solve/Patch temperatures, 80
diagnostic tools, 874 Solve/Run optimization menu, 81
Solve/Run solution menu, 81, 837, 842 specification, 654
Solve/Settings menu, 80 transient simulations, 660
Solve/Settings/Advanced menu, 80, 831 transport
Solve/Settings/Basic menu, 80, 835 postprocessing, 664
Solve/Settings/Parallel menu, 80, 852 transport equations, 962
Solve/Solution monitor menu, 81, 840, 873 variables, 958
solver, 7, 13 specific heat, 344, 346
control, 842 specific heat capacity, 653
advanced options, 847 Specular reflectance, 67
results options, 850 speed, 937, 956
discretization, 993 Square Wave Time-Step Parameters dialog box, 629
double-precision, 835 stability, 995
files, 145 stacked die packages
input, 145 gradient powermap files, 201
output, 145 starting ANSYS Icepak, 16
linear solver advanced controls, 835 on a Linux system, 16
linearization, 993 on a Windows system, 16
multigrid, 995, 1001 startup options for Linux systems, 18
numerical scheme, 991 startup screen, 17
overview of, 991 state-space characterization, 713
parallel, 852 static pressure, 956
precision, 835 steady-state calculation, 252
serial, 853 STEP files, 193
single-precision, 835 stiffener, 730
source, 423 summary
creating, 424 assembly, 367
heat parameters, 423, 427 material, 368
joule heating, 429 object, 368
meshing, 805 Summary output
radiation, 427, 666 files, 157
emissivity, 670 summary report, 840, 943
specification, 668 Summary report button, 89, 840, 943
species, 659 support engineer
temperature dependent, 423, 427 when to call, 6
transient simulations, 427, 637 surface, 94
using, 424 high side, 795
Sources dialog box, 424 low side, 795
Spalart-Allmaras model, 965 material
spatial power profile, 262 default, 261
species, 653 properties, 347
adding, 655 node, 94, 115
augmentation, 660 plane cut, 888
boundary conditions, 658-659 Surface probe button, 89, 903
concentration, 658 surface roughness, 348, 455, 468, 494
concentrations, 657 surface-to-surface radiation model, 665-666, 981
filtering, 660 adaptive method, 672
heat flow, 958 objects to include in calculation, 671
initial concentrations, 656 specification for individual objects, 668
inputs for transport, 654 using Form factors , 670
material properties, 653 view factors
order of, 657 computing, 672
properties, 653 displaying, 673
Index
editing, 675 ANSYS Icepak in Workbench, 139

saving, 675 tooling holes, 160
swirling flow, 996 Top side surface properties dialog box, 600
turbulence modeling in, 966 total area
system environment variables, 19 assembly, 368
total volume
T assembly, 368
tabs, 108 trace
geometry, 108 boundary conditions, 192
info, 108 files, 182
notes, 108 heating, 191
properties, 108 mesh, 805
temperature, 937, 956 transformations
reference, 957 cabinet, 280-281, 292
variables, 956 merging model data, 148
Temperature dependent power dialog box, 427, 431, object, 293, 308
462, 513 Transient animation dialog box, 646
temperature limits Transient current dialog box, 636
compare, 771 Transient fan strength dialog box, 636
Temperature or velocity dependent fluid conductivity Transient heat tr coeff dialog box, 637
dialog box, 352 Transient parameters dialog box, 628
temperature variables, 253 Transient power dialog box, 636
postprocessing, 254 Transient power/area dialog box, 637
temperature-dependent material parameters, 353 Transient pressure dialog box, 636
Temperature/value curve window, 354 Transient settings button, 89, 644
temporal discretization, 1000 transient simulations, 252, 627
TERM , 19 animation, 645
termination criteria, 1007 Basic parameters panel , 627
Text editor , 356, 419, 544, 578, 643 Basic settings panel , 638
text window, 239 block, 636
texture fan, 636
group, 336 history plot, 647
object, 311 initial conditions, 633
thermal conductivity, 344, 347, 653 iterations, 638
anisotropic, 345 opening, 636
parameterization, 691 plate, 637
biaxial, 345 postprocessing, 644
orthotropic, 344 report, 647
variables, 959 full, 952
thermal resistance, 938 point, 949
This project button, 235, 242 summary, 944
time variation, 252 resistance, 637
time-dependent calculations, 627 saving, 632
time-dependent variables, 638 solving, 627
Time/value curve window, 642 source, 637
title, 96, 231 specifying variables as a function of time, 638
moving, 130 user inputs, 627
Title, 102 variation of temperature with time, 633
Title/notes dialog box, 93, 231 wall, 637
TKE , 937 Transient temperature dialog box, 633
toolbars Transient X velocity dialog box, 636
ANSYS Icepak, 86 Transient Y velocity dialog box, 636
Transient Z velocity dialog box, 636 tutorial, 20, 109
Transients dialog box, 640
translating U
assembly, 360 under-relaxation, 833, 995
cabinet, 282 pseudo transient, 1000
merged model data, 149 Undo button, 87
model, 129 units, 215
object, 130, 293, 308 automatic conversion, 215
transparency conversion factors, 220
%, 125 creating, 219
group, 336 customizing, 217
object, 311 deleting, 220
Off, 125 Fix values option , 219
transport equation meshing, 216
coupling SST transport and transition model, 978 postprocessing, 220
transition SST model, 976 unpacking a project, 19, 156
Trash node, 94, 115 upwind schemes, 994
trials, 689 first-order, 995
defining, 699 second-order, 995
export, 701 user
import, 701 beginner, 3
plot, 923 experienced, 4
set range, 926 user inputs
reporting and plotting, 709 stacked die, 605
running, 704 user interface, 55
multiple trials, 705 using the manual, 1
single trial, 704
saving, 708 V
selecting, 702 V-cycle multigrid, 1002, 1005
Trials plot button, 89, 924 values
Trials plot dialog box, 924 power and temperature, 125
Trials plot window, 923 variables, 955
turbulence, 255-256, 963 reports, 936
buoyancy effects, 974 solution, 252
enhanced two-equation model, 256, 964, 967 value at a point, 903
K-ω SST, 256 variation plot, 918
mixing-length model, 963 set range, 921
modeling, 965 Variation plot button, 89, 919
production, 969, 974 Variation plot dialog box, 919
realizable k-ε model, 966 Variation plot window, 918
realizable k-ε model, 256 vector variables, 955
RNG k-ε model, 256, 964, 966 vectors, 909
RNGk-ε model, 972 scaling, 883, 912
Spalart-Allmaras model, 256, 965, 968 velocity, 938
standard k-ε model, 256, 964, 966, 971 variables, 956
two-equation model, 256, 964, 971 velocity-dependent material parameters, 352
variables, 958 vent, 409
zero-equation model, 256, 963 Version selection dialog box, 929, 943, 949
turbulent dissipation rate, 937, 958 versions, 102
turbulent kinetic energy, 937, 958 via layer information, 191
turbulent viscosity, 256, 971 view factors, 666
turbulent viscosity ratio, 937 computing, 672
Index
adaptive method, 672 viscous forces, 259

hemicube method, 672 volume flow, 938, 956
displaying, 673 volume source
editing, 675 species, 659-660
saving, 675 volumetric expansion coefficient, 346, 653
View menu, 61 volumetric heat sources, 962
View/Angle menu, 62 vorticity, 956
View/Bounding box menu, 62
View/Default shading menu, 63 W
View/Default shading/Solid menu, 63 W-cycle multigrid, 1002, 1005
View/Default shading/Solid/wire menu, 63 wall, 467
View/Default shading/Wire menu, 63 cabinet, 283
View/Display menu, 63 creating, 476
View/Display/Construction lines menu, 64 effective thickness, 468
View/Display/Construction points menu, 64 external thermal conditions, 472
View/Display/Coord axes menu, 64 heat transfer, 482
View/Display/Current date menu, 64 coefficient, 473
View/Display/Depthcue menu, 64 convective, 472
View/Display/Logo menu, 64 radiative, 472-473, 484
View/Display/Mesh menu, 64 inside, 467
View/Display/Mouse position menu, 64 meshing, 805
View/Display/Object names menu, 63 moving, 469, 479
View/Display/Object names/Current assembly menu, multifaceted, 474
63 outside, 467
View/Display/Object names/None menu, 63 profiles, 484
View/Display/Object names/Selected menu, 63 radiation, 666
View/Display/Origin marker menu, 64 emissivity, 670
View/Display/Project title menu, 64 specification, 669
View/Display/Rulers menu, 64 specified heat flux, 470
View/Display/Tcl console menu, 64 specified temperature, 471
View/Display/Visible grid menu, 64 stationary, 479
View/Distance menu, 62 surface roughness, 468
View/Edit toolbars menu, 63 symmetry, 479
View/Lights menu, 65 thermal boundary conditions, 469
View/Location menu, 61 thermal specification, 480
View/Markers menu, 62 thickness, 468, 479
View/Markers/Add menu, 62 transient simulations, 480, 637
View/Markers/Clear menu, 62 velocity, 469, 480
View/Rubber bands menu, 62 Wall external thermal conditions dialog box, 481
View/Rubber bands/Add menu, 62 Walls dialog box, 476
View/Rubber bands/Clear menu, 63 wedgelock, 730
View/Shading/Hidden line menu, 63 Welcome to Icepak dialog box, 17
View/Shading/Selected solid menu, 63 wheel sensitivity, 130
View/Summary (HTML) menu, 61, 368 Windows
View/Traces menu, 62 batch processing, 868
View/Visible menu, 64 menu, 85
viewing starting ANSYS Icepak on, 16
assembly, 365 systems, 16
viewing material properties, 349 wire shading, 63
Viewing options toolbar, 87 wizard
viscosity, 346, 653 problem setup, 267
viscosity ratio, 937 workstation clusters, 855
write
electric current density vector, 850
interpolated restart data file, 850
restart data file, 850
Write assembly button, 366
writing
file, 98
report
full, 953
point, 950
summary, 847, 945
X
XY plot, 918
Z
zero slack, 808
Zoom in button, 87
Zoom-in modeling dialog box, 930
zooming the model, 129

ANSYS Icepak Users Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS Icepak Users Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS Icepak User's Guide

ANSYS, Inc. Release 2020 R1

© 2020 ANSYS, Inc. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

U.S. Government Rights

Third Party Software

FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Macrovision Corporation.

pnmscale: Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.

pnmtops: Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.

pnmtoxwd: Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.

Copyright (C) 1995,1996 by Klaus Ehrenfried.

ppmquant: Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 by Jef Poskanzer.

ppmtogif: Copyright (C) 1989 by Jef Poskanzer.

Armadillo C++ Linear Algebra Library

Copyright 2008-2016 by Conrad Sanderson (http://conradsanderson.id.au)

Copyright 2008-2016 National ICT Australia (NICTA)

This product includes software developed by Conrad Sanderson

This product includes software developed at National ICT Australia (NICTA)

License Agreement: PYTHON SOFTWARE FOUNDATION LICENSE VERSION 2

NETEX-G: Copyright © 2004 by Artwork Conversion Software, Inc.

cpp (GCC): Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

3.1.4. The Model manager Window .................................................................................................. 92

5.2.2. Mesh Files ............................................................................................................................ 145

7. Unit Systems ........................................................................................................................................ 215

9.2.3. Changing the Walls of the Cabinet ........................................................................................ 283

9.21. Material Properties ...................................................................................................................... 339

12.3.1. Recirculation Mass Flow Rate .............................................................................................. 395

18.5.1. Convective Heat Transfer .................................................................................................... 472

22. Blowers .............................................................................................................................................. 549

28. Radiation Modeling .......................................................................................................................... 665

33.8. Transient Temperature Dependent Power .................................................................................... 752

35.6.17. Meshing Parameters for Resistances .................................................................................. 804

37. Examining the Results ....................................................................................................................... 877

40.3.1. Zero-Equation Turbulence Model ........................................................................................ 963

3.16. Show objects by type Panel ................................................................................................................. 73

6.8. The IDF View loaded data Panel ........................................................................................................... 167

8.23. The Basic parameters Panel (Defaults Tab) .......................................................................................... 261

9.44. The Create group Panel ..................................................................................................................... 334

13.2. Outlet Grille Conditions (Vents) ......................................................................................................... 411

19.4. The Periodic boundaries Panel (Properties Tab) .................................................................................. 490

24.3. Cross Cut Extrusion Heat Sink ............................................................................................................ 571

27.1. Basic parameters (Advanced tab) ....................................................................................................... 655

33.5. The Create Wedgelock Panel .............................................................................................................. 731

35.22. Display of Surface Elements ............................................................................................................. 812

37.16. The Min/max locations Panel ........................................................................................................... 904

1.1. What’s In This Manual

A brief description of each chapter follows:

1.2. How To Use This Manual

1.2.1. For the Beginner

• To learn how to solve constrained-design-optimization problems, see Optimization (p. 679).

1.2.2. For the Experienced User

1.3. Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual

Model Generate mesh

Problem setup Basic parameters

1.4. Mathematical Conventions

appears in several ways:

This tensor is usually written as

is different from the expression , which is defined as

1.5. Mouse and Keyboard Conventions Used In This Manual

1.6. When To Call Your ANSYS Icepak Support Engineer

3. Write down the exact error message that appeared, if any.

Information in this chapter is divided into the following sections:

• What is ANSYS Icepak? (p. 7)

• Program Structure (p. 8)